G-A-HENTY 


R 


B.C 


CIS 


SIGNOR   POLANI   ACCOMPANIES   FRANCIS    TO   THE   STEPS. 


THE    LION    OF    ST.    MARK 

A  STORY  OF  VENICE 
IN   THE   FOURTEENTH    CENTURY 


BY 


G.  A.  HENTY 


uonny  Prince  Charlie ;"  "  For  the  Tempi* ;"  "  By  Sheer  Pluck  •" 
••  With  Clive  in  India ;"  Ac. 


WITH  TEN  PULLPA GB  1LLUSTRA  TTOffS 
BY  GORDON  BROWNE 


NEW  YORK 
CHARLES   SCRIBNER'S   SONS 

1903 


DNIV.  OF  CALIF.  UjS»,Tr,  LOS  ANGELES 


Stack 
Annex 


PREFACE. 

_  1103 

MY  DEAR  LADS, 

Of  all  the  chapters  of  history  there  are  few  more  in- 
teresting or  wonderful  than  that  which  tells  the  story  of  the 
rise  and  progress  of  Venice.  Built  upon  a  few  sandy  islands  in 
a  shallow  lagoon,  and  originally  founded  by  fugitives  from  the 
mainland,  Venice  became  one  of  the  greatest  and  most  respected 
powers  of  Europe.  She  was  mistress  of  the  sea  ;  conquered  and 
ruled  over  a  considerable  territory  bordering  on  the  Adriatic; 
checked  the  rising  power  of  the  Turks  ;  conquered  Constanti- 
nople ;  successfully  defied  all  the  attacks  of  her  jealous  rivals 
to  shake  her  power  ;  and  carried  on  a  trade  relatively  as  great  as 
that  of  England  in  the  present  day.  I  have  laid  my  story  in  the 
time  not  of  the  triumphs  of  Venice,  but  of  her  hardest  struggle 
for  existence  —  when  she  defended  herself  successfully  against 
the  coalition  of  Hungary,  Padua,  and  Genoa  —  for  never  at 
any  time  were  the  virtues  of  Venice,  her  steadfastness,  her 
patriotism,  and  her  willingness  to  make  all  sacrifice  for  her 
independence  more  brilliantly  shown.  The  historical  portion 
of  the  story  is  drawn  from  Hazlitt's  History  of  the  Republic  of 
Venice,  and  with  it  I  have  woven  the  adventures  of  an  English 
boy  endowed  with  a  full  share  of  that  energy  and  pluck  which, 
more  than  any  other  qualities,  have  made  the  British  empire 
the  greatest  the  world  ever  saw. 

Yours  sincerely, 

G.  A.  HENTY. 


CONTENTS. 


CHAP. 

I.  VENICE, 


II.  A  CONSPIRACY ....    27 

III.  ON  THE  GRAND  CANAL,.    ..........    46 

IV.  CARRIED  OFF 64 

V.  FINDING  A  CLUE 83 

VI.  THE  HUT  ON  SAN  NICOLO,     ...«.*.*.  102 
VII.  ON  BOARD  A  TRADER,    ...........  121 

VIII.  AT  ATTACK  BY  PIRATES,    .    .    .    .    j 140 

IX.  THE  CAPTURE  OF  THE  "  LIDO,** 159 

X.   RECAPTURED 179 

XI.  THE  BATTLE  OF  ANTIUM, 198 

XII.  IN  MOCENIGO'S  POWER, 218 

XIII.  THE  PIRATES'  POWER, 236 

XIV.  THE  END  OF  THE  PERSECUTOR, 254 

XV.  THE  BATTLE  OF  POLA, 272 

XVI.  THE  RECAPTUEE  OF  THE  "  PLUTO," 290 

XVII.  AN  UNGRATEFUL  REPUBLIC,    ...    * 310 

XVIII.  THE  RELEASE  OF  PISANI, 328 

XIX.  THE  SIEGE  OF  CHIOGGIA, 349 

XX.  THE  TRIUMPH  OF  VENICB 370 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 

Page 

SlGNOR   POLANI  ACCOMPANIES  FRANCIS  TO  THE  STEPS,  Frontis.      54 

FRANCIS  WATCHES  THE  CONSPIRATORS  ON  SAN  NICOLO,      .    .    41 
ON  BOARD  THE  "BONITO"  IN  A  STORM, 137 

THE  CREW  OF  THE  "  BONITO"  SHELTERING  FROM  THE  PIRATES* 
ARROWS, 148 

THE  "  LIDO  "  RECAPTURED  BY  FRANCIS  AND  MATTEO,  .    .    .  179 
FRANCIS  IN  THE  POWER  OF  THE  PIRATE  RUGGIERO,      .    .    .  226 

FRANCIS  BROUGHT  BEFORE  HIS  SAVAGE  CAPTOR 238 

PHILIPPO  THE  JAILER  MASTERED  BY  HIS  PRISONER,  ....  241 

DEATH  OF  THE  PIRATE  RUGGIERO  MOCENIGO,  ......  260 

FRANCIS  TELLS  SIGNOK  POLANI  WHAT  HE  WISHES  FOR,      .    .  380 


THE  LION  OF  ST.  MARK. 


CHAPTER    I. 

VENICE. 

|  SUPPOSE  you  never  have  such  nights  as  these  in 
that  misty  island  of  yours,  Francisco  ?" 

"  Yes,  we  have, "  the  other  said  stoutly.  "  I 
have  seen  just  as  bright  nights  on  the  Thames. 
I  have  stood  down  by  Paul's  Stairs  and  watched  the  reflection 
of  the  moon  on  the  water,  and  the  lights  of  the  houses  on  the 
bridge,  and  the  passing  boats,  just  as  we  are  doing  now.  But," 
he  added  honestly,  "  I  must  confess  that  we  do  not  have  such 
still  bright  nights  very  often,  while  with  you  they  are  the  rule, 
though  sometimes  even  here  a  mist  rises  up  and  dims  the  water 
just  as  it  does  with  us. " 

"  But  I  have  heard  you  say  that  the  stars  are  not  so  bright 
as  we  have  them  here. " 

"  No,  I  do  not  think  they  are,  Matteo.  I  do  not  remember 
now,  but  I  do  know  when  I  first  came  here  I  was  struck  with 
the  brightness  of  the  stars,  so  I  suppose  there  must  have  been 
a  difference.  " 

"  But  you  like  this  better  than  England  ?  You  are  glad  that 
your  father  came  out  here?  " 


12  OLD  MEJJORIEi 

Francis  Hammond  did  not  answer  at  once. 

"  I  am  glad  he  came  out,"  he  said  after  a  pause,  "  because  I 
have  seen  many  things  I  should  never  have  seen  if  I  had  stayed 
at  home,  and  I  have  learned  to  speak  your  tongue.  But  I  do 
not  know  that  I  like  it  better  than  home.  Things  are  different, 
you  see.  There  was  more  fun  at  home.  My  father  had  two 
or  three  apprentices  whom  I  used  to  play  with  when  the  shop 
was  closed,  and  there  were  often  what  you  would  call  tumults, 
but  which  were  not  serious.  Sometimes  there  would  be  a  fight 
between  the  apprentices  of  one  ward  and  another,  a  shout  would 
be  raised  of  '  Clubs ! '  and  all  the  'prentices  would  catch  up  their 
sticks  and  pour  out  of  the  shops,  and  then  there  would  be 
a  fight  till  the  city  guard  turned  out  and  separated  them. 
Then  there  used  to  be  the  shooting  at  the  butts,  and  the 
shows,  and  the  Mayday  revels,  and  all  sorts  of  things.  The 
people  were  more  merry  than  you  are  here,  and  much  more 
free.  You  see,  the  barons,  who  are  the  same  to  us  that  your 
great  families  are  to  you,  had  no  influence  in  the  city.  You 
are  a  nation  of  traders,  and  so  are  we;  but  in  London  the 
traders  have  the  power,  and  are  absolute  masters  inside  their 
own  walls,  caring  nothing  for  the  barons,  and  not  much  for 
the  king.  If  anyone  did  wrong  he  got  an  open  and  fair  trial. 
There  was  no  fear  of  secret  accusations.  Everyone  thought 
and  said  as  he  pleased.  There  was  no  Lion's  Mouth,  and  no 
Council  of  Ten." 

"  Hush !  hush !  Francisco,  "  the  other  said,  grasping  his  arm. 
"Do  not  say  a  word  against  the  council.  There  is  no  saying 
who  may  be  listening.  "  And  he  looked  nervously  round  to  see 
if  anyone  was  within  earshot. 

"  There  it  is,  you  see, "  his  companion  said.  "  So  long  as  we 
have  a  safe  conscience  in  London  we  are  frightened  at  nothing, 
whereas  here  no  one  can  say  with  certainty  that  he  may  not 
before  to-morrow  morning  be  lying  in  the  dungeons  of  S'i. 


ON  THE  PIAZZA.  13 

Mark  without  the  slightest  idea  in  the  world  as  to  what  his 
crime  has  been. " 

"There,  there,  Francisco,"  Matteo  said  uneasily;  "do  talk 
about  other  things.  Your  notions  may  do  very  well  in  Eng- 
land, but  are  not  safe  to  discuss  here.  Of  course  there  are 
plenty  here  who  would  gladly  see  a  change  in  some  matters, 
but  one  cannot  have  everything ;  and,  after  all,  when  one  has 
so  much  to  be  proud  of,  one  need  not  grumble  because  every- 
thing is  not  just  as  one  would  like. " 

"  Yes,  you  have  much  to  be  proud  of, "  Francis  Hammond 
agreed.  "  It  is  marvellous  that  the  people  of  these  scattered 
islets  should  be  masters  of  the  sea,  that  their  alliance  should 
be  coveted  by  every  power  in  Europe,  that  they  should  be  the 
greatest  trading  community  in  the  world.  If  I  were  not 
English  I  should  like  to  be  Venetian.  " 

The  speakers  were  standing  at  the  edge  of  the  water  in  front 
of  the  Palace  of  St.  Mark.  In  the  piazza,  behind  them  a  throng 
of  people  were  walking  to  and  fro,  gossiping  over  the  latest 
news  from  Constantinople,  the  last  rumour  as  to  the  doings  of 
the  hated  rival  of  Venice,  Genoa,  or  the  purport  of  the  letter 
which  had,  as  everyone  knew,  been  brought  by  the  Bishop  of 
Treviso  from  the  pope  to  the  seignory. 

The  moon  was  shining  brightly  overhead,  and  glittering  in 
the  waters  of  the  lagoon,  which  were  broken  into  innumerable 
little  wavelets  by  the  continual  crossing  and  recrossing  of  the 
gondolas  dotting  its  surface.  There  was  a  constant  arrival  and 
departure  of  boats  from  the  steps,  fifty  yards  to  the  right  of  the 
spot  where  the  speakers  were  standing;  but  where  they  had 
stationed  themselves,  about  half-way  between  the  landing-steps 
and  the  canal  running  down  by  the  side  of  the  ducal  palace, 
there  were  but  few  people  about. 

Francis  Hammond  was  a  lad  between  fifteen  and  sixteen 
years  old.  His  father  was  a  merchant  of  London.  He  was 


14  AN   ENGLISH   MERCHANT. 

a  man  of  great  enterprise  and  energy,  and  had  four  years 
before  determined  to  leave  his  junior  partner  in  charge  of  the 
business  in  London,  and  to  come  out  himself  for  a  time  to 
Venice  so  as  to  buy  the  Eastern  stuffs  in  which  he  dealt  at  the 
head-quarters  of  the  trade  instead  of  paying  such  prices  as  the 
agents  of  the  Venetian  traders  might  demand  in  London.  He 
had  succeeded  beyond  his  expectations.  In  Venice  there  were 
constantly  bargains  to  be  purchased  from  ships  returning  laden 
with  the  spoils  of  some  captured  Genoese  merchantman  or 
taken  in  the  sack  of  some  Eastern  seaport.  The  prices  too 
asked  by  the  traders  with  the  towns  of  Syria  or  the  Black 
Sea  were  but  a  fraction  of  those  charged  when  these  goods 
arrived  in  London. 

It  was  true  that  occasionally  some  of  his  cargoes  were  lost 
on  the  homeward  voyage,  captured  either  by  the  Genoese  or 
the  Moorish  pirates ;  but  even  allowing  for  this,  the  profits  of 
the  trade  were  excellent.  The  English  merchant  occupied  a 
good  position  in  Venice.  The  promptness  of  his  payments  and 
the  integrity  of  his  dealings  made  him  generally  respected,  and 
the  fact  that  he  was  engaged  in  trade  was  no  drawback  to  his 
social  position  in  a  city  in  which,  of  all  others,  trade  was  con- 
sidered honourable,  and  where  members  of  even  the  most 
aristocratic  families  were,  with  scarcely  an  exception,  engaged 
in  commerce. 

There  were  many  foreign  merchants  settled  in  Venice,  for 
from  the  first  the  republic  had  encouraged  strangers  to  take 
up  their  residence  there,  and  had  granted  them  several  privi- 
leges and  advantages.  Between  Venice  and  England  there 
had  always  been  good  feeling.  Although  jealous  of  foreigners, 
England  had  granted  the  Venetians  liberty  to  trade  in  London, 
Southampton,  and  some  other  towns  as  far  back  as  the  year 
1304,  and  their  relations  had  always  been  cordial,  as  there 
were  no  grounds  for  jealousy  or  rivalry  between  the  two 


THE  RISE  OF  VENICE.  15 

peoples ;  whereas  the  interference  of  France,  Germany,  Austria, 
and  Hungary  in  the  affairs  of  Italy  had  frequently  caused 
uneasiness  to  Venice,  and  had  on  several  occasions  embroiled 
her  with  one  or  other  of  the  three  last-named  powers. 

France  had  as  yet  taken  a  very  minor  part  in  the  continual 
wars  which  were  waged  between  the  rival  cities  of  Italy,  and 
during  the  Crusades  there  had  been  a  close  alliance  between 
her  and  Venice,  the  troops  of  the  two  nations  fighting  together 
at  the  siege  of  Constantinople,  and  causing  the  temporary  over- 
throw of  the  Greek  Empire  of  the  East. 

The  rise  of  Venice  had  been  rapid,  and  she  owed  her  advance- 
ment to  a  combination  of  circumstances.  In  the  first  place,  her 
insular  position  rendered  her  almost  impervious  to  attack,  and 
she  had  therefore  no  occasion  to  keep  on  foot  any  army,  and  was 
able  to  throw  all  her  strength  on  to  the  sea,  where  Genoa  was 
her  only  formidable  rival. 

In  the  second  place,  her  mercantile  spirit  and  her  extensive 
trade  with  the  East  brought  in  a  steady  influx  of  wealth,  and 
her  gold  enabled  her  to  purchase  allies,  to  maintain  lengthy 
struggles  without  faltering,  and  to  emerge  unscathed  from 
wars  which  exhausted  the  resources  and  crippled  the  powers  of 
her  rivals.  The  third  source  of  her  success  lay  in  the  spirit  of 
her  population.  Like  Rome  in  her  early  days,  she  was  never 
cast  down  by  reverses.  Misfortune  only  nerved  her  to  further 
exertions,  and  after  each  defeat  she  rose  stronger  than  before. 
But  the  cause  which  more  than  all  contributed  to  give  to  Venice 
her  ascendency  among  the  cities  of  Italy  was  her  form  of 
government. 

Democratic  at  first,  as  among  all  communities,  it  had  gradu- 
ally assumed  the  character  of  a  close  oligarchy,  and  although 
nominally  ruled  by  a  council  containing  a  large  number  of 
members,  her  destinies  were  actually  in  the  hands  of  the  Doge, 
elected  for  life,  and  the  Council  of  Ten,  chosen  from  the  great 


I<J  A  WELL-GOVERNED   STATE. 

body  of  the  council.  Thus  she  had  from  the  first  been  free 
from  those  factions  which  were  the  bane  of  Genoa  and 
Florence.  Some  of  the  great  families  had  from  time  to  time 
come  more  prominently  to  the  front  than  others,  but  none  had 
attained  predominant  political  power,  and  beyond  a  few  street 
tumults  of  slight  importance  Venice  had  not  suffered  from  the 
popular  tumults  and  uprisings  which  played  so  prominent  a 
part  in  the  history  of  her  rivals. 

Thus,  undisturbted  by  discord  at  home,  Venice  had  been  able 
to  give  all  her  attention  and  all  her  care  to  her  interests 
abroad,  and  her  affairs,  conducted  as  they  were  by  her  wisest 
citizens,  with  a  single  eye  to  the  benefit  of  the  state,  had  been 
distinguished  by  a  rare  sagacity.  Her  object  had  been  single 
and  uniform,  to  protect  her  own  interests  and  to  prevent 
any  one  city  on  the  mainland  attaining  such  a  preponderance 
as  would  render  her  a  dangerous  neighbour.  Hence  she 
was  always  ready  to  ally  herself  with  the  weaker  against  the 
stronger,  and  to  aid  with  money  and  men  any  state  struggling 
against  an  ambitious  neighbour. 

Acting  on  this  principle  she  by  turns  assisted  Padua  against 
Verona  and  Verona  against  Padua,  or  either  of  them  when 
threatened  by  the  growing  power  of  Milan,  and  at  the  end  of  a 
war  she  generally  came  out  with  an  increased  territory  and 
added  importance.  It  is  probable  that  no  community  was  ever 
governed  for  hundreds  of  years  with  such  uniform  wisdom  and 
sagacity  as  was  Venice ;  but  the  advantage  was  not  without 
drawbacks.  The  vigilance  of  the  Council  of  Ten  in  repressing 
plots,  not  unfrequently  set  on  foot  by  the  enemies  of  the 
republic,  resulted  in  the  adoption  of  a  hateful  system  of 
espionage.  The  city  was  pervaded  with  spies,  and  even  secret 
denunciations  were  attended  to,  and  the  slightest  expression  of 
discontent  against  the  ruling  authorities  was  severely  punished. 

On  the  other  hand  comparatively  slight  attention  was  paid 


THE  SQUARE  OF  ST.  MARK.  17 

to  private  crime.  Assassinations  were  of  frequent  occurrence, 
and  unless  the  victim  happened  to  be  very  powerfully  con- 
nected no  notice  was  taken  when  a  man  was  found  to  be 
missing  from  his  usual  place,  and  his  corpse  was  discovered 
floating  in  the  lagoon.  Consequently  crimes  of  this  kind  were 
in  the  great  majority  of  cases  committed  with  impunity,  and 
even  when  traced  the  authors,  if  possessed  of  powerful  pro- 
tectors, seldom  suffered  any  greater  punishment  than  temporary 
banishment. 

After  standing  for  some  time  on  the  Piazzetta  the  two  lads 
turned,  and  entering  the  square  of  St.  Mark  mingled  with  the 
crowd.  It  was  a  motley  one.  Nobles  in  silks  and  satins 
jostled  with  fishermen  of  the  lagoons.  Natives  of  all  the  coasts 
and  islands,  which  owned  the  sway  of  Venice,  Greeks  from 
Constantinople,  Tartar  merchants  from  the  Crimea,  Tyrians, 
and  inhabitants  of  the  islands  of  the  ^Egean,  were  present  in 
considerable  numbers  ;  while  among  the  crowd  vendors  of  fruit 
and  flowers  from  the  mainland,  and  of  fresh  water  or  cooling 
drinks,  sold  their  wares.  The  English  lad's  companion — 
Matteo  Giustiniani — belonged  to  one  of  the  leading  families  of 
Venice,  and  was  able  to  name  to  Francis  most  of  the  nobles 
and  persons  of  importance  whom  they  passed. 

"  There  is  Pisani,  "  he  said  ;  "  of  course  you  know  him ;  what 
a  jolly,  good-tempered  looking  fellow  he  is !  The  sailors  would 
do  anything  for  him,  and  they  say  he  will  have  command  of 
the  next  fleet  that  puts  to  sea.  I  wish  I  was  going  with  him, 
there  is  sure  to  be  a  fierce  fight  when  he  comes  across  the 
Genoese ;  his  father  was  one  «f  our  greatest  admirals.  That 
noble  just  behind  him  is  Fiofio  Dandolo :  what  a  grand  family 
they  have  been,  what  a  number  of  great  men  they  have  given 
to  the  republic !  I  should  like  to  have  seen  the  grand  old 
Doge  who  stormed  the  walls  of  Constantinople,  and  divided 
the  Eastern  empire  among  the  crusading  barons.  He  was  a 


l8  A  GRAVE  ACCUSATION. 

hero  indeed.  No ;  I  don't  know  who  that  young  noble  in  the 
green  velvet  cap  and  plum-colored  dress  is.  O  yes,  I  do, 
though ;  it  is  Ruggiero  Mocenigo ;  he  has  been  away  for  the 
last  two  years  at  Constantinople;  he  was  banished  for  having 
killed  Polo  Morosini — he  declared  it  was  in  fair  fight,  but  no 
one  believed  him.  They  had  quarreled  a  few  days  before  over 
some  question  of  the  precedence  of  their  families,  and  Morosini 
was  found  dead  at  the  top  of  the  steps  close  to  the  church  of  St. 
Paolo.  Some  people  heard  a  cry  and  ran  up  just  as  Mocenigo 
leapt  into  his  gondola,  but  as  it  rowed  off  their  shouts  called  the 
attention  of  one  of  the  city  guard  boats  which  happened  to  be 
passing,  and  it  was  stopped.  As  his  sword  was  still  wet  with 
blood  he  could  not  deny  that  he  was  the  author  of  the  deed, 
but,  as  I  said,  he  declared  it  was  in  fair  fight.  The  Morosinis 
asserted  that  Polo's  sword  was  undrawn,  but  the  Mocenigo 
family  brought  forward  a  man  who  swore  that  he  was  one  of 
the  first  to  arrive  and  pick  up  the  sword  and  place  it  in  its 
scabbard  to  prevent  its  being  lost.  No  doubt  he  lied  ;  but  as 
Mocenigo 's  influence  in  the  council  was  greater  than  that  of  the 
Morosini,  the  story  was  accepted ;  however,  the  public  feeling 
was  so  strong  that  they  could  not  do  less  than  sentence  Ruggiero 
to  two  years'  banishment.  I  suppose  that  has  just  expired,  and 
he  has  returned  from  Constantinople ;  he  had  a  bad  reputation 
before  this  affair  took  place,  but  as  his  connections  are  so  power- 
ful, I  suppose  he  will  be  received  as  if  nothing  had  happened. 
There  are  plenty  of  others  as  bad  as  he  is. " 

"  It's  a  scandalous  thing, "  Francis  Hammond  said  indig- 
nantly, "  that,  just  because  they  have  got  powerful  connections, 
men  should  be  allowed  to  do,  almost  with  impunity,  things  for 
which  an  ordinary  man  would  be  hung;  there  ought  to  be 
one  law  for  the  rich  as  well  as  the  poor.  " 

"  So  there  is  as  far  as  the  state  is  concerned, "  his  companion 
replied ;  "  a  noble  who  plots  against  the  state  is  as  certain  of 


EARLY    HOURS.  19 

a  place  in  the  lowest  dungeons  as  a  fisherman  who  has  done 
the  same ;  but  in  other  respects  there  is  naturally  some  differ- 
ence. " 

"Why  naturally?"  Francis  retorted.  "You  belong  to  a 
powerful  family,  Giustiniani,  and  my  father  is  only  a  trader, 
but  I  don't  see  that  naturally  you  have  any  more  right  to  get 
me  stabbed  in  the  back,  than  I  have  to  get  you  put  out  of 
the  way. " 

"  Naturally  perhaps  not, "  Matteo  laughed ;  "  but  you  see  it 
has  become  a  second  nature  to  us  here  in  Venice.  But  seriously 
I  admit  that  the  present  state  of  things  has  grown  to  be  a 
scandal,  and  that  the  doings  of  some  of  our  class  ought  to  be 
put  down  with  a  strong  hand.  " 

"  Well,  I  shall  say  good-night  now, "  the  English  boy  said ; 
"  my  father  doesn't  like  my  being  out  after  ten ;  he  keeps  up 
his  English  habits  of  shutting  up  early,  and  has  not  learned  to 
turn  night  into  day  as  you  do  here  in  Venice. " 

"  The  bell  has  just  tolled  the  hour,  Francis, "  his  father  said 
as  he  entered. 

"  I  didn't  think  it  was  quite  so  late,  father ;  the  Piazza  is 
crowded.  I  really  do  not  think  there  is  one  person  in  Venice 
who  goes  to  bed  so  early  as  we  do.  It  is  so  pleasant  in  the 
moonlight  after  the  heat  of  the  day. " 

"  That  is  true  enough,  Francis,  but  men  are  meant  to  sleep 
at  night  and  to  work  in  the  day.  I  think  our  fathers  carried 
this  too  far  when  they  rang  the  curfew  at  eight ;  but  ten  is 
quite  late  enough  for  any  honest  man  to  be  about  in  the  streets, 
and  the  hours  of  the  early  morning  are  just  as  pleasant  and 
far  more  healthy  than  those  of  the  evening,  especially  in  a 
place  like  this  where  the  mists  rise  from  the  water,  to  say 
nothing  of  the  chance  of  meeting  a  band  of  wild  gallants  on 
their  way  homewards  heated  with  wine,  or  of  getting  a  stab  in 
the  back  from  some  midnight  assassin.  However,  I  do  not 


30  A   VIEW   FROM  A   WINDOW. 

blame  Venice  for  enjoying  herself  while  she  can ;  she  will  have 
more  serious  matters  to  attend  to  soon.  " 

"But  she  is  at  peace  with  every  one  at  present,  father.  I 
thought  when  she  signed  the  treaty  with  Austria  after  a  year's 
fighting,  she  was  going  to  have  rest  for  a  time.  " 

"  That  was  only  the  beginning  of  the  trouble,  Francis,  and 
the  council  knew  it  well ;  that  was  why  they  made  such  terms 
with  Austria  as  they  did.  They  knew  that  Austria  was  only 
acting  in  accord  with  Hungary,  and  Padua,  and  Genoa;  the 
others  were  not  ready  to  begin,  so  Austria  came  on  her  own 
account  to  get  what  booty  and  plunder  she  could ;  but  the 
storm  is  gathering,  and  will  burst  before  long.  But  do  not  let 
us  stand  talking  here  any  longer,  it  is  high  time  for  you  to  be 
in  bed. " 

But  though  Francis  retired  to  his  room  it  was  more  than  an 
hour  before  he  got  into  bed.  His  window  looked  down  upon  one 
of  the  canals  running  into  the  Grand  Canal.  Gondolas  lighted 
by  lanterns,  or  by  torches  held  by  servitors,  passed  constantly 
backwards  and  forwards  beneath  his  window,  and  by  leaning 
out  he  could  see  the  passing  lights  of  those  on  the  Grand 
Canal.  Snatches  of  song  and  laughter  came  up  to  him,  and 
sometimes  the  note  of  a  musical  instrument.  The  air  was 
soft  and  balmy,  and  he  felt  no  inclination  for  sleep. 

Francis  thought  over  what  his  father  had  said  of  the 
probability  of  war  as  he  sat  at  his  window,  and  wished  that 
he  were  a  couple  of  years  older  and  could  take  part  in  the 
struggle.  The  Venetian  fleet  had  performed  such  marvels  of 
valour,  that,  in  the  days  when  military  service  was  almost  the 
sole  avenue  to  distinction  and  fortune,  the  desire  to  take  part 
in  a  naval  expedition  which  promised  unusual  opportunities 
of  gaining  credit  and  renown  was  the  most  natural  thing 
possible  for  a  boy  of  spirit. 

Francis  was  a  well-built  lad  of  nearly  sixteen ;  he  had,  until 


AN   ENGLISH   BOY'S  TRAINING.  21 

he  left  London  when  about  twelve  years  old,  taken  his  full 
share  in  the  rough  sports  which  formed  so  good  a  training  for 
the  youths  of  England,  and  in  which  the  citizens  of  London 
were  in  no  way  behind  the  rest  of  the  kingdom.  He  had 
practised  shooting  with  a  light  bow  and  arrows  in  company 
with  boys  of  his  own  age  in  the  fields  outside  the  city  walls; 
had  engaged  in  many  a  rough  tussle  with  light  clubs  and 
quarter-staffs;  and  his  whole  time — except  for  an  hour  or  two 
daily  which  he  had,  as  the  son  of  a  well-to-do  citizen,  spent  in 
learning  to  read  and  write — had  been  occupied  in  games  and 
exercises  of  one  kind  or  other. 

Since  his  arrival  in  Venice  he  had  not  altogether  discon- 
tinued his  former  habits.  At  his  earnest  solicitation  his 
father  had  permitted  him  to  attend  the  School  of  Arms,  where 
the  sons  of  patricians  and  well-to-do  merchants  learned  the  use 
of  sword  and  dagger,  to  hurl  the  javelin,  and  wield  the  mace 
and  battle-axe;  and  was,  besides,  a  frequenter  of  some  of  the 
schools  where  old  soldiers  gave  private  lessons  in  arms  to  such 
as  could  afford  it;  and  the  skill  and  strength  of  the  English 
lad  excited  no  slight  envy  among  the  young  Venetian  nobles. 
Often  too  he  would  go  out  to  one  of  the  sandy  islets,  and 
there  setting  up  a  mark,  practise  with  the  bow ;  his  muscles, 
too,  had  gained  strength  and  hardness  by  rowing. 

It  was  his  constant  habit  of  an  evening  when  well  away  from 
the  crowded  canals  in  the  gondola,  with  Giuseppi,  the  son  and 
assistant  of  his  father's  gondolier,  to  take  an  oar,  for  he  had 
thoroughly  mastered  the  difficult  accomplishment  of  rowing 
well  in  a  gondola ;  but  he  only  did  this  when  far  out  from  the 
city,  or  when  the  darkness  of  evening  would  prevent  his  figure 
from  being  recognized  by  any  of  his  acquaintances,  for  no 
Venetian  of  good  family  would  demean  himself  by  handling  an 
oar.  Francis,  however,  accustomed  to  row  upon  the  Thames, 
could  see  no  reason  why  he  should  not  do  the  same  in  a  gondola, 


22  A  NEW  GONDOLA. 

and  in  time  he  and  his  companion  could  send  the  boat  dancing 
over  the  water  at  a  rate  which  enabled  them  to  overtake  and 
distance  most  pair-oared  boats. 

After  breakfast  next  morning  he  went  down  to  the  steps 
where  Beppo  and  Giuseppi,  in  their  black  cloth  suits  with  red 
sashes  round  their  waists,  were  waiting  with  the  gondola  in 
which  Mr.  Hammond  was  going  out  to  Malamocco  to  examine 
a  cargo  which  had  the  day  before  arrived  from  Azoph. 
Giuseppi  jumped  ashore. 

"  I  have  heard  of  just  the  gondola  to  suit  you,  Messer 
Francisco,  and  you  can  get  her  a  bargain. " 

"  What  is  she  like,  Giuseppi  ?  " 

"  She  belongs  to  a  man  out  at  Lido.  She  was  built  for  the 
race  two  years  ago,  but  her  owner  fell  sick  and  was  unable  to 
start ;  he  has  not  got  strong  again,  and  wants  to  sell  his  boat, 
which  is  far  too  light  for  ordinary  work  ;  they  say  she  is  almost 
like  an  egg-shell,  and  you  and  I  will  be  able  to  send  her  along 
grandly.  She  cost  four  ducats,  but  he  will  sell  her  for  two.  " 

"  That  is  capital,  Giuseppi ;  this  gondola  is  all  well  enough 
for  my  father,  but  she  is  very  heavy.  This  evening  we  will 
row  over  to  Lido  and  look  at  her.  " 

A  few  minutes  later  Mr.  Hammond  came  down,  Beppo  and 
his  son  took  off  their  jackets,  and  in  their  snow-white  shirts 
and  black  trousers,  set  off  by  the  red  scarf  and  a  red  ribbon 
round  their  broad  hats,  took  their  places  on  the  bow  and  stern. 
Mr.  Hammond  sat  down  on  the  cushions  in  the  middle  of  the 
boat,  and  with  an  easy  noiseless  motion  the  gondola  glided  away 
from  the  stairs.  Francis,  with  a  little  sigh,  turned  away  and 
strolled  off  for  a  couple  of  hours'  work  with  the  preceptor  with 
whom  he  had  continued  his  studies  since  he  came  to  Venice. 

This  work  consisted  chiefly  of  learning  various  languages,  for 
in  those  days  there  was  Itttle  else  to  learn.  Latin  was  almost 
universally  spoken  by  educated  men  in  southern  Europe,  and 


MATTEO'S  OPINION.  23 

Greeks,  Italians,  Spaniards,  and  Frenchmen  were  able  to  converse 
in  this  common  medium.  French,  Francis  understood,  for  it  was 
the  language  in  use  in  the  court  and  among  the  upper  classes  in 
England.  Italian  he  picked  up  naturally  during  his  residence, 
and  spoke  it  with  the  facility  of  a  native.  He  could  now  converse 
freely  in  Latin,  and  had  some  knowledge  of  German.  At  the 
same  school  were  many  lads  of  good  Venetian  families,  and  it 
was  here  that  he  had  first  made  the  acquaintance  of  Matteo 
Giustiniani,  who  was  now  his  most  intimate  friend.  Matteo, 
like  all  the  young  nobles  of  Venice,  was  anxious  to  excel  in 
military  exercises,  but  he  had  none  of  the  ardour  for  really  hard 
work  which  distinguished  his  friend.  He  admired  the  latter's 
strength  and  activity,  but  could  not  bring  himself  to  imitate 
him  in  the  exercises  by  which  that  strength  was  attained,  and 
had  often  remonstrated  with  him  upon  his  fondness  for  rowing. 

"  It  is  not  seemly,  Francisco,  for  a  gentleman  to  be  labouring 
like  a  common  gondolier ;  these  men  are  paid  for  doing  it ;  but 
what  pleasure  there  can  be  in  standing  up  working  that  oar  till 
you  are  drenched  with  perspiration  I  cannot  understand.  I 
don't  mind  getting  hot  in  the  School  of  Arms,  because  one  can- 
not learn  to  use  the  sword  and  dagger  without  it,  but  that's 
quite  another  thing  from  tugging  at  an  oar.  " 

"  But  I  like  it,  Matteo ;  and  see  how  strong  it  has  made  my 
muscles,  not  of  the  arm  only,  but  the  leg  and  back.  You  often 
say  you  envy  me  my  strength,  but  you  might  be  just  as  strong 
if  you  chose  to  work  as  I  do ;  besides  it  is  delightful,  when  you 
are  accustomed  to  it,  to  feel  the  gondola  flying  away  under 
your  stroke. " 

"  I  prefer  feeling  it  fly  away  under  some  one  else's  stroke, 
Francisco.  That  is  pleasant  enough,  I  grant ;  but  the  very 
thought  of  working  as  you  do  throws  me  into  a  perspiration. 
I  should  like  to  be  as  strong  as  you  are,  but  to  work  as  a 
gondolier  is  too  high  a  price  to  pay  for  it. " 


24  A  RACING  CRAFT. 

That  evening  Francis  crossed  the  lagoon  in  the  gondola  with 
Giuseppi  to  inspect  the  boat  he  had  heard  of.  It  was  just 
what  he  wanted.  In  appearance  it  differed  in  no  way  from  an 
ordinary  gondola,  but  it  was  a  mere  shell.  The  timbers  and 
planking  were  extremely  light,  and  the  weight  of  the  boat 
was  little  more  than  a  third  of  that  of  other  craft.  She  had 
been  built  like  a  working  gondola,  instead  of  in  the  form  of 
those  mostly  used  for  racing,  because  her  owner  had  intended, 
after  the  race  was  over,  to  plank  her  inside  and  strengthen  her  for 
everyday  work ;  but  the  race  had  never  come  off,  and  the  boat 
lay  just  as  she  had  come  from  the  hands  of  her  builder,  except 
that  she  had  been  painted  black,  like  other  gondolas,  to  prevent 
her  planks  from  opening,  When  her  owner  had  determined 
to  part  with  her  he  had  given  her  a  fresh  coat  of  paint,  and 
had  put  her  in  the  water  that  her  seams  might  close  up. 

"  I  don't  like  parting  with  her, "  the  young  fisherman  to 
whom  she  belonged  said.  "  I  tried  her  once  or  twice  and  she 
went  like  the  wind,  but  I  got  fever  in  my  bones  and  I  am 
unlikely  to  race  again,  and  the  times  are  hard,  and  I  must  part 
with  her. " 

Francis  and  Giuseppi  gave  her  a  trial,  and  were  delighted 
with  the  speed  and  ease  with  which  she  flew  through  the  water. 
On  their  return  Francis  at  once  paid  the  price  asked  for  her. 
His  father  made  him  a  handsome  allowance  in  order  that  he 
might  be  able  to  mix  without  discomfort  with  the  lads  of  good 
family  whom  he  met  at  his  preceptor's  and  at  the  schools  of 
arms.  But  Francis  did  not  care  for  strolling  in  the  Piazza.,  or 
sitting  for  hours  sipping  liquors  ;  still  less  did  he  care  for  dress 
or  finery ;  consequently  he  had  always  plenty  of  money  to  in- 
dulge in  his  own  special  fancies.  As  soon  as  the  bargain  was 
completed  Giuseppi  took  his  place  in  the  old  gondola,  while 
Francis  took  the  oar  in  his  new  acquisition,  and  found  to  his 
satisfaction  that  with  scarcely  an  effort  he  could  dart  ahead  of 


"YOUNG  PEOPLE  ALWAYS  WANT  TO   GO   FAST."  25 

his  companion  and  leave  him  far  behind.  By  nightfall  the  two 
gondolas  were  fastened  side  by  side  behind  the  gaily-painted 
posts  which,  in  almost  all  Venetian  houses,  are  driven  into  the 
canal  close  to  the  steps,  and  behind  which  the  gondolas 
belonging  to  the  house  lie  safe  from  injury  by  passing  craft. 

"  I  have  bought  another  gondola,  father, "  Francis  said  the 
next  morning.  "  She  is  a  very  light,  fast  craft,  and  I  got  her 
cheap. " 

"  I  don't  see  what  you  wanted  another  gondola  for,  Francis. 
I  do  not  use  mine  very  much,  and  you  are  always  welcome  to 
take  it  when  I  do  not  want  it.  " 

"  Yes,  father,  but  you  often  use  it  in  the  evening,  and  that 
is  just  the  time  when  one  wants  to  go  out.  You  very  often 
only  take  Beppo  with  you  when  you  do  not  go  on  business,  and 
I  often  want  a  boat  that  I  could  take  with  Giuseppi;  besides, 
your  gondola  is  a  very  solid  one,  and  I  like  passing  people. " 

"  Young  people  always  want  to  go  fast, "  Mr.  Hammond  said, 
"why,  I  can't  make  out.  However,  Francis,  I  am  not  sorry  that 
you  have  got  a  boat  of  your  own,  for  it  has  happened  several 
times  lately  that  when  in  the  evening  I  have  gone  down  intend- 
ing to  row  round  to  the  Piazetta  I  have  found  the  boat  gone,  and 
have  had  to  walk.  Now  I  shall  be  able  to  rely  on  finding  Beppo 
asleep  in  the  boat  at  the  steps.  In  future,  since  you  have  a 
boat  of  your  own,  I  shall  not  be  so  particular  as  to  your  being 
in  at  ten.  I  do  not  so  much  mind  you  being  out  on  the  water, 
only  you  must  promise  me  that  you  will  not  be  in  the  streets 
after  that  hour.  There  are  frequent  broils  as  the  evening  gets 
on,  not  to  mention  the  danger  of  cut-throats  in  unfrequented 
lanes ;  but  if  you  will  promise  me  that  you  will  never  be  about 
the  streets  after  half-past  nine  I  will  give  you  leave  to  stay  out  on 
the  water  till  a  later  hour ;  but  when  you  come  in  late  be  careful 
always  to  close  and  bar  the  door,  and  do  not  make  more  noise 
than  you  can  help  in  coming  up  to  your  room. " 


26  A  CONCESSION. 

Francis  was  much  pleased  with  this  concession,  for  the 
obligation  to  return  at  ten  o'clock,  just  when  the  temperature 
was  most  delightful  and  the  Grand  Canal  at  its  gayest,  had  been 
very  irksome  to  him.  As  to  the  prohibition  against  being  in  the 
streets  of  Venice  after  half-past  nine  he  felt  that  no  hardship 
whatever,  as  he  found  no  amusement  in  strolling  in  the  crowded 
Piazza. 


CHAPTER  II. 

A  CONSPIRACY. 

|HO  are  those  ladies,  Matteo?"  Francis  asked  his 
friend  one  evening,  as  the  latter,  who  was  sitting 
with  him  in  his  gondola  while  Giuseppi  rowed  them 
along  the  Grand  Canal,  half  rose  and  saluted  two 
girls  in  a  passing  gondola. 

"They  are  distant  cousins  of  mine,  Maria  and  Giulia 
Polani :  they  only  returned  a  short  time  since  from  Corfu. 
Their  father  is  one  of  the  richest  merchants  of  our  city,  he  has 
for  the  last  three  years -been  living  in  Corfu,  which  is  the  head- 
quarters of  his  trade.  The  family  is  an  old  one,  and  has  given 
doges  to  Venice.  They  are  two  of  our  richest  heiresses,  for 
they  have  no  brothers.  Their  mother  died  soon  after  the  birth 
of  Giulia." 

"  They  both  look  very  young,"  Francis  said. 

"Maria  is  about  sixteen,  her  sister  two  years  younger. 
There  will  be  no  lack  of  suitors  for  their  hands;  for  although 
the  family  is  not  politically  powerful,  as  it  used  to  be,  their 
wealth  would  cause  them  to  be  gladly  received  in  our  very  first 
families." 

"  Who  was  the  middle-aged  lady  sitting  between  them  ?" 

"  She  is  only  their  duenna,"  Matteo  said  carelessly.  "  She 
has  been  with  them  since  they  were  children,  and  their  father 
places  great  confidence  in  her.  And  he  had  need  to,  for  Maria 


28       "IT   IS   ALWAYS   USEFUL  TO   HAVE  A    FAST   BOAT." 

will  ere  long  be  receiving  bouquets  and  perfumed  notes  from 
many  a  young  gallant." 

"  I  can  quite  fancy  that,"  Francis  said,  "  for  she  is  very  pretty 
as  well  as  very  rich,  and,  as  far  as  I  have  observed,  the  two 
things  do  not  go  very  often  together.  However,  no  doubt  by 
this  time  her  father  has  pretty  well  arranged  in  his  mind  whom 
she  is  to  marry." 

"  I  expect  so,"  agreed  Matteo. 

"  That  is  the  worst  of  being  born  of  good  family ;  you  have  got 
to  marry  some  one  of  your  father's  choice,  not  your  own,  and  that 
choice  is  determined  simply  by  the  desire  to  add  to  the  political 
influence  of  the  family,  to  strenghten  distant  ties,  or  to  obtain 
powerful  connections.  I  suppose  it  is  the  same  everywhere, 
Matteo,  but  I  do  think  that  a  man  or  woman  ought  to  have 
some  voice  in  a  matter  of  such  importance  to  them." 

"  I  think  so  too  at  the  present  time,"  Matteo  laughed ;  "  but 
I  don't  suppose  that  I  shall  be  of  that  opinion  when  I  have 
a  family  of  sons  and  daughters  to  marry.  This  gondola  of  yours 
must  be  a  fast  one  indeed,  Francisco,  for  with  only  one  rower 
she  keeps  up  with  almost  all  the  pair-oared  boats,  and  your  boy 
is  not  exerting  himself  to  the  utmost  either." 

"  She  can  fly  along,  I  can  tell  you,  Matteo.  You  shall  come 
out  in  her  some  evening  when  Giusseppi  and  I  both  take  oars. 
I  have  had  her  ten  days  now,  and  we  have  not  come  across 
anything  that  can  hold  her  for  a  moment." 

"  It  is  always  useful,"  Matteo  said,  "  to  have  a  fast  boat. 
It  is  invaluable  in  case  you  have  been  getting  into  a  scrape  and 
have  one  of  the  boats  of  the  city  watch  in  chase  of  you." 

"  I  hope  I  sha'n't  want  it  for  any  purpose  of  that  sort," 
Francis  answered,  laughing.  "  I  do  not  think  I  am  likely  to 
give  cause  to  the  city  watch  to  chase  me." 

"I  don't  think  you  are,  Francisco,  but  their  is  never  any 
saying." 


A   FARE.  29 

"  At  anyrate  it  is  always  useful  to  be  able  to  go  fast  if 
necessary,  and  if  we  did  want  to  get  away  I  do  not  think  there 
are  many  pair-oared  gondolas  afloat  that  would  overtake  us, 
though  a  good  four-oar  might  do  so.  Giuseppi  and  I  are  so 
accustomed  to  each  other's  stroke  now  that  though  in  a  heavy 
boat  we  might  not  be  a  match  for  two  men,  in  a  light  craft  like 
this,  where  weight  does  not  count  for  so  much,  we  would  not 
mind  entering  her  for  a  race  against  the  two  best  gondoliers  on 
the  canals  in  an  ordinary  boat." 

A  few  evenings  later  Francis  was  returning  homewards  at 
about  half-past  ten,  when,  in  passing  along  a  quiet  canal,  the 
boat  was  hailed  from  the  shore. 

"  Shall  we  take  him,  Messer  Francisco?"  Giuseppi  asked  in  a 
low  voice;  for  more  than  once  they  had  late  in  the  evening  taken 
a  fare. 

Francis  rowed,  like  Giuseppi,  in  his  shirt,  and  in  the  darkness 
they  were  often  taken  for  a  pair-oared  gondola  on  the  look- 
out for  a  fare.  Francis  had  sometimes  accepted  the  offer, 
because  it  was  an  amusement  to  see  where  the  passenger 
wished  to  go — to  guess  whether  he  was  a  lover  hastening  to 
keep  an  appointment,  a  gambler  on  a  visit  to  some  quiet 
locality  where  high  play  went  on  unknown  to  the  authorities, 
or  simply  one  who  had  by  some  error  missed  his  own  gondola 
and  was  anxious  to  return  home.  It  made  no  difference  to  him 
which  way  he  rowed  ;  it  was  always  possible  that  some  adven- 
ture was  to  be  met  with,  and  the  fare  paid  was  a  not  unwelcome 
addition  to  Giuseppi's  funds. 

"  Yes,  we  may  as  well  take  him,"  he  replied  to  Giuseppi's 
question. 

"You  are  in  no  hurry  to  get  to  bed,  I  suppose?"  the  man 
who  had  hailed  them  said  as  the  boat  drew  up  against  the  wall 
of  the  canal. 

"  It  does  not  make  much  difference  to  us  if  we  are  well  paid 


30  A   LONG   ROW. 

to  keep  awake,"  Giuseppi  said.  Upon  such  occasions  he  was 
always  the  spokesman. 

"You  know  San  Nicolo?" 

"  Yes,  I  know  it,"  Giuseppi  said  ;  "  but  it  is  a  long  row — six 
miles,  if  it's  a  foot." 

'  You  will  have  to  wait  there  for  an  hour  or  two,  but  I  will 
give  you  half  a  ducat  for  your  night's  work." 

"  What  do  you  say,  partner  ?"  Giuseppi  asked  Francis. 

"  We  may  as  well  go,"  the  lad  replied  after  a  moment's  pause. 

The  row  was  certainly  a  long  one,  but  the  night  was  delight- 
ful, and  the  half-ducat  was  a  prize  for  Giuseppi ;  but  what 
influenced  Francis  principally  in  accepting  was  curiosity.  San 
Nicolo  was  a  little  sandy  islet  lying  quite  on  the  outside  of  the 
group  of  islands.  It  was  inhabited  only  by  a  few  fishermen ; 
and  Francis  wondered  that  a  man,  evidently  by  his  voice  and 
manner  of  address  belonging  to  the  upper  class,  should  want  to 
go  to  such  a  place  as  this  at  this  hour  of  the  night.  Certainly 
no  ordinary  motives  could  actuate  him.  As  the  stranger  took 
his  place  in  the  boat  Francis  saw  by  the  light  of  the  stars  that 
he  was  masked  ;  but  there  was  nothing  very  unusual  in  this,  as 
masks  were  not  unfrequently  worn  at  night  by  young  gallants 
when  engaged  on  any  frolic  in  which  they  wished  their  identity 
to  be  unrecognized.  Still  it  added  to  the  interest  of  the  trip ; 
and  dipping  his  oar  in  the  water  he  set  out  at  a  slow,  steady 
stroke  well  within  his  power.  He  adopted  this  partly  in  view 
of  the  length  of  the  row  before  them,  partly  because  the  idea 
struck  him  that  it  might  be  as  well  that  their  passenger  should 
not  suspect  that  the  boat  was  other  than  an  ordinary  gondola. 
The  passenger,  however,  was  well  satisfied  with  the  speed,  for 
they  passed  two  or  three  other  gondolas  before  issuing  from  the 
narrow  canals  and  starting  across  the  broad  stretch  of  the 
lagoon.  Not  a  word  was  spoken  until  the  gondola  neared  its 
destination.  Then  the  passenger  said : 


AT  SAN   NICOLO.  3! 

"You  row  well.  If  you  like  the  iob  I  may  employ  you 
again." 

"  We  are  always  ready  to  earn  money,"  Francis  said,  speaking 
in  a  gruff  voice  quite  unlike  his  own. 

"  Very  well.  I  will  let  you  know,  as  we  return,  what  night  I 
shall  want  you  again.  I  suppose  you  can  keep  your  mouths  shut 
on  occasion,  and  can  go  without  gossiping  to  your  fellows  as  to 
any  job  on  which  you  are  employed  ?" 

"  We  can  do  that,"  Francis  said.  "  It's  no  matter  to  us  where 
our  customers  want  to  go  if  they  are  willing  to  pay  for  it ;  and 
as  to  gossiping,  there  is  a  saying,  'A  silver  gag  is  the  best  for 
keeping  the  mouth  closed.'  " 

A  few  minutes  later  the  bow  of  the  gondola  ran  up  on  the 
sandy  shore  of  San  Nicolo.  The  stranger  made  his  way  forward 
and  leapt  out,  and  with  the  words,  "  It  may  be  two  hours  before 
I  am  back,'  walked  rapidly  away. 

"  Why,  Messer  Francisco,"  Giuseppi  said  when  their  passen- 
ger was  well  out  of  hearing,  "  what  on  earth  possessed  you  to 
accept  a  fare  to  such  a  place  as  this  ?  Of  course,  for  myself,  I 
am  glad  enough  to  earn  half  a  ducat,  which  will  buy  me  a  new 
jacket  with  silver  buttons  for  the  next  festa ;  but  to  make  such 
a  journey  as  this  was  too  much  and  it  will  be  very  late  before 
we  are  back.  If  the  padrone  knew  it  he  would  be  very 
angry." 

"  I  didn't  do  it  to  enable  you  to  earn  half  a  ducat,  Giuseppi, 
although  I  am  glad  enough  you  should  do  so ;  but  I  did  it 
because  it  seemed  to  promise  the  chance  of  an  adventure. 
There  must  be  something  in  this.  A  noble — for  I  have  no 
doubt  he  is  one — would  never  be  coming  out  to  San  Nicolo  at 
this  time  of  night  without  some  very  strong  motive.  There 
can  be  no  rich  heiress  whom  he  might  want  to  carry  off  living 
here,  so  that  can't  be  what  he  has  come  for.  I  think  there 
must  be  some  secret  meeting,  for  as  we  came  across  the  lagoon 


JJ  A   FOOLISH   DETERMINATION. 

I  saw  one  or  two  boats  in  the  distance  heading  in  this  direction. 
Anyhow,  I  mean  to  try  and  find  out  what  it  all  means." 

"  You  had  better  not,  sir,"  Giuseppi  said  earnestly.  "  If  there 
is  any  plot  on  foot  we  had  best  not  get  mixed  up  in  it.  No 
one  is  too  high  or  too  low  to  escape  the  vengeance  of  the  council 
if  found  plotting  against  the  state ;  and  before  now  gondolas 
staved  in  and  empty  have  been  found  drifting  on  the  lagoons, 
and  the  men  who  rowed  them  have  never  been  heard  of  again. 
Once  in  the  dungeons  of  St.  Mark  it  would  be  of  no  use  to 
plead  that  you  had  entered  into  the  affair  simply  for  the  amuse- 
ment. The  fact  that  you  were  not  a  regular  boatman  would 
make  the  matter  all  the  worse,  and  the  maxim  that  '  dead  men 
tell  no  tales '  is  largely  acted  upon  in  Venice.  I  think,  sir,  the 
best  plan  will  be  to  row  straight  back,  and  leave  our  fare  to  find 
his  way  home  as  best  he  may. 

"  I  mean  to  find  something  out  about  it  if  I  can,  Giuseppi. 
A  state  secret  may  be  dangerous  but  it  may  be  valuable.  Any- 
how, there  can  be  no  great  risk  in  it.  On  the  water  I  think  we 
can  show  our  heels  to  anyone  who  chases  us ;  and  once  in  Venice, 
we  are  absolutely  safe,  for  no  one  would  suspect  a  gondola  of 
Mr.  Hammond,  the  English  merchant,  of  having  any  connection 
with  a  hired  craft  with  its  two  gondoliers." 

"That  is  true  enough,  sir;  but  I  don't  like  it  for  all  that. 
However,  if  you  have  made  up  your  mind  to  it  there  is  nothing 
more  to  be  said." 

"Very  well.  You  stay  here,  and  I  will  go  and  look  round. 
You  had  better  get  the  gondola  afloat  and  be  ready  to  start  at 
the  instant,  so  that,  if  I  should  have  to  run  for  it,  I  can  jump  on 
board  and  be  off  in  a  moment." 

Francis  made  his  way  quietly  up  to  the  little  group  of  huts 
inhabited  by  the  fishermen,  but  in  none  of  them  could  he  see 
any  signs  of  life — no  lights  were  visible,  nor  could  he  hear  the 
murmur  of  voices.  There  were,  he  knew,  other  buildings  scat- 


A   USELESS   SEARCH.  33 

tered  about  on  the  island  ;  but  he  had  only  the  light  of  the  stars 
to  guide  him,  and,  not  knowing  anything  of  the  exact  position  of 
the  houses,  he  thought  it  better  to  return  to  the  boat. 
,    "  I  can  find  no  signs  of  them,  Giuseppi." 

"  All  the  better,  Messer  Francisco.  There  are  some  sorts  of 
game  which  it  is  well  for  the  safety  of  the  hunter  not  to  discover. 
I  was  very  glad,  I  can  tell  you,  when  I  heard  your  whistle  and 
made  out  your  figure  returning  at  a  walk.  Now  you  are  back 
I  will  take  an  hour's  nap,  and  I  should  advise  you  to  do  the 
same." 

But  Francis  had  no  thought  of  sleep,  and  sat  down  at  his 
end  of  the  gondola  wondering  over  the  adventure,  and  con- 
sidering whether  or  not  it  would  be  worth  while  to  follow  it  up 
another  night.  That  it  was  a  plot  of  some  sort  he  had  little 
doubt.  There  were  always  in  Venice  two  parties,  equally  anxious 
perhaps  for  the  prosperity  of  the  republic,  but  differing  widely 
as  to  the  means  by  which  that  prosperity  would  be  best 
achieved,  and  as  to  the  alliances  which  would  in  the  long  run 
prove  most  beneficial  to  her.  There  were  also  needy  and  des- 
perate men  ready  enough  to  take  bribes  from  any  who  might 
offer  them,  and  to  intrigue  in  the  interest  of  Padua  or  Ferrara, 
Verona,  Milan,  or  Genoa — whichever  might  for  the  time  be 
their  paymasters.  Francis  was  English,  but  he  had  been  long 
enough  in  Venice  to  feel  a  pride  in  the  island  city,  and  to  be 
almost  as  keenly  interested  in  her  fortunes  as  were  his  com- 
panions and  friends ;  and  a  certain  sense  of  duty  mingled  with 
his  natural  love  of  adventure,  decided  him  to  follow  up  the 
chance  which  had  befallen  him,  and  to  endeavour  to  ascertain 
the  nature  of  the  plot  which  was,  he  had  little  doubt  being 
hatched  at  San  Nicolo. 

In  a  very  few  minutes  the  regular  breathing  of  Giuseppi,  who 
had  curled  himself  up  in  the  botton  of  the  boat,  showed  that  he 
had  gone  to  sleep ;  and  he  did  not  stir  until,  an  hour  and  a  half 


34  "STOP   IN   THE   NAME  OF  THE   REPUBLIC!" 

after  the  return  of  Francis,  the  latter  heard  the  fall  of  footsteps 
approadiing  the  gondola. 

"  Wake  up,  Giuseppi,  here  comes  our  fare  !  " 

Francis  stood  up  and  stretched  himself  as  the  stranger  came 
alongside,  as  if  he  too  had  been  fast  asleep. 

"Take  me  back  to  the  spot  where  I  hailed  you,"  the  fare 
said  briefly  as  he  stepped  into  the  boat  and  threw  himself  back 
on  the  cushions,  and  without  a  word  the  lads  dipped  their  oars 
in  the  water  and  the  gondola  glided  away  towards  Venice.  Just 
as  they  reached  the  mouth  of  the  Grand  Canal,  and  were  about 
to  turn  into  it,  a  six-oared  gondola  shot  out  from  under  the 
point,  and  a  voice  called  out : 

"Stop,  in  the  name  of  the  republic,  and  give  an  account  of 
yourselves ! " 

"  "  Row  on,"  the  passenger  exclaimed,  starting  up ;  "  ten  ducats 
if  you  can  set  me  safely  on  shore." 

Had  the  lads  been  real  gondoliers  it  is  probable  that  even  this 
tempting  offer  would  not  have  induced  them  to  disregard  the 
order  from  the  galley,  for  they  would  have  run  no  slight  risk  in 
so  doing. 

But  Francis  had  no  desire  to  be  caught,  and  perhaps  im- 
prisoned for  a  considerable  time  until  he  was  able  to  convince 
the  council  that  his  share  of  the  night's  work  had  been  merely 
the  result  of  a  boyish  freak.  With  two  strokes  of  his  oar, 
therefore,  he  swept  the  boat's  head  round,  thereby  throwing 
their  pursuers  directly  astern  of  them ;  then  he  and  Giuseppi 
threw  their  whole  weight  into  the  stroke,  and  the  boat  danced 
over  the  water  at  a  pace  very  different  to  that  at  which  it  had 
hitherto  proceeded.  But,  fast  as  they  went,  the  galley  travelled 
somewhat  faster,  the  rowers  doing  their  utmost  in  obedience  to 
the  angry  orders  of  their  officer,  and  had  the  race  been  continued 
on  a  broad  stretch  of  water  it  would  sooner  or  later  have  over- 
hauled the  gondola.  But  Francis  was  perfectly  aware  of  this, 


CHASED.  35 

and  edged  the  boat  away  towards  the  end  of  the  Piazzetta,  and 
then,  shooting  her  head  around,  dashed  at  full  speed  along  the 
canal  by  the  side  of  the  ducal  palace,  the  galley  being  at  the 
time  some  forty  yards  behind. 

"The  first  to  the  right,"  Francis  said,  and  with  scarce  a 
pause  in  their  speed  they  turned  off  at  right  angles  up  the  first 
canal  they  came  to.  Again  and  again  they  turned  and  twisted, 
regardless  of  the  direction  in  which  the  canals  took  them,  their 
only  object  being  to  gain  on  their  pursuers,  who  lost  consider- 
ably at  each  turn,  being  obliged  always  to  check  their  speed 
before  arriving  at  each  angle,  to  allow  the  boat  to  go  round.  In 
ten  minntes  she  was  far  behind,  and  they  then  abated  their 
speed,  and  turned  the  boat's  head  in  the  direction  in  which  they 
wished  to  go. 

"  By  San  Paolo,"  the  stranger  said,  "  that  was  well  done ! 
You  are  masters  of  your  craft,  and  sent  your  boat  along  at  a  pace 
which  must  have  astonished  those  fellows  in  that  lumbering 
galley.  I  had  no  reason  to  fear  them,  but  I  do  not  care  to  be 
interfered  with  and  questioned  by  these  jacks-in  -office  of  the 
republic." 

A  few  minutes  later  they  reached  the  place  where  he  em- 
barked, and  as  he  got  out  he  handed  the  money  he  had  promised 
to  Giuseppi. 

"  Next  Thursday  night,"  he  said,  "  at  half-past  ten." 

"  It  seems  a  dangerous  sort  of  service,  signer,"  Giuseppi  said 
hesitatingly.  "  It  is  no  joke  to  disobey  the  officers  of  the 
republic,  and  next  time  we  may  not  be  so  fortunate." 

"  It's  worth  taking  a  little  risk  when  you  are  well  paid,"  the 
other  said,  turning  away,  "and  it  is  not  likely  we  shall  run 
against  one  of  the  state  galleys  another  night." 

"  Home,  now,  Giuseppi,"  Francis  said,  "  we  can  talk  about  it 
to-morrow ;  it's  the  best  night's  work  you  ever  did  in  your  life, 
and  as  I  have  had  a  grand  excitement  we  are  both  contented." 


36  A   PIECE  OF  NEWS. 

During  the  next  few  days  Francis  debated  seriously  with  him- 
self whether  to  follow  up  the  adventure ;  but  he  finally  decided 
on  doing  so,  feeling  convinced  that  there  could  be  no  real 
danger,  even  were  the  boat  seized  by  one  of  the  state  galleys,  as 
his  story,  that  he  had  gone  into  the  matter  simply  to  discover 
whether  any  plot  was  intended  against  the  republic,  would 
finally  be  believed,  as  it  would  be  beyond  the  bounds  of  prob- 
ability that  a  lad  of  his  age  could  himself  have  been  concerned 
in  such  a  conspiracy. 

As  to  Giuseppi,  he  offered  no  remonstrance  when  Francis 
told  him  that  he  intended  to  go  out  to  San  Nicolo  on  the  fol- 
lowing Thursday,  for  the  ten  ducats  he  had  received  were  a  sum 
larger  than  he  could  have  saved  in  a  couple  of  years'  steady 
work,  and  were  indeed  quite  a  fortune  in  his  eyes.  Another 
such  a  sum,  and  he  would  be  able,  when  the  time  came,  to  buy 
a  gondola  of  his  own,  to  marry,  and  set  up  housekeeping  in 
grand  style.  As  for  the  danger,  if  Francis  was  willing  to  run  it 
he  could  do  the  same ;  for  after  all,  a  few  months'  imprisonment 
was  the  worst  that  could  befall  him  for  his  share  in  the 
business. 

Before  the  day  came  Matteo  Giustiniani  told  Francis  a  piece 
of  news  which  interested  him. 

"  You  remember  my  cousin  Maria  Polani,  whom  we  met  the 
other  evening  on  the  Grand  Canal  ?  " 

"  Of  course  I  do,  Matteo.    What  of  her  ?  " 

"  Well,  what  do  you  think  ! "  Ruggiero  Mocenigo,  whom  I 
pointed  out  to  you  on  the  Piazza — the  man  who  had  been 
banished  for  two  years — has  asked  for  her  hand  in  marriage." 

"He  is  not  going  to  have  it,  I  hope,"  Francis  said  indig- 
nantly. "  It  would  be  a  shame,  indeed,  to  give  her  to  such  a 
man  as  that." 

"  That  is  just  what  her  father  thought,  Francisco,  and  he  re- 
fused Ruggiero  pretty  curtly,  and  told  him,  I  believe,  he  would 


AN   ARGUMENT.  37 

rather  see  her  in  her  grave  than  married  to  him ;  and  I  hear 
there  was  a  regular  scene,  and  Ruggiero  went  away  swearing 
Polani  should  regret  his  refusal." 

"  I  suppose  your  cousin  does  not  care  much  about  his  threats," 
Francis  said. 

"  I  don't  suppose  he  cares  much  about  them,"  Matteo  replied ; 
"  but  Ruggiero  is  very  powerfully  connected,  and  may  do  him 
damage,  not  to  speak  of  the  chance  of  his  hiring  a  bravo  to  stab 
him  on  the  first  opportunity.  I  know  my  father  advised  Polani 
to  be  very  cautious  where  he  went  at  night  for  a  time.  This 
fellow,  Ruggiero,  is  a  dangerous  enemy.  If  he  were  to  get 
Polani  stabbed,  it  would  be  next  to  impossible  to  prove  that  it 
was  his  doing,  however  strong  the  suspicion  might  be ;  for  mere 
suspicion  goes  for  nothing  against  a  man  with  his  influence  and 
connections.  He  has  two  near  relations  on  the  council,  and  if 
he  were  to  burn  down  Polani 's  mansion,  and  to  carry  off  Maria, 
the  chances  are  against  his  being  punished  if  he  did  but  keep 
out  of  the  way  for  a  few  months." 

As  in  England  powerful  barons  were  in  the  habit  of  waging 
private  wars  with  each  other,  and  the  carrying  off  a  bride  by 
force  was  no  very  rare  event,  this  state  of  things  did  not  appear 
to  Francis  as  outrageous  as  it  would  do  to  an  English  lad  of  the 
present  day,  but  he  shook  his  head. 

"Of  course  one  understands,  Matteo,  that  everywhere  pow- 
erful nobles  do  things  which  would  be  regarded  as  crimes  if 
done  by  others ;  but,  elsewhere,  people  can  fortify  their  houses, 
and  call  out  and  arm  their  retainers,  and  stand  on  their  guard. 
But  that  here,  in  a  city  like  this,  private  feuds  should  be  carried 
on,  and  men  stabbed  when  unconscious  of  danger,  seems  to  me 
detestable." 

"Of  course  it  isn't  right,"  Matteo  said  carelessly,  "but  I 
don't  know  how  you  are  going  to  put  a  stop  to  it ;  and  after 
all,  our  quarrels  here  only  involve  a  life  or  two,  while  in  other 


38  TWO  SIDES  OF  A  QUESTION. 

countries  nobles  go  to  war  with  each  other,  and  hundreds  of 
lives  of  people  who  have  nothing  to  do  with  the  quarrel  may  be 
sacrificed." 

This  was  a  light  in  which  Francis  had  hardly  looked  upon 
the  matter  before,  and  he  was  obliged  to  own  that  even  private 
assassination,  detestable  as  it  was,  yet  caused  much  less  suffering 
than  feudal  war ;  still,  he  was  not  disposed  entirely  to  give  in  to 
his  friend's  opinion. 

"  That  is  true,  Matteo ;  but  at  tht  same  time,  in  a  war  it  is  fair 
fighting,  while  a  stab  in  the  back  is  a  cowardly  business." 

"  It  is  not  always  fair  fighting,"  Matteo  replied.  "  You  hear 
of  castles  being  surprised  and  the  people  massacred  without  a 
chance  of  resistance ;  of  villages  being  burned,  and  the  people 
butchered  unresistingly.  I  don't  think  there  is  so  much  more 
fairness  one  way  than  the  other.  Polani  knows  he  will  have  to 
be  careful,  and  if  he  likes  he  can  hire  bravos  to  put  Ruggiero 
out  of  the  way,  just  as  Ruggiero  can  do  to  remove  him.  There's 
a  good  deal  to  be  said  for  both  sides  of  the  question." 

Francis  felt  this  was  so,  and  that  although  he  had  an  abhor- 
rence of  the  Venetian  method  of  settling  quarrels  he  saw  that 
as  far  as  the  public  were  concerned,  it  was  really  preferable  to 
the  feudal  method  of  both  parties  calling  out  their  retainers 
and  going  to  war  with  each  other,  especially  as  assassinations 
played  no  inconsiderable  part  in  the  feudal  struggles  of  the 
time, 

On  the  Thursday  night  the  gondola  was  in  waiting  at  the 
agreed  spot.  Francis  had  thought  it  probable  that  the  stranger 
might  this  time  ask  some  questions  as  to  where  they  lived  and 
their  usual  place  of  plying  for  hire,  and  would  endeavor  to  find 
out  as  much  as  he  could  about  them,  as  they  could  not  but 
suspect  that  he  was  engaged  in  some  very  unusual  enterprise. 
He  had  therefore  warned  Giuseppi  to  be  very  careful  in  his 
replies.  He  knew  that  it  was  not  necessary  to  say  more,  for 


QUESTIONED.  39 

Giuseppi  had  plenty  of  shrewdness,  and  would,  he  was  sure,  in- 
vent some  plausible  story  without  the  least  difficulty,  possessing 
as  he  did  plenty  of  the  easy  mendacity  so  general  among  the 
lower  classes  of  the  races  inhabiting  countries  bordering  on  the 
Mediterranean.  Their  fare  came  down  to  the  gondola  a  few  min- 
utes after  the  clock  had  tolled  the  half-hour. 

"  I  see  you  are  punctual,"  he  said,  "  which  is  more  than  most 
of  you  men  are." 

Francis  was  rowing  the  bow-oar,  and  therefore  stood  with 
his  back  to  the  passenger,  and  was  not  likely  to  be  addressed 
by  him,  as  he  would  naturally  turn  to  Giuseppi,  who  stood  close 
behind  him.  As  Francis  had  expected,  as  soon  as  they  were  out 
on  the  lagoon  the  passenger  turned  to  his  companion  and  began 
to  question  him. 

"  I  cannot  see  your  faces,"  he  said ;  "  but  by  your  figures  you 
are  both  young,  are  you  not  ?  " 

"  I  am  but  twenty-two,"  Giuseppi  said,  "  and  my  brother  is  a 
year  younger." 

"  And  what  are  your  names?" 

"  Giovanni  and  Beppo  Morani." 

"  And  is  this  boat  your  own  ?  " 

"  It  is,  signor.  Our  father  died  three  years  ago,  leaving  us  his 
boat." 

"  And  where  do  you  usually  ply  ?  " 

"Anywhere,  signor,  just  as  the  fancy  seizes  us.  Sometimes 
one  place  is  good,  sometimes  another." 

"  And  where  do  you  live  ?  " 

"  We  don't  live  anywhere,  signor.  When  night  comes,  and 
business  is  over,  we  tie  up  the  boat  to  a  post,  wrap  ourselves 
up,  and  go  to  sleep  at  the  bottom.  It  costs  nothing,  and  we 
are  just  as  comfortable  there  as  we  should  be  on  straw  in  a 
room." 

"  Then  you  must  be  saving  money  ?  " 


40  "THE  BOAT  IS   LIKE  OTHERS." 

"Yes,  we  are  laying  money  by.  Some  day,  I  suppose,  we 
shall  marry,  and  our  wives  must  have  homes.  Besides,  some- 
times we  are  lazy  and  don't  work.  One  must  have  some  pleas- 
ure, you  know.  ' 

"  Would  you  like  to  enter  service  ?  " 

"  No,  signer.  We  prefer  being  our  own  masters ;  to  take  a 
fare  or  leave  it  as  we  please." 

"  Your  boat  is  a  very  fast  one.  You  went  at  a  tremendous  rate 
when  the  galley  was  after  us  the  other  night." 

"The  boat  is  like  others,"  Giuseppi  said  carelessly;  "but  most 
men  can  row  fast  when  the  alternative  is  ten  ducats  one  way  or 
a  prison  the  other." 

"  Then  there  would  be  no  place  where  I  could  always  find  you 
in  the  daytime  if  I  wanted  you  ?  " 

"  No,  signer ;  there  would  be  no  saying  where  we  might  be. 
We  have  sometimes  regular  customers,  and  it  would  not  pay  us 
to  disappoint  them,  even  if  you  paid  us  five  times  the  ordinary 
fare ;  but  we  could  always  meet  you  at  night  anywhere,  when  you 
choose  to  appoint." 

"  But  how  can  I  appoint,"  the  passenger  said  irritably,  "  if  I 
don't  know  where  to  find  you  ?  " 

Giuseppi  was  silent  for  a  stroke  or  two. 

"  If  your  excellency  would  write  in  figures  half-past  ten  or 
eleven,  or  whatever  time  we  should  meet  you,  just  at  the  base  of 
the  column  of  the  palace — the  corner  one  on  the  Piazzetta — we 
should  be  sure  to  be  there  sometime  or  other  during  the  day,  and 
would  look  for  it." 

"You  can  read  and  write,  then ?  "  the  passenger  asked. 

"  I  cannot  do  that,  signer,"  Giuseppi  said,  "  but  I  can  make 
out  figures.  That  is  necessary  to  us,  as  how  else  could  we  keep 
f  >me  with  our  customers  ?  We  can  read  the  sun-dials,  as  every- 
o  le  else  can ;  but  as  to  reading  and  writing,  that  is  not  for  poor 
lads  like  us." 


FRANCIS   FOLLOWS   HIS   FARE.  4! 

The  stranger  was  satisfied.  Certainly  every  one  could  read 
the  sun-dials ;  and  the  gondoliers  would,  as  they  said,  under- 
stand his  figures  if  he  wrote  them. 

"Very  well,"  he  said;  "it  is  probable  I  shall  generally  know, 
each  time  I  discharge  you,  when  I  shall  want  you  again ;  but 
should  there  be  any  change,  I  will  make  the  figures  on  the  base 
of  the  column  at  the  corner  of  the  Piazzetta,  and  that  will  mean 
the  hour  at  which  you  are  to  meet  me  that  night  at  the  usual 
place." 

Nothing  more  was  said  until  the  gondola  arrived  at  the  same 
spot  at  which  it  had  landed  the  passenger  on  the  previous  oc- 
casion. 

"  I  shall  be  back  in  about  the  same  time  as  before,"  the  fare 
said  when  he  alighted. 

As  he  strode  away  into  the  darkness  Francis  followed  him. 
He  was  shoeless,  for  at  that  time  the  lower  class  seldom  wore 
any  protection  to  the  feet,  unless  when  going  a  journey  over 
rough  ground.  Among  the  gondoliers  shoes  were  unknown; 
and  Francis  himself  generally  took  his  off,  for  coolness  and  com- 
fort, when  out  for  the  evening  in  his  boat.  He  kept  some  dis- 
tance behind  the  man  he  was  following,  for  as  there  were  no 
hedges  or  inclosures,  he  could  make  out  his  figure  against  the 
sky  at  a  considerable  distance. 

As  Francis  had  expected,  he  did  not  make  towards  the  vil- 
lage, but  kept  along  the  island  at  a  short  distance  from  the 
edge  of  the  water.  Presently  Francis  heard  the  dip  of  oars, 
ind  a  gondola  ran  up  on  the  sands  half-way  between  himself 
and  the  man  he  was  following.  He  threw  himself  down  on 
the  ground.  Two  men  alighted,  and  went  in  the  same  direc- 
tion as  the  one  who  had  gone  ahead.  Francis  made  a  detour, 
so  as  to  avoid  being  noticed  by  the  gondoliers,  and  then  again 
followed. 

After  keeping  more  than  a  quarter  of  a  mile  near  the  water, 


42  THE  PLACE  OF   MEETING. 

the  two  figures  ahead  struck  inshore.  Francis  followed  them, 
and  in  a  few  minutes  they  stopped  at  a  black  mass  rising  above 
the  sand.  He  heard  them  knock,  and  then  a  low  murmur,  as  if 
they  were  answering  some  question  from  within.  Then  they 
entered,  and  a  door  closed. 

He  moved  up  to  the  building ;  it  was  a  hut  of  some  size,  but 
had  a  deserted  appearance.  It  stood  between  two  ridges  of  low 
sand-hills,  and  the  sand  had  drifted  till  it  was  half-way  up  the 
walls.  There  was  no  garden  or  inclosure  round  it,  and  any 
passer-by  would  have  concluded  that  it  was  uninhabited.  The 
shutters  were  closed,  and  no  gleam  of  light  showed  from  within. 
After  stepping  carefully  round  it  Francis  took  his  post  round  the 
angle  close  to  the  door,  and  waited. 

Presently  he  heard  footsteps  approaching — three  knocks  were 
given  on  the  door,  and  a  voice  within  asked,  "  Who  is  there  ?  " 
The  reply  was,  "  One  who  is  in  distress."  The  question  came, 
"  What  ails  you  ?  "  and  the  answer,  "  All  is  wrong  within."  Then 
there  was  a  sound  of  bars  being  withdrawn,  and  the  door  opened 
and  closed  again. 

There  were  four  other  arrivals.  The  same  questions  were 
asked  and  answered  each  time.  Then  some  minutes  elapsed 
without  any  fresh  comers,  and  Francis  thought  that  the  number 
was  probably  complete.  He  lay  down  on  the  sand,  and  with  his 
dagger  began  to  make  a  hole  through  the  wood,  which  was  old 
and  rotten,  and  gave  him  no  difficulty  in  piercing  it.  He  applied 
his  eye  to  the  orifice,  and  saw  that  there  were  some  twelve  men 
seated  round  a  table. 

Of  those  facing  him  he  knew  three  or  four  by  sight ;  all  were 
men  of  good  family.  Two  of  them  belonged  to  the  council,  but 
not  to  the  inner  Council  of  Ten.  One  sitting  at  the  top  of 
the  table  was  speaking;  but  although  Francis  applied  his  ear 
to  the  hole  he  had  made  he  could  hear  but  a  confused  mur- 
mur, and  could  not  catch  the  words.  He  now  rose  cautiously, 


WATCHING  THE  CONSPIRATORS.  43 

scooped  up  the  sand  so  as  to  cover  the  hole  in  the  wall,  and 
swept  a  little  down  over  the  spot  where  he  had  been  lying, 
although  he  had  no  doubt  that  the  breeze  which  would  spring 
up  before  morning  would  soon  drift  the  light  shifting  sand  over 
it  and  obliterate  the  mark  of  his  recumbent  figure.  Then  he 
went  round  to  the  other  side  of  the  hut  and  bored  another  hole, 
so  as  to  obtain  a  view  of  the  faces  of  those  whose  backs  had  be- 
fore been  towards  him. 

One  of  these  was  Ruggiero  Mocenigo.  Another  was  a  stran- 
ger to  Francis,  and  some  difference  in  the  fashion  of  his  gar- 
ments indicated  that  he  was  not  a  Venetian,  but,  Francis  thought, 
a  Hungarian.  The  other  three  were  not  nobles.  One  of  them 
Francis  recognized  as  being  a  man  of  much  influence  among 
the  fishermen  and  sailors.  The  other  two  were  unknown  to 
him. 

As  upwards  of  an  hour  had  been  spent  in  making  the  two 
holes  and  taking  observations,  Francis  thought  it  better  now 
to  make  his  way  back  to  his  boat,  especially  as  it  was  evident 
that  he  would  gain  nothing  by  remaining  longer.  Therefore, 
after  taking  the  same  precautions  as  before  to  conceal  all  signs 
of  his  presence,  he  made  his  way  across  the  sands  back  to  his 
gondola. 

"  Heaven  be  praised  you  are  back  again  ! "  Giuseppi  said  when 
he  heard  his  low  whistle  as  he  came  down  to  the  boat.  "  I 
have  been  in  a  fever  ever  since  I  lost  sight  of  you.  Have  you 
succeeded  ?  " 

"  I  have  found  out  that  there  is  certainly  a  plot  of  some  sort 
being  got  up,  and  I  know  some  of  those  concerned  in  it,  but  I 
could  hear  nothing  that  went  on.  Still  I  have  succeeded  better 
than  I  expected,  and  I  am  well  satisfied  with  the  night's  work." 

"  I  hope  you  won't  come  again,  Messer  Francisco.  In  the 
first  place,  you  may  not  always  have  the  fortune  to  get  away  un- 
seen. In  the  next  place,  it  is  a  dangerous  matter  to  have  to  do 


44  P»OS   AND   CONS.  * 

with  conspiracies,  whichever  side  you  are  on.  The  way  to  live 
long  in  Venice  is  to  make  no  enemies." 

"  Yes,  I  know  that,  Giuseppi,  and  I  haven't  decided  yet  what 
to  do  in  the  matter." 

A  quarter  of  a*  hour  later  their  fare  returned  to  the  boat. 
This  time  they  took  a  long  detour,  and  entering  Venice  by  one 
of  the  many  canals,  reached  the  landing-place  without  adventure. 
The  stranger  handed  Giuseppi  a  ducat. 

"  I  do  not  know  when  I  shall  want  you  again  ;  but  I  will  mark 
the  hour,  as  agreed,  on  the  pillar.  Do  not  fail  to  go  there 
every  afternoon ;  and  even  if  you  don't  see  it,  you  might  as  well 
come  round  here  at  half-past  ten  of  a  night.  I  may  want  you 
suddenly." 

Before  going  to  sleep  that  night  Francis  thought  the  matter 
over  seriously,  and  finally  concluded  that  he  would  have  no  more 
to  do  with  it.  No  doubt,  by  crossing  over  to  San  Nicolo  in  the 
daytime  he  might  be  able  to  loosen  a  plank  at  the  back  of 
the  hut,  or  to  cut  so  large  an  opening  that  he  could  hear  as 
well  as  see  what  was  going  on  within ;  but  supposing  he  dis- 
covered that  a  plot  was  on  hand  in  favour  of  the  enemiae  of 
Venice,  such  as  Padua  or  Hungary,  what  was  he  to  do  next  ? 
At  the  best,  if  he  denounced  it,  and  the  officers  of  the  republic 
surrounded  the  hut  when  the  conspirators  were  gathered  there, 
arrested  them,  and  found  upon  them,  or  in  their  houses,  proofs 
sufficient  to  condemn  them,  his  own  position  would  not  be 
enviable.  He  would  gain,  indeed,  the  gratitude  of  the  re- 
public ;  but  as  for  rewards,  he  had  no  need  of  them.  On  the 
other  hand,  he  would  draw  upon  himself  the  enmity  of  some 
eight  or  ten  important  families  and  all  their  connections  and 
followers,  and  his  life  would  be  placed  in  imminent  danger. 
They  would  be  all  the  more  bitter  against  him,  inasmuch  as  the 
discovery  would  not  have  been  made  by  accident,  but  by  an  act 
of  deliberate  prying  into  matters  which  concerned  him  in  no 


A  WISE  DECISION.  45 

way,  he  not  being  a  citizen  of  the  republic.  So  far  his  action  in 
the  matter  had  been  a  mere  boyish  freak ;  and  now  that  he  saw 
it  was  likely  to  become  an  affair  of  grave  importance,  involving 
the  lives  of  many  persons,  he  determined  to  have  nothing  further 
to  do  with  it. 


CHAPTER    III. 


ON  THE  GRAND   CANAL. 

[IUSEPPI  next  morning  heard  the  announcement  of 
the  determination  of  Francis  to  interfere  no  fur- 
ther in  the  matter  of  the  conspiracy  at  San  Nicolo 
with  immense  satisfaction.  For  the  last  few  nights 
he  had  scarcely  slept,  and  whenever  he  dozed  off,  dreamed 
either  of  being  tortured  in  dungeons,  or  of  being  murdered 
in  his  gondola ;  and  no  money  could  make  up  for  the  con- 
stant terrors  which  assailed  him.  In  his  waking  moments  he 
was  more  anxious  for  his  employer  than  for  himself,  for  it  was 
upon  him  that  the  vengeance  of  the  conspirators  would  fall, 
rather  than  upon  a  young  gondolier,  who  was  only  obeying 
the  orders  of  his  master.  It  was  then  with  unbounded  relief 
that  he  heard  Francis  had  decided  to  go  no  more  out  to  San 
Nicolo. 

During  the  next  few  days  Francis  went  more  frequently 
than  usual  to  the  Piazza  of  St.  Mark,  and  had  no  difficulty 
in  recognizing  there  the  various  persons  he  had  seen  in  the 
hut,  and  in  ascertaining  their  names  and  families.  One  of 
the  citizens  he  had  failed  to  recognize  was  a  large  contractor 
in  the  salt-works  on  the  mainland ;  the  other  was  the  largest 
importer  of  beasts  for  the  supply  of  meat  to  the  markets  of 
the  city.  Francis  was  well  satisfied  with  the  knowledge  he 
had  gained  ;  it  might  never  be  of  any  use  to  him,  but  it  might, 


A   MEASURE   OF   PRECAUTION.  47 

on  the  other  hand,  be  of  importance  when  least  expected.  As 
a  matter  of  precaution  he  drew  up  an  exact  account  of  the 
proceedings  of  the  two  nights  on  the  lagoons,  giving  an  account 
of  the  meeting,  and  the  names  of  the  persons  present,  and 
placed  it  in  a  drawer  in  his  room.  He  told  Giuseppi  what  he 
had  done. 

"  I  do  not  think  there  is  the  least  chance  of  our  ever  being 
recognized,  Giuseppi ;  there  was  not  enough  light  for  the  man 
to  have  made  out  our  features.  Still  there  is  nothing  like  taking 
precautions,  and  if — I  don't  think  it  is  likely,  mind — but  if  any- 
thing should  ever  happen  to  me — if  I  should  be  missing,  for 
example,  and  not  return  by  the  following  morning — you  take 
that  paper  out  of  my  drawer  and  drop  it  into  the  Lion's  Mouth. 
Then,  if  you  are  questioned,  tell  the  whole  story." 

"  But  they  will  never  believe  me,  Messer  Francisco,"  Giuseppi 
said  in  alarm. 

"  They  will  believe  you,  because  it  will  be  a  confirmation  of  my 
etory ;  but  I  don't  think  that  there  is  the  least  chance  of  our 
ever  hearing  anything  further  about  it." 

"  Why  not  denounce  them  at  once  without  putting  your  name 
to  it,"  Giuseppi  said  ;  "  then  they  could  pounce  upon  them  over 
there,  and  find  out  all  about  it  for  themselves  ?  " 

"  I  have  thought  about  it,  Giuseppi,  but  there  is  something 
treacherous  in  secret  denunciation ;  these  men  have  done  me 
no  harm,  and  as  a  foreigner  their  political  schemes  do  not  greatly 
concern  me.  I  should  not  like  to  think  I  had  sent  twelve  men 
to  the  dungeons  and  perhaps  to  death." 

"  I  think  it's  a  pity  you  ever  went  there  at  all,  Messer  Fran- 
cisco." 

"  Well,  perhaps  it  is,  Giuseppi ;  but  I  never  thought  it  would 
turn  out  a  serious  affair  like  this ;  however,  I  do  wish  I  hadn't 
gone  now ;  not  that  I  think  it  really  matters,  or  that  we  shall 
ever  hear  anything  more  of  it.  We  may,  perhaps,  some  day  see 


48  INQUIRIES    SET    ON    FOOT. 

the  result  of  this  conspiracy,  that  is,  if  its  objects  are  such  as  I 
guess  them  to  be,  namely,  to  form  a  party  opposed  to  war  with 
Hungary,  Padua,  or  Genoa." 

For  some  days  after  this  Francis  abstained  from  late  excur- 
sions in  the  gondola.  It  was  improbable  that  he  or  Giusseppi 
would  be  recognized  did  their  late  passenger  meet  them ; 
still  it  was  possible  that  they  might  be  so ;  and  when  he  went 
out  he  sat  quietly  among  the  cushions  while  Giuseppi  rowed, 
as  it  would  be  a  pair-oared  gondola  the  stranger  would  be  look- 
ing for.  He  was  sure  that  the  conspirator  would  feel  uneasy 
when  the  boat  did  not  come  to  the  rendezvous,  especially  when 
they  found  that  on  three  successive  days  figures  were  marked 
as  had  been  arranged  on  the  column  at  the  corner  of  the 
Piazzetta. 

Giuseppi  learned  indeed  a  week  later  that  inquiries  had  been 
made  among  the  gondoliers  for  a  boat  rowed  by  two  brothers, 
Giovanni  and  Beppo ;  and  the  inquirer,  who  was  dressed  as  a 
retainer  of  a  noble  family,  had  offered  five  ducats  reward  for 
information  concerning  it.  No  such  names,  however,  were  down 
upon  the  register  of  gondoliers  licensed  to  ply  for  hire.  Giu- 
seppi learned  that  the  search  had  been  conducted  quietly  but 
vigorously,  and  that  several  young  gondoliers  who  rowed  to- 
gether had  been  seen  and  questioned.  The  general  opinion 
among  the  boatmen  was  that  some  lady  must  have  been  carried 
of,  and  that  her  friends  were  seeking  for  a  clue  as  to  the  spot  to 
which  she  had  been  taken. 

One  evening  Francis  had  been  strolling  on  the  Piazza,  with 
Matteo,  and  had  remained  out  later  than  he  had  done  since  the 
night  of  his  last  visit  to  San  Nicolo.  He  took  his  seat  in  the 
gondola,  and  when  Giuseppi  asked  him  if  he  would  go  home, 
said  he  would  first  take  a  turn  or  two  on  the  Grand  Canal  as  the 
night  was  close  and  sultry.  There  was  no  moon  now,  and  most 
of  the  gondolas  carried  torches.  Giuseppi  was  paddling  quietly, 


FRANCIS  TO   THE  RESCUE.  49 

when  a  pair-oared  gondola  shot  past  them,  and  by  the  light 
of  the  torch  it  carried  Francis  recognized  the  ladies  sitting  in  it 
to  be  Maria  and  Giula  Polani  with  their  duenna ;  two  armed 
retainers  sat  behind  them.  They  were,  Francis  supposed,  return- 
ing from  spending  the  evening  at  the  house  of  some  of  their 
friends.  There  were  but  few  boats  now  passing  along  the 
canal.  Polani's  gondola  was  a  considerable  distance  ahead, 
when  Francis  heard  a  sudden  shout  of,  "  Mind  where  you  are 
going !  "  Then  there  was  a  crash  of  two  gondolas  striking  each 
other  followed  by  an  outburst  of  shouts  and  cries  of  alarm, 
with,  Francis  thought,  the  clash  of  swords. 

"  Row,  Giuseppi ! "  he  exclaimed,  leaping  from  his  seat  and 
catching  up  the  other  oar ;  and  with  swift  and  powerful  strokes 
the  two  lads  drove  the  gondola  towards  the  scene  of  what  was 
either  an  accident  or  an  attempt  at  crime.  They  had  no 
doubt  which  it  was  when  they  arrived  at  the  spot.  A  four-oared 
gondola  lay  alongside  that  of  the  Polanis,  and  the  gondoliers 
with  their  oars,  and  the  two  retainers  with  their  swords,  had 
offered  a  stout  resistance  to  an  armed  party  who  were  trying 
to  board  her  from  the  other  craft,  but  their  resistance  was 
well-nigh  over  by  the  time  Francis  brought  his  gondola  along- 
side. 

One  of  the  retainers  had  fallen  with  a  sword  thrust  through 
his  body,  and  a  gondolier  had  been  knocked  overboard  by  a  blow 
from  an  oar.  The  two  girls  were  standing  up  screaming,  and  the 
surviving  retainer  was  being  borne  backwards  by  three  or  four 
armed  men  who  were  slashing  furiously  at  him. 

"  Quick,  ladies,  jump  into  my  boat ! "  Francis  exclaimed  as  he 
came  alongside,  and,  leaning  over,  he  dragged  them  one  after 
the  other,  into  his  boat  just  as  their  last  defender  fell. 

With  a  fierce  oath  the  leader  of  the  assailants  was  about  to 
spring  into  the  gondola,  when  Francis,  snatching  up  his  oar, 
smote  him  with  all  his  strength  on  the  head  as  he  was  in  the 


JO  •  "TO   THE    PALAZZO   POLANI." 

act  of  springing,  and  he  fell  with  a  heavy  splash  into  the  water 
between  the  boats. 

A  shout  of  alarm  and  rage  rose  from  his  followers,  but  the 
gondolas  were  now  separated,  and  in  another  moment  that  of 
Francis  was  flying  along  the  canal  at  the  top  of  its  speed. 

"  Calm  yourselves,  ladies,"  Francis  said  ;  "  there  is  no  fear  of 
pursuit,  they  will  stop  to  pick  up  the  man  I  knocked  into  the 
canal,  and  by  the  time  they  get  him  on  board  we  shall  be  out  of 
their  reach." 

"What  will  become  of  the  signora?"  the  eldest  girl  asked 
when  they  recovered  a  little  from  their  agitation. 

"  No  harm  will  befall  her,  you  may  be  sure,"  Francis  said  ;  "  it 
was  evidently  an  attempt  to  carry  you  off,  and  now  that  you 
have  escaped  they  will  care  nothing  for  your  duenna.  She 
seemed  to  have  lost  her  head  altogether,  for  as  I  lifted  you  into 
the  boat  she  clung  so  fast  to  your  garments  that  I  fancy  a  portion 
of  them  were  left  in  her  grasp." 

"  Do  you  know  where  to  take  us  ?  "  I  see  you  are  going  in  the 
right  direction  !  "  the  girl  asked. 

"  To  the  Palazzo  Polani,"  Francis  said.  "  I  have  the  honour 
of  being  a  friend  of  your  cousin,  Matteo  Giustiniani,  and  being 
with  him  one  day  when  you  passed  in  your  gondola  he  named 
you  to  me." 

"A  friend  of  Matteo ! "  the  girl  repeated  in  surprise.  "  Pardon 
me,  signer,  I  thought  you  were  two  passing  gondoliers ;  it  was 
so  dark  that  I  could  not  recognize  you :  and,  you  see,  it  is  so 
unusual  to  see  a  gentleman  rowing." 

"  I  am  English,  signora,  and  we  are  fond  of  strong  exercise, 
and  so  after  nightfall,  when  it  cannot  shock  my  friends,  I  often 
take  an  oar  myself." 

"  I  thank  you,  sir,  with  all  my  heart,  for  my  sister  and  my- 
self, for  the  service  you  have  rendered  us.  I  can  hardly  under- 
stand wnat  has  passed,  even  now  it  seems  like  a  dream.  We 


"WE  HAVE   BEEN   ATTACKED,    FATHER.  $1 

were  going  quietly  along  home  when  a  large  dark  gondola 
dashed  out  from  one  of  the  side  canals  and  nearly  ran  us 
down.  Our  gondolier  shouted  to  warn  them,  but  they  ran 
alongside,  and  then  some  men  jumped  on  board,  and  there  was 
a  terrible  fight,  and  every  moment  I  expected  that  the  gondola 
would  have  been  upset ;  Beppo  was  knocked  overboard,  and 
I  saw  old  Nicolini  fall ;  and  then,  just  as  it  seemed  all  over, 
you  appeared  suddenly  by  our  side  and  dragged  us  on  board 
this  boat  before  I  had  time  to  think." 

"  I  am  afraid  I  was  rather  rough,  signora,  but  there  was  no 
time  to  stand  on  ceremony.  Here  is  the  palazzo." 

The  boat  was  brought  up  by  the  side  of  the  steps.  Francis 
leapt  ashore  and  rang  the  bell,  and  then  assisted  the  girls  to 
land.  In  a  minute  the  door  was  thrown  open,  and  two  servi- 
tors with  torches  appeared.  There  was  an  exclamation  of 
astonishment  as  they  saw  the  young  ladies  alone  with  a  strange 
attendant. 

"  I  will  do  myself  the  honour  of  calling  to-morrow  to  inquire 
if  you  are  any  the  worse  for  your  adventure,  signora." 

"  No,  indeed,"  the  eldest  girl  said  ;  "  you  must  come  up  with 
us  and  see  our  father.  We  must  tell  him  what  has  happened  ; 
and  he  will  be  angry  indeed  did  we  surfer  our  rescuer  to  depart 
without  his  having  an  opportunity  of  thanking  him." 

Francis  bowed  and  followed  the  girls  upstairs.  They  entered 
a  large,  very  handsomely-furnished  apartment  where  a  tall  man 
was  sitting  reading. 

"  Why,  girls,"  he  exclaimed  as  he  rose,  "  what  has  happened  ? 
you  look  strangely  excited  ;  where  is  your  duenna ;  and  who  is 
this  young  gentleman  who  accompanies  you  ?  " 

"We  have  been  attacked,  father,  on  our  way  home,"  both  the 
girls  exclaimed. 

"  Attacked! "  Signer  Polani  repeated.  "  Who  has  dared  to 
venture  on  such  an  outrage  ?  " 


52  "  IT   IS  A   SCANDALOUS  OUTRAGE." 

"  We  don't  know,  father,"  Maria  said  ;  "  it  was  a  four-oared 
gondola  that  ran  suddenly  into  us.  We  thought  it  was  an 
accident  till  a  number  of  men,  with  their  swords  drawn,  leaped 
on  board.  Then  Nicolini  and  Francia  drew  their  swords  and 
tried  to  defend  us,  and  Beppo  and  Jacopo  both  fought  bravely 
too  with  their  oars ;  but  Beppo  was  knocked  overboard,  and 
I  am  afraid  Nicolini  and  Francia  are  killed,  and  in  another 
moment  they  would  have  got  at  us,  when  this  young  gentleman 
came  alongside  in  his  gondola  and  dragged  us  on  board,  for  we 
were  too  bewildered  and  frightened  to  do  anything.  One  of  them 
— he  seemed  the  leader  of  the  party— tried  to  jump  on  board, 
but  our  protector  struck  him  a  terrible  blow  with  his  oar 
and  he  fell  into  the  water,  and  then  the  gondola  made  off,  and, 
so  far  as  we  could  see,  they  did  not  chase  us." 

"  It  is  a  scandalous  outrage,  and  I  will  demand  justice  at  the 
hands  of  the  council.  Young  sir,  you  have  laid  me  under  an 
obligation  I  shall  never  forget.  You  have  saved  my  daughter 
from  the  worst  calamity  that  could  befall  her.  Who  is  it  to 
whom  I  am  thus  indebted  ?  " 

"  My  name  is  Francis  Hammond ;  my  father  is  an  English 
merchant  who  has  for  the  last  four  years  established  himself 
here." 

"  I  know  him  well  by  repute,"  Polani  said ;  "  I  trust  I  shall 
know  more  of  him  in  the  future.  But  where  is  your  duenna, 
girls  ?  " 

"  She  remained  behind  in  the  gondola,  father ;  she  seemed  too 
frightened  to  move." 

"The  lady  seemed  to  have  lost  her  head  altogether,"  Francis 
said.  "  As  I  was  lifting  your  daughters  into  my  gondola  in  a 
very  hasty  and  unceremonious  way — for  the  resistance  of  your 
servitors  was  all  but  overcome,  and  there  was  no  time  to  be 
lost — she  held  so  tightly  to  their  robes  that  they  were  rent  in 
her  hands." 


"AND  WELL  YOU   DID   IT."  53 

Signer  Polani  struck  a  gong. 

"Let  a  gondola  be  manned  instantly,"  he  said,  "and  let  six 
ol  you  take  arms  and  go  in  search  of  our  boat ;  let  another 
man  at  once  summon  a  leech,  for  some  of  those  on  board  are,  I 
fear,  grievously  wounded,  if  not  killed." 

But  there  was  no  occasion  to  carry  out  the  order  concerning 
the  boat,  for  before  it  was  ready  to  start  the  missing  gondola 
arrived  at  the  steps,  rowed  by  the  remaining  gondolier.  The 
duenna  was  lifted  out  sobbing  hysterically,  and  the  bodies  of 
the  two  retainers  were  then  landed.  One  was  dead ;  the  other 
expired  a  few  minutes  after  being  brought  ashore. 

"  You  did  not  observe  anything  particular  about  the  gondola 
Maria,  or  you,  Giulia  ?  " 

"  No,  father,  I  saw  no  mark  or  escutcheon  upon  it,  though 
they  might  have  been  there  without  my  noticing  them.  I  was 
too  frightened  to  see  anything ;  it  came  so  suddenly  upon  us." 

"  It  was,  as  far  as  I  noticed,  a  plain  black  gondola,"  Francis 
said.  "  The  men  concerned  in  the  affair  were  all  dressed  in 
dark  clothes,  without  any  distinguishing  badges." 

"  How  was  it  you  came  to  interfere  in  the  fray,  young  gentle- 
man ?  Few  of  our  people  would  have  done  so,  holding  it  to 
be  a  dangerous  thing  for  a  man  to  mix  himself  up  in  a  quarrel 
in  which  he  had  no  concern." 

"  I  should  probably  have  mixed  myself  up  in  it  in  any  case 
when  I  heard  the  cry  of  women,"  Francis  replied  ;  "  but,  in 
truth,  I  recognized  the  signoras  as  their  gondola  passed  mine, 
and  knew  them  to  be  cousins  of  my  friend  Matteo  Giustiniani, 
therefore  when  I  heard  the  outcry  ahead  I  naturally  hastened  up 
to  do  what  I  could  in  the  matter." 

"  And  well  you  did  it,"  Polani  said  heartily.  "  I  trust  that 
the  man  you  felled  into  the  water  is  he  who  is  the  author 
of  this  outrage.  I  do  not  think  I  need  seek  far  for  him.  My 
suspicions  point  very  strongly  in  one  direction,  and  to-morrow 


54  "WE  SEEM    FATED  TO   HAVE    ADVENTURES." 

I  will  lay  the  matter  before  the  council  and  demand  repara- 
tion." 

"And  now,  signor,  if  you  will  permit  me  I  will  take  my 
leave,"  Francis  said;  "the  hour  is  late,  and  the  signoras  will 
require  rest  after  their  fright  and  emotion." 

"  I  will  see  you  to-morrow,  sir.  I  shall  do  myself  the  honour 
of  calling  early  upon  your  father  to  thank  him  for  the  great 
service  you  have  rendered  me." 

Signor  Polani  accompanied  Francis  to  the  steps,  while  two 
servants  held  torches  while  he  took  his  seat  in  the  gondola, 
and  remained  standing  there  until  the  barque  had  shot  away 
beyond  the  circle  of  light. 

"  We  seem  fated  to  have  adventures,  Giuseppi." 

"  We  do  indeed,  Messer  Francisco,  and  this  is  more  to  my 
liking  than  the  last.  We  arrived  just  at  the  nick  of  time; 
another  half-minute  and  those  young  ladies  would  have  been 
carried  off.  That  was  a  rare  blow  you  dealt  their  leader.  I 
fancy  he  never  came  up  again,  and  that  that  is  why  we  got  away 
without  being  chased." 

"  I  am  of  that  opinion  myself,  Giuseppi." 

"  If  that  is  the  case  we  shall  not  have  heard  the  last  of  it, 
Messer  Francisco.  Only  some  one  of  a  powerful  family  would 
venture  upon  so  bold  a  deed  as  to  try  to  carry  off  ladies  of  birth 
on  the  Grand  Canal,  and  you  may  find  that  this  adventure  has 
created  for  you  enemies  not  to  be  despised." 

"  I  can't  help  it  if  it  has,"  Francis  said  carelessly.  On  the 
other  hand,  it  will  gain  for  me  an  influential  friend  in  Signor 
Polani,  who  is  not  only  one  of  the  richest  merchants  of  Venice, 
but  closely  related  to  a  number  of  the  best  families  of  the  city." 

"  His  influence  will  not  protect  you  against  the  point  of  a 
dagger,"  Giuseppi  said.  "  Your  share  in  this  business  cannot 
but  become  public,  and  I  think  that  it  would  be  wise  to  give  up 
our  evening  excursions  at  present." 


FRANCIS  TELLS  HIS    STORY.  55 

"  I  don't  agree  with  you,  Giuseppi.  We  don't  go  about  with 
torches  burning,  so  no  one  who  meets  us  is  likely  to  recognize 
us.  One  gondola  in  the  dark  is  pretty  much  like  another,  and 
however  many  enemies  I  had  I  should  not  be  afraid  of  traversing 
the  canals." 

The  next  morning  at  breakfast-time  Francis  related  to  his 
father  his  adventure  of  the  previous  evening. 

"  It  is  a  mistake,  my  son,  to  mix  yourself  up  in  broils  which 
do  not  concern  you  ;  but  in  the  present  instance  it  may  be  that 
your  adventure  will  turn  out  to  be  advantageous  to  your  pros- 
pects. Signor  Polani  is  one  of  the  most  illustrious  merchants 
of  Venice ;  his  name  is  known  everywhere  in  the  East,  and 
there  is  not  a  port  in  the  Levant  where  his  galleys  do  not 
trade ;  the  friendship  of  such  a  man  cannot  but  be  most  useful 
to  me.  Upon  the  other  hand,  you  will  probably  make  some 
enemies  by  your  interference  with  the  plans  of  some  unscrupu- 
lous young  noble,  and  Venice  is  not  a  healthy  city  for  those  who 
have  powerful  enemies  ;  still  I  think  that  the  advantages  will 
more  than  balance  the  risk. 

"  However,  Francis,  you  must  curb  your  spirit  of  adventure. 
You  are  not  the  son  of  a  baron  or  count,  and  the  winning  of 
honour  and  glory  by  deeds  of  arms  neither  befits  you  nor  would 
be  of  advantage  to  you  in  any  way.  A  trader  of  the  city 
of  London  should  be  distinguished  for  his  probity  and  his 
attention  to  business;  and  methinks  that  ere  long  it  will  be 
well  to  send  you  home  to  take  your  place  in  the  counting-house 
under  the  eye  of  my  partner,  John  Pearson.  Hitherto  I 
have  not  checked  your  love  for  arms  or  your  intercourse  with 
youths  of  far  higher  rank  than  your  own ;  but  I  have  been  for 
some  time  doubting  the  wisdom  of  my  course  in  bringing  you 
out  here  with  me,  and  have  regretted  that  I  did  not  leave 
you  in  good  hands  at  home.  The  events  of  last  night  show 
that  the  time  is  fast  approaching  when  you  can  no  longer  be 


56  A  MERCHANT'S  LIFE. 

considered  a  boy,  and  it  will  be  better  for  you  to  turn  at  once 
into  the  groove  in  which  you  are  to  travel  than  to  continue  a 
mode  of  life  which  will  unfit  you  for  the  career  of  a  city  trader." 

Francis  knew  too  well  his  duty  towards  his  father  to  make 
any  reply,  but  his  heart  sank  at  the  prospect  of  settling  down  in 
the  establishment  in  London.  His  life  there  had  not  been 
an  unpleasant  one,  but  he  knew  that  he  should  find  it  ter- 
ribly dull  after  the  freedom  and  liberty  he  had  enjoyed  in 
Venice.  He  had  never,  however,  even  to  himself,  indulged  the 
idea  that  any  other  career  save  that  of  his  father  could  be  his, 
and  had  regarded  it  as  a  matter  of  course  that  some  day  he 
would  take  his  place  in  the  shop  in  Cheapside. 

Now  that  it  was  suddenly  presented  to  him  as  something 
which  would  shortly  take  place,  a  feeling  of  repugnance  towards 
the  life  came  over  him.  Not  that  he  dreamt  for  a  moment  of 
trying  to  induce  his  father  to  allow  him  to  seek  some  other  call- 
ing. He  had  been  always  taught  to  consider  the  position  of  a 
trader  of  good  standing  of  the  city  of  London  as  one  of  the 
most  desirable  possible.  The  line  between  the  noble  and  the  citi- 
zen was  so  strongly  marked  that  no  one  thought  of  overstepping  it. 

The  citizens  of  London  were  as  proud  of  their  position 
and  as  tenacious  of  their  rights  as  were  the  nobles  themselves. 
They  were  ready  enough  to  take  up  arms  to  defend  their 
privileges  and  to  resist  oppression,  whether  it  came  from  king 
or  noble  ;  but  few  indeed,  even  of  the  wilder  spirits  of  the  city, 
ever  thought  of  taking  to  arms  as  a  profession.  It  was  true 
that  honour  and  rank  were  to  be  gained  by  those  who  rode  in 
the  tram  of  great  nobles  to  the  wars,  but  the  nobles  drew  their 
following  from  their  own  estates,  and  not  from  among  the 
dwellers  in  the  cities  ;  and,  although  the  bodies  of  men-at-arms 
and  archers  furnished  by  the  city  to  the  king  in  his  wars  always 
did  their  duty  stoutly  in  the  field,  they  had  no  opportunity  of 
distinguishing  themselves  singly.  The  deeds  which  attracted 


A    VISITOR.  57 

attention  and  led  to  honour  and  rank  were  performed  by  the 
esquires  and  candidates  for  the  rank  of  knighthood,  who  rode 
behind  the  barons  into  the  thick  of  the  French  chivalry. 

Therefore  Francis  Hammond  had  never  thought  of  taking  to 
the  profession  of  arms  in  his  own  country ;  though,  when  the 
news  arrived  in  Venice  of  desperate  fighting  at  sea  with  the 
Genoese,  he  had  thought  to  himself  that  the  most  glorious  thing 
in  life  must  be  to  command  a  well-manned  galley  as  she  ad- 
vanced to  the  encounter  of  an  enemy  superior  in  numbers.  He 
had  never  dreamed  that  such  an  aspiration  could  ever  be  satisfied 
— it  was  merely  one  of  the  fancies  in  which  lads  so  often  indulge. 
Still,  the  thought  that  he  was  soon  to  return  and  take  his  place 
in  the  shop  in  Chepe  was  exceedingly  unpleasant  to  him. 

Soon  after  breakfast  the  bell  at  the  water-gate  rang  loudly, 
and  a  minute  later  the  servant  entered  with  the  news  that 
Signer  Polani  was  below,  and  begged  an  interview.  Mr.  Ham- 
mond at  once  went  down  to  the  steps  to  receive  his  visitor,  whom 
he  saluted  with  all  ceremony,  and  conducted  upstairs. 

"  I  am  known  to  you  by  name,  no  doubt.  Signer  Hammond, 
as  you  are  to  me,"  the  Venetian  said  when  the  first  formal 
greetings  were  over.  "  I  am  not  a  man  of  ceremony,  nor,  I 
judge,  are  you ;  but  even  if  I  were,  the  present  is  not  an  occa- 
sion for  it.  Your  son  has  doubtless  told  you  of  the  inestimable 
service  which  he  rendered  to  me  last  night,  by  saving  my 
daughters,  or  rather  my  eldest  daughter — for  it  was  doubtless 
she  whom  the  villains  sought — from  being  borne  off  by  one  of 
the  worst  and  most  disreputable  of  the  many  bad  and  disrepu- 
table young  men  of  this  city." 

"  I  am  indeed  glad,  Signer  Polani,  that  my  son  was  able  to 
be  of  service  to  you.  I  have  somewhat  blamed  myself  that  I 
have  let  him  have  his  own  way  so  much,  and  permitted  him  to 
give  himself  up  to  exercises  of  arms,  more  befitting  the  son  of  a 
warlike  noble  than  of  a  peaceful  trader ;  but  the  quickness  and 


58  "A   MASTERY  OF  ARMS   IS   ALWAYS   USEFUL." 

boldness  which  the  mastery  of  arms  gives  was  yesterday  of  ser- 
vice,  and  I  no  longer  regret  the  time  he  has  spent,  since  it  has 
enabled  him  to  be  of  aid  to  the  daughters  of  Signer  Polani." 

"  A  mastery  of  arms  is  always  useful,  whether  a  man  be  a  peace- 
loving  citizen  or  one  who  would  carve  his  way  to  fame  by  means 
of  his  weapons.  We  merchants  of  the  Mediterranean  might 
give  up  our  trade  if  we  were  not  prepared  to  defend  our  ships 
against  the  corsairs  of  Barbary  and  the  pirates  who  haunt  every 
inlet  and  islet  of  the  Levant  now,  as  they  have  ever  done  since 
the  days  of  Rome.  Besides,  it  is  the  duty  of  every  citizen  to 
defend  his  native  city  when  attacked.  And  lastly,  there  are  the 
private  enemies,  that  every  man  who  rises  but  in  the  smallest 
degree  above  his  fellows  is  sure  to  create  for  himself.  Moreover, 
a  training  in  arms,  as  you  say,  gives  readiness  and  quickness,  it 
enables  the  mind  to  remain  calm  and  steadfast  amidst  dangers 
of  all  sorts,  and,  methinks,  it  adds  not  a  little  to  a  man's  dignity 
and  self-respect  to  know  that  he  is  equal,  man  to  man,  to  any  with 
whom  he  may  come  in  contact.  Here  in  Venice  we  are  all  soldiers 
and  sailors,  and  your  son  will  make  no  worse  merchant,  but  rather 
the  better,  for  being  able  to  wield  sword  and  dagger.  Even 
now,"  he  said  with  a  smile,  "  he  has  proved  the  advantage  of 
his  training ;  for,  though  I  say  it  not  boastfully,  Nicholas  Polani 
has  it  in  his  power  to  be  of  some  use  to  his  friends,  and  fore- 
most among  them  he  will  henceforward  count  your  brave  son, 
and,  if  you  will  permit  him,  yourself.  But  you  will,  I  trust, 
excuse  my  paying  you  but  a  short  visit  this  morning,  for  I  am 
on  my  way  to  lay  a  complaint  before  the  council.  I  have  already 
been  round  to  several  of  my  friends,  and  Phillipo  Giustiniani 
and  some  six  others,  nearest  related  to  me,  will  go  with  me, 
being  all  aggrieved  at  this  outrage  to  a  family  nearly  connected. 
I  crave  you  to  permit  me  to  take  your  son  with  me,  in 
order  that  he  may  be  at  hand  if  called  upon  to  say  what  he 
knows  of  the  affair." 


"HOW   OLD   ARE  YOU?"  59 

"  Assuredly  it  is  his  duty  to  go  with  you  if  you  desire  it ; 
although  I  own  I  am  not  sorry  that  he  could  see,  as  he  tells  me, 
no  badge  or  cognizance  which  would  enable  him  to  say  ought 
which  can  lead  to  the  identification  of  those  who  would  have 
abducted  your  daughter.  It  is  but  too  well  known  a  fact  that 
it  is  dangerous  to  make  enemies  in  Venice,  for  even  the  most 
powerful  protection  does  not  avail  against  the  stab  of  a 
dagger." 

"That  is  true  enough,"  the  merchant  said.  " The  frequency 
of  assassinations  is  a  disgrace  to  our  city ;  nor  will  it  ever  be 
put  down  until  some  men  of  high  rank  are  executed,  and  the 
seignory  show  that  they  are  as  jealous  of  the  lives  of  private 
citizens  as  they  are  of  the  honour  and  well-being  of  the 
republic." 

Francis  gladly  threw  aside  his  books  when  he  was  told  that 
Signor  Polani  desired  him  to  accompany  him,  and  was  soon 
seated  by  the  side  of  the  merchant  in  his  gondola. 

"  How  old  are  you,  my  friend  ?  "  the  merchant  asked  him,  as 
the  boat  threaded  the  mazes  of  the  canals. 

"  I  am  just  sixteen,  signer." 

"  No  more !"  the  merchant  said  in  surprise.  "  I  had  taken 
you  for  well-nigh  two  years  older.  I  have  but  just  come  from 
the  Palazzo  Giustiniani,  and  my  young  kinsman,  Matteo,  tells 
me  that  in  the  School  of  Arms  there  are  none  of  our  young 
nobles  who  are  your  match  with  rapier  or  battle-axe." 

"  I  fear,  sir,"  Francis  said  modestly,  "  that  I  have  given  up 
more  time  to  the  study  of  arms  than  befits  the  son  of  a  sober 
trader." 

"  Not  at  all,"  the  Venetian  replied.  "  We  traders  have  to 
defend  our  rights  and  our  liberties,  our  goods  and  our  ships, 
just  as  much  as  the  nobles  have  to  defend  their  privileges  and 
their  castlei*  Here  in  Venice  there  are  no  such  distinctions  of 
rank  as  there  are  elsewhere.  Certain  families  distinguished 


60  "THE  IDEA   IS  A   FOOLISH   ONE." 

among  the  rest  by  their  long  standing,  wealth,  influence,  or  the 
services  they  have  rendered  to  the  state,  are  of  senatorial  rank. 
and  constitute  our  nobility ;  but  there  are  no  titles  among  us. 
We  are  all  citizens  of  the  republic,  with  our  rights  and  privileges, 
which  cannot  be  infringed  even  by  the  most  powerful ;  and  the 
poorest  citizen  has  an  equal  right  to  make  himself  a  proficient 
in  the  arms  which  he  may  be  called  upon  to  wield  in  defence 
of  the  state  as  the  Doge  himself.  In  your  country  also,  I 
believe;  all  men  are  obliged  to  learn  the  use  of  arms,  to  practise 
shooting  at  the  butts,  and  to  make  themselves  efficient,  if  called 
upon  to  take  part  in  the  wars  of  the  country.  And  I  have  heard 
that  at  the  jousts  the  champions  of  the  city  of  London  have  ere 
now  held  their  own  against  those  of  the  court." 

"They  have  done  so,"  Francis  said;  "and  yet,  I  know  not 
why,  it  is  considered  unseemly  for  the  sons  of  well-to-do  citizens 
to  be  too  fond  of  military  exercises." 

"  The  idea  is  a  foolish  one,"  the  Venetian  said  hotly.  "  I 
myself  have  a  score  of  times  defended  my  ships  against  corsairs 
and  pirates,  Genoese,  and  other  enemies.  I  have  fought  against 
the  Greeks,  and  been  forced  to  busy  myself  in  more  than  one 
serious  fray  in  the  streets  of  Constantinople,  Alexandria,  and 
other  ports,  and  have  served  in  the  galleys  of  the  state.  All 
men  who  live  by  trade  must  be  in  favour  of  peace ;  but  they 
must  also  be  prepared  to  defend  their  goods,  and  the  better 
able  they  are  to  do  it  the  more  the  honour  to  them.  But  here 
we  are  at  the  Piazzetta." 

A  group  of  nobles  were  standing  near  the  landing-place, 
and  Signer  Polani  at  once  went  up  to  them  and  introduced 
Francis  to  them  as  the  gentleman  who  had  done  his  daughter 
and  their  kinswoman  such  good  service.  Francis  was  warmly 
thanked  and  congratulated  by  them  all. 

"Will  you  wait  near  the  entrance  ?  "  Signer  Polani  said.  "  I 
see  that  my  young  cousin,  Matteo,  has  accompanied  his  father, 


MATTEO'S   CONGRATULATIONS.  6l 

and  you  will,  no  doubt,  find  enough  to  say  to  each  other  while 
we  are  with  the  council." 

The  gentlemen  entered  the  palace,  and  Matteo,  who  had  re- 
mained respectfully  at  a  short  distance  from  the  seniors,  at  once 
joined  his  friend. 

"Well,  Francis,  I  congratulate  you  heartily,  though  I  feel 
quite  jealous  of  you.  It  was  splendid  to  think  of  your  dashing 
up  in  your  gondola,  and  carrying  off  my  pretty  cousins  from 
the  clutches  of  that  villain,  Ruggiero  Mocenigo,  just  as  he  was 
about  to  lay  his  hands  on  them. " 

"  Are  you  sure  it  was  Ruggiero,  Matteo  ?  " 

"  Oh,  there  can't  be  any  doubt  about  it.  You  know,  he  had 
asked  for  Maria's  hand,  and  when  Polani  refused  him,  had 
gone  off  muttering  threats.  You  know  what  his  character  is, 
he  is  capable  of  any  evil  action ;  besides,  they  say  that  he  has 
dissipated  his  patrimony  in  gaming  and  other  extravagancies 
at  Constantinople,  and  is  deep  in  the  hands  of  the  Jews.  If  he 
could  have  succeeded  in  carrying  off  Maria  it  would  more  than 
have  mended  his  fortunes,  for  she  and  her  sister  are  acknow- 
ledged to  be  the  richest  heiresses  in  Venice.  Oh,  there  is  not 
a  shadow  of  doubt  that  it's  he.  You  won't  hear  me  saying 
anything  against  your  love  of  prowling  about  in  that  gondola 
of  yours,  since  it  has  brought  you  such  a  piece  of  good  fortune 
— for  it  is  a  piece  of  good  fortune,  Francis,  to  have  rendered 
such  a  service  to  Polani,  to  say  nothing  of  all  the  rest  of  us  who 
are  connected  with  his  family.  I  can  tell  you  that  there  are 
scores  of  young  men  of  good  birth  in  Venice  who  would  give 
their  right  hand  to  have  done  what  you  did." 

"  I  should  have  considered  myself  fortunate  to  have  been 
of  service  to  any  girls  threatened  by  violence,  though  they 
had  only  been  fishermen's  daughters, "  Francis  said ;  "  but  I 
am  specially  pleased  because  they  are  relatives  of  yours, 
Matteo." 


62  "IT  WOULD   NOT   TROUBLE   ME  AT   ALL." 

"  To  say  nothing  to  their  being  two  of  the  prettiest  girls  in 
Venice, "  Matteo  added  slyly. 

"That  counts  for  something  too,  no  doubt,"  Francis  said 
laughing,  "though  I  didn't  think  of  it.  I  wonder,"  he  went  on 
gravely,  "whether  that  was  Ruggiero  whom  I  struck  down, 
and  whether  he  came  up  again  to  the  surface.  He  has  very 
powerful  connections,  you  know,  Matteo ;  and  if  I  have 
gained  friends,  I  shall  also  have  gained  enemies  by  the  night's 
work." 

"  That  is  so,"  Matteo  agreed.  "  For  your  sake  I  own  that  I 
hope  that  Ruggiero  is  at  present  at  the  bottom  of  the  canal.  He 
was  certainly  no  credit  to  his  friends  ;  and  although  they  would 
of  course  have  stood  by  him,  I  do  not  think  they  will  feel  at 
heart  in  any  way  displeased  to  know  that  he  will  trouble  them 
no  longer.  But  if  his  men  got  him  out  again,  I  should  say  you 
had  best  be  careful,  for  Ruggiero  is  about  the  last  man  in  Venice 
I  should  care  to  have  as  an  enemy.  However,  we  won't  look  at 
the  unpleasant  side  of  the  matter,  and  will  hope  that  his  career 
has  been  brought  to  a  close." 

"I  don't  know  which  way  to  hope,"  Francis  said  gravely. 
"  He  will  certainly  be  a  dangerous  enemy  if  he  is  alive ;  and 
yet  the  thought  of  having  killed  a  man  troubles  me  much. " 

"  It  would  not  trouble  me  at  all  if  I  were  in  your  place," 
Matteo  said.  "  If  you  had  not  killed  him,  you  may  be  very  sure 
that  he  would  have  killed  you,  and  that  the  deed  would  have 
caused  him  no  compunction  whatever.  It  was  a  fair  fight,  just 
as  if  it  had  been  a  hostile  galley  in  mid-sea ;  and  I  don't  see 
why  the  thought  of  having  rid  Venice  of  one  of  her  worst  citi- 
zens need  trouble  you  in  any  way. " 

"You  see  I  have  been  brought  up  with  rather  different  ideas 
to  yours,  Matteo.  My  father,  as  a  trader,  is  adverse  to  fighting 
of  all  kinds— save,  of  course,  in  defence  of  one's  country ;  and 
although  he  has  not  blamed  me  in  any  way  for  the  part  I  took, 


"OH,    I    HOPE   NOT!"  63 

I  can  see  that  he  is  much  disquieted,  and  indeed  speaks  of 
sending  me  back  to  England  at  once. " 

"Oh,  I  hope  not!"  Matteo  said  earnestly.  "Hitherto  you 
and  I  kave  been  great  friends,  Francis,  but  we  shall  be  more  in 
future.  All  Polani's  friends  will  regard  you  as  one  of  them- 
selves ;  and  I  was  even  thinking,  on  my  way  here,  that  perhaps 
you  and  I  might  enter  the  service  of  the  state  together  and 
get  appointed  to  a  war  galley  in  a  few  years. " 

"My  father's  hair  would  stand  up  at  the  thought,  Matteo; 
though,  for  myself,  I  should  like  nothing  so  well.  However, 
that  could  never  have  been.  Still  I  am  sorry,  indeed,  at  the 
thought  of  leaving  Venice.  I  have  been  very  happy  here,  and 
I  have  made  friends,  and  there  is  always  something  to  do  or 
talk  about;  and  the  life  in  London  would  be  so  dull  in  com- 
parison. But  here  comes  one  of  the  ushers  from  the  palace. " 

The  official  came  up  to  them  and  asked  if  either  of  them  was 
Messer  Francisco  Hammond,  and,  finding  that  he  had  come  to 
the  right  person,  requested  Francis  to  follow  him. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

CARRIED   OFF. 

T  was  with  a  feeling  of  considerable  discomfort  and 
some  awe  that  Francis  Hammond  followed  the 
conductor  to  the  chamber  of  the  Council.  It  was  a 
large  and  stately  apartment.  The  decorations  were 
magnificent,  and  large  pictures  representing  events  in  the  wars 
of  Venice  hung  round  the  walls;  the  ceiling  was  also  superbly 
painted.  The  cornices  were  heavily  gilded,  curtains  of  worked 
tapestry  hung  by  the  windows  and  fell  behind  him  as  he  entered 
the  door. 

At  a  table  of  horse-shoe  shape  eleven  councillors,  clad  in  the 
long  scarlet  robes  trimmed  with  ermine  which  were  the  dis- 
tinguishing dress  of  Venetian  senators,  were  seated — the  doge 
himself  acting  as  president.  On  their  heads  they  wore  black 
velvet  caps,  flat  at  the  top  and  in  shape  somewhat  resembling 
the  flat  Scotch  bonnet.  Signor  Polani  and  his  companions 
were  seated  in  chairs  facing  the  table.  When  Francis  entered 
the  gondolier  was  giving  evidence  as  to  the  attack  upon  his 
boat.  Several  questions  were  asked  him  when  he  had  finished, 
and  he  was  then  told  to  retire.  The  usher  then  brought  Francis 
forward. 

"This  is  Messer  Francisco  Hammond,  "  he  said. 
"  Tell  your  story  your  own  way, "  the  doge  said. 


BEFORE  THE  COUNCIL.  65 

Francis  related  the  story  of  the  attack  on  the  gondola  and 
the  escape  of  the  ladies  in  his  boat. 

"  How  came  you,  a  foreigner  and  a  youth,  to  interfere  in  a 
fray  of  this  kind  ?  "  one  of  the  councillors  asked. 

"  I  did  not  stop  to  think  of  my  being  a  stranger  or  a  youth,  " 
Francis  replied  quietly.  "  I  heard  the  screams  of  women  in 
distress,  and  felt  naturally  bound  to  render  them  what  aid  I 
could. " 

"  Did  you  know  who  the  ladies  were  ?  " 

"  I  knew  them  only  by  sight.  My  friend  Matteo  Giustinlani 
had  pointed  them  out  to  me  on  one  occasion  as  being  the 
daughters  of  Signor  Polani  and  connections  of  his.  Whi»n 
their  gondola  had  passed  mine,  a  few  minutes  previously, 
I  recognized  their  faces  by  the  light  of  the  torches  in  their 
boat. " 

"  Were  the  torches  burning  brightly  ?  "  another  of  the  council 
asked ;  "  because  it  may  be  that  this  attack  was  not  intended 
against  them,  but  against  some  others.  " 

"  The  light  was  bright  enough  for  me  to  recognize  their  faces 
at  a  glance, "  Francis  said,  "  and  also  the  yellow  and  white 
sashes  of  their  gondoliers.  " 

"  Did  you  see  any  badge  or  cognizance  either  on  the  gondola 
or  on  the  persons  of  the  assailants  ?  " 

"  I  did  not, "  Francis  said  ;  "  they  certainly  wore  none.  One 
of  the  torches  in  the  Polani  gondola  had  been  extinguished  in 
the  fray,  but  the  other  was  still  burning,  and,  had  the  gon- 
doliers worn  coloured  sashes  or  other  distinguishing  marks,  I 
should  have  noticed  them.  " 

"  Should  you  recognize,  were  you  to  see  them  again,  any  of 
the  assailants  ?  " 

"  I  should  not,  "  Francis  said  ;  "  they  were  all  masked.  " 

"  You  say  you  struck  down  the  one  who  appeared  to  be  their 
leader  with  an  oar  as  he  was  about  to  leap  into  your  boat. 

—5 


66  "  LET   HIM   ENTER.  " 

How  was  it  the  oar  was  in  your  hand  instead  of  that  of  your 
gondolier  ?  " 

"I  was  myself  rowing,"  Francis  said.  "In  London  rowing 
is  an  amusement  of  which  boys  of  all  classes  are  fond,  and 
since  I  have  been  out  here  with  my  father  I  have  learned  to 
row  a  gondola ,  and  sometimes  when  I  am  out  of  an  evening  I 
take  an  oar  as  well  as  my  gondolier,  enjoying  the  exercise  and 
the  speed  at  which  the  boat  goes  along.  I  was  not  rowing 
when  the  signora's  boat  passed  me,  but  upon  hearing  the 
screams  I  stood  up  and  took  the  second  oar  to  arrive  as  quickly 
as  possible  at  the  spot.  That  was  how  it  was  that  I  had  it  in 
my  hand  when  the  man  was  about  to  leap  into  the  boat. " 

"  Then  there  is  nothing  at  all,  so  far  as  you  know,  to  direct 
your  suspicion  against  anyone  as  the  author  of  this  attack  ?  " 

"  There  was  nothing, "  Francis  said,  "  either  in  the  gondola 
itself  or  in  the  attire  or  persons  of  those  concerned  in  the  fray, 
which  could  give  me  the  slightest  clue  as  to  their  identity.  " 

"  At  anyrate,  young  gentleman, "  the  doge  said,  "  you  appear 
to  have  behaved  with  a  promptness,  presence  of  mind,  and 
courage — for  it  needs  courage  to  interfere  in  a  fray  of  this 
sort — beyond  your  years ;  and  in  the  name  of  the  republic  I 
thank  you  for  having  prevented  the  commission  of  a  grievous 
crime.  You  will  please  to  remain  here  for  the  present.  It  may 
be  that  when  the  person  accused  of  this  crime  appears  before 
us  you  may  be  able  to  recognize  his  figure.  " 

It  was  with  mixed  feelings  that  Francis  heard,  a  minute  or 
two  later,  the  usher  announce  that  Signer  Ruggiero  Mocenigo 
was  without  awaiting  the  pleasure  of  their  excellencies. 

"  Let  him  enter,  "  the  doge  said. 

The  curtains  fell  back  and  Ruggiero  Mocenigo  entered  with 
a  haughty  air.  He  bowed  to  the  council  and  stood  as  if  ex- 
pecting to  be  questioned. 

"  You  are  charged,  Ruggiero  Mocenigo,  "  the  doge  said,  "  with 


THE    ACCUSED.  67 

being  concerned  in  an  attempt  to  carry  off  the  daughters  of 
Signer  Polani,  and  of  taking  part  in  the  killing  of  three  servi- 
tors of  that  gentleman.  " 

"  On  what  grounds  am  I  accused  ?  "  Ruggiero  said  haughtily. 

"  On  the  ground  that  you  are  a  rejected  suitor  for  the  elder 
lady's  hand,  and  that  you  had  uttered  threats  against  her 
father,  who,  so  far  as  he  knows,  has  no  other  enemies.  " 

"This  seems  somewhat  scanty  ground  for  an  accusation  oi 
such  gravity,"  Ruggiero  said  sneeringly.  "  If  every  suitor  who 
grumbles  when  his  offer  is  refused  is  to  be  held  responsible  for 
every  accident  which  may  take  place  in  the  lady's  family, 
methinks  that  the  time  of  this  reverend  and  illustrious  council 
will  be  largely  occupied.  " 

"You  will  remember,"  the  doge  said  sternly,  "that  your 
previous  conduct  gives  good  ground  for  suspicion  against  you. 
You  have  already  been  banished  from  the  state  for  two  years 
for  assassination,  and  such  reports  as  reached  us  of  your  con- 
duct in  Constantinople  during  your  exile  were  the  reverse  of 
satisfactory.  Had  it  not  been  so,  the  prayers  of  your  friends 
that  your  term  of  banishment  might  be  shortened  would  doubt- 
less have  produced  their  effect.  " 

"  At  anyrate, "  Ruggiero  said,  "  I  can  with  little  difficulty 
prove  that  I  had  no  hand  in  any  attempt  upon  Signor  Polani's 
daughters  last  night,  seeing  that  I  had  friends  spending  the 
evening  with  me,  and  that  we  indulged  in  play  until  three 
o'clock  this  morning — an  hour  at  which,  I  should  imagine,  the 
Signoras  Polani  would  scarcely  be  abroad.  " 

"  At  what  time  did  your  friends  assemble  ?  " 

"  At  nine  o'clock,  "  Ruggiero  said.  "  We  met  by  agreement 
in  the  Piazza,  somewhat  before  that  hour  and  proceeded  to- 
gether on  foot  to  my  house.  " 

"  Who  were  your  companions  ?" 

Ruggiero  gave  the  names  of  six  young  men,  all  connections 


gg  PROVING   AN   ALIBI. 

of  his  family,  and  summonses  were  immediately  sent  for  them 
to  attend  before  the  council. 

"  In  the  meantime,  Messer  Francisco  Hammond,  you  can  tell 
us  whether  you  recognize  in  the  accused  one  of  the  assailants 
last  night.  " 

"  I  cannot  recognize  him,  your  excellency,"  Francis  said  ;  "  but 
I  can  say  certainly  that  he  was  not  the  leader  of  the  party  whom 
I  struck  with  my  oar.  The  blow  fell  on  the  temple,  and  as- 
suredly there  would  be  marks  of  such  a  blow  remaining  to-day." 

As  Francis  was  speaking  Ruggiero  looked  at  him  with  a 
cold  piercing  glance  which  expressed  the  reverse  of  gratitude 
for  the  evidence  which  he  was  giving  in  his  favour,  and  some- 
thing like  a  chill  ran  through  him  as  he  resumed  his  seat 
behind  Signer  Polani  and  his  friends. 

There  was  silence  for  a  quarter  of  an  hour.  Occasionally  the 
members  of  the  council  spoke  in  low  tones  to  each  other,  but 
no  word  was  spoken  aloud  until  the  appearance  of  the  first  of 
the  young  men  who  had  been  summoned.  One  after  another 
they  gave  their  evidence,  and  all  were  unanimous  in  declaring 
that  they  had  spent  the  evening  with  Ruggiero  Mocenigo,  and 
that  he  did  not  leave  the  room  from  the  moment  of  his  arrival 
there  soon  after  nine  o'clock,  until  they  left  him  at  two  in  the 
morning. 

"  You  have  heard  my  witnesses, "  Ruggiero  said  when  the 
last  had  given  his  testimony ;  "  and  I  now  ask  your  excellencies 
whether  it  is  right  that  a  gentleman  of  good  family  should  be 
exposed  to  a  villainous  accusation  of  this  kind  on  the  barest 
grounds  of  suspicion  ?  " 

"  You  have  heard  the  evidence  which  has  been  given,  Signer 
Polani, "  the  doge  said ;  "  do  you  withdraw  your  accusation 
against  Signer  Mocenigo  ?  " 

"  I  acknowledge,  your  excellency,  "  Signor  Polani  said,  rising, 
"  that  Ruggiero  Mocenigo  has  proved  that  he  took  no  personal 


"I   FEAR  THAT   HE    WILL   GO    FREE."  69 

part  in  the  affair,  but  I  will  submit  to  you  that  this  in  no  way 
proves  that  he  is  not  the  author  of  the  attempt.  He  would  know 
that  my  first  suspicion  would  fall  upon  him,  and  would  therefore 
naturally  leave  the  matter  to  be  carried  out  by  others,  and  would 
take  precautions  to  enable  him  to  prove,  as  he  has  done,  that  he 
was  not  present.  I  still  maintain  that  the  circumstances  of  the 
case,  his  threats  to  me,  and  the  fact  that  my  daughter  will  natur- 
ally inherit  a  portion  of  what  wealth  I  might  possess,  and  that, 
as  I  know  and  can  prove,  Ruggiero  Mocenigo  has  been  lately  re- 
duced to  borrowing  money  of  the  Jews,  all  point  to  his  being  the 
author  of  this  attempt,  which  would  at  once  satisfy  his  anger 
against  me  for  having  declined  the  honour  of  his  alliance,  and 
repair  his  damaged  fortunes." 

There  were  a  few  words  of  whispered  consultation  between  the 
councillors,  and  the  doge  then  said  : 

"  All  present  will  now  retire  while  the  council  deliberates. 
Our  decision  will  be  made  known  to  the  parties  concerned  in 
due  time." 

On  leaving  the  palace  Signer  Polani  and  his  friends  walked  to- 
gether across  the  Piazza,  discussing  the  turn  of  events. 

"  He  will  escape,"  Polani  said  ;  "  he  has  two  near  relations  on 
the  council,  and  however  strong  our  suspicions  may  be  there  is 
really  no  proof  against  him.  I  fear  that  he  will  go  free.  I  feel 
as  certain  as  ever  that  he  is  the  contriver  of  the  attempt ;  but 
the  precautions  he  has  taken  seem  to  render  it  impossible  to 
bring  the  crime  home  to  him.  However,  it  is  no  use  talking 
about  it  any  more  at  present.  You  will,  I  hope,  accompany  me 
home,  Signor  Francisco,  and  allow  me  to  present  you  formally 
to  my  daughters.  They  were  too  much  agitated  last  night  to  be 
able  to  thank  you  fully  for  the  service  you  had  rendered  them. 
Matteo,  do  you  come  with  us." 

Three  days  passed  and  no  decision  of  the  council  had  been 
announced,  when,  early  in  the  morning,  one  of  the  state  mes- 


70  IN  THE  STATE   PRISON. 

sengers  brought  an  order  that  Francis  should  be  in  readi- 
ness at  nine  o'clock  to  accompany  him.  At  that  hour  a  gondola 
drew  up  at  the  steps.  It  was  a  covered  gondola,  with  hangings, 
which  prevented  any  from  seeing  who  were  within.  Francis 
took  his  seat  by  the  side  of  the  official,  and  the  gondola  started 
at  once. 

"  It  looks  very  much  as  if  I  was  being  taken  as  a  prisoner," 
Francis  said  to  himself;  "however,  that  can  hardly  be,  for  even 
if  Ruggiero  convinced  the  council  that  he  was  wholly  innocent 
of  this  affair,  no  blame  could  fall  on  me,  for  I  neither  accused  nor 
identified  him.  However,  it  is  certainly  towards  the  prisons  we 
are  going." 

The  boat  indeed  was  passing  the  Piazzetta  without  stopping, 
and  turned  down  the  canal  behind  to  the  prisons  in  rear  of  the 
palace.  They  stopped  at  the  water-gate  close  to  the  Bridge  of 
Sighs,  and  Francis  and  his  conductor  entered.  They  proceeded 
along  two  or  three  passages  until  they  came  to  a  door  where  an 
official  was  standing ;  a  word  was  spoken,  and  they  passed  in. 

The  chamber  they  entered  was  bare  and  vaulted,  and  contained 
no  furniture  whatever,  but  at  one  end  was  a  low  stone  slab  upon 
which  something  was  lying  covered  with  a  cloak.  Four  of  the 
members  of  the  council  were  standing  in  a  group  talking  when 
Francis  entered.  Signor  Polani,  with  two  of  his  friends,  stood 
apart  at  one  side  of  the  chamber.  Ruggiero  Mocenigo  also, 
with  two  of  his  companions,  stood  on  the  other  side.  Francis 
thought  that  the  demeanor  of  Ruggiero  was  somewhat  altered 
from  that  which  he  had  assumed  at  the  previous  investigation, 
and  that  he  looked  sullen  and  anxious. 

"  We  have  sent  for  you,  Francisco  Hammond,  in  order  that 
you  may,  if  you  can,  identify  a  body  which  was  found  last  night 
floating  in  the  Grand  Canal." 

One  of  the  officials  stepped  forward  and  removed  the  cloak, 
showing  on  the  stone  slab  the  body  of  a  young  man.  On  the 


THE   BRUISE  ON   THE  TEMPLE.  71 

left  temple  there  was  an  extensive  bruise,  and  the  skin  was 
broken. 

"  Do  you  recognize  that  body  ?  " 

"  I  do  not  recognize  the  face,"  Francis  said,  "  and  do  not  know 
that  I  ever  saw  it  before." 

"  The  wound  upon  the  temple  which  you  see,  is  it  such  as  you 
would  suppose  would  be  caused  by  the  blow  you  struck  an  un- 
known person  while  he  was  engaged  in  attacking  the  gondola  of 
Signor  Polani?  " 

"  I  cannot  say  whether  it  is  such  a  wound  as  would  be  caused 
by  a  blow  with  an  oar,"  Francis  said ;  "  but  it  is  certainly  as 
nearly  as  possible  on  the  spot  where  I  struck  the  man,  just  as  he 
was  leaping,  sword  in  hand,  into  my  gondola." 

"  You  stated  at  your  examination  the  other  day  that  it  was  on 
the  left  temple  you  struck  the  blow." 

"  I  did  so.  I  said  at  once  that  Signor  Ruggiero  Mocenigo 
could  not  have  been  the  man  who  led  the  assailants,  because 
had  he  been  so  he  would  assuredly  have  borne  a  mark  from  the 
blow  on  the  left  temple." 

"  Look  at  the  clothes.  Do  you  see  anything  there  which 
could  lead  you  to  identify  him  with  your  assailant  ?  " 

"  My  assailant  was  dressed  in  dark  clothes  as  this  one  was. 
There  was  but  one  distinguishing  mark  that  I  noticed,  and  this 
is  wanting  here.  The  light  of  the  torch  fell  upon  the  handle 
of  a  dagger  in  his  girdle.  I  saw  it  but  for  a  moment,  but  I 
caught  the  gleam  of  gems ;  it  was  only  a 'passing  impression,  but 
1  could  swear  that  he  carried  a  small  gold  or  yellow  metal  han- 
dled dagger,  and  I  believe  that  it  was  set  with  gems,  but  to  this 
I  should  not  like  to  swear." 

"  Produce  the  dagger  found  upon  the  dead  man,"  one  of  the 
council  said  to  an  official. 

And  the  officer  produced  a  small  dagger  with  a  fine  steel 
blade  and  gold  handle,  thickly  encrusted  with  gems. 


72  FOUND   GUILTY. 

"  Is  this  the  dagger  ?  "  the  senator  asked  Francis. 

"  I  cannot  say  that  it  is  the  dagger,"  Francis  replied  ;  "but  it 
closely  resembles  it  if  it  is  not  the  same." 

"  You  have  no  doubt,  I  suppose,  seeing  that  wound  on  the 
temple,  the  dagger  found  in  the  girdle,  and  the  fact  that  the 
body  has  evidently  only  been  a  few  days  in  the  water,  that  this 
is  the  man  whom  you  struck  down  in  the  fray  on  the  canal  ?  " 

"  No,  signer,  I  have  no  doubt  whatever  that  it  is  the  same  per- 
son." 

"That  will  do,"  the  council  said,  "you  can  retire;  and  we 
thank  you,  in  the  name  of  justice,  for  the  evidence  you  have 
given." 

Francis  was  led  back  to  the  gondola  and  conveyed  to  his 
father's  house.  An  hour  later  Signor  Polani  arrived. 

"  The  matter  is  finished,"  he  said ;  "  I  cannot  say  satisfac- 
torily to  me,  for  the  punishment  is  wholly  inadequate  to  the 
offence,  but  at  any  rate  he  has  not  got  off  altogether  unpunished. 
After  you  left  we  passed  from  the  prison  into  the  palace,  and 
then  the  whole  council  assembled  as  before,  in  the  council 
chamber.  I  may  tell  you  that  the  body  which  was  found  was 
that  of  a  cousin  and  intimate  of  Ruggiero  Mocenigo ;  the  two 
have  been  constantly  together  since  the  return  of  the  latter 
from  Constantinople.  It  was  found  by  inquiry  at  the  house 
of  the  young  man's  father  that  he  left  home  on  the  evening 
upon  which  the  attack  was  committed,  saying  that  he  was  going 
to  the  mainland  and  might  not  be  expected  to  return  for  some 
days. 

"  The  council  took  it  for  granted  from  the  wound  in  his  head, 
and  the  fact  that  a  leech  has  testified  that  the  body  had  probably 
been  in  the  water  about  three  days,  that  he  was  the  man  that 
was  stunned  by  your  blow  and  drowned  in  the  canal.  Ruggiero 
urged  that  the  discovery  in  no  way  affected  him ;  and  that  his 
cousin  had  no  doubt  attempted  to  carry  off  my  daughter  on 


THE  SENTENCE.  73 

his  own  account.  There  was  eventually  a  division  among  the 
council  on  this  point,  but  Maria  was  sent  for,  and  on  being 
questioned  testified  that  the  young  man  had  never  spoken  to 
her,  and  that  indeed  she  did  not  know  him  even  by  sight ;  and 
the  majority  thereupon  came  to  the  conclusion  that  he  could 
only  have  been  acting  as  an  instrument  of  Ruggiero's. 

"  We  were  not  in  the  apartment  while  the  deliberation  was 
going  on,  but  when  we  returned  the  president  announced  that 
although  there  was  no  absolute  proof  of  Ruggiero's  complicity  in 
the  affair,  yet  that,  considering  his  application  for  my  daughter's 
hand,  his  threats  on  my  refusal  to  his  request,  his  previous 
character,  and  his  intimacy  with  his  cousin,  the  council  had  no 
doubt  that  the  attempt  had  been  made  at  his  instigation,  and 
therefore  sentenced  him  to  banishment  from  Venice  and  the 
islands  for  three  years." 

"  I  should  be  better  pleased  if  they  had  sent  him  back  to  Con- 
stantinople, or  one  of  the  islands  of  the  Levant,"  Mr.  Hammond 
said.  "  If  he  is  allowed  to  take  up  his  abode  on  the  mainland 
he  may  be  only  two  or  three  miles  away,  which,  in  the  case  of  a 
man  of  his  description,  is  much  too  near  to  be  pleasant  for  those 
who  have  incurred  his  enmity." 

"  That  is  true,"  Signor  Polani  agreed,  "  and  I  myself  and  my 
friends  are  indignant  that  he  should  not  have  been  banished  to 
a  distance  where  he  at  least  would  have  been  powerless  for 
fresh  mischief.  On  the  other  hand,  his  friends  will  doubtless 
consider  that  he  has  been  hardly  treated.  However,  as  far  as 
my  daughters  are  concerned,  I  will  take  good  care  that  he  shall 
have  no  opportunity  of  repeating  his  attempt ;  for  I  have 
ordered  them,  on  no  account  whatever,  to  be  absent  from  the 
palazzo  after  the  shades  of  evening  begin  to  fall,  unless  I  my- 
self am  with  them,  and  I  shall  increase  the  number  of  armed 
retainers  in  the  house  by  bringing  some  of  my  men  on  shore 
from  a  ship  which  arrived  last  night  in  port.  I  cannot  believe 


«4  FRANCIS   AND  THE   MERCHANT'S   FAMILY. 

that  even  Ruggiero  would  have  the  insolence  to  attempt  to  carry 
them  off  from  the  house  by  force  ;  but  when  one  has  to  deal  with 
a  man  like  this,  one  cannot  take  too  great  precautions." 

"  I  have  already  ordered  my  son,  on  no  account,  to  be  out 
after  nightfall  in  the  streets.  In  his  gondola  I  do  not  mind, 
for  unless  the  gondoliers  wear  badges,  it  is  impossible  to  tell 
one  boat  from  another  after  dark.  Besides,  as  he  tells  me,  his 
boat  is  so  fast  that  he  has  no  fear  whatever  of  being  overtaken, 
even  if  recognized  and  chased.  But  I  shall  not  feel  comfortable 
so  long  as  he  is  here,  and  shall  send  him  back  to  England  on  the 
very  first  occasion  that  offers." 

"  I  trust  that  no  such  occasion  may  occur  just  yet,  Signer 
Hammond.  I  should  be  sorry,  indeed,  for  your  son  to  be 
separated  so  soon  from  us.  We  must  talk  the  matter  over  to- 
gether, and  perhaps  between  us  we  may  hit  on  some  plan  by 
which,  while  he  may  be  out  of  the  reach  of  the  peril  he  has  in- 
curred on  behalf  of  my  family,  he  may  yet  be  neither  wasting  his 
time,  nor  altogether  separated  from  us." 

For  the  next  fortnight  Francis  spent  most  of  his  time  at  the 
Palazzo  Polani.  The  merchant  was  evidently  sincere  in  his 
invitation  to  him  to  make  his  house  his  home ;  and  if  a  day 
passed  without  the  lad  paying  a  visit,  would  chide  him  gently 
for  deserting  them.  He  himself  was  frequently  present  in  the 
balcony,  where  the  four  young  people — for  Matteo  Giustiniani 
was  generally  of  the  party — sat  and  chatted  together,  the  gouv- 
ernante  sitting  austerely  by,  with  at  times  a  strong  expression  of 
disapproval  on  her  countenance  at  their  laughter  and  merriment, 
although — as  her  charges'  father  approved  of  the  intimacy  of  the 
girls  with  their  young  cousin  and  this  English  lad — she  could 
offer  no  open  objections. 

In  the  afternoon  the  party  generally  went  for  a  long  row  in  a 
four-oared  gondola,  always  returning  home  upon  the  approach 
of  evening;. 


THE  DUENNA.  75 

To  Francis  this  time  was  delightful.  He  had  had  no  sister 
of  his  own  ;  and  although  he  had  made  the  acquaintance  of  a 
number  of  lads  in  Venice,  and  had  accompanied  his  father  to 
formal  entertainments  at  the  houses  of  his  friends,  he  had  never 
before  been  intimate  in  any  of  their  families.  The  gaiety  and 
high  spirits  of  the  two  girls  when  they  were  in  the  house 
amused  and  pleased  him,  especially  as  it  was  in  contrast  to  the 
somewhat  stiff  and  dignified  demeanour  which  they  assumed 
when  passing  through  the  frequented  canals  in  the  gondola. 

"  I  do  not  like  that  woman  Castaldi,"  Francis  said  one  even- 
ing as,  after  leaving  the  palazzo,  Giuseppi  rowed  them  towards 
the  Palazzo  Giustiniani,  where  Matteo  was  to  be  landed. 

"  Gouvernantes  are  not  popular  as  a  class  with  young  men," 
Matteo  laughed. 

"  But  seriously,  Matteo,  I  don't  like  her ;  and  I  am  quite  sure, 
that  for  some  reason  or  other,  she  does  not  like  me.  I  have 
seen  her  watching  me  as  a  cat  would  watch  a  mouse  she  is  going 
to  spring  on." 

"  Perhaps  she  has  not  forgiven  you,  Francisco,  for  saving  her 
two  charges,  and  leaving  her  to  the  mercy  of  their  assailants." 

"  I  don't  know,  Matteo.  Her  conduct  appeared  to  me  at  the 
time  to  be  very  strange.  Of  course  she  might  have  been  para- 
lysed with  fright,  but  it  was  certainly  curious  the  way  she 
clung  to  their  dresses,  and  tried  to  prevent  them  from  leaving 
the  boat." 

"  You  don't  really  think,  Francis,  that  she  wanted  them  to  be 
captured  ?  " 

"  I  don't  know  whether  I  should  be  justified  in  saying  as 
much  as  that,  Matteo,  and  I  certainly  should  not  say  so  to 
anyone  else,  but  I  can't  help  thinking  that  such  was  the  case. 
I  don't  like  her  face,  and  I  don't  like  the  woman  ;  she  strikes 
me  as  being  deceitful.  She  certainly  did  try  to  prevent  my 
carrying  the  girls  off,  and  had  not  their  dresses  given  way  in 


^6  SUSPICIONS. 

her  hands  she  would  have  done  so.  Anyhow  it  strikes  me  that 
Ruggiero  must  have  had  some  accomplice  in  the  house.  How 
else  could  he  have  known  of  the  exact  time  at  which  they  would 
be  passing  along  the  Grand  Canal  ?  for  that  the  gondola  was  in 
waiting  to  dash  out  and  surprise  them  there  is  no  doubt. 

"  I  was  asking  Signora  Giulia,  the  other  day,  how  it  was 
they  were  so  late,  for  she  says  that  her  father  never  liked  their 
being  out  after  dusk  in  Venice,  though  at  Corfu  he  did  not  care 
how  late  they  were  upon  the  water.  She  replied  that  she  did 
not  quite  know  how  it  happened.  Her  sister  had  said,  some  time 
before,  that  she  thought  it  was  time  to  be  going,  but  the 
gouvernante — who  was  generally  very  particular— had  said  that 
there  was  no  occasion  to  hurry,  as  their  father  knew  where  they 
were  and  would  not  be  uneasy.  She  thought  the  woman  must 
have  mistaken  the  time,  and  did  not  know  how  late  it  was.  Of 
course  this  proves  nothing.  Still  I  own  that,  putting  all  the 
things  together,  I  have  my  suspicions." 

"  It  is  certainly  curious,  Francisco,  though  I  can  hardly 
believe  it  possible  that  the  woman  could  be  treacherous.  She 
has  been  for  some  years  in  the  service  of  the  family,  and  my 
cousin  has  every  confidence  in  her." 

"  That  may  be,  Matteo  ;  but  Ruggiero  may  have  promised  so 
highly  that  he  may  have  persuaded  her  to  aid  him.  He  could 
have  afforded  to  be  generous  if  he  had  been  successful." 

"  There  is  another  thing,  by  the  bye,  Francisco,  which  did  not 
strike  me  at  the  time ;  but  now  you  speak  of  it,  may  be  another 
link  in  the  chain.  I  was  laughing  at  Maria  about  their 
screaming,  and  saying  what  a  noise  the  three  of  them  must  have 
made,  and  she  said,  '  Oh,  no  !  there  were  only  two  of  us — Giulia 
and  I  screamed  for  aid  at  the  top  of  our  voices ;  but  the  signora 
was  as  quiet  and  brave  as  possible,  and  did  not  utter  a  sound.'  " 

"  That  doesn't  agree,  Matteo,  with  her  being  so  frightened 
as  to  hold  the  girls  tightly  and  almost  prevent  their  escape,  or 


"YOU   HAVE  MADE   ME   VERY   UNCOMFORTABLE."  ^^ 

with  the  row  she  made,  sobbing  and  crying,  when  she  came 
back.  Of  course  there  is  not  enough  to  go  upon  ;  and  I  could 
hardly  venture  to  speak  of  it  to  Signor  Polani,  or  to  accuse  a 
woman  in  whom  he  has  perfect  confidence  of  such  frightful 
treachery  on  such  vague  grounds  of  suspicion.  Still  I  do  sus- 
pect her ;  and  I  hope  when  I  go  away  from  Venice  you  will,  as 
far  as  you  can,  keep  an  eye  upon  her." 

"I  do  not  know  how  to  do  that,"  Matteo  said,  laughing; 
"  but  I  will  tell  my  cousins  that  we  don't  like  her,  and  advise 
them  in  future  not  on  any  account  to  stay  out  after  dusk,  even 
if  she  gives  them  permission  to  do  so  ;  and  if  I  learn  anything 
more  to  justify  our  suspicions,  I  will  tell  my  cousins  what  you 
and  I  think,  though  it  won't  be  a  pleasant  thing  to  do.  How- 
ever, Ruggiero  is  gone  now,  and  I  hope  we  sha'n't  hear  anything 
more  about  him." 

"  I  hope  not,  Matteo ;  but  I  am  sure  he  is  not  the  man  to 
give  up  the  plan  he  has  once  formed  easily,  any  more  than  he 
is  to  forgive  an  injury.  However,  here  we  are  at  your  steps. 
We  will  talk  the  other  matter  over  another  time.  Anyhow  I  am 
glad  I  have  told  you  what  I  thought,  for  it  has  been  worrying 
me.  Now  that  I  find  you  don't  think  my  ideas  about  her 
are  altogether  absurd,  I  will  keep  my  eyes  more  open  than  ever 
in  future.  I  am  convinced  she  is  a  bad  one,  and  I  only  hope 
we  may  be  able  to  prove  it." 

"  You  have  made  me  very  uncomfortable,  Francisco,"  Matteo 
said  as  he  stepped  ashore  ;  "  but  we  will  talk  about  it  again 
to-morrow." 

"  We  shall  meet  at  your  cousin's  in  the  evening.  Before 
tnat  time  we  had  better  both  think  over  whether  we  ought  to 
tell  anyone  our  suspicions,  and  we  can  hold  a  council  in  the 
gondola  on  the  way  back." 

Francis  did  think  the  matter  over  that  night.  He  felt  that 
the  fact  told  him  by  Giulia,  that  the  gouvernante  had  herself  been 


yg  FRANCIS   RELATES   HIS    SUSPICIONS. 

the  means  of  their  staying  out  later  than  usual  on  the  evening 
of  the  attack,  added  great  weight  to  the  vague  suspicions  he 
had  previously  entertained  ;  and  he  determined  to  let  the  matter 
rest  no  longer,  but  that  the  next  day  he  would  speak  to  Signer 
Polani,  even  at  the  risk  of  offending  him  by  his  suspicions  of  a 
person  who  had  been  for  some  years  in  his  confidence.  Accord- 
ingly he  went  in  the  morning  to  the  palazzo,  but  found  that 
bignor  Polani  was  absent,  and  would  not  be  in  until  two  or 
three  o'clock  in  the  afternoon.  He  did  not  see  the  girls,  who, 
he  knew,  were  going  out  to  spend  the  day  with  some  friends. 
At  three  o'clock,  he  returned,  and  found  that  Polani  had  just 
come  in. 

"  Why,  Francisco,"  the  merchant  said  when  he  entered,  "  have 
you  forgotten  that  my  daughters  will  be  out  all  day?  " 

"  No,  signor,  I  have  not  forgotten  that,  but  I  wish  to  speak  to 
you.  I  dare  say  you  will  laugh  at  me,  but  I  hope  you  will  not 
think  me  meddlesome  or  impertinent  for  touching  upon  a  sub- 
ject which  concerns  you  nearly." 

"  I  am  sure  you  will  not  be  meddlesome  or  impertinent, 
Francisco,"  Signor  Polani  said  reassuringly,  for  he  saw  that  the 
lad  was  nervous  and  anxious.  "  Tell  me  what  you  have  to  say, 
and  I  can  promise  you  beforehand  that  whether  I  agree  with 
you  or  not  in  what  you  may  have  to  say,  I  shall  be  in  no  way 
vexed,  for  I  shall  know  you  have  said  it  with  the  best 
intentions." 

"  What  I  have  to  say,  sir,  concerns  the  Signora  Castaldi, 
your  daughters'  gouvernante.  I  know,  sir,  that  you  repose  im- 
plicit confidence  in  her  ;  and  your  judgment,  formed  after  years 
of  intimate  knowledge,  is  hardly  likely  to  be  shaken  by  what 
I  have  to  tell  you.  I  spoke  to  Matteo  about  it,  and,  as  he  is 
somewhat  of  my  opinion,  I  have  decided  that  it  is  at  least  my 
duty  to  tell  you  all  the  circumstances,  and  you  can  then  form 
/*»"**  own  conclusions." 


POLANl'S   VIEW   OF    THE   MATTER.  79 

Francis  then  related  the  facts  known  to  him.  First,  that  the 
assailants  of  the  gondola  must  have  had  accurate  information  as 
to  the  hour  at  which  they  would  come  along ;  secondly,  that  it, 
was  at  the  gouvernante's  suggestion  that  the  return  had 
been  delayed  much  later  than  usual ;  lastly,  that  when  the 
attack  took  place  the  gouvernante  did  not  raise  her  voice  to 
cry  for  assistance,  and  that  she  had  at  the  last  moment  so 
firmly  seized  their  dresses  that  it  was  only  by  tearing  the  girls 
from  her  grasp  that  he  had  been  enabled  to  get  them  into  the 
boat. 

"  There  may  be  nothing  in  all  this,"  he  said  when  he  had 
concluded.  "  But  at  least,  sir,  I  thought  that  it  was  right  you 
should  know  it ;  and  you  will  believe  me  that  it  is  only  anxiety 
as  to  the  safety  of  your  daughters  that  has  led  me  to  speak  to 
you." 

"  Of  that  I  am  quite  sure,"  Signor  Polani  said  cordially,  "  and 
you  were  perfectly  right  in  speaking  to  me.  I  own,  however, 
that  I  do  not  for  a  moment  think  that  the  circumstances  are 
more  than  mere  coincidences.  Signora  Castaldi  has  been  with 
me  for  upwards  of  ten  years  ;  she  has  instructed  and  trained  my 
daughters  entirely  to  my  satisfaction.  I  do  not  say  that  she  is 
everything  that  one  could  wish,  but  then,  no  one  is  perfect,  and 
I  have  every  confidence  in  her  fidelity  and  trustworthiness.  I 
own  that  the  chain  you  have  put  together  is  a  strong  one,  and 
had  she  but  lately  entered  my  service,  and  were  she  a  person 
of  whom  I  knew  but  little,  I  should  attach  great  weight  to  the 
facts,  although  taken  in  themselves  they  do  not  amount  to 
much.  Doubtless  she  saw  that  my  daughters  were  enjoying 
themselves  in  the  society  of  my  friends,  and  in  her  kindness  of 
heart  erred,  as  she  certainly  did  err,  in  allowing  them  to  stay 
longer  than  she  should  have  done. 

"  Then,  as  to  her  not  crying  out  when  attacked,  women 
behave  differently  in  cases  of  danger.  Some  scream  loudly. 


8o  "  I  SHALL  CERTAINLY  NOT  NEGLECT  THE  WARNING." 

others  are  silent,  as  if  paralysed  by  fear.  This  would  seem  to 
have  been  her  case.  Doubtless  she  instinctively  grasped  the 
girls  for  their  protection,  and  in  her  fright  did  not  even  perceive 
that  a  boat  had  come  alongside,  or  know  that  you  were  a  friend 
trying  to  save  them.  That  someone  informed  their  assailants 
of  the  whereabouts  of  my  daughters,  and  the  time  they  were 
coming  home,  is  clear  ;  but  they  might  have  been  seen  going  to 
the  house,  and  a  swift  gondola  have  been  placed  on  the  watch. 
Had  this  boat  started  as  soon  as  they  took  their  seat  in  the 
gondola  on  their  return,  and  hastened  by  the  narrow  canals  to 
the  spot  where  their  accomplices  were  waiting,  they  could  have 
warned  them  in  ample  time  of  the  approach  of  the  gondola  with 
my  daughters. 

"  I  have,  as  you  may  believe,  thought  the  matter  deeply  over, 
for  it  was  evident  to  me  that  the  news  of  my  daughters'  coming 
must  have  reached  their  assailants  beforehand.  I  was  most 
unwilling  to  suspect  treachery  on  the  part  of  any  of  my  house- 
hold, and  came  to  the  conclusion  that  the  warning  was  given 
in  the  way  I  have  suggested.  At  the  same  time,  Francisco,  I 
thank  you  deeply  for  having  mentioned  to  me  the  suspicions 
you  have  formed,  and  although  I  think  that  you  are  wholly 
mistaken,  I  certainly  shall  not  neglect  the  warning,  but  shall 
watch  very  closely  the  conduct  of  my  daughters'  gouvernante, 
and  shall  take  every  precaution  to  put  it  out  of  her  power 
to  play  me  false,  even  while  I  cannot  for  a  moment  believe 
she  would  be  so  base  and  treacherous  as  to  attempt  to 
do  so."  . 

"  In  that  case,  signer,  I  shall  feel  that  my  mission  has  not 
been  unsuccessful,  however  mistaken  I  may  be,  and  I  trust 
sincerely  that  I  am  wholly  wrong.  I  thank  you  much  for  the 
kind  way  in  which  you  have  heard  me  express  suspicions  of  a 
person  in  your  confidence." 

The   gravity  with   which   the  merchant  had   heard   Francis 


"MY   COUSINS    HAVE    DISAPPEARED!"  8l 

story  vanished  immediately  he  left  the  room,  and  a  smile  came 
over  his  face. 

"  Boys  are  boys  all  the  world  over,"  he  said  to  himself,  "  and 
though  my  young  friend  has  almost  the  stature  of  a  man,  as 
well  as  the  quickness  and  courage  of  one,  and  has  plenty  of 
sense  in  other  matters,  he  has  at  once  the  prejudices  and  the 
romantic  ideas  of  a  boy.  Had  Signora  Castaldi  been  young  and 
pretty,  no  idea  that  she  was  treacherous  would  have  ever 
entered  his  mind ;  but  what  young  fellow  yet  ever  liked  a 
gouvernante,  who  sits  by  and  works  at  her  tambour  frame  with 
a  disapproving  expression  on  her  face,  while  he  is  laughing  and 
talking  with  a  girl  of  his  own  age.  I  should  have  felt  the 
same  when  I  was  a  boy ;  still  to  picture  the  poor  signora  as  a 
traitoress  in  the  pay  of  that  villain  Mocenigo  is  too  absurd.  I 
had  the  greatest  difficulty  in  keeping  my  gravity  when  he  was 
unfolding  his  story ;  but  he  is  an  excellent  lad  nevertheless,  a 
true,  honest,  brave  lad,  with  a  little  of  the  bluffness  that  they 
say  all  his  nation  possess,  but  with  a  heart  of  gold,  unless  I  am 
greatly  mistaken." 

At  seven  o'clock,  Francis  was  just  getting  into  his  gondola 
to  go  round  again  to  Signer  Polani's,  when  another  gondola 
came  along  the  canal  at  the  top  of  its  speed,  and  he  recognized 
at  once  the  badge  of  the  Giustiniani.  It  stopped  suddenly  as  it 
came  abreast  of  his  own  boat,  and  Matteo,  in  a  state  of  the  highest 
excitement,  jumped  from  his  own  boat  into  that  of  Francis. 

"  What  is  the  matter,  Matteo  ?     What  has  happened  ?  " 

"  I  have  terrible  news,  Francisco.  My  cousins  have  both 
disappeared." 

"  Disappeared  !  "  Francis  repeated  in  astonishment.  "  How 
have  they  disappeared  ?  " 

"  Their  father  has  just  been  round  to  see  mine ;  he  is  half 
mad  with  grief  and  anger.  You  know  they  had  gone  to  spend 
the  day  at  the  Persanis'." 


82  TREACHERY. 

"  Yes,  yes,"  Francis  exclaimed  ;  "  but  do  go  on,  Matteo.  Tell 
me  all  about  it  quickly." 

"  Well,  it  seems  that  Polani,  for  some  reason  or  other,  thought 
he  would  go  and  fetch  them  himself,  and  at  five  o'clock  he 
arrived  there  in  his  gondola,  only  to  find  that  they  had  left  two 
hours  before.  You  were  right,  Francisco,  it  was  that  beldam 
Castaldi ;  she  went  with  them  there  in  the  morning  and  left 
them  there,  and  was  to  have  come  in  the  gondola  for  them 
at  six.  At  three  o'clock  she  arrived  saying  that  their  father 
had  met  with  a  serious  accident,  having  fallen  down  the  steps 
of  one  of  the  bridges  and  broken  his  leg,  and  that  he  had  sent 
her  to  fetch  them  at  once. 

"Of  course  they  left  with  her  instantly.  Polani  questioned 
the  lackeys,  who  had  aided  them  to  embark.  They  said  that 
the  gondola  was  not  one  of  his  boats,  but  was  apparently  a  hired 
gondola,  with  a  closed  cabin.  The  girls  had  stopped  in  surprise 
as  they  came  down  the  steps,  and  Maria  said,  '  Why,  this  is  not 
our  gondola ! '  Gastaldi  replied,  '  No,  no  ;  our  own  gondolas 
have  both  gone  off  to  find  and  bring  a  leech,  and  as  your  father 
was  urgently  wanting  you,  I  hailed  the  first  passing  boat. 
Make  haste,  dears,  your  father  is  longing  for  you.'  So  they 
got  on  board  at  once,  and  the  gondola  rowed  swiftly  away. 
That  is  all  I  know  about  it,  except  that  the  story  was  a  lie, 
that  their  father  never  sent  for  them,  and  that  up  to  a  quarter 
of  an  hour  ago  they  had  not  reached  home." 


CHAPTER   V. 

FINDING  A  CLUE. 

|HIS  is  awful,  Matteo,"  Francis  said,  when  his 
friend  had  finished  his  story.  "What  is  to  be 
done  ?  " 

"That  is  just  the  thing,  Francisco;  what  is  to 
be  done  ?  My  cousin  has  been  already  to  the  city  magistrates 
to  tell  them  what  has  taken  place,  and  to  request  their  aid  in 
discovering  where  the  girls  have  been  carried  to.  I  believe  that 
he  is  going  to  put  up  a  proclamation,  announcing  that  he  will 
give  a  thousand  ducats  to  whomsoever  will  bring  information 
which  will  enable  him  to  recover  the  girls.  That  will  set  every 
gondolier  on  the  canals  on  the  alert,  and  some  of  them  must 
surely  have  noticed  a  closed  gondola  rowed  by  two  men,  for  at 
this  time  of  year  very  few  gondolas  have  their  covers  on.  It 
seems  to  be  terrible  not  to  be  able  to  do  anything,  so  I  came 
straight  off  to  tell  you." 

"  You  had  better  send  your  gondola  home,  Matteo,  it  may 
be  wanted.  We  will  paddle  out  to  the  lagoon  and  talk  it  over ; 
surely  there  must  be  something  to  be  done,  if  we  could  but 
think  of  it.  This  is  terrible,  indeed,  Matteo,"  he  repeated,  after 
they  had  sat  without  speaking  for  some  minutes.  "  One  feels 
quite  helpless  and  bewildered.  To  think  that  only  yesterday 
evening  we  were  laughing  and  chatting  with  them,  and  that 
now  thy  are  lost  and  in  the  power  of  that  villain  Mocenigo,  who 


§4  WHAT    IS   TO    BE   DONE? 

you  may  be  sure  is  at  the  bottom  of  it.  By  the  way,"  he  said 
suddenly,  "  do  you  know  where  he  has  taken  up  his  abode  ?  " 

"  I  heard  that  he  was  at  Botonda  near  Chioggia  a  week  ago, 
but  whether  he  is  there  still  I  have  not  the  least  idea." 

"  It  seems  to  me  that  the  thing  to  do  is  to  find  him,  and  keep 
him  in  sight.  He  will  probably  have  them  hidden  away  some- 
where, and  will  not  go  near  them  for  some  time,  for  he  will 
know  that  he  will  be  suspected  and  perhaps  watched." 

"  But  why  should  he  not  force  Maria  to  marry  him  at  once  ?  " 
Matteo  said.  "  You  see  when  he  has  once  made  her  his  wife 
he  will  be  safe,  for  my  cousin  would  be  driven  then  to  make 
terms  with  him  for  her  sake." 

"  He  may  try  that,"  Francis  said ;  "  but  he  must  know  that 
Maria  has  plenty  of  spirit,  and  may  refuse  to  marry  him, 
threaten  her  as  he  will.  He  may  think  that  after  she  has  been 
kept  confined  for  some  time  and  finds  that  there  is  no  hope  of 
escape,  except  by  consenting  to  be  his  wife,  she  may  give  way. 
But  in  any  case,  it  seems  to  me  that  the  thing  to  be  done  is  to 
find  Ruggiero,  and  to  watch  his  movements." 

"  I  have  no  doubt  my  cousin  has  already  taken  steps  in  that 
direction,"  Matteo  said,  "  and  I  feel  sure  that  in  this  case  he 
will  receive  the  support  of  every  influential  man  in  Venice 
outside  the  Mocenigo  family  and  their  connections.  The  carry- 
ing off  of  ladies  in  broad  daylight  will  be  regarded  as  a  personal 
injury  in  every  family.  The  last  attempt  was  different;  I  do 
not  say  it  was  not  bad  enough,  but  it  is  not  like  decoying 
girls  from  home  by  a  false  message.  No  one  could  feel  safe  if 
such  a  deed  as  this  were  not  severely  punished." 

"  Let  'us  go  back  again,  Matteo.  It  is  no  use  our  thinking 
of  anything  until  we  know  what  has  really  been  done,  and  you 
are  sure  to  be  able  to  learn  at  home  what  steps  have  been 
taken." 

On  reaching  home  Matteo  learned  that  Polani,  accompanied 


ENERGETIC    MEASURES.  85 

by  two  members  of  the  council,  had  already  started  in  one  of 
the  swiftest  of  the  state  galleys  for  the  mainland.  A  council 
had  been  hastily  summoned,  and  upon  hearing  Polani's  narra- 
tive had  dispatched  two  of  their  number,  with  an  official  of 
the  republic,  to  Botonda.  If  Ruggiero  was  found  to  be  still 
there,  he  was  to  be  kept  a  prisoner  in  the  house  in  which  he 
was  staying  under  the  strictest  watch  ;  if  he  had  left,  orders 
were  to  be  sent  to  every  town  in  the  Venetian  dominions 
on  the  mainland  for  his  arrest  when  discovered,  and  in  that 
case  he  was  to  be  sent  a  prisoner,  strongly  guarded,  to  Venice. 

Other  galleys  had  been  simultaneously  despatched  to  the 
various  ports,  ordering  a  strict  search  of  every  boat  arriving  or 
leaving,  and  directing  a  minute  investigation  to  be  made  as  to 
the  occupants  of  every  boat  that  had  arrived  during  the  evening 
or  night.  The  fact  that  a  thousand  ducats  were  offered  for 
information  which  would  lead  to  the  recovery  of  the  girls, 
was  also  to  be  published  far  and  wide. 

The  news  of  the  abduction  had  spread,  and  the  greatest  indig- 
nation was  excited  in  the  city.  The  sailors  from  the  port  of 
Malamocco  came  over  in  great  numbers.  They  regarded  this 
outrage  on  the  family  of  the  great  merchant  as  almost  a  personal 
insult.  Stones  were  thrown  at  the  windows  of  the  Palazzo 
Mocenigo,  and  an  attack  would  have  been  made  upon  it  had 
not  the  authorities  sent  down  strong  guards  to  protect  it. 
Persons  belonging  to  that  house,  and  the  families  connected 
with  it,  were  assaulted  in  the  streets,  and  all  Venice  was  in  an 
uproar. 

"  There  is  one  comfort,"  Giuseppi  said,  when  he  heard  from 
Francis  what  had  taken  place ,  "  just  at  present  Mocenigo 
will  have  enough  to  think  about  his  own  affairs  without 
troubling  about  you.  I  have  been  in  a  tremble  ever  since 
that  day,  and  have  dreamed  bad  dreams  every  night." 

"You  are  more  nervous  for  me  than  I  am  for  myself,  Giu- 


86  A    CHANGE    OF    PLANS. 

seppi ;  but  I  have  been  careful  too,  for  although  Ruggiero 
himself  was  away  his  friends  are  here,  and  active  too,  as  you 
see  by  this  successful  attempt;  but  I  think  that  at  present 
they  are  likely  to  let  matters  sleep.  Public  opinion  is  greatly 
excited  over  the  affair,  and  as,  if  I  were  found  with  a  stab  in 
my  back,  it  would,  after  what  has  passed,  be  put  down  to  them, 
I  think  they  will  leave  me  alone." 

"I  do  hope,  father,"  Francis  said  at  breakfast  the  next 
morning,  "  that  there  may  be  no  opportunity  of  sending  me 
back  to  England  until  something  is  heard  of  the  Polanis." 

"  I  have  somewhat  changed  my  mind,  Francis,  as  to  that 
matter.  After  what  Signor  Polani  said  the  other  day,  I  fed 
that  it  would  be  foolish  for  me  to  adhere  to  that  plan  ;  with  his 
immense  trade  and  business  connections  he  can  do  almost 
anything  for  you,  and  such  an  introduction  into  business  is  so 
vastly  better  than  you  entering  my  shop  in  the  city,  that 
it  is  best  in  every  way  that  you  should  stay  here  for  the 
present.  Of  course  for  the  time  he  will  be  able  to  think  of 
nothing  but  his  missing  daughters;  but  at  any  rate  you  can 
remain  here  until  he  has  leisure  to  pursue  the  subject,  and  to 
state  further  than  he  did  the  other  day  what  he  proposes  for 
you.  My  own  business  is  a  good  one  for  a  London  trader, 
but  it  is  nothing  by  the  side  of  the  transactions  of  the  merchant 
princes  at  Venice,  among  the  very  first  of  whom  Signor  Polani 
is  reckoned. " 

Francis  was  greatly  pleased  at  his  father's  words.  He 
had,  ever  since  Polani  had  spoken  to  him,  been  pondering 
the  matter  in  his  mind ;  he  knew  that  to  enter  business 
under  his  protection  would  be  one  of  the  best  openings  that 
even  Venice  could  afford  ;  but  his  father  was  slow  to  change 
his  plans,  and  Francis  greatly  feared  that  he  would  adhere  to 
his  original  plan. 

"  I  was  hoping,  father,  that  you  would  think  favourably  of 


"YOUR  WARNING   MADE   ME   UNEASY."  87 

what  Signer  Polani  said,  although,  of  course,  I  kept  silence, 
knowing  that  you  would  do  what  was  best  for  me.  And  now 
I  would  ask  you  if  you  will,  until  this  matter  is  cleared  up, 
excuse  me  from  my  tasks.  I  should  learn  nothing  did  I 
continue  at  them,  for  my  mind  would  be  ever  running  upon 
Signor  Polani 's  daughters,  and  I  should  be  altogether  too  rest- 
less to  apply  myself.  It  seems  to  me,  too,  that  I  might,  as  I 
row  here  and  there  in  my  gondola,  obtain  some  clue  as  to  their 
place  of  concealment." 

"  I  do  not  see  how  you  could  do  that,  Francis,  when  so 
many  others,  far  better  qualified  than  yourself,  will  be  on  the 
look-out.  Still,  as  I  agree  with  you  that  you  are  not  likely  to 
apply  your  mind  diligently  to  your  tasks,  and  as  indeed  you 
will  shortly  be .  giving  them  up  altogether,  I  grant  your 
request." 

Polani  returned  in  the  evening  to  Venice.  Ruggiero  Mocenigo 
had  been  found.  He  professed  great  indignation  at  the  accusa- 
tion brought  against  him  of  being  concerned  in  the  abduction 
of  the  ladies,  and  protested  furiously  when  he  heard  that,  until 
they  were  found,  he  was  to  consider  himself  a  prisoner. 

Signor  Polani  considered  that  his  indignation  was  feigned, 
but  he  had  no  doubt  as  to  the  reality  of  his  anger  at  finding  that 
he  was  to  be  confined  to  his  house  under  a  guard.  Immediately 
after  his  return,  Polani  sent  his  gondola  for  Francis ;  he  was 
pacing  up  and  down  the  room  when  the  lad  arrived. 

"  Your  suspicions  have  turned  out  correct,  as  you  see,  Francis ; 
would  to  Heaven  I  had  acted  upon  them  at  once,  and  then  this 
would  not  have  happened.  It  seemed  to  me  altogether  absurd 
when  you  spoke  to  me,  that  the  woman  I  have  for  years  treated 
as  a  friend  should  thus  betray  me ;  and  yet  your  warning  made 
me  uneasy,  so  much  so,  that  I  set  off  myself  to  fetch  them  home 
at  five  o'clock,  only  to  find  that  I  was  too  late.  I  scarcely  know 
why  I  have  sent  for  you,  Francis,  except  that  as  I  have  found 


88  "THAT   IS   WHAT   I   CALCULATED." 

to  my  cost  that  you  were  more  clear-sighted  in  this  matter  than 
I.  I  want  to  know  what  you  think  now,  and  whether  any  plan 
offering  even  a  chance  of  success  has  occurred  to  you.  That 
they  have  been  carried  off  by  the  friends  of  Mocenigo  I  have  no 
doubt  whatever." 

"I  fear,  signer,"  Francis  said,  "that  there  is  little  hope  of 
my  thinking  of  anything  that  has  not  already  occurred  to  you. 
It  seems  to  me  hardly  likely  that  they  can  be  in  the  city, 
although,  of  course,  they  may  be  confined  in  the  house  of 
Mocenigo's  agents.  Still  they  would  be  sure  that  you  would 
offer  large  rewards  for  their  discovery,  and  would  be  more 
likely  to  take  them  right  away ;  besides,  I  should  think  that  it 
was  Mocenigo's  intention  to  join  them,  wherever  they  may  be, 
as  soon  as  he  learned  that  they  were  in  the  hands  of  his  accom- 
plices. Your  fortunate  discovery  that  they  had  gone,  so  soon 
after  they  had  been  carried  off,  and  your  going  straight  to  him 
armed  with  the  order  of  the  council,  probably  upset  his  calcu- 
lations, for  it  is  likely  enough  that  his  agents  had  not  arrived 
at  the  house,  and  that  he  learned  from  you  for  the  first  time 
that  his  plans  had  succeeded.  Had  you  arrived  two  or  three 
hours  later  you  might  have  found  him  gone." 

"  That  is  what  I  calculated,  Francisco.  His  agents  had  but  four 
hours'  start  of  me,  they  would  no  doubt  carry  the  girls  to  the 
place  of  concealment  chosen,  and  would  then  bear  the  news  to 
him ;  whereas  I,  going  direct  in  one  of  the  state  gondolas,  might 
reach  him  before  they  did,  and  I  feel  assured  that  I  did  so.  It 
was  nigh  midnight  when  I  arrived,  but  he  was  still  up,  and  I 
doubt  not  awaiting  the  arrival  of  the  villains  he  had  employed. 
My  first  step  was  to  set  a  watch  round  the  house,  with  the  order 
to  arrest  any  who  might  come  and  inquire  for  him.  No  one 
however  came. 

"The  news  indeed  of  the  sudden  arrival  of  a  state  galley 
at  that  hour  had  caused  some  excitement  in  the  place,  and  his 


THE   PROCLAMATIONS.  89 

agents  might  well  have  heard  of  it  upon  their  arrival.  I  agree 
with  you  in  thinking  they  are  not  in  the  town,  but  this  makes 
the  search  all  the  more  difficult ;  the  question  is,  what  ought  we 
to  do  next  ?  " 

"  The  reward  that  you  have  offered  will  certainly  bring  you 
news,  signor,  if  any,  save  those  absolutely  concerned,  have 
observed  anything  suspicious ;  but  I  should  send  to  all  the 
fishing  villages  on  the  islets  and  on  the  mainland,  to  publish 
the  news  of  the  reward  you  have  offered ;  beyond  that  I  do 
not  see  that  anything  can  be  done ;  and  I  too  have  thought  of 
nothing  else  since  Matteo  brought  me  the  news  of  their  being 
carried  off.  It  will  be  of  no  use  that  I  can  see  going  among 
the  fishermen  and  questioning  them,  because  with  such  a 
reward  in  view  it  is  certain  that  anyone  who  has  anything  to 
tell  will  come  of  his  own  accord  to  do  so." 

"  I  know  that  is  the  case  already,  Francisco ;  the  authorities 
have  been  busy  all  day  with  the  matter,  and  a  score  of  reports 
as  to  closed  gondolas  being  seen  have  reached  them  ;  but  so  far 
nothing  has  come  of  it.  Many  of  these  gondolas  have  been 
traced  to  their  destinations,  but  in  no  case  was  there  anything 
to  justify  suspicion.  Happily  as  long  as  Mocenigo  is  in  con- 
finement I  feel  that  no  actual  harm  will  happen  to  the  girls ; 
but  the  villain  is  as  crafty  as  a  fox,  and  may  elude  the  vigilance 
of  the  officer  in  charge  of  him.  I  am  going  to  the  council 
presently  to  urge  that  he  should  be  brought  here  as  a  prisoner ; 
but  from  what  I  hear  there  is  little  chance  of  the  request  being 
complied  with ;  his  friends  are  already  declaiming  on  the  injus- 
tice of  a  man  being  treated  as  a  criminal  when  there  is  no 
shadow  of  proof  forthcoming  against  him  ;  and  the  disturbances 
last  night  have  angered  many  who  have  no  great  friendship 
for  him,  but  who  are  indignant  at  the  attack  of  the  populace 
upon  the  house  of  a  noble.  So  you  see  that  there  is  but  faint 
chance  that  they  would  bring  him  hither  a  prisoner." 


go  "I  WILL  DO   MV   BEST." 

"  I  think,  sir,  that  were  I  in  your  case  I  should  put  some 
trusty  men  to  watch  round  the  house  where  he  is  confined ;  so 
that  in  case  he  should  escape  the  vigilance  of  his  guards  they 
might  seize  upon  him.  Everything  depends,  as  you  say,  upon 
his  being  kept  in  durance." 

"  I  will  do  so,  Francisco,  at  once.  I  will  send  to  two  of  my 
officers  at  the  port,  and  tell  them  to  pick  out  a  dozen  men  on 
whom  they  can  rely,  to  proceed  to  Botonda  and  to  watch 
closely  every  one  who  enters  or  leaves  the  house,  without  at 
the  same  time  making  themselves  conspicuous.  At  any  rate 
they  will  he  handy  there  in  case  Mocenigo's  friends  attempt 
to  rescue  him  by  force,  which  might  be  done  with  success, 
for  the  house  he  occupies  stands  at  a  short  distance  out  of  the 
town,  and  the  official  in  charge  of  Mocenigo  has  only  eight  men 
with  him. 

"  Yes,  your  advice  is  excellent,  and  I  will  follow  it  at  once. 
'  Should  any  other  idea  occur  to  you  pray  let  me  know  it 
immediately.  You  saved  my  daughters  once,  and  although 
I  know  there  is  no  reason  why  it  should  be  so,  still  I  feel 
a  sort  of  belief  that  you  may  somehow  be  instrumental  in  their 
again  being  brought  back  to  me." 

"  I  will  do  my  best,  sir,  you  may  depend  upon  it,"  Francis 
said  earnestly.  "  Were  they  my  own  sisters  I  could  not  feel 
^jnore  strongly  interested  in  their  behalf." 

Francis  spent  the  next  week  almost  entirely  in  his  gondola. 
Starting  soon  after  daybreak  with  Giuseppi,  he  would  row 
across  to  the  villages  on  the  mainland  and  make  inquiries  of 
all  sorts  there,  or  would  visit  the  little  groups  of  fishermen's 
huts  built  here  and  there  on  posts  among  the  shallows.  He 
would  scan  every  house  as  he  passed  it,  with  a  vague  hope 
that  a  face  might  appear  at  the  window  or  a  hand  be  waved  for 
assistance.  But  during  all  that  time  he  had  found  nothing 
which  seemed  to  offer  the  slighest  clue,  nor  were  the  inquiries 


THE   DUENNA.  91 

set  on  foot  by  Signer  Polani  more  successful.  Every  piece  of 
information  which  seemed  to  bear  in  the  slighest  degree  upon 
the  affair  was  investigated,  but  in  no  case  was  it  found  of  the 
slighest  utility. 

One  evening  he  was  returning  late,  tired  by  the  long  day's 
work,  and  discouraged  with  his  utter  want  of  success,  when, 
just  as  he  had  passed  under  the  Ponto  Maggiore,  the  lights  on 
the  bridge  fell  on  the  faces  of  the  sitters  in  a  gondola  coming 
the  other  way.  They  were  a  man  and  a  woman.  The  latter 
was  closely  veiled.  But  the  night  was  close  and  oppressive, 
and  just  at  the  moment  when  Francis'  eyes  fell  upon  her  she 
lifted  her  veil  for  air.  Francis  recognized  her  instantly.  For 
a  moment  he  stopped  rowing,  and  then  dipped  his  oar  in  as 
before.  Directly  the  other  gondola  passed  through  the  bridge 
behind  him,  and  his  own  had  got  beyond  the  circle  of  light,  he 
swept  it  suddenly  round.  Giuseppi  gave  an  exclamation  of 
surprise. 

"  Giuseppi,  we  have  luck  at  last.  Did  you  notice  that  gondola 
we  met  just  now?  The  woman  sitting  in  it  is  Castaldi,  the 
woman  who  betrayed  the  signoras." 

"  What  shall  we  do,  Messer  Francisco  ?  "  Giuseppi,  who  had 
become  almost  as  interested  in  the  search  as  his  master,  asked. 
"  There  was  only  a  single  gondolier  and  one  other  man.  If  we 
take  them  by  surprise  we  can  master  them." 
•  "  That  will  not  do,  Giuseppi.  The  woman  would  refuse  to 
speak,  and  though  they  could  force  her  to  do  so  in  the 
dungeons,  the  girls  would  be  sure  to  be  removed  the  moment 
it  was  known  she  was  captured.  We  must  follow  them  and  see 
where  they  go  to.  Let  us  get  well  behind  them  so  that  we  can 
just  make  them  out  in  the  distance.  If  they  have  a  suspicion 
that  they  are  being  followed  they  will  land  her  at  the  first  steps 
and  slip  away  from  us." 

"They  are   landing   now,   signor,"  Giuseppi    exclaimed   di- 


92  "  KEEP   VOUR    EYE   UPON    IT." 

rectly  afterwards.  "  Shall  we  push  on  and  overtake  them  on 
shore  ?  " 

"  It  is  too  late,  Giuseppi.  They  are  a  hundred  and  fifty 
yards  away,  and  would  have'  mixed  in  the  crowd  and  be  lost 
long  before  we  should  get  ashore  and  follow  them.  Row  on 
fast,  but  not  over  towards  that  side.  If  the  gondola  moves  off 
we  will  make  straight  for  the  steps  and  try  to  follow  them, 
though  our  chance  of  hitting  upon  them  in  the  narrow  lanes 
and  turnings  is  slight  indeed.  But  if,  as  I  hope,  the  gondola 
stops  at  the  steps,  most  likely  they  will  return  to  it  in  time. 
So  we  will  row  in  to  the  bank  a  hundred  yards  farther  up  the 
canal  and  wait." 

The  persons  who  had  been  seen  in  the  gondola  had  disap- 
peared when  they  came  abreast  of  it,  and  the  gondolier  had 
seated  himself  in  the  boat  with  the  evident  intention  of  waiting. 
Francis  steered  his  gondola  at  a  distance  of  a  few  yards  from 
it  as  he  shot  past,  but  did  not  abate  his  speed,  and  continued 
to  row  till  they  were  three  or  four  hundred  yards  farther  up 
the  canal.  Then  he  turned  the  gondola  and  paddled  noiselessly 
back  until  he  could  see  the  outline  of  the  boat  he  was  watching. 
An  hour  elapsed  before  any  movement  was  visible.  Then 
Francis  heard  the  sound  of  footsteps,  and  could  just  make  out 
the  figures  of  persons  descending  the  steps  and  entering  the 
gondola.  Then  the  boat  moved  out  into  the  middle  of  the 
canal,  where  a  few  boats  were  still  passing  to  and  fro.  Francis 
kept  his  gondola  close  by  the  bank  so  as  to  be  in  the  deep  shade 
of  the  houses.  The  boat  they  were  following  again  passed 
under  the  Ponto  Maggiore,  and  for  some  distance  followed  the 
line  of  the  Grand  Canal. 

"  Keep  your  eye  upon  it,  Giuseppi.  It  is  sure  to  turn  off  one 
way  or  the  other  soon,  and  if  it  is  too  far  ahead  of  us  when  it 
does  so  then  it  may  give  us  the  slip  altogether." 

But  the  gondola  continued  its  course  the  whole  length  of  the 


A   NARROW   ESCAPE.  93 

canal  and  then  straight  on  until,  nearly  opposite  St.  Mark's, 
it  passed  close  to  a  larger  gondola  with  four  rowers  coming 
slowly  in  the  other  direction,  and  it  seemed  to  Francis  that  the 
two  boats  paused  when  opposite  each  other,  and  that  a  few 
words  were  exchanged.  Then  the  boat  they  were  watching 
turned  out  straight  into  the  lagoon.  It  was  rather  lighter 
here  than  in  the  canal  bordered  on  each  side  by  houses,  and 
Francis  did  not  turn  the  head  of  his  gondola  for  a  minute  or 
two. 

"  It  will  be  very  difficult  to  keep  them  in  sight  out  here 
without  their  making  us  out,"  Giuseppi  said. 

"Yes,  and  it  is  likely  enough  that  they  are  only  going  out 
there  in  order  that  they  may  be  quite  sure  that  they  are  not 
followed  before  striking  off  to  the  place  they  want  to  go  to. 
They  may  possibly  have  made  us  out,  and  guess  that  we  are 
tracking  them.  They  would  be  sure  to  keep  their  eyes  and 
ears  open." 

"  I  can  only  just  make  them  out  now,  Messer  Francisco,  and 
as  we  shall  have  the  buildings  behind  us  they  will  not  be  able 
to  see  us  as  well  as  we  can  see  them.  I  think  we  can  go 
now." 

"  We  will  risk  it  at  any  rate,  Giuseppi.  I  have  lost  sight 
of  them  already,  and  it  will  never  do  to  let  them  give  us  the 
slip." 

They  dipped  their  oars  in  the  water,  and  the  gondola  started 
out  from  the  shore.  They  had  not  gone  fifty  strokes  when 
they  heard  the  sound  of  oars  close  at  hand. 

"  To  the  right,  Giuseppi,  hard  !"  Francis  cried  as  he  glanced 
over  his  shoulder. 

A  sweep  with  both  oars  brought  the  gondola's  head  in  a 
moment  almost  at  right  angles  to  the  course  that  she  had  been 
pursuing,  and  the  next  sent  her  dancing  on  a  new  line  just  as 
a  four-oared  gondola  swept  down  upon  them,  missing  their  stern 


94  BAFFLED. 

by  only  three  or  four  feet.  Had  they  been  less  quick  in  turn- 
ing the  iron  prow  would  have  cut  right  through  their  light 
boat. 

Giuseppi  burst  into  a  torrent  of  vituperation  at  the  careless- 
ness of  the  gondoliers  who  had  so  nearly  run  into  them,  but 
Francis  silenced  him  at  once. 

"  Row,  Giuseppi,  it  was  done  on  purpose.  It  is  the  gondola 
the  other  spoke  to." 

Their  assailant  was  turning  also,  and  in  a  few  seconds  was 
in  pursuit.  Francis  understood  it  now.  The  gondola  they  had 
been  following  had  noticed  them,  and  had  informed  their  friends 
waiting  off  St.  Mark's  of  the  fact.  Intent  upon  watching  the 
receding  boat,  he  had  paid  no  further  attention  to  the  four- 
oared  craft,  which  had  made  a  turn,  and  lay  waiting  in  readi- 
ness to  run  them  down  should  they  follow  in  the  track  of  the 
other  boat. 

Francis  soon  saw  that  the  craft  behind  them  was  a  fast  one, 
and  rowed  by  men  who  were  first-rate  gondoliers.  Fast  as  his 
own  boat  was  flying  through  the  water,  the  other  gained  upon 
them  steadily.  He  was  heading  now  for  the  entrance  to  the 
Grand  Canal,  for  their  pursuer,  in  the  wider  sweep  he  had 
made  in  turning,  was  nearer  to  the  Piazza  than  they  were,  and 
cut  off  their  flight  in  that  direction. 

"Keep  cool,  Giuseppi,"  he  said,  "they  will  be  up  to  us  in  a 
minute  or  two.  When  their  bow  is  within  a  yard  or  two  of  us, 
and  I  say,  '  Now !'  sweep  her  head  straight  round  towards  the 
lagoon.  We  can  turn  quicker  than  they  can.  Then  let  them 
gain  upon  us  and  we  will  then  turn  again." 

The  gondola  in  pursuit  came  up  hand  over  hand.  Francis 
kept  looking  over  his  shoulder,  and  when  he  saw  its  bow  gliding 
up  within  a  few  feet  of  her  stern  he  exclaimed  "  Now !"  and 
with  a  sudden  turn  the  gondola  again  swept  out  seaward. 

Their  pursuer  rushed  on  for  a  length  or  two  before  she  could 


SAFE  on   SHORE.  95 

sweep  round,  while  a  volley  of  imprecations  and  threats  burst 
from  three  men  who  were  standing  up  in  her  with  drawn 
swords.  Francis  and  Giuseppi  were  now  rowing  less  strongly 
and  gaining  breath  for  their  next  effort.  When  the  gondola 
again  came  up  to  them  they  swept  round  to  the  left,  and  as 
their  pursuers  followed  they  headed  for  the  Grand  Canal. 

"  Make  for  the  steps  of  Santa  Maria  church.  We  will 
jump  out  there  and  trust  to  our  feet." 

The  two  lads  put  out  all  their  strength  now.  They  were 
some  three  boats'  lengths  ahead  before  their  pursuers  were 
fairly  on  their  track.  They  were  now  rowing  for  life,  for  they 
knew  that  they  could  hardly  succeed  in  doubling  again,  and 
that  the  gondola  behind  them  was  so  well  handled  that  they 
could  not  gain  on  it  at  the  turnings  were  they  to  venture  into 
the  narrow  channels.  It  was  a  question  of  speed  alone,  and  so 
hard  did  they  row  that  the  gondola  in  pursuit  gained  but  slowly 
on  them,  and  they  were  still  two  lengths  ahead  when  they 
dashed  up  to  the  steps  of  the  church. 

Simultaneously  they  sprang  on  shore,  leaped  up  the  steps,  and 
dashed  off  at  the  top  of  their  speed,  hearing,  as  they  did  so,  a 
crash  as  the  gondola  ran  into  their  light  craft.  There  was  a 
moment's  delay,  as  the  men  had  to  step  across  their  boat  to 
gain  the  shore,  and  they  were  fifty  yards  ahead  before  they 
heard  the  sound  of  their  pursuers'  feet  on  the  stone  steps ;  but 
they  were  lightly  clad  and  shoeless,  and  carried  nothing  to 
impede  their  movements,  and  they  had  therefore  little  fear  of 
being  overtaken.  After  racing  on  at  the  top  of  their  speed  for 
a  few  minutes  they  stopped  and  listened.  The  sound  of  their 
pursuers'  footsteps  died  away  in  the  distance ;  and,  after  taking 
a  few  turns  to  put  them  off  their  track,  they  pursued  their  way 
at  a  more  leisurely  pace. 

"They  have  smashed  the  gondola,"  Giuseppi  said  with  a  sob, 
for  he  was  very  proud  of  the  light  craft. 


96  ON    THE   TRACK    AT    LAST. 

"Never  mind  the  gondola,"  Francis  said  cheerfully;  "  if  they 
had  smashed  a  hundred  it  would  not  matter." 

"  But  the  woman  has  got  away  and  we  have  learned  nothing," 
Giuseppi  said,  surprised  at  his  master's  cheerfulness. 

"  I  think  we  have  learned  something,  Giuseppi ;  I  think  we 
have  learned  everything.  I  have  no  doubt  the  girls  are  confined 
in  that  hut  on  San  Nicolo.  I  wonder  I  never  thought  of  it 
before ;  but  I  made  so  sure  that  they  would  be  taken  somewhere 
close  to  where  Mocenigo  was  staying  that  it  never  occurred  to 
me  that  they  might  hide  them  out  there.  I  ought  to  have  known 
that  that  was  just  the  thing  they  would  do,  for  while  the  search 
would  be  keen  among  the  islets  near  the  land,  and  the  villages 
there,  no  one  would  think  of  looking  for  them  on  the  seaward 
islands.  I  have  no  doubt  they  are  there  now.  That  woman 
came  ashore  to  report  to  his  friends,  and  that  four-oared  boat 
which  has  chased  us  was  in  waiting  off  St.  Mark's  to  attack 
any  boat  that  might  be  following  them.  We  will  go  to  Signor 
Polani  at  once  and  tell  him  what  has  happened.  I  suppose  it 
is  about  one  o'clock  now,  but  I  have  not  noticed  the  hour ;  it 
was  past  eleven  before  we  first  met  the  gondola,  and  we  must 
have  been  a  good  deal  more  than  an  hour  lying  there  waiting 
for  them." 

A  quarter  of  an  hour's  walking  took  them  to  the  palazzo  of 
Polani.  They  rang  twice  at  the  bell  at  the  land  entrance  before 
a  face  appeared  at  the  little  window  of  the  door  and  asked  who 
Was  there. 

"  I  wish  to  see  Signor  Polani  at  once,"  Francis  said. 

"  The  signor  retired  to  rest  an  hour  ago,"  the  man  said. 

"Never  mind  that,"  Francis  replied.  "I  am  Francis  Ham- 
mond, and  I  have  important  news  to  give  him." 

As  soon  as  the  servitor  recognized  Francis'  voice  he  unbarred 
the  door. 

"  Have  you  news  of  the  ladies?"  he  asked  eagerly. 


GOOD   NEWS.  97 

"  I  have  news  which  will,  I  hope,  lead  to  something,"  Francis 
replied. 

A  moment  later  the  voice  of  Polani  himself,  who,  although 
he  had  retired  to  his  room,  had  not  yet  gone  to  sleep,  was 
heard  at  the  top  of  the  grand  stairs  inquiring  who  it  was  who 
had  come  so  late ;  for  although  men  had  been  arriving  all  day 
with  reports  from  the  various  islands  and  villages,  he  thought 
that  no  one  would  come  at  this  hour  unless  his  news  were 
important.  Francis  at  once  answered  : 

"  It  is  I,  Signer  Polani,  Francis  Hammond.  I  have  news 
which  I  think  may  be  of  importance,  although  I  may  be  mis- 
taken; still,  it  is  certainly  news  that  may  lead  to  some- 
thing." 

The  merchant  hurried  down. 

"  What  is  it,  Francisco  ?    What  have  you  learned  ?" 

"  I  have  seen  the  woman  Castaldi,  and  have  followed  her. 
I  do  not  know  for  certain  where  she  was  going,  for  we  have 
been  chased  by  a  large  gondola  and  have  narrowly  escaped 
with  our  lives ;  still  I  have  a  clue  to  their  whereabouts." 

Francis  then  related  the  events  of  the  evening. 

"  But  why  did  you  not  run  into  the  boat  and  give  the  alarm 
at  once,  Francisco?  Any  gondolas  passing  would  have  given 
their  assistance  when  you  declared  who  she  was,  for  the  affair 
is  the  talk  of  the  city.  If  that  woman  were  in  our  power  we 
should  soon  find  means  to  make  her  speak." 

"  Yes,  signer ;  but  the  moment  she  was  known  to  be  in  your 
power  you  may  be  sure  that  they  would  remove  your  daughters 
from  the  place  where  they  have  been  hiding  them.  I  thought, 
therefore,  the  best  plan  would  be  to  track  them.  No  doubt 
we  should  have  succeeded  in  doing  so  had  it  not  been  for  the 
attack  upon  us  by  another  gondola." 

"  You  are  right,  no  doubt,  Francisco.  Still,  it  is  unfortunate, 
for  I  do  not  see  that  we  are  now  any  nearer  than  we  were 


98  SAN   NICOLO. 

before,  except  that  we  know  that  this  woman  is  in  the  habit  of 
coming  into  the  city." 

"  I  think  we  are  nearer,  sir,  for  I  had  an  adventure  some 
time  ago  that  may  afford  a  clue  to  their  hiding-place." 

He  then  told  the  merchant  how  he  had  one  evening  taken  a 
man  out  to  San  Nicolo,  and  had  discovered  that  a  hut  in  that 
island  was  used  as  a  meeting-place  by  various  persons,  among 
whom  was  Ruggiero  Mocenigo. 

"  I  might  have  thought  of  the  place  before,  signor ;  but,  in 
fact,  it  never  entered  my  mind.  From  the  first  we  considered 
it  so  certain  that  the  men  who  carried  off  your  daughters  would 
take  them  to  some  hiding-place  where  Mocenigo  could  speedily 
join  them  that  San  Nicolo  never  entered  my  mind.  I  own 
that  it  was  very  stupid,  for  it  seems  now  to  me  that  the 
natural  thing  for  them  to  do  would  be  to  take  them  in  the 
very  opposite  direction  to  that  in  which  the  search  for  them 
would  be  made.'" 

The  story  had  been  frequently  interrupted  by  exclamations 
of  surprise  by  Polani.  At  its  conclusion  he  laid  his  hand  on 
Francis'  shoulder. 

"  My  dear  boy,"  he  said,  "  how  can  I  thank  you !  You  seem 
to  me  to  be  born  to  be  the  preserver  of  my  daughters.  I 
cannot  doubt  that  your  suspicion  is  correct,  and  that  they  are 
confined  in  this  hut  at  San  Nicolo.  How  fortunate  that  you 
did  not  denounce  this  conspiracy — for  conspiracy  no  doubt  it 
is— that  you  discovered,  for,  had  you  done  so,  some  other  place 
would  have  been  selected  for  the  girls'  prison." 

"  I  would  not  be  too  sanguine,  sir.  The  girls  may  not  be  in 
this  hut,  still  we  may  come  on  some  clue  there  which  may  lead 
us  to  them ;  if  not,  we  will  search  the  islands  on  that  side  as 
closely  as  we  have  done  those  on  the  mainland." 

"Now,  shall  I  send  for  the  gondoliers  and  set  out  at  once? 
There  are  ten  or  twelve  men  in  the  house,  and  it  is  hardly 


FRANCIS   SKETCHES   A   PLAN.  99 

likely  that  they  will  place  a  guard  over  them  of  anything  like 
this  strength,  as  of  course  they  will  be  anxious  to  avoid  obser- 
vation by  the  islanders." 

"  I  do  not  think  I  would  do  anything  to-night,  sir,"  Francis 
said ;  "  the  gondola  that  chased  us  will  be  on  the  alert.  They 
cannot,  of  course,  suspect  in  the  slightest  that  we  have  any  clue 
to  the  hiding-place  of  your  daughters,  still  they  might  think 
that  if  we  were  really  pursuing  the  other  gondola  and  had 
recognized  the  woman  Castaldi,  we  might  bring  the  news  to 
you,  and  that  a  stir  might  be  made;  they  may  therefore  be 
watching  to  see  if  anything  comes  of  it;  and  if  they  saw  a 
bustle  and  gondolas  setting  out  taking  the  direction  of  the 
island,  they  might  set  off  and  get  there  first,  for  it  is  a  very 
fast  craft,  and  remove  your  daughters  before  we  reach  the  hut. 

"  I  should  say  wait  till  morning.  They  may  be  watching 
your  house  now,  and  if  in  an  hour  or  two  they  see  all  is  quiet 
they  will  no  doubt  retire  with  the  belief  that  all  danger  is  at 
an  end.  Then,  in  the  morning,  I  would  embark  the  men  in 
two  or  three  gondolas,  but  I  would  not  start  from  your  own 
steps,  for  no  doubt  your  house  is  watched.  Let  the  men  go  out 
singly  and  embark  at  a  distance  from  here,  and  not  at  the  same 
place.  Once  out  upon  the  lagoon,  they  should  row  quietly 
towards  San  Nicolo,  keeping  a  considerable  distance  apart,  the 
men  lying  down  in  the  bottom  as  the  boats  approach  the 
island,  so  that  if  anyone  is  on  watch  he  will  have  no  suspicion. 

"As  I  am  the  only  one  that  knows  the  position  of  the  hut 
I  will  be  with  you  in  the  first  gondola.  We  will  not  land  near 
the  hut,  but  pass  by  and  land  at  the  other  end  of  the  island ; 
the  other  gondolas  will  slowly  follow  us  and  land  at  the  same 
spot ;  then  three  or  four  men  can  go  along  by  the  sea  face, 
with  orders  to  watch  any  boats  hauled  up  upon  the  shore  there 
and  stop  any  party  making  down  towards  them.  The  rest  of  us 
will  walk  straight  to  the  hut,  and,  as  it  lies  among  sand-hills, 


100  "AN    EXCELLENT   PRECAUTION." 

I  hope  we  shall  be  able  to  get  quite  close  to  it  before  >ur 
approach  is  discovered." 

"  An  excellent  plan,  Francisco,  though  I  am  so  impatient 
that  the  night  will  seem  endless  to  me ;  but  certainly  your  plan 
is  the  best.  Even  if  the  house  is  watched  and  you  were  seen 
to  enter,  if  all  remains  perfectly  quiet  they  will  naturally  sup- 
pose that  the  news  you  brought  was  not  considered  of  sufficient 
importance  to  lead  to  any  action.  You  will,  of  course,  remain 
here  till  morning?" 

"  I  cannot  do  that,  sir,  though  I  will  return  the  first  thing. 
There  is  lying  on  my  table  a  paper  with  the  particulars  and 
names  of  the  persons  I  saw  meet  in  this  hut,  and  a  request  to 
my  father  that  if  I  do  not  return  in  the  morning  he  will  at 
once  lay  this  before  the  council.  I  place  it  there  every  day 
when  I  go  out,  in  order  that,  if  I  should  be  seized  and  carried 
off  by  Mocenigo's  people,  I  should  have  some  means  of  forcing 
them  to  let  me  go.  Although  I  know  absolutely  nothing  of 
the  nature  of  the  conspiracy,  they  will  not  know  how  much 
I  am  aware  of,  or  what  particulars  I  may  have  given  in  the 
document;  and  as  I  could  name  to  them  those  present,  and 
among  them  is  the  envoy  of  the  King  of  Hungary  now  in  the 
city,  they  would  hardly  dare  harm  me,  when  they  knew  that  if 
they  did  so  this  affair  would  be  brought  before  the  council." 

"It  was  an  excellent  precaution,  Francisco.  Why,  you  are 
as  prudent  and  thoughtful  as  you  are  courageous !" 

"  It  was  not  likely  to  be  of  much  use,  sir,"  Francis  said 
modestly.  "  I  was  very  much  more  likely  to  get  a  stab  in  the 
back  than  to  be  carried  off.  Still,  it  was  just  possible  that 
Mocenigo  might  himself  like  to  see  his  vengeance  carried  out, 
and  it  was  therefore  worth  my  while  guarding  against  it ;  but, 
as  you  see,  it  will  be  necessary  for  me  to  be  back  sometime 
before  morning." 

"At  any  rate,   Francisco,  you  had  better  wait    here    until 


"WE  WILL   START  AT  SEVEN."  IOI 

morning  breaks.  Your  room  is  not  likely  to  be  entered  for 
some  hours  after  that ;  so  while  I  am  preparing  for  our  expe- 
dition, you  can  go  out  and  make  your  way  to  the  Grand  Canal, 
hail  an  early  gondola,  and  be  put  down  at  your  own  steps, 
when,  as  you  have  told  me,  you  can  enter  the  house  without 
disturbing  anyone ;  then  you  can  remove  that  paper  and  return 
here  in  the  gondola.  We  will  start  at  seven;  there  will  be 
plenty  of  boats  about  by  that  time,  and  the  lagoon  will  be 
dotted  by  the  fishermen's  craft,  so  that  our  gondolas  will 
attract  no  attention." 

"  Perhaps  that  will  be  the  best  plan,  signor ;  and,  indeed,  I 
should  not  be  sorry  for  a  few  hours'  sleep,  for  Giuseppi  and  I 
have  been  in  our  boat  since  a  very  early  hour  in  the  morning, 
and  were  pretty  well  tired  out  before  this  last  adventure  began." 


CHAPTER  VI. 

THE  HUT  ON   SAN  NICOLO. 

IT  seven  o'clock  all  was  in  readiness  for  a  start.  Signor 
Polani  set  out  alone  in  his  gondola,  and  picked  up 
Francis  and  four  men  at  a  secluded  spot  some  dis- 
tance from  the  house.  A  messenger  had  been  sent 
two  hours  before  to  the  captain  of  one  of  the  merchant  ships 
lying  in  the  port.  He  at  once  put  ten  men  into  a  large  boat 
and  rowed  down  to  within  half  a  mile  of  the  island.  Here  a 
grapnel  was  thrown  overboard,  most  of  the  men  lay  down  in 
the  bottom,  and  the  captain,  according  to  his  instructions,  kept 
a  sharp  look-out  to  see  that  no  boat  left  San  Nicolo — his  instruc- 
tions being  to  overhaul  any  boat  coming  out,  and  to  see  that  no 
one  was  concealed  on  board  it.  There  he  remained  until  Polani's 
gondola  rowed  past  him.  After  it  had  gone  a  few  hundred  yards 
the  grapnel  was  got  up,  the  men  took  to  their  oars  and  followed 
the  gondola,  keeping  so  far  behind  that  it  would  not  seem  there 
was  any  connection  between  them. 

Francis  made  for  the  narrow  channel  which  separated  San 
Nicolo  from  the  next  island,  and  then  directed  the  gondola  to 
be  run  ashore,  where  a  low  sand-hill  close  by  hid  them  from 
the  sight  of  any  one  on  the  look-out.  A  few  minutes  later  the 
ship's  boat  arrived.  Francis  now  led  the  way  direct  for  the 
hut,  accompanied  by  Polani  and  six  men,  while  four  sailors 


THE   HUT   ENTERED.  103 

advanced  at  a  distance  of  a  hundred  yards  on  either  flank  to 
cut  off  any  one  making  for  the  water. 

"  We  may  as  well  go  fast,"  he  said,  "  for  we  can  scarcely  get 
there  without  being  seen  by  a  look-out  should  there  be  one'  on 
the  sand-hills,  and  the  distance  is  so  short  that  there  will  be 
no  possibility  of  their  carrying  your  daughters  off  before  we  get 
there." 

"  The  faster  the  better,"  the  merchant  said.  "  This  suspense 
is  terrible." 

Accordingly,  the  party  started  at  a  brisk  run.  Francis  kept 
his  eyes  on  the  spot  where  he  believed  the  hut  lay. 

"  I  see  no  one  anywhere  near  there,"  he  said,  as  they  came 
over  one  of  the  sand  ridges.  "  Had  there  been  any  one  on  the 
watch  I  think  we  should  see  him  now." 

On  they  ran,  until,  passing  over  one  of  the  sand-hills,  Francis 
came  to  a  stand-still.  The  hut  lay  in  the  hollow  below  them. 

"There  is  the  house,  signor;  now  we  shall  soon  know." 

They  dashed  down  the  short  slope  and  gathered  round  the 
door. 

"Within  there,  open!"  the  merchant  shouted,  hammering 
with  the  hilt  of  his  sword  on  the  door. 

All  was  silent  within. 

"  Break  it  down !"  he  said ;  and  two  of  the  sailors,  who  had 
brought  axes  with  them,  began  to  hew  away  at  the  door.  A 
few  blows  and  it  suddenly  opened,  and  two  men  dressed  as 
fishermen  appeared  in  the  doorway. 

"What  means  this  attack  upon  the  house  of  quiet  people  ?" 
they  demanded. 

"  Bind  them  securely,"  Polani  said,  as  he  rushed  in,  followed 
closely  by  Francis,  while  those  who  followed  seized  the  men. 
Polani  paused  as  he  crossed  the  threshold,  with  a  cry  of  disap- 
pointment— the  hut  was  empty.  Francis  was  almost  equally 
disappointed. 


104  '    A   CLUE   DISCOVERED. 

"  If  they  are  not  here,  they  are  near  by,"  Francis  said  to  Polani. 
"  Do  not  give  up  hope.  I  am  convinced  they  are  not  far  off ; 
and  if  we  search  we  may  find  a  clue.  Better  keep  your  men 
outside ;  we  can  search  more  thoroughly  by  ourselves." 

The  merchant  told  his  men,  who  had  seized  and  were  binding 
the  two  occupants  of  the  hut,  to  remain  outside.  The  inside 
of  the  hut  differed  in  no  way  from  the  ordinary  dwelling  of 
fishermen,  except  that  a  large  table  stood  in  the  middle  of  it, 
and  there  were  some  benches  against  the  walls.  Some  oars 
stood  in  one  corner,  and  some  nets  were  piled  close  to  them. 
A  fire  burned  in  the  open  hearth,  and  a  pot  hung  over  it  and 
two  others  stood  on  the  hearth. 

"  Let  us  see  what  they  have  got  here,"  Francis  said,  while 
the  merchant  leaned  against  the  table  with  an  air  of  profound 
depression,  paying  no  attention  to  what  he  was  doing. 

"  A  soup,"  Francis  said,  lifting  the  lid  from  the  pot  over  the 
fire,  "and,  by  the  smell,  a  good  one."  Then  he  lifted  the  other 
pots  simmering  among  the  burning  brands.  "  A  ragout  of  kid 
and  a  boiled  fish.  Signor  Polani,  this  is  no  fisherman's  meal; 
either  these  men  expect  visitors  of  a  much  higher  degree  than 
themselves,  or  your  daughters  are  somewhere  close.  Oh !  there 
is  a  door." 

"  It  can  lead  nowhere,"  Polani  said.  "  The  sand  is  piled  up 
to  the  roof  on  that  side  of  the  house." 

"  It  is,"  Francis  agreed  ;  "  but  there  may  be  a  lower  room 
there  completely  covered  with  the  sand  ;  at  any  rate  we  will  see." 

He  pushed  against  the  door,  but  it  did  not  give  in  the  slightest. 

"  It  may  be  the  sand,"  he  said,  "  it  may  be  bolts." 

He  went  to  the  outside  door  and  called  in  the  sailors  with  the 
hatchets. 

"  Break  open  that  door,"  he  said.  "  There  is  a  space  behind," 
he  exclaimed,  as  the  first  blow  was  given.  "  It  is  hollow,  I 
swear;  it  would  be  a  different  sound  altogether  if  sand  was 


FOUND  !  105 

piled  up  against  it."  A  dozen  blows  and  the  fastenings  gave, 
and,  sword  in  hand,  the  merchant  and  Francis  rushed  through 
it. 

Both  gave  a  shout  of  delight.  They  were  in  a  room  built 
out  at  the  back  of  the  hut.  It  was  richly  furnished,  and  hang- 
ings of  Eastern  stuffs  covered  the  walls.  A  burning  lamp  hung 
from  the  ceiling.  Two  men  stood  irresolute  with  drawn  swords, 
having  apparently  turned  round  just  as  the  door  gave  way,  for 
as  it  did  so  two  figures  struggled  to  their  feet  from  a  couch 
behind  them,  for  some  shawls  had  been  wrapped  round  their 
heads,  and  with  a  cry  of  delight  rushed  forward  to  meet  their 
rescuers.  Seated  at  the  end  of  the  couch,  with  bowed-down 
head,  was  another  female  figure. 

"  Maria — Giulia  !  "  the  merchant  exclaimed,  as,  dropping  his 
sword,  he  clasped  his  daughters  in  his  arms. 

Francis,  followed  by  the  two  sailors  with  hatchets,  advanced 
towards  the  men. 

"  Drop  your  swords  and  surrender,"  he  said.  Resistance  is 
useless ;  there  are  a  dozen  men  outside." 

The  men  threw  their  swords  down  on  the  ground. 

"  Lead  them  outside  and  bind  them  securely,"  Francis  said. 

For  the  next  minute  or  two  few  words  were  spoken.  The 
girls  sobbed  with  delight  on  their  father's  breast,  while  he  him- 
self was  too  moved  to  do  more  than  murmur  words  of  love  and 
thankfulness.  Francis  went  quietly  out  and  spoke  to  the  cap- 
tain, who  went  into  the  inner  room,  touched  the  sitting  figure  on 
the  shoulder,  and,  taking  her  by  the  arm,  led  her  outside. 

"  Come  in,  Francis,"  Polani  called  a  minute  later.  "  My 
dears,  it  is  not  me  you  must  thank  for  your  rescue,  it  is  your 
English  friend  here  who  has  again  restored  you  to  me.  It  is  to 
him  we  owe  our  happiness,  and  that  you,  my  child,  are  saved 
from  the  dreadful  fate  of  being  forced  to  be  the  wife  of  that 
villain  Mocenigo.  Embrace  him,  my  dears,  as  a  brother,  for 


io6  MARIA'S  STORY. 

he  has  done  more  than  a  brother  for  you.  And  now  tell  me 
all  that  has  happened  since  I  last  saw  you." 

"  You  know,  father,  the  message  that  was  brought  us,  that 
you  had  been  hurt  and  wanted  us  home?" 

"  Yes,  my  dears,  that  I  learned  soon  afterwards.  I  went  at 
five  o'clock  to  fetch  you  home,  and  found  that  you  had  gone, 
and  why." 

"Well,  father,  directly  we  had  taken  our  seats  in  the  cabin 
of  the  gondola  our  gouvernante  closed  the  doors,  and  soon 
afterwards  she  slid  to  the  two  shutters  before  the  windows. 
We  cried  out  in  surprise  at  finding  ourselves  in  the  dark,  but 
she  bade  us  be  quiet  in  a  tone  quite  different  to  any  in  which 
she  had  ever  spoken  to  us  before.  We  were  both  frightened, 
and  tried  to  push  back  the  shutters  and  open  the  door,  but  they 
were  fastened  firmly.  I  suppose  there  was  some  spring  which 
held  them.  Then  we  screamed  ;  but  I  could  feel  that  the  inside 
was  all  thickly  padded.  I  suppose  our  voices  could  not  be  heard 
outside.  I  thought  so,  because  once  I  thought  I  heard  the 
gondoliers  singing,  but  it  was  so  faint  that  I  could  not  be  sure. 
Then  the  air  seemed  stiflingly  close,  and  I  fainted  ;  and  when  I 
came  to  myself  one  of  the  windows  was  open,  and  Giulia  said 
she  had  promised  we  would  not  scream,  but  I  think  we  were 
beyond  the  canals  then,  for  I  could  see  nothing  but  the  sky  as  we 
passed  along.  When  I  was  better  the  windows  were  almost 
shut  again,  so  that  we  could  not  see  out,  though  a  little  air 
could  get  in ;  then  the  gondola  went  on  for  a  long  time.  At 
last  it  stopped,  and  she  said  we  must  be  blindfolded.  We  said 
we  would  not  submit  to  it,  and  she  told  us  unless  we  let  her  do 
it  the  men  would  do  it.  So  we  submitted,  and  she  wrapped 
shawls  closely  over  our  heads.  Then  we  were  helped  ashore, 
and  walked  some  distance.  At  last  the  shawls  were  taken  off 
our  heads  and  we  found  ourselves  here,  and  here  we  have  been 
ever  since." 


"WHERE  ARE  WE?"  107 

"  You  have  not  been  ill-treated  in  any  way,  my  children  ?  " 
the  merchant  asked  anxiously. 

"  Not  at  all,  father ;  until  to-day,  nobody  has  been  into  this 
room  besides  ourselves  and  that  woman.  The  door  was  generally 
left  a  little  open  for  air,  for  you  see  there  are  no  windows  here. 
She  used  to  go  into  the  next  room  and  come  back  with  our  food. 
We  could  see  men  moving  about  in  there,  but  they  were  very 
quiet,  and  all  spoke  in  low  tones.  You  may  think  how  we  up- 
braided our  gouvernante  for  her  treachery,  and  threatened  her 
with  your  anger.  She  told  us  we  should  never  be  found,  and 
that  I  might  as  well  make  up  my  mind  to  marry  Ruggiero 
Mocenigo,  for  if  I  did  not  consent  quietly  means  would  be  found 
to  compel  me  to  do  so.  I  said  I  would  die  first,  but  she  used  to 
laugh  a  cruel  laugh  and  say  he  would  soon  be  here  with  the 
priest,  and  that  it  mattered  not  whether  I  said  yes  or  no,  the 
ceremony  would  be  performed,  and  then  Ruggiero  would  sail 
away  with  me  to  the  East,  and  I  should  be  glad  enough  then 
to  make  peace  between  him  and  you ;  but  he  never  came.  I 
think  she  became  anxious,  for  she  went  away  twice  for  three  or 
four  hours,  and  locked  us  in  here  when  she  went.  That,  father, 
is  all  we  know  about  it.  Where  are  we? " 

"  You  are  at  San  Nicolo." 

"  On  the  island  ! "  Maria  exclaimed  in  surprise.  "  She  told 
us  we  were  on  the  mainland.  And  now,  how  did  you  find  us  ?  " 

"  I  will  tell  you  as  we  go  home,  Maria." 

"Yes,  that  will  be  better,  father.  Giulia  and  I  long  for  a 
breath  of  fresh  air  and  the  sight  of  the  blue'sky." 

"  Giulia  has  not  had  so  much  to  frighten  her  as  you  have," 
her  father  said. 

"  Yes,  I  have,  father ;  for  she  said  I  was  to  go  across  the  seas 
with  Maria,  and  that  Ruggiero  would  soon  find  a  husband  for 
me  among  his  friends.  I  told  her  she  was  a  wicked  woman 
over  and  over  again,  and  we  told  her  that  we  were  sure  you 


108  "SHALL  WE  PUT  A  TORCH   TO  THIS   PLACE?" 

would  forgive  and  even  reward  her  if  she  would  take  us  back 
again  to  you.  When  she  was  away  we  thought  we  would 
try  to  make  our  escape  behind,  and  we  made  a  little  hole  in 
the  boards ;  but  the  sand  came  pouring  in,  and  we  found  we 
were  underground,  though  how  we  got  there  we  didn't  know, 
for  we  had  not  come  down  any  steps.  So  we  had  to  give  up  the 
idea  of  escape." 

"You  are  partly  underground,"  her  father  said,  "for,  as  you 
will  see  when  you  get  out,  the  sand  has  drifted  up  at  the  back 
of  the  hut  to  the  roof,  and  has  altogether  hidden  this  part  of 
the  hut ;  so  that  we  did  not  know  that  there  was  more  than  one 
room,  and  I  should  never  have  thought  of  breaking  into  that 
door  had  it  not  been  for  Francisco.  And  now  come  along,  my 
dears  ;  let  us  wait  here  no  longer." 

The  sailors  and  servitors  broke  into  a  cheer  as  the  girls  came 
out  of  the  hut. 

"  Shall  we  put  a  torch  to  this  place  ?  "  Francis  asked  Polani. 

"  No,  Francisco  ;  it  must  be  searched  thoroughly  first.  Cap- 
tain Lontano,  do  you  order  four  of  your  men  to  remain  here 
until  some  of  the  officials  of  the  state  arrive.  If  anyone  comes 
before  that,  they  must  seize  them  and  detain  them  as  prisoners. 
The  state  will  investigate  the  matter  to  the  bottom." 

Now  that  they  were  in  the  open  air  the  merchant  could  see 
that  the  close  confinement  and  anxiety  had  told  greatly  upon 
his  daughters ;  both  were  pale  and  hollow-eyed,  and  looked  as 
if  they  had  suffered  a  long  illness.  Seeing  how  shaken  they 
were  he  ordered  one  of  the  retainers  to  go  to  the  gondola,  and 
tell  the  men  to  row  it  round  to  the  nearest  point  to  the  hut ;  the 
party  then  walked  along  down  to  the  shore. 

In  a  few  minutes  the  gondola  arrived  ;  Polani,  his  two  daugh- 
ters, and  Francis  took  their  places  in  it ;  the  four  men,  bound 
hand  and  foot,  were  laid  in  the  bottom  of  the  ship's  boat ;  the 
gouvernante  was  made  to  take  her  place  there  also ;  and  the 


"WE  SHALL   LOVE   HIM   ALL  OUR   LIVES."  ICXJ 

sailors  were  told  to  follow  closely  behind  the  gondola,  which 
was  rowed  at  a  very  slow  pace.  On  the  way  Polani  told  his 
daughters  of  the  manner  in  which  Francis  had  discovered  the 
place  of  concealment. 

"  Had  it  not  been  for  him,  my  dears,  we  should  certainly  not 
have  found  you,  and  that  villain  would  have  carried  out  his 
plans  sooner  or  later.  He  would  either  have  given  his  guards 
the  slip,  or,  when  no  evidence  was  forthcoming  against  him, 
they  would  have  been  removed.  He  would  then  have  gone 
outside  the  jurisdiction  of  the  republic,  obtained  a  ship  with  a 
crew  of  desperadoes,  sailed  round  to  the  seaward  side  of  San 
Nicolo,  and  carried  you  off.  Nothing  could  have  saved  you, 
and  your  resistance  would,  as  that  woman  told  you,  have  been 
futile." 

"  We  shall  be  grateful  to  you  all  our  lives,  Francisco,"  Maria 
said.  "  We  shall  pray  for  you  always,  night  and  morning,  shall 
we  not,  Giulia?  " 

"  Yes,  indeed,"  the  young  girl  said  simply ;  we  shall  love  him 
all  our  lives." 

"Answer  for  yourself,  Giulia,"  Maria  said  with  a  laugh,  her 
spirits  returning  in  the  bright  sunshine  and  fresh  air.  "  When 
Francisco  asks  for  my  love,  it  will  be  quite  soon  enough  to  say 
what  I  think  about  it." 

"  I  should  never  have  courage  enough  to  do  that,  signora,  I 
know  what  you  would  say  too  well." 

"  What  should  I  say  ?  "  Maria  asked. 

"  You  would  say  I  was  an  impudent  boy.* 

Maria  laughed. 

"  I  cannot  think  of  you  as  a  boy  any  longer,  Francisco, "  she 
said  more  gravely.  "  I  have,  perhaps,  regarded  you  as  a  boy 
till  now,  though  you  did  save  us  so  bravely  before ;  but  you  see 
you  are  only  my  own  age,  and  a  girl  always  looks  upon  a  boy  of 
her  own  age  as  ever  so  much  younger  than  she  is  herself. 


no  THE  MERCHANT'S  PLANS. 

Besides,  too,  you  have  none  of  the  airs  of  being  a  man,  which 
some  of  my  cousins  have ;  and  never  pay  compliments  or  say 
pretty  things,  but  seem  altogether  like  a  younger  brother.  But 
I  shall  think  you  a  boy  no  more.  I  know  you  better  now." 

"  But  I  am  a  boy,"  Francis  said,  "  and  I  don't  want  to  be 
thought  anything  else.  In  England  we  keep  young  longer  than 
they  do  here,  and  a  boy  of  my  age  would  not  think  of  speaking 
to  his  elders  unless  he  was  first  addressed.  What  are  you  going 
to  do  with  your  prisoners,  signor  ?  " 

"  I  shall  take  them  direct  to  my  house,  and  then  go  and  report 
the  recovery  of  my  daughters  and  their  capture.  Officials 
will  at  once  be  sent  with  a  gondola  to  take  them  off  to  the 
prison.  There  can  be  no  question  now  as  to  the  part  Mocenigo 
has  played  in  this  business,  and  no  doubt  he  will  be  brought 
here  a  prisoner  at  once.  Even  his  nearest  connections  will  not 
dare  to  defend  conduct  so  outrageous,  especially  when  public 
indignation  has  been  so  excited.  You  do  not  know,  girls,  what 
a  stir  has  been  caused  in  the  city  on  your  account.  If  it  had  not 
been  for  the  citizen  guard  I  believe  the  Mocenigo  Palace  would 
have  been  burned  down,  and  Ruggiero's  connections  have 
scarcely  dared  to  show  their  faces  in  the  streets  since  you  have 
been  missing.  You  see  every  father  of  a  family  felt  personally 
grieved,  for  if  the  nobles  were  permitted  with  impunity  to  carry 
off  the  daughters  of  citizens,  who  could  feel  safe  ?  When  this 
is  all  over  I  shall  take  you  for  a  time  back  to  our  home  in  Corfu. 
It  is  not  good  for  girls  to  be  the  subject  of  public  talk  and 
attention." 

"  I  shall  be  very  glad,  father  "  Giulia  said.  "  I  love  our  home 
at  Corfu,  with  its  gardens  and  flowers,  far  better  than  the  palazzo 
here.  The  air  is  always  soft  and  balmy,  while  here  it  is  so  hot 
sometimes  by  day  and  so  damp  and  foggy  in  the  evening.  I 
shall  be  glad  to  go  back  again." 

"And  you,  Maria  ?  " 


A  JOYFUL    RECEPTION.  Ill 

"  I  shall  be  very  happy  there,  father,  but  I  like  Venice  best." 

"  You  are  getting  to  an  age  to  enjoy  gaiety,  Maria  ;  and  it  is 
natural  you  should  do  so.  However,  it  will  not  be  necessary 
for  you  to  be  long  absent.  In  a  city  like  Venice  there  are 
always  fresh  subjects  for  talk,  and  the  most  exciting  piece  of 
scandal  is  but  a  three  days'  wonder.  A  few  weeks  at  Corfu 
will  restore  your  nerves,  which  cannot  but  have  been  shaken 
by  what  you  have  gone  through,  and  you  will  come  back  here 
more  disposed  than  ever  to  appreciate  the  gaieties  of  Venice." 

"  As  long  as  it  is  for  only  a  few  weeks,  father,  I  shall  not 
care ;  for  you  know  I  am  very  fond,  too,  of  our  beautiful  home 
there.  Still  I  do  like  Venice." 

They  had  now  reached  the  steps  of  the  Palazzo  Polani. 
They  had  not  proceeded  by  way  of  the  Grand  Canal,  as  the 
merchant  was  anxious  that  his  daughters  should  reach  their 
home  unrecognized,  as,  had  they  been  noticed,  it  would  have 
given  rise  to  no  little  excitement,  and  they  had  had  more  than 
enough  of  this,  and  needed  quiet  and  repose.  Besides,  until 
the  prisoners  were  in  the  safe  custody  of  the  officials  of  the 
state  it  was  in  every  way  desirable  that  the  events  of  the 
morning  should  remain  unknown. 

Their  return  home  created  quite  a  tumult  of  joy  in  the 
house.  The  preparations  that  had  been  made  had  been  kept 
a  profound  secret,  as  the  merchant  could  not  be  sure  but  that 
some  other  member  of  his  household  was  in  the  pay  of  Mo- 
cenigo.  Thus  until  the  girls  alighted  at  the  steps  none  in  the 
house  were  aware  that  any  clue  had  been  obtained  as  to  their 
hiding  place.  The  women  ran  down  with  cries  of  joy ;  the 
men  would  have  shouted  and  cheered,  had  not  Polani  held  up 
his  hand. 

"  The  signoras  have  had  more  than  enough  excitement,"  he 
said.  "  They  are  grateful  to  you  for  your  good-will  and  affec- 
tion, but  for  the  present  they  need  quiet.  They  may  have 


112  THE  FATE   OF   THE   GONDOLA. 

more  to  go  through  to-day.  I  pray  you  that  no  word  as  to 
their  return  be  said  outside  the  house.  I  would  not  that  the 
news  were  whispered  in  the  city  till  the  seignory  decide  what 
is  to  be  done  in  the  matter." 

As  soon  as  the  girls  had  gone  upstairs  to  their  rooms  the 
ship's  boat  came  alongside  and  the  prisoners  were  carried  into 
the  house,  glances  of  indignation  and  anger  being  cast  at  the 
gouvernante,  who  had,  as  soon  as  she  was  placed  on  board  the 
boat,  closely  veiled  herself ;  and  some  of  the  women  broke  out 
into  threats  and  imprecations. 

"  Captain  Lontano,  the  servants  will  show  you  a  room  where 
your  men  can  guard  the  prisoners.  You  had  better  remain 
with  them  yourself.  Let  no  one  except  your  own  men  enter 
the  room." 

Giuseppi  was  on  the  steps,  and  Francis  stepped  up  to  him  and 
eagerly  asked,  "  What  news  of  the  gondola  ?  " 

"  I  found  her  stove  in  and  full  of  water  behind  the  piles 
close  to  the  steps.  Some  one  must  have  pushed  her  there  to  be 
out  of  the  way  of  the  traffic.  She  has  several  holes  in  her 
bottom,  besides  being  stove  in  at  the  gunwale  where  the  other 
boat  struck  her.  They  must  have  thrust  the  ends  of  their  oars 
through  her  planks  out  of  sheer  spite  when  they  found  that  we 
had  escaped  them.  Father  and  I  have  towed  her  round  to 
your  steps,  but  I  doubt  whether  she  is  worth  repairing." 

"Well,  we  can't  help  it,  Giuseppi.  She  has  done  her  work; 
and  if  every  two  ducats  I  lay  out  were  to  bring  in  as  good  a 
harvest  I  should  have  no  reason  to  complain." 

Having  seen  the  prisoners  safely  placed,  the  merchant  re- 
turned. 

"  I  think,  Francisco,  you  must  go  with  me.  They  will  be 
sure  to  want  to  question  you." 

"  I  shall  have  to  say  what  were  my  reasons  for  thinking 
your  daughters  were  hid  in  that  hut,  signer,"  Francis  said  as 


"I   AM   NOT  GOING  TO   TELL  A   LIE  ABOUT  IT."  113 

the  gondola  rowed  towards  St.  Mark's ;  "  and  I  can  only  do 
that  by  telling  of  that  secret  meeting.  I  do  not  want  to  de- 
nounce a  number  of  people  besides  Ruggiero.  I  have  no  evi- 
dence against  them,  and  do  not  know  what  they  were  plotting, 
nor  have  I  any  wish  to  create  for  myself  more  enemies.  It  is 
quite  enough  to  have  incurred  the  enmity  of  all  the  connections 
of  the  house  of  Mocenigo." 

"  That  is  true  enough,  Francisco,  but  I  do  not  see  how  it  is 
to  be  avoided ;  unfortunately  you  did  recognize  others  besides 
Ruggiero." 

"  Quite  so,  signor,  and  I  am  not  going  to  tell  a  lie  about 
it,  whatever  the  consequences  may  be ;  stilt  I  wish  I  could  get 
out  of  it." 

"  I  wish  you  could,  Francis,  but  I  do  not  see  any  escape  for 
it,  especially  as  you  say  you  did  not  recognize  Ruggiero  as  the 
passenger  you  carried." 

"No,  signor,  I  did  not;  it  might  have  been  he,  but  lean- 
not  say ;  he  was  wrapped  in  a  cloak,  and  I  did  not  see  his 
features." 

"  It  is  a  pity,  Francisco,  for  had  you  known  him  the  state- 
ment that,  moved  by  curiosity,  you  followed  him  and  saw  him 
into  that  hut,  would  have  been  sufficient  without  your  entering 
into  the  other  matter.  Most  of  my  countrymen  would  not 
hesitate  about  telling  a  lie  to  avoid  mixing  themselves  up 
further  in  such  a  matter,  for  the  dangers  of  making  enemies 
are  thoroughly  appreciated  here ;  but  you  are  perfectly  right, 
and  I  like  your  steady  love  of  the  truth  whatever  the  conse- 
quences to  yourself ;  but  certainly  as  soon  as  the  matter  is 
concluded,  it  will  be  better  for  you  to  quit  Venice  for  a  time." 

"  Are  you  going  to  the  council  direct,  signor?  " 

"  No ;  I  am  going  first  to  the  magistrates  to  tell  them  that 
I  have  in  my  hands  five  persons  who  have  been  engaged  in 
carrying  off  my  daughters,  and  beg  them  to  send  at  once  to 

—8 


114  POLANI    KEEPS   THE   SECRET. 

take  them  into  their  custody ;  then  I  shall  go  before  the 
council  and  demand  justice  upon  Mocenigo,  against  whom  we 
have  now  conclusive  evidence.  You  will  not  be  wanted  at  the 
magistracy  ;  my  own  evidence  that  I  found  them  keeping  guard 
over  my  daughters  will  be  quite  sufficient  for  the  present,  and 
after  that  the  girls'  evidence  will  be  sufficient  to  convict  them 
without  your  name  appearing  in  the  affair  at  all.  I  will  try 
whether  I  cannot  keep  your  name  from  appearing  before  the 
council  also.  Yes,  I  think  I  might  do  that ;  and  as  a  first  step 
I  give  you  my  promise  not  to  name  you  unless  I  find  it 
absolutely  necessary.  You  may  as  well  remain  here  in  the 
gondola  until  I  return." 

It  was  upwards  of  an  hour  before  Signer  Polani  came  back  to 
the  boat. 

"  I  have  succeeded,"  he  said,  "  in  keeping  your  name  out  of 
it.  I  first  of  all  told  my  daughters'  story,  and  then  said  that, 
having  obtained  information  that  Ruggiero,  before  he  was 
banished  from  Venice,  was  in  the  habit  of  going  sometimes  at 
night  to  a  hut  on  San  Nicolo,  I  proceeded  thither,  and  found 
my  daughters  concealed  in  the  hut  whose  position  had  been 
described  to  me.  Of  course  they  inquired  where  I  had  obtained 
the  information  ;  but  I  replied  that,  as  they  knew,  I  had  offered 
a  large  reward  which  would  lead  to  my  daughters'  discovery, 
and  that  this  reward  had  attracted  one  in  the  secret  of 
Mocenigo,  but  that  for  the  man's  own  safety  I  had  been  com- 
pelled to  promise  that  I  would  not  divulge  his  name. 

"  Some  of  the  council  were  inclined  to  insist,  but  others 
pointed  out  that  for  the  ends  of  justice  it  mattered  in  no 
way  how  I  obtained  the  informatiou.  I  had  at  any  rate 
gone  to  the  island  and  found  my  daughters  there ;  and  their 
evidence,  if  it  was  in  accordance  with  what  I  had  stated, 
was  amply  sufficient  to  bring  the  guilt  of  the  abduction  of  my 
daughters  home  to  Ruggiero,  against  whom  other  circumstances 


"I   HAVE   MUCH   TO   SAY   TO    HIM."  115 

had  already  excited  suspicion.  A  galley  has  already  started 
for  the  mainland  with  orders  to  bring  him  back  a  prisoner, 
and  the  girls  are  to  appear  to  give  evidence  to-morrow ;  the 
woman  Castaldi  is  to  be  interrogated  by  the  council  this  after- 
noon, and  I  have  no  doubt  she  will  make  a  full  confession, 
seeing  that  my  daughters'  evidence  is  in  itself  sufficient  to 
prove  her  guilt,  and  that  it  can  be  proved  from  other  sources 
that  it  was  she  who  inveigled  them  away  by  a  false  message 
from  me." 

"  I  am  glad  indeed,  signer,  that  I  am  not  to  be  called,  and 
that  this  affair  of  the  conspiracy  is  not  to  be  brought  up.  I 
would  with  your  permission  now  return  home.  Giuseppi  took 
a  message  to  my  father  from  me  the  first  thing  explaining  my 
absence,  and  I  told  him  when  we  left  your  house  to  go  at  once 
to  tell  him  that  your  daughters  had  been  recovered,  and  that 
I  should  return  before  long.  Still  he  will  want  to  hear  from  me 
as  to  the  events  of  the  night." 

"  Will  you  also  tell  him,  Francisco,  that  I  will  call  upon  him 
this  afternoon.  I  have  much  to  say  to  him." 

"  I  am  glad  Signer  Polani  is  coming,"  Mr.  Hammond  said 
when  his  son  gave  him  the  message.  "  I  am  quite  resolved  that 
you  shall  quit  Venice  at  once.  I  do  not  wish  to  blame  you 
for  what  you  have  done,  which,  indeed,  is  likely  to  have  a 
favourable  effect  upon  your  fortunes ;  but  that  at  your  age  you 
have  mixed  yourself  up  in  adventures  of  this  kind,  taken 
part  in  the  affairs  of  great  houses,  and  drawn  upon  yourself 
the  enmity  of  one  of  the  most  powerful  families  of  Venice,  is 
altogether  strange  and  improper  for  a  lad  of  your  years  and 
belonging  to  the  family  of  a  quiet  trader.  I  have  been  think- 
ing about  it  all  this  morning,  and  am  quite  resolved  that  the 
sooner  you  are  out  of  Venice  the  better;  if  I  saw  any  way  of 
sending  you  off  before  nightfall  I  would  do  so. 

"  Signer  Polani  has,  you  say,  so  far    concealed    from    the 


Il6  MR.    HAMMOND   IS  ALARMED. 

council  the  fact  that  you  have  been  mixed  up  in  this  business; 
but  there  is  no  saying  how  soon  it  may  come  out.  You  know 
that  Venice  swarms  with  spies,  and  these  are  likely  before 
many  hours  to  learn  the  fact  of  your  midnight  arrival  at 
Polani's  house ;  and  as  no  orders  were  given  for  the  prepara- 
tion of  this  expedition  to  the  island  before  that  time,  it  will 
not  need  much  penetration  to  conclude  that  you  were  the 
bearer  of  the  news  that  led  to  the  discovery  of  the  maidens ; 
besides  which,  you  accompanied  the  expedition  and  acted  as 
its  guide  to  the  hut.  Part  of  this  they  will  learn  from  the 
servants  of  the  house,  part  of  it  they  may  get  out  from  the 
sailors,  who,  over  their  wine-cups,  are  not  given  to  reticence. 
The  council  may  not  have  pressed  Polani  on  this  point,  but 
take  my  word  for  it,  some  of  them  at  least  will  endeavor  to 
get  to  the  bottom  of  it,  especially  Mocenigo's  connections,  who 
will  naturally  be  alarmed  at  the  thought  that  there  is  some- 
where a  traitor  among  their  own  ranks. 

"  The  affair  has  become  very  serious,  Francis,  and  far  beyond 
the  compass  of  a  boyish  scrape,  and  no  time  must  be  lost  in 
getting  you  out  of  Venice.  I  have  no  doubt  Polani  will  see 
the  matter  in  the  same  light,  for  he  knows  the  ways  of  his 
countrymen  even  better  than  I  do." 

The  interview  between  the  two  traders  was  a  long  one ;  at 
its  conclusion  Francis  was  sent  for. 

"  Francis,"  his  father  said,  "  Signer  Polani  has  had  the 
kindness  to  make  me  offers  of  a  most  generous  nature." 

"  Not  at  all,  Messer  Hammond,"  the  Venetian  interrupted  ; 
"  let  there  be  no  mistake  upon  that  score.  Your  son  has  ren- 
dered me  services  impossible  for  me  ever  to  repay  adequately. 
He  has  laid  me  under  an  obligation  greater  than  I  can  ever 
discharge.  At  the  same  time,  fortunately,  I  am  in  a  position 
to  be  able  to  further  his  interests  in  life.  I  have  proposed, 
Francisco,  that  you  shall  enter  my  house  at  once.  You  will,  of 


A  GENEROUS  OFFER.  117 

course,  for  some  years  learn  the  business,  but  you  will  do  so  in 
the  position  which  a  son  of  mine  would  occupy,  and  when  you 
come  of  age  you  will  take  your  place  as  a  partner  with  me. 

"  Your  father  will  return  to  England.  He  informs  me  that  he 
is  now  longing  to  return  to  his  own  country,  and  has  for  some 
time  been  thinking  of  doing  so.  I  have  proposed  to  him  that  he 
shall  act  as  my  agent  there.  Hitherto  I  have  not  traded  direct 
with  England ;  in  future  I  shall  do  so  largely.  Your  father  has 
explained  to  me  somewhat  of  his  transactions,  and  I  see  there  is 
good  profit  to  be  made  on  trade  with  London  by  a  merchant 
who  has  the  advantage  of  the  advice  and  assistance  of  one,  like 
your  father,  thoroughly  conversant  in  the  trade.  Thus  I  hope 
that  the  arrangement  will  be  largely  to  our  mutual  advantage. 
As  to  yourself,  you  will  probably  be  reluctant  to  establish  your- 
self for  life  in  this  country ;  but  there  is  no  reason  why,  in  time, 
when  your  father  wishes  to  retire  from  business,  you  should  not 
establish  yourself  in  London  in  charge  of  the  English  branch  of 
our  house." 

"  I  am  most  grateful  to  you  for  your  offer,  signer,  which  is 
vastly  beyond  anything  that  my  ambition  could  ever  have 
aspired  to.  I  can  only  say  that  I  will  try  my  best  to  do  justice 
to  your  kindness  to  me." 

"  I  have  no  fear  as  to  that,  Francisco,"  the  merchant  said ; 
"  you  have  shown  so  much  thoughtfulness  in  this  business  that 
I  shall  have  no  fear  of  intrusting  even  weighty  affairs  of  busi- 
ness in  your  hands;  and  you  must  remember  always  that  I 
shall  still  consider  myself  your  debtor.  I  thoroughly  agree 
with  your  father's  views  as  to  the  necessity  for  your  leaving 
Venice  as  soon  as  possible.  In  a  few  months  this  matter  will 
have  blown  over,  the  angry  feelings  excited  will  calm  down, 
and  you  will  then  be  able  to  come  and  go  in  safety ;  but  at 
present  you  were  best  out  of  the  town,  and  I  have  therefore 
arranged  with  your  father  that  you  shall  embark  to-night 


Il8  A  GREAT   FUTURE. 

on  board  the  Bonito,  which  sails  to-morrow.  You  will  have 
much  to  say  to  your  father  now,  but  I  hope  you  will  find 
time  to  come  round  and  say  good-bye  to  my  daughters  this 
evening." 

"  Your  adventures,  Francis,"  Mr.  Hammond  said  when  the 
merchant  had  left  them,  "  have  turned  out  fortunate  indeed. 
You  have  an  opening  now  beyond  anything  we  could  have 
hoped  for.  Signor  Polani  has  expressed  himself  most  warmly. 
He  told  me  that  I  need  concern  myself  no  further  with  your 
future,  for  that  would  now  be  his  affair.  The  arrangement  that 
he  has  made  with  me  will  enable  me  to  hold  my  head  as  high 
as  any  in  the  City,  for  it  will  give  me  almost  a  monopoly  of  the 
Venetian  trade ;  and  although  he  said  that  he  had  long  been 
thinking  of  entering  into  trade  direct  with  England,  there  is  no 
doubt  that  it  is  his  feeling  towards  you  which  has  influenced  him 
now  in  the  matter. 

"  My  business  here  has  more  than  answered  my  expecta- 
tions in  one  respect,  but  has  fallen  short  in  another.  I  have 
bought  cheaply,  and  the  business  should  have  been  a  very 
profitable  one ;  but  my  partner  in  London  is  either  not  acting 
fairly  by  me,  or  he  is  mismanaging  matters  altogether.  This 
offer,  then,  of  Signor  Polani,  is  in  every  respect  acceptable.  I 
shall  give  up  my  own  business  and  start  anew,  and  selling,  as  I 
shall,  on  commission,  shall  run  no  risk,  while  the  profits  will  be 
far  larger  than  I  could  myself  make,  for  Polani  will  carry  it  on 
on  a  great  scale.  As  for  you,  you  will  soon  learn  the  ways 
of  trade,  and  will  be  able  to  come  home  and  join  me,  and 
eventually  succeed  me  in  the  business. 

"  No  fairer  prospect  could  well  open  to  a  young  man,  and  if 
you  show  yourself  as  keen  in  business  as  you  have  been  ener- 
getic in  the  pursuits  you  have  adopted,  assuredly  a  great  future 
is  open  to  you,  and  you  may  look  to  be  one  of  the  greatest 
merchants  in  the  city  of  London.  I  know  not  yet  what  offers 


GIUSEPPI'S   GRIEF.  119 

Polani  may  make  you  here,  but  I  hope  that  you  will  not  settle 
in  Venice  permanently,  but  will  always  remember  that  you  are 
an  Englishman  and  the  son  of  a  London  citizen,  and  that  you 
will  never  lose  your  love  for  your  native  land.  And  yet  do  not 
hurry  home  for  my  sake.  Your  two  brothers  will  soon  have 
finished  their  schooling,  and  will,  of  course,  be  apprenticed  to 
me  as  soon  as  I  return ;  and  if,  as  I  hope,  they  turn  out  steady 
and  industrious  they  will,  by  the  time  they  come  to  man's 
estate,  be  of  great  assistaece  to  me  in  the  business.  And  now, 
you  will  be  wanting  to  say  good-bye  to  your  friends.  Be  careful 
this  last  evening,  for  it  is  just  when  you  are  thinking  most  of 
other  matters  that  sudden  misfortune  is  likely  to  come  upon 
you." 

Delighted  with  his  good  fortune — rather  because  it  opened 
up  a  life  of  activity  instead  of  the  confinement  to  business  that 
he  had  dreaded,  than  for  the  pecuniary  advantages  it  offered — • 
Francis  ran  down  stairs,  and  leaping  into  his  father's  gondola 
told  Beppo  to  take  him  to  the  Palazzo  Giustiniani.  On  the 
way  he  told  Beppo  and  his  son  that  the  next  day  he  was 
leaving  Venice,  and  was  going  to  enter  the  service  of  Signor 
Polani.  Giuseppi  ceased  rowing,  and,  throwing  himself  down  at 
the  bottom  of  the  gondola,  began  to  sob  violently,  with  the 
abandonment  to  his  emotions  common  to  his  race ;  then  he  sud- 
denly sat  up. 

"  If  you  are  going,  I  will  go  too,  Messer  Francisco.  You  will 
want  a  servant  who  will  be  faithful  to  you.  I  will  ask  the 
padrone  to  let  me  go  with  you.  You  will  let  me  go,  will  you 
not,  father  ?  I  cannot  leave  our  young  master,  and  should  pine 
away  were  I  obliged  to  stop  here  to  work  a  gondola,  while  he 
may  be  wanting  my  help,  for  Messer  Francisco  is  sure  to  get  into 
adventures  and  dangers.  Has  he  not  done  it  here  in  Venice  ? 
and  is  he  not  sure  to  do  it  at  sea,  where  there  are  Genoese  and 
pirates,  and  perils  of  all  kinds  ?  You  will  take  me  with  you,  will 


120  GIUSEPPfS   REQUEST   GRANTED. 

you  not,  Messer  Francisco  ?  You  will  never  be  so  hard  hearted 
as  to  go  away  and  leave  me  behind  ?  " 

"  I  shall  be  very  glad  to  have  you  with  me,  Giuseppi,  if  your 
father  will  give  you  leave  to  go.  I  am  quite  sure  that  Signor 
Polani  will  make  no  objection.  In  the  first  place  he  would  do 
it  to  oblige  me,  and  in  the  second,  I  know  that  it  is  his  intention 
to  do  something  to  your  advantage.  He  has  spoken  to  me 
about  it  several  times,  for  you  had  your  share  of  the  danger 
when  we  first  rescued  his  daughters,  and  again  when  we  were 
chased  by  that  four-oared  gondola.  He  has  been  too  busy  with 
the  search  for  his  daughters  to  give  the  matter  his  attention, 
but  I  know  that  he  is  conscious  of  his  obligation  to  you,  and 
that  he  intends  to  reward  you  largely ;  therefore  I  am  sure  that 
he  will  offer  no  objection  to  your  accompanying  me.  What  do 
you  say,  Beppo  ?  " 

"  I  do  not  like  to  stand  in  the  way  of  the  lad's  wishes,  Messer 
Francisco,  but,  you  see,  he  is  of  an  age  now  to  be  very  useful  to 
me.  If  Giuseppi  leaves  me  I  shall  have  to  hire  another  hand  for 
the  gondola,  or  to  take  a  partner." 

"  Well,  we  will  talk  it  over  presently,"  Francis  said.  "Here 
we  are  at  the  steps  of  the  palazzo,  and  here  comes  Matteo  him- 
self. It  is  lucky  I  was  not  five  minutes  later,  or  I  should  have 
missed  him." 


CHAPTER  VII. 

ON  BOARD  A  TRADER. 

|AVE  you  heard  the  news,  Francisco?  My  cousins 
are  rescued !  I  have  been  out  this  morning  and 
have  only  just  heard  it,  and  I  was  on  the  point  of 
starting  to  tell  you." 

"  Your  news  is  old,  Matteo.     I  knew  it  hours  ago." 

"  And  I  hear,"  Matteo  went  on,  "  that  Polani  found  them  in  a 
hut  on  San  Nicolo.  My  father  cannot  think  how  he  came  to 
hear  of  their  hiding-place  ;  he  says  Polani  would  not  say  how  he 
learned  the  news.  My  father  supposes  he  heard  it  from  some 
member  of  Ruggiero's  household." 

Francis  hesitated  for  a  moment.  He  had  at  first  been  on 
the  point  of  telling  Matteo  of  the  share  he  had  had  in  the 
recovery  of  the  girls ;  but  he  thought  that  although  his  friend 
could  be  trusted  not  to  repeat  the  news  willfully,  he  might 
accidentally  say  something  which  would  lead  to  the  fact  being 
known,  and  that  as  Polani  had  strongly  enjoined  the  necessity 
of  keeping  the  secret,  and  had  himself  declined  to  mention, 
even  to  the  council,  the  source  from  which  he  obtained  his 
information,  he  would  look  upon  him  as  a  babbler  and  un- 
worthy of  trust  did  he  find  that  Matteo  had  been  let  into  the 
secret. 

"  It  does  not  much  matter  who  it  is  Polani  learned  the  news 
from.  The  great  point  is  he  has  found  his  daughters  safe  from 


122  "I  CONGRATULATE  YOU,   FRANCISCO. 

all  injury,  and  I  hear  has  brought  back  with  him  the  woman  who 
betrayed  them.  It  is  fortunate,  indeed,  that  he  took  such  prompt 
measures  with  Ruggiero,  and  thus  prevented  his  escaping  from 
the  mainland  and  making  off  with  the  girls,  as  of  course  he  in- 
tended to  do." 

"  My  father  tells  me,"  Matteo  said,  "  that  a  state  gondola  has 
already  been  dispatched  to  bring  Ruggiero  a  prisoner  here,  and 
that  even  his  powerful  connections  will  not  save  him  from  severe 
punishment,  for  public  indignation  is  so  great  at  the  attempt  that 
his  friends  will  not  venture  to  plead  on  his  behalf." 

"  And  now  I  have  my  bit  of  news  to  tell  you,  Matteo.  Signor 
Polani  has  most  generously  offered  me  a  position  in  his  house, 
and  I  am  to  sail  to-morrow  in  one  of  his  ships  for  the  East." 

"  I  congratulate  you  Francisco,  for  I  know  from  what  you  have 
often  said  that  you  would  like  this  much  better  than  going  back 
to  England.  But  it  seems  very  sudden  ;  you  did  not  know  any- 
thing about  it  yesterday,  and  now  you  are  going  to  start  at  once. 
Why,  when  can  it  have  been  settled  ?  Polani  has  been  absent 
since  daybreak,  engaged  in  this  matter  of  the  girls,  and  has  been 
occupied  ever  since  with  the  council." 

"  I  have  seen  him  since  he  returned,"  Francis  replied;  "and 
though  it  was  only  absolutely  settled  this  morning,  he  has  had 
several  interviews  with  my  father  on  the  subject.  I  believe  he 
and  my  father  thought  that  it  was  better  to  get  me  away  as  soon 
as  possible,  as  Ruggiero's  friends  may  put  down  the  disgrace 
which  has  befallen  him  to  my  interference  in  his  first  attempt  to 
carry  off  the  girls." 

"  Well,  I  think  you  are  a  lucky  fellow  anyhow,  Francisco,  and 
I  hope  that  I  may  be  soon  doing  something  also.  I  shall  speak 
to  my  father  about  it,  and  ask  him  to  get  Polani  to  let  me  take 
some  voyages  in  his  vessels,  so  that  I  may  be  fit  to  become  an 
officer  in  one  of  the  state  galleys  as  soon  as  I  am  of  age.  Where 
are  you  going  now  ?  " 


"  YOU  ARE  THE   HEROINES   OF  THE  DAY.  123 

"  I  am  going  round  to  the  School  of  Arms  to  say  good-bye  to 
our  comrades ;  after  that  I  am  going  to  Signor  Polani's  to  pay 
my  respects  to  the  signoras ;  then  I  shall  be  at  home  with  my 
father  till  it  is  time  to  go  on  board.  He  will  have  left  here 
before  I  return  from  my  voyage,  as  he  is  going  to  wind  up  his 
affairs  at  once  and  return  to  England." 

1  "  Well,  I  will  accompany  you  to  the  school  and  to  my 
cousin's,"  Matteo  said.  "  I  shall  miss  you  terribly  here,  and 
shall  certainly  do  all  I  can  to  follow  your  example  and  get  afloat. 
You  may  have  all  sorts  of  adventures,  for  we  shall  certainly  be 
at  war  with  Genoa  before  many  weeks  are  over,  and  you  will 
have  to  keep  a  sharp  look-out  for  their  war  galleys.  Polani's 
ships  are  prizes  worth  taking,  and  you  may  have  the  chance  of 
seeing  the  inside  of  a  Genoese  prison  before  you  return." 

After  a  visit  to  the  School  of  Arms  the  two  friends  were 
rowed  to  Signor  Polani's.  The  merchant  himself  was  out,  but 
they  were  at  once  shown  up  to  the  room  where  the  girls  were 
sitting. 

11  My  dear  cousins,"  Matteo  said  as  he  entered,  "  I  am 
delighted  to  see  you  back  safe  and  well.  All  Venice  is  talking 
of  your  return.  You  are  the  heroines  of  the  day.  You  do 
not  know  what  an  excitement  there  has  been  over  your 
adventure." 

"  The  sooner  people  get  to  talk  about  something  else  the 
better,  Matteo,"  Maria  said,  "  for  we  shall  have  to  be  prisoners 
all  day  till  something  else  occupies  their  attention.  We  have 
not  the  least  desire  to  be  pointed  at,  whenever  we  go  out,  as  the 
maidens  who  were  carried  away.  If  the  Venetians  were  so  in- 
terested in  us,  they  had  much  better  have  set  about  discovering 
where  we  were  hidden  away  before." 

"  But  everyone  did  try,  I  can  assure  you,  Maria.  Every 
place  has  been  ransacked,  high  and  low.  Every  gondolier  has 
been  questioned  and  cross-questioned  as  to  his  doings  on  that 


124  "FRANCISCO   IS  DIFFERENT." 

day.  Every  fishing  village  has  been  visited.  Never  was  such 
a  search,  I  do  believe.  But  who  could  have  thought  of  your 
being  hidden  away  all  the  time  at  San  Nicolo !  As  for  me,  I 
have  spent  most  of  my  time  in  a  gondola,  going  out  and  staring 
up  at  every  house  I  passed,  in  hopes  of  seeing  a  handkerchief 
waved  from  a  casement.  And  so  has  Francisco ;  he  has  been 
just  as  busy  in  the  search  as  anyone,  I  can  assure  you." 

"  Francisco  is  different,"  Maria  said,  not  observing  the  signs 
Francis  was  making  for  her  to  be  silent.  "  Francisco  has  got 
eyes  in  his  head  and  a  brain  in  his  skull,  which  is  more,  it 
seems,  than  any  of  the  Venetians  have  ;  and  had  he  not  brought 
father  to  our  hiding-place,  there  we  should  have  remained  until 
Ruggiero  Mocenigo  came  and  carried  us  away." 

"  Francisco  brought  your  father  the  news  ! "  Matteo  exclaimed 
in  astonishment.  "  Why,  was  it  he  who  found  you  out,  after 
all?" 

"Did  you  not  know  that,  Matteo?  Of  course  it  was  Fran- 
cisco !  As  I  told  you,  he  has  got  brains ;  and  if  it  had  not  been 
for  him  we  should  certainly  never  have  been  rescued.  Giulia 
and  I  owe  him  everything — don't  we,  Giulia  ?  " 

"  Forgive  me  for  not  telling  you,  Matteo,"  Francis  said  to  his 
astonished  friend,  "  but  Signer  Polani  and  my  father  both 
impressed  upon  me  so  strongly  that  I  should  keep  silent  as  to 
my  share  in  the  business,  that  I  thought  it  better  not  even  to 
mention  it  to  you  at  present.  It  was  purely  the  result  of  an 
accident." 

"  It  was  nothing  of  the  sort,"  Maria  said ;  "  it  was  the  result 
of  your  keeping  your  eyes  open  and  knowing  how  to  put  two 
and  two  together.  I  did  not  know,  Francisco,  that  it  was  a 
secret.  We  have  not  seen  our  father  since  we  have  returned, 
and  I  suppose  he  thought  we  should  see  nobody  until  he  saw 
us  again,  and  so  did  not  tell  us  that  we  were  not  to  mention 
your  name  in  the  affair ;  but  we  will  be  careful  in  future." 


"WHAT!  ARE  YOU  GOING  AWAY?"  125 

"  But  how  was  it,  Francisco  ?  "  Matteo  asked.  "  Now  I  know 
$o  much  as  this,  I  suppose  I  can  be  told  the  rest.  I  can  under- 
stand well  enough  why  it  was  to  be  kept  a  secret,  and  why  my 
cousin  is  anxious  to  get  you  out  of  Venice  at  once." 

Francis  related  the  manner  in  which  he  first  became 
acquainted  with  the  existence  of  the  hut  on  the  island  and  the 
fact  of  its  being  frequented  by  Ruggiero  Mocenigo,  and  how, 
on  catching  sight  of  the  gouvernante  in  a  gondola,  and  seeing 
her  make  out  across  the  lagoons,  the  idea  struck  him  that  the 
girls  were  confined  in  the  hut. 

"  It  is  all  very  simple,  you  see,  Matteo,"  he  concluded. 

"I  will  never  say  anything  against  learning  to  row  a  gon- 
dola in  future,"  Matteo  said,  "  for  it  seems  to  lead  to  all  sorts 
of  adventures ;  and  unless  you  could  have  rowed  well,  you 
would  never  have  got  back  to  tell  the  story.  But  it  is  certain 
that  it  is  a  good  thing  you  are  leaving  Venice  for  a  time,  for 
Ruggiero's  friends  may  find  out  the  share  you  had  in  it  from 
some  of  my  cousin's  servants.  You  may  be  sure  that  they 
will  do  their  best  to  discover  how  he  came  to  be  informed 
of  the  hiding-place,  and  he  is  quite  right  to  send  you  off  at 
once." 

"  What !  are  you  going  away,  Francisco  ?  "  the  two  girls  ex- 
claimed together. 

"I  am  sailing  to-morrow  in  one  of  your  father's  ships, 
signoras." 

"  And  you  are  not  coming  back  again  ?  "  Maria  exclaimed. 

"  I  hope  to  have  the  pleasure  of  seeing  you  again  before  very 
long,  signora.  I  am  entering  your  father's  service  for  good, 
and  shall  be  backwards  and  forwards  to  Venice  as  the  ship 
comes  and  goes.  My  father  is  returning  to  England,  and  Signer 
Polani  has  most  kindly  requested  me  to  make  my  home  with 
him  whenever  I  am  in  port." 

"That  is  better,"  Maria  said.    "We  should  have  a  pretty 


126  THAT   WILL    BE   VERY    PLEASANT. 

quarrel  with  papa  if  he  had  let  you  go  away  altogether,  after 
what  you  have  done  for  us — shouldn't  we,  Giulia?  " 

But  Giulia  had  walked  away  to  the  window,  and  did  not  seem 
to  hear  the  question. 

"  That  will  be  very  pleasant,"  Maria  went  on  ;  for  you  will 
be  back  every  two  or  three  months,  and  I  shall  take  good  care 
that  papa  does  not  send  the  ship  off  in  a  hurry  again.  It  will 
be  almost  as  good  as  having  a  brother ;  and  I  look  upon  you 
almost  as  a  brother  now,  Francisco — and  a  very  good  brother 
too.  I  don't  think  that  man  will  molest  us  any  more.  If  I 
thought  there  was  any  chance  of  it,  I  should  ask  papa  to  keep 
you  for  a  time,  because  I  should  feel  confident  that  you  would 
manage  to  protect  us  somehow." 

"  I  do  not  think  there  is  the  slightest  chance  of  more  trouble 
from  him,"  Francis  said.  "  He  is  sure  of  a  long  term  of  im- 
prisonment for  carrying  you  off." 

"  That  is  the  least  they  can  do  to  him,  I  should  think,"  Maria 
said  indignantly.  "  I  certainly  shall  not  feel  confortable  while  he 
is  at  large." 

After  half  an  hour's  talk  Francis  and  his  friend  took  their 
leave. 

"  You  certainly  were  born  with  a  silver  spoon  in  your  mouth," 
Matteo  said  as  they  took  their  seats  in  the  gondola,  "  and  my 
cousin  does  well  to  get  you  out  of  Venice  at  once,  for  I  can  tell 
you  there  are  scores  of  young  fellows  who  would  feel  jealous  at 
your  position  with  my  cousins." 

"  Nonsense  !  "  Francis  said,  colouring.  "  How  can  you  talk 
so  absurdly,  Matteo?  I  am  only  a  boy  and  it  will  be  years 
before  I  could  think  of  marriage.  Besides,  your  cousins  are  said 
to  be  the  richest  heiresses  in  Venice ;  and  it  is  not  because  I 
have  been  able  to  be  of  some  slight  service  to  them  that  I 
should  venture  to  think  of  either  of  them  in  that  way." 

"We    shall  see,"    Matteo    laughed.      Maria    is  a  little  too 


"THE  THING   IS   ABSURD."  \1"J 

old  for  you.  I  grant,  but  Giulia  will  do  very  well ;  and  as  you 
have  already  come,  as  Maria  says,  to  be  looked  upon  by  them  as 
a  brother  and  protector,  there  is  no  saying  as  to  how  she  may 
regard  you  in  another  two  or  three  years." 

"The  thing  is  absurd,  Matteo,"  Francis  said  impatiently;  "  do 
not  talk  such  nonsense  any  more." 

Matteo  lay  back  in  his  seat  and  whistled. 

"  I  will  say  no  more  about  it  at  present,  Francisco,"  he  said, 
after  a  pause  ;  "  but  I  must  own  that  I  should  be  well  content 
to  stand  as  high  in  the  good  graces  of  my  pretty  cousins  as  you 
do." 

The  next  morning  Francis  spent  some  time  with  his  father 
talking  over  future  arrangements. 

"  I  have  no  doubt  that  I  shall  see  you  sometimes,  Francis  ;  for 
Polani  will  be  sure  to  give  you  an  opportunity  of  making  a  trip 
to  England  from  time  to  time,  in  one  of  his  ships  trading  thither. 
Unless  anything  unexpected  happens,  your  future  appears 
assured.  Polani  tells  me  he  shall  always  regard  you  in  the 
light  of  a  son  ;  and  I  have  no  fear  of  your  doing  anything 
to  cause  him  to  forfeit  his  good  opinion  of  you.  Do  not  be 
over  adventurous,  for  even  in  a  merchant  ship  there  are  many 
perils  to  be  met  with.  Pirates  swarm  in  the  Mediterranean,  in 
spite  of  the  efforts  of  Venice  to  suppress  them ;  and  when  war 
is  going  on,  both  Venice  and  Genoa  send  out  numbers  of  ships 
whose  doings  savour  strongly  of  piracy.  Remember  that  the 
first  duty  of  the  captain  of  a  merchant  ship  is  to  save  his  vessel 
and  cargo,  and  that  he  should  not  think  of  fighting  unless  he 
sees  no  other  method  of  escape  open  to  him. 

"  It  is  possible  that,  after  a  time,  I  may  send  one  of  your 
brothers  out  here,  but  that  will  depend  upon  what  I  find  of 
their  disposition  when  I  get  home ;  for  it  will  be  worse  than 
useless  to  send  a  lad  of  a  headstrong  disposition  out  to  the  care 
of  one  but  a  few  years  older  than  himself.  But  this  we  can  talk 


128  "VENICE   HAS   RARE   VIRTUES." 

about  when  you  come  over  to  England,  and  we  see  what  posi- 
tion you  are  occupying  here.  I  fear  that  Venice  is  about  to 
enter  upon  a  period  of  great  difficulty  and  danger.  There  can 
be  little  doubt  that  Genoa,  Padua,  and  Hungary  are  leagued 
against  her ;  and  powerful  as  she  is,  and  great  as  are  her  re- 
sources, they  will  be  taxed  to  the  utmost  to  carry  her  througn 
the  dangers  that  threaten  her.  However,  I  have  faith  in  her 
future,  and  believe  that  she  will  weather  the  storm,  as  she  has 
done  many  that  have  preceded  it. 

"Venice  has  the  rare  virtue  of  endurance — the  greatest 
dangers,  the  most  disastrous  defeats,  fail  to  shake  her  courage, 
and  only  arouse  her  to  greater  efforts.  In  this  respect  she  is 
in  the  greatest  contrast  to  her  rival,  Genoa,  who  always  loses 
heart  the  moment  the  tide  turns  against  her.  No  doubt  this  is 
due,  in  no  slight  extent,  to  her  oligarchic  form  of  government. 
The  people  see  the  nobles,  who  rule  them,  calm  and  self-pos- 
sessed, however  great  the  danger,  and  remain  confident  and 
tranquil ;  while  in  Genoa  each  misfortune  is  the  signal  for  a 
struggle  between  contending  factions.  The  occasion  is  seized 
to  throw  blame  and  contumely  upon  those  in  power,  and  the 
people  give  way  to  alternate  outbursts  of  rage  and  depres- 
sion. 

"  I  do  not  say  there  are  no  faults  in  the  government  of 
Venice,  but  taking  her  altogether  there  is  no  government  in 
Europe  to  compare  with  it.  During  the  last  three  hundred 
years  the  history  of  every  other  city  in  Italy,  I  may  say  of 
every  other  nation  in  Europe,  is  one  long  record  of  intestine 
struggle  and  bloodshed,  while  in  Venice  there  has  not  been 
a  single  popular  tumult  worthy  of  the  name.  It  is  to  the 
strength,  the  firmness,  and  the  moderation  of  her  government 
that  Venice  owes  her  advancement,  the  respect  in  which  she  is 
held  among  nations,  as  much  as  to  the  commercial  industry  of 
her  people. 


THE  "  BONITO."  129 

"  She  alone  among  nations  could  for  years  have  withstood 
the  interdict  of  the  pope,  or  the  misfortunes  that  have  some- 
times befallen  her.  She  alone  has  never  felt  the  foot  of  the 
invader,  or  bent  her  neck  beneath  a  foreign  yoke  to  preserve 
her  existence.  Here,  save  only  in  matters  of  government,  all 
opinions  are  free,  strangers  of  all  nationalities  are  welcome. 
It  is  a  grand  city  and  a  grand  people,  Francis,  and  though  I 
shall  be  glad  to  return  to  England  I  cannot  but  feel  regret  at 
leaving  it.  And  now,  my  boy,  it  is  time  to  be  going  off  to  your 
ship.  Polani  said  she  would  sail  at  ten  o'clock.  It  is  now 
nine,  and  it  will  take  you  half  an  hour  to  get  there.  I  am  glad 
to  hear  that  Giuseppi  is  going  with  you ;  the  lad  is  faithful 
and  attached  to  you,  and  may  be  of  service.  Your  trunk  has 
already  been  sent  on  board,  so  let  us  be  going." 

On  arriving  at  the  ship,  which  was  lying  in  the  port  of 
Malamocco  they  found  that  she  was  just  ready  for  sailing,  the 
last  bales  of  goods  were  being  hoisted  on  board,  and  the  sailors 
were  preparing  to  loosen  the  sails. 

The  Bonito  was  a  large  vessel,  built  for  stowage  rather  than 
speed.  She  carried  two  masts  with  large  square  sails,  and 
before  the  wind  would  probably  proceed  at  a  fair  rate ;  but  the 
art  of  sailing  close-hauled  was  then  unknown,  and  in  the  event 
of  the  wind  being  unfavourable  she  would  be  forced  either  to 
anchor  or  to  depend  upon  her  oars,  of  which  she  rowed  fifteen 
on  either  side.  As  they  mounted  on  to  the  deck  they  were 
greeted  by  Polani  himself. 

"I  have  come  off  to  see  the  last  of  your  son,  Messer 
Hammond,  and  to  make  sure  that  my  orders  for  his  comfort 
have  been  carried  out.  Captain  Corpadio,  this  is  the  young 
gentleman  of  whom  I  have  spoken  to  you,  and  who  is  to  be 
treated  in  all  respects  as  if  he  were  my  son.  You  will  instruct 
him  in  all  matters  connected  with  the  navigation  of  the  ship, 
as  well  as  in  the  mercantile  po'rtion  of  the  business,  the  best 


130  BAD   NEWS. 

methods  of  buying  and  selling,  the  pricas  of  goods  and  the 
methods  of  payment.  This  is  your  cabin,  Francisco." 

He  opened  the  door  of  a  roomy  cabin  in  the  poop  of  the 
ship.  It  was  fitted  up  with  every  luxury. 

"  Thank  you  very  much  indeed,  Signor  Polani,"  Francis  said. 
"The  only  fault  is  that  it  is  too  comfortable.  I  would  as  lief 
have  roughed  it  as  other  aspirants  have  to  do." 

"There  was  no  occasion,  Francisco.  When  there  is  rough 
work  to  be  done  you  will,  I  have  no  doubt,  do  it ;  but  as  you 
are  going  to  be  a  trader,  and  not  a  sailor,  there  is  no  occasion 
that  you  should  do  so  more  than  is  necessary.  You  will  learn 
to  command  a  ship  just  as  well  as  if  you  began  by  dipping  your 
hands  in  tar.  And  it  is  well  that  you  should  learn  to  do  this, 
for  unless  a  man  can  sail  a  vessel  himself  he  is  not  well  qualified 
to  judge  of  the  merits  of  men  he  appoints  to  be  captains ;  but 
you  must  remember  that  you  are  going  as  a  representative  of 
my  house,  and  must,  therefore,  travel  in  accordance  with  that 
condition.  You  will  be  sorry  to  hear  that  bad  news  has  just 
been  received  from  the  mainland.  The  state  galley  sent  to 
fetch  Ruggiero  Mocenigo  has  arrived  with  the  news  that  on 
the  previous  night  a  strong  party  of  men  who  are  believed  to 
have  come  from  Padua,  fell  upon  the  guard  and  carried  off 
Ruggiero.  My  sailors  came  up  and  fought  stoutly,  but  they 
were  overpowered,  and  several  of  them  were  killed ;  so  Rug- 
giero is  again  at  large. 

"This  is  a  great  disappointment  to  me.  Though  the  villain 
is  not  likely  to  show  his  face  in  the  Venetian  territory  again, 
I  shall  be  anxious  until  Maria  is  safely  married,  and  shall 
lose  no  time  in  choosing  a  husband  for  her.  Unless  I  am  mis- 
taken her  liking  is  turned  in  the  direction  of  Rufino,  brother 
of  your  friend  Matteo  Giustiniani,  and  as  I  like  none  better 
among  the  suitors  for  her  hand,  methinks  that  by  the  time  you 
return  you  will  find  that  they  are  betrothed.  And  now  I  hear 


ON   BOARD.  131 

the  sailors  are  heaving  the  anchor,  and  therefore,  Messer  Ham- 
mond, it  is  time  we  took  to  our  boats." 

There  was  a  parting  embrace  between  Francis  and  his  father. 
Then  the  merchants  descended  into  their  gondolas,  and  lay 
waiting  alongside  until  the  anchor  was  up,  the  great  sails 
shaken  out,  and  ihe  Bonito  began  to  move  slowly  through  the 
water  towards  the  entrance  of  the  port ;  then,  with  a  final  wave 
of  the  hand,  the  gondolas  rowed  off,  and  Francis  turned  to  look 
at  his  surroundings.  The  first  object  that  met  his  eye  was 
Giuseppi,  who  was  standing  near  him  waving  his  cap  to  his  father. 

"  Well,  Giuseppi,  what  do  you  think  of  this  ?" 

"  I  don't  know  what  to  think  yet,  Messer  Francisco ;  it  all 
seems  so  big  and  solid  one  does  not  feel  as  if  one  was  on  the 
water,  it's  more  like  living  in  a  house.  It  does  not  seem  as  if 
anything  could  move  her." 

"  You  will  find  the  waves  can  move  her  about  when  we  get 
fairly  to  sea,  Giuseppi,  and  the  time  will  come  when  you  will 
think  our  fast  gondola  was  a  steady  craft  in  comparison.  How 
long  have  you  been  on  board  ?" 

"  I  came  off  three  hours  ago,  signer,  with  the  boat  that 
brought  the  furniture  for  your  cabin.  I  have  been  putting 
that  to  rights  since.  A  supply  of  the  best  wine  has  been 
sent  off,  and  extra  stores  of  all  sorts,  so  you  need  not  be  afraid 
of  being  starved  on  the  voyage." 

"  I  wish  he  hadn't  sent  so  much,"  Francis  said ;  "  it  makes 
one  feel  like  a  milksop.  Whose  cabin  is  it  I  have  got  ?" 

"  I  believe  that  it  is  the  cabin  usually  used  by  the  supercargo 
who  is  in  charge  of  the  goods  and  does  the  trading,  but  the 
men  say  the  captain  of  this  ship  has  been  a  great  many  years 
in  Polani's  employment,  and  often  sails  without  a  supercargo, 
being  able  to  manage  the  trading  perfectly  well  by  himself  ;  but 
the  usual  cabin  is  only  half  the  size  of  yours,  and  two  have  been 
thrown  into  one  to  make  it  light  and  airy.' 


132  "  SHE  IS  LIVELY   ENOUGH   IN   A   STORM." 

"  And  where  do  you  sleep,  Giuseppi  ?  " 

"  I  am  going  to  sleep  in  the  passage  outside  your  door, 
Messer  Francisco." 

"Oh,  but  I  sha'n't  like  that!"  Francis  said;  "you  ought  to 
have  a  better  place  than  that." 

Giuseppi  laughed. 

"  Why,  Messer  Francisco,  considering  that  half  my  time  I 
slept  in  the  gondola,  and  the  other  half  on  some  straw  in  our 
kitchen,  I  shall  do  capitally.  Of  course  I  could  sleep  in  the 
fo 'castle  with  the  crew  if  I  liked,  but  I  should  find  it  hot  and 
stifling  there.  I  chose  the  place  myself,  and  asked  the  captain 
if  I  could  sleep  there,  and  he  has  given  me  leave." 

In  an  hour  the  Bonito  had  passed  through  the  Malamocco 
Channel  and  was  out  on  the  broad  sea.  The  wind  was  very 
light,  and  but  just  sufficient  to  keep  the  great  sails  bellied  out. 
The  sailors  were  all  at  work,  coiling  down  ropes,  washing  the 
decks,  and  making  everything  clean  and  tidy. 

"  This  is  a  good  start,  Messer  Hammond,"  the  captain  said, 
coming  up  to  him ;  "  if  this  wind  holds  we  shall  be  able  to 
make  our  course  round  the  southern  point  of  Greece  and  then 
on  to  Candia,  which  is  our  first  port.  I  always  like  a  light 
breeze  when  I  first  go  out  of  port,  it  gives  time  for  everyone 
to  get  at  home  and  have  thinks  ship-shape  before  we  begin  to 
get  lively." 

"  She  does  not  look  as  if  she  would  ever  get  lively,"  Francis 
said,  looking  at  the  heavy  vessel. 

"  She  is  lively  enough  in  a  storm,  I  can  tell  you,"  the  captain 
said,  laughing ;  "  when  she  once  begins  to  roll  she  does  it  in 
earnest,  but  she  is  a  fine  sea  boat,  and  I  have  no  fear  of  gales. 
I  wish  I  could  say  as  much  of  pirates ;  however,  she  has 
always  been  fortunate,  and  as  we  carry  a  stout  crew  she  could 
give  a  good  account  of  herself  against  any  of  the  small  piratical 
vessels  that  swarm  among  the  islands,  although,  of  course,  if 


ADVENTURES   WITH    PIRATES.  133 

she  fell  in  with  two  or  three  of  them  together  it  would  be 
awkward." 

"  How  many  men  do  you  carry  altogether,  captain  ?  " 

"  Just  seventy.  You  see  she  rows  thirty  oars,  and  in  case  of 
need  we  put  two  men  to  each  oar,  and  though  she  doesn't 
look  fast  she  can  get  along  at  a  fine  rate  when  the  oars  are 
double-banked.  We  have  shown  them  our  heels  many  a  time, 
for  our  orders  are  strict,  we  are  never  to  fight  if  we  can  get 
away  by  running." 

"  But  I  suppose  you  have  to  fight  sometimes?  "  Francis  asked. 

"  Yes,  I  have  been  in  some  tough  fights  several  times,  though 
not  in  the  Bonilo,  which  was  only  built  last  year.  Once  in  the 
Lion  we  were  attacked  by  three  pirates.  We  were  at  anchor 
in  a  bay,  and  the  wind  was  blowing  on  the  shore,  when  they 
suddenly  came  round  the  headland,  so  there  was  no  chance  of 
running,  and  we  had  to  fight  it  out.  We  fought  for  five  hours 
before  they  sheered  off  pretty  well  crippled,  and  one  of  them 
in  flames,  for  we  carried  Greek  fire. 

"  Three  or  four  times  they  nearly  got  a  footing  on  deck,  but 
we  managed  to  beat  them  off  somehow.  We  lost  a  third  of 
our  crew.  I  don't  think  there  was  a  man  escaped  without  a 
wound.  I  was  laid  up  for  three  months  after  I  got  home  with 
a  slash  on  the  shoulder,  which  pretty  nigh  took  off  my  left  arm. 
However,  we  saved  the  ship  and  the  cargo,  which  was  a  valuable 
one,  and  Messer  Polani  saw  that  no  one  was  the  worse  for  his 
share  in  the  business.  There's  no  more  liberal  hearted  man 
in  the  trade  than  he  is,  and  whatever  may  be  the  scarcity  of 
hands  in  the  port  there  is  never  any  difficulty  in  getting  a 
good  crew  together  for  his  vessels. 

"  Of  course  there  are  the  roughs  with  the  smooths.  Some 
years  ago  I  was  in  prison  for  six  months  with  all  my  crew 
in  Azoff.  It  was  the  work  of  those  rascally  Genoese,  who 
are  always  doing  us  a  bad  turn  when  they  have  the  chance, 


134  ANTAGONISM. 

even  when  we  are  at  peace  with  them.  They  set  the  mind 
of  the  native  khan — that  is  the  prince  of  the  country — 
against  us  by  some  lying  stories  that  we  had  been  engaged 
in  smuggling  goods  in  at  another  port.  And  suddenly,  in  the 
middle  of  the  night,  in  marched  his  soldiers  on  board  my  ship 
and  two  other  Venetian  craft  lying  in  the  harbour,  and  took 
possession  of  them,  and  shut  us  all  up  in  prison.  There  we 
were  till  Messer  Polani  got  news  and  sent  out  another  ship  to 
pay  the  fine  demanded.  That  was  no  joke,  I  can  tell  you,  for 
the  prison  was  so  hot  and  crowded,  and  the  food  so  bad,  that 
we  got  fever,  and  pretty  near  half  of  us  died  before  our  ransom 
came.  Then  at  Constantinople  the  Genoese  stirred  the  people 
up  against  us  once  or  twice,  and  all  the  sailors  ashore  had  to  fight 
for  their  lives.  Those  Genoese  are  always  doing  us  mischief." 

"  But  I  suppose  you  do  them  mischief  sometimes,  captain  ? 
I  imagine  it  isn't  all  one  side." 

"  Of  course  we  pay  them  out  when  we  get  a  chance,"  the 
captain  replied.  "  It  isn't  likely  we  are  going  to  stand  being 
always  put  upon,  and  not  take  our  chance  when  it  comes.  We 
only  want  fair  trade  and  no  favour,  while  those  rascals  want  it 
all  to  themselves.  They  know  they  have  no  chance  with  us 
when  it  comes  to  fair  trading." 

"  You  know,  captain,  that  the  Genoese  say  just  the  same  things 
about  the  Venetians  that  the  Venetians  do  about  them.  So  I 
expect  that  there  are  faults  on  both  sides." 

The  captain  laughed. 

"  I  suppose  each  want  to  have  matters  their  own  way,  Messer 
Hammond,  but  I  don't  consider  the  Genoese  have  any  right  to 
come  interfering  with  us  to  the  eastward  of  Italy.  They 
have  got  France  and  Spain  to  trade  with,  and  all  the  western 
parts  of  Italy.  Why  don't  they  keep  there  ?  Besides,  I  look 
upon  them  as  landsmen.  Why,  we  can  always  lick  them  at  sea 
in  a  fair  fight." 


"I   HAVE  NEVER  BEEN   TO   ENGLAND."  135 

"  Generally,  captain  :  I  admit  you  generally  thrash  them ; 
still,  you  know  they  have  sometimes  got  the  better  of  you,  even 
when  the  force  was  equal." 

The  captain  grunted.     He  could  not  deny  the  fact. 

"  Sometimes  our  captains  don't  do  their  duty,"  he  said. 
"  They  put  a  lot  of  young  patricians  in  command  of  the  gal- 
leys, men  that  don't  know  one  end  of  a  ship  from  the  other,  and 
then,  of  course,  we  get  the  worst  of  it.  But  1  maintain  that, 
properly  fought,  a  Venetian  ship  is  always  more  than  a  match 
for  a  Genoese." 

"  I  think  she  generally  is,  captain,  and  I  hope  it  will  always 
prove  so  in  the  future.  You  see,  though  I  am  English  I  have 
lived  long  enough  in  Venice  to  feel  like  a  Venetian." 

"  I  have  never  been  to  England,"  the  captain  said,  "  though 
a  good  many  Venetian  ships  go  there  every  year.  They  tell 
me  it's  an  island,  like  Venice,  only  a  deal  bigger  than  any 
we  have  got  in  the  Mediterranean.  Those  who  have  been 
there  say  the  sea  is  mighty  stormy,  and  that  sailing  up  from 
Spain  you  get  tremendous  tempests  sometimes,  with  the  waves 
ever  so  much  bigger  than  we  have  here,  and  longer  and  more 
regular,  but  not  so  trying  to  the  ships  as  the  short  sharp  gales 
of  these  seas." 

"  I  believe  that  is  so,  captain,  though  I  don't  know  anything 
about  it  myself.  It  is  some  years  since  I  came  out,  and  our 
voyage  was  a  very  calm  one." 

Three  days  of  quiet  sailing  and  the  Bonito  rounded  the 
headlands  of  the  Morea,  and  shaped  her  course  to  Candia.  The 
voyage  was  a  very  pleasant  one  to  Francis.  Each  day  the  cap- 
tain brought  out  the  list  of  cargo  and  instructed  him  in  the 
prices  of  each  description  of  goods,  told  him  of  the  various 
descriptions  of  merchandise  which  they  would  be  likely  to  pur- 
chase at  the  different  ports  at  which  they  were  to  touch,  and 
the  prices  which  they  would  probably  have  to  pay  for  them. 


136  A  STORM. 

A  certain  time,  too,  was  devoted  each  day  to  the  examination 
of  the  charts  of  the  various  ports  and  islands,  the  captain  point- 
ing out  the  marks  which  were  to  be  observed  on  entering  and 
leaving  the  harbours,  the  best  places  for  anchorage,  and  the  points 
where  shelter  could  be  obtained  should  high  winds  come  on. 

After  losing  sight  of  the  Morea  the  weather  changed,  clouds 
banked  up  rapidly  in  the  south-west,  and  the  captain  ordered 
the  great  sails  to  be  furled. 

"  We  are  going  to  have  a  serious  gale,"  he  said  to  Francis, 
"  which  is  unusual  at  this  period  of  the  year.  I  have  thought 
for  the  last  two  days  we  were  going  to  have  a  change,  but  I 
hoped  to  have  reached  Candia  before  the  gale  burst  upon  us. 
I  fear  that  this  will  drive  us  off  our  course." 

By  evening  it  was  blowing  hard,  and  the  sea  got  up  rapidly. 
The  ship  speedily  justified  the  remarks  of  the  captain  on  her 
power  of  rolling,  and  the  oars,  at  which  the  men  had  been 
labouring  since  the  sails  were  furled,  were  laid  in. 

"  It  is  imposssble  to  keep  our  course,"  the  captain  said,  "  and 
we  must  run  up  among  the  islands,  and  anchor  under  the  lee  of 
one  of  them.  I  should  recommend  you  to  get  into  your  bed  as 
soon  as  possible,  you  have  not  learned  to  keep  your  legs  in  a 
storm.  I  see  that  lad  of  yours  is  very  ill  already,  but  as  you 
show  no  signs  of  suffering  thus  far  you  will  probably  escape." 

It  was  some  time,  however,  before. Francis  went  below.  The 
scene  was  novel  to  him,  and  he  was  astonished  at  the  sight  of 
the  waves,  and  at  the  manner  in  which  they  tossed  the  great  ship 
about,  as  if  she  were  an  egg-shell ;  but  when  it  became  quite 
dark,  and  he  could  see  nothing  but  the  white  crests  of  the  waves 
and  the  foam  that  flew  high  in  the  air  every  time  the  bluff  bows 
of  the  ship  plunged  down  into  a  hollow,  he  took  the  captain's 
advice  and  retired  to  his  cabin.  He  was  on  deck  again 
early.  A  gray  mist  overhung  the  water;  the  sea  was  of  a 
leaden  colour,  crested  with  white  heads ;  the  waves  were  far 


ON    BOARD   THE    " BQtilTO  "    IN    A    STORM. 


AMONG  THE  ISLANDS.  137 

higher  than  they  had  been  on  the  previous  evening,  and  as  they 
came  racing  along  behind  the  Bonito  each  crest  seemed  as  if 
it  would  rise  over  her  stern  and  overwhelm  her ;  but  this  ap- 
prehension was  soon  dispelled,  as  he  saw  how  lightly  the  vessel 
rose  each  time.  Although  showing  but  a  very  small  breadth  of 
sail,  she  was  running  along  at  a  great  rate,  leaving  a  white  streak 
of  foam  behind  her.  The  captain  was  standing  near  the  helm, 
and  Francis  made  his  way  to  him. 

"  Well,  captain,  and  how  are  you  getting  on,  and  where  are 
we  ?  "  he  asked  cheerfully. 

"  We  are  getting  on  well  enough,  Messer  Francisco,  as  you  can 
see  for  yourself.  The  Bonito  is  as  good  a  sea  boat  as  ever 
floated,  and  would  not  care  for  the  wind  were  it  twice  as  strong 
as  it  is.  It  is  not  the  storm  I  am  thinking  about,  but  the 
islands.  If  we  were  down  in  the  Mediterranean  I  could  turn  into 
my  cot  and  sleep  soundly ;  but  here  it  is  another  matter.  We  are 
somewhere  up  among  the  islands,  but  where  no  man  can  say. 
The  wind  has  shifted  a  bit  two  or  three  times  during  the  night, 
and,  as  we  are  obliged  to  run  straight  before  it,  there  is  no  cal- 
culating to  within  a  few  miles  where  we  are.  I  have  tried  to 
edge  out  to  the  westward  as  much  as  I  could,  but  with  this  wind 
blowing  and  the  height  of  the  ship  out  of  water,  we  sag  away  to 
leeward  so  fast  that  nothing  is  gained  by  it. 

"According  to  my  calculation  we  cannot  be  very  far  from 
the  west  coast  of  Mitylene.  If  the  clouds  would  but  lift  and 
give  us  a  look  round  for  two  minutes  we  should  know  all  about 
it,  as  I  know  the  outline  of  every  island  in  the  ^Egean  ;  and  as 
over  on  this  side  you  are  always  in  sight  of  two  or  three  of  them, 
I  should  know  all  about  it  if  I  could  get  a  view  of  the  land. 
Now,  for  aught  we  know,  we  may  be  running  straight  down 
upon  some  rocky  coast." 

The  idea  was  not  a  pleasant  one,  and  Francis  strained  his  eyes, 
gazing  through  the  mist. 


138  IN  PORT. 

"  What  should  we  do  if  we  saw  land,  captain  ?  "  he  asked  pres- 
ently. 

"  Get  out  the  oars,  row  her  head  round,  and  try  to  work  either 
to  the  right  or  left,  whichever  point  of  land  seemed  easiest 
to  weather.  Of  course,  if  it  was  the  mainland  we  were  being 
driven  on  there  would  be  no  use,  and  we  should  try  and  row  into 
the  teeth  of  the  gale,  so  as  to  keep  her  off  land  as  long  as  possi- 
ble, in  the  hope  of  the  wind  dropping.  When  we  got  into 
shallow  water  we  should  drop  our  anchors  and  still  keep  on  row- 
ing to  lessen  the  strain  upon  them.  If  they  gave  there  would  be 
an  end  to  the  Bonito.  But  if,  as  I  think,  we  are  driving  towards 
Mitylene,  there  is  a  safe  harbour  on  this  side  of  the  island, 
and  I  shall  certainly  run  into  it.  It  is  well  sheltered  and 
landlocked." 

Two  more  hours  passed,  and  then  there  was  a  startling  trans- 
formation. The  clouds  broke  suddenly  and  cleared  off,  as  if  by 
magic,  and  the  sun  streamed  brightly  out.  The  wind  was  blow- 
ing as  strong  as  ever,  but  the  change  in  the  hue  of  sky  and 
sea  would  at  once  have  raised  the  spirits  of  the  tired  crew 
had  not  a  long  line  of  land  been  seen  stretching  ahead  of  them 
at  a  distance  of  four  or  five  miles. 

"  Just  as  I  thought,"  the  captain  exclaimed  as  he  saw  it. 
"That  is  Mitylene  sure  enough, and  the  entrance  to  the  harbour 
I  spoke  of  lies  away  there  on  that  beam." 

The  oars  were  at  once  got  out,  the  sale  braced  up  a  little,  and 
the  Bonito  made  for  the  point  indicated  by  the  captain,  who  him- 
self took  the  helm.  Another  half-hour  and  they  were  close 
to  land.  Francis  could  see  no  sign  of  a  port,  but  in  a  few  min- 
utes the  Bonito  rounded  the  end  of  a  low  island,  and  a  passage 
opened  before  her.  She  passed  through  this  and  found  herself 
in  still  water,  in  a  harbour  large  enough  to  hold  the  fleet 
of  Venice.  The  anchor  was  speedily  let  drop. 

"  It  seems  almost  bewildering,"  Francis  said,  "  the  hush  and 


SUSPICIOUS  CRAFT.  139 

quiet  hereafter  the  turmoil  of  the  storm  outside.    To  whom  does 
Mitylene  belong?" 

"  The  Genoese  have  a  trading  station  and  a  castle  at  the  other 
side  of  the  island,  but  it  belongs  to  Constantinople.  The  other 
side  of  the  island  is  rich  and  fertile,  but  this,  as  you  see, 
is  mountainous  and  barren.  The  people  have  not  a  very  good 
reputation,  and  if  we  had  been  wrecked  we  should  have  been 
plundered,  if  not  murdered.  You  see  those  two  vessels  lying 
close  to  the  shore  near  the  village  ?  They  are  pirates  when 
they  get  a  chance,  you  may  be  quite  sure;  in  fact,  these 
islands  swarm  with  them.  Venice  does  all  she  can  to  keep 
them  down,  but  the  Genoese  and  the  Hungarians  and  the 
rest  of  them  keep  her  so  busy  that  she  has  no  time  to  take 
the  matter  properly  in  hand,  and  make  a  clean  sweep  of 
them." 


CHAPTER  VIII. 


AN  ATTACK   BY  PIRATES. 

BOAT  was  lowered,  and  the  captain  went  ashore  with 
a  strong  crew,  all  armed  to  the  teeth.  Francis  ac- 
companied him.  The  natives  were  sullen  in  their 
manner,  but  expressed  a  willingness  to  trade,  and  to 
exchange  hides  and  wine  for  cloth. 

"  We  may  as  well  do  a  little  barter,"  the  captain  said,  as  they 
rowed  back  towards  the  ship.  "  The  port  is  not  often  visited, 
and  the  road  across  the  island  is  hilly  and  rough,  so  they  ought 
to  be  willing  to  sell  their  goods  cheaply." 

"  They  did  not  seem  pleased  to  see  us  nevertheless,"  Francis 
said. 

"  No;  you  see  the  Genoese  have  got  a  footing  in  the  island, 
and  of  course  they  represent  us  to  the  natives  as  being  robbers, 
who  would  take  their  island  if  we  got  the  chance.  All  round 
these  coasts  and  islands  the  people  are  partisans  either  of 
Venice  or  Genoa;  they  care  very  little  for  Constantinople, 
although  they  form  part  of  the  empire.  Constantinople  taxes 
them  heavily,  and  is  too  weak  to  afford  them  protection.  Of 
course  they  are  Greeks,  but  the  Greeks  of  the  islands  have  very 
little  in  common,  beyond  their  language,  with  the  Greeks  of 
Constantinople.  They  see,  too,  that  the  Turks  are  increasing  in 
power,  and  they  know  that  if  they  are  to  be  saved  from 
{ailing  into  the  hands  of  the  Moslem,  it  is  Venice  or  Genoa 


A  MEASURE  OF    PRECAUTION.  14! 

who  will  protect  them,  and  not  Constantinople,  who  will  have 
enough  to  do  to  defend  herself.  As  to  themselves,  they  would 
naturally  prefer  Venice,  because  Venice  is  a  far  better  mistress 
than  Genoa ;  but  of  course,  when  the  Genoese  get  a  footing 
they  spread  lies  as  to  our  tyranny  and  greed,  and  so  it  comes 
that  the  people  of  the  islands  are  divided  in  their  wishes,  and 
that  while  we  are  gladly  received  in  some  of  them,  we  are  re- 
garded with  hate  and  suspicion  in  others." 

Trade  at  once  began,  and  continued  until  evening. 

"  How  long  do  you  expect  to  stay  here,  captain  ? "  Francis 
asked. 

"  That  must  depend  upon  the  wind ;  it  may  go  down  to- 
morrow, it  may  continue  to  blow  strong  for  days,  and  it  is  no 
use  our  attempting  to  work  down  to  Candia  until  it  changes  its 
direction.  I  should  hope,  however,  that  in  a  day  or  two  we 
may  be  off;  we  are  doing  little  more  than  wasting  our  time 
here." 

A  strong  watch  was  placed  on  deck  at  nightfall. 

"  Why,  surely,  captain,  there  is  no  fear  of  an  attack !  War 
has  not  yet  been  proclaimed  with  Genoa,  although  there  is  little 
doubt  it  will  be  so  in  a  few  weeks,  or  perhaps  a  few  days." 

"  There  is  never  a  real  peace  between  Venice  and  Genoa  in 
these  seas,"  the  captain  said,  "  and  as  war -is  now  imminent,  one 
cannot  be  too  watchful.  State  galleys  would  not  be  attacked, 
but  merchant  vessels  are  different.  Who  is  to  inquire  about 
a  merchant  ship !  Why,  if  we  were  attacked  and  plundered 
here,  who  would  be  any  the  wiser !  We  should  either  have 
our  throats  cut  or  be  sent  to  rot  in  the  dungeons  of  Genoa. 
And  not  till  there  was  an  exchange  of  prisoners,  perhaps  years 
hence,  would  any  in  Venice  know  what  had  befallen  us.  When 
weeks  passed,  and  no  news  came  to  Venice  of  our  having 
reached  Candia,  it  would  be  supposed  that  we  had  been  lost  in 
the  storm." 


1^2  A   VESSEL   MISSING. 

"  Signer  Polani  would  run  his  pen  through  the  name  of  the 
Sonito,  and  put  her  down  as  a  total  loss,  and  there  would  be 
an  end  of  it  till  those  of  us  who  were  alive,  when  the  prison 
doors  were  opened,  made  their  way  back  to  Venice.  No,  no, 
Messer  Francisco ;  in  these  eastern  waters  one  must  always  act 
as  if  the  republic  were  at  war.  Why,  did  not  Antonio  Doria, 
in  a  time  of  profound  peace,  attack  and  seize  eight  Venetian 
ships  laden  with  goods,  killing  two  of  the  merchants  on  board, 
and  putting  the  ships  at  a  ransom.  As  to  single  vessels  missing, 
and  never  heard  of,  their  number  is  innumerable.  It  is  all  put 
down  to  pirates  ;  but  trust  me,  the  Genoese  are  often  at  the 
bottom  of  it.  They  are  robbers,  the  Genoese.  In  fair  trade 
we  can  always  beat  them,  and  they  know  it,  and  so  they  are 
always  seeking  a  pretext  for  a  quarrel  with  us." 

Francis  smiled  quietly  at  the  bigoted  hatred  which  the 
captain  bore  the  Genoese,  but  thought  it  useless  to  argue  with 
him.  The  next  morning  he  came  up  on  deck  soon  after  day- 
break. 

"  I  see  one  of  those  vessels  has  taken  her  departure,"  he  said, 
as  he  glanced  towards  the  spot  where  they  had  been  lying. 

"  So  she  has,"  the  captain  said.  "  I  had  not  noticed  that 
before.  I  wonder  what  that  fellow  has  gone  for?  No  good, 
you  may  be  sure.  Why,  it  is  blowing  hard  outside  still,  as  you 
may  see  by  the  rate  those  light  clouds  travel.  He  would  never 
have  put  to  sea  without  having  a  motive,  and  he  must  have 
had  a  strong  crew  on  board  to  row  out  in  the  teeth  of  the 
gale  far  enough  to  make  off  the  land  ;  that  fellow  is  up  to 
mischief  of  some  sort." 

A  few  minutes  later  the  captain  ordered  a  boat  to  be 
lowered  and  rowed  out  to  the  rocky  islet  at  the  mouth  of  the 
harbour,  and  landing,  climbed  up  the  rocks  and  looked  out  to 
sea.  In  half  an  hour  he  returned  to  the  ship.  "  It  is  no  use," 
he  said  to  Francis ;  "  the  wind  is  blowing  straight  into  the 


THE  CAPTAIN'S  SUSPICIONS.  143 

passage,  and  we  could  not  row  the  Bontto  out  against  it.  It 
was  different  with  that  craft  that  went  out  yesterday  evening, 
for  I  have  no  doubt  she  started  as  soon  as  it  became  dark.  She 
was  low  in  the  water,  and  would  not  hold  the  wind  ;  besides, 
no  doubt  they  lowered  the  masts,  and  with  a  strong  crew 
might  well  have  swept  her  out.  But  with  the  Bonito,  with  her 
high  sides  and  heavy  tonnage,  it  could  not  be  done." 

"  What  do  you  think  she  went  out  for,  captain  ?  " 

"  It  is  likely  enough  that  she  may  have  gone  to  one  of  the 
other  islands,  and  may  return  with  a  dozen  other  craft,  pirates 
like  herself.  The  news  that  a  Venetian  merchant  ship,  without 
consorts,  is  weather-bound  here,  would  bring  them  upon  us 
like  bees.  It  is  a  dangerous  thing,  this  sailing  alone.  I  have 
talked  it  over  several  times  with  the  master.  Other  merchants 
generally  send  their  ships  in  companies  of  eight  or  ten,  and 
they  are  then  strong  enough  to  beat  off  any  attack  of  pirates. 
Messer  Polani  always  sends  his  vessels  out  singly.  What  he 
says  is  this  :  '  A  single  ship  always  travels  faster  than  a  convoy, 
because  these  must  go  at  the  rate  ot  the  slowest  among  them  ; 
then  the  captain  is  free  to  go  where  he  will,  without  consulting 
others,  according  as  he  gets  news  where  trade  is  to  be  done,  and 
when  he  gets  there  he  can  drive  his  own  bargains  without  the 
competition  of  other  ships.' 

"  So  you  see  there  are  advantages  both  ways.  The  padrone's 
ships  run  greater  risks,  but  if  they  get  through  them  safely 
they  bring  home  much  larger  profits  than  do  those  of  others. 
As  a  rule,  I  prefer  sailing  singly ;  but  just  at  the  present  time 
I  should  be  well  pleased  to  see  half  a  dozen  consorts  lying 
alongside." 

Three  times  during  the  day  the  captain  paid  a  visit  to  the 
rocky  island.  On  his  return  for  the  last  time  before  nightfall, 
he  said  to  Francis  : 

"The  wind    is    certainly    falling;    I    hope    that    to-morrow 


144  -  OMINOUS  SIGNS. 

morning  we  shall  be  able  to  get  out  of  this  trap.  I  am  con- 
vinced that  there  is  danger." 

"  You  see  nothing  else,  do  you,  captain,  beyond  the  departure 
of  that  craft,  to  make  you  think  that  there  is  danger  ?  " 

"  Yes,  I  have  seen  two  things,"  the  captain  said.  "  In  the  first 
place,  the  demeanour  of  the  people  has  changed ;  they  do  not 
seem  more  unfriendly  than  they  were  before,  but  as  I  moved 
about  the  place  to-day  it  seemed  to  me  that  there  was  a  sup- 
pressed excitement — people  gathered  together  and  talked 
earnestly,  and  separated  if  any  of  our  crew  happened  to  go 
near  them ;  even  laughed  when  they  thought  that  none  of  us 
were  looking,  and  looked  serious  and  sullen  if  we  turned 
round.  I  am  convinced  that  they  are  expecting  something  to 
happen. 

"  I  have  another  reason  for  suspecting  it.  I  have  kept  a 
sharp  watch  on  that  high  hill  behind  the  village  ;  they  tell  me 
there  is  nothing  at  the  top  except  some  curious  stones,  that 
look  as  if  they  had  once  been  trees,  so  there  is  nothing  they  can 
want  to  go  up  for.  Several  times  to-day  I  have  made  out  the 
figures  of  men  climbing  that  hill ;  when  they  got  to  the  top 
they  stood  for  some  time  as  if  they  were  looking  out  over  the 
sea,  and  then  came  down  again  without  doing  anything.  Now, 
men  do  not  climb  such  a  hill  as  that  merely  for  exercise.  They 
went  up  because  they  expected  to  see  something,  and  that 
something  could  only  be  a  fleet  of  pirate  boats  from  the  other 
islands.  I  would  give  a  year's  pay  if  we  could  get  out  of  this 
place  this  evening,  but  it  cannot  be  done,  and  we  must  wait 
till  to-morrow  morning;  I  will  try  then,  even  though  I  risk 
being  driven  on  the  rocks.  However,  if  they  do  come  to-night 
they  will  not  catch  us  asleep." 

Orders  were  issued  that  the  whole  crew  were  to  remain  in 
readiness  for  attack,  and  that  those  whose  watch  was  below 
were  to  sleep  with  their  arms  beside  them.  The  lower  ports 


"WHAT   SORT   OF  SOUNDS?"  145 

were  all  closed,  a  strong  watch  was  kept  on  deck,  and  it  was 
certain  that,  whatever  happened,  the  Bonito  would  not  be  taken 
by  surprise.  Being  assured  by  the  captain  that  it  was  not 
probable  that  any  attack  would  be  made  before  morning,  as  the 
pirates,  not  knowing  their  exact  position,  would  wait  until  the 
first  gleam  of  daylight  enabled  them  to  make  out  where  she 
was  lying,  and  to  advance  in  order  against  her,  Francis  lay 
down  on  his  couch,  leaving  orders  that,  if  asleep,  he  was  to  be 
called  two  hours  before  daybreak.  He  slept  but  little,  how- 
ever, getting  up  frequently  and  going  out  to  ascertain  if  any 
sounds  indicated  the  presence  of  an  enemy.  Upon  one  of  these 
occasions  he  found  that  the  person  leaning  next  to  him  against 
the  bulwark,  and  gazing  towards  the  mouth  of  the  harbour, 
was  Giuseppi. 

"  Have  you  been  here  long,  Giuseppi  ?  " 

"  Since  you  were  out  last,  Messer  Francisco.  I  thought  I 
would  wait  a  bit  and  listen." 

"  And  have  you  heard  anything?  " 

"  I  have  heard  sounds  several  times." 

"  What  sort  of  sounds,  Giuseppi  ?  " 

"  Such  a  sound  as  is  made  when  the  sails  and  yards  are 
lowered.  I  have  heard  it  over  and  over  again  when  out  at 
night  on  the  lagoons  near  the  port ;  there  is  no  mistake  in  the 
creaking  of  the  blocks  as  the  halyards  run  through  them.  I  am 
sure,  that  since  I  have  been  here  several  vessels  have  brought 
up  inside  the  mouth  of  the  harbour.  Some  of  the  sailors  have 
heard  the  same  noises,  so  there  cannot  be  any  mistake  about 
it.  If  the  captain  likes,  I  will  take  a  small  boat  and  row  out, 
and  find  out  all  about  them." 

"  I  will  ask  the  captain,  Giuseppi." 

The  captain,  however,  said  that  there  would  be  no  use  in 
this  being  done.  "  Whether  there  are  few  or  whether  there  are 
many  of  them,  we  must  wait  till  morning  before  we  go  out. 


I46  THE   PIRATE   FLEET. 

There  will  be  no  working  out  that  channel  in  the  dark,  even  it 
we  were  unopposed." 

"  But  they  must  have  managed  to  come  in,"  Francis  said. 

"  No  doubt  some  of  their  comrades  in  the  other  barque,  or 
people  from  the  village,  show  a  light  out  there  to  guide  them 
in  ;  besides,  the  wind  is  favourable  to  them  and  against  us.  No, 
young  sir,  there  is  nothing  to  do  but  to  wait.  In  the  morning, 
if  there  are  but  few  of  them,  we  will  try  to  break  through 
and  gain  the  sea ;  if  there  are  many  we  will  fight  here,  as  then 
all  hands  will  be  available  for  the  combat,  while  if  we  were 
rowing,  half  of  them  would  be  occupied  with  the  oars.  If  your 
lad  were  to  go  as  he  proposes  he  might  fall  into  the  hands  of 
the  enemy,  and  as  the  information  he  could  gather  would  be  in 
any  case  of  no  use  it  is  best  he  should  remain  where  he  is." 

The  hours  seemed  long  until  the  first  tinge  of  daylight 
appeared  in  the  sky.  All  hands  were  on  deck  now,  for  the 
news  that  vessels  had  been  arriving  in  the  port  had  convinced 
all  that  danger  really  threatened  them.  It  was  not  until  half 
an  hour  later  that  they  were  able  to  make  out  some  dark 
objects  lying  in  under  the  shadow  of  the  islet  across  the  mouth 
of  the  harbour. 

"  There  they  are,  Messer  Francisco,"  the  captain  said. 
"  Ten  of  them,  as  far  as  I  can  make  out ;  but  there  may  be 
more,  for  likely  enough  some  of  them  are  lying  side  by  side. 
There  may,  too,  be  some  round  a  corner,  where  we  cannot  see 
them.  Another  half  hour  we  shall  know  all  about  it." 

Francis  was  half  surprised  that  the  captain  did  not  order  the 
oars  to  be  put  out  and  lashed  in  that  position,  for  it  was  a 
recognized  plan  for  preventing  a  ship  from  being  boarded  by  an 
enemy,  who  could  thus  only  approach  her  at  the  lofty  poop  and 
forecastle. 

"  Are  you  not  going  to  get  out  the  oars  to  keep  them  off  ?  " 

"  No,  Messer  Francisco.     In  the  first  place,  our  sides  are  so  high 


READY    FOR  THE   FIGHT.  147 

out  of  water  that  the  pirates  will  have  a  difficulty  in  boarding  us 
in  any  case.  In  the  second  place,  if  we  get  the  oars  out  and 
they  row  full  at  them,  sooner  or  later  they  will  break  them  off, 
and  it  is  all-important  that  we  should  be  able  to  row.  I  have 
been  thinking  the  matter  over,  and  my  idea  is,  as  soon  as  they 
advance,  to  get  three  or  four  oars  at  work  on  either  side  so  as 
to  move  her  gradually  through  the  water  towards  the  harbour 
mouth.  The  rowers  will  be  charged  to  let  their  oars  swing 
alongside  whenever  any  of  their  craft  dash  at  them.  We  shall 
want  every  oar  as  well  as  our  sails  to  get  away  when  we  are 
once  outside.  I  do  not  think  we  have  much  chance  of  finally 
beating  them  off  if  we  stop  and  fight  here.  But  if  we  can  do  so 
for  a  time  and  can  manage  to  creep  out  of  the  harbour,  all  may 
be  well." 

When  daylight  fairly  broke  they  were  able  to  make  out  their 
enemy.  The  vessels  were  of  all  sizes,  from  long,  low  craft, 
carrying  great  sails  and  long  banks  of  oars,  down  to  boats  of  a 
few  tons  burden.  All  seemed  crowded  with  men. 

"  None  of  them  are  anything  like  as  high  out  of  the  water  as 
the  Bontto,"  the  captain  said,  "  and  they  will  find  it  very  difficult 
to  climb  up  our  sides.  Still  the  odds  against  us  are  serious, 
but  we  shall  give  them  a  warmer  reception  than  they  expect. 
They  will  hardly  calculate  either  on  our  being  so  strong-handed 
or  so  well  prepared  for  them." 

Everything  was  indeed  ready  for  the  combat.  Two  or  three 
barrels  of  the  compound  known  as  Greek  fire  had  been  brought 
up  from  the  hold,  and  the  cooks  had  heated  cauldrons  full  of 
pitch.  Thirty  men  with  bows  and  arrows  were  on  the  poop, 
and  the  rest,  with  spears,  axes,  and  swords,  stood  along  the 
bulwarks. 

"  We  may  as  well  get  as  near  the  entrance  as  we  can  before 
the  fight  begins,"  the  captain  said.  "  Get  up  the  anchor,  and 
as  soon  as  it  is  apeak  get  out  four  oars  on  each  side." 


148  ATTACKED. 

The  anchor  had  already  been  hove  short,  and  was  soon  in  its 
place.  Then  the  oars  dipped  into  the  water,  and  slowly  the 
Bonito  moved  towards  the  mouth  of  the  harbour.  Scarcely  had 
the  oars  touched  the  water  than  a  bustle  was  perceived  on 
board  the  piratical  ships.  Oars  were  put  out,  and  in  two  or 
three  minutes  the  pirates  were  under  way,  advancing  at  a  rapid 
pace  towards  the  Bonito. 

The  crew  made  no  reply  to  the  shouts  and  yells  of  the 
pirates,  but,  in  accordance  with  the  orders  of  the  captain, 
remained  in  a  stooping  position,  so  that  the  figure  of  the  cap- 
tain, as  he  hauled  up  the  flag  with  the  lion  of  Venice  to  the 
mast-head,  was  alone  visible  to  the  pirates.  As  these  ap- 
proached volleys  of  arrows  were  shot  at  the  Bonito,  but  not  a 
shot  replied  until  they  were  within  fifty  yards  of  the  ship. 
Then  the  captain  gave  the  word.  The  archers  sprang  to  their 
feet,  and  from  their  eminence  poured  their  arrows  thick  and 
fast  on  to  the  crowded  decks  of  the  pirates.  The  captain  gave 
the  word  to  the  rowers,  and  they  relinquished  their  oars,  which 
swung  in  by  the  side  of  the  vessel. 

A  moment  later  two  of  the  largest  craft  of  the  pirates 
dashed  alongside.  The  instant  they  did  so  they  were  saluted 
with  showers  of  boiling  pitch,  while  pots  full  of  Greek  fire 
were  thrown  down  upon  them.  Those  who  tried  to  climb  up 
the  side  of  the  Bonito  were  speared  with  lances  or  cut  down 
with  battle-axes.  The  combat  was  of  short  duration.  Many 
of  those  on  whom  the  boiling  pitch  had  fallen  jumped  overboard 
in  their  agony,  while  others  did  the  same  to  escape  the  Greek 
fire  which  they  in  vain  endeavoured  to  extinguish. 

The  fire  quickly  spread  to  the  woodwork,  and  in  five  minutes 
after  the  beginning  of  the  fight  the  two  craft  dropped  astern 
from  the  Bonito  with  the  flames  already  rising  fiercely  from  them. 
In  the  meantime  the  other  vessels  had  not  been  idle,  and  a 
storm  of  missiles  was  poured  upon  the  Bonito.  The  fate  which 


RAMMING  THE  "  BONITO."  149 

befell  their  comrades,  however,  showed  them  how  formidable 
was  the  vessel  they  had  regarded  as  an  easy  prey,  and  when 
the  first  assailants  of  the  Bonito  dropped  astern  none  of  the 
others  cared  to  take  their  places. 

"  Man  the  oars  again  !  "  the  captain  ordered,  and  the  Bonito 
again  moved  forward,  her  crew  stooping  behind  the  bulwarks, 
while  the  archers  only  rose  from  time  to  time  to  discharge  their 
shafts. 

"  The  thing  I  am  most  afraid  of,"  the  captain  said  to  Francis, 
who  was  standing  beside  him,  "  is,  that  they  will  ram  us  with 
their  prows.  The  Bonito  is  strongly  built,  but  the  chances  are 
that  they  would  knock  a  hole  in  her." 

"  I  should  think,  captain,  that  if  we  were  to  get  up  some  of 
those  bales  of  cloth  and  fasten  ropes  to  them  we  might  lower 
them  over  the  side  and  so  break  the  shock." 

"  It  is  worth  trying  anyhow,"  the  captain  said.  And  a  score 
of  the  sailors  were  at  once  sent  down  to  fetch  up  the  bales. 
Ropes  were  fastened  round  these,  and  they  were  laid  along  by 
the  bulwarks  in  readiness  for  being  lowered  instantly.  Ten 
bales  were  placed  on  each  side,  and  three  men  told  off  to  eac^ 
bale. 

By  this  time  they  were  half-way  to  the  mouth  of  the  har- 
bour, and  the  preparations  were  completed  just  in  time,  for 
the  small  boats  suddenly  drew  aside,  and  two  of  the  largest  of 
the  pirates'  craft,  each  rowed  by  twenty-four  oars,  dashed  at 
her,  one  on  each  side.  The  captain  shouted  the  order,  and  the 
men  all  sprang  to  their  feet.  It  was  seen  at  once  that  the 
vessels  would  both  strike  about  midships.  Three  bales  on 
either  side  were  raised  to  the  bulwarks  and  lowered  down  with 
the  ropes  until  close  to  the  water's  edge  and  closely  touching 
each  other.  Francis  sprang  on  to  the  bulwark  and  superintended 
the  operations  on  one  side,  while  the  captain  did  the  same  on 
the  other. 


150  BEATEN   OFF. 

"  A  few  feet  more  astern,  lads.  That  is  right.  Now,  keep 
the  bales  touching.  You  are  just  in  the  line." 

An  instant  later  the  Bonito  reeled  from  the  shock  of  two 
tremendous  blows.  The  bows  of  the  pirates  were  stove  in, 
but  the  thick  bales  enabled  the  Bonito  to  withstand  the  shock, 
although  her  sides  creaked,  the  seams  started,  and  the  water 
flowed  in  freely.  But  of  this  the  crew  thought  little.  They 
were  occupied  in  hurling  darts,  arrows,  and  combustibles  into 
the  pirates  as  these  backed  off  in  an  already  sinking  con- 
dition. 

"  Now  I  think  we  can  go,"  the  captain  said,  and  ordered  the 
whole  of  the  oars  to  be  manned. 

They  were  speedily  got  out,  and  the  Bonito  made  her  way 
out  through  the  mouth  of  the  harbour.  The  pirates,  in  their 
lighter  boats,  rowed  round  and  round  her,  shooting  clouds  of 
arrows,  but  not  venturing  to  come  to  close  quarters  after  the 
fate  which  had  befallen  the  four  largest  vessels  of  their  fleet. 
As  soon  as  they  were  clear  of  the  islet  the  sails  were  hoisted. 
The  wind  had  fallen  much  during  the  night,  and  had  worked 
round  to  the  east,  and  under  sails  and  oars  the  Bonito  left  the 
island,  none  of  the  pirates  venturing  to  follow  in  pursuit. 

The  oars  were  soon  laid  in,  and  the  men,  with  mallets  and 
chisels,  set  to  work  to  caulk  the  seams  through  which  the  water 
was  making  its  way.  The  casualties  were  now  inquired  into, 
and  it  was  found  that  six  men  had  been  shot  dead,  and  that 
nine-and-twenty  had  received  wounds  more  or  less  severe  from 
the  arrows  of  the  pirates.  Francis  had  been  twice  wounded 
while  superintending  the  placing  of  the  bales.  One  arrow  had 
gone  through  his  right  leg,  another  had  struck  him  in  the  side 
and  glanced  off  a  rib. 

"This  won't  do,  Messer  Francisco,"  the  captain  said  as  he 
assisted  Giuseppi  to  bandage  the  wounds.  "  Signer  Polani 
placed  you  on  board  to  learn  something  of  seamanship  and 


COMPARING  NOTES.  !$! 

commerce,  not  to  make  yourself  a  target  for  the  arrows  of 
pirates.  However,  we  have  to  thank  you  for  the  saving  of  the 
Bonito,  for  assuredly  she  would  have  been  stove  in  had  not  the 
happy  thought  of  hanging  those  bales  overboard  struck  you. 
It  would  be  of  no  use  against  war-galleys,  whose  beaks  are  often 
below  the  water-line,  but  against  craft  like  these  pirates  it 
acts  splendidly,  and  there  is  no  doubt  that  you  saved  the  ship 
from  destruction  and  us  from  death,  for  after  the  burning  of 
the  two  first  vessels  that  attacked  us  you  may  be  sure  they 
would  have  shown  but  little  mercy.  I  can't  think  how  you 
came  to  think  of  it." 

"Why,  I  have  read  in  books,  captain,  of  defenders  of  walls 
hanging  over  trusses  of  straw  to  break  the  blows  of  battering- 
rams  and  machines  of  the  besiegers.  Directly  you  said  they 
were  going  to  ram  us  it  struck  me  we  might  do  the  same,  and 
then  I  thought  that  bales  of  cloth  similar  to  those  you  got 
up  on  deck  to  trade  with  the  islanders  would  be  just  the 
thing." 

"  It  was  a  close  shave,"  the  captain  said.  "  I  was  leaning 
over,  and  saw  the  whole  side  of  the  ship  bend  beneath  the  blow, 
and  expected  to  hear  the  ribs  crack  beneath  me.  Fortunately 
the  Bonito  was  stronger  built  than  her  assailants,  and  their  bows 
crumpled  in  before  her  side  gave;  but  my  heart  was  in  my 
mouth  for  a  time,  I  can  tell  you." 

"So  was  mine,  captain.  I  hardly  felt  these  two  arrows 
strike  me;  they  must  have  been  shot  from  one  of  the  other 
boats.  Then  I  could  not  help  laughing  to  see  the  way  in  which 
the  men  at  the  oars  tumbled  backwards  at  the  moment  when 
their  vessels  struck  us  ;  it  was  as  if  an  invisible  giant  had  swept 
them  all  off  their  seats  together." 

The  wind  continued  favourable  until  they  arrived  at  Candia, 
where  the  captain  reported  to  the  commander  of  a  Venetian 
war  galley  lying  in  the  port  the  atttack  that  had  been  made 


152  CRUISING. 

upon  him,  and  the  galley  at  once  started  for  the  scene  of  the 
action  to  destroy  any  pirates  she  might  find  there  or  among 
the  neighboring  islands,  or  in  the  various  inlets  and  bays  of 
the  mainland.  Having  delivered  their  letters  and  landed  a 
portion  of  their  cargo  for  the  use  of  Polani's  agents  in  the 
islands,  the  Bonito  proceeded  to  Cyprus.  For  some  weeks 
she  cruised  along  the  coast  of  Syria,  trading  in  the  various 
Turkish  ports,  for  Venice,  although  she  had  shared  in  some  of 
the  crusades,  was  now,  as  she  had  often  been  before,  on  friendly 
terms  with  the  Turks.  Her  interests  all  lay  in  that  direction ; 
she  carried  on  a  large  trade  with  them ;  and  in  the  days  when 
she  lay  under  the  interdict  of  the  pope,  and  all  Europe  stood 
aloof  from  her,  she  drew  her  stores  of  provisions  from  the 
Moslem  ports,  and  was  thus  enabled  successfully  to  resist  the 
pressure  which  she  suffered  from  the  interdict. 

She  foresaw,  too,  the  growing  power  of  the  Turks,  and  per- 
ceived that  in  the  future  they  would  triumph  over  the  de- 
generate Greek  empire  at  Constantinople.  She  had  spent  her 
blood  and  treasure  freely  in  maintaining  that  empire ;  but  the 
weakness  and  profligacy  of  its  emperors,  the  intestine  quarrels 
and  disturbances  which  were  for  ever  going  on,  and  the  in- 
gratitude with  which  she  had  always  treated  Venice,  had 
completely  alienated  the  Venetians  from  her;  Genoa  had,  in- 
deed, for  many  years  exercised  a  far  more  preponderating 
influence  at  Constantinople  than  Venice  had  done. 

Having  completed  the  tour  of  the  Syrian  ports  the  Bonito 
sailed  north,  with  the  intention  of  passing  the  Dardanelles  and 
Bosphorus  and  proceeding  to  Azoph.  When  she  reached  the 
little  island  of  Tenedos,  a  few  miles  from  the  entrance  to  the 
strait,  she  heard  news  which  compelled  the  captain  to  alter  his 
intentions.  A  revolution  had  broken  out  in  Constantinople, 
aided  by  the  Genoese  of  Pera.  The  cruel  tyrant  Calojohannes  V. 
had  been  deposed,  and  his  heir  Andronicus,  whom  he  had 


A  REVOLUTION.  153 

deprived  of  sight  and  thrown  into  a  dungeon,  released  and 
placed  on  the  throne.  As  a  reward  for  the  services  she  had 
rendered  him,  Andronicus  issued  a  decree  conferring  Tenedos 
upon  Genoa. 

The  news  had  just  arrived  when  the  Bonito  entered  the  port, 
and  the  town  was  in  a  ferment.  There  were  two  or  chree 
Venetian  war-ships  in  the  harbour;  but  the  Venetian  admiral, 
being  without  orders  from  home  as  to  what  part  to  take  in 
such  an  emergency,  remained  neutral.  The  matter  was,  how- 
ever, an  important  one,  for  the  possession  of  Tenedos  gave  its 
owners  the  command  of  the  Dardanelles,  and  a  fleet  lying  there 
could  effectually  block  the  passage. 

The  people  thronged  up  to  the  governor's  house  with  shouts 
of  "  Down  with  Genoa!"  The  governor  being  unsupported  by 
any  Greek  or  Genoese  troops,  bowed  to  the  popular  will, 
and  declared  that  he  did  not  recognize  the  revolution  that  had 
taken  place  in  Constantinople,  and  refused  to  submit  to  the 
decree  of  Andronicus.  Donato  Trono,  a  Venetian  merchant 
resident  in  the  island,  and  other  Venetians,  harangued  the 
people,  and  pointed  out  to  them  that  alone  they  could  not  hope 
to  resist  the  united  forces  of  Greece  and  Genoa,  and  that  their 
only  hope  of  safety  lay  in  placing  themselves  under  the  protec- 
tion of  Venice.  The  people,  seeing  the  justice  of  the  arguments 
of  the  Venetians,  and  preferring  the  Venetian  rule  to  that  of 
Genoa,  agreed  to  the  proposal.  The  banner  of  St.  Mark  was 
raised  amid  great  enthusiasm,  and  the  island  declared  subject 
to  Venice. 

A  Genoese  galley  in  port  \mmediately  set  sail  and  quickly 
carried  the  news  to  Constantinople,  where  the  emperor  at  once 
threw  the  whole  of  the  Venetian  residents  into  prison.  As  soon 
as  the  news  of  this  reached  Tenedos  the  captain  of  the  Bonito 
held  a  consultation  with  Francis. 

"It  is  evident,   Messer   Francisco,  that  we  cannot  proceed 


154  RETURN   TO   VENICE. 

upon  our  northward  passage.  We  should  be  captured  and  held 
at  Constantinople ;  and,  even  did  we  succeed  in  passing  at  night, 
we  should  fall  into  the  hands  of  the  Genoese — who  are  far 
stronger  in  the  Black  Sea  than  we  are — for  if  Venice  accepts 
the  offer  of  the  people  of  this  place  ana  takes  possession  of  the 
island,  Genoa  is  sure  to  declare  war.  I  think,  then,  that  we 
had  better  make  our  way  back  to  Venice  with  what  cargo  we 
have  on  board,  and  there  get  fresh  orders  from  the  padrone. 
We  have  not  done  badly  so  far,  and  it  is  better  to  make  sure 
of  what  we  have  got  than  to  risk  its  loss,  for  at  any  day  we 
may  fall  in  with  the  Genoese  fleet  sailing  hither." 

Francis  quite  agreed  with  the  captain's  opinion,  and  the 
Bonito  sailed  for  the  south.  They  touched,  on  their  way,  at 
several  islands,  and  the  news  that  an  early  outbreak  of  hostilities 
between  Genoa  and  Venice  was  probable — in  which  case  there 
would  be  an  almost  complete  cessation  of  trade — produced  so 
strong  a  desire  on  the  part  of  the  islanders  to  lay  in  a  store  of 
goods,  that  the  captain  was  able  to  dispose  of  the  rest  of  his 
cargo  on  good  terms,  and  to  fill  up  his  ship  with  the  produce 
of  the  islands. 

Thus  the  Bonito  was  deep  in  the  water  when  she  re-entered 
the  port  of  Venice  after  an  absence  of  about  three  months.  As 
soon  as  the  anchor  was  dropped  the  captain,  accompanied  by 
Francis,  hired  a  gondola,  and  rowed  into  the  city  to  give  an 
account  to  Signor  Polani  of  the  success  of  his  voyage,  and  to 
lay  before  him  a  list  of  the  cargo  with  which  the  Bonito  was 
laden.  The  merchant  received  them  with  great  cordiality,  and 
embraced  Francis  with  the  affection  of  a  father. 

"Do  you  go  at  once  into  the  salon,  Francisco;  you  will  find 
my  daughters  expecting  you  there,  for  the  news  came  an  hour 
ago  that  the  Bonito  was  entering  port.  Of  course  we  heard  from 
the  letters  from  Candia  of  your  adventures  with  the  pirates, 
and  the  gallant  way  in  which  the  Bonito  defeated  them.  You 


A   HEARTY   GREETING.  155 

will  find,  captain,  that  I  have  ordered  an  extra  month's  pay  to 
be  given  to  all  on  board. 

"The  captain  did  full  justice,  Francisco,  in  his  account  of 
the  matter,  to  your  quickness  in  suggesting  a  method  by  which 
the  effort  of  the  ramming  of  the  enemy  was  neutralized,  and 
for  the  courage  you  showed  in  carrying  out  your  idea ;  but 
we  will  talk  of  that  afterwards.  He  and  I  have  business  to 
transact  which  will  occupy  us  for  some  time,  so  the  sooner  you 
go  the  better." 

Francis  at  once  took  himself  off  and  joined  the  girls,  who 
received  him  with  the  heartiest  greeting. 

"We  were  glad  indeed,  Francis,"  Maria  said,  "when  our 
father  told  us  that  the  Bonito  was  signalled  as  entering  the 
port.  No  letters  have  come  for  some  time,  and  we  feared  that 
you  must  have  entered  the  Dardanelles  and  reached  Constanti- 
nople before  the  news  arrived  there  of  that  affair  at  Tenedos, 
in  which  case  you  would  no  doubt  have  been  seized  and  thrown 
into  the  dungeons." 

"  We  were  at  Tenedos  when  the  affair  took  place,"  Francis 
said,  "and  have  had  no  opportunity  since  of  sending  a  letter 
by  any  ship  likely  to  be  here  before  us.  The  outbreak  made 
us  alter  our  plans,  for,  of  course,  it  would  not  have  been  safe 
to  have  sailed  farther  when  the  emperor  was  so  enraged  against 
Venice.  I  need  hardly  tell  you  I  was  not  sorry  when  we 
turned  our  faces  again  towards  Venice.  I  have  enjoyed  the 
voyage  very  much,  and  have  had  plenty  to  occupy  me;  still, 
three  months  at  a  time  is  long  enough,  and  I  was  beginning  to 
long  for  a  sight  for  Venice." 

"For  a  sight  of  Venice  and — "  Maria  repeated,  holding  up 
her  finger  reprovingly. 

"  And  of  you  both,"  Francis  said  smiling.  "  I  did  not  think 
it  necessary  to  put  that  in,  because  you  must  know  that  you 
are  Venice  to  me." 


156  "  WE  DO   NOT  WANT   FLATTERY." 

"  That  is  much   better,"   Maria  said   approvingly.     "  I  think 
you  have   improved   sin-ce  you   have  been  away.     Do  you  not    • 
think  so,  Giulia?" 

"  I  don't  think  that  sort  of  nonsense  is  an  improvement," 
Giulia  said  gravely.  "  Any  of  the  young  Venetian  gallants 
can  say  that  sort  of  thing.  We  do  not  want  flattery  from 
Francisco." 

"  You  should  say  you  do  not  want  it,  Giulia,"  Maria  said 
laughing.  "  I  like  it,  I  own,  even  from  Francisco.  It  may 
not  mean  anything,  but  it  is  pleasant  nevertheless ;  besides,  one 
likes  to  think  that  there  is  just  a  little  truth  in  it,  not  much, 
perhaps,  but  just  a  little  in  what  Francisco  said,  for  instance, 
Of  course  we  are  not  all  Venice  to  him,  still,  just  as  we  are 
pleased  to  see  him,  he  is  pleased  to  see  us ;  and  why  shouldn't 
he  say  so  in  a  pretty  way  ?  It's  all  very  well  for  you  to  set 
up  as  being  above  flattery,  Giulia,  but  you  are  young  yet ; 
I  have  no  doubt  you  will  like  it  when  you  get  as  old  as  I  am." 

Giulia  shook  her  head  decidedly. 

"I  always  think,"  she  said,  "when  I  hear  a  man  saying 
flattering  things  to  a  girl,  that  it  is  the  Jeast  complimentary 
thing  he  can  do,  for  it  is  treating  her  as  if  he  considers  that 
she  is  a  fool,  otherwise  he  would  never  say  such  outrageous 
nonsense  to  her." 

"There,  Francisco,"  Maria  laughed,  "you  are  fairly  warned 
now;  beware  how  you  venture  to  pay  any  compliment  to 
Giulia  in  future.  It  would  be  a  dull  world  if  every  one  were 
to  think  as  you  do,  Giulia,  and  to  say' exactly  as  they  meant. 
Fancy  a  young  man  saying  to  you:  'I  think  you  are  a  nice 
sort  of  girl,  no  prettier  than  the  rest,  but  good-tempered  and 
pleasant,  and  to  be  desired  because  your  father  is  rich !'  A 
nice  sort  of  way  that  would  be  to  be  made  love  to !" 

"There  is  no  occasion  for  them  to  say  anything  at  all," 
Giulia  said  indignantly ;  "  we  don't  go  about  saying  to  them 


"WE  ARE   DYING  TO   HEAR   YOUR   ADVENTURES."          157 

'  I  think  you  are  good  looking,  and  well-mannered,  and  witty  ; ' 
or,  '  I  like  you  because  they  say  you  are  a  brave  soldier  and  a 
good  swordsman.'  Why  should  they  say  such  things  to  us  ? 
I  suppose  we  can  tell  if  anyone  likes  us  without  all  that 
nonsense  " 

"  Perhaps  so,"  the  elder  girl  assented  ;  "  and  yet  I  maintain 
it's  pleasant,  and  at  any  rate  it's  the  custom,  and  as  it's  the 
custom,  we  must  put  up  with  it.  What  do  you  say,  Fran- 
cisco ?  " 

"I  don't  know  anything  about  it,"  Francis  said;  "certainly 
some  of  the  compliments  I  have  heard  paid  were  barefaced  false- 
hoods, and  I  have  wondered  how  men  could  make  them,  and 
how  women  could  even  affect  to  believe  in  them  ;  but,  on  the 
other  hand,  I  suppose  that  when  people  are  in  love,  they  really 
do  think  the  person  they  are  in  love  with  is  prettier  and  more 
charming,  or  braver  and  more  handsome,  than  anyone  else  in 
the  world,  and  that  though  it  may  be  flattery,  it  is  really  true 
in  the  opinion  of  the  person  who  utters  it." 

"  And  now  let  us  leave  the  matter  alone  for  the  present, 
Francisco ;  we  are  dying  to  hear  all  about  your  adventures, 
and  especially  that  fight  with  the  pirates.  The  captain  in  his 
letter  merely  said  that  you  were  attacked  and  beat  the  pirates 
off,  and  that  you  would  have  been  sunk  if  it  hadn't  been  that 
at  your  suggestion  they  lowered  bales  of  cloth  over  to  break 
the  shock,  and  that  so  many  men  were  killed  and  so  many 
wounded,  and  that  you  were  hit  twice  by  arrows,  but  the 
wounds  were  healing.  That's  all  he  said,  for  papa  read  that 
portion  of  his  letter  out  to  us ;  now  we  want  a  full  and  particular 
account  of  the  affair." 

Francis  gave  a  full  account  of  the  fight,  and  then  related  the 
other  incidents  of  the  voyage. 

"  We  know  many  of  the  ports  you  touched  at,"  Maria  said 
when  he  had  finished,  "  for  when  we  were  little  girls  papa 


158  A   ROW   PROPOSED. 

took  us  sometimes  for  voyages  in  his  ships  when  the  times  were 
peaceful  and  there  was  no  danger.  Now  let  us  order  a  gondola, 
and  go  for  a  row ;  papa  is  sure  to  be  occupied  for  ever  so  long 
with  your  captain." 


CHAPTER  IX 

THE  CAPTURE  OF  THE  "  LIDO." 

|IUNOR  POLANI  told  Francis  that  evening  that  he 
was  much  pleased  with  the  report  that  the  captain 
had  given  of  his  eagerness  to  acquire  information 
both  in  mercantile  and  nautical  matters,  and  of  the 
manner  in  which  he  had  kept  the  ship's  books,  and  the  entries 
of  the  sales,  and  purchases  of  goods. 

"  Many  young  fellows  at  your  age,  Francis,  when  there  was 
no  compulsion  for  them  to  have  taken  these  matters  into  their 
charge,  would  have  thought  only  of  amusement  and  gaiety 
when  they  were  in  port,  and  I  am  glad  to  see  that  you  have  a 
real  interest  in  them.  Whatever  the  line  in  life  a  young  man 
takes  up,  he  will  never  excel  in  it  unless  he  goes  into  it  with 
all  his  heart,  and  I  am  very  glad  to  see  that  you  have 
thrown  yourself  so  heartily  into  your  new  profession.  The  Bonito 
made  a  most  satisfactory  voyage,  far  more  so  than  I  antici- 
pated when  I  found  that  she  would  not  be  able  to  carry  out 
the  programme  I  had  laid  down  for  her;  but  the  rise  in  the 
prices  in  the  latter  part  of  your  voyage  have  more  than  made 
up  for  the  loss  of  the  trade  in  the  Black  Sea ;  and  you  have 
done  as  much  in  the  three  months  you  were  absent  as  I  should 
have  expected  had  you  been,  as  I  anticipated,  six  months 
away. 


l6o  WAR   IMMINENT. 

"  You  will  be  some  little  time  before  you  start  again,  as  I 
wish  to  see  how  matters  are  going  before  I  send  the  Bonito  out 
upon  another  adventure.  At  present  nothing  is  settled  here, 
that  there  will  be  war  with  Genoa  before  long  is  certain,  but 
we  would  rather  postpone  it  as  long  as  possible,  and  the 
senate  has  not  yet  arrived  at  the  decision  to  accept  the  offer 
of  Tenedos.  Negotiations  are  going  on  with  Genoa  and  Con- 
stantinople, but  I  have  little  hope  that  anything  will  come  of 
them. 

"  It  is  getting  late  in  the  season  now,  and  the  war  will 
hardly  break  out  until  next  spring;  but  I  have  no  doubt  the 
struggle  will  then  begin,  and  preparations  are  going  on  with 
all  speed  in  the  dockyards.  We  are  endeavouring  to  obtain 
allies,  but  the  combination  is  so  strong  against  Venice  that  we 
are  meeting  with  little  success,  and  Ferrara  is  really  the  only 
friend  on  whom  we  can  rely,  and  she  is  not  in  a  position  to  aid 
us  materially  in  such  a  struggle  as  this  will  be.  I  am  glad  to 
tell  you  that  the  affair  in  which  you  were  concerned  before  you 
sailed  has  now  completely  dropped ;  nothing  has  been  heard  of 
Mocenigo  since  he  made  his  escape. 

"  A  decree  of  banishment  was  passed  against  him,  but  .where 
he  is  we  know  not.  That  wretched  woman  was  sentenced  to 
four  year's  imprisonment,  but  upon  my  petition  she  will  be 
released  at  the  end  of  six  months,  on  her  promise  that  she  will 
not  again  set  foot  in  the  territory  of  the  republic.  As 
Mocenigo  has  not  been  brought  to  trial,  there  will  be  no 
further  official  inquiry  into  the  matter,  and  I  have  not  been 
further  questioned  as  to  the  source  from  which  I  obtained  my 
information  as  to  the  girl's  hiding-place.  Your  share  in  the 
matter  is  therefore  altogether  unsuspected,  and  I  do  not  think 
that  there  is  any  further  danger  to  you  from  Mocenigo's 
partisans." 

"  I  should  be  glad  enough  to  remain   in  Venice  a  fortnight 


"  I   WILL   ARRANGE  IT   SO."  l6l 

or  so,  sir,"  Francis  said,  "  but  if  at  the  end  of  that  time  you 
have  any  vessel  going  out,  I  shall  prefer  to  go  in  her.  Now 
that  my  studies  are  over,  I  shall  very  soon  get  tired  of  doing 
nothing.  Perhaps  in  a  few  years  I  may  care  more  for  the 
gaieties  of  Venice,  but  certainly  at  present  I  have  no  interest 
in  them,  and  would  rather  be  at  sea.  Matteo  tells  me  that 
you  have  promised  he  shall  make  a  few  voyages  in  your 
ships,  and  that  you  have  told  him  he  shall  go  in  one  of  them 
shortly ;  if  so,  it  would  be  very  pleasant  to  us  both  if  we  can 
sail  together." 

"  I  will  arrange  it  so,  Francisco.  It  would  be  for  the  benefit 
of  my  cousin — who  is  a  good  lad,  but  hare-brained,  and  without 
ballast — for  you  to  go  with  him.  I  should  indeed  have  pro- 
posed it,  but  the  vessel  in  which  I  have  decided  he  shall  sail 
will  be  ready  for  sea  in  another  ten  days  or  so,  and  I  thought 
that  you  would  prefer  a  longer  stay  in  Venice  before  you  again 
set  sail.  If,  however,  it  is  your  wish  to  be  off  again  so  soon,  I 
will  arrange  for  you  both  to  sail  together.  This  time  you  will 
go  officially  as  my  supercargo,  since  you  now  understand  the 
duties.  The  captain  of  the  vessel  in  which  you  will  sail  is  a 
good  sailor,  and  a  brave  man,  but  he  has  no  aptitude  for  trade, 
and  I  must  have  sent  a  supercargo  with  him.  Your  decision 
to  go  relieves  me  of  this,  for  which  I  am  not  sorry,  for  men 
who  are  at  once  good  supercargos  and  honest  men  are  difficult 
to  get." 

The  fortnight  passed  rapidly,  and  Francis  enjoyed  his  stay 
at  the  merchant's  greatly,  but  he  was  not  sorry  when,  at  the 
end  of  ten  days,  Polani  told  him  that  the  lading  of  the  vessel 
would  begin  the  next  day,  and  that  he  had  best  go  on  board  early 
and  see  the  cargo  shipped,  so  that  he  might  check  off  the  bales 
and  casks  as  they  were  sent  on  board,  and  see  where  each  de- 
scription of  goods  was  stowed  away. 

"  I  think,  papa,  it  is  too  bad  of  you  sending  Francisco  away 


l62  "OUR   FAULT  !" 

so  soon,"  Maria  said,  when  at  their  evening  meal  she  learned 
the  news  of  his  early  departure. 

"It  is  his  own  doing,"  her  father  said;  "it  is  he  who  wants 
to  go,  not  I  who  send  him.  I  consider  that  it  is  entirely  your 
fault." 

"  Our  fault ! "  the  two  girls  repeated  in  surprise. 

"  Certainly.  If  you  had  made  Venice  sufficiently  pleasant  to 
him  he  would  not  wish  to  leave.  I  am  too  busy  to  see  about 
such  things,  and  I  left  it  to  you  to  entertain  him.  As  he  is  in 
such  a  hurry  to  get  away  again,  it  is  evident  that  you  have  not 
succeeded  in  doing  so." 

"  Indeed,  Signer  Polani,  your  daughters  have  been  everything 
that  is  kind,  but  I  have  no  taste  for  assemblies  and  entertain- 
ments. I  feel  out  of  place  there  amid  all  the  gaily-dressed  nobles 
and  ladies,  and  no  sooner  do  I  get  there  than  I  begin  to  wonder 
how  anyone  can  prefer  the  heated  rooms  and  clatter  of  tongues, 
to  the  quiet  pleasure  of  a  walk  backwards  and  forwards  on 
the  deck  of  a  good  ship  ;  besides  I  want  to  learn  my  profession, 
and  there  is  so  much  to  learn  in  it  that  I  feel  I  have  no  time 
to  lose." 

"  I  am  right  glad  to  see  your  eagerness  in  that  direction, 
Francisco,  and  I  did  but  jest  with  my  daughters.  You  have  not 
yet  asked  me  what  is  the  destination  of  the  Lido,  for  that  is 
the  name  of  your  new  vessel.  This  time  you  are  going  quite 
in  a  new  direction.  In  the  spring  we  are  certain  to  have 
war  with  Genoa,  and  as  Parma  and  Hungary  will  probably  both 
take  side  against  us,  we  may  find  ourselves  cut  off  from  the 
mainland,  and,  in  case  of  a  disaster  happening  to  our  fleet,  in 
sore  straits  for  food.  I  am,  therefore,  going  to  gather  into 
my  warehouses  as  much  grain  as  they  will  hold  ;  this  will  both 
be  a  benefit  to  the  state-,  and  will  bring  me  good  profit,  for 
the  price  of  wheat  will  be  high  in  the  city  if  we  are  leaguered  on 
the  land  side. 


TO   SICILY   FOR   GRAIN.  163 

"  The  Lido  will  go  down  to  Sicily,  and  fill  up  there  with  corn. 
You  will  have  to  use  care  before  entering  port,  for  with  war 
now  certain  both  parties  will  begin  to  snap  up  prizes  when 
they  get  the  chance.  So  you  must  keep  a  sharp  look-out  for 
Genoese  galleys.  If  you  find  the  coast  is  too  closely  watched, 
you  will  go  to  the  Moorish  ports.  We  are  friends  with  them  at 
present,  though  doubtless,  as  soon  as  Genoa  and  ourselves  get  to 
blows,  they  will  be  resuming  their  piratical  work.  Thus  you  will, 
this  time,  take  in  a  much  smaller  amount  of  cargo,  as  you  will 
have  to  pay  for  the  most  part  in  gold." 

It  mattered  little  to  Francis  where  he  voyaged ;  but  Matteo, 
who  had  been  greatly  delighted  at  the  thought  of  sailing  with 
his  friend,  was  much  disappointed  when  he  heard  that  they  were 
only  going  to  fetch  grain  from  Sicily. 

"  Why,  it  is  nothing  to  call  a  voyage,"  he  said  in  tones  of 
disgust,  when  Francis  told  him  the  destination  of  the  Lido, 
"  I  had  hoped  we  were  going  to  make  a  long  voyage,  and  touch 
at  all  sorts  of  places,  just  as  you  did  last  time." 

"  I  do  not  see  that  it  matters  much,  Matteo ;  and  we  shall 
learn  navigation  just  as  well  from  one  course  as  another.  The 
voyage  will  not  be  a  long  one,  unless  we  meet  with  unfavour- 
able winds ;  but  there's  no  saying  what  may  happen,  and  you 
may  meet  with  adventure  even  on  a  voyage  to  Sicily  and 
back." 

The  trip  down  to  Sicily  was  quickly  made.  Francis  had 
worked  hard  on  his  first  voyage,  and  was  now  able  to  make  daily 
calculations  as  to  the  run  made,  the  course  steered,  and  the  posi- 
tion of  the  ship,  and  found  that  these  tallied  closely  with  those 
of  the  captain.  Matteo  and  he  shared  a  large  and  handsome 
cabin,  and  the  time  passed  pleasantly  as  the  vessel  ran  down 
the  coast  of  Italy.  Once  out  of  the  Adriatic  a  sharp  look-out 
was  kept,  but  the  coast  of  Sicily  was  made  without  seeing  any 
sails  of  a  suspicious  character.  The  lads  were  struck  with 


164  ETNA. 

surprise  and  admiration  when,  on  coming  on  deck  in  the  morn- 
ing, they  saw  the  great  cone  of  Etna  lying  ahead  of  them. 

Neither  of  them  had  ever  seen  a  mountain  of  any  size,  and  their 
interest  in  the  scene  was  heightened  by  a  slight  wreath  of  smoke 
which  curled  up  from  the  summit  of  the  hill. 

"  It  is  well  worth  a  voyage,  if  it  were  only  to  see  that  moun- 
tain," Francis  said.  "  What  an  immense  height  it  is,  and  how 
regular  in  its  shape  !  " 

"  And  yet,"  Matteo  said,  "  those  who  have  journeyed  from 
Italy  into  France  tell  me  that  there  are  mountains  there  beside 
which  Etna  is  as  nothing.  These  mountains  are  a  continuation 
of  the  range  of  hills  which  we  can  see  from  Venice.  Their  tops 
are  always  covered  with  snow,  and  cannot  be  ascended  by  man  ; 
whereas  it  is  easy,  they  say,  to  reach  the  top  of  Etna." 

"  Yes,  that  looks  easy  enough,"  Francis  agreed.  "  It  seems 
such  a  regular  slope,  that  one  could  almost  ride  up ;  but  I  dare 
say  when  you  are  close  you  would  find  all  sorts  of  difficult 
places." 

"I  should  like  to  try,"  Matteo  said.  "What  a  grand  view 
there  would  be  from  the  top !  Is  the  port  we  are  going  to  try 
first,  captain,  anywhere  near  the  foot  of  the  mountain  ?  " 

"  No,  I  am  going  round  the  southern  part  of  the  island.  On 
this  side  the  ground  is  less  fertile,  and  we  should  have  difficulty 
in  obtaining  a  cargo.  But  even  were  we  to  put  into  a  port  on 
this  side,  you  would  not  be  able  to  climb  Mount  Etna. 

"  Sicily  has  been  an  unfortunate  country.  Its  great  natural 
wealth  has  rendered  it  an  object  of  desire  to  all  its  neighbours. 
It  was  the  battle-ground  of  the  Romans  and  Carthaginians. 
Pisa,  Genoa,  and  Naples  have  all  contended  for  its  possession ; 
and  the  Moors  frequently  make  descents  upon  its  coasts.  It 
has  seldom  enjoyed  a  peaceful  and  settled  government.  The 
consequence  is  that  general  lawlessness  prevails  in  the  districts 
remote  from  the  towns :  while  in  the  forests  that  clothe  the  side 


MATTEO'S  ASPIRATION.  165 

of  Mount  Etna  there  are  numerous  hordes  of  bandits  who  set 
the  authorities  at  defiance,  levy  blackmail  throughout  the  sur- 
rounding villages,  and  carry  off  wealthy  inhabitants,  and  put 
them  to  ransom.  No  one  in  his  senses  would  think  of  ascending 
that  mountain,  unless  he  had  something  like  an  army  with 
him." 

"  I  should  like  to  try  it  all  the  same,"  Matteo  asserted.  "  If 
there  are  woods  all  over  it,  it  is  not  likely  one  would  happen  to 
meet  with  any  of  these  people.  I  should  like,  above  all  things, 
to  get  to  the  top  of  that  hill." 

"  It  would  be  harder  work  than  you  think,  young  sir,"  the 
captain  said.  "  You  have  no  idea  from  this  distance  what  the 
height  is,  or  what  a  long  journey  it  is  to  ascend  to  the  top.  I 
have  been  told  that  it  is  a  hundred  and  twenty  miles  round  its 
foot." 

"  I  don't  think  you  would  like  it  Matteo,  if  you  were  to  try  it," 
Francis  said,  laughing.  '•  You  know  you  are  as  lazy  as  you  can 
be,  and  hate  exerting  yourself.  I  am  sure  that  before  you  got  a 
quarter  the  distance  up  that  monntain  you  would  have  only  one 
wish,  and  that  would  be  to  be  at  the  bottom  again." 

"  I  don't  know,"  Matteo  said.  "  I  hate  exerting  myself 
uselessly — wasting  my  strength,  as  you  do,  in  rowing  at  an  oar, 
or  anything  of  that  sort ;  but  to  do  anything  great,  I  would  not 
mind  exertion,  and  would  go  on  until  I  dropped." 

"  That  is  all  very  well,  Matteo  ;  but  to  do  anything  great  you 
have  got  to  do  small  things  first.  You  could  never  wield  a  sword 
for  five  minutes  unless  you  had  practised  with  it ;  and  you  will 
never  succeed  in  accomplishing  any  feats  requiring  great  strength 
and  endurance,  if  you  do  not  practice  your  muscles  on  every 
occasion.  You  used  to  grumble  at  the  height  when  you  came  up 
to  my  room  in  the  old  house,  and  I  suppose  Etna  is  something 
like  two  hundred  times  as  high." 

"  That    does    sound    a  serious    undertaking,"    Matteo    said. 


166  "GENOESE  GALLEYS   ARE   ENTERING   THE   BAY.** 

laughing;  "and  I  am  afraid  that  I  shall  never  see  the  view  from 
the  top  of  Etna.  Certainly  I  shall  not  if  it  will  be  necessary 
beforehand  to  be  always  exercising  my  muscles  by  running  up 
the  stairs  of  high  houses." 

The  next  day  they  were  off  Girgenti,  the  port  at  which  they 
hoped  to  obtain  a  cargo.  They  steered  in  until  they  encoun- 
tered a  fishing-boat,  and  learned  from  those  on  board  that  there 
was  no  Genoese  vessel  in  port,  nor,  as  far  as  the  men  knew,  any 
state  galleys  anywhere  in  the  neighbourhood.  Obtaining  this 
news,  they  sailed  boldly  into  the  port  and  dropped  anchor. 
Francis,  who  had  received  before  starting  a  list  of  houses  with 
whom  Signer  Polani  was  in  the  habit  of  doing  business,  at 
once  rowed  ashore,  Matteo  and  Giuseppi  accompanying  him. 
His  business  arrangements  were  soon  completed  ;  the  harvest  had 
been  a  good  one,  and  there  was  an  abundance  of  corn  to  be  had 
at  a  cheap  rate. 

In  half  an  hour  he  arranged  for  as  large  a  quantity  as  the  Lido 
would  carry.  The  work  of  loading  soon  commenced,  and  in  four 
days  the  ship  was  full  up  to  the  hatches. 

Francis  went  on  shore  to  settle  the  various  accounts,  and  was 
just  making  the  last  payment  when  Matteo  ran  into  the  office. 

"  Four  Genoese  galleys  are  entering  the  bay  !  " 

Francis  ran  out,  and  saw  four  Genoese  galleys  rowing  in. 

"  It  is  too  late  to  escape.  Even  were  we  empty  we  could  not 
get  away ;  but  laden  as  the  Lido  is,  they  could  row  three  feet  to 
her  one." 

"  What  shall  we  do,  Francisco  ?  " 

Francis  stood  for  half  a  minute,  thinking. 

"  You  had  better  stay  here,  Matteo.  I  will  row  out  to  the  ship 
and  send  most  of  the  men  on  shore.  If  they  seize  the  ship,  they 
may  not  take  those  on  board  prisoners ;  but  if  they  do,  there  is  no 
reason  why  they  should  take  us  all." 

"  You  had  better  come  on  shore  too,  Francisco,  and  leave 


"  I   WILL  NOT   SUFFER  IT."  l6j 

the  captain  in  chargfe.  You  can  do  no  good  by  staying  there ; 
and  Polani  would  be  more  concerned  at  your  capture  than  he 
would  at  the  loss  of  a  dozen  ships.  If  you  could  do  any  good, 
it  would  be  different ;  but  as  it  is,  it  would  be  foolish  to  risk 
capture." 

"  I  will  see,"  Francis  said ;  "  at  any  rate  do  you  stop  here." 

Jumping  into  a  boat,  he  rowed  towards  the  Lido,  which  was 
lying  but  a  cable's-length  from  the  shore.  As  he  neared  her  he 
shouted  to  the  men  to  lower  the  boats. 

"  Captain,"  he  said, "  I  do  not  know  whether  there  is  any  danger 
of  being  captured  by  the  Genoese.  But  it  is  useless  to  run  any 
unnecessary  risk ;  therefore  send  all  the  crew  but  three  or  four 
men  on  shore.  If  the  Genoese  board  us,  we  have  our  papers  as 
peaceful  traders  buying  wheat ;  but  if,  in  spite  of  that,  they 
capture  us,  we  must  take  our  chance." 

"  Surely,  you  are  not  thinking  of  stopping,  Messer  Francisco. 
The  padrone  would  be  terribly  vexed  if  you  were  taken.  He 
specially  ordered  me,  before  we  started,  to  see  that  no  unneces- 
sary risk  was  run,  and  to  prevent  you  from  thrusting  yourself 
into  danger.  Therefore,  as  captain  of  the  ship,  I  must  insist  that 
you  go  on  shore." 

"  I  think  I  ought  to  stay  here,"  Francis  said. 

"  I  do  not  think  so,"  the  captain  said  firmly,  "  and  I  will  not 
suffer  it.  I  have  to  answer  for  your  safety  to  the  padrone ;  and 
if  you  do  not  go  by  yourself,  I  shall  order  the  men  to  put  you 
into  one  of  the  boats  by  force.  I  mean  no  disrespect ;  but  I 
know  my  duty,  and  that  is  to  prevent  yon  from  falling  into  the 
hands  of  the  Genoese." 

"  I  will  not  oblige  you  to  use  force,  captain,"  Francis  said, 
smiling,  "  and  will  do  as  you  wish  me." 

In  five  minutes  the  men  were  all — save  four,  whom  the  captain 
had  selected — in  the  boat,  and  rowing  towards  shore.  Matteo 
was  awaiting  them  when  they  landed. 


l68  "I   KNOW   HOW  OBSTINATE  YOU  ARE." 

"  That  is  right,  Francisco.  I  was  half  afraid  you  would  stay 
on  board.  I  know  how  obstinate  you  are  whenever  you  take  a 
thing  into  your  head." 

"The  captain  was  more  obstinate  still,  Matteo,  and  said  that 
unless  I  came  away  he  would  send  me  on  shore  by  force ;  but  I 
don't  like  deserting  the  ship." 

"  That  is  nonsense,  Francisco.  If  the  Genoese  take  her,  they 
take  her,  and  your  remaining  on  board  could  not  do  any  good. 
What  are  you  going  to  do  now  ?  " 

i  "  We  will  at  once  leave  the  place  with  the  men,  Matteo,  and 
retire  into  the  country  behind.  It  is  not  likely  the  Genoese 
would  land  and  seize  us  here,  but  they  might  do  so,  or  the 
inhabitants,  to  please  Genoa,  might  seize  us  and  send  us  on  board. 
At  any  rate  we  shall  be  safer  in  the  country." 

The  men  had,  by  the  captain's  orders,  brought  their  arms 
ashore  on  leaving  the  ship.  This  was  the  suggestion  of  Francis, 
who  said  that  were  they  unarmed  the  people  might  seize  them 
and  hand  them  over  to  the  Genoese. 

At  the  head  of  this  party,  which  was  about  fifty  strong, 
Francis  marched  up  through  the  little  town  and  out  into  the 
country.  He  had  really  but  little  fear  either  that  the  Genoese 
would  arrest  them  on  shore,  or  that  the  people  would  interfere 
with  them,  for  they  would  not  care  to  risk  the  anger  of  Venice 
by  interfering  in  such  a  matter.  He  thought  it  probable, 
however,  that  if  his  men  remained  in  the  town,  broils  would 
arise  between  them  and  any  of  the  Genoese  sailors  who  might 
land. 

As  soon  as  the  Genoese  galleys  came  up  to  the  head  of  the  bay 
a  boat  was  lowered  and  rowed  to  the  Lido,  at  whose  masthead 
the  Venetian  flag  was  flying.  An  officer,  followed  by  six  men, 
climbed  up  on  to  the  deck. 

"Are  you  the  captain  of  this  ship?"  the  officer  asked,  as  the 
captain  approached  him. 


"YOU  ARE   MY    PRISONER."  169 

"  I  am,"  the  captain  said. 

"  What  ship  is  it  ?  " 

"  It  is  the  Lido,  the  property  of  Messer  Polani,  a  merchant  of 
Venice,  and  laden  with  a  cargo  of  wheat." 

"  Then  you  are  my  prisoner,"  the  Genoese  said.  "  I  seize  this 
vessel  as  lawful  prize." 

"There  is  peace  between  the  republics,"  the  captain  said. 
"  I  protest  against  the  seizure  of  this  ship  as  an  act  of  piracy." 

"  We  have  news  that  several  of  our  ships  have  been  seized 
by  the  Venetians,"  the  officer  said;  "and  we  therefore  capture 
this  vessel  in  reprisal.  Where  are  your  crew?" 

"  There  are  only  four  on  board,"  the  captain  said.  "  We  have 
filled  up  our  cargo  and  were  going  to  sail  to-morrow,  and  there- 
fore the  rest  of  the  crew  were  allowed  to  go  on  shore ;  and  I 
do  not  think  it  is  likely  that  they  will  return  now,"  for  one  of 
the  Genoese  sailors  had  hauled  down  the  flag  of  Venice  and 
had  replaced  it  with  that  of  Genoa. 

The  Genoese  officer  briefly  examined  the  vessel. 

"  Whom  have  you  here  on  board  with  you  ?  "  he  asked,  struck 
with  the  furniture  and  fittings  of  Francis'  cabin. 

"  This  is  the  cabin  of  Matteo  Giustiniani,  a  young  noble  of 
Venice,  who  is  making  his  first  voyage  in  order  to  fit  himself 
for  entering  the  service  of  the  state,  and  of  Francisco  Hammond, 
who  stands  high  in  the  affections  of  my  patron." 

The  Genoese  uttered  an  angry  exclamation.  The  name  of 
Polani  was  well  known  in  Genoa  as  one  of  the  chief  merchants 
of  Venice  and  as  belonging  to  a  ducal  house,  while  the  family  of 
Giustiniani  was  even  more  illustrious;  and  had  these  passen- 
gers fallen  into  his  hands,  a  ransom  might  have  been  obtained 
greatly  exceeding  the  value  of  the  Lido  and  her  cargo. 

Leaving  four  of  his  men  on  board  he  went  off  to  the  galley 
of  the  officer  commanding  the  fleet,  and  presently  returned 
with  a  large  boat  full  of  sailors. 


170  THE    BIVOUAC. 

"  You  and  your  men  can  go  ashore,"  he  said  to  the  captain 
"  The  admiral  does  not  deem  you  worth  the  trouble  of  carrying 
to  Genoa;  but  be  quick,  or  you  will  have  to  swim  to  shore." 

As  the  Lidos  boats  had  all  gone  ashore  the  captain  hailed  a 
fishing-boat  which  was  passing,  and  with  the  four  sailors  was 
rowed  to  shore,  well  content  that  he  had  escaped  the  dungeons 
of  Genoa.  He  rightly  imagined  that  he  and  his  men  were 
released  solely  on  account  of  the  paucity  of  their  numbers. 
Had  the  whole  crew  been  captured  they  would  have  been 
carried  to  Genoa;  but  the  admiral  did  not  care  to  bring  in  five 
prisoners  only,  and  preferred  taking  the  ship  alone. 

Francis  with  his  party  followed  the  line  of  the  coast,  ascend- 
ing the  hills  which  rose  steeply  from  the  edge  of  the  sea  at  a 
short  distance  from  the  town.  He  had  brought  with  him  from 
the  town  a  supply  of  food  sufficient  for  four  or  five  days,  and 
encamped  in  a  little  wood  near  the  edge  of  the  cliff.  From 
this  they  had  a  view  of  the  port  and  could  watch  the  doings 
of  the  Genoese  galleys.  Fires  were  lit  and  meat  cooked  over 
them ;  and  just  as  the  meal  was  prepared  the  captain  and  the 
four  sailors  joined  them  amid  a  hearty  cheer  from  the  crew. 

"  I  have  made  my  protest,"  the  captain  said  as  he  took  his 
seat  by  the  side  of  Francis,  "  and  the  padrone  can  make  a  com- 
plaint before  the  council  if  he  thinks  fit  to  do  so ;  but  there  is 
small  chance  that  he  will  ever  recover  the  Lido  or  the  value  of 
her  cargo." 

"  I  don't  like  losing  the  ship,"  Francis  said.  "  Of  course  it 
is  only  a  stroke  of  bad  fortune,  and  we  could  neither  fly  nor 
defend  ourselves.  Still  one  hates  arriving  home  with  the  story 
that  one  has  lost  the  ship." 

"  Yes,"  the  captain  agreed.  "  Messer  Polani  is  a  just  man,  yet 
no  ones  cares  to  employ  men  who  are  unlucky;  and  the  worst 
of  it  is  that  the  last  ship  I  commanded  was  wrecked.  Many 
men  would  not  have  employed  me  again,  although  it  wasn't 


A  WALK   ALONG   THE  CLIFFS.  171 

my  fault.  But  after  this  second  affair  in  a  few  months'  time  I 
shall  get  the  name  of  being  an  unlucky  man,  and  no  one  in 
his  senses  would  employ  a  man  who  is  always  losing  his 
ships." 

"  Do  you  think  that  there  is  any  chance  of  our  recapturing  it, 
captain  ?  " 

"  Not  the  least  in  the  world,"  the  captain  replied.  Even  sup- 
posing that  we  could  get  on  board  and  overpower  the  Genoese 
without  being  heard,  and  get  her  out  of  the  port  without  being 
seen,  we  should  not  get  away.  Laden  as  she  is  with  gram,  she 
will  sail  very  slowly,  and  the  Genoese  would  overtake  her  in  a 
few  hours ;  and  I  needn't  tell  you  that  then  there  would  be 
very  little  mercy  shown  to  any  on  board." 

"  That  is  true  enough,"  Francis  said.  "  Still  I  do  not  like 
the  idea  of  losing  the  Lido" 

After  the  meal  was  over  Francis  rose  and  asked  Matteo  to 
accompany  him  on  a  stroll  along  the  cliffs,  Giueseppi  as  usual 
following  them.  They  walked  along  until  they  rounded  the 
head  of  the  bay  and  were  able  to  look  along  the  coast  for  some 
distance.  It  was  steep  and  rocky  and  worn  into  a  number  of 
slight  indentations.  In  one  of  these  rose  a  ledge  of  rocks  at  a 
very  short  distance  from  the  shore. 

"  How  much  further  are  we  going,  Francis  ? "  Matteo  said 
when  they  had  walked  a  couple  of  miles. 

"  About  a  quarter  of  a  mile,  Matteo.  I  want  to  examine 
that  ledge  of  rocks  we  saw  from  the  first  point." 

"  What  on  earth  do  you  want  to  look  at  them  for,  Francis  ? 
You  certainly  are  the  most  curious  fellow  I  ever  met.  You 
scoffed  at  me  when  I  said  I  should  like  to  go  up  Mount  Etna, 
and  now  here  you  are  dragging  me  along  this  cliff  just  to  look 
at  some  rocks  of  no  possible  interest  to  any  one." 

"  That  is  the  point  to  be  inquired  into,  Matteo.  I  think  it's 
possible  they  may  prove  very  interesting." 


172  MATTEO  IS  PUZZLED. 

Matteo  shrugged  his  shoulders,  as  he  often  did  when  he  felt 
too  lazy  to  combat  the  eccentric  ideas  of  his  English  friend. 

"  There  we  are,"  Francis  said  at  last,  standing  on  the  edge  of 
the  cliff  and  looking  down.  "  Nothing  could  be  better." 

"  I  am  glad  you  think  so,  Francisco,"  Matteo  said,  seating 
himself  on  the  grass.  "  I  hope  you  intend  to  stay  some  little 
time  to  admire  them,  for  I  own  that  I  should  like  a  rest  before 
I  go  back." 

Francis  stood  looking  at  the  rocks.  The  bay  was  a  shallow 
one  and  was  but  five  or  six  hundred  yards  from  point  to  point, 
the  rocks  rising  nearly  in  a  line  between  the  points  and  show- 
ing for  about  two  hundred  yards  above  water,  and  at  about 
the  same  distance  from  the  cliffs  behind  them. 

"  What  height  do  you  think  those  rocks  are  above  the  water, 
Giuseppi  ?  " 

"  It  is  difficult  to  judge,  signor,  we  are  so  high  above  them  ;  but 
I  should  think  in  the  middle  they  must  be  ten  or  twelve  feet." 

"  I  should  think  it  likely  they  were  more  than  double  that, 
Giuseppi ;  but  we  shall  see  better  when  we  get  down  to  the 
bottom.  I  daresay  we  shall  find  a  place  where  we  can  clamber 
down  somewhere." 

"  My  dear  Francisco,"  Matteo  said  earnestly,  "  is  anything 
the  matter  with  you  ?  I  begin  to  have  doubts  of  your  sanity. 
What  on  earth  do  these  rocks  matter  to  you  one  way  or  the 
other  ?  or  what  can  you  care  whether  they  are  thirty  inches  or 
thirty  feet  above  the  water?  They  do  not  differ  from  other 
rocks,  as  far  as  I  can  see.  They  are  very  rugged  and  very 
rough,  and  would  be  very  awkward  if  they  lay  out  at  sea 
instead  of  in  this  little  bay,  where  they  are  in  nobody's  way. 
Is  it  not  enough  that  you  have  tramped  two  miles  to  have  a 
look  at  them,  which  means  four  miles,  as  we  have  got  to  return 
somehow  ?  and  now  you  talk  about  climbing  down  that  break- 
neck cliff  to  have  a  look  at  them  close ! " 


MATTEO   PROTESTS.  173 

But  Francis  paid  no  attention  to  Matteo's  words.  He  was 
gazing  down  into  the  clear  smooth  water,  which  was  so  trans- 
parent that  every  stone  and  pebble  at  the  bottom  could  be  seen. 

"  The  water  looks  extremely  shallow,  Giuseppi.  What  do 
you  think  ?  " 

"  It  seems  to  me,  signor,  that  there  is  not  a  foot  of  water 
between  the  rocks  and  the  shore." 

"  It  does  look  so,  Giuseppi ;  but  it  is  possible  that  the  trans- 
parency of  the  water  deceives  us,  and  that  there  may  be  ten  or 
twelve  feet  of  water  there.  However,  that  is  what  we  must 
go  down  and  find  out.  Now  the  first  thing  is  to  look  about  and 
find  some  point  at  which  we  can  get  down  the  beach." 

"  Well,  I  will  lie  down  and  take  a  nap  till  you  come  back," 
Matteo  said  in  a  tone  of  resignation.  "  I  have  no  interest 
either  in  these  rocks  or  in  the  water ;  and  as  far  as  I  can  pro- 
test I  do  so  against  the  whole  proceeding,  which  to  me  savours 
of  madness." 

"  Don't  you  understand,  you  silly  fellow,  what  I  am  thinking 
about  ?  "  Francis  said  impatiently. 

"  Not  in  the  smallest  degree,  Francisco ;  but  do  not  trouble 
to  tell  me — it  makes  no  matter.  You  have  some  idea  in  your 
head,  carry  it  out  by  all  means ;  only  don't  ask  me  to  cut  my 
hands,  tear  my  clothes,  and  put  myself  into  a  perspiration  by 
climbing  down  that  cliff." 

"  My  idea  is  this,  Matteo.  There  is  no  chance  of  carrying 
off  the  Lido  by  speed  from  the  Genoese  ;  but  if  we  could  get 
her  out  of  the  bay  we  might  bring  her  round  here  and  lay  her 
behind  those  rocks,  and  the  Genoese  would  pass  by  without 
dreaming  she  was  there.  Half  a  mile  out  those  rocks  would 
look  as  if  they  form  part  of  the  cliff,  and  none  would  suspect 
there  was  a  passage  behind  them." 

"  That  is  something  like  an  idea! "  Matteo  said,  jumping  to 
his  feet.  "  Why  did  you  not  tell  me  of  it  before  ?  You  have 


174  "  GIUSEPPI   CAN    WADE  OUT." 

quite  alarmed  me.  Seriously  I  began  to  think  that  you  had 
become  a  little  mad,  and  was  wondering  whether  I  had  not 
better  go  back  and  fetch  the  captain  and  some  of  his  men  to 
look  after  you.  Now  let  us  look  at  your  rocks  again.  Why, 
man,  there  is  not  water  enough  to  float  a  boat  between  them 
and  the  shore,  much  less  the  Lido,  which  draws  nine  foot  of 
water  now  she  is  loaded." 

"  I  don't  know,  Matteo.  Looking  down  on  water  from  a 
height  is  very  deceiving ;  if  it  is  clear  and  transparent  there  is 
nothing  to  enable  you  to  judge  its  depth.  At  any  rate  it  is 
worth  trying.  Before  we  go  down  we  will  cut  some  long  stiff 
rods  with  which  we  can  measure  the  depth.  But  we  have  first 
to  find  a  place  where  we  can  get  down  to  the  water." 

After  a  quarter  of  an  hour's  search  they  found  a  point  where 
the  descent  seemed  practicable.  A  little  stream  had  worn  a 
deep  fissure  in  the  face  of  the  rock,  shrubs  and  bushes  had 
grown  up  in  the  crevices  and  afforded  a  hold  for  the  hands,  and 
there  appeared  no  great  difficulty  in  getting  down.  Before 
starting  they  cut  three  stiff  slender  rods  twelve  feet  in  length. 
They  then  set  to  work  to  make  the  descent.  It  was  by  no 
means  difficult,  and  in  a  few  minutes  they  stood  by  the  edge 
of  the  water. 

"  It  is  a  great  advantage,  the  path  being  so  easy,"  Francis 
said,  "  for  in  case  they  did  discover  the  ship  we  could  land  and 
climb  to  the  top  before  they  had  time  to  come  ashore,  and 
once  there  we  could  keep  the  whole  force  in  those  galleys  at 
bay.  Now  for  the  main  point,  the  depth  of  the  water." 

Matteo  shook  his  head. 

"  It  is  useless  to  take  the  trouble  to  undress,  Francis,"  he 
said,  as  the  latter  threw  off  his  jacket.  "  Giuseppi  can  wade 
out  to  the  rocks  without  wetting  his  knees." 

"  Giuseppi  can  try  if  he  likes,"  Francis  said,  "  but  I  will 
wager  he  will  not  get  far." 


"I  SHALL   BELIEVE    YOU   IN    FUTURE."  175 

Giuseppi,  as  convinced  as  Matteo  of  the  shallowness  of  the 
water,  stepped  into  it,  but  was  surprised  to  find  that  before  he 
had  gone  many  paces  the  water  was  up  to  his  waist. 

"Well,  I  wouldn't  have  believed  it  if  I  hadn't  seen  it," 
Matteo  said  when  he  returned,  "  but  I  think  he  must  have  got 
into  a  deep  hole  among  the  rocks ;  however,  we  shall  soon  see," 
and  he  too  began  to  undress. 

In  a  few  minutes  the  three  lads  were  swimming  out  towards 
the  rocks  which,  as  Francis  had  anticipated,  rose  from  twenty 
to  thirty  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea.  The  water  deepened 
fast,  and  for  the  last  thirty  or  forty  yards  they  were  unable  to 
touch  the  bottom,  even  when  thrusting  down  'their  rods  to  the 
fullest  depth.  They  then  tried  the  depth  in  the  passages  at  the 
end  of  the  rocks  and  found  that  there  was  ample  water  for  the 
Lido.  When  they  ascertained  this  to  their  satisfaction  they 
swam  back  to  the  shore. 

"  I  shall  believe  you  in  future,  Francis,  even  if  you  assert 
that  the  moon  is  made  of  cheese.  I  could  have  taken  an  oath 
that  there  was  not  a  foot  of  water  between  those  rocks  and  the 
shore." 

"  I  hardly  ventured  to  hope  that  it  was  as  deep  as  it  is," 
Francis  said,  "  but  I  know  how  deceiving  clear  water  is  when 
you  look  down  upon  it  from  a  height.  However,  that  point  is 
settled." 

"  But  they  would  see  our  masts  above  the  rocks,  Francisco ; 
they  are  sure  to  keep  a  sharp  look-out  as  they  go  along." 

"  We  must  take  the  masts  out  of  her,"  Francis  said.  "  I  don't 
know  how  it  is  to  be  done,  but  the  captain  will  know,  and  if 
that  can't  be  managed  we  must  cut  them  down.  There  is  no 
difficulty  about  that.  Now  we  will  make  our  way  back  again, 
it  will  be  dark  in  a  couple  of  hours'  time.  Everthing  depends 
upon  whether  they  have  towed  the  Lido  out  and  anchored  her 
among  their  galleys.  If  they  have  I  fear  the  scheme  is 


176  GIUSEPPl'S  INSTRUCTIONS. 

impracticable;  but  if  they  let  her  remain  where  she  is  lying  we 
might  get  her  out  without  being  noticed,  for  there  is  no 
moon." 

As  they  began  to  ascend  the  cliff  Francis  stopped  sud- 
denly. 

"  We  should  never  be  able  to  find  this  place  in  the  dark," 
he  said.  "  Giuseppi,  you  must  stay  here.  Do  you  collect  a 
quantity  of  dried  sticks,  and  lay  them  in  readiness  at  that 
point  opposite  the  ledge  ;  we  will  show  a  light  as  we  come  along, 
that  is  if  we  succeed  in  getting  the  Lido  out,  and  directly  you 
see  it  set  fire  to  the  sticks ;  the  fire  will  be  a  guide  to  us  as  to 
the  position  of  the  rocks." 

"  Perhaps  I  had  better  take  the  sticks  off  to  the  ledge, 
Messer  Francisco,  and  light  my  fire  on  the  rock  at  the  end. 
The  water  is  deep  a  few  yards  out,  as  we  found,  so  you  could 
sail  close  to  the  fire  and  then  round  behind  the  rocks  without 
danger." 

"That  will  be  the  best  way,  Giuseppi ;  but  how  will  you  get 
the  sticks  off  without  wetting  them  ?  " 

"  I  will  make  a  bundle  three  or  four  times  as  big  as  I  want," 
Giuseppi  said,  "  and  then  half  of  them  will  be  dry.  I  can  put 
my  clothes  on  them  and  the  tinder.  I  will  answer  for  the  fire» 
but  I  would  rather  have  been  with  you  in  your  adventure." 

"  There  will  be  no  danger  there,  Giuseppi,  so  you  need  not 
be  anxious  about  us;  it  has  to  be  done  quietly  and  secretly, 
and  there  will  be  no  fighting.  These  Genoese  are  too  strong  to 
think  of  that ;  and  if  we  are  discovered  in  the  attempt,  or  as  we 
make  off,  we  shall  take  to  our  boats  again  and  row  straight  on 
shore.  Keep  a  sharp  look-out  for  us,  we  will  hoist  two  lights, 
one  above  the  other,  to  prevent  your  mistaking  any  fishing-boat 
which  may  be  coming  along  for  us.  Now,  Matteo,  for  a  climb; 
we  have  no  time  to  lose." 

The  two  lads  climbed  to  the  top  of  the  cliff,  and  then  started 


"  WE  HAVE  SETTLED    IT,   CAPTAIN."'  177 

at  a  brisk  pace  along  the  top,  and  in  half  an  hour  reached  the 
wood. 

"  We  were  beginning  to  wonder  what  had  become  of  you," 
the  captain  said  as  they  joined  him. 

"  We  have  been  settling  how  to  carry  off  the  Lido,"  Francis 
said,  "  and  have  arranged  everything." 

The  captain  laughed. 

"  If  we  could  fly  with  her  through  the  air  you  might  get  her 
away,  but  I  see  no  other  way.  I  have  been  thinking  it  over 
since  you  left.  With  luck  we  might  get  her  safely  out  of  the 
bay,  but  the  galleys  row  four  feet  to  our  one,  and  as  they 
would  be  sure  to  send  some  one  way  and  some  the  other  along 
the  coast,  they  would  pick  us  up  again  in  two  or  three  hours 
after  daylight." 

"  Nevertheless  we  have  settled  it,  captain.  We  have  found  a 
place  where  we  can  hide  her,  and  the  Genoese  might  search  the 
coast  for  a  month  without  finding  her." 

"  If  that  be  so  it  is  possible,"  the  captain  said  eagerly,  "  and 
you  may  be  sure  you  will  not  find  us  backward  in  doing  our 
best." 

Francis  described  the  nature  and  position  of  the  rock  which 
would  afford  a  shelter,  and  the  means  by  which  they  had  ascer- 
tained that  there  was  plenty  of  water  for  the  Lido  behind  it. 

"  It  seems  plausible,"  the  captain  said  when  he  had  con- 
cluded, "  and  I  am  quite  ready  to  make  the  attempt  if,  in  your 
opinion,  it  can  be  done.  You  are  Messer  Polani's  representa- 
tive, and  for  my  own  sake  as  well  as  his  I  would  do  anything 
which  promises  a  chance  of  recapturing  the  ship;  besides,  as 
you  say,  there  is  little  danger  in  it,  for  we  can  take  to  the  boats 
and  make  for  the  shore  if  discovered.  The  Lido  is  still  lying 
where  we  anchored  her.  They  can  have  no  fear  of  a  recapture, 
for  they  would  know  that  they  could  overtake  us  easily  enough. 
I  daresay  they  intend  to  sail  to-morrow  morning,  and  did  not 


178  SETTING  OUT  ON   THE  ADVENTURE. 

think  it  worth  the  trouble  to  get  up  the  anchor  and  tow  her 
out  to  where  they  are  lying." 

The  details  of  the  expedition  were  now  discussed  and 
arranged,  and  the  men  told  off  to  their  various  duties,  and  at 
eleven  o'clock  at  night,  when  all  in  the  town  were  fast  asleep, 
the  party  quitted  the  bivouac  and  marched  down  again  to  the 
port. 


CHAPTER  X. 

RECAPTURED. 

|O  one  was  astir  in  the  streets  as  the  band  marched 
through  and  they  reached  the  port  without 
encountering  a  single  person.  A  small  boat  was 
chosen,  and  in  this  the  captain,  Francis,  Matteo, 
and  two  of  the  strongest  and  most  powerful  of  the  sailors 
embarked.  It  was  thought  unlikely  that,  lying,  as  the  Lido  did, 
within  a  couple  of  hundred  yards  of  the  Genoese  galleys,  any 
very  vigilant  watch  would  be  kept,  and  not  more  than  two  sailors 
would  probably  be  on  deck. 

The  dark  mass  of  the  ship  could  just  be  made  out  from  the 
shore,  and  when  all  was  ready  the  two  sailors  with  their  oars 
pushed  her  off  with  all  their  strength,  and  then  stood  perfectly 
quiet.  The  impetus  was  sufficient.  The  boat  moved  so  slowly 
through  the  water,  indeed,  before  they  reached  the  ship  that 
Francis  thought  it  would  be  necessary  for  the  men  to  row  a 
stroke  or  two,  but  the  boat  still  moved  on  until  at  last  it  touched 
the  side  of  the  ship.  All  had  removed  their  boots  before  start- 
ing, and  they  now  clambered  up  the  sides  without  making  the 
slightest  noise. 

Once  on  deck  they  stood  perfectly  quiet,  listening.  Presently 
they  heard  a  murmur  of  voices  on  the  other  side  of  the  vessel. 
Very  quietly  they  crept  towards  the  sound,  and  at  length 


l8o  A   SURPRISE. 

made  out  two  figures  leaning  over  the  bulwarks  talking.  Each 
man's  work  had  been  settled,  and  there  was  no  confusion.  One 
of  the  sailors  and  Francis  stole  towards  one  of  the  men,  while 
the  other  and  Matteo  approached  the  second.  The  captain 
stood  with  his  sword  bared  in  readiness  to  cut  down  any  other 
man  who  might  be  on  deck.  The  Genoese  did  not  look  round. 

Francis  gave  the  word,  "  Now,"  and  in  a  moment  the  two 
sailors  seized  them  from  behind  with  a  grasp  of  iron,  while  the 
lads  at  the  same  moment  passed  bandages  tightly  round  their 
mouths,  and  before  the  Genoese  were  quite  aware  of  what  had 
happened  they  were  lying  bound  hand  and  foot  gagged  upon 
the  deck.  The  party  now  made  a  search,  but  found  no  one  else 
about.  They  then  secured  and  fastened  down  the  hatch  of  the 
forecastle  by  coiling  ropes  upon  it,  quietly  opened  the  door 
leading  to  the  poop  cabins,  and  entering,  seized  and  bound  two 
officers  sleeping  there  without  the  slightest  noise  or  resistance. 
Then  they  took  a  light  from  the  cabin  and  showed  it  towards 
the  shore. 

At  the  signal  the  sailors,  who  had  already  taken  their  places 
in  the  boats,  at  once  rowed  out  to  the  vessel.  When  all  were 
on  board,  the  boats  were  fastened  alongside  in  case  it  should 
be  necessary  to  abandon  the  ship  again.  The  cable  was  then 
cut.  One  of  the  sailors  had  already  ascended  the  shrouds  and 
poured  oil  over  the  blocks  through  which  the  halyards  ran  so 
that  the  sails  should  ascend  noiselessly.  The  wind  was  very 
light,  scarcely  enough  to  belly  out  the  sails,  but  it  was  fortu- 
nately in  the  right  direction,  and  the  Lido  began  to  steal  through 
the  water.  Not  a  word  had  been  spoken  since  they  first  started, 
but  Francis  now  whispered  to  the  captain,  "  I  think  I  can  make 
out  the  Genoese  ships." 

"So  can  I,"  the  captain  said,  "but  they  cannot  see  us ;  they 
are  against  the  sky-line,  while  we  are  in  the  shadow  of  the 
shore;  so  far  all  is  perfectly  safe,  and  if  this  breath  of  wind  will 


FAIRLY  AWAY.  l8l 

but  carry  us  far  enough  out  to  be  able  to  use  our  oars  without 
their  hearing  us  we  shall  certainly  get  away." 

The  progress  of  the  Lido  was  so  slow  that  it  was  nearly  an 
hour  before  the  captain  said  that  he  thought  they  were  now 
fairly  round  the  point  of  the  bay  and  could  use  their  oars. 
"We  had  better  tow,"  he  said;  "the  sweeps  make  a  noise  that 
can  be  heard  miles  away,  on  a  calm  night  like  this,  whereas,  if 
they  are  careful,  men  in  a  boat  can  row  almost  noiselessly." 

Ten  of  the  men  accordingly  took  their  places  in  one  of  the 
large  boats  in  which  they  had  come  on  board,  and  a  rope  being 
passed  down  to  them  they  began  rowing  at  the  head  of  the 
ship. 

"  We  may  as  well  lower  the  sails,"  the  captain  said,"  they  are 
doing  no  good  now.  Indeed  I  think  it  is  a  current  rather  than 
the  wind  that  has  helped  us  so  far." 

"  I  will  put  two  lanterns  over  the  side,"  Francis  said.  "  We 
may  have  gone  farther  than  we  think,  and  it  would  never  do  to 
pass  our  hiding-place." 

The  men  in  the  boat  rowed  vigorously,  but  it  was  slow  work 
towing  the  deeply  laden  vessel.  At  last,  however,  a  light  burst 
suddenly  up  from  the  shore. 

"  There  is  Giuseppi,"  Francis  exclaimed.  "  We  are  further 
out  than  we  thought  we  were.  He  must  be  fully  a  mile  and  a 
half  away." 

The  men  in  the  boat  were  told  to  row  direct  for  the  light, 
and  some  of  the  sweeps  were  got  out  and  helped  the  vessel 
through  the  water. 

As  they  drew  near  they  could  make  out  Giuseppi  throwing 
fresh  wood  on  the  fire. 

"  You  can  steer  within  ten  yards  of  where  he  is  standing, 
captain,  and  directly  you  are  abreast  of  him  put  your  helm  hard 
to  port.  You  had  better  get  the  sweeps  in  now,  the  less  way 
she  has  on  her  the  better." 


l82  IN  THE  HIDING-PLACE. 

"  All  well  ?"  Giuseppi  hailed,  as  they  came  within  fifty  yards 
of  it. 

"  All  well,  Giuseppi !  There  has  been  no  fighting,  so  you 
have  lost  nothing.  Put  all  your  wood  on  the  fire,  we  want  as 
much  light  as  we  can  to  get  in." 

The  flames  shot  up  high,  and  the  captain  had  no  difficulty  in 
rounding  the  corner  of  the  rocks  and  bringing  up  his  vessel 
behind  them.  A  kedge  was  dropped,  and  the  men  in  the  boat 
rowed  to  the  end  of  the  rocks  and  brought  off  Giuseppi. 

"  1  was  beginning  to  be  anxious,"  the  lad  said,  as  he  joined 
them  on  deck,  "and  when  I  first  saw  your  signal  I  took  you  for 
a  fishing-boat ;  you  were  so  far  off  that  the  two  lights  looked 
like  one,  but  by  dint  of  gazing  I  made  them  out  at  last,  and 
then  lit  the  fire." 

"  Now,  captain,"  Francis  said,  "  we  have  a  good  deal  to  do 
before  morning,  for  I  take  it  it  will  be  no  easy  matter  to  get 
out  the  masts." 

"  There  would  be  no  difficulty  in  getting  the  masts  out,"  the 
captain  answered.  "  I  have  only  to  knock  out  the  wedges  and 
loosen  the  stays,  and  get  up  a  tripod  made  of  three  spars  to  lift 
them  out ;  but  I  don't  see  how  they  are  to  be  got  in  again." 

"  How  is  that,  captain  ?  I  should  have  thought  it  no  more 
difficult  to  get  a  mast  in  than  to  take  it  out." 

"Nor  would  it  be  so  under  ordinary  circumstances,"  the 
captain  replied ;  "  but  you  see  our  hold  is  full  of  grain,  and  as 
the  mast  comes  out  the  hole  it  leaves  will  fill  up  and  there 
will  be  no  getting  it  down  again  to  step  it  on  the  keel  without 
discharging  the  cargo." 

"Yes,  I  see  that,  captain.  Then  you  think  we  had  better 
cut  down  the  masts ;  but  in  that  case  how  are  we  to  raise 
them  again  ?" 

"  We  will  cut  them  off  about  six  feet  above  the  deck,  Messer 
Francisco ;  then  when  we  want  to  set  sail  again  we  have  only  to 


THE  PRISONERS.  183 

rear  the  masts  up  by  the  side  of  the  stumps,  and  lash  them 
securely.  Of  course  they  will  be  six  feet  shorter  than  before, 
but  that  is  of  little  consequence." 

"Then  so  let  it  be,"  Francis  said,  " the  sooner  we  begin  the 
better." 

Just  at  this  moment  there  was  a  violent  knocking  against  the 
hatch  of  the  forecastle. 

"I  had  forgotten  all  about  the  sailors,"  the  captain  said, 
laughing.  "  I  suppose  the  men  who  were  to  relieve  the  watch 
have  woke  up,  and  finding  they  could  not  get  out  have  aroused 
their  comrades." 

"  Shall  we  leave  them  there,  or  take  them  out  and  bind 
them  ?"  Matteo  asked. 

"  We  had  better  have  them  up,"  the  captain  said.  "  I  don't 
suppose  there  are  more  than  twenty  of  them,  and  it  would  be 
best  to  bind  them  and  put  them  down  in  the  hold  with  the  corn, 
otherwise  they  may  manage  to  break  out  when  we  are  not  ex- 
pecting it,  and  might  give  us  some  trouble." 

Accordingly,  the  sailors  gathered  round  the  hatch,  the  ropes 
were  then  removed  and  the  hatch  taken  off. 

"  What  fooling  are  you  up  to  ?"  one  of  the  Genoese  exclaimed, 
angrily,  as  they  rushed  up  on  deck.  "  You  have  nearly  stifled 
us  down  below  putting  on  the  hatch  and  fastening  it."  He 
stopped  abruptly  as,  on  gaining  the  deck,  he  saw  a  crowd  of 
armed  figures  round  him,  for  a  lantern  had  been  placed  so  as  to 
throw  a  light  upon  the  spot. 

"  You  are  prisoners,  the  captain  said.  "  It  is  useless  to  at- 
tempt resistance." 

"  Help,  help,  treachery !"  one  of  the  Genoese  shouted  at  the 
top  of  his  voice. 

"It  is  useless  for  you  to  shout,"  the  captain  said,  "you  are 
miles  away  from  your  fleet.  Now,  do  you  surrender,  or  are  we 
to  attack  you  ?" 


184  AWAITING  THE  PURSUERS. 

Taken  by  surprise  and  unarmed,  the  Genoese  who  had  gained 
the  deck  sullenly  replied  that  they  surrendered.  They  were 
bound  and  led  away,  and  the  others  ordered  to  come  up  on  deck. 
There  were  found  to  be  four-and-twenty  in  all,  and  these  were 
soon  laid  side  by  side  on  the  grain  in  the  hold,  the  hatch  being 
left  off  to  give  them  air.  The  masts  were  then  cut  through, 
and  were  with  some  trouble  lowered  to  the  deck. 

"There  is  nothing  more  to  be  done  now,"  the  captain  said, 
"and  I  think  we  can  all  safely  turn  in  till  morning."  He  then 
ordered  the  under  officer  to  place  two  men  on  watch  on  the 
rocks  and  two  men  on  deck,  two  men  to  stand  as  sentinels  over 
the  prisoners,  and  the  rest  to  lie  down.  He  directed  that  he 
should  be  roused  at  the  earliest  streak  of  daylight.  The  lads 
were  soon  fast  asleep,  and  could  hardly  believe  that  the  night 
was  over  when  Giuseppi  awakened  them  with  the  news  that 
day  was  breaking.  They  were  soon  on  deck,  and  found  that 
the  crew  were  already  astir.  The  sentinels  on  the  rock  were  at 
once  ordered  to  lie  down,  so  that  they  could  command  a  view 
of  the  sea  without  exposing  themselves  to  sight.  The  boats 
were  drawn  up  alongside,  and  everything  put  in  readiness  for 
instant  debarkation,  and  then  the  party  waited  for  the  appear- 
ance of  the  Genoese  galleys. 

"  They  will  be  along  in  less  than  an  hour,"  the  captain  said. 
"  It  is  light  enough  now  for  the  watch  to  have  discovered  that 
the  Lido  is  missing,  and  it  will  not  be  many  minutes  before  they 
are  under  way  They  will  calculate  that  we  can  have  but  five 
or  six  hours  start  at  the  utmost,  and  that  three  hours'  rowing 
will  bring  them  up  to  us." 

"  I  have  no  fear  whatever  of  their  discovering  us  as  they  go 
along,"  Francis  said.  "  The  only  fear  is  that  after  rowing  for 
three  or  four  hours  and  seeing  no  sign  of  us  they  will  guess 
that  we  are  hidden  somewhere  under  the  cliffs,  and  will  come 
back  along  the  shore,  searching  every  bay." 


A   WATCH   ALONG  THE   CLIFF.  185 

"  There  is  a  chance  of  that,"  the  captain  agreed,  "  but  I  should 
think  only  a  chance.  When  the  party  who  come  this  way  find 
they  do  not  overtake  us  they  will  suppose  that  we  have  sailed 
to  the  west,  and  that  on  their  return  they  will  find  us  in  the 
hands  of  their  comrades,  and  when  these  also  come  back  empty 
handed  they  will  conclude  that  we  have  sailed  straight  out  to 
sea.  Of  course  they  may  have  sent  a  galley  southward  also,  but 
will  conclude  that  that  has  somehow  missed  us  when  it  returns 
without  news.  I  hardly  think  that  the  idea  that  we  may  be 
hidden  so  close  to  them  will  enter  their  minds,  and  the  only 
fear  I  entertain  is  that  some  peasant  may  happen  to  come 
to  the  edge  of  the  cliff  and  see  us  lying  here,  and  may  take  the 
news  back  to  Girgenti." 

"  Yes,  there  is  certainly  a  danger  of  that,"  Francis  said.  "  I 
think,  captain,  it  would  be  the  best  plan  to  land  twenty  men 
at  once.  Giuseppi  will  show  them  the  way  up  the  cliff;  and  then 
they  must  take  their  station  at  short  distances  apart  along  the 
edge  of  the  cliff,  from  point  to  point  of  this  little  bay,  with 
orders  to  seize  any  one  who  may  approach  and  bring  him  down 
here.  They  must,  of  course,  be  told  to  lie  down,  as  a  line  of 
sentries  along  the  top  of  the  cliff  might  attract  the  attention  of 
somebody  on  the  galleys,  and  lead  to  a  search." 

"  Yes,  I  think  that  will  be  a  wise  precaution,"  the  captain 
agreed.  "Thomaso,  do  you  take  twenty  men  and  post  them 
as  you  hear  Messer  Francisco  say.  Tell  them  to  lie  in  the 
bushes  and  keep  out  of  sight,  and  on  no  account  to  show  them- 
selves unless  some  one  comes  along  sufficiently  near  to  look  over 
the  edge  of  the  cliff." 

"  Giuseppi,"  Francis  said,  "  do  you  act  as  guide  to  the  party. 
You  will  have  plenty  of  time  to  get  to  the  top  and  to  return 
before  the  galleys  come  along." 

A  quarter  of  an  hour  later  the  captain  with  Matteo  and 
Francis  landed  on  the  ledge  and  took  the  place  of  the  sentries, 


1 86  THE  GENOESE  GALLEY. 

and  in  twenty  minutes  a  simultaneous  exclamation  burst  from 
them,  as  a  Genoese  galley  was  seen  rowing  rapidly  along. 

"  They  have  sent  only  one  galley,"  Francis  said.  "  Of  course 
they  would  know  that  it  was  sufficiently  strong  to  overpower  us 
without  difficulty.  I  suppose  one  has  gone  west  and  the  others 
have  put  out  to  sea  in  different  directions ;  that  certainly 
was  the  best  course  they  could  have  adopted,  and  it  is  very 
lucky  that  we  did  not  attempt  to  escape  seaward,  for  they  would 
assuredly  have  had  us.  I  suppose,  captain,  you  intend  to  sail 
to-night." 

"  Certainly,"  the  captain  replied.  "  We  will  get  everything 
in  readiness  for  hoisting  the  masts  as  soon  as  the  galley  has 
passed  us  on  its  way  back.  There  is  no  fear  of  their  coming 
along  again  later  on,  for  the  men  will  have  had  an  eight  hours' 
row  of  it,  the  first  part,  at  any  rate,  at  full  speed  ;  besides,  they 
will  not  know  until  all  the  galleys  return  that  we  have  not  been 
*found,  so  I  think  it  will  be  quite  safe  to  get  up  the  masts  as 
soon  as  they  have  passed.  Then  directly  it  is  dark  we  will 
man  our  oars  and  row  to  the  south-west.  We  shall  be  far  away 
before  morning,  even  if  they  look  further  for  us,  which  they  are 
hardly  likely  to  do." 

"  How  about  the  prisoners,  captain  ?" 

"  We  have  no  choice  but  to  take  them  with  us,  Messer 
Francisco.  I  am  sure  I  do  not  want  to  be  bothered  with 
them,  but  we  cannot  land  them  before  we  leave,  or  they  would 
carry  the  news  to  Girgenti  in  an  hour,  and  we  should  be  caught 
the  first  thing  in  the  morning." 

It  was  late  in  the  afternoon  before  the  galley  was  seen 
returning,  rowing  slowly  and  heavily. 

"  I  expect,"  the  captain  said,  "  they  kept  up  the  racing  pace 
at  which  they  started  for  some  four  hours ;  by  that  time  they 
must  have  been  completely  worn  out,  and  no  doubt  they 
anchored  and  waited  for  some  hours  for  the  men  to  feed  and 


THE   BAFFLED  GALLEY.  187 

rest  themselves,  for  from  the  hurry  with  which  they  started 
you  may  be  sure  that  they  did  not  wait  to  break  their  fast. 
I  would  give  a  month's  pay  to  be  in  that  harbour  this  evening. 
What  tempers  they  must  be  in  when  they  find,  after  all  theit 
toil,  that  we  have  slipped  through  their  fingers ;  how  they  will 
talk  the  matter  over,  and  discuss  which  way  we  went ;  how  the 
men  in  each  ship  will  say  that  the  others  cannot  have  used 
their  eyes  or  exerted  themselves,  else  we  must  have  been  over- 
taken. Messer  Francisco,  I  am  indebted  to  you,  not  only  for 
having  saved  the  ship,  but  for  giving  me  a  joke,  which  I  shall 
laugh  over  whenever  I  think  of  it.  It  will  be  a  grand  story  to 
tell  over  the  wine-cups,  how  we  cheated  a  whole  Genoese  fleet, 
and  carried  off  the  Lido  from  under  their  noses.  What  a  tale 
it  will  be  to  relate  to  a  Genoese,  when  we  meet  in  some  port  after 
the  war  is  over;  it  will  be  enough  to  make  him  dance  with 
rage. 

"  Now,  lads,"  he  went  on  turning  to  the  men,  "  stand  to  your 
tackle ;  the  moment  that  galley  gets  out  of  sight  round  the 
point,  up  with  the  mast." 

Ten  minutes  later  the  masts  were  up,  stout  ropes  were  lashed 
round  them  and  the  stumps,  and  wedges  driven  in  to  tighten 
the  cords  to  the  utmost.  The  rigging  was  of  the  simplest 
description,  and  before  dark  everything  was  in  readiness  for 
hoisting  the  sails. 

"  I  don't  think  they  can  make  us  out  now,"  the  captain 
said. 

"I  don't  think  they  could,"  Francis  agreed;  "but  we  had 
better  wait  another  quarter  of  an  hour ;  it  would  be  absurd  to 
run  any  risk  after  everything  has  turned  out  so  well ;  but  the 
men  can  get  into  the  boats  and  tow  us  out  through  the  channel, 
then  we  can  hoist  the  boats  on  board,  and  by  that  time  it 
should  be  nearly  dark  enough." 

"  I  think  there  will  be  a  breeze  presently,"  the  captain  said, 


1 88  HOME    AGAIN. 

"and  from  the  right  direction.  However,  the  men  won't  mind 
working  hard  for  a  bit,  they  have  had  an  easy  time  for  the  last 
two  days." 

The  oars  were  all  manned,  and  the  men  set  to  work  with 
hearty  good-will.  They  were  delighted  at  their  escape  from 
the  island,  for  they  might  have  been  there  some  time  before  they 
got  a  passage  back,  and  still  more  pleased  at  having  tricked  the 
Genoese ;  and  the  Lido,  heavy  laden  as  she  was,  moved  at  a 
steady  pace  through  the  water,  under  the  impulsion  of  the 
oars. 

For  an  hour  they  rowed  parallel  with  the  shore,  as,  had  they 
made  out  to  sea  they  might  possibly  have  been  seen  by  one 
of  the  galleys  returning  late  from  the  search  for  them.  At 
the  end  of  that  time  the  captain  turned  her  head  from  shore. 
As  soon  as  they  got  well  out  from  under  the  shelter  of  the 
land  the  breeze  made  itself  felt,  and  the  sails  were  hoisted. 
For  a  time  the  men  kept  on  rowing,  but  the  breeze  increased 
rapidly,  and  the  captain  ordered  the  oars  to  be  laid  in.  A  double 
allowance  of  wine  was  served  out,  and  an  hour  or  two  spent  in 
song  and  hilarity;  then  the  watch  below  was  sent  down,  and 
Francis  and  Matteo  turned  into  their  cots. 

In  the  morning  the  breeze  was  blowing  strong;  the  sails  had 
been  taken  off  the  main-mast,  but  that  on  the  fore-mast  was 
dragging  the  Lido  through  the  water  at  a  good  rate  of  speed, 
and  before  night  they  were  off  Cape  Spartivento.  The  wind 
held  till  next  morning,  when  they  were  abreast  of  the  Gulf  of 
Taranto.  Then  came  a  long  spell  of  calms  or  baffling  winds, 
and  it  was  a  fortnight  before  the  campaniles  of  Venice  were  seen 
rising  apparently  from  the  water. 

"  I  have  been  anxious  about  you,"  Signor  Polani  said  when 
Francis  arrived.  "  One  of  our  galleys  brought  the  report  that 
a  Genoese  fleet  was  cruising  on  the  coast  of  Sicily,  and  as, 
although  war  had  not  yet  been  openly  declared,  both  parties 


"  IT   WAS  JUST  A   HAPPY   IDEA."  189 

were  making  prizes,  I  was  afraid  that  they  might  have  snapped 
you  up." 

"  They  did  snap  us  up,"  Francis  said  smiling.  "  They  caught 
us  in  the  port  of  Girgenti,  and  the  standard  of  Genoa  waved 
over  the  Lido." 

"  But  how  can  that  be,"  Polani  said,  "  when  you  have  returned 
in  her?  for  she  was  signalled  as  approaching  the  port  hours 
ago.  You  could  hardly  have  persuaded  the  Genoese  by  fair 
words  to  release  a  prize  that  they  had  once  taken.  Eh,  cap- 
tain ?'" 

"  No,  that  is  not  the  Genoese  way,  nor  ours  either,"  the 
captain  said.  "  We  did  better  than  that,  signor ;  we  recaptured 
her,  and  carried  her  off  from  under  their  noses." 

"You  are  joking,"  Polani  said,  "for  they  signalled  the  Lido 
as  returning  laden,  and  a  laden  ship  could  never  get  away  from 
state  galleys,  however  long  her  start.  A  fat  pig  might  as  soon 
try  to  escape  from  a  hunting  dog." 

"  That  is  so,  Messer  Polani,  and  we  did  not  trust  to  our 
speed  ;  we  tricked  them  famously,  sir.  At  least,  when  I  say  we 
did,  Messer  Francis  here  did,  for  the  credit  as  due  solely  to 
him.  If  it  had  not  been  for  this  young  gentleman  I  and  the 
crew  would  now  have  been  camping  out  in  the  forests  of  Sicily, 
without  the  slightest  prospect  of  being  able  to  make  our  way 
home,  and  the  Lido  would  now  be  moored  in  the  port  of 
Genoa." 

"  That  is  so,  Cousin  Polani,"  Matteo  said.  "  It  is  to  Francisco 
that  we  owe  our  escape,  and  you  owe  the  safety  of  the  Lido  and 
her  cargo." 

"  It  was  just  a  happy  idea  that  occurred  to  me,"  Francis 
said,  "  as  it  would  assuredly  have  occurred  to  Captain  Pesoro, 
if  he  had  been  with  us,  or  to  anyone  else,  and  after  I  had  first 
suggested  it  the  captain  carried  out  all  the  arrangements." 

"  Not  at  all,  Messer  Francisco,"  the  captain  said  obstinately. 


190  THE   STORY  TOLD. 

"  I  had  no  part  or  hand  in  the  business  beyond  doing  what  you 
suggested,  and  you  would  have  got  the  Lido  off  just  as  well  if 
I  hadn't  been  there." 

"  Well,  I  will  judge  for  myself  when  I  hear,"  Polani  said. 
"  But,  as  it  must  be  an  interesting  story,  my  daughters  would 
like  to  hear  it  also ;  so,  come  into  the  next  room  and  tell  the 
tale,  and  I  will  order  up  a  flagon  of  Cyprus  wine  to  moisten 
your  throats." 

"  First  of  all,"  the  captain  began,  after  the  girls  had  greeted 
Francis,  and  all  had  taken  their  seats,  "  I  must  tell  how  the 
Lido  was  captured."  And  he  then  related  how  the  Genoese  fleet 
had  suddenly  appeared  before  them,  and  how,  seeing  the  im- 
possibility of  escape,  he  had  sent  all  on  shore  with  the  exception 
of  four  sailors,  and  how  he  had  with  them  been  released  and 
sent  on  shore. 

"  That's  the  Genoese  all  over,"  Polani  said.  "  If  they  could 
have  sent  forty  prisoners  home  they  would  have  done  so ;  but 
the  fact  that  there  were  only  five  on  board  when  they  took  the 
vessel  would  seem  to  them  to  detract  from  the  credit  of  the 
capture." 

The  captain  then  told  how,  fearing  that  the  people  of  Girgenti 
might  give  them  all  up  to  the  Genoese,  or  that  fights  might 
ensue  among  the  Genoese  sailors  who  landed,  he  had  marched 
the  crew  away  out  of  the  town. 

"  Now,  captain,"  Matteo  broke  in,  "  I  will  tell  the  next  bit, 
because  I  was  with  Francis  when  he  found  a  hiding-place." 

He  then  related  how  Francis  had  seen  the  ledge  of  rocks  in 
the  distance,  and  had  dragged  him  along  the  cliff  two  miles  to 
observe  them  more  closely ;  and  how  he  had  come  to  the  con- 
clusion that  his  companion  had  lost  his  senses ;  then  he 
described  the  exact  position  and  the  clearness  of  the  water, 
and  how  he  had  been  convinced  that  there  was  not  depth  to 
float  a  row-boat  inside  the  rocks;  and  how  they  had  gone 


WAR  WITH   GENOA.  igi 

down,  swum  out,  fathomed  the  water,  and  then  returned  to  the 
wood. 

The  captain  then  took  up  the  tale  again,  and  completed  it  to 
the  end. 

"  There  is  no  doubt  you  were  right,  captain,"  Polani  said, 
"and  that  it  is  entirely  Francisco's  quickness  of  observation, 
readiness  of  plan,  and  determination  to  see  if  his  ideas  could  be 
carried  into  effect,  which  saved  the  Lido,  That  he  possessed 
these  qualities  is  not  new  to  me,  for  I  have  already  greatly 
benefited  by  them.  If  he  had  not  been  born  a  peaceful 
trader  he  would  have  made  a  great  captain  some  day ;  but 
the  qualities  which  would  distinguish  a  man  in  war  are  also 
useful  in  peace,  and  I  think  it  fully  as  honourable  to  be  a  suc- 
cessful merchant,  as  a  successful  soldier.  Henceforth,  Francisco, 
I  shall  no  longer  consider  you  as  in  leading  strings,  and  shall 
feel  that  I  can  confide  important  business  to  you,  young  as  you 
are." 

The  next  voyage  that  Francis  made  was  to  Jaffa,  and  this  was 
accomplished  without  adventure.  On  his  return  he  found  that 
Venice  was  in  a  state  of  excitement — war  had  at  last  been 
declared,  and  every  effort  was  being  made  to  fit  out  a  fleet 
which  could  cope  with  that  of  Genoa.  The  command  was 
intrusted  to  Vettore  Pisani,  who  was  invested  in  the  church  of 
St.  Mark  with  the  supreme  command  of  the  fleet  by  the  doge 
himself,  who  handed  to  the  admiral  the  great  banner  of  Venice, 
with  the  words : 

"  You  are  destined  by  God  to  defend  with  your  valour  this 
republic,  and  to  retaliate  upon  those  who  have  dared  to  insult 
her  and  to  rob  her  of  that  security  which  she  owes  to  the  virtue 
of  her  ancestors ;  wherefore,  we  confide  to  you  this  victorious 
and  great  standard,  which  it  will  be  your  duty  to  restore  to  us 
unsullied  and  triumphant." 

Carlo  Zeno,  a  noble,  who  had  gained  a  high  reputation  in 


I92  VETTORE   PISANI. 

various  capacities,  was  appointed  commissioner  and  captain-gen- 
eral of  Negropont.  The  three  first  divisions  of  those  inscribed  in 
the  register,  as  liable  to  serve  in  the  navy,  were  called  out,  and 
on  the  24th  of  April  Pisani  sailed  from  Venice  with  fourteen  war 
galleys. 

Pisani  enjoyed  the  highest  popularity  among  the  people  of 
Venice,  his  manner  was  that  of  a  bluff,  hearty  sailor,  he  was 
always  ready  to  share  in  the  hardships  of  his  men,  and  to  set 
them  an  example  of  good  temper  and  cheerfulness,  as  well  as  of 
bravery.  He  was  quick-tempered,  and  when  in  a  passion  cared 
nothing  whom  he  struck  ;  when  governor  of  Candia,  he  had  got 
into  a  serious  scrape,  by  striking  Pietro  Cornaro,  an  officer  of 
the  republic,  from  whom  he  happened  to  differ  on  some  point  of 
routine. 

He  was  a  relative  of  the  Doge  Andrea  Contarini,  and  had  been 
employed  not  only  as  an  officer  in  the  navy,  but  as  a  military 
engineer  and  as  a  diplomatist,  and  in  each  capacity  had  shown 
equal  talent.  He  was  connected  with  the  Polani  family,  av* 
was  at  their  house  several  times  before  he  sailed.  Here  he 
heard  from  his  kinsman  an  account  of  the  manner  in  which 
Francisco  had  saved  the  Bonito  from  being  rammed  by  the 
pirates,  and  how  he  had  succeeded  in  getting  the  Lido  out  of  the 
hands  of  the  Genoese ;  and  he  was  so  much  pleased  that  he 
offered  to  take  him  with  him  in  his  galley,  but  Polani  advised 
Francis  not  to  accept  the  offer. 

"  It  is  quite  true,"  he  said,  "  that  most  of  our  noble  families 
are,  like  myself,  engaged  in  commerce,  and  that  one  day  they 
are  trading  as  merchants  and  the  next  fighting  under  the  state ; 
but  at  present,  if  you  take  my  advice  you  will  stick  to  the 
peaceful  side  of  the  profession,  especially  as,  being  an  English- 
man, you  are  in  no  way  called  upon  to  serve  the  state.  In 
another  five  or  six  years,  if  we  are  then  at  war,  it  will  be 
different.  I  have  frequently  offered  galleys  for  the  service  of  the 


POLANl'S   ADVICE.  193 

state,  and  you  can  then  take  the  command  of  one,  and  will,  I 
have  no  doubt,  distinguish  yourself;  but  were  you  to  enter 
now,  you  might  remain  in  the  service  of  the  state  for  some 
years,  and  would  be  losing  your  time  as  a  merchant.  There 
are  countries  in  which  when  a  man  once  takes  up  the  profession 
of  arms  he  remains  a  soldier  all  his  life,  and  may  not  only 
achieve  honour,  but  wealth  and  wide  possessions.  It  is  not  so 
in  Venice  ;  here  we  are  all  citizens  as  well  as  all  soldiers  if  need 
be.  We  fight  for  the  state  while  a  war  lasts,  and  then  return 
to  our  peaceful  avocations.  Even  mv  kinsman,  Pisani,  may  be 
admiral  of  the  fleet  to-day,  and  a  week  hence  may  be  a  private 
citizen.  Therefore,  my  lad,  I  think  it  would  be  very  foolish 
of  you  to  give  up  commerce  at  present  to  take  military  ser- 
vice." 

"  I  quite  agree  with  you,  signor,"  Francis  said,  although,  in 
truth,  for  a  moment  he  had  felt  a  strong  mind  to  accept  the 
offer  of  Pisani.  "  I  am  just  beginning  to  learn  a  little  of  trade, 
and  desire  nothing  better  than  to  be  a  successful  merchant 
though  I  confess  that  I  should  like  to  take  part  in  such  a 
glorious  sea-fight  as  that  which  is  likely  to  take  place  soon." 

"  Yes,  and  perhaps  be  killed  in  the  first  engagement,  Francis, 
for  neither  skill  nor  bravery  avail  against  a  bolt  from  a  Genoese 
cross-bow.  No,  my  lad,  be  content  with  trade,  especially  since 
you  have  seen  already  that  even  the  life  of  a  trader  has  plenty 
of  incident  and  excitement.  What  with  storms,  what  with 
pirates,  what  with  the  enemies  of  the  state  and  the  treachery  of 
the  native  peoples  with  whom  we  trade,  there  is  no  lack  of 
adventure  in  the  life  of  a  Venetian  merchant." 

Francis  felt  that  this  was  true,  and  that  he  had  in  the  past 
six  months  had  fully  his  share  in  adventures.  His  stay 
on  shore  this  time  extended  over  a  month,  and  it  was  not 
until  three  weeks  after  Pisani  sailed  that  he  again  set  out. 
The  notice  was  a  short  one.  Polani  had  been  sent  for  to 


lg4  A    FRESH   VOYAGE. 

attend  the  council  early  in  the  morning,  and  on  his  return  he 
said  to  Francis : 

"  You  must  go  down  to  the  port  at  once,  Francis.  News  has 
been  received  from  Pisani  that  he  has  sailed  almost  into  the 
port  of  Genoa,  without  finding  the  fleet  of  Fieschi.  The 
Genoese  have  been  in  a  terrible  state  of  panic.  The  Lord 
of  Fiesole,  who  is  our  ally,  is  menacing  the  city  by  land,  the 
Stella  Company  of  Condottieri,  which  is  in  our  pay,  is  also  march- 
ing against  them  ;  and  the  news  that  Pisani  was  close  at  hand 
seems  to  have  frightened  them  out  of  their  senses.  Their  first 
step  as  usual  has  been  to  depose  their  doge  and  choose  another. 
However  that  is  not  the  point.  Pisani  has  written  asking  that 
some  ships  with  provisions  and  stores  shall  be  sent  out  to  him. 
They  are  to  go  through  the  Straits  of  Messina  and  up  the 
coast  of  Italy  until  he  meets  them.  His  force  is  far  too  small 
for  him  to  think  of  making  an  attack  upon  Genoa.  He  will  wait 
in  the  neighbourhood  of  the  city  for  a  short  time  in  hopes  of 
Fieschi's  fleet  returning ;  if  it  does  not  do  so  he  will  come 
down  the  coast  searching  for  it,  and  as  he  does  not  wish  to 
put  in  port,  he  desires  the  stores  mentioned  to  be  sent  out  to 
him. 

"  I  have  placed  the  Bontto  at  their  service,  and  have  pro- 
mised that  she  shall  be  ready  to  sail  to-morrow  morning,  if 
they  will  send  the  stores  on  board  to-day.  Three  other 
merchants  placed  ships  at  their  disposal,  but  these  may  not 
sail  for  a  day  or  two.  They  are  particularly  anxious  that  the 
Bontto  shall  start  at  once,  as,  in  addition  to  provisions,  she  will 
carry  a  store  of  javelins,  arrows,  and  other  missiles  of  which  there 
was  not  a  sufficiency  in  the  arsenal  when  Pisani  sailed.  You 
will  have  a  strong  party  on  board,  as  speed  is  required,  and 
the  oars  must  be  kept  going  until  you  join  the  fleet ;  therefore 
I  shall  place  the  crew  of  the  Lido  on  board  as  well  as  the 
Bonitos  own  complement,  and  this  will  bring  the  number  up  to 


A  BUSY  NIGHT'S  WORK.  195 

&  hundred  men.  The  captain  has  had  an  accident,  and  will  not 
be  able  to  go  in  charge,  therefore  the  Lido's  captain  will  com- 
mand. This  time  I  shall  appoint  you  specifically  second  in 
command,  as  well  as  my  representative.  Now  get  off  on  board 
as  quickly  as  you  can,  for  there  is  enough  to  keep  you  at  work 
till  to-morrow  morning  to  get  everything  in  readiness  for  a 
start.  You  had  best  run  in  and  say  good-bye  to  my  daughters, 
as  it  may  be  that  you  will  not  find  time  to  return  before 
sailing.  You  can  send  your  boy  ashore  for  what  things  you 
require.  Matteo  will  accompany  you." 

A  few  minutes  later  Francis  was  on  his  way  to  the  port, 
leaving  Giuseppi  to  charter  a  gondola  and  follow  with  his 
trunks.  As  Polani  had  said,  he  was  occupied  without  inter- 
mission until  the  time  for  sailing  next  morning.  The  barges 
of  the  state  kept  coming  alongside  with  stores  and  provisions 
from  the  arsenal ;  while  other  boats  brought  out  the  ship's 
stores ;  and  Francis  had  to  take  a  note  of  all  that  came  on 
board.  The  captain  superintended  the  setting  up  of  the  rig- 
ging, and  the  getting  of  the  ship  into  working  order ;  while 
the  under  officers  saw  to  the  hoisting  in  and  storing  of  the 
cargo.  Gangs  of  men  were  at  work  tarring  the  sides  of  the 
ship,  for  she  had  only  two  days  before  returned  from  a  trip  to 
Spain  ;  and  a  number  of  sailors  were  unloading  the  cargo  from 
one  hatchway,  while  her  fresh  freight  was  being  taken  in  at  the 
other.  It  seemed  well-nigh  impossible  that  she  could  be  ready 
to  sail  at  the  hour  named,  but  every  one  worked  with  a  will, 
and  by  daybreak  things  were  almost  in  order. 

Polani  himself  came  down  to  the  port  as  soon  as  it  was  light, 
and  expressed  satisfaction  at  the  work  which  had  been  done ; 
and  half  an  hour  afterwards  the  anchor  was  weighed.  Just  as 
the  sails  had  been  hoisted,  Matteo  arrived. 

"  You  are  only  just  in  time,  Matteo,"  Polani  said ;  "  why 
did  you  not  come  off  yesterday  and  help?  '" 


jp6  MATTEO   IS   REPRIMANDED. 

"  I  was  out,"  Matteo  said,  "  when  your  message  came,  and 
only  returned  just  in  time  to  go  to  the  entertainment  at  the 
ducal  palace ;  I  knew  I  could  be  of  no  use  on  board  while 
they  were  only  getting  in  the  cargo." 

"  You  will  never  be  of  any  use  on  board,  Matteo,  if  you  go 
to  entertainments  when  there's  work  to  be  done.  You  could 
have  taken  the  marks  on  the  bales  as  they  came  on  board  just 
as  well  as  another.  I  suppose  you  thought  that  the  dirt  and 
dust  wouldn't  suit  a  fine  gentleman  like  you  ?  Another  time, 
unless  you  come  on  board  when  sent  for,  and  make  yourself  as 
useful  as  you  can  while  the  ship  is  fitting  out  and  loading,  you 
will  not  sail  in  her.  One  part  of  the  duty  is  just  as  important 
as  the  other,  and  seamanship  does  not  consist  solely  in  strolling 
up  and  down  the  deck,  and  watching  a  vessel  sail  for  her 
destination." 

"  Matteo  was  abashed  at  the  reproach,  but  soon  recovered 
his  usual  spirits  after  Polani  had  left  when  the  vessel  was 
under  way. 

"  My  cousin  was  rather  in  a  sharp  mood  this  morning,"  he 
said  with  a  laugh  to  Francis;  "but  really  I  did  not  think  I 
could  be  of  any  good,  and  the  entertainment  was  a  grand  one. 
Every  one  was  there,  and  I  should  have  been  very  sorry  to 
have  missed  it." 

"  Every  one  to  his  taste,  Matteo.  For  my  part  I  would  very 
much  rather  have  been  at  work  here  all  night  watching  the 
cargo  got  in  and  checking  it  off,  than  have  been  standing 
about  doing  nothing  in  the  palace." 

"Doing  nothing!"  Matteo  repeated  indignantly.  "Why,  I 
was  talking  to  some  one  the  whole  time  I  was  there." 

"  Talking  about  what,  Matteo  ?  " 

"  The  heat,  and  the  music,  and  the  costumes,  and  the  last  bit 
of  scandal  at  the  Piazza." 

"  I  don't  call  that  talk,  I  call  it  chatter.    And  now,  Matteo, 


SEARCHING  FOR  PISANI.  197 

I  shall  leave  you  to  your  own  devices,  for  I  am  going  to  turn  in 
and  get  a  sleep  for  a  few  hours." 

"  You  look  as  if  you  wanted  it,"  Matteo  said ;  "  but  I  think 
that  you  stand  in  even  more  need  of  a  wash.  You  are  grimy 
with  dust.  It  is  just  as  well  that  my  cousin  Giulia  did  not 
come  on  board  with  her  father  this  morning,  for  the  sight  of 
your  face  would  have  given  her  quite  a  shock,  and  would  have 
dissipated  any  illusions  she  may  have  had  that  you  were  a  good- 
looking  fellow." 

Francis  went  off  to  his  cabin  with  a  laugh,  and  took  Matteo's 
advice  as  to  the  wash  before  he  turned  in.  In  a  few  minutes  he 
was  asleep,  and  did  not  wake  until  Giuseppi  came  to  say  that 
the  mid-day  meal  was  just  ready. 

The  Bonito  made  a  rapid  voyage.  The  winds  were  light,  and 
for  the  most  part  favourable,  and  the  twenty-four  oars  were 
kept  going  night  and  day,  the  men  relieving  each  other  every 
two  hours,  so  that  they  had  six  hours'  rest  between  the  spells  of 
rowing.  When  they  rounded  the  southern  point  of  Italy  a  sharp 
look-out  was  kept  for  the  fleet  of  Fieschi,  but  they  passed 
tnrough  the  straits  without  catching  sight  of  a  single  vessel 
carrying  the  Genoese  flag.  The  most  vigilant  watch  was  now 
kept  for  Pisani's  galleys,  and  they  always  anchored  at  the  close 
of  day,  lest  they  should  pass  him  in  the  dark.  Occasionally 
they  overhauled  a  fishing-boat,  and  endeavoured  to  obtain  news 
of  the  two  squadrons  ;  but  beyond  the  fact  that  Fieschi  had  been 
seen  steering  north  some  days  before,  and  that  no  signs  had 
been  seen  of  Pisani's  returning  fleet,  they  could  learn  nothing. 


CHAPTER  XI. 

THE   BATTLE  OF  ANTIUM. 

E  are  running  very  far  north,"  the  captain  said  on 
the  29th  of  May.  "  We  are  near  Antium  now,  and 
are  getting  into  what  we  may  call  Genoese  waters. 
If  anything  has  occurred  to  prevent  Pisani  carrying 
out  his  intention  of  sailing  back  along  this  coast,  or  if  he  has 
passed  us  on  the  way  up,  our  position  would  be  a  hazardous 
one,  for  as  soon  as  he  has  rowed  away  the  Genoese  galleys  will 
be  on  the  move  again,  and  even  if  we  do  not  fall  in  with  Fieschi 
we  may  be  snapped  up  by  one  of  their  cruisers." 

"  It  is  rather  risky,  captain,"  Francis  agreed  ;  "  but  our  orders 
are  distinct.  We  were  to  sail  north  till  we  met  Pisani,  and  we 
must  do  so  till  we  are  within  sight  of  the  walls  of  Genoa.  If  we 
then  see  he  is  not  lying  off  the  port  we  shall  put  about  and  make 
our  way  back  again." 

"  Yes,  if  they  give  us  the  chance,  Messer  Francisco ;  but  long 
before  we  are  sufficiently  near  to  Genoa  to  make  out  whether 
Pisani  is  lying  off  the  port  they  will  see  us  from  the  hills,  and 
will  send  off  a  galley  to  bring  us  in.  However,  we  must  take 
our  chance,  and  if  we  get  into  a  scrape  I  shall  look  to  you  con- 
fidently to  get  us  out  again." 

"  I  should  advise  you  not  to  count  on  that,"  Francis  said, 
laughing.  "  It  is  not  always  one  gets  such  a  lucky  combination 
of  circumstances  as  we  did  at  Girgenti." 


NEWS  OF  THE  GENOESE.  199 

At  ,'ast  they  obtained  news  from  a  fishing-boat  that  Fieschi's 
fleet  had  passed,  going  northward,  on  the  previous  day,  and  was 
now  lying  in  the  bay  of  Antium.  As  Antium  lay  but  a  few 
miles  north  they  held  a  consultation  as  to  the  best  method  to 
pursue.  If  they  sailed  on  there  was  a  risk  of  capture ;  but  that 
risk  did  not  appear  to  be  very  great.  The  Genoese  admiral 
would  not  expect  to  find  a  Venetian  merchant  ship  so  near  to 
Genoa,  and  they  might  be  able  to  pass  without  being  inter- 
fered with.  On  the  other  hand,  news  might  possibly  have  come 
of  the  departure  of  store-ships  from  Venice  for  Pisani's  fleet, 
and  in  that  case  a  strict  look-out  would  certainly  be  kept,  and  it 
would  be  necessary  to  keep  so  far  to  sea  as  to  be  out  of  sight  of 
the  Genoese  ;  but  in  that  case  there  would  be  a  risk  of  their 
missing  Pisani's  fleet  on  the  way  down. 

"  I  think,"  the  captain  said  after  a  long  debate,  "  that  we  had 
better  anchor  here  close  under  the  shore  to-night.  If  I  am  not 
mistaken  we  shall  have  a  gale  in  the  morning.  I  do  not  like  the 
look  of  the  sky.  To-morrow  we  shall  see  how  the  weather  is, 
and  can  then  come  to  a  decision." 

By  morning,  as  the  captain  had  predicted,  the  wind  was  blow- 
ing strongly  and  a  heavy  sea  was  running,  and  it  was  agreed  to 
keep  along  under  the  lee  of  the  shore  until  they  could  obtain  a 
view  of  the  Bay  of  Antium,  and  see  if  the  fleet  of  Fieschi  was 
still  there ;  if  so,  they  would  tack  and  run  back  some  distance 
and  make  straight  out  to  sea,  so  as  to  pass  along  four  or  five 
miles  from  the  shore,  as  it  would  be  unlikely  in  the  extreme  that 
the  Genoese  admiral  would  send  a  galley  out  to  overhaul  a 
passing  ship  in  such  weather. 

They  sailed  along  till  they  neared  the  slight  depression  known 
as  the  Bay  of  Antium,  and  then  bore  farther  out  to  sea. 

Suddenly  a  fleet  was  seen  running  down  the  coast  at  some 
distance  away. 

"  'Bout  ship,"  the  captain  cried.    "  The  Genoese  have  been 


200  THE  RIVAL   FLEETS. 

cruising  further  north,  and  are  coming  down  the  coast.  In  such 
weather  as  this  the  Bonito  ought  to  be  able  to  get  away  from 
them." 

"  It  may  be  Pisani's  fleet,"  Francis  said,  as  the  ship  was  put 
round. 

"  It  is  possible,"  the  captain  agreed  ;  "  but  we  cannot  run  the 
risk  of  stopping  until  we  make  inquiries." 

"  No,  captain  ;  but,  at  least,  if  we  run  a  mile  or  so  out  to  sea 
we  should  be  able  to  see  round  the  point  and  discover  whether 
Fieschi's  galleys  are  there." 

The  captain  assented.  The  vessel's  head  was  turned  from 
the  land.  In  ten  minutes  there  was  a  joyous  shout  on  board 
the  Bonito,  for  the  Genoese  fleet  was  seen  lying  in  the  bay. 
The  distant  fleet  must  then  form  that  of  Pisani. 

"  See  !  "  Francis  exclaimed  ;  "  the  Genoese  have  just  caught 
sight  of  them,  and  are  hoisting  sail.  They  are  either  going  to 
meet  them  or  to  run  away.  Our  vessels  are  the  most  numerous; 
but  no,  there  is  not  much  difference.  Pisani  has  fourteen  ships, 
but  some  must  be  lagging  behind,  or  have  been  lost.  How 
many  do  you  make  them  out  to  be,  captain  ?  " 

"I  think  there  are  only  nine,"  the  captain  answered,  "and 
that  is  just  the  number  of  the  Genoese." 

"  Then  Fieschi  will  fight  if  he  is  not  a  coward,"  Matteo  said  ; 
"  but,  in  that  case,  why  are  they  making  out  to  sea  ?  " 

"  Fieschi  may  not  care  to  be  attacked  at  anchor,"  the  captain 
replied  ;  "  that  would  give  all  the  advantage  to  us  ;  besides  if 
they  were  beaten  there  would  be  but  little  chance  of  any  of 
them  escaping.  No,  he  is  right  to  make  out  to  sea,  but  blow- 
ing as  it  is  it  will  be  next  to  impossible  for  him  to  fight  there. 
Two  vessels  could  hardly  get  alongside  to  board  in  such  a  sea 
as  this.  I  expect  Fieschi  thinks  that  we  shall  never  attack 
him  in  such  a  storm;  but  Pisani  would  fight  if  it  were  a 
hurricane." 


"CANNOT  WE  EDGE  DOWN  TOWARDS  THEM?"  2OI 

It  did  indeed  seem  almost  impossible  to  fight  in  such  a  sea. 
The  Bonito  was  rolling,  gunwale  under.  Her  sail  had  been 
reduced  to  its  smallest  proportions,  and  yet,  when  the  squalls 
struck  her  she  was  laid  completely  over  on  her  side.  But  the 
rival  admirals  were  too  anxious  to  fight  to  be  deterred  by  the 
difficulty,  and  both  were  bent  upon  bringing  on  an  action  at  once. 

"  I  would  give  anything  to  be  on  board  one  of  our  galleys," 
Matteo  said.  "  It  is  horrible  standing  here  doing  nothing, 
when  such  a  fight  as  this  is  going  to  begin." 
1  "  Cannot  we  edge  down  towards  them,  captain  ? "  Francis 
asked.  "  I  do  not  mean  that  we  should  take  part  in  the  fight, 
for  we  have  but  a  hundred  men,  and  the  galleys  must  each 
carry  at  least  three  times  as  many  ;  still  we  might  be  near  enough 
to  see  something,  and  perhaps  give  succour  to  any  disabled 
ship  that  drops  out  of  the  fight." 

"  I  will  do  so  if  you  like,  Messer  Francisco,"  the  captain  said, 
"  if  you  will  take  the  responsibility ;  but  if  our  side  gets  the 
worst  of  it,  you  must  remember  that  the  Bonito  may  be  cap- 
tured." 

"  I  don't  think  there's  much  chance  of  Pisani  being  beaten 
by  an  enemy  no  stronger  than  himself,"  Francis  said  ;  "  and  even 
if  they  should  be  victorious,  the  Genoese  will  certainly  have 
enough  on  their  hands  with  repairing  damages  and  securing 
prisoners  to  think  of  setting  off  in  chase  of  a  ship  like  ours." 

"That  is  true  enough,"  the  captain  agreed,  for  he  was  indeed 
as  anxious  as  Francis  and  Matteo  to  witness  the  struggle. 

The  vessels  on  both  sides  were  under  canvas,  for  it  was  im- 
possible to  row  in  such  a  sea.  As  soon  as  they  approached  each 
other  both  fleets  broke  up,  and  the  vessels  each  singling  an 
opponent  out,  the  combat  began.  It  was  a  singular  one,  and 
differed  widely  from  ordinary  sea-fights  of  the  time,  in  which 
the  combatants  always  tried  to  grapple  with  their  enemies  and 
carry  them  by  boarding.  This  was  almost  impossible  now,  for 


202  A  SEA  FIGHT. 

it  seemed  that  the  vessels  would  be  dashed  in  pieces  like  egg- 
shells were  they  to  strike  each  other.  Clouds  of  missiles  were 
poured  from  one  to  the  other;  the  archers  plied  their  bows; 
great  machines  hurled  javelins  and  big  stones,  and  the  crash 
of  the  blows  of  the  latter  aga.nst  *he  sides  of  the  ships  sounded 
even  above  the  noise  of  the  wind  and  waves  and  the  shouting 
of  the  combatants.  As  for  the  cannon  with  which  all  the 
galleys  were  armed,  they  were  far  too  cumbrous  and  unmanage- 
able to  be  worked  in  such  weather. 

Sometimes  one  vessel,  lifted  on  the  crest  of  a  wave  while  its 
opponent  lay  in  a  hollow,  swept  its  decks  with  terrible  effect ; 
while  a  few  seconds  later  the  advantage  was  on  the  other 
side. 

For  a  long  time  neither  party  seemed  to  gain  any  advantage. 
Great  numbers  were  killed  on  both  sides,  but  victory  did  not  in- 
cline either  way,  until  the  mast  of  one  of  the  Venetian  galleys  was 
struck  by  a  heavy  stone  and  went  over  the  side.  She  at  once 
fell  out  of  the  line  of  the  battle,  her  opponent  keeping  close  to 
her,  pouring  in  volumes  of  missiles,  while  the  sea,  taking  her 
on  the  broad  side,  washed  numbers  of  her  crew  overboard.  Her 
opponent,  seeing  that  she  was  altogether  helpless,  left  her  to  be 
taken  possession  of  afterwards,  and  made  for  Pisani's  galley, 
which  was  distinguished  by  its  flag  at  the  masthead,  and  was 
maintaining  a  desperate  conflict  with  the  galley  of  Fieschi. 

The  admiral's  ship  was  now  swept  with  missiles  from  both 
sides,  and  when  his  adversaries  saw  that  his  crew  was  greatly 
weakened  they  prepared  to  close,  in  spite  of  the  state  of  the 
sea.  If  Pisani  himself  could  be  captured  there  would  remain 
but  seven  Venetian  ships  to  the  nine  Genoese,  and  victory  was 
certain. 

The  captain  of  the  Bonito  had  lashed  together  some  heavy 
spars  and  thrown  them  overboard,  having  fastened  a  strong 
rope  to  them,  and  was  riding  head  to  the  waves  by  means 


THE   ''BONITO"   TO    THE   RESCUE!  203 

of  this  sea  anchor,  at  a  distance  of  about  half  a  mile  from  the 
conflict.  A  cry  of  grief  and  rage  had  arisen  when  the  crew  saw 
that  one  oi  their  galleys  was  disabled,  and  their  excitement  be- 
came intense  when  they  saw  the  unequal  struggle  which  Pisani 
was  maintaining. 

"  They  are  preparing  to  board,  captain,"  Francis  said.  "  We 
must  go  to  the  admiral's  aid  ;  if  his  ship  is  captured  the  battle 
is  lost." 

"  I  am  ready,  Messer  Francisco,  if  you  authorize  me." 

"  Certainly  I  do,"  Francis  said.  "  The  loss  or  capture  of  the 
Bonito  is  as  nothing  in  comparison  to  the  importance  of  saving 
Pisani." 

The  captain  gave  the  order  for  the  hawser  to  be  cut  and  the 
sail  hoisted.  A  cheer  broke  from  the  crew  as  they  saw  what 
was  to  be  done.  Their  arms  had  been  served  out  at  the  begin- 
ning of  the  contest,  and  they  now  seized  them  and  gathered  in 
readiness  to  take  part  in  the  fight." 

The  two  Genoese  galleys  had  thrown  their  grapnels  and 
made  fast,  one  on  each  side  of  Pisani's  galley.  The  bulwarks 
were  stove  in  and  splintered  as  the  vessels  rolled,  and  the  rigging 
of  the  three  ships  became  entangled.  The  Genoese  sprang  on 
to  the  deck  of  Pisani's  galley,  with  shouts  of  triumph,  but  they 
were  met  by  the  admiral  himself,  wielding  a  mighty  battle-axe, 
and  the  survivors  of  his  crew. 

The  combat  was  still  raging  when  the  Bonito  sailed  swiftly 
up.  Her  sails  were  lowered  as  she  came  alongside,  and  she  was 
lashed  "to  one  of  the  galleys.  But  this  manoeuvre  was  not  per- 
formed without  loss.  As  she  approached  with  the  Venetian 
flag  flying  at  her  masthead,  the  Genoese  archers  on  the  poop  of 
the  galley,  who  had  hitherto  been  pouring  their  missiles  among 
Pisani's  men,  turned  round  and  opened  fire  upon  this  new  foe. 
Their  arrows  did  far  more  execution  here  than  they  had  done 
among  the  armour-clad  soldiers  of  the  state.  The  captain  fell 


2O4  A   HAND-TO-HAND  COMBAT. 

dead  with  an  arrow  which  struck  him  full  in  the  throat,  and 
ten  or  twelve  of  the  sailors  fell  on  the  deck  beside  him. 

"  Pour  in  one  volley,"  Francis  shouted ;  "  then  throw  down 
your  bows,  and  take  to  your  axes  and  follow  me." 

The  instant  the  vessel  was  lashed  Francis  sprang  on  to  the 
deck  of  the  galley.  Matteo  was  by  his  side,  Giuseppi  just 
behind,  and  the  whole  crew  followed.  Climbing  first  upon  the 
poop,  they  fell  upon  the  archers,  who,  after  a  short  struggle, 
were  cut  down ;  then,  descending  again  to  the  waist  of  the 
galley,  they  leaped  on  to  the  deck  of  Pisani's  ship,  and  fell  upon 
the  rear  of  the  Genoese.  These  were  taken  completely  by  sur- 
prise. Absorbed  in  the  struggle  in  which  they  were  engaged, 
they  had  noticed  neither  the  approach  of  the  Bonito,  nor  the 
struggle  on  board  their  own  galley,  and  supposed  that  another 
of  the  Venesian  war-ships  had  come  up  to  the  assistance  of 
their  admiral. 

Taken  then  by  surprise,  and  finding  themselves  thus  between 
two  bands  of  foes,  they  fought  irresolutely,  and  the  crew  of 
the  Bonito,  with  their  heavy  axes,  cut  down  numbers  of  them, 
and  fighting  their  way  through  the  mass,  joined  the  diminished 
force  of  Pisani. 

The  admiral  shouted  the  battle-cry  of  "  St.  Mark ! "  his  fol- 
lowers, who  had  begun  to  give  way  to  despair,  rallied  at  the 
arrival  of  this  unlooked-for  reinforcement,  and  the  whole  fell 
upon  the  Genoese  with  fury. 

The  latter  fought  stoutly  and  steadily  now,  animated  by  the 
voice  and  example  of  Fieschi  himself ;  but  their  assurance  of 
victory  was  gone,  and  they  were  gradually  beaten  back  to  the 
deck  of  their  admiral's  ship.  Here  they  made  desperate  efforts 
to  cut  the  lashings  and  free  the  vessel ;  but  the  yards  had  got 
interlocked  and  the  rigging  entangled,  and  the  Venetians  sprang 
on  to  the  deck  of  the  ship,  and  renewed  the  conflict  there. 
For  some  time  the  struggle  was  doubtful ;  the  Genoese  had 


VICTORY.  205 

still  the  advantage  in  numbers,  but  they  were  disheartened  at 
the  success,  which  they  had  deemed  certain,  having  been  so 
suddenly  and  unexpectedly  snatched  from  their  grasp. 

The  presence  of  Pisani  in  itself  doubled  the  strength  of  the 
Venetians.  He  was  the  most  popular  of  their  commanders, 
and  each  strove  to  imitate  the  example  which  he  set  them. 
After  ten  minutes'  hard  fighting  the  result  was  no  longer 
doubtful.  Many  of  the  Genoese  ran  below ;  others  threw  down 
their  arms ;  and  their  admiral  at  last,  seeing  further  resistance 
was  hopeless,  lowered  his  sword  and  surrendered. 

No  sooner  had  resistance  ceased  than  Pisani  turned  to 
Francis,  who  had  been  fighting  by  his  side  : 

"  I  thank  you,  in  the  name  of  myself  and  the  republic,"  he 
said.  "  Where  you  have  sprung  from,  or  how  you  came  here, 
I  know  not.  You  seemed  to  me  to  have  fallen  from  heaven  to 
our  assistance  just  at  the  moment  when  all  was  lost.  Who 
are  you  ?  I  seem  to  know  your  face,  though  I  cannot  recall 
where  I  have  seen  it." 

"  I  am  Francis  Hammond,  Messer  Pisani.  I  had  the  honour 
of  seeing  you  at  the  house  of  my  patron,  Signer  Polani,  and 
you  were  good  enough  to  offer  to  take  me  with  you  to  sea." 

"  Oh,  I  remember  now !  "  Pisani  said.  "  But  how  came  you 
here  ?  " 

"  I  came  in  the  Bonito,  one  of  Polani's  ships.  She  is 
lying  outside  the  farther  of  the  Venetian  galleys.  We  bring 
from  Venice  some  of  the  stores  for  which  you  sent.  We  were 
lying  off  watching  the  battle,  until  we  saw  that  you  were 
sore  beset  and  in  need  of  help,  and  could  then  no  longer 
remain  inactive.  Our  captain  was  killed  by  an  arrow  as  we 
ranged  up  alongside  of  the  galley,  and  I  am  now  in  command. 
This  is  my  friend,  Matteo  Giustiniani,  a  volunteer  on  board 
the  Bonito." 

"  I  remember  you,  Master  Matteo,"  Pisani  said,  as  he  shook 


2o6  AFTER  THE   BATTLE. 

him  by  the  hand.  "  I  have  seen  you  often  at  your  father's 
house.  I  shall  have  to  give  him  a  good  account  of  you,  for 
I  saw  you  fighting  bravely.  But  we  will  talk  more  of  this  after- 
wards. We  must  set  to  work  to  separate  the  galleys,  or  we 
shall  have  them  grinding  each  other  to  pieces.  Then  we  must 
hasten  to  the  assistance  of  our  friends." 

The  Genoese  prisoners  were  all  fastened  below,  and  the 
Venetians  then  set  to  work  to  cut  the  lashings  and  free  the 
rigging  of  the  ships. 

Francis  kept  only  twenty  men  on  board  the  Bontto ;  the  re- 
mainder were  distributed  between  the  two  captured  Genoese 
galleys,  and  the  admiral  turned  his  attention  to  the  battle. 
But  it  was  already  almost  over.  The  sight  of  the  Venetian 
flag  at  the  mastheads  of  the  admiral's  ship  and  the  other 
galley  struck  dismay  into  the  Genoese.  Five  of  their  ships 
immediately  hoisted  all  canvas  and  made  off,  while  the  other 
two,  surrounded  by  the  Venetian  galleys,  hauled  down  their 
flags. 

The  battle  had  been  a  sanguinary  one,  and  but  eight  hundred 
men  were  found  alive  on  board  the  four  galleys  captured.  The 
fight  is  known  in  history  as  the  battle  of  Porto  d'Anzo. 

The  struggle  had  lasted  nearly  the  whole  day,  and  it  was 
growing  dark  when  the  Venetian  fleet,  with  their  prizes, 
anchored  under  shelter  of  the  land. 

All  night  long  the  work  of  attending  upon  the  wounded  went 
on,  and  it  was  daybreak  before  the  wearied  crews  lay  down  for 
repose.  In  the  afternoon  Pisani  hoisted  a  signal  for  the  captains 
of  the  galleys  to  come  on  board ;  and  in  their  presence  he 
formally  thanked  Francis,  in  the  name  of  the  republic,  for  the 
aid  he  had  afforded  him  at  the  most  critical  moment.  Had  it 
not  been  for  that  aid,  he  acknowledged  that  he  and  his  crew 
must  have  succumbed,  and  the  victory  would  assuredly  have 
fallen  to  the  Genoese. 


PISANl'S   OFFER.  207 

After  the  meeting  was  over  he  took  Francis  into  his  cabin, 
and  again  offered  him  a  post  in  his  own  ship. 

"  Were  your  merit  properly  rewarded,"  he  said,  "  I  would 
appoint  you  at  once  to  the  command  of  a  galley;  but  to  do  so 
would  do  you  no  service,  for  it  would  excite  against  you  the 
jealousy  of  all  the  young  nobles  in  the  fleet.  Besides,  you  are 
so  young,  that  although  the  council  at  home  cannot  but  acknowl- 
edge the  vastness  of  the  service  you  have  rendered,  they  might 
make  your  age  an  excuse  for  refusing  to  confirm  the  appoint- 
ment ;  but  if  you  like  to  come  as  my  third  officer,  I  can  promise 
you  that  you  shall  have  rapid  promotion,  and  speedily  be  in 
command  of  a  galley.  We  Venetians  have  no  prejudice  against 
foreigners.  They  hold  very  high  commands,  and,  indeed,  our 
armies  in  the  field  are  frequently  commanded  by  foreign 
captains." 

Francis  thanked  the  admiral  heartily  for  his  offer,  but  said 
that  his  father's  wishes  and  his  own  led  him  to  adopt  the  life  of 
a  merchant,  and  that,  under  the  patronage  of  Messer  Polani,  his 
prospects  were  so  good  that  he  would  not  exchange  them  even 
for  a  command  under  the  state  of  Venice." 

"You  are  quite  right,  lad,"  the  admiral  said.  "All  govern- 
ments are  ungrateful,  and  republics  most  of  all.  Where  all  are 
supposed  to  be  equal,  there  is  ever  envy  and  jealousy  against  one 
who  rises  above  the  rest.  The  multitude  is  fickle  and  easily  led ; 
and  the  first  change  of  fortune,  however  slight,  is  seized  upon  by 
enemies  as  a  cause  of  complaint,  and  the  popular  hero  of  to-day 
may  be  an  exile  to-morrow.  Like  enough  I  shall  see  the  inside 
of  a  Venetian  prison  some  day." 

"Impossible,  signor!"  Francis  exclaimed;  "the  people  would 
tear  to  pieces  anyone  who  ventured  to  malign  you." 

"Just  at  present,  my  lad;  just  at  present.  But  I  know  my 
countrymen.  They  are  not  as  light-hearted  and  fickle  as  those 
of  Genoa ;  but  they  are  easily  led,  and  will  shout  '  A  basso ! '  as 


208  THE  RETURN. 

easily  as  '  Viva !'  Time  will  show.  I  was  within  an  ace  of  being 
defeated  to-day ;  and  you  may  not  be  close  at  hand  to  come  to 
my  rescue  next  time.  And  now  to  business. 

"  To-morrow  morning  I  will  set  the  crews  to  get  out  your 
stores,  and  distribute  them  as  required,  and  will  place  four  hun- 
dred prisoners  in  your  hold,  and  you  shall  carry  them  to  Venice 
with  my  despatches  announcing  the  victory.  The  other  four 
hundred  Genoese  I  shall  send  in  the  galley  that  was  dismasted 
yesterday  to  Candia,  to  be  imprisoned  there.  I  shall  send  prize 
crews  home  in  the  galleys  we  have  captured,  and  as  soon  as  they 
are  refitted  and  manned,  and  rejoin  me,  I  shall  sail  in  search  of 
Doria  and  his  fleet.  I  shall  first  cruise  up  the  Adriatic,  in  case 
he  may  have  gone  that  way  to  threaten  Venice,  and  I  can  the 
more  easily  receive  such  reinforcements  as  may  have  been  pre- 
pared for  me." 

The  following  day  was  spent  in  unloading  the  vessel.  This 
was  accomplished  by  nightfall.  The  prisoners  were  then  put  on 
board.  Francis  at  once  ordered  sail  to  be  set,  and  the  Bonito 
was  started  on  her  homeward  voyage. 

As  soon  as  the  Bonito  was  signalled  in  sight,  Signor  Polani 
went  down  to  the  port  to  meet  her,  to  ascertain  where  she  had 
fallen  in  with  the  fleet,  for  there  was  great  anxiety  in  Venice,  as 
no  news  had  been  received  from  Pisani  for  more  than  ten  days. 
The  vessel  had  just  passed  through  the  entrance  between  the 
islands  when  the  gondola,  with  her  owner,  was  seen  approaching. 
Francis  went  to  the  gangway  to  receive  him. 

"  Why,  what  has  happened,  Francisco?"  Polani  asked,  as  the 
boat  neared  the  side  of  the  ship.  "  Half  your  bulwark  is  carried 
away,  and  the  whole  side  of  the  ship  is  scraped  and  scored.  She 
looks  as  if  she  had  been  rubbing  against  a  rock." 

"  Not  quite  so  bad  as  that,  Messer  Polani.  She  has  been 
grinding  against  a  Genoese  galley." 

"  Against  a  Genoese  galley ! "  the  merchant  repeated  in  sur- 


"THIS   IS   INDEED   GREAT   NEWS.'  209 

prise,  stopping  in  his  passage  up  the  rope-ladder,  which  had  been 
lowered  for  him.  "Why,  how  is  that?  But  never  mind  that 
now ;  first  tell  me  what  is  the  news  from  the  fleet  ?" 

"There  is  great  news,"  Francis  replied.  "The  admiral  fell  in 
with  Fieschi  off  Antium.  There  were  nine  ships  on  each  side, 
and  the  battle  took  place  in  a  storm.  We  were  victorious,  and 
captured  four  of  the  Genoese  galleys,  with  Fieschi  himself  and 
eight  hundred  prisoners ;  the  rest  fled.  Fieschi  is  now  in  my 
cabin  and  four  hundred  prisoners  in  the  hold." 

"This  is  indeed  great  news,"  the  merchant  said,  "and  will 
be  an  immense  relief  to  Venice.  We  were  getting  very  anxious, 
for  had  Pisani  been  defeated  there  was  nothing  to  prevent  the 
Genoese  ravaging  our  coasts,  and  even  assailing  Venice  itself. 
But  where  is  the  captain?" 

"  I  regret  to  say,  sir,  that  he  has  been  killed,  as  well  as 
twenty-seven  of  the  sailors,  and  many  of  the  others  are  more 
or  less  severely  wounded.  I  am  the  bearer  of  despatches  from 
the  admiral  to  the  council." 

"  Then  get  into  my  gondola  and  come  along  at  once,"  Polani 
said.  "  I  deeply  regret  the  death  of  the  captain  and  sailors ; 
you  shall  tell  me  all  about  it  as  we  come  along ;  we  must  not 
delay  a  moment  in  carrying  this  great  news  ashore.  Have  you 
got  the  despatches?" 

"  Yes,  signer.  I  put  them  into  my  doublet  when  I  saw  you 
approaching,  thinking  that  you  would  probably  wish  me  to 
take  them  on  shore  at  once." 

"And  now  tell  me  all  about  the  battle,"  the  merchant  said 
as  soon  as  they  had  taken  their  seats  in  the  gondola.  "You 
say  there  were  nine  ships  on  either  side.  Pisani  sailed  away 
with  fourteen;  has  he  lost  the  remainder?" 

"  They  came  up  next  day,"  Francis  replied.  "  The  fleet  was 
in  a  port  north  of  Antium  when  the  news  came  that  Fieschi's 
fleet  was  there.  Five  of  the  galleys  had  been  dismantled  and 


210  THE  STORY  OF  THE   FIGHT. 

were  under  repair,  and  Pisani  would  not  wait  for  them  to  be 
got  into  fighting  order,  as  he  was  afraid  lest  Fieschi  might 
weigh  anchor  and  escape  if  he  delayed  an  hour.  He  learned 
that  the  Genoese  had  nine  ships  with  him,  and  as  he  had 
himself  this  number  ready  for  sea  he  sailed  at  once.  The 
weather  was  stormy  and  the  sea  very  high  when  he  appeared 
within  sight  of  Antium.  Fieschi  sailed  boldly  out  to  meet 
him.  The  battle  lasted  ail  day,  for  it  was  next  to  impossible 
to  board;  but  in  the  end,  as  I  say,  four  Genoese  galleys  sur- 
rendered and  the  rest  fled.  It  was  a  terrible  sight;  for  it 
seemed  at  every  moment  as  if  the  waves  would  hurl  the  vessels 
against  each  other,  and  so  break  them  into  fragments;  but  in 
no  case  did  such  an  accident  happen." 

"  Why,  you  speak  as  if  you  saw  it,  Francisco !  Had  you 
joined  the  admiral  before  the  battle  took  place  ?" 

"No,  signer;  we  arrived  near  Antium  on  the  evening  before 
the  fight  and  heard  of  Fieschi's  presence  there,  therefore  we 
anchored  south  of  the  promontory.  In  the  morning  we  put  out, 
intending  to  sail  well  out  to  sea  and  so  pass  the  Genoese,  who 
were  not  likely  in  such  weather  to  put  out  to  question  a  sail 
passing  in  the  distance ;  but  as  we  made  off  from  land  we  saw 
Pisani's  fleet  approaching.  Then  as  Fieschi  put  to  sea  and  we 
saw  that  the  battle  was  imminent,  there  was  nothing  for  us  to 
do  but  to  lie  to  and  wait  for  the  battle  to  be  over  before  we 
delivered  our  stores,  having  little  doubt  that  Pisani  would  be 
victorious." 

"Then  had  the  battle  gone  the  other  way,"  the  merchant 
said,  "the  Bonito  at  the  present  moment  would  probably  be 
lying  a  prize  in  the  harbour  of  Genoa!" 

"We  did  not  lose  sight  of  the  probability  of  that,  signor, 
but  thought  that,  if  the  Genoese  should  gain  a  victory,  they 
would  be  too  busy  with  their  prizes  and  prisoners,  if  not  too 
crippled,  to  pursue  us,  and  we  reckoned  that  in  such  weather 


"THAT   WAS   WELL   DONE   INDEED."  211 

the  Bontto  would  be  able  to  sail  quite  as  fast  as  any  of  the 
Genoese." 

"And  now  tell  me  about  your  affairs,  Francisco.  Where 
was  it  you  fell  in  with  the  Genoese  galley,  and  by  what  miracle 
did  you  get  off?" 

"  It  was  in  the  battle,  sir.  One  of  the  Venetian  galleys  had 
dropped  out  of  the  fight  disabled,  and  its  opponent  went  to  the 
assistance  of  the  admiral's  ship,  which  was  engaged  with 
Pisani.  They  attempted  to  board  him  on  both  sides,  and,  seeing 
that  he  was  in  great  peril,  and  that  if  his  ship  was  taken  the 
battle  would  be  as  bad  as  lost,  we  thought  that  you  yourself 
would  approve  of  our  going  to  his  assistance.  This  we  did,  and 
engaged  one  of  their  galleys;  and,  as  her  crew  were  occupied 
with  the  admiral,  we  took  them  by  surprise,  and  created  such 
a  diversion  that  he  succeeded,  with  what  assistance  we  could 
give  him,  in  capturing  both  his  opponents." 

"That  was  well  done  indeed,"  Polani  said  warmly.  "It  was 
a  risky  matter  indeed  for  you.  with  sailors  unprotected  by 
armour,  to  enter  into  a  combat  with  the  iron-clad  soldiers  of 
Genoa.  And  so  the  captain  and  twenty-seven  of  the  men  were 
killed!  You  must  have  had  some  brisk  fighting!" 

"  The  captain  and  many  of  the  men  were  shot  by  the  Genoese 
archers  as  we  ranged  up  alongside  their  vessel ;  the  others  were 
killed  in  hand-to-hand  fighting." 

"  And  my  cousin  Matteo,  what  has  become  of  him  ?"  Polani 
asked  suddenly.  "  I  trust  he  is  not  among  the  killed  !" 

"  He  is  unharmed,"  Francis  replied.  "  He  fought  gallantly, 
and  the  admiral  the  next  day  offered  to  take  him  on  board  his 
own  ship,  many  of  the  volunteers  serving  on  board  having  been 
killed.  Matteo  of  course  accepted  the  offer." 

"  He  would  have  done  better  to  have  stayed  on  board  my 
ship  for  another  two  years,"  Polani  said,  "  and  learned  his  busi- 
ness. He  would  have  made  a  far  better  sailor  than  he  can 


212  SPREADING  THE   NEWS. 

ever  become  on  board  a  state  galley ;  but  I  never  expected  him 
to  stick  to  it.  He  has  no  earnestness  of  purpose,  and  is  too 
particular  about  his  dress  to  care  about  the  rough  life  of  a  real 
seaman." 

"  He  has  plenty  of  courage,  sir,  and  I  have  always  found  him 
a  staunch  friend." 

"  No  doubt  he  has  courage,"  the  merchant  said.  "  He  comes 
of  good  blood  and  could  hardly  be  a  coward.  I  think  he  is  a 
good-hearted  lad  too,  and  will,  I  have  no  doubt,  make  a  brave 
commander  of  a  galley ;  but  more  than  that  Matteo  is  never 
likely  to  become." 

"  Your  daughters  are  well,  I  hope  ?  "  Francis  asked. 

"  Quite  well ;  but  you  will  not  find  them  at  home — they 
sailed  three  days  ago  in  the  Lido  for  Corfu.  They  are  going  to 
stay  for  a  time  at  my  villa  there.  That  affair  of  last  year  shook 
them  both,  and  I  thought  it  better  that  they  should  go  away  for 
a  change — the  hot  months  here  are  trying,  and  often  unhealthy. 
I  will  go  over  myself  next  week  to  be  with  them." 

They  were  now  approaching  the  Piazzetta,  and  Polani  shouted 
out  to  various  acquaintances  he  met  in  passing  gondolas  the 
news  that  Pisani  had  gained  a  great  victory,  and  had  captured 
the  Genoese  admiral  with  four  of  his  galleys.  The  gondolas  at 
once  changed  their  course,  and  accompanied  them  to  gather 
further  details  of  the  fight.  The  news  was  shouted  to  other 
passing  boats,  and  by  the  time  they  reached  the  steps  of  the 
Piazzetta  a  throng  was  round  them.  Those  on  shore  shouted 
out  the  news,  and  it  spread  rapidly  from  mouth  to  mouth ;  the 
shopkeepers  left  their  stores  and  the  loungers  on  the  Piazzetta 
ran  up,  and  it  was  with  difficulty  that  Polani  and  Francis  could 
make  their  way  through  the  shouting  and  excited  crowd  to  the 
entrance  of  the  ducal  palace. 

Polani  at  once  led  Francis  to  the  doge,  to  whom  he  gave  an 
account  of  the  action.  Messengers  were  immediately  despatched 


BEFORE  THE  COUNCIL.  213 

to  some  of  the  members  of  the  council,  for  it  was  to  them  that 
the  despatches  had  to  be  delivered.  As  soon  as  a  sufficient 
number  to  transact  the  business  had  arrived  at  the  palace  the 
doge  himself  led  Francis  to  the  council  chamber. 

"  Is  the  news  that  we  heard  shouted  in  the  streets  as  we 
came  thither  true,  your  highness  ?  "  one  of  the  councillors  asked 
as  they  entered,  "  that  our  fleet  has  gained  a  victory  over  the 
Genoese  ?  " 

"  I  am  happy  to  say  that  it  is  quite  true ;  but  this  young 
gentleman  is  the  bearer  of  despatches  from  the  admiral,  and 
these  will  doubtless  give  us  all  particulars." 

"  Admiral  Pisani  has  chosen  a  strange  messenger  for  so 
important  a  despatch,"  one  of  the  party  hostile  to  the  admiral 
said.  "  It  is  usual  to  send  despatches  of  this  kind  by  a  trusted 
officer,  and  I  do  not  think  it  respectful  either  to  the  council  or 
the  republic  to  send  home  the  news  of  a  victory  by  a  lad  like 
this." 

"  The  admiral  apparently  chose  this  young  gentleman  because, 
owing  to  the  death  of  his  captain,  he  was  in  command  of  the 
ship  which  Messer  Polani  placed  at  the  service  of  the  republic, 
and  which  was  present  at  the  fight.  The  admiral  intended,  as 
I  hear,  to  set  out  at  once  in  search  of  the  fleet  of  Doria,  and 
doubtless  did  not  wish  to  weaken  himself  by  despatching  a  state 
galley  with  the  news  ;  but  perhaps  he  may  explain  the  matter  in 
his  despatches." 

Several  other  councillors  had  by  this  time  arrived,  and  the 
despatches  were  opened.  The  admiral's  account  of  the  engage- 
ment was  brief,  for  he  was  fonder  of  the  sword  than  the  pen. 
He  stated  that  having  obtained  news  that  Fieschi's  fleet  was  at 
anchor  under  the  promontory  of  Antium  he  sailed  thither  with 
nine  ships,  these  being  all  that  were  at  the  moment  fit  to  take 
to  sea ;  that  Fieschi  had  sailed  out  to  meet  him,  and  that  an 
engagement  had  taken  place  in  the  storm,  which  prevented  the 


214  THE  DESPATCHES. 

ships  from  pursuing  their  usual  tactics  and  compelled  them  to 
fight  with  missiles  at  a  distance.  The  despatch  then  went  on  : 

"  We  fought  all  day,  and  the  upshot  of  it  was  we  captured 
four  of  their  galleys,  the  admiral  himself,  and  eight  hundred 
prisoners.  Fortunately  it  is  unnecessary  for  me  to  give  your 
seignory  the  details  of  the  fighting,  as  these  can  be  furnished 
you  by  Messer  Francisco  Hammond,  who  will  hand  you  these 
despatches.  He  was  a  witness  of  the  action  on  the  Bonito, 
which  had  that  morning  arrived  at  Antium  with  some  of  the 
stores  you  despatched  me.  I  have  selected  this  young  gentle- 
man as  the  bearer  of  these  despatches  because  it  is  to  him  I 
entirely  owe  it  that  I  am  not  at  the  present  moment  a  prisoner 
in  Genoa,  and  to  him  the  republic  owes  that  we  yesterday  won  a 
victory. 

"  I  was  attacked  by  Fieschi  and  by  another  galley,  and  in 
spite  of  the  weather  they  cast  grapnels  on  to  my  ship  and 
boarded  me.  I  had  already  lost  half  of  my  crew  by  their 
missiles,  and  things  were  going  very  badly  with  us,  when  the 
Bonito  came  up  to  our  assistance  and  grappled  with  one  of  the 
galleys.  Her  captain  was  killed,  but  Messer  Hammond — 
of  whom  Polani  has  so  high  an  opinion  that  he  had  ap- 
pointed him  second  in  command — led  his  men  to  my  rescue. 
They  boarded  the  galley  and  slew  those  who  remained  on 
board,  and  then,  crossing  on  to  my  ship,  fell  upon  the  rear  of 
the  Genoese  who  were  pressing  us  backwards.  His  sailors, 
undefended  as  they  were  by  armour,  fought  like  demons  with 
their  axes,  and,  led  by  Messer  Hammond,  cut  their  way  through 
the  enemy  and  joined  me. 

"  This  reinforcement  gave  fresh  strengh  and  spirit  to  my  men, 
who  had  a  minute  before  thought  that  all  was  lost.  Together 
we  fell  upon  the  Genoese  before  they  could  recover  from  their 
surprise,  beat  them  back  into  their  admiral's  ship,  and  following 
them  there  forced  them  to  surrender.  Messer  Hammond 


THE  DOGE'S  APPROVAL.  21$ 

fought  by  my  side,  and  although  but  a  lad  in  years  he  showed 
himself  a  sturdy  man-at-arms,  and  behaved  with  a  coolness  and 
bravery  beyond  praise.  I  hereby  recommend  him  to  your 
gracious  consideration,  for  assuredly  to  him  it  is  due  that  it  is 
I,  and  not  Fieschi,  who  is  writing  to  announce  a  victory." 

A  murmur  of  surprise  from  the  councillors  greeted  the  read- 
ing of  this  portion  of  the  letter.  When  it  was  concluded  the 
doge  was  the  first  to  speak. 

"  You  have  indeed  deserved  well  of  the  republic,  Messer 
Hammond,  for  we  know  that  Admiral  Pisani  is  not  one  to 
give  undue  praise  or  to  exaggerate  in  aught.  This  is  news  to 
me,  signers,  as  well  as  to  you,  for  in  his  narrative  to  me  of  the 
events  of  the  fight,  he  passed  over  his  own  share  in  it,  though 
Messer  Polani,  who  accompanied  him,  did  say  that  his  ship 
had  taken  some  part  in  the  fight,  and  that  the  captain  and 
twenty-seven  men  had  been  killed.  Now,  young  sir,  as  the 
admiral  has  referred  us  to  you  for  a  detailed  narrative  of  the 
battle,  we  will  thank  you  to  tell  us  all  you  witnessed,  omitting 
no  detail  of  the  occurrences." 

Francis  accordingly  gave  a  full  account  of  the  action,  and 
gave  great  praise  to  his  crew  for  the  valour  with  which  they 
had  fought  against  the  heavy-armed  Genoese.  When  he  had 
concluded  the  doge  said  : 

"  We  thank  you  for  your  narrative,  Messer  Hammond,  as 
well  as  for  the  great  service  you  have  rendered  the  state. 
Will  you  now  leave  us,  as  we  have  much  to  debate  on  regard- 
ing this  and  other  matters,  and  to  arrange  for  the  reinforce- 
ments for  which  I  see  by  his  letter  the  admiral  asks.  Will 
you  ask  Messer  Polani  to  remain  in  attendance  for  a  while,  as 
we  wish  to  consult  with  him  as  to  ships  and  other  matters?  As 
to  yourself,  we  shall  ask  you  to  come  before  us  again  shortly." 

After  Francis  had  left,  the  council  first  voted  that  five 
ducats  should  be  given  to  every  man  of  the  crew  of  the  Bontto, 


2l6  REWARDS   FOR  MERIT. 

and  that  the  widows  of  those  who  had  been  slain  should  be 
provided  for  at  the  expense  of  the  state.  They  deferred  the 
question  as  to  the  honours  which  should  be  conferred  upon 
Francis  until  they  had  consulted  Polani.  State  barges  were  at 
once  sent  off  to  bring  in  the  prisoners  from  the  ship,  and  prepara- 
tions made  for  their  accommodation,  for  Venice  always  treated 
prisoners  taken  in  war  with  the  greatest  kindness,  an  example 
which  Genoa  was  very  far  from  following.  Then  Polani  was  sent 
for,  and  the  question  of  stores  and  ships  gone  into.  Orders 
were  issued  fof  redoubled  activity  in  the  arsenal,  and  it  was 
arranged  that  several  ships  belonging  to  Polani  and  others 
should  be  at  once  purchased  for  the  service  of  the  state.  Then 
they  asked  him  for  his  opinion  as  to  the  reward  which  should 
be  given  to  Francis.  Upon  the  merchant  expressing  his  igno- 
rance of  any  special  service  his  young  friend  had  rendered,  the 
passage  from  Pisani's  letter  relating  to  him  was  read  out. 

"  The  lad  is  as  modest  as  he  is  brave,"  the  merchant  said, 
"  for  although  of  course  he  told  me  that  the  ship  had  taken 
some  part  in  the  fight,  and  had  done  what  it  could  to  assist  the 
admiral,  in  which  service  the  captain  and  twenty-seven  men 
had  lost  their  lives,  I  had  no  idea  of  the  real  nature  of  the 
encounter.  I  feel  very  proud  of  the  service  he  has  rendered 
the  state,  for  he  has  rendered  me  as  a  private  individual 
no  less  important  service,  and  I  regard  him  as  my  adopted  son 
and  my  future  partner  in  my  business.  Such  being  the  case, 
signors,  he  needs  no  gift  of  money  from  the  state." 

"  He  has  not,  of  course,  being  still  a  minor,  taken  up  his 
papers  of  naturalization  as  a  citizen  ?  "  the  doge  said. 

"  No,  your  highness,  nor  is  it  his  intention  to  do  so.  I  spoke 
to  him  on  the  subject  once,  and  he  said  that  although  he 
regarded  Venice  with  affection,  and  would  at  all  times  do  every- 
thing in  his  power  for  the  state,  he  could  not  renounce  his 
birthplace,  as  an  Englishman,  by  taking  an  oath  of  allegiance 


AN   EXCEPTIONAL   HONOUR.  217 

to  another  state,  and  that  probably  he  should  after  a  time 
return  to  his  native  country.  I  pointed  out  to  him  that  although 
foreigners  were  given  every  facility  for  trade  in  Venice  it  would 
be  a  grievous  disadvantage  to  him  in  the  islands,  and  especially 
with  countries  such  as  Egypt,  the  Turks,  and  the  Eastern  empire, 
with  whom  we  had  treaties,  as,  unless  he  were  a  Venetian,  he 
would  be  unable  to  trade  with  them. 

"  He  fully  saw  the  force  of  my  argument,  but  persisted  in 
his  determination.  If  you  ask  my  opinion,  therefore,  signors, 
and  you  do  not  think  the  honour  too  great,  I  would  suggest 
that  the  highest  and  most  acceptable  honour  that  could  be 
bestowed  upon  him  would  be  that  which  you  have  at  various 
times  conferred  upon  foreign  personages  of  distinction,  namely, 
to  grant  him  the  freedom  of  Venice,  and  inscribe  his  name 
upon  the  list  of  her  citizens,  without  requiring  of  him  the 
renunciation  of  his  own  country  or  the  taking  the  oath  of 
allegiance." 

"  The  honour  is  assuredly  a  great  and  exceptional  one,"  the 
doge  said,  "  but  so  is  the  service  that  he  has  rendered.  He  has 
converted  what  would  have  been  a  defeat  into  a  victory,  and 
has  saved  Venice  from  a  grave  peril.  Will  you  retire  for  a 
few  minutes,  signer,  and  we  will  then  announce  to  you  the 
result  of  our  deliberations  on  the  matter." 


CHAPTER  XII. 


IN  MOCENIGO'S  POWER. 


T  was  fully  an  hour  before  Polani  was  recalled  to  the 
council  chamber.  He  saw  at  once  by  the  flushed 
and  angry  faces  of  some  of  the  council  that  the 
debate  had  been  a  hot  one.  At  this  he  was  not 
surprised,  for  he  knew  that  the  friends  and  connections  of 
Ruggiero  Mocenigo  would  vehemently  oppose  the  suggestion 
he  had  made.  The  doge  announced  the  decision. 

"  The  council  thank  you  for  your  suggestion,  Signer  Polani, 
and  have  resolved  by  a  majority  to  confer  upon  Messer 
Francisco  Hammond  the  high  honour  of  placing  his  name  upon 
the  list  of  the  citizens  of  Venice  without  requiring  from  him  the 
oaths  of  allegiance  to  the  state.  As  such  an  honour  has  never 
before  been  conferred,  save  upon  personages  of  the  highest 
rank,  it  will  be  a  proof  of  the  gratitude  which  Venice  feels 
towards  one  who  has  done  her  such  distinguished  service. 
The  decree  to  that  effect  will  be  published  to-morrow." 

The  merchant  retired  highly  gratified.  The  honour  was  a 
great  and  signal  one,  and  the  material  advantages  considerable. 
The  fact  that  Francis  was  a  foreigner  had  been  the  sole  obstacle 
which  had  presented  itself  to  him  in  associating  him  with  his 
business,  for  it  would  prevent  Francis  from  trading  personally 
with  any  of  the  countries  in  which  Venetian  citizens  enjoyed 
special  advantages.  Francis  was  immensely  gratified  when  he 


THE  JOY   OF   VENICE.  21$ 

heard  from  the  merchant  of  the  honour  to  be  conferred  upon 
him  ;  it  was  of  all  others  the  reward  he  would  have  selected  had 
a  free  choice  been  given  him,  but  it  was  so  great  and  unusual 
an  honour  that  he  could  indeed  scarcely  credit  it  when  the 
merchant  told  him  the  result  of  his  interviews  with  the  council. 

The  difficulty  which  his  being  a  foreigner  would  throw  in 
the  way  of  his  career  as  a  merchant  in  Eastern  waters  had  been 
frequently  in  his  mind,  and  would,  he  foresaw,  greatly  lessen 
his  usefulness,  but  that  he  should  be  able  to  obtain  naturaliza- 
tion without  renouncing  his  allegiance  to  England  he  had  never 
even  hoped. 

"  It  is  a  very  high  honour,  doubtless,"  Polani  said,  "  but  no 
whit  higher  than  you  deserve  ;  besides,  after  all  it  costs  Venice 
nothing,  and  money  is  scarce  at  present.  At  any  rate  I  can 
congratulate  myself  as  well  as  you,  for  I  foresaw  many  difficul- 
ties in  our  way.  Although  the  ships  carrying  the  Venetian  flag 
could  enter  the  ports  of  all  countries  trading  with  us,  you  would 
personally  be  liable  to  arrest  at  any  time  on  being  denounced 
as  not  being  a  native  of  Venice,  which  you  assuredly  would  be 
by  my  rivals  in  trade." 

The  next  day  a  bulletin  was  published,  giving  the  substance  of 
Pisani's  despatch,  and  announcing  that  in  token  of  the  gratitude 
of  the  republic  for  the  great  service  he  had  rendered,  Messer 
Hammond  would  be  at  once  granted  the  freedom  of  Venice, 
and  his  name  inserted  on  the  list  of  her  citizens. 

During  these  two  days  the  delight  of  Venice  at  the  news  of 
the  victory  had  been  extreme.  The  houses  had  been  decorated 
with  flags,  and  the  bells  of  all  the  churches  had  peeled  out  joy- 
ously. Crowds  assembled  round  the  Polani  Palace,  and  insisted 
upon  Francis  making  his  appearance,  when  they  greeted  him 
with  tremendous  shouts  of  applause.  Upon  the  evening  of 
the  second  day  he  said  to  Polani : 

"  Have  you  any  ship  fit  for  sea,  signor,  because  if  so  I  pray 


220  "  I   WILL  CHARTER  A   FISHING-BOAT." 

you  to  send  me  away,  no  matter  where.  I  cannot  stand  this. 
Since  the  decree  was  published  this  morning  I  have  not  had  a 
moment's  peace,  and  it  is  too  absurd  when  I  did  no  more  than 
any  sailor  on  board  the  ship.  If  it  went  on  I  should  very  soon 
be  heartily  sorry  I  ever  interfered  on  behalf  of  the  admiral." 

The  merchant  smiled. 

"  I  have  half  promised  to  take  you  with  me  to  the  reception 
at  the  Persanis"  this  evening,  and  have  had  a  dozen  requests  of 
a  similar  nature  for  every  night  this  week  and  next." 

"  Then  if  you  have  no  ship  ready,  signer,  I  will  charter  a 
fishing-boat,  engage  a  couple  of  men,  and  go  off  for  a  fortnight ; 
by  the  end  of  that  time  something  fresh  will  have  hap- 
pened." 

"  I  can  send  you  off  if  you  really  wish  it,  Francisco,  the  first 
thing  to-morrow  morning.  I  am  despatching  a  small  craft  with 
a  message  to  my  agent  in  Corfu,  and  with  letters  for  my 
daughters ;  they  will  be  delighted  to  see  you,  and  indeed  I 
shall  be  glad  to  know  that  you  are  with  them,  until  I  can  wind 
up  several  affairs  which  I  have  in  hand,  and  join  them  myself. 
She  is  fast,  and  you  should  be  at  Corfu  in  eight-and-forty  hours 
after  sailing." 

Francis  gladly  embraced  the  offer,  and  started  the  next  mor- 
ning. The  vessel  was  a  small  one,  designed  either  to  sail  or  row. 
Her  crew  consisted  of  twenty  men,  who  rowed  sixteen  sweeps 
when  the  wind  was  light  or  unfavourable.  She  was  an  open 
boat,  except  that  she  was  decked  at  each  end,  a  small  cabin 
being  formed  aft  for  the  captain,  and  any  passengers  there 
might  be  on  board,  while  the  crew  stowed  themselves  in  the 
little  forecastle. 

When  the  boat  was  half-way  across  a  sail  was  seen  approach- 
ing, and  the  captain  recognized  her  as  one  of  Polani's  vessels. 

"  In  that  case,"  Francis  said,  "  we  may  as  well  direct  our 
course  so  as  to  pass  them  within  hailing  distance.  When  you 


A  MYSTERIOUS  VESSEL.  221 

approach  them  hoist  the  Polani  flag,  and  signal  to  them  to 
lay  to." 

This  was  done,  and  the  two  craft  brought  up  within  thirty 
yards  of  each  other.  The  captain  appeared  at  the  side  of  the 
vessel,  and  doffed  his  cap  when  he  recognized  Francis. 

"  Have  you  any  news  from  the  East  ?"  the  latter  asked. 

"  But  little,  signor.  A  few  Genoese  pirates  are  among  the 
islands,  and  are  reported  to  have  made  some  captures,  but 
I  have  seen  none.  There  is  nothing  new  from  Constantinople ; 
no  fresh  attempt  has  been  made  by  the  emperor  to  recapture 
Tenedos." 

"  Did  you  touch  at  Corfu  on  your  way  back?" 

"  I  left  there  yesterday,  signor.  A  strange  craft  has  been 
reported  as  having  been  seen  on  the  coast.  She  carries  no  flag, 
but  from  her  appearance  she  is  judged  to  be  a  Moor." 

"  But  we  are  at  peace  with  the  Moors,"  Francis  said,  "  and 
it  is  years  since  they  ventured  on  any  depredations  excepting 
on  their  own  waters." 

"  That  is  so,  signor,  and  I  only  tell  you  what  was  the  report 
at  Corfu.  She  appeared  to  be  a  swift  craft,  rowing  a  great 
many  oars.  Her  movements  certainly  seem  mysterious,  as  she 
has  several  times  appeared  off  the  coast.  Two  vessels  which 
sailed  from  Cyprus,  and  were  to  have  touched  at  Corfu,  had 
not  arrived  there  when  I  left,  and  they  say  that  several  others 
are  overdue.  I  do  not  say  that  has  anything  to  do  with  the 
strange  galley,  but  it  is  the  general  opinion  in  Corfu  that  it  has 
something  to  do  with  it,  and  I  am  the  bearer  of  letters  from  the 
governor  to  the  seignory,  praying  that  two  or  three  war  ships 
may  at  once  be  sent  down  to  the  island." 

"  It  looks  strange,  certainly,"  Francis  said ;  "  but  I  cannot 
believe  that  any  Moorish  pirates  would  be  so  daring  as  to  come 
up  into  Venetian  waters." 

"  I  should  not  have  thought  so  either,  signor ;  but  it  may  be 


222  MOOR  OR  GENOESE? 

that,  knowing  there  is  war  between  Venice  and  Genoa,  and  that 
the  state  galleys  of  the  republics,  instead  of  being  scattered 
over  the  seas,  are  now  collected  in  fleets  and  thinking  only  of 
fighting  each  other,  they  might  consider  it  a  good  opportunity 
for  picking  prizes." 

"  It  is  a  good  opportunity  certainly,"  Francis  said  ;  "but  they 
would  know  that  Venice  would  sooner  or  later  reckon  with 
them  and  would  demand  a  fourfold  indemnity  for  any  losses 
her  merchants  may  have  suffered.  However,  I  will  not  detain 
you  longer.  Will  you  tell  Signer  Polani  that  you  met  us,  and 
that  we  were  making  good  progress  and  hoped  to  reach  Corfu 
some  time  to-morrow?" 

"  This  is  a  curious  thing  about  this  galley,"  the  captain  of 
the  boat  said  to  Francis  as  the  men  again  dipped  their  oars 
into  the  water  and  the  boat  once  more  proceeded  on  the 
way. 

"  It  is  much  more  likely  to  be  a  Genoese  pirate  than  a 
Moor,"  Francis  said.  "  They  may  have  purposely  altered  their 
rig  a  little  in  order  to  deceive  vessels  who  may  sight  them.  It  is 
very  many  years  since  any  Moorish  craft  have  been  bold  enough 
to  commit  acts  of  piracy  on  this  side  of  Sicily.  However,  we 
must  hope  that  we  shall  not  fall  in  with  her,  and  if  we  see 
anything  answering  to  her  description  we  will  give  it  a  wide 
berth.  Besides,  it  is  hardly  likely  they  would  interfere  with  so 
small  a  craft  as  ours,  for  they  would  be  sure  we  should  be 
carrying  no  cargo  of  any  great  value." 

"  Twenty  Christian  slaves  would  fetch  money  among  the 
Moors,"  the  captain  said.  "  Let  us  hope  we  shall  see  nothing 
of  them ;  for  we  should  have  no  chance  of  resistance  against 
such  a  craft,  and  she  would  go  two  feet  to  our  one." 

The  next  morning  Francis  was  aroused  by  a  hurried  sum- 
mons from  the  captain.  Half  awake,  and  wondering  what 
could  be  the  cause  of  the  call,  for  the  boat  lay  motionless  on 


THE  PIRATE.  223 

the  water,  he  hurried  out  from  the  little  cabin.  Day  had  just 
broken,  the  sky  was  aglow  with  ruddy  light  in  the  east. 

"  Look  there,  signor !"  the  captain  said,  pointing  to  the  south. 
"  The  watch  made  them  out  a  quarter  of  an  hour  since,  but 
thinking  nothing  of  it,  they  did  not  call  me.  What  do  you 
think  of  that?" 

Two  vessels  were  lying  in  close  proximity  to  each  other  at  a 
distance  of  about  two  miles  from  the  boat.  One  of  them  was  a 
large  trader,  the  other  was  a  long  galley  rigged  quite  differently 
to  those  of  either  Venice  or  Genoa. 

"  That  is  the  craft  they  were  speaking  of,"  the  captain  said. 
"  There  is  no  mistaking  her.  She  may  be  an  Egyptian  or  a 
Moor,  but  certainly  she  comes  from  the  African  coast." 

"  Or  is  got  up  in  African  fashion,"  Francis  said.  "  She  may 
be,  as  we  agreed  yesterday,  a  Genoese  masquerading  in  that 
fashion  in  order  to  be  able  to  approach  our  traders  without 
their  suspicions  being  aroused.  She  looks  as  if  she  has  made 
a  captive  of  that  vessel.  I  imagine  she  must  have  come  up  to 
her  late  yesterday  evening,  and  has  been  at  work  all  night 
stripping  her.  I  hope  she  is  too  busy  to  attend  to  us." 

The  sail  had  been  lowered  the  instant  the  captain  caught 
sight  of  the  vessels,  for  there  was  scarcely  enough  wind  to  fill 
it,  and  the  men  were  now  rowing  steadily. 

"  I  do  not  think  she  could  have  taken  much  of  her  cargo 
out ;  she  is  very  deep  in  the  water." 

"Very  deep,"  Francis  agreed.  She  seems  to  me  to  be 
deeper  than  she  did  three  minutes  ago." 

"  She  is  a  great  deal  deeper  than  when  we  first  caught  sight 
of  her,"  one  of  the  sailors  said.  "  She  stood  much  higher  in 
the  water  than  the  galley  did,  and  now,  if  anything,  the  galley 
stands  highest." 

"  See !"  the  captain  exclaimed  suddenly,  "  the  galley  is  row- 
ing her  oars  on  the  port  bow  and  bringing  her  head  round. 


224  CHASED. 

She  has  noticed  us  and  is  going  to  chase  us  !  We  have  seen  too 
much.  Row,  men — it  is  for  life  !  If  they  overtake  us  it  is  a 
question  between  death  and  slavery  among  the  Moors." 

A  sudden  exclamation  from  one  of  the  men  caused  the  cap- 
tain to  glance  round  again  at  the  galley.  See  was  alone  now 
on  the  water — the  trader  had  sunk  ! 

"  Do  you  take  the  helm,  signor,"  the  captain  said,  "  all  hands 
will  help  at  the  oars." 

Some  of  the  oars  were  double  banked,  and  beneath  the 
strength  of  the  twenty  men  the  boat  moved  fast  through  the 
water.  The  galley  was  now  rowing  all  her  oars  and  in  full  pur- 
suit. For  a  quarter  of  an  hour  not  a  word  was  spoken,  every 
man  on  board  was  doing  his  utmost.  Francis  had  glanced  back- 
wards several  times,  and  at  the  end  of  a  quarter  of  an  hour  he 
could  see  that  the  'distance  between  the  boat  and  her  pursuer 
had  distinctly  lessened. 

"  Is  she  gaining  on  us?  "the  captain  asked,  for  the  cabin  in 
the  stern  hid  the  galley  from  the  sight  of  the  oarsmen. 

"She  is  gaining,"  Francis  said  quietly,  "  but  not  rapidly.  Row 
steadily,  my  lads,  and  do  not  despair.  When  they  find  how 
slowly  they  gain  they  may  give  up  the  chase  and  think  us  not 
worth  the  trouble. 

"  Jacopo,"  he  said  to  an  old  sailor  who  was  rowing  in  the 
bow,  and  who  already  was  getting  exhausted  from  the  exer- 
tion, "  do  you  lay  in  your  oar  and  come  aft.  I  will  take  your 
place." 

At  the  end  of  an  hour  the  galley  was  little  more  than  a 
quarter  of  a  mile  away. 

"  We  had  better  stop,"  the  captain  said.  "  We  have  no  chance 
of  getting  away,  and  the  longer  the  chase  the  more  furious  they 
will  be.  What  do  you  think,  signor  ?  " 

"  I  agree  with  you,"  Francis  replied.  We  have  done  all 
that  we  could.  There  is  no  use  in  rowing  longer." 


RUGGIERO   MOCENIGO.  22$ 

The  oars  fell  motionless  in  the  water,  and  a  few  minutes 
later  the  long  galley  came  rushing  up  by  their  side. 

"  A  fine  row  you  have  given  us,  you  dogs  !  "  a  man  shouted 
angrily  as  she  came  alongside.  "  If  you  haven't  something  on 
board  that  will  pay  us  for  the  chase  we  have  had  it  will  be  the 
worse  for  you.  What  boat  is  that  ?  " 

"  It  is  the  Naxos,  and  belongs  to  Messer  Polani  of  Venice. 
We  are  bound  to  Corfu,  and  bear  letters  from  the  padrone  to 
his  agent  there.  We  have  no  cargo  on  board." 

"  The  letters  perhaps  may  be  worth  more  than  any  cargo 
such  a  boat  would  carry.  So  come  on  board  and  let  us  see 
what  the  excellent  Polani  says  to  his  agent.  Now,  make  haste 
all  of  you,  or  it  will  be  the  worse  for  you." 

It  was  useless  hesitating.  The  captain,  Francis,  and  the  crew 
stepped  on  board  the  galley. 

"  Just  look  round  her,"  the  captain  said  to  one  of  his  sailors. 
"  If  there  is  anything  worth  taking  take  it,  and  then  knock  a 
hole  in  her  bottom  with  your  axe." 

"  Francis,  as  he  stepped  on  board  the  galley,  looked  round  at 
the  crew.  They  were  not  Genoese,  as  he  had  expected,  but  a 
mixture  of  ruffians  from  all  the  ports  in  the  Mediterranean, 
as  he  saw  at  once  by  their  costumes.  Some  were  Greeks  from 
the  islands,  some  Smyrniots,  Moors,  and  Spaniards ;  but  the 
Moors  predominated,  nearly  half  the  crew  belonging  to  that 
race.  Then  he  looked  at  the  captain,  who  was  eagerly  perusing 
the  documents  the  captain  had  handed  him.  As  his  eye  fell 
upon  him  Francis  started,  for  he  recognized  at  once  the  man 
whose  designs  he  had  twice  thwarted,  Ruggiero  Mocenigo,  and 
felt  that  he  was  in  deadly  peril. 

After  reading  the  merchant's  communication  to  his  agent, 
Ruggiero  opened  the  letter  addressed  to  Maria.  He  had  read 
but  a  few  lines  when  he  suddenly  looked  up,  and  then,  with  an 

expression  of  savage  pleasure  in  his  face,  stepped  up  to  Francis. 
—15 


226          "YOU   SHALL  SUFFER  A  THOUSAND    TORMENTS." 

"  So,  Messer  Hammond,  the  good  Polani  sends  you  to  stay 
for  a  while  with  his  daughters  !  Truly,  when  I  set  out  in  chase 
this  morning  of  that  wretched  row-boat,  I  little  deemed  that 
she  carried  a  prize  that  I  valued  more  than  a  loaded  caravel ! 
It  is  to  you  I  owe  it  that  I  am  an  exile  instead  of  being  the 
honoured  son-in-law  of  the  wealthy  Polani ;  it  was  your  ac- 
cursed interference  that  brought  all  my  misfortunes  upon  me ; 
but  thank  Heaven  my  vengeance  has  come  at  last !  Take  them 
ail  below,"  he  said,  turning  to  his  men.  "  Put  the  heaviest 
irons  you  have  got  on  this  fellow,  and  fasten  them  with  staples 
into  the  deck.  You  thought  I  was  going  to  hang  you  or  throw 
you  overboard,"  he  went  on,  turning  to  Francis.  "  Do  not  flatter 
yourself  that  your  death  will  be  so  easy  a  one — you  shall  suffer 
a  thousand  torments  before  you  die  !  " 

Francis  had  not  spoken  a  word  since  Ruggiero  first  turned 
to  him,  but  had  stood  with  a  tranquil  and  almost  contemptu- 
ous expression  upon  his  face ;  but  every  nerve  and  muscle  of 
his  body  were  strained  and  in  readiness  to  spring  into  action. 
He  had  expected  that  Ruggiero  would  at  once  attack  him,  and 
was  determined  to  leap  upon  him  and  to  sell  his  life  as  dearly 
as  possible. 

The  sailors  seized  Francis  and  his  companions  and  thrust 
them  down  into  the  hold,  which  was  already  crowded  with 
upwards  of  a  hundred  captives.  He  was  chained  with  heavy 
manacles.  In  obedience  to  Ruggiero's  orders  staples  were 
driven  through  the  links  of  his  chain  deep  into  the  deck,  so 
that  he  was  forced  to  remain  in  a  sitting  or  lying  posture.  The 
captain  of  the  Naxos  came  and  sat  beside  him. 

"  Who  is  this  pirate  captain,  Messer  Francisco,  who  thus 
knows  and  has  an  enmity  against  you  ?  By  his  speech  he  is 
surely  a  Venetian.  And  yet,  how  comes  a  Venetian  in  command 
of  a  pirate  ?  " 

"  That   man   is   Ruggiero    Mocenigo — the    same    who  twice 


"TELL   IT   IN   VENICE."  227 

attempted  to  carry  off  Messer  Polani's  daughters.  The  second 
time  he  succeeded,  and  would  have  been  tried  for  the  offence 
by  the  state  had  he  not,  aided  by  a  band  of  Paduans,  escaped 
from  the  keeping  of  his  guard." 

"  Of  course  I  heard  of  it,  signor.  I  was  away  at  sea  at  the 
time,  but  I  heard  how  you  came  up  at  the  moment  when 
the  padrone's  gondoliers  had  been  overcome,  and  rescued  his 
daughters.  And  this  is  that  villain  Mocenigo,  a  disgrace  to  his 
name  and  family  ! " 

"  Remember  the  name,  captain,  and  tell  it  to  each  of  your 
men,  so  that  if  they  ever  escape  from  this  slavery  into  which, 
no  doubt,  he  intends  to  sell  you,  they  may  tell  it  in  Venice  that 
Ruggiero  Mocenigo  is  a  pirate  and  an  ally  of  the  Moors.  As 
for  me,  there  is,  I  think,  but  small  chance  of  escape ;  but  at  any 
rate,  if  you  ever  reach  Venice  you  will  be  able  to  tell  the 
padrone  how  it  was  that  we  never  arrived  at  Corfu,  and  how  I 
fell  into  the  hands  of  his  old  enemy.  Still,  I  do  not  despair 
that  I  may  carry  the  message  myself;  there  is  many  a  slip 
between  the  cup  and  the  lip,  and  Mocenigo  may  have  cause  yet 
to  regret  that  he  did  not  make  an  end  of  me  as  soon  as  he  got 
me  into  his  hands." 

"It  may  be  so,"  the  captain  said,  "  and  indeed  I  cannot 
think  that  so  brave  a  young  gentleman  is  destined  to  die  miser- 
ably at  the  hands  of  such  a  scoundrel  as  this  man  has  shown 
himself  to  be.  As  for  death,  did  it  come  but  speedily  and 
sharply,  I  would  far  sooner  die  than  live  a  Moorish  slave. 
Santa  Maria,  how  they  will  wonder  at  home  when  the  days  go 
on  and  the  Naxos  does  not  return,  and  how  at  last  they  will 
give  up  all  hope,  thinking  that  she  has  gone  down  in  a  sudden 
squall,  and  never  dreaming  that  we  are  sold  as  slaves  to  the 
Moors  by  a  countryman  !  " 

"  Keep  up  your  heart,  captain ;  be  sure  that  when  the  war 
with  Genoa  is  over  Venice  will  take  the  matter  in  hand.  As  you 


228  "HE   WILL   DO   HIS   BEST." 

know,  a  vessel  has  already  carried  tidings  thither  of  the  depre- 
dation of  a  Moorish  cruiser,  and  she  will  take  vengeance  on  the 
Moors,  and  may  even  force  them  to  liberate  the  captives  they 
have  taken ;  and  besides,  you  may  be  sure,  that  the  padrone, 
when  he  hears  of  the  Moorish  galley,  and  finds  we  never 
reached  Corfu  although  the  weather  continued  fine,  will  guess 
that  we  have  fallen  into  her  hands,  and  will  never  rest 
till  he  finds  where  we  have  been  taken,  and  will  ransom  those 
who  survive  at  whatever  price  they  may  put  upon  them." 

"  He  will  do  his  best,  I  know,  he  is  a  good  master  to  serve ; 
but  once  a  prisoner  among  the  Moors,  the  hope  of  one's  ever 
being  heard  of  again  is  slight.  Sometimes,  of  course,  men  have 
been  ransomed ;  but  most,  as  I  have  heard,  can  never  be  found 
by  their  friends,  however  ready  they  may  be  to  pay  any  ransom 
that  might  be  asked.  It  just  depends  whether  they  are  sold 
to  a  Moor  living  in  a  seaport  or  not ;  if  they  are,  there  would  be 
no  great  difficulty  in  hearing  of  them,  but  if  they  are  sold  into 
the  interior,  no  inquiries  are  ever  likely  to  discover  them." 

"  You  must  hope  for  the  best,"  Francis  said.  "  Chances  of 
escape  may  occur,  and  I  have  heard  that  Christian  captives  who 
have  been  released,  say  that  the  Moors  are  for  the  most  part 
kind  masters." 

"  I  have  heard  so  too,"  the  captain  said  ;  "  and  anyhow,  I 
would  rather  be  a  Moorish  slave  than  lie  in  a  Genoese  dungeon. 
The  Genoese  are  not  like  us.  When  we  take  prisoners  we  treat 
them  fairly  and  honourably,  while  they  treat  their  prisoners 
worse  than  dogs.  I  wish  I  could  do  something  for  you,  Messer 
Francisco ;  your  case  is  a  deal  worse  than  ours.  Listen,  they 
are  quarreling  up  on  deck  ! " 

There  was  indeed  a  sound  of  men  in  hot  dispute,  a  trampling 
of  feet,  a  clash  of  steel,  and  the  sound  of  bodies  falling. 

"  It  is  not  possible  that  one  of  our  cruisers  can  have  come 
up  and  is  boarding  the  pirate,"  the  captain  said,  "  for  no  sail  was 


UTTERLY   DISPIRITED.  22Q 

in  sight  when  we  were  brought  here ;  I  looked  round  the  last 
thing  before  I  left  the  deck.  What  can  they  be  fighting 
about  ?  " 

"  Likely  enough  as  to  their  course.  They  have  probably,  from 
what  we  heard,  taken  and  sunk  several  ships,  and  some  may 
be  in  favour  of  returning  to  dispose  of  their  booty,  while  others 
may  be  for  cruising  longer.  I  only  hope  that  scoundrel  Ruggiero 
is  among  those  we  heard  fall.  They  are  quiet  now,  and  one 
party  or  the  other  has  evidently  got  the  best  of  it.  There, 
they  are  taking  to  the  oars  again." 

Several  days  passed ;  sometimes  the  oars  were  heard  going, 
but  generally  the  galley  was  under  sail.  The  sailors  brought 
down  food  and  water  morning  and  evening,  but  paid  no  other 
attention  to  the  captives.  Francis  discussed  with  some  of  the 
other  prisoners  the  chances  of  making  a  sudden  rush  on  to  the 
deck  and  overpowering  the  crew ;  but  all  their  arms  had  been 
taken  from  them,  and  the  galley,  they  calculated,  contained 
fully  a  hundred  and  fifty  men ;  they  noticed  too,  when  the 
sailors  brought  down  the  food,  a  party  armed  and  in  readiness 
were  assembled  round  the  hatchway. 

At  all  other  times  the  hatchway  was  nearly  closed,  being 
only  left  sufficiently  open  to  allow  a  certain  amount  of  air  to 
pass  down  into  the  hold,  and  by  the  steady  tramp  of  steps  up 
and  down  they  knew  that  two  sentries  were  also  on  guard 
above.  Most  of  the  prisoners  were  so  overcome  with  the  mis- 
fortune which  had  befallen  them  and  the  prospect  of  a  life  in 
hopeless  slavery,  that  they  had  no  spirit  to  attempt  any  enter- 
prise whatever,  and  there  was  nothing  to  do  but  to  wait  the 
termination  of  the  voyage. 

At  the  end  of  six  days  there  was  a  bustle  on  deck,  and  the 
chain  of  the  anchor  was  heard  to  run  out.  Two  or  three  hours 
afterwards  the  hatchway  was  taken  off.  When  the  rest  had 
ascended,  two  men  came  below  with  hammers,  and  drew  the 


23<3  A  PRISONER   IN   CHAINS. 

staples  which  fastened  Francis  to  the  deck.  On  going  up  he 
was  at  first  so  blinded  with  the  glare  of  the  sunshine — after  six 
days  in  almost  total  darkness — that  he  could  scarce  see  where 
he  was. 

The  ship  was  lying  at  anchor  in  a  bay ;  the  shores  were 
low,  and  a  group  of  houses  stood  abreast  of  where  the  ship 
was  anchored.  By  their  appearance  Francis  saw  at  once  that 
he  was  on  the  coast  of  Africa,  or  of  some  island  near  it.  The 
prisoners  were  ordered  to  descend  into  the  boats  which  lay 
alongside,  some  sailors  taking  their  places  with  them.  Rug- 
giero  was  not  at  first  to  be  seen,  but  just  as  Francis  was  pre- 
paring to  take  his  place  in  the  boat  he  came  out  from  the  cabin. 
One  of  his  arms  was  in  a  sling  and  his  head  bandaged. 

"  Take  special  care  of  that  prisoner,"  he  said  to  the  men. 
"  Do  not  take  off  his  chains,  and  place  a  sentinel  at  the  door 
of  the  place  of  his  confinement.  I  would  rather  lose  my  share 
of  all  the  spoil  we  have  taken  than  he  should  escape  me !  " 

The  shackles  had  been  removed  from  the  rest  of  the  captives, 
and  on  landing  they  were  driven  into  some  huts  which  stood 
a  little  apart  from  the  village. 

Francis  was  thrust  into  a  small  chamber  with  five  or  six  com- 
panions. The  next  morning  the  other  prisoners  were  called 
out,  and  Francis  was  left  alone  by  himself  all  day.  On  their 
return  in  the  evening  they  told  him  that  all  the  prisoners 
had  been  employed  in  assisting  to  get  out  the  cargo  with 
which  the  vessel  was  crammed,  and  in  carrying  it  to  a  large 
storehouse  in  the  village. 

"  They  must  have  taken  a  rich  booty  indeed,"  said  one  of 
the  prisoners,  who  had  already  told  Francis  that  he  was  the 
captain  of  the  vessel  they  had  seen  founder.  "  I  could  tell 
pretty  well  what  all  the  bales  contain  by  the  manner  of  pack- 
ing, and  I  should  say  that  there  were  the  pick  of  the  cargoes  of 
a  dozen  ships  there.  All  of  us  here  belong  to  three  ships,  except 


SEPARATED.  23! 

those  taken  with  you  ;  but  from  the  talk  of  the  sailors,  I  heard 
that  they  had  already  sent  off  two  batches  of  captives  by 
another  ship  which  was  cruising  in  company  of  them.  I  also 
learned  that  the  quarrel  which  took  place  just  after  you  were 
captured  arose  from  the  fact  that  the  captain  wished  a  party 
to  land,  to  carry  off  two  women  from  somewhere  in  the  island  of 
Corfu  ;  but  the  crew  insisted  on  first  returning  with  the  booty, 
urging,  that  if  surprised  by  a  Venetian  galley  they  might  lose 
all  the  result  of  their  toil.  This  was  the  opinion  of  the  majority, 
although  a  few  sided  with  the  captain,  being  induced  to  do  so 
by  the  fact  that  he  offered  to  give  up  all  his  share  of  the  booty 
if  they  would  do  so. 

"The  captain  lost  his  temper  and  drew  his  sword,  but  he  and 
his  party  were  quickly  overpowered.  He  has  kept  to  his  cabin 
ever  since,  suffering,  they  say,  more  from  rage  than  from  his 
wounds.  However,  it  seems  that  as  soon  as  we  and  the  cargo 
have  been  sold  they  are  to  start  for  Corfu  to  carry  out  the 
enterprise.  We  are  on  an  island  not  very  far  from  Tunis,  and 
a  fast  rowing  boat  started  early  this  morning  to  the  mer- 
chants with  whom  they  deal,  for  it  seems  that  a  certain 
amount  of  secrecy  is  observed,  in  order  that  if  any  complaints 
are  made  by  Venice,  the  Moorish  authorities  may  disclaim  all 
knowledge  of  the  matter." 

Two  days  later  the  prisoners  captured  were  again  led  out, 
their  guards  telling  them  that  the  merchants  who  had  been 
expected  had  arrived.  Giuseppi,  who  had  hitherto  borne  up 
bravely,  was  in  an  agony  of  grief  at  being  separated  from 
Francis.  He  threw  himself  upon  the  ground,  wept,  tore  his 
hair,  and  besought  the  guards  to  let  him  share  his  master's  fate, 
whatever  that  might  be.  He  declared  that  he  would  kill  him- 
self were  they  separated  ;  and  the  guards  would  have  been 
obliged  to  use  force  had  not  Francis  begged  Giuseppi  not  to 
struggle  against  fate,  but  to  go  quietly,  promising  again  and 


232  FRANCIS   ALONE. 

again  that,  if  he  himself  regained  his  freedom,  he  would  not  rest 
until  Giuseppi  was  also  set  at  liberty.  At  last  the  lad  yielded, 
and  suffered  himself  to  be  led  away  in  a  heart-broken  state  by 
the  guards.  None  of  the  captives  returned  to  the  hut,  and 
Francis  now  turned  his  whole  thoughts  to  freeing  himself  from 
his  chains.  He  had  already  revolved  in  his  mind  every  possible 
mode  of  escape ;  he  had  tried  the  strong  iron  bars  of  the 
window,  but  found  that  they  were  so  rigidly  fixed  and  em- 
bedded in  the  stonework,  that  there  was  no  hope  of  escape  in 
this  way  ;  and  even  could  he  have  got  through  the  window  the 
weight  of  his  shackles  would  have  crippled  him. 

He  was  fastened  with  two  chains,  each  about  two  feet  six 
inches  long,  going  from  the  wrist  of  the  right  hand  to  the  left 
ankle,  and  from  the  left  hand  to  the  right  ankle.  Thus  he  was 
unable  to  stand  quite  upright,  and  anything  like  rapid  move- 
ment was  almost  impossible.  The  bottom  of  the  window  came 
within  four  feet  of  the  ground,  and  it  was  only  by  standing  on 
one  leg  and  lifting  the  other  as  high  as  he  could  that  he  was 
able  to  grasp  one  of  the  bars  to  try  its  strength.  The  news  he 
had  heard  from  his  fellow-prisoner  almost  maddened  him, 
and  he  thought  far  less  of  his  own  fate  than  of  that  of  the  girls, 
who  would  be  living  in  their  quiet  country  retreat  in  ignorance 
of  danger,  until  suddenly  seized  by  Mocenigo  and  his  band  of 
pirates. 

He  had  on  the  first  day  tried  whether  it  was  possible  to 
draw  his  hand  through  the  iron  band  round  his  wrist,  but  had 
concluded  it  could  not  be  done,  for  it  was  rivetted  so  tightly  as 
to  press  upon  the  flesh.  Therefore  there  was  no  hope  of  freeing 
himself  in  that  manner.  The  only  possible  means  then  would 
be  to  cut  through  the  rivet  or  chain,  and  for  this  a  tool  would 
be  required. 

Suddenly  an  idea  struck  him.  The  guard  who  brought  in 
his  food  was  a  Sicilian,  and  was  evidently  of  a  talkative  dispo- 


A    RUSE.    '  233 

sition,  for  he  had  several  times  entered  into  conversation  with 
the  captives.  In  addition  to  a  long  knife  he  carried  a  small 
stiletto  in  his  girdle,  and  Francis  thought  that  if  he  could 
obtain  this  he  might  possibly  free  himself.  Accordingly,  at 
the  hour  when  he  expected  his  guard  to  enter  Francis  placed 
himself  at  his  window,  with  his  face  against  the  bars.  When 
he  heard  the  guard  come  in,  and,  as  usual,  close  the  door  behind 
him,  he  turned  round  and  said  : 

"  Who  is  that  damsel  there  ?  She  is  very  beautiful,  and  she 
passes  here  frequently.  There  she  is,  just  going  among  those 
trees." 

The  guard  moved  to  the  window  and  looked  out. 

"  Do  you  see  her  just  going  round  that  corner  there  ?  Ah  ! 
she  is  gone." 

The  guard  was  pressing  his  face  against  the  bars  to  look  in  the 
direction  indicated,  and  Francis,  who  was  already  standing  on 
his  left  leg,  with  the  right  raised  so  as  to  give  freedom  to  the 
hand  next  to  the  man,  had  no  difficulty  in  drawing  the  stiletto 
from  its  sheath  and  slipping  it  into  his  trousers. 

"  You  were  just  too  late,"  he  said,  "  but  no  doubt  you  often 
see  her." 

"  I  don't  see  any  beautiful  damsels  about  is  this  wretched 
place,"  the  man  replied.  "  I  suppose  she  is  the  daughter  of  the 
head  man  in  the  village.  They  say  he  has  some  good-looking 
ones,  but  he  takes  pretty  good  care  that  they  are  not  about 
when  we  are  here.  I  suppose  she  thought  she  wouldn't  be 
seen  along  that  path.  I  will  keep  a  good  look-out  for  her  in 
future." 

"  Don't  frighten  her  away,"  Francis  said  laughing;  she  is  the 
one  pleasant  thing  I  have  in  the  day  to  look  at." 

After  some  more  talk  the  man  retired,  and  Francis  examined 
his  prize.  It  was  a  thin  blade  of  fine  steel,  and  he  at  once  hid 
it  in  the  earth  which  formed  the  floor  of  the  hut.  An  hour 


234  "I   HAVE   DROPPED   MY   DAGGER." 

later  the  guard  opened  the  door  suddenly.  It  was  now  dusk, 
and  Francis  was  sitting  quietly  in  a  corner. 

"  Bring  a  light,  Thomaso,"  the  guard  shouted  to  his  comrade 
outside,  "  it  is  getting  dark  in  here." 

The  other  brought  a  torch,  and  they  carefully  examined  the 
floor  of  the  cell. 

"  What  is  it  that  you  are  searching  her  ?"  Francis  asked. 

"  I  have  dropped  my  dagger  somewhere,"  the  man  replied. 
"  I  can't  think  how  it  fell  out." 

"  When  did  you  see  it  last  ?  " 

"  Not  since  dinner  time.  I  know  I  had  it  then.  I  thought 
possibly  I  might  have  dropped  it  here,  and  a  dagger  is  not  the 
sort  of  plaything  one  cares  about  giving  to  prisoners." 

"Chained  as  I  am,"  Francis  said,  "a  dagger  would  not  be  a 
formidable  weapon  in  my  hands." 

"  No,"  the  man  agreed.  "  It  would  be  useless  to  you  unless 
you  wanted  to  stick  it  into  your  own  ribs." 

"  I  should  have  to  sit  down  to  be  able  to  do  even  that." 

"  That  is  so,  lad.  It  is  not  for  me  to  question  what  the 
captain  says,  I  just  do  as  I  am  told.  But  I  own  it  does 
seem  hard  keeping  a  young  fellow  like  you  chained  up  as  if 
you  were  a  wild  beast.  If  he  had  got  Pisani  or  Zeno  as  a 
prisoner,  and  wanted  to  make  doubly  sure  that  they  would  not 
escape,  it  would  be  all  well  enough,  but  for  a  lad  like  you 
with  one  man  always  at  the  door  and  the  window  barred  so 
that  a  lion  couldn't  break  through,  I  do  think  it  hard  to  keep 
you  chained  like  this;  and  the  worst  of  it  is,  we  are  going 
to  have  to  stop  here  to  look  after  you  till  the  captain 
gets  back,  and  that  may  be  three  weeks  or  a  month,  who 
knows !" 

"  Why  don't  you  keep  your  mouth  shut,  Philippo?"  the  other 
man  growled.  "  It's  always  talk,  talk  with  you.  We  are  chosen 
because  the  captain  can  rely  upon  us." 


TRYING  THE  RIVET.  235 

"  He  can  rely  upon  anyone,"  Philippo  retorted,  "who  knows 
that  he  will  get  his  throat  cut  if  he  fails  in  his  duty." 

"  Well,  come  along,"  the  other  said,  "  I  don't  want  to  be 
staying  here  all  night.  Your  dagger  isn't  here,  that's  certain 
and  as  I  am  off  guard  at  present  I  want  to  be  going." 

As  soon  as  he  was  left  alone  Francis  unearthed  the  dagger, 
feeling  sure  that  no  fresh  visit  would  be  made  him  that  evening. 
As  he  had  hoped,  his  first  attempt  showed  him  that  the 
iron  of  the  rivet  was  soft,  and  the  keen  dagger  at  once  notched 
off  a  small  piece  of  the  burred  end.  Again  and  again  he  tried, 
and  each  time  a  small  piece  of  metal  flew  off.  After  each 
cut  he  examined  the  edge  of  the  dagger)  but  it  was  well 
tempered,  and  seemed  entirely  unaffected.  He  now  felt  certain 
that  with  patience  he  should  be  able  to  cut  off  the  projecting 
edges  of  the  rivets  and  so  be  able  to  free  his  hands. 

He  therefore  now  examined  the  fastenings  at  the  ankles. 
These  were  more  heavy,  and  on  trying  them  the  iron  of  the 
rivet  appeared  to  be  much  harder  than  that  which  kept 
the  manacles  together.  It  was,  however,  now  too  dark  to  see 
what  he  was  doing,  and  concealing  the  dagger  again  he  lay 
down  with  a  lighter  heart  than  he  had  from  the  moment  of  his 
capture.  Even  if  he  found  that  the  lower  fastenings  of  the 
chain  defied  all  his  efforts,  he  could  cut  the  rivets  at  the  wrists, 
and  so  free  one  end  of  each  chain,  he  could  then  tie  the  chains 
round  his  legs,  and  their  weight  would  not  be  sufficient  to  pre- 
Tent  his  walking. 


CHAPTER  XIII. 
THE  PIRATES'  RAID. 

S  soon  as  it  was  daylight  next  morning  Francis  was 
up  and  at  work.  His  experiments  of  the  evening 
before  were  at  once  confirmed.  Three  or  four  hours' 
work  would  enable  him  to  free  his  wrists,  but  he 
could  make  no  impression  on  the  rivets  at  his  ankles.  After  a 
few  trials  he  gave  this  up  as  hopeless,  for  he  was  afraid  if  he 
continued  he  would  blunt  the  edge  of  the  dagger. 

For  an  hour  he  sat  still  thinking,  and  at  last  an  idea  occurred 
to  him.  Iron  could  be  ground  by  rubbing  it  upon  stone,  and  if 
he  could  not  cut  off  the  burr  of  the  rivet  with  the  dagger  he 
might  perhaps  be  able  to  wear  it  down  by  rubbing  it  with  a  stone. 
He  at  once  turned  to  the  walls  of  his  cell.  These  were  not  built 
of  the  unbaked  clay  so  largely  used  for  houses  of  the  poorer  class 
in  Northern  Egypt,  but  had  evidently  been  constructed  either  as 
a  prison  or  more  probably  as  a  strong  room  where  some  merchant 
kept  valuable  goods. 

It  was  therefore  constructed  of  blocks  of  hard  stone.  It 
seemed  to  Francis  that  this  was  sandstone,  and  to  test  its 
quality  he  sat  down  in  the  corner  where  the  guard  had  the 
night  before  placed  his  supply  of  food  and  water.  First  he 
moistened  a  portion  of  the  wall,  then  he  took  up  a  link  of  his 
chain  and  rubbed  for  some  time  against  it.  At  last,  to  his 


SLOW   WORK.  237 

satisfaction,  a  bright  patch  showed  that  the  stone  was  capable  of 
wearing  away  iron. 

But  in  vain  did  he  try  to  twist  his  legs  so  as  to  rub  the  rivet 
against  the  wall,  and  he  gave  up  the  attempt  as  impossible.  It 
was  clear  then  that  he  must  have  a  bit  of  the  stone  to  rub  with. 
He  at  once  began  to  dig  with  the  dagger  in  the  earth  at  the  foot 
of  the  wall  to  see  if  he  could  find  any  such  pieces.  For  a  long 
time  he  came  across  no  chips,  even  of  the  smallest  size.  As 
he  worked  he  was  most  careful  to  stamp  down  the  earth  which 
he  had  moved,  scattering  over  it  the  sand,  of  which  there  was  an 
abundance  in  the  corners  of  the  room,  to  obliterate  all  traces  of 
his  work. 

When  breakfast  time  approached  he  ceased  for  a  while,  but 
after  the  meal  had  been  taken  he  recommenced  the  task.  He 
met  with  little  success  till  he  reached  the  door,  but  here  he  was 
more  fortunate.  A  short  distance  below  the  surface  were  a 
number  of  pieces  of  stone  of  various  sizes,  which  he  had  no  doubt 
had  been  cut  from  the  blocks  to  allow  for  the  fixing  of  the  lintel 
and  door-post.  He  chose  half  a  dozen  pieces  of  the  handiest 
sizes,  each  having  a  flat  surface.  Then  replacing  the  earth  care- 
fully, he  took  one  of  the  pieces  in  his  hand,  and  moistening  it 
with  water,  set  to  work. 

He  made  little  progress.  Still  the  stone  did  wear  the  iron, 
and  he  felt  sure  that  by  perseverance  he  should  succeed  in 
wearing  off  the  burrs.  All  day  he  worked  without  intermission, 
holding  a  rag  wrapped  round  the  stone  to  deaden  the  sound. 
He  worked  till  his  ringers  ached  so  that  he  could  no  longer  hold 
it,  then  rested  for  an  hour  or  two,  and  resumed  his  work.  When 
his  guard  brought  his  dinner  he  asked  him  when  the  galley  was 
to  sail  again. 

"  It  was  to  have  gone  to-day,"  the  man  said,  "  but  the  captain 
has  been  laid  up  with  fever.  He  has  a  leech  from  Tunis  attend- 
ing him,  and,  weak  as  he  is,  he  is  so  bent  on  going,  that  he  would 


238  AN   INTERVIEW. 

have  had  himself  carried  on  board  the  ship  had  not  the  leech 
said  that  in  that  case  he  would  not  answer  for  his  life,  as  in  the 
state  his  blood  is  in  his  wounds  would  assuredly  mortify  did  he 
not  remain  perfectly  quiet.  So  he  has  agreed  to  delay  for  three 
days." 

Francis  was  unable  to  work  with  the  stone  at  night,  for 
in  the  stillness  the  sound  might  be  heard ;  but  for  some  hours 
he  hacked  away  with  the  dagger  at  the  rivets  on  his  manacles. 
The  next  morning  he  was  at  work  as  soon  as  the  chirrup  of  the 
cicadae  began,  as  these,  he  knew,  would  completely  deaden  any 
sound  he  might  make.  By  night-time  the  rivet  ends  on  the 
irons  round  his  ankles  were  worn  so  thin  that  he  felt  sure  that 
another  hour's  work  would  bring  them  level  with  the  iron,  and 
before  he  went  to  sleep  the  rivets  on  the  wrist  were  in  the  same 
condition. 

He  learned  from  his  guard  next  morning  that  the  captain  was 
better,  that  he  was  to  be  taken  on  board  in  the  cool  of  the  even- 
ing, and  that  the  vessel  would  start  as  soon  as  the  breeze  sprang 
up  in  the  morning.  In  the  afternoon  his  two  guards  entered, 
and  bade  him  follow  them.  He  was  conducted  to  the  principal 
house  in  the  village,  and  into  a  room  where  Ruggiero  Mocenigo 
was  lying  on  a  couch. 

"  I  have  sent  for  you,"  Ruggiero  said,  "  to  tell  you  that  I  have 
not  forgotten  you.  My  vengeance  has  been  delayed  from  no 
fault  of  mine,  but  it  will  be  all  the  sweeter  when  it  comes.  I  am 
going  to  fetch  Polani's  daughters.  I  have  heard  that  since  you 
thrust  yourself  between  me  and  them  you  have  been  a  familiar 
in  the  house,  that  Polani  treats  you  as  a  member  of  the  family, 
and  that  you  are  in  high  favour  with  his  daughters.  I  have 
kept  myself  informed  of  what  happened  in  Venice,  and  I  have 
noted  each  of  these  things  down  in  the  account  of  what  I  owe 
you.  I  am  going  to  fetch  Polani's  daughters  here,  and  to  make 
Maria  my  wife,  and  then  I  will  show  her  how  I  treat  those  who 


A   VILLAINOUS   SCHEME.  239 

cross  my  path.  It  will  be  a  lesson  to  her  as  well  as  for  you. 
You  shall  wish  yourself  dead  a  thousand  times  before  death 
comes  to  you." 

"  I  always  knew  that  you  were  a  villain,  Ruggiero  Mocenigo," 
Francis  said  quietly,  "although  I  hardly  thought  that  a  man 
who  had  once  the  honour  of  being  a  noble  of  Venice  would 
sink  to  become  a  pirate  and  renegade.  You  can  marry  Maria 
Polani  off.  but  you  will  never  succeed  through  her  in  obtaining 
a  portion  of  her  father's  fortune,  for  I  know  that  the  first 
moment  her  hands  are  free  she  will  stab  herself  to  the  heart, 
rather  than  remain  in  the  power  of  such  a  wretch." 

Ruggiero  snatched  up  a  dagger  from  a  table  by  his  couch  as 
Francis  was  speaking,  but  dropped  it  again. 

"  Fool,"  he  said.  "  Am  I  not  going  to  carry  off  the  two  girls, 
and  do  you  not  see  that  it  will  tame  Maria's  spirit  effectually 
when  she  knows  that  if  she  lays  hands  on  herself  she  will  but 
shift  the  honour  of  being  my  wife  from  herself  to  her  sister  ?  " 

As  the  .laugh  of  anticipated  triumph  rang  in  Francis's  ears 
the  latter  in  his  fury  made  a  spring  forward  to  throw  himself 
upon  the  villain,  but  he  had  forgotten  his  chains,  and  fell  head- 
long on  to  the  floor. 

"  Guards,"  Ruggiero  shouted,  "  take  this  fellow  away,  and  I 
charge  you  watch  over  him  securely,  and  remember  that  your 
lives  shall  answer  for  his  escape." 

"  There  is  no  need  for  threats,  signer,"  Philippo  said.  "  You 
can  rely  on  our  vigilance,  though  as  far  as  I  see,  if  he  had 
but  a  child  to  watch  him  he  would  be  safe  in  that  cell  of  his, 
fettered  as  he  is." 

Ruggiero  waved  his  hand  impatiently,  and  the  two  men  with- 
drew with  their  prisoner. 

"  If  it  were  not  that  I  have  not  touched  my  share  of  the  booty 
of  our  last  trip,"  Philippo  said  as  they  left  the  house,  "  I  would 
not  serve  him  another  day.  As  it  is,  soon  as  the  galley  re- 


240  "THE  CREW   ARE  ALL   ON    BOARD." 

turns  and  we  get  our  shares  of  the  money  and  of  the  sum  he 
has  promised  if  this  expedition  of  his  is  successful,  I  will  be  off. 
I  have  had  enough  of  this.  It  is  bad  enough  to  be  consorting 
with  Moors,  without  being  abused  and  threatened  as  if  one  was 
a  dog." 

As  soon  as  he  was  alone  again  Francis  set  to  work,  and  by 
the  afternoon  the  ends  of  the  four  rivets  were  worn  down  level 
with  the  iron,  and  it  needed  but  a  pressure  to  make  the  rings 
spring  open.  Then  he  waited  for  the  evening  before  freeing 
himself,  as  by  some  chance  he  might  again  be  visited,  and  even 
if  free  before  nightfall  he  could  not  leave  the  house. 

Philippo  was  later  than  usual  in  bringing  him  his  meal,  and 
Francis  heard  angry  words  passing  between  him  and  his  com- 
rade because  he  had  not  returned  to  relieve  him  sooner. 

"  Is  everything  ready  for  the  start  ?  "  Francis  asked  the  man 
as  he  entered. 

"  Yes,  the  crew  are  all  on  board.  The  boat  is  to  be  on  shore 
for  the  captain  at  nine  o'clock,  and  as  there  is  a  little  breeze 
blowing  I  expect  they  will  get  up  sail  and  start  at  once." 

After  a  few  minutes'  talk  the  man  left,  and  Francis  waited 
until  it  became  almost  dark,  then  he  inserted  the  dagger  between 
the  irons  at  the  point  of  junction.  At  the  first  wrench,  they 
flew  apart,  and  his  left  hand  was  free.  A  few  minutes'  more 
work  and  the  chains  lay  on  the  ground.  Taking  them  up  he 
rattled  them  together  loudly.  In  a  minute  he  heard  the  guard 
outside  move  and  come  to  the  door,  then  the  key  was  inserted 
in  the  lock  and  the  door  opened. 

"  What  on  earth  are  you  doing  now  ?  "  Philippo  asked  as  he 
entered. 

Francis  was  standing  close  to  the  door,  so  that  as  his  guard 
entered  he  had  his  back  to  him,  and  before  the  question  was 
finished  he  sprang  upon  him,  throwing  him  headlong  to  the 
ground  with  the  shock,  and  before  the  astonished  man  could 


"  I   DO   NOT   WANT  TO   KILL   YOU."  24! 

speak  he  was  kneeling  upon  him,  with  the  point  of  the  dagger 
at  his  throat. 

"  If  you  make  a  sound,  or  utter  a  cry,"  he  exclaimed,  "  I  will 
drive  this  dagger  into  your  throat." 

Philippo  could  feel  the  point  of  the  dagger  against  his  skin, 
and  remained  perfectly  quiet. 

"  I  do  not  want  to  kill  you,  Philippo.  You  have  not  been 
harsh  to  me,  and  I  would  spare  your  life  if  I  could.  Hold  your 
hands  back  above  your  head  and  put  your  wrists  together  that 
I  may  fasten  them,  then  I  will  let  you  get  up." 

Philippo  held  up  his  hands  as  requested,  and  Francis  bound 
them  tightly  together  with  a  strip  of  twisted  cloth.  He  then 
allowed  him  to  rise. 

"  Now,  Philippo,  I  must  gag  you,  then  I  will  fasten  your 
hands  to  a  bar  well  above  your  head  so  that  you  can't  get  at 
the  rope  with  your  teeth  ;  I  will  leave  you  here  till  your  comrade 
comes  in  the  morning." 

"  I  would  rather  that  you  killed  me  at  once,  signer,"  the 
man  said.  "  Thomaso  will  be  furious  at  your  having  made 
your  escape,  for  he  will  certainly  come  in  for  a  share  of  the 
fury  of  the  captain.  There  are  three  or  four  of  the  crew 
remaining  behind,  and  no  doubt  they  will  keep  me  locked  up 
till  the  ship  returns,  and  in  that  case  the  captain  will  be  as  good 
as  his  word.  You  had  better  kill  me  at  once." 

"But  what  am  I  to  do,  Philippo?  I  must  ensure  my  own 
safety.  If  you  will  suggest  any  way  by  which  I  can  do  that 
I  will." 

"  I  would  swear  any  oath  you  like,  signor,  that  I  will  not 
give  the  alarm.  I  will  make  straight  across  the  island  and  get 
hold  of  a  boat  there  so  as  to  be  well  away  before  your  escape  is 
known  in  the  morning. 

"  Well,  look  here,  Philippo,     I  believe  you  are  sincere,  and 

you  shall  take  the  oath  you  hold  most  sacred. 
— 16 


242  "  I   WILL   TRUST   YOU   ALTOGETHER." 

"  You  can  accompany  me,  signer,  if  you  will.  Keep  my  hands 
tied  till  we  are  on  the  other  side  of  the  island,  and  stab  me  if  I 
give  the  alarm." 

"  I  will  not  do  that,  Philippo.  I  will  trust  you  altogether ; 
but  first  take  the  oath  you  spoke  of." 

Philippo  swore  a  terrible  oath  that  he  would  abstain  from 
giving  the  alarm,  and  would  cross  the  island  and  make  straight 
for  the  mainland.  Francis  at  once  cut  the  bonds. 

"You  will  lose  your  share  of  the  plunder,  Philippo,  and 
you  will  have  to  keep  out  of  the  way  to  avoid  the  captain's 
rage ;  therefore  I  advise  you,  when  you  get  to  Tunis,  to  em- 
bark in  the  first  ship  that  sails.  If  you  come  to  Venice,  ask 
for  me,  and  I  will  make  up  to  you  for  your  loss  of  booty,  and 
put  you  in  the  way  of  leading  an  honest  life  again ;  but  before 
going  you  must  first  change  clothes  with  me.  You  can  sell 
mine  at  Tunis  for  enough  to  buy  you  a  dozen  suits  like  yours  ; 
but  you  must  divide  with  me  what  money  you  now  have  in 
your  possession,  for  I  cannot  start  penniless. 

"  I  thank  you  for  your  kindness,"  the  man  said  ;  "  you  had 
it  in  your  power  with  a  thrust  of  the  dagger  to  make  yourself 
safe,  and  you  abstained ;  even  were  it  not  for  my  oath,  I 
should  be  a  treacherous  dog  indeed  were  I  to  betray  you.  I 
do  not  know  what  your  plans  are,  signer,  but  I  pray  you  to 
follow  my  example  and  get  away  from  this  place  before  day- 
light. The  people  here  will  all  aid  in  the  search  for  you,  and 
as  the  island  is  not  large,  you  will  assuredly  be  discovered. 
It  has  for  many  years  been  a  rendezvous  of  pirates,  a  place  to 
which  they  bring  their  booty  to  sell  to  the  traders  who  come 
Over  from  the  mainland." 

"  Thank  you  for  your  advice,  Philippo,  and  be  assured  I 
shall  be  off  the  island  before  daybreak,  but  I  have  some  work  to 
do  first  and  cannot  therefore  accompany  you." 

"  May  all   the   saints  bless  you,  signer,  and  aid  you   to  get 


PHILIPPO'S    OFFER.  243 

safe  away !  Assuredly  if  I  live  I  will  ere  long  present  myself 
to  you  at  Venice — not  for  the  money  which  you  so  generously 
promised  me,  but  that  I  may  with  your  aid  earn  an  honest 
living  among  Christians." 

By  this  time  the  exchange  of  clothes  was  effected.  The  six 
ducats  in  Philippe's  purse — the  result  of  a  little  private  plun- 
dering on  one  of  the  captured  vessels — divided  ;  and  then  they 
left  the  prison  room,  and  Philippo  locked  the  door  after  them. 

"  Is  there  any  chance  of  Thomaso  returning  speedily  ? " 
Francis  asked ;  "  because  if  so  he  might  notice  your  absence, 
and  so  give  the  alarm  before  the  ship  sets  sail,  in  which  case 
we  should  have  the  whole  crew  on  our  tracks." 

"  I  do  not  think  that  he  will.  He  will  be  likely  to  be  drink- 
ing in  the  wine-shop  for  an  hour  or  two  before  he  returns. 
But  I  tell  you  what  I  will  do,  signer.  I  will  resume  my  place 
here  on  guard  until  he  has  returned.  He  will  relieve  me  at 
midnight,  and  in  the  darkness  will  not  notice  the  change  of 
clothes.  There  will  still  be  plenty  of  time  for  me  to  cross  the 
island  and  get  out  of  sight  in  the  boat  before  the  alarm  is 
given,  which  will  not  be  until  six  o'clock,  when  I  ought  to 
relieve  him  again.  As  you  say,  if  the  alarm  were  to  be  given 
before  the  vessel  sails,  they  might  start  at  once  to  cut  us  off 
before  we  reach  the  mainiand,  for  they  would  make  sure  that 
we  should  try  to  escape  in  that  direction." 

"  That  will  be  the  best  plan,  Philippo  ;  and  now  good-bye." 

Francis  walked  down  to  the  shore.  There  were  no  boats 
lying  there  of  a  size  he  could  launch  unaided,  but  presently  he 
heard  the  sound  of  oars,  and  a  small  fishing-boat  rowed  by  two 
men  approached. 

"  Look  here,  lads,"  he  said  ;  "  I  want  to  be  put  on  board  the 
ship.  I  ought  to  have  been  on  board  three  hours  ago,  but 
took  too  much  wine,  and  lay  down  for  an  hour  or  two  and 
overslept  myself.  Do  you  think  you  can  row  quietly  up  along- 


24+  ON    BOARD   THE   PIRATE. 

side  so  that  i  can  slip  on  board  unnoticed  ?  If  so  I  will  give 
you  a  ducat  for  your  trouble." 

"  We  can  do  that,"  the  fishermen  said ;  "we  have  just  come 
from  the  ship  now,  and  have  sold  them  our  catch  of  to-day. 
There  were  half-a-dozen  other  boats  lying  beside  her  bargain- 
ing for  their  fish;  besides  they  are  taking  on  board  firewood 
and  other  stores  that  have  been  left  till  the  last  moment ;  so 
jump  in  and  we  will  soon  get  you  there." 

In  a  few  minutes  they  approached  the  side  of  the  ship. 

"  I  see  you  have  got  half-a-dozen  fish  left  in  your  boat  now," 
Francis  said. 

"They  are  of  no  account,"  one  of  the  men  said;  "they  are 
good  enough  for  our  eating,  but  not  such  as  they  buy  on  board 
a  ship  where  money  is  plentiful.  You  are  heartily  welcome  to 
them  if  you  have  a  fancy  for  them." 

"  Thank  you,"  Francis  said ;  "  I  will  take  two  or  three  of 
them  if  you  can  spare  them.  I  want  to  play  a  trick  with  a 
comrade." 

As  the  fishermen  said,  there  were  several  boats  lying  near 
the  vessel,  and  the  men  were  leaning  over  the  sides  bargaining 
for  fish.  Handing  the  fishermen  their  promised  reward,  Fran- 
cis sprang  up  the  ladder  to  the  deck. 

He  was  unnoticed,  for  other  men  had  gone  down  into  the 
boats  for  fish.  Mingling  with  the  sailors  he  gradually  made 
his  way  to  the  hatchway  leading  into  the  hold,  descended 
the  ladder,  and  stowed  himself  away  among  a  quantity  of 
casks,  some  filled  with  wine  and  some  with  water,  at  the 
farther  end  of  the  hold,  and  as  he  lay  there  devoutly  thanked 
God  that  his  enterprise  had  been  so  far  successful. 

Men  came  down  from  time  to  time  with  lanterns  to  stow 
away  the  lately-arrived  stores,  but  none  came  near  the  place 
where  Francis  was  hidden.  The  time  seemed  long  before  he 
heard  the  clank  of  the  capstan,  and  knew  the  vessel  was  being 


IN  HIDING.  345 

hove  up  to  her  anchors.  Then  after  a  while  he  heard  the 
creaking  of  cordage,  and  much  trampling  of  feet  on  the  deck 
above,  and  knew  that  she  was  under  way.  Then  he  made 
himself  as  comfortable  as  he  could  in  his  cramped  position,  and 
went  off  to  sleep. 

When  he  woke  in  the  morning  the  light  was  streaming 
down  the  hatch,  which  was  only  closed  in  rough  weather,  as 
it  was  necessary  frequently  to  go  down  into  it  for  water  and 
stores.  Francis  had  brought  the  fish  with  him  as  a  means  of 
subsistence  during  the  voyage  in  case  he  should  be  unable  to 
obtain  provisions,  but  for  this  there  was  no  occasion,  as  there 
was  an  abundance  of  fruit  hanging  from  the  beams,  while 
piles  of  bread  were  stowed  in  a  partition  at  one  end  of  the 
hold.  During  the  day,  however,  he  did  not  venture  to  move, 
and  was  heartily  glad  when  it  again  became  dark  and  he  could 
venture  to  get  out  and  stretch  himself.  He  appropriated  a  loaf 
and  some  bunches  of  grapes,  took  a  long  drink  from  a  pail 
placed  under  the  tap  of  a  water-butt,  and  made  his  way  back  to 
his  corner.  After  a  hearty  meal  he  went  out  again  for  another 
drink,  and  then  turned  in  to  sleep. 

So  passed  six  days.  By  the  rush  of  water  against  the  outside 
planks  he  could  always  judge  whether  the  vessel  was  making 
brisk  way  or  whether  she  was  lying  becalmed.  Once  or  twice 
after  nightfall  he  ventured  up  on  deck,  feeling  certain  that  in  the 
darkness  there  was  no  fear  of  his  being  detected.  From  con- 
versation he  overheard  on  the  seventh  evening  he  learned  that 
Corfu  had  been  sighted  that  day.  For  some  hours  the  vessel's 
sails  had  been  lowered,  and  she  had  remained  motionless  ;  but 
she  was  now  again  making  for  the  land,  and  in  the  course  of 
another  two  hours  a  landing  was  to  be  made. 

The  boats  had  all  been  got  in  readiness,  and  the  men  were  to 
muster  fully  armed.  Although,  as  they  understood,  the  carrying 
off  of  two  girls  was  their  special  object,  it  was  intended  that 


246  CORFU. 

they  should  gather  as  much  plunder  as  could  be  obtained.  The 
island  was  rich,  for  many  wealthy  Venetians  had  residences 
there.  Therefore,  with  the  exception  of  a  few  men  left  on  board 
to  take  care  of  the  galley,  the  whole  were  to  land. 

A  picked  boat's  crew  were  to  accompany  the  captain,  who  was 
now  completely  convalescent;  the  rest  were  to  divide  in  bands 
and  scatter  over  the  country,  pillaging  as  they  went,  and  setting 
fire  to  the  houses.  It  was  considered  that  such  consternation 
would  be  caused  that  nothing  like  resistence  could  be  offered 
for  some  time,  and  by  daybreak  all  hands  were  to  gather  at  the 
landing-place.  How  far  this  spot  was  from  the  town  Francis  had 
no  means  of  learning. 

There  was  a  store  of  spare  arms  in  the  hold,  and  Francis, 
furnishing  himself  with  a  sword  and  large  dagger,  waited  until 
he  heard  a  great  movement  overhead,  and  then  went  upon  deck 
and  joined  a  gang  of  men  employed  in  lowering  one  of  the  boats. 

The  boat  was  a  large  one,  rowing  sixteen  oars  and  carrying 
some  twenty  men  seated  in  the  stern ;  here  Francis  took  his 
place  with  the  others,  the  boat  pushed  off  and  waited  until  four 
others  were  launched  and  filled,  then  the  order  was  given,  and 
the  boats  rowed  in  a  body  towards  the  shore.  The  men  landed 
and  formed  under  their  respective  officers,  one  man  remaining 
in  each  boat  to  keep  it  afloat. 

Francis  leaped  ashore,  and  while  the  men  were  forming  up, 
found  no  difficulty  in  slipping  away  unnoticed.  As  he  did  not 
know  where  the  path  was,  and  was  afraid  of  making  a  noise,  he 
lay  down  among  the  rocks  until  he  heard  the  word  of  command 
to  start  given  ;  then  he  cautiously  crept  out,  and,  keeping  far 
enough  in  the  rear  to  be  unseen,  followed  the  sound  of  their 
footsteps.  By  the  short  time  which  had  elapsed  between  the 
landing  and  the  start  he  had  no  doubt  they  were  guided  by  some 
persons  perfectly  acquainted  with  the  locality,  probably  by  some 
natives  of  the  island  among  the  mixed  crew. 


SEEKING  A  GUIDE.  247 

Francis  had,  during  his  voyage,  thought  over  the  course  he 
should  pursue  on  landing,  and  saw  that,  ignorant  as  he  was  of 
the  country,  his  only  hope  was  in  obtaining  a  guide  who  would 
conduct  him  to  Polani's  villa  before  the  arrival  of  Mocenigo  and 
his  band.  The  fact  that  the  crew  were  divided  into  five  parties 
which  were  to  proceed  in  different  directions,  and  that  he  did 
not  know  which  of  them  was  commanded  by  the  captain,  added 
to  the  difficulty.  Had  they  kept  together  he  might,  after  seeing 
the  direction  in  which  they  were  going,  make  a  detour  and  get 
ahead  of  them.  But  he  might  now  follow  a  party  going  in  an 
entirely  wrong  direction,  and  before  he  could  obtain  a  guide 
Mocenigo's  band  might  have  gone  so  far  that  they  could  not  be 
overtaken  before  they  reached  the  villa. 

There  was  nothing  to  do  but  to  get  ahead  of  all  the  parties 
in  the  hope  of  coming  upon  a  habitation  before  going  far.  As 
soon,  therefore,  as  the  last  band  had  disappeared  he  started  at  a 
run.  The  country  was  open,  with  few  walls  or  fences  ;  therefore 
on  leaving  the  road  he  was  able  to  run  rapidly  forwards,  and  in 
a  few  minutes  knew  that  he  must  be  ahead  of  the  pirates,  then 
he  again  changed  his  course  so  as  to  strike  the  road  he  had  left. 

After  running  for  about  a  mile  he  saw  a  light  ahead  of  him, 
and  soon  arrived  at  a  cottage.  He  knocked  at  the  door,  and  then 
entered.  The  occupants  of  the  room — a  man  and  woman,  a  lad, 
and  several  children — rose  to  their  feet  at  the  sudden  entrance 
of  the  stranger. 

"  Good  people,"  Francis  said,  "  I  have  just  landed  from  a  ship 
and  am  the  bearer  of  important  messages  to  the  Signoras 
Polani.  I  have  lost  my  way,  and  it  is  necessary  that  I  should 
go  on  without  a  moment's  delay.  Can  you  tell  me  how  far  the 
villa  of  Polani  is  distant  ?" 

"  It  is  about  three  miles  from  here,"  the  man  said. 

"  I  will  give  a  ducat  to  your  son  if  he  will  run  on  with  me  at 
once." 


248  A  RACE. 

The  man  looked  doubtful.  The  apparel  and  general  appear- 
ance of  Francis  were  not  prepossessing ;  he  had  been  six  days  a 
prisoner  in  the  hold  without  means  of  washing. 

"  See,"  he  said,  producing  a  ducat,  "  here  is  the  money.  I  will 
give  it  you  at  once  if  you  will  order  your  son  to  go  with  me  and 
to  hurry  at  the  top  of  his  speed." 

"  It's  a  bargain,"  the  man  said.  "  Here,  Rufo !  start  at  once 
with  the  signor." 

"  Come  along,  signor,"  the  boy  said ;  and  without  another  word 
to  the  parents  Francis  followed  him  out,  and  both  set  off  at  a  run 
along  the  road. 

Francis  had  said  nothing  about  pirates  to  the  peasants,  for 
he  knew  that  did  he  do  so  such  alarm  would  be  caused  that  they 
would  think  of  nothing  but  fligkt,  and  he  should  not  be  able 
to  obtain  a  guide.  It  was  improbable  that  they  would  be 
molested.  The  pirates  were  bent  upon  pillaging  the  villas  of 
the  wealthy,  and  would  not  risk  the  raising  of  an  alarm  by 
entering  cottages  where  there  was  no  chance  of  plunder.  After 
proceeding  a  few  hundred  yards  the  lad  struck  off  by  a  by-road 
at  right  angles  to  that  which  they  had  been  following,  and  by 
the  direction  he  took  Francis  felt  that  he  must  at  first  have 
gone  far  out  of  his  way,  and  that  the  party  going  direct  to  the 
v'lla  must  have  had  a  considerable  start ;  still  he  reckoned  that 
as  he  was  running  at  the  rate  of  three  feet  to  every  one  they 
would  march,  he  might  hope  to  arrive  at  the  house  well  before 
them. 

Not  a  word  was  spoken  as  they  ran  along.  The  lad  was 
wondering  in  his  mind  as  to  what  could  be  the  urgent  business 
that  could  necessitate  its  being  carried  at  such  speed,  while 
Francis  felt  that  every  breath  was  needed  for  the  work  he  had 
to  do.  Only  once  or  twice  he  spoke,  to  ask  how  much  further 
it  was  to  their  destination.  The  last  answer  was  cheering .  "  A 
few  hundred  paces  farther." 


SIGNOR  POLANI   WARNED.  249 

"  There  are  the  lights,  signer ;  they  have  not  gone  to  bed ; 
this  is  the  door." 

Francis  knocked  with  the  pommel  of  his  sword,  keeping  up  a 
loud  continuous  knocking.  A  minute  or  two  passed,  and  then  a 
face  appeared  at  the  window  above. 

"  Who  is  it  that  knocks  so  loudly  at  this  time  of  night  ?  " 

"  It  is  Francisco  Hammond.  Open  instantly  ;  danger  threatens 
the  signoras.  Quick,  for  your  life  ! " 

The  servant  recognized  the  voice  and  ran  down  withouc 
hesitation  and  unbarred  the  fastening;  but  for  a  moment  he 
thought  he  must  have  been  mistaken  as  Francis  ran  into  the 
lighted  hall. 

"  Where  are  the  ladies  ?"  he  asked.  "  Lead  me  to  them 
instantly." 

But  as  he  spoke  a  door  standing  by  was  opened,  and  Signor 
Polani  himself  with  the  two  girls  appeared.  They  had  been  on 
the  point  of  retiring  to  rest  when  the  knocking  began,  and  the 
merchant  with  his  drawn  sword  was  standing  at  the  door  when 
he  recognized  Francis'  voice.  They  were  about  to  utter  an 
exclamation  of  pleasure  at  seeing  him,  and  of  astonishment,  not 
only  at  his  sudden  arrival,  but  at  his  appearance,  when  Francis 
burst  out : 

"  There  is  no  time  for  a  word,  you  must  fly  instantly.  Rug- 
giero  Mocenigo  is  close  at  my  heels  with  a  band  of  twenty 
pirates." 

The  girls  uttered  a  cry  of  alarm,  and  the  merchant  exclaimed  : 

"  Can  we  not  defend  the  house,  Francisco  ?  I  have  eight  men 
here,  and  we  can  hold  it  till  assistance  comes." 

"  Ruggiero  has  a  hundred,"  Francis  said,  "  and  all  can  be 
brought  up  in  a  short  time — you  must  fly.  For  God's  sake,  do 
not  delay,  signer.  They  may  be  here  at  any  moment." 

"  Come  girls,"  Polani  said ;  "  and  you,  too,"  he  went  on, 
turning  to  the  servants,  whom  the  knocking  had  caused  to 


250  JUST  IN  TIME. 

assemble,  "  do  you  follow  us ;  resistance  would  only  cost  you 
your  lives.  Here,  Maria,  take  my  hand.  Francisco,  do  you 
see  to  Giulia.  Close  the  door  after  the  last  of  you,  and  bolt  it. 
It  will  give  us  a  few  minutes  before  they  break  in  and  dis- 
cover that  we  have  all  gone.  Which  way  are  the  scoundrels 
coming  ?  " 

Francis  pointed  in  the  direction  from  which  he  had  come,  and 
the  whole  party  started  at  a  fast  pace  in  the  other  direction. 
They  had  not  been  gone  five  minutes  when  a  loud  and  sudden 
knocking  broke  on  the  silence  of  the  night. 

"  It  was  a  close  thing,  indeed,  Francisco,"  the  merchant  said 
as  they  ran  along  close  to  each  other.  "  At  present  I  feel  as  if  I 
was  in  a  dream  ;  but  you  shall  tell  us  all  presently." 

They  were  by  this  time  outside  the  grounds  of  the  villa,  and 
some  of  the  servants  who  knew  the  country  now  took  the  lead. 
In  a  few  minutes  the  merchant  slackened  his  pace. 

"  We  are  out  of  danger  now,"  he  said.  "  They  will  not  know 
in  which  direction  to  search  for  us ;  and  if  they  scatter  in  pur- 
suit we  could  make  very  short  work  of  any  that  might  come  up 
with  us." 

"  I  do  not  know  that  you  are  out  of  danger,"  Francis  said. 
"  A  hundred  men  laaded  ;  Mocenigo  with  twenty  took  the  line 
to  your  house,  but  the  rest  have  scattered  over  the  country  in 
smaller  bands,  bent  on  murder  and  pillage.  Therefore  we  had 
best  keep  on  as  fast  as  we  can,  until  well  beyond  the  circle  they 
are  likely  to  sweep — that  is,  unless  the  ladies  are  tired." 

"  Tired  ! "  Maria  repeated.  "  Why,  Giulia  and  I  go  for  long 
walks  every  day,  and  could  run  for  an  hour  if  necessary." 

"  Then  come  on  my  dears,"  the  merchant  said.  "  I  am  burning 
to  know  what  this  all  means ;  and  I  am  sure  you  are  equally 
curious ;  but  nothing  can  be  said  till  you  are  in  safety." 

Accordingly  the  party  again  broke  into  a  run.  A  few  minutes 
later  one  of  the  servants,  looking  back,  exclaimed : 


IN  SAFETY.  251 

••  They  have  fired  the  house,  signer.  There  are  flames  issuing 
from  one  of  the  lower  windows." 

"  I  expected  that,"  the  merchant  said,  without  looking  back. 

"  That  scoundrel  would,  in  any  case,  light  it  in  his  fury  at  rind- 
ing that  we  have  escaped  ;  but  he  has  probably  done  so  now  in 
hopes  that  the  light  will  enable  him  to  discover  us.  It  is  well 
that  we  are  so  far  ahead,  for  the  blaze  will  light  up  the  country 
for  a  long  way  round." 

"There  is  a  wood  a  little  way  ahead,  signer,"  the  servant 
said.  "  Once  through  that  we  shall  be  hidden  from  sight,  how- 
ever great  the  light." 

Arrived  at  the  wood  they  again  broke  into  a  walk.  A  few 
hundred  yards  beyond  the  wood  was  some  rising  ground,  from 
which  they  could  see  far  over  the  country. 

"  Let  us  stop  here,"  the  merchant  said ;  "  we  are  safe  now. 
We  have  placed  two  miles  between  ourselves  and  those  villains." 

The  villa  was  now  a  mass  of  flames.  Exclamations  of  fury 
broke  from  the  men-servants,  while  the  women  cried  with  anger 
at  the  sight  of  the  destruction. 

"  Do  not  concern  yourselves,"  the  merchant  said,  "  the  house 
can  be  rebuilt,  and  I  will  see  that  none  of  you  are  the  poorer 
for  the  loss  of  your  belongings.  Now,  girls,  let  us  sit  down 
here  and  hear  from  Francisco  how  it  is  that  he  has  once  again 
been  your  saviour." 

"  Before  I  begin,  signor,  tell  me  whether  there  are  any  ships 
of  war  in  the  port,  and  how  far  that  is  distant  from  us?" 

"  It  is  not  above  six  miles  on  the  other  side  of  the  island ; 
that  is  to  say,  we  have  been  going  towards  it  since  we  left  the 
villa.  See,"  he  broke  off,  "  there  are  flames  rising  in  three  or 
four  directions ;  the  rest  of  those  villains  are  at  their  work." 

"But  are  there  any  war  galleys  in  the  port?"  Francis 
interrupted. 

"  Yes ;  three  ships  were  sent  here  on  the  report  that  a  Moorish 


252  "FRANCISCO'S  STORY  WILL  KEEP." 

pirate  had  been  cruising  in  these  waters,  and  that  several  vessels 
were  missing.  When  the  story  first  came  I  did  not  credit  it. 
The  captain  of  the  ship  who  brought  the  news  told  me  he  had 
met  you  about  half-way  across,  and  had  told  you  about  the 
supposed  pirate.  A  vessel  arrived  four  days  later,  and  brought 
letters  from  my  agent,  but  he  said  no  word  about  your  boat 
having  arrived.  Then  I  became  uneasy ;  and  when  later  news 
came,  and  still  no  word  of  you,  I  felt  sure  that  something  must 
have  befallen  you ;  that  possibly  the  report  was  true,  and  that 
you  had  fallen  into  the  hands  of  the  pirates.  So  I  at  once  started 
in  one  of  the  galleys  which  the  council  were  despatching  in 
answer  to  the  request  of  the  governor  here." 

"  In  that  case,  signor,  there  is  not  a  moment  to  lose.  The 
governor  should  be  informed  that  the  pirate  is  lying  on  the 
opposite  coast,  and  that  his  crew  have  landed,  and  are  burning 
and  pillaging.  If  orders  are  issued  at  once,  the  galleys  could 
get  round  before  morning,  and  so  cut  off  the  retreat  of  these 
miscreants." 

"You  are  quite  right,"  Polani  said,  rising  at  once.  "We 
will  go  on  without  a  moment's  delay !  The  girls  can  follow 
slowly  under  the  escort  of  the  servants." 

"Oh,  papa,"  Maria  exclaimed,  "you  are  not  going  to  take 
Francisco  away  till  we  have  heard  his  story !  Can  you  not  send 
forward  the  servants  with  a  message  to  the  governor  ?" 

"  No,  my  dear.  The  governor  will  have  gone  to  bed,  and 
the  servants  might  not  be  able  to  obtain  admittance  to  him. 
I  must  go  myself.  It  is  for  your  sakes,  as  well  as  for  my  own. 
We  shall  never  feel  a  moment's  safety  as  long  as  this  villain  is 
at  large.  Francisco's  story  will  keep  till  to-morrow.  As  to  your 
gratitude  and  mine,  that  needs  no  telling.  He  cannot  but  know 
what  we  ire  feeling  at  the  thought  of  the  almost  miraculous 
escape  you  have  had  from  falling  into  the  hands  of  your  perse- 
cutor. Now  come  along,  Francisco.  One  of  you  men  who 


POLANI'S  INSTRUCTIONS.  253 

knows  the  road  had  better  come  with  us.  Do  the  rest  of  you  all 
keep  together.  Two  miles  further,  girls,  as  you  know,  is  a  villa 
of  Carlo  Maffene.  If  you  feel  tired,  you  had  best  stop  and  ask 
for  shelter  there.  There  is  no  fear  that  the  pirates  will  extend 
their  ravages  so  far.  They  will  keep  on  the  side  of  the  island 
where  they  landed,  so  as  to  be  able  to  return  with  their  booty 
before  daybreak  to  the  ship. 


CHAPTER  XIV. 

THE   END   OF  THE  PERSECUTOR. 

(IGNOR  POLANI  was  so  well  known  that  upon  his 
arrival  at  the  governor's  house  the  domestics,  upon 
being  aroused,  did  not  hesitate  to  awaken  the 
governor  at  once.  The  latter,  as  soon  as  he  heard 
that  the  pirates  had  landed  and  were  devastating  the  other  side 
of  the  island,  and  that  their  ship  was  lying  close  in  to  the  coast 
under  the  charge  of  a  few  sailors  only,  at  once  despatched  a 
messenger  to  the  commander  of  the  galleys,  ordering  them  to 
arouse  the  crews  and  make  ready  to  put  out  to  sea  instantly. 
He  added  that  he  himself  should  follow  his  messenger  on  board 
in  a  few  minutes  and  should  accompany  them ;  he  then  issued 
orders  that  the  bell  should  toll  to  summon  the  inhabitants  to 
arms ;  and  directed  an  officer  to  take  the  command,  and  to  start 
with  them  at  once  across  the  island  and  to  fall  upon  the  pirates 
while  engaged  in  their  work  of  pillage.  They  were  to  take  a 
party  with  them  with  litters  to  carry  Polani's  daughters  to  the 
town,  and  an  apartment  was  to  be  assigned  to  them  in  his  palace 
until  his  return. 

While  he  was  issuing  this  order  refreshments  had  been  placed 
upon  the  table,  and  he  pressed  Polani  and  his  companions  to 
partake  of  these  before  starting.  Francis  needed  no  second 
invitation.  He  had  been  too  excited  at  the  news  he  had  heard 
on  board  the  ship  to  think  of  eating,  and  he  now  remembered 


ON  BOARD  A  STATE  GALLEY.  255 

that  it  was  a  good  many  hours  since  he  had  taken  his  last  meal; 
he  was  but  a  few  minutes,  however,  in  satisfying  his  hunger. 

By  the  time  he  had  finished,  the  governor  had  seen  that  his 
orders  had  been  carried  out.  Two  hundred  armed  citizens  had 
already  mustered  in  companies  and  were  now  on  the  point  of 
setting  out,  burning  with  indignation  at  what  they  had  heard 
of  the  depredations  which  the  pirates  had  committed.  After 
seeing  his  preparations  complete  the  governor,  accompanied  by 
Polani  and  Francis,  made  his  way  down  to  the  port  and  was 
rowed  out  to  the  galleys.  Here  he  found  all  on  the  alert. 
The  sails  were  ready  for  hoisting,  and  the  men  were  seated  at 
the  benches  ready  to  aid  with  oars  the  light  wind  which  was 
blowing, 

The  governor  now  informed  the  commander  of  the  vessels  the 
reason  of  the  sudden  orders  for  sailing.  The  news  was  passed  to 
the  captains  of  the  other  two  vessels,  and  in  a  very  few  minutes 
the  anchors  were  weighed  and  the  vessels  started  on  their  way. 
Francis  was  closely  questioned  as  to  the  spot  at  which  the  pirate 
vessel  was  lying,  but  could  only  reply  that,  beyond  the  fact  that 
it  was  some  four  miles  from  Polani's  villa,  he  had  no  idea  of  the 
locality. 

"  But  can  you  not  describe  to  us  the  nature  of  the  coast  ?  " 
the  commander  said. 

"That  I  cannot,"  Francis  replied;  "for  I  was  hidden  away 
in  the  hold  of  the  vessel  and  did  not  come  on  deck  until  after  it 
was  dark,  at  which  time  the  land  abreast  of  us  was  only  a  dark 
mass." 

"Signor  Polani  has  informed  me,"  the  governor  said,  "that, 
although  your  attire  does  not  betoken  it,  you  are  a  dear  friend 
of  his ;  but  he  has  not  yet  informed  me  how  it  comes  that  you 
were  upon  this  pirate  ship." 

"  He  has  been  telling  me  as  we  came  along,"  Polani  replied ; 
"  and  a  strange  story  it  is.  He  was  on  his  voyage  hither  in  the 


2$6  POLANI    EXPLAINS   MATTERS. 

Naxos,  which,  as  you  doubtless  remember,  was  a  little  craft  of 
mine,  which  should  have  arrived  here  a  month  since.  As  we 
supposed,  it  was  captured  by  the  pirates,  the  leader  of  whom  is 
Ruggiero  Mocenigo.  who,  as  of  course  you  know,  made  his  escape 
from  the  custody  of  the  officers  of  the  state,  they  being  over- 
powered by  a  party  of  Paduans.  The  sentence  of  banishment 
for  life  has  been  passed  against  him,  and,  until  I  heard  from  my 
friend  here  that  he  was  captain  of  the  pirate  which  has  been  seen 
off  this  island,  I  knew  not  what  had  become  of  him. 

"  Those  on  board  the  Naxos  were  taken  prisoners  and  con- 
fined in  the  pirate's  hold,  which  they  found  already  filled  with 
captives  taken  from  other  ships.  The  pirate  at  once  sailed  for 
Africa,  where  all  the  prisoners  were  sold  as  slaves  to  the 
Moors,  my  friend  here  alone  excepted,  Mocenigo  having  an  old 
feud  with  him  and  a  design  to  keep  him  in  his  hands.  Learn- 
ing that  a  raid  was  intended  upon  Corfu  with  the  special 
design  of  carrying  off  my  daughters,  whom  Mocenigo  had 
twice  previously  tried  to  abduct,  Francisco  managed  to  get  on 
board  the  vessel  and  conceal  himself  in  her  hold  in  order  that  he 
might  frustrate  the  design.  He  managed  in  the  dark  to  mingle 
with  the  landing  party,  and  then,  separating  from  them,  made  his 
way  on  ahead,  and  fortunately  was  able  to  obtain  a  guide  to  my 
house,  which  he  reached  five  minutes  only  before  the  arrival  of 
the  pirates  there." 

"  Admirable,  indeed !  and  we  are  all  vastly  indebted  to  him, 
for  had  it  not  been  for  him  we  should  not  have  known  of  the 
doings  of  these  scoundrels  until  too  late  to  cut  off  their  retreat ; 
and,  once  away  in  their  ship  again,  they  might  long  have  preyed 
upon  our  commerce  before  one  of  our  cruisers  happened  to  fall 
in  with  them.  As  for  Ruggiero  Mocenigo,  he  is  a  disgrace  to 
the  name  of  a  Venetian  ;  and  it  is  sad  to  think  that  one  of  our 
most  noble  families  should  have  to  bear  the  brand  of  being 
connected  with  a  man  so  base  and  villainous.  However,  I 


THE   PLAN   OF   ATTACK.  257 

trust  that  his  power  of  ill-doing  has  come  to  an  end.  Is  the 
vessel  a  fast  one,  signer  ?" 

"  I  cannot  say  whether  she  sails  fast,"  Francis  replies;  "but 
she  certainly  rows  fast." 

"  I  trust  that  we  shall  catch  her  before  she  gets  under  way," 
the  commander  of  the  galleys  said.  "  Our  vessels  are  not  made 
for  rowing,  although  we  get  out  oars  to  help  them  along  in 
calm  weather." 

"  What  course  do  you  propose  to  take  ?"  the  merchant  asked. 

"  When  we  approach  the  spot  where  she  is  likely  to  be  lying 
I  shall  order  the  captains  of  the  other  two  ships  to  lie  off  the 
coast  a  couple  of  miles  distant  and  as  far  from  each  other,  so 
that  they  can  cut  her  off  as  she  makes  out  to  sea.  We  will 
follow  the  coast  line,  keeping  in  as  close  as  the  water  will 
permit,  and  in  this  way  we  shall  most  likely  come  upon  her. 
If  we  should  miss  her  I  shall  at  the  first  dawn  of  morning  join 
the  others  in  the  offing,  and  keep  watch  till  she  appears  from 
under  the  shadow  of  the  land." 

It  was  now  three  o'clock  in  the  morning,  and  an  hour  later 
the  three  vessels  parted  company,  and  the  galley  with  the 
governor  and  commander  of  the  squadron  rowed  for  the  shore. 
When  they  came  close  to  the  land  the  captain  ordered  the  oars 
to  be  laid  in. 

"  The  breeze  is  very  light,"  he  said ;  "  but  it  is  favourable, 
and  will  enable  us  to  creep  along  the  shore.  If  we  continue 
rowing  those  in  charge  of  the  ship  may  hear  us  coming  and 
may  cut  their  cables,  get  up  sail,  and  make  out  from  the  land 
without  our  seeing  them.  On  a  still  night  like  this  the  sound 
of  the  sweeps  can  be  heard  a  very  long  distance." 

Quietly  the  vessel  made  her  way  along  the  shore.  Over  the 
land  the  sky  was  red  with  the  reflection  of  numerous  fires,  but 
this  only  made  the  darkness  more  intense  under  its  shadow, 

and  the  lead  was  kept  going  in  order  to  prevent  them  from 

—17 


258  THE  PIRATE  AT   ANCHOR. 

sailing  into  shallow  water.  By  the  captain's  orders  strict 
silence  was  observed  on  board  the  ship,  and  every  eye  was 
strained  ahead  on  the  look-out  for  the  pirate  vessel.  Presently 
all  became  aware  of  a  confused  noise  apparently  coming  from 
the  land,  but  at  some  distance  ahead.  As  they  got  further  on 
distant  shouts  and  cries  were  heard. 

"  I  fancy,"  the  governor  said  to  the  captain,  "  the  band  from 
the  town  have  met  the  pirates,  and  the  latter  are  retreating  to 
their  ship." 

"Then  the  ship  can't  be  far  off,"  the  captain  said.  "Day- 
light is  beginning  to  break  in  the  east,  and  we  shall  soon  be 
able  to  make  her  out  against  the  sky — that  is,  if  she  is  still 
lying  at  anchor." 

On  getting  round  the  next  point  the  vessel  was  distinctly 
visible.  The  shouting  on  the  shore  was  now  plainly  heard, 
and  there  could  be  no  doubt  that  a  desperate  fight  was  going  on 
there. 

It  seemed  to  be  close  to  the  water's  edge. 

"  There  is  a  boat  rowing  off  to  the  ship,"  one  of  the  sailors 
said. 

"  Then  get  out  your  oars  again  ;  she  is  not  more  than  half  a 
mile  away,  and  she  can  hardly  get  under  way  before  we  reach 
her.  Besides,  judging  from  the  sound  of  the  fight,  the  pirates 
must  have  lost  a  good  many  men  and  will  not  be  able  to  man 
all  the  oars  even  if  they  gain  their  ship." 

The  men  sat  down  to  their  oars  with  alacrity.  Every  sailor 
on  board  felt  it  almost  as  a  personal  insult  that  pirates  should 
dare  to  enter  the  Venetian  waters  and  carry  on  their  depreda- 
tions there.  The  glare  of  the  burning  houses,  too,  had  fired 
their  indignation  to  the  utmost,  and  all  were  eager  for  the  fight. 
Three  boats  were  now  seen  rowing  towards  the  ship. 

"  Stretch  to  your  oars,  men,"  the  captain  said  ;  "  we  must  be 
alongside  them  if  we  can  before  they  can  take  to  their  sweeps." 


"  TRAITOR  AND   VILLAIN."  259 

The  pirates  had  now  seen  them ;  and  Francis,  standing  at  the 
bow  eagerly  watching  the  vessel,  could  hear  orders  shouted  to 
the  boats.  These  pulled  rapidly  alongside,  and  he  could  see 
the  men  clambering  up  in  the  greatest  haste.  There  was  a  din 
of  voices ;  some  men  tried  to  get  up  the  sails,  others  got  out 
oars,  and  the  utmost  confusion  evidently  prevailed.  In  obe- 
dience to  the  shouts  of  the  officers  the  sails  were  lowered  again 
and  all  betook  themselves  to  the  oars,  but  scarce  a  stroke  had 
been  pulled  before  the  Venetian  galley  ran  up  alongside. 
Grapnels  were  thrown,  and  the  crew,  seizing  their  weapons, 
sprang  on  to  the  deck  of  the  pirate. 

The  crew  of  the  latter  knew  that  they  had  no  mercy  to 
expect,  and  although  weakened  by  the  loss  of  nearly  a  third  of 
their  number  in  the  fighting  on  shore,  sprang  from  their  benches 
and  rushed  to  oppose  their  assailants,  with  the  desperation  of 
despair.  They  were  led  by  Ruggiero  Mocenigo,  who,  furious  at 
the  failure  of  his  schemes,  and  preferring  death  to  the  shame  of 
being  carried  to  Venice  as  a  pirate  and  a  traitor,  rushed  upon  the 
Venetians  with  a  fury  which  at  first  carried  all  before  it.  Sup- 
ported by  his  Moors  and  renegades  he  drove  back  the  boarders, 
and  almost  succeeded  in  clearing  the  deck  of  his  vessel. 

He  himself  engaged  hand-to-hand  with  the  commander  of  the 
Venetian  galley,  and  at  the  third  thrust  ran  him  through  the 
throat;  but  the  Venetians,  although  they  had  yielded  to  the 
first  onslaught,  again  poured  over  the  bulwarks  of  the  galley. 
Polani,  burning  to  punish  the  man  who  had  so  repeatedly  tried  to 
injure  him,  accompanied  them,  Francis  keeping  close  beside  him. 

"  Ruggiero  Mocenigo,  traitor  and  villain,  your  time  has 
come ! " 

Ruggiero  started  at  hearing  his  name  thus  proclaimed,  for 
on  board  his  own  ship  he  was  simply  known  as  the  captain ; 
but  in  the  dim  light  he  recognized  Polani,  and  at  once  crossed 
swords  with  him. 


260  "HOW   ABOUT   YOUR  VENGEANCE  NOW?" 

"  Be  not  so  sure,  Polani ;  perhaps  it  is  your  time  that  has 
come." 

The  two  engaged  with  fury.  Polani  was  still  strong  and 
vigorous,  his  opponent  had  the  advantage  of  youth  and  activity. 
But  Polani's  weight  and  strength  told,  and  he  was  forcing  his 
opponent  back  when  his  foot  slipped  on  the  blood-stained  deck. 
He  fell  forward  ;  and  in  another  moment  Ruggiero  would  have 
run  him  through  the  body  had  not  the  weapon  been  knocked 
up  by  Francis,  who,  watching  every  movement  of  the  fight, 
sprang  forward  when  he  saw  the  merchant  slip. 

"  This  time,  Ruggiero,  my  hands  are  free.     How  about  your 


Ruggiero  gave  a  cry  of  astonishment  at  seeing  the  lad  whom 
he  believed  to  be  lying  in  chains  five  hundred  miles  away,  facing 
him.  For  a  moment  he  recoiled,  and  then  with  the  cry, 

"  I  will  take  it  now,"  sprang  forward  ;  but  this  time  he  had 
met  an  opponent  as  active  and  as  capable  as  himself. 

For  a  minute  or  two  they  fought  on  even  terms,  and  then 
Ruggiero  fell  suddenly  backwards,  a  cross-bow  bolt  from  one  of 
the  Venetians  on  the  poop  of  the  vessel  having  struck  him  full 
in  the  forehead. 

Without  their  leader  the  spirit  of  the  pirates  had  fled.  They 
still  fought,  steadily  and  desperately,  but  it  was  only  to  sell 
their  lives  as  dearly  as  possible  ;  and  in  five  minutes  after  the  fall 
of  Ruggiero  the  last  man  was  cut  down,  for  no  quarter  was  given 
to  pirates. 

Just  as  the  combat  concluded  the  sound  of  oars  was  heard, 
and  the  other  two  galleys  came  up  to  the  assistance  of  their 
consort.  They  arrived  too  late  to  take  part  in  the  conflict,  but 
cheered  lustily  when  they  heard  that  the  pirate  captain  and  all 
his  crew  had  been  killed.  Upon  learning  that  the  commander 
of  the  galley  was  killed,  the  captain  next  in  seniority  assumed 
the  command.  In  a  few  minutes  the  bodies  of  the  pirates 


DEATH    OF   THE   PIRATE    RUGG1ERO    MOCENIGO. 


"THANKS  TO  YOU,    FRANCISCO."  261 

were  thrown  overboard,  the  wounded  were  carried  below  to 
have  their  wounds  attended  to,  while  the  bodies  of  those  who 
had  fallen— thirteen  in  number — were  laid  together  on  the  deck, 
for  burial  on  shore. 

"  Thanks  to  you,  Francisco,  that  I  am  not  lying  there  beside 
them,"  the  merchant  said.  "  I  did  not  know  that  you  were  so 
close  at  hand,  and  as  I  slipped  I  felt  that  my  end  had  come." 

"  You  were  getting  the  better  of  him  up  to  that  point," 
Francis  said.  "  I  was  close  at  hand  in  readiness  to  strike  in 
should  I  see  that  my  aid  was  wanted,  but  up  to  the  moment 
you  slipped  I  believed  that  you  would  have  avenged  your 
wrongs  yourself." 

"  It  is  well  that  he  fell  as  he  did.  It  would  have  been  dreadful, 
indeed,  had  he  been  carried  to  Venice  to  bring  shame  and  dis- 
grace upon  a  noble  family.  Thank  God,  his  power  for  mischief 
is  at  an  end  !  I  have  had  no  peace  of  mind  since  the  day  when 
you  first  thwarted  his  attempt  to  carry  off  the  girls  ;  nor  should 
I  have  ever  had  until  I  obtained  sure  tidings  that  he  was  dead. 
The  perseverance  with  which  he  has  followed  his  resolve  to  make 
my  daughter  his  wife  is  almost  beyond  belief.  Had  his  mind 
been  turned  to  other  matters  he  was  capable  of  attaining  great- 
ness, for  no  obstacle  would  have  barred  his  way.  It  almost 
seems  as  if  it  were  a  duel  between  him  and  you  to  the  death 
— his  aim  to  injure  me,  and  yours  to  defend  us ;  and  now  it 
has  ended.  Maria  will  breath  more  freely  when  she  hears  the 
news,  for,  gay  and  light-hearted  as  she  is,  the  dread  of  that  man 
has  weighed  heavily  upon  her." 

The  governor,  who  from  the  poop  of  the  vessel  had  watched 
the  conflict,  now  came  up  and  warmly  congratulated  Francis 
upon  his  bravery. 

"  I  saw  you  rush  forward  just  as  my  friend  Polani  fell  and 
engage  his  assailant.  At  first  I  thought  you  lost,  for  the  villain 
was  counted  one  of  the  best  swordsmen  in  Venice,  and  you  are 


262  THE  RETURN  TO  THE  PORT. 

still  but  a  lad  ;  but  I  saw  you  did  not  give  way  an  inch,  but  held 
your  own  against  him  ;  and  I  believe  you  would  have  slain  him 
unaided,  for  you  were  fighting  with  greater  coolness  than  he 
was ;  still  I  was  relieved  when  I  saw  him  fall,  for  even  then  the 
combat  was  doubtful,  and  his  men,  to  do  them  justice,  fought 
like  demons.  How  comes  it  that  one  so  young  as  you  should  be 
so  skilled  with  your  weapon  ?  " 

"  This  is  not  the  first  time  that  my  young  friend  has  done 
good  service  to  the  state,"  Polani  said,  "  for  it  was  he  who  led 
a  crew  of  one  of  my  ships  to  the  aid  of  Pisani  when  his  galley 
was  boarded  by  the  Genoese,  at  the  battle  of  Antium." 

"  Is  this  he  ?  "  the  governor  said  in  surprise.  "  I  heard,  of 
course,  by  the  account  of  those  who  came  from  Venice  a  month 
since,  how  Pisani  was  aided,  when  hard  pressed,  by  the  crew  of 
one  of  your  ships,  headed  by  a  young  Englishman,  upon  whom 
the  state  had  conferred  the  rights  of  citizenship  as  a  recognition 
of  his  services ;  but  I  did  not  dream  that  the  Englishman  was 
but  a  lad.  What  is  your  age,  young  sir?  " 

"  I  am  just  eighteen,  Francis  replied.  "  Our  people  are  all 
fond  of  strong  exercise,  and  thus  it  was  that  I  became  more 
skilled  perhaps  than  many  of  my  age  in  the  use  of  arms." 

At  nine  o'clock  the  squadron  arrived  in  the  port,  bringing 
with  them  the  captured  galley.  As  soon  as  they  were  seen 
approaching,  the  church  bells  rang,  flags  were  hung  out  from 
the  houses,  and  the  whole  population  assembled  at  the  quay  to 
welcome  the  victors  and  to  hear  the  news. 

"  Do  you  go  on  at  once  directly  we  land,  Francisco,  and  set 
the  girls'  minds  at  ease.  I  must  come  on  with  the  governor, 
and  he  is  sure  to  be  detained  and  will  have  much  to  say  before 
he  can  make  his  way  through  the  crowd." 

Francis  was,  on  his  arrival  at  the  governor's,  recognized  by 
the  domestics,  and  at  once  shown  into  the  room  where  the  girls 
were  awaiting  him.  The  fact  that  the  pirate  galley  had  been 


"ST.   MARK    BE   PRAISED!"  263 

captured  was  already  known  to  them,  the  news  having  been 
brought  some  hours  before  by  a  horseman  from  the  other  side 
of  the  island. 

"  Where  is  our  father  ?  "  Maria  exclaimed  as  Francis  entered 
alone. 

"  He  is  well  and  sent  me  on  to  relieve  your  minds." 

"  St.  Mark  be  praised  !  "  Maria  said.  "  We  have  been  sorely 
anxious  about  you  both.  A  messenger  who  brought  the  news 
said  that  it  could  be  seen  from  the  shore  that  there  was  a 
desperate  fight  on  board  the  pirate  ship,  which  was  attacked  by 
one  galley  only.  We  felt  sure  that  it  would  be  the  ship  that  the 
governor  was  in,  and  we  knew  you  were  with  him ;  and  our 
father  was  so  enraged  at  what  had  happened  that  we  felt  sure  he 
would  take  part  in  the  fight." 

"  He  did  so,"  Francis  said,  "  and  himself  engaged  hand-to-hand 
with  Mocenigo,  and  would  probably  have  killed  him  had  not  his 
foot  slipped  on  the  deck.  I  was,  of  course,  by  his  side,  and 
occupied  the  villain  until  a  cross-bolt  pierced  his  brain.  So 
there  is  an  end  to  all  your  trouble  with  him." 

"  Is  he  really  dead  ?  "  Maria  said.  "  Oh,  Francisco,  how  thank- 
ful I  am  !  he  seemed  so  determined  that  I  began  to  think  he  was 
sure  some  day  to  succeed  in  carrying  me  off.  Not  that  I  would 
ever  have  become  his  wife,  for  I  had  vowed  to  kill  myself  before 
that  came  about.  I  should  have  thought  he  might  have  known 
that  he  could  never  have  forced  me  to  be  his  wife." 

"  I  told  him  the  same  thing,"  Francis  said,  "  and  he  replied 
that  he  was  not  afraid  of  that,  for  that  he  should  have  your 
sister  in  his  power  also,  and  that  he  should  warn  you  that  if  you 
laid  hands  on  yourself  he  should  make  her  his  wife  instead  of 
you." 

The  girls  both  gave  an  exclamation  of  horror. 

"  I  never  thought  of  that,"  Maria  said  ;  "  but  he  would,  indeed, 
have  disarmed  me  with  such  a  threat.  It  would  have  been 


264       "YOU  HAVE  HEARD  ALL  THE  NEWS,   I   SUPPOSE?" 

horrible  for  me  to  have  been  the  wife  of  such  a  man  ;  but  I  think 
I  could  have  borne  it  rather  than  have  consigned  Giulia  to  such 
a  fate.  Oh,  here  is  father ! " 

"  I  have  got  away  sooner  than  I  expected,"  Polani  said,  as  he 
entered.  "  The  governor  was  good  enough  to  beg  me  to  come 
on  at  once  to  you.  You  have  heard  all  the  news,  I  suppose,  and 
know  that  our  enemy  will  persecute  you  no  more  ?  " 

"  We  have  heard,  papa,  and  also  that  you  yourself  fought  with 
him,  which  was  very  wrong  and  very  rash  of  you." 

"  And  did  he  tell  you  that  had  it  not  been  for  him  I  should 
not  be  here  alive  now,  girls  ?  " 

"No,  father;  he  said  that  when  you  slipped  he  occupied 
Ruggiero's  attention  until  the  cross-bolt  struck  him." 

"  That  is  what  he  did,  my  dear ;  but  had  he  not  occupied  his 
attention  I  should  have  been  a  dead  man.  The  thrust  was 
aimed  at  me  as  I  fell,  and  would  have  pierced  me  had  he  not 
sprung  forward  and  turned  it  aside,  and  then  engaged  in  single 
combat  with  Mocenigo,  who,  with  all  his  faults,  was  brave  and 
a  skilful  swordsman ;  and  yet,  as  the  governor  himself  said, 
probably  Francisco  would  have  slain  him,  even  had  not  the 
combat  ended  as  it  did.  And  now  we  must  have  his  story  in 
full.  I  have  not  heard  much  about  it  yet,  and  you  have  heard 
nothing :  and  I  want  to  know  how  he  managed  to  get  out  of  the 
hands  of  that  man  when  he  had  once  fallen  into  them." 

"  That  is  what  we  want  to  know,  too,  father.  We  know  what 
a  sharp  watch  was  kept  upon  us,  and  I  am  sure  they  must  have 
been  much  more  severe  with  him." 

"They  were  certainly  more  severe,"  Francis  said,  smiling, 
"  for  my  right  hand  was  chained  to  my  left  ankle  and  the  left 
hand  to  the  right  ankle — not  tightly,  you  know,  but  the  chain 
was  so  short  that  I  could  not  stand  upright ;  but,  on  the  other 
hand,  I  do  not  think  my  guards  were  as  vigilant  as  yours. 
However,  I  will  tell  you  the  whole  story." 


"WHAT  ARE  WE  TO   DO   FOR  HIM?"  265 

The  girls  listened  with  rapt  attention  to  the  story  of  the  capture, 
the  escape,  and  of  his  hiding  in  the  hold  of  the  pirate  in  order  to 
be  able  to  give  them  a  warning  in  time. 

"  Your  escape  was  fortunate,  indeed,"  the  merchant  said,  when 
he  had  finished.  "  Fortunate  both  for  you  and  for  us,  for  I  have 
no  doubt  that  Mocenigo  had  intended  to  put  you  to  a  lingering 
death  on  his  return.  As  for  the  girls,  nothing  could  have  saved 
them  from  the  fate  he  designed  for  them  save  the  method  which 
you  took  of  arriving  here  before  him." 

"  What  are  we  to  do  for  him,  father?  "  Maria  exclaimed.  "  We 
are  not  tired  of  thanking  him,  but  he  hates  being  thanked.  If  he 
would  only  get  into  some  terrible  scrape  Giulia  and  I  would  set 
out  to  rescue  him  at  once  ;  but  you  see  he  gets  out  of  his  scrapes 
before  we  hear  of  them.  It  is  quite  disheartening  not  to  be  able 
to  do  anything." 

Francis  laughed  merrily. 

"  It  is  terrible,  is  it  not,  signora  ?  But  if  I  manage  to  get 
into  any  scrape,  and  have  time  to  summon  you  to  my  assist- 
ance, be  sure  I  will  do  so.  But,  you  see,  one  cannot  get  into 
a  scrape  when  one  chooses,  and  I  must  be  content  while  I  am 
away  in  knowing  that  I  have  the  good  wishes  of  you  and  your 
sister." 

"  Do  not  trouble  yourself,  Maria,"  her  father  said ;  "  some 
day  an  opportunity  may  come  for  our  paying  our  debts,  and 
in  the  meantime  Francis  is  content  that  we  should  be  his 
debtors." 

"  And  now,  what  are  you  going  to  do,  papa  ?  " 

"  I  shall  sail  with  you  for  Venice  to-morrow.  The  governor 
will  be  sending  one  of  the  galleys  with  the  news  of  the  capture 
of  the  pirate,  and  doubtless  he  will  give  us  all  a  passage  in 
her.  I  shall  order  steps  to  be  taken  at  once  for  rebuilding 
the  villa,  and  will  get  it  completed  by  the  spring,  before  which 
time  you  will  be  off  my  hands,  young  lady  ;  and  I  shall  not  be 


266  "  IT  HAS  NOT   BEEN   MY  FAULT." 

altogether  sorry,  for  you  have  been  a  very  troublesome  child 
lately." 

"  It  has  not  been  my  fault,"  Maria  pouted. 

"  Not  at  all,  my  dear.  It  has  been  your  misfortune,  and  I  am 
not  blaming  you  at  all." 

"  But  the  trouble  is  now  over,  father ! " 

"  So  much  the  better  for  Rufino,"  the  merchant  said.  "It  will 
be  good  news  to  him  that  you  are  freed  from  the  persecution 
of  Ruggiero.  And  now,  I  must  leave  you,  for  I  have  arranged 
to  ride  over  with  the  governor  to  the  other  side  of  the  island. 
He  has  to  investigate  the  damage  which  took  place  last  evening. 
I  hear  that  upwards  of  a  score  of  villas  were  sacked  and  de- 
stroyed, and  that  many  persons  were  killed,  and  while  he  is 
doing  that  I  shall  see  what  has  to  be  done  at  our  place.  I  don't 
know  whether  the  walls  are  standing  or  whether  it  will  have  to 
be  entirely  rebuilt,  and  I  must  arrange  with  some  builder  to  go 
over  from  here  with  me  and  take  my  instructions  as  to  what 
must  be  done." 

On  the  following  day  the  party  set  sail  for  Venice,  where  they 
arrived  without  adventure.  Preparations  were  at  once  begun 
for  the  marriage  of  Maria  with  Rufino  Giustiniani,  and  six 
weeks  later  the  wedding  ceremony  took  place.  Francis  did  not 
go  to  sea  until  this  was  over,  for  when  he  spoke  of  afresh  voyage 
a  short  time  after  their  return  Maria  declared  that  she  would 
not  be  married  unless  he  remained  to  be  present. 

"  You  have  got  me  out  of  all  my  scrapes,  hitherto,  Francisco, 
and  you  must  see  me  safely  through  this." 

As  Signor  Polani  also  declared  that  it  was  not  to  be  thought 
of  that  Francis  should  leave  until  after  the  marriage,  he  was 
obliged  to  remain  for  it.  He  was  glad,  however,  when  it 
was  over,  for  he  found  the  time  on  shore  more  tedious  than 
usual.  The  girls  were  taken  up  with  the  preparations  for  the 
ceremony,  and  visitors  were  constantly  coming  and  going,  and 


A  WELCOME   PROPOSAL.  267 

the  house  was  not  like  itself.  But  even  when  the  marriage 
was  over  he  was  forced  to  remain  some  time  longer  in  Venice. 
The  Genoese  fleets  were  keeping  the  sea,  and  Pisani  had  not, 
since  the  battle  of  Antium,  succeeded  in  coming  up  with  them  ; 
the  consequence  was  that  commerce  was  at  a  stand-still,  for  the 
risk  of  capture  was  so  great  that  the  merchants  ceased  to  send 
their  ships  to  sea. 

"  The  profit  would  not  repay  us  for  the  risk,  Francisco,"  the 
merchant  said  one  day  when  they  were  talking  over  it.  "  If 
only  one  cargo  in  ten  fell  into  their  hands  the  profit  off  the 
other  nine  would  be  swept  away ;  but  as  I  see  that  you  are 
longing  to  be  afloat  again,  you  can,  if  you  like,  join  one  of  the 
state  galleys  which  start  next  week  to  reinforce  Pisani's  fleet. 
The  last  time  Pisani  wrote  to  me  he  said  how  glad  he  should 
be  to  have  you  with  him  ;  and  after  your  service  at  Antium  I 
have  no  doubt  whatever  that  I  could  procure  for  you  a  post  as 
second  in  command  in  one  of  the  ships.  What  do  you  say  ?  " 

"  I  should  certainly  like  it,  signor,  greatly ;  but,  as  you  said 
before,  it  would  be  a  mere  waste  of  time  for  me  to  take  service 
with  the  state  when  I  am  determined  upon  the  vocation  of  a 
merchant." 

"  I  did  say  that,  Francis,  and  meant  it  at  the  time ;  but  at 
present  trade  is,  as  you  see,  at  a  stand-still,  so  you  would  not 
be  losing  time,  and,  in  the  next  place,  it  is  always  an  advantage 
even  to  a  trader  to  stand  well  with  the  state.  Here  in  Venice 
all  the  great  merchants  are  of  noble  family,  and  trade  is  no  bar 
to  occupying  the  highest  offices  of  the  state.  Many  of  our 
doges  have  been  merchants  ;  while  merchants  are  often  soldiers, 
diplomatists,  or  governors,  as  the  state  requires  their  services. 
You  have  already,  you  see,  obtained  considerable  benefit  by  the 
action  at  Antium.  I  do  not  say  that  you  would  derive  any 
direct  benefit  even  were  you  to  distinguish  yourself  again  as 
highly  as  on  that  occasion,  still  it  is  always  well  to  gain  the 


268  "I   AM  QUITE  JEALOUS." 

consideration  of  your  fellows  and  to  be  popular  with  the  people. 
Therefore  if  you  would  like  to  take  service  with  the  state 
until  this  affair  is  decided  with  Genoa  and  the  seas  are  again 
open  to  our  ships,  I  think  it  will  be  advantageous  to  you  rather 
than  not." 

"  Then,  with  your  permission  I  will  certainly  do  so,  signer," 
Francis  said.  "  Of  course  I  should  prefer  to  go  as  an  officer  on 
board  one  of  the  ships ;  but  if  not,  I  will  go  as  a  volun- 
teer." 

"  You  need  not  fear  about  that,  Francis.  With  my  influence 
and  that  of  the  Giustiniani,  and  the  repute  you  have  gained  for 
yourself,  you  may  be  sure  of  an  appointment.  Rufino  would 
have  commanded  one  of  the  ships  had  it  not  been  for  his  mar- 
riage." 

Rufino  Giustiniani  had  indeed  been  most  warm  in  his  ex- 
pressions of  gratitude  to  Francis,  to  whom  the  whole  family 
had  shown  the  greatest  attention,  giving  him  many  presents  as 
a  proof  of  their  good-will  and  gratitude. 

"  I  am  quite  jealous  of  your  English  friend,"  Rufino  had  said 
one  day  to  Maria.  "  I  do  believe,  Maria,  that  you  care  for  him 
more  than  you  do  for  me ;  it  is  lucky  for  me  that  he  is  not  two 
or  three  years  older." 

Maria  laughed. 

"  I  do  care  for  him  dearly ;  and  if  he  had  been,  as  you  say, 
older  and  had  fallen  in  love  with  me,  I  can't  say  how  it  would 
have  been.  You  must  acknowledge  it  would  be  very  hard  to 
say  no  to  a  man  who  keeps  on  saving  you  from  frightful  peril ; 
but  then,  you  see,  a  girl  can't  fall  in  love  with  a  man  who  does 
not  fall  in  love  with  her.  Francisco  is  so  different  from  us 
Venetians  ;  he  always  says  just  what  he  thinks,  and  never  pays 
anyone  even  the  least  bit  of  a  compliment.  How  can  you  fall 
in  love  with  a  man  like  that  ?  Of  course  you  can  love  him  like 
a  brother — and  I  do  love  Francisco  as  if  he  were  my  brother — 


"I  SHALL  HAVE  TO   PUT    UP  WITH   IT."  269 

but  I  don't  think  we  should  have  got  further  than  that  if  he  had 
been  ever  so  old." 

"  And  does  Francis  never  pay  you  compliments,  Giulia?  " 

"  Never !  "  Giulia  said  decidedly.  "  It  would  be  hateful  of 
him  if  he  did." 

"  But  Maria  doesn't  object  to  compliments,  Giulia.  She 
looks  for  them  as  if  they  were  her  daily  bread;  don't  you, 
Maria?  You  will  have  to  learn  to  put  up  with  them  soon, 
Giulia,  for  you  will  be  out  in  society  now,  and  the  young  men 
will  crowd  round  your  chair  just  as  they  have  done  round  that 
of  this  little  flirt  your  sister." 

"  I  shall  have  to  put  up  with  it,  I  suppose,"  Giulia  said 
quietly,  "  just  as  one  puts  up  with  other  annoyances  ;  but  I  should 
certainly  never  get  to  care  for  anyone  who  thinks  so  little  of 
me  as  to  believe  that  I  could  be  pleased  by  being  addressed  in 
such  terms." 

"  From  which  I  gather,"  Giustiniani  said  smiling,  "  that  this 
English  lad's  bluntness  of  speech  pleases  you  more  than  it  does 
Maria  ?  " 

"  It  pleases  Maria  too,"  Giulia  said,  "though  she  may  choose 
to  say  that  it  doesn't.  And  I  don't  think  it  quite  right  to 
discuss  him  at  all  when  we  all  owe  him  as  much  as  we  do." 

Giustiniani  glanced  at  Maria  and  gave  a  little  significant 
nod. 

"  I  do  not  think  Giulia  regards  Francisco  in  quite  the  bro- 
therly way  that  you  do,  Maria,"  he  whispered  presently  to  her. 

"  Perhaps  not,"  Maria  answered.  "  You  see  she  had  not  fallen 
in  love  with  you  before  she  met  him.  But  I  do  not  know; 
Giulia  seldom  speaks  of  him  when  we  are  alone,  and  if  she  did, 
you  don't  suppose  I  should  tell  you  my  sister's  secrets,  sir  ?  " 

The  day  after  his  conversation  with  Francis,  Polani  handed 
him  his  nomination  as  second  in  command  of  the  Pluto,  which 
he  had  obtained  that  morning  from  the  seignory. 


270  A  SEARCH    FOR   THE  CAPTIVES. 

"  You  will  be  glad  to  hear  that  it  is  in  this  ship  that  Matteo 
also  sails,"  for  Matteo  had  come  home  for  his  brother's  wedding. 

"  I  am  very  glad  of  that,"  Francis  said.  "  I  wish  that  poor 
Giuseppi  was  also  here  to  go  with  me.  I  shall  miss  him  terri- 
bly ;  he  was  a  most  faithful  and  devoted  follower." 

"  I  have  already  sent  orders  to  my  agent  in  Tunis  to  spare 
no  pains  in  discovering  to  whom  the  crew  of  the  Naxos  were 
sold.  It  is  unfortunate  that  so  many  other  captives  were  sold 
at  the  same  time,  as  it  will  make  it  so  much  more  difficult  to 
trace  our  men.  Those  purchasing  are  not  likely  to  know  more 
than  their  first  names,  and  may  not  even  take  the  trouble  to 
find  out  those,  but  may  give  them  the  first  appellation  that 
comes  to  hand  ;  therefore  he  has  to  find  out  who  are  now  the 
masters  of  the  whole  of  the  captives  sold  at  the  same  time, 
and  then  to  pursue  his  investigations  until  he  discovers  the 
identity  of  the  men  he  is  looking  for.  Once  he  has  found  this 
I  will  promise  you  there  will  be  no  delay.  I  have  ordered  him 
to  make  the  best  bargain  in  each  case  he  can,  but  that  at  any- 
rate  he  is  to  buy  every  one  of  them,  whatever  it  may  cost.  I 
have  sent  him  the  personal  descriptions  of  each  man  of  the 
boat's  crew,  as  given  to  me  by  their  friends  and  relatives  here 
as  this  will  be  an  assistance  in  his  search.  If,  for  instance,  he 
hears  of  a  Christian  slave  named  Giuseppi  living  with  a  master 
some  hundreds  of  miles  in  the  interior,  the  fact  that  this  man 
is  middle-aged  will  show  at  once  that  he  was  not  the  Giuseppi, 
age  20,  of  whom  he  is  in  search.  I  have  particularly  impressed 
upon  him  in  my  letter  that  we  were  especially  anxious  for  the 
rescue  of  the  captain  and  the  young  man  Giuseppi,  so  I  hope 
that  by  the  time  you  return  from  the  voyage  I  may  have 
received  some  news  of  them." 

Matteo  was  greatly  pleased  when  he  heard  that  he  was  going 
to  sail  under  Francis. 

"  I  would  rather  that  we  had  both  been  volunteers,"  Francis 


NEW   SHIPMATES.  Y]\ 

said ;  "  it  seems  absurd  my  being  appointed  second  officer, 
while  you  as  yet  have  no  official  position." 

"  I  am  not  in  the  least  bit  in  the  world  jealous,  Francisco. 
With  the  exception  of  taking  part  in  the  fight  at  Antium,  I 
have  had  no  experience  whatever,  while  you  have  been  going 
through  all  sorts  of  adventures  for  the  last  two  years  and 
always  have  come  out  of  them  marvellously  well." 

An  hour  after  Matteo  left  him  a  retainer  of  the  family  brought 
Francis  a  letter  from  Signor  Giustiniani,  inviting  him  to  come 
to  his  house  that  evening,  as  many  of  Matteo's  comrades  on 
board  the  Pluto  would  be  present. 

On  Francis  going  to  the  palace  he  found  assembled  not  only 
the  young  men  who  would  be  Matteo's  comrades  as  volunteers, 
but  also  the  captain  and  other  officers  of  the  ship,  and  to  them 
Signor  Giustiniani  personally  presented  Francis,  while  Rufino 
and  Matteo  did  all  they  could  to  ensure  the  heartiest  welcome 
for  him  by  telling  everyone  how  greatly  they  were  indebted 
to  him,  and  how  gallantly  he  had  behaved  on  several  occasions. 
Many  of  the  young  men  he  already  knew  as  Matteo's  friends, 
and  by  them  he  was  received  with  the  greatest  cordiality ;  but 
his  reception  by  the  captain,  and  one  or  two  of  the  other  officers, 
was  much  more  cool.  The  captain,  whose  name  was  Carlo 
Bottini,  was  a  distant  connection  of  the  Mocenigo  family,  and 
was  therefore  already  prejudiced  against  Francis.  The  coolness 
of  the  other  officers  was  due  to  the  fact  that  Francis,  a  foreigner 
and  several  years  junior  to  themselves,  had  been  placed  in 
command  over  their  heads. 


CHAPTER   XV. 


THE  BATTLE  OF  POLA. 

| HE  squadron,  consisting  of  four  galleys,  sailed  for 
Cyprus,  where  Pisani  had  just  endeavoured  with- 
out success  to  expel  the  Genoese  from  Famagosta. 
It  was  towards  the  end  of  August  that  they 
effected  a  junction  with  his  fleet.  Pisani  received  Francis 
with  great  warmth,  and  in  the  presence  of  many  officers 
remarked  that  he  was  glad  to  see  that  the  republic  was  at  last 
appointing  men  for  their  merits,  and  not,  as  heretofore,  allow- 
ing family  connection  and  influence  to  be  the  chief  passport  to 
their  favour. 

For  two  months  the  fleet  sailed  among  the  islands  of  the 
Levant  and  along  the  shores  of  Greece,  Istria,  and  Dalmatia, 
hoping  to  find  the  Genoese  fleet,  but  altogether  without  success. 
In  November,  when  they  were  on  the  coast  of  Istria,  winter 
set  in  with  extraordinary  severity,  and  the  frost  was  intense. 
Pisani  wrote  to  his  government  asking  permission  to  bring  the 
fleet  into  Venice  until  the  spring.  The  seignory,  however, 
refused  his  request,  for  they  feared  that  were  it  known  that 
their  fleet  had  come  into  port  for  the  winter  the  Genoese  would 
take  advantage  of  its  absence  to  seize  upon  some  of  the  islands 
belonging  to  Venice,  and  to  induce  the  inhabitants  of  the  cities 
of  Istria  and  Dalmatia,  always  ready  for  revolt,  to  declare  against 
her. 


A  TERRIBLE  WINTER.  273 

The  first  indications  of  the  winter  were  more  than  verified. 
The  cold  was  altogether  extraordinary  ;  and  out  of  the  nineteen 
galleys  of  Pisani  only  six  were  fit  to  take  the  sea  with  their  full 
complement  of  men  when  the  spring  of  1379  began.  Many  of 
the  vessels  had  been  disabled  by  storms ;  numbers  of  the  men 
had  died,  more  had  been  sent  home  invalided,  and  it  was  only 
by  transferring  the  men  from  the  other  vessels  to  the  six  in  the 
best  condition  that  the  crews  of  the  latter  were  made  up  to  their 
full  strength. 

As  soon  as  the  terrible  frost  broke,  Pisani  received  a  rein- 
forcement of  twelve  ships  from  Venice,  these  being,  for  the 
most  part,  built  and  equipped  at  the  cost  of  his  personal  friends, 
Polani  having  contributed  two  of  the  number.  With  the 
eighteen  sail  Pisani  put  to  sea  to  prosecute  a  fresh  search  for 
the  Genoese  admiral,  Doria,  and  his  fleet.  The  Pluto  was  one 
of  the  six  vessels  which  remained  in  good  condition  at  the 
end  of  the  winter,  thanks  in  no  small  degree  to  the  energy 
and  care  which  Francis  had  bestowed  in  looking  after  the 
welfare  of  the  crew.  In  the  most  bitter  weather  he  had 
himself  landed  with  the  boats  to  see  that  firewood  was  cut  and 
brought  off  in  abundance,  not  only  for  the  officers'  cabins,  but 
to  warm  that  portion  of  the  ship  inhabited  by  the  men. 
Knowing  that  Polani  would  not  grudge  any  sum  which  might 
be  required,  he  obtained  from  his  agents  ample  supplies  of 
warm  clothing  and  bedding  for  the  men,  occupying  himself  in- 
cessantly for  their  welfare,  while  the  captain  and  other  officers 
passed  their  time  in  their  warm  and  comfortable  cabins. 

Francis  induced  Matteo  and  several  of  his  comrades  to  brave 
the  weather  as  he  did,  and  to  exert  themselves  for  the  benefit  of 
the  men ;  and  the  consequence  was,  that  while  but  few  of  the 
other  ships  retained  enough  men  to  raise  their  sails  in  case  of 
emergency,  the  strength  of  the  crew  of  the  Pluto  was  scarcely 
impaired  at  the  termination  of  the  winter.  The  admiral,  &rj 


374  PRAISE  MISPLACED. 

paying  a  visit  of  inspection  to  the  ship,  was  greatly  struck  with 
the  contrast  which  the  appearance  of  the  crew  afforded  to  that 
of  the  other  galleys,  and  warmly  complimented  the  commander 
on  the  condition  of  his  man. 

The  captain  received  the  praise  as  if  it  was  entirely  due  to 
himself,  and  said  not  a  single  word  of  the  share  which  Francis 
had  had  in  bringing  it  about.  Matteo  was  most  indignant  at 
this  injustice  towards  his  friend,  and  managed  that  through  a 
relative  serving  in  the  admiral's  own  ship,  a  true  report  of 
the  case  should  come  to  Pisani's  ears.  Francis  was  in  no  way 
troubled  at  the  captain's  appropriation  of  the  praise  due  to 
himself.  There  had  not,  from  the  time  he  sailed,  been  any 
cordiality  between  Francis  and  the  other  officers.  These  had 
been  selected  for  the  position  solely  from  family  influence,  and 
none  of  them  were  acquainted  with  the  working  of  a  ship. 

In  those  days,  not  only  in  Venice  but  in  other  countries, 
naval  battles  were  fought  by  soldiers  rather  than  sailors. 
Nobles  and  knights,  with  their  retainers,  embarked  on  board 
a  ship  for  the  purpose  of  fighting,  and  of  fighting  only,  the 
management  of  the  vessel  being  carried  on  entirely  by  sailors 
under  their  own  officers.  Thus,  neither  the  commander  of  the 
force  on  board  the  galley,  nor  any  of  his  officers,  with  the 
exception  of  Francis,  knew  anything  whatever  about  the 
management  of  the  ship,  nor  were  capable  of  giving  orders  to 
the  crew.  Among  the  latter  were  some  who  had  sailed  with 
Francis  in  his  first  two  voyages,  and  these  gave  so  excellent  a 
report  of  him  to  the  rest  that  they  were  from  the  first  ready  to 
obey  his  orders  as  promptly  as  those  of  their  own  sub-officer. 

Francis  concerned  himself  but  little  with  the  ill-will  that 
was  shown  him  by  the  officers.  He  knew  that  it  arose  from 
jealousy,  not  only  of  the  promotion  he,  a  foreigner  and  a 
junior  in  years,  had  received  over  them,  but  of  the  fact  that 
he  had  already  received  the  thanks  of  the  republic  for  the 


A  COUNCIL  OF  WAR.  27$ 

services  he  had  rendered,  and  stood  high  in  the  favour  of  the 
admiral,  who  never  lost  an  opportunity  of  showing  the  interest 
he  had  in  him.  Had  the  hostility  shown  itself  in  any  offensive 
degree  Francis  would  at  once  have  resented  it ;  but  Matteo  and 
some  of  those  on  board  who  had  been  his  comrades  in  the 
fencing-rooms  had  given  such  reports  of  his  powers  with  his 
weapons  that  even  those  most  opposed  to  him  thought  it  pru- 
dent to  observe  a  demeanor  of  outward  politeness  towards  him. 

For  three  months  the  search  for  the  Genoese  fleet  was  in- 
effectual. A  trip  had  been  made  along  the  coast  of  Apulia,  and 
the  fleet  had  returned  to  Pola  with  a  large  convoy  of  merchant 
ships  loaded  with  grain,  when  on  the  yth  of  May  Doria  appeared 
off  the  port  with  twenty-five  sail. 

But  Pisani  was  now  by  no  means  anxious  to  fight.  Zeno 
was  away  with  a  portion  of  the  fleet,  and  although  he  had 
received  reinforcements  he  numbered  but  twenty-one  vessels, 
and  a  number  of  his  men  were  laid  up  with  sickness.  The 
admiral,  however,  was  not  free  to  follow  out  the  dictates  of 
his  own  opinions.  The  Venetians  had  a  mischievous  habit, 
which  was  afterwards  adopted  by  the  French  republic,  of 
fettering  their  commanders  by  sea  and  land  by  appointing 
civilian  commissioners,  or,  as  they  were  termed  in  Venice, 
proveditors,  who  had  power  to  overrule  the  nominal  com- 
mander. When,  therefore,  Pisani  assembled  a  council  of  war, 
and  informed  them  of  his  reasons  for  wishing  to  remain  on 
the  defensive  until  the  return  of  Zeno,  he  was  overruled  by 
the  proveditors,  who  not  only  announced  themselves  unani- 
mously in  favour  of  battle,  but  sneered  at  Pisani's  prudence  as 
being  the  result  of  cowardice.  Pisani  in  his  indignation  drew 
his  sword  and  would  have  attacked  the  proveditors  on  the  spot 
had  he  not  been  restrained  by  his  captains. 

However,  the  counci^  decided  upon  instant  battle,  and  Pisani 
was  forced,  by  the  rules  of  the  service,  at  once  to  carry  their 


276  A   HAND-TO-HAND    CONFLICT. 

decision  into  effect.  Ascending  the  poop  of  his  galley,  he  ad- 
dressed in  a  loud  voice  the  crews  of  the  ships  gathered  around 
him. 

"  Remember,  my  brethren,  that  those  who  will  now  face 
you  are  the  same  whom  you  vanquished  with  so  much  glory 
on  the  Roman  shore.  Do  not  let  the  name  of  Luciano  Doria 
terrify  you  ;  it  is  not  the  names  of  commanders  that  will  decide 
the  conflict,  but  Venetian  hearts  and  Venetian  hands.  Let  him 
that  loves  St.  Mark  follow  me." 

The  men  received  the  address  with  a  shout,  and  as  soon  as 
the  commanders  had  regained  their  galleys  the  fleet  moved  out 
to  attack  the  enemy.  The  fight  was  a  furious  one,  each  vessel 
singling  out  an  opponent  and  engaging  her  hand  to  hand.  Carlo 
Bottini  was  killed  early  in  the  fight,  and  Francis  succeeded  to 
the  command.  His  galley  had  grappled  with  one  of  the  largest 
of  the  Genoese  vessels,  and  a  desperate  conflict  went  on.  Some- 
times the  Venetians  gained  a  footing  on  the  deck  of  the 
Genoese,  sometimes  they  were  driven  back  and  the  Genoese  in 
turn  poured  on  board,  but  no  decisive  advantage  was  gained  on 
either  side  after  an  hour's  fighting. 

The  Genoese  crew  was  numerically  much  stronger  than  that 
of  the  Pluto,  and  although  Francis  with  Matteo  and  his  com- 
rades headed  their  men  and  cheered  them  on,  they  could  make  no 
impression  on  the  ranks  of  the  enemy.  Suddenly  the  Genoese 
threw  off  the  grapnels  that  attached  the  two  ships,  and  hoisting 
their  sails,  sheered  off.  Francis  looked  round  to  see  the  cause 
of  this  sudden  manoeuvre,  and  perceived  for  the  first  time  that 
the  Genoese  vessels  were  all  in  flight,  with  the  Venetians  press- 
ing closely  upon  them. 

Sails  were  at  once  hoisted,  and  the  Pluto  joined  in  the  chase. 
But  the  flight  was  a  feigned  one,  and  it  was  only  designed  to 
throw  the  Venetian  rank  into  confusion.  After  sailing  for 
two  miles  the  Genoese  suddenly  turned  and  fell  upon  their 


DEFEAT.  277 

pursuers  as  they  came  up  in  straggling  order.  The  result  was 
decisive.  Many  of  the  Venetian  ships  were  captured  before  the 
rest  came  up  to  take  part  in  the  battle ;  others  were  hemmed 
in  by  numerous  foes.  Pisani,  after  fighting  until  he  saw  that 
all  was  lost,  made  the  signal  for  the  ships  to  withdraw  from  the 
conflict,  and  he  himself,  with  six  galleys,  succeeded  in  fighting 
his  way  through  the  enemy's  fleet,  and  gained  a  refuge  in  the 
port  of  Parenzo. 

All  the  rest  were  taken.  From  seven  to  eight  hundred  Vene- 
tians perished  in  the  fight,  two  thousand  four  hundred 
were  taken  prisoners,  twelve  commanders  were  killed,  and 
five  captured.  The  Genoese  losses  were  also  severe,  and  Doria 
himself  was  among  the  slain,  having  been  killed  by  a  spear 
thrust  by  Donate  Zeno,  commander  of  one  of  the  galleys,  almost 
at  the  moment  of  victory. 

The  Pluto  had  defended  herself  for  a  long  time  against  the 
attacks  of  three  of  the  Geneese  galleys,  and  had  repeatedly 
endeavoured  to  force  her  way  out  of  the  throng,  but  the 
Genoese  held  her  fast  with  their  grapnels,  and  at  last  the  greater 
part  of  her  crew  were  driven  down  below,  and  Francis,  seeing 
the  uselessness  of  further  resistance,  ordered  the  little  group, 
who  were  now  completely  pent  in  by  the  Genoese,  to  lower 
their  weapons.  All  were  more  or  less  severely  wounded,  and 
were  bleeding  from  sword  cuts  and  thrusts. 

"  This  is  an  evil  day  for  Venice,"  Matteo  said,  as,  having 
been  deprived  of  their  weapons,  the  prisoners  were  thrust  below. 
"  I  heard  the  Genoese  say  that  only  six  of  our  galleys  have 
escaped,  all  the  rest  have  been  taken.  We  were  the  last  ship  to 
surrender,  that's  a  comfort  anyhow." 

"  Now,  Matteo,  before  you  do  anything  else  let  me  bind  up 
your  wounds  ;  you  are  bleeding  in  two  or  three  places." 

"  And  you  are  bleeding  from  something  like  a  dozen,  Fran- 
cisco, so  you  had  better  let  me  play  the  doctor  first." 


278  PRISONERS. 

"  The  captain  is  always  served  last,  so  do  as  you  are  told,  and 
strip  off  your  doublet.  Now,  gentlemen,"  he  said,  turning  to 
the  other  officers,  "  let  each  of  us  do  what  we  can  to  dress  the 
wounds  of  others;  we  can  expect  no  care  from  the  Genoese 
leeches,  who  will  have  their  hands  full  for  a  long  time  to  come 
with  their  own  men.  There  are  some  among  us  who  will 
soon  bleed  to  death  unless  their  wounds  are  staunched.  Let 
us,  therefore,  take  the  most  serious  cases  first,  and  so  on  in 
rotation  until  all  have  been  attended  to." 

It  was  fortunate  for  them  that  in  the  hold  in  which  they 
were  confined  there  were  some  casks  of  water ;  for,  for  hours 
the  Genoese  paid  no  attention  whatever  to  their  prisoners,  and 
the  wounded  were  beginning  to  suffer  agonies  of  thirst  when 
the  barrels  were  fortunately  discovered.  The  head  of  one 
was  knocked  in,  and  some  shallow  tubs  used  for  serving  the 
water  to  the  crew  filled,  and  the  men  knelt  down  and  drank 
by  turns  from  these.  Many  were  too  enfeebled  by  their  wounds 
to  rise,  and  their  thirst  was  assuaged  by  dipping  articles  of 
clothing  into  the  water,  and  letting  the  fluid  from  these  run 
into  their  mouths. 

It  was  not  until  next  morning  that  the  prisoners  were  ordered 
to  come  on  deck.  Many  had  died  during  the  night,  others 
were  too  weak  to  obey  the  summons.  The  names  of  the  rest 
were  taken,  and  not  a  little  surprise  was  expressed  by  the 
Genoese  officers  at  the  extreme  youth  of  the  officer  in  command 
of  the  Pluto. 

"  I  was  only  the  second  in  command,"  Francis  said  in  answer 
to  their  questions.  "  Carlo  Bottini  was  in  command  of  the 
ship,  but  he  was  killed  at  the  commencement  of  the  fight." 

"  But  how  is  it  that  one  so  young  came  to  be  second  ?  You 
must  belong  to  some  great  family  to  have  been  ^hus  pushed 
forward  above  men  so  much  your  senior." 

"  It  was  a  wise  choice  nevertheless."  t>8  commander  of  one 


"YOU   ARE  NOT  A    MERCENARY?"  379 

of  the  galleys  which  had  been  engaged  with  the  Pluto  said,  "  for 
it  is  but  justice  to  own  that  no  ship  was  better  handled  or 
fought  in  the  Venetian  fleet.  They  were  engaged  with  us  first, 
and  for  over  an  hour  they  fought  us  on  fair  terms,  yielding  no 
foot  of  ground,  although  we  had  far  more  men  than  they 
carried.  I  noticed  this  youth  fighting  always  in  the  front  line 
with  the  Venetians,  and  marvelled  at  the  strength  and  dexterity 
with  which  he  used  his  weapons,  and  afterwards,  when  there 
were  three  of  us  around  him,  he  fought  like  a  boar  surrounded 
by  hounds.  I  am  sure  he  is  a  brave  youth,  and  well  worthy 
the  position  he  held,  to  whatsoever  he  owed  it." 

"  I  belong  to  no  noble  family  of  Venice,"  Francis  said.  "  My 
name  is  Francis  Hammond,  and  my  parents  are  English." 

"You  are  not  a  mercenary,  I  trust?"  the  Genoese  captain 
asked  earnestly. 

"  I  am  not,"  Francis  replied.  "  I  am  a  citizen  of  Venice, 
and  my  name  is  inscribed  in  her  books,  as  my  comrades  will 
vouch." 

"  Right  glad  am  I  that  it  is  so,"  the  Genoese  said,  "  for  Pietro 
Doria,  who  is  now,  by  the  death  of  his  brother,  in  chief  com- 
mand, has  ordered  that  every  mercenary  found  among  the 
prisoners  shall  to-day  be  slain." 

"  It  is  a  brutal  order,"  Francis  said  fearlessly,  "  whosoever 
may  have  given  it !  A  mercenary  taken  in  fair  fight  has  as 
much  right  to  be  held  for  ransom  or  fair  exchange  as  any 
other  prisoner;  and  if  your  admiral  thus  breaks  the  laws  of 
war,  there  is  not  a  free-lance  from  one  end  of  Italy  to  the  other 
but  will  take  it  up  as  a  personal  quarrel." 

The  Genoese  frowned  at  the  boldness  with  which  Francis 
spoke,  but  at  heart  agreed  in  the  sentiments  he  expressed ;  for 
among  the  Genoese  officers  generally  there  was  a  feeling  that 
this  brutal  execution  in  cold  blood  was  an  impolitic  as  well  as  a 
disgraceful  deed. 


28o  "  THE  CHANCES  ARE  IN  OUR  FAVOUR." 

The  officers  were  now  placed  in  the  forehold  of  the  ship, 
the  crew  being  confined  in  the  after-hold.  Soon  afterwards 
they  knew  by  the  motion  of  the  vessel  that  sail  had  been  put 
on  her. 

"  So  we  are  on  our  way  to  a  Genoese  prison,  Francisco," 
Matteo  said  ;  "  we  had  a  narrow  escape  of  it  before,  but  this 
time  I  suppose  it  is  our  fate." 

"  There  is  certainly  no  hope  of  rescue,  Matteo  ;  it  is  too  early 
as  yet  to  say  whether  there  is  any  hope  of  escape.  The  prospect 
looked  darker  when  I  was  in  the  hands  of  Ruggiero,  but  I 
managed  to  get  away ;  then  I  was  alone  and  closely  guarded, 
now  we  have  in  the  ship  well-nigh  two  hundred  friends,  pris- 
oners like  ourselves,  it  is  true,  but  still  to  be  counted  on.  Then, 
too,  the  Genoese  are  no  doubt  so  elated  with  their  triumph 
that  they  are  hardly  likely  to  keep  a  very  vigilant  guard  over 
us.  Altogether,  I  should  say  that  the  chances  are  in  our 
favour.  Were  I  sure  that  the  Pluto  is  sailing  alone  I  should 
be  very  confident  that  we  might  retake  her,  but  probably  the 
fifteen  captured  ships  are  sailing  in  company,  and  would  at 
once  come  to  the  aid  of  their  comrades  here,  directly  they  saw 
any  signs  of  a  conflict  going  on,  and  we  could  hardly  hope  to 
recapture  the  ship  without  making  some  noise  over  it." 

"  I  should  think  not,"  Matteo  agreed. 

"  Then  again,  Matteo,  even  if  we  find  it  impossible  to  get 
at  the  crew,  and  with  them  to  recapture  the  ship,  some  chance 
may  occur  by  which  you  and  I  may  manage  to  make  our  escape." 

"  If  you  say  so,  Francisco,  I  at  once  believe  it.  You  got  us  all 
out  of  the  scrape  down  at  Girgenti.  You  got  Polani's  daughters 
out  of  a  worse  scrape  when  they  were  captives  on  San  Nicolo; 
and  got  yourself  out  of  the  worst  scrape  of  all  when  you 
escaped  from  the  grip  of  Ruggiero  Mocenigo.  Therefore, 
when  you  say  that  there  is  a  fair  chance  of  escape  out  of  this 
business,  I  look  upon  it  as  almost  as  good  as  done." 


""MY  WOUNDS  SMART  AMAZINGLY."  281 

"  It  is  a  long  way  from  that,  Matteo,"  Francis  laughed  ;  "  still 
I  hope  we  may  manage  it  somehow.  I  have  the  greatest 
horror  of  a  Genoese  prison,  for  it  is  notorious  that  they  treat 
their  prisoners  of  war  shamefully,  and  I  certainly  do  not  mean 
to  enter  one  if  there  is  the  slightest  chance  of  avoiding  it ; 
but  for  to-day,  Matteo,  I  shall  not  even  begin  to  think  about 
it.  In  the  first  place  my  head  aches  with  the  various  thumps 
it  has  had  ;  in  the  second,  I  feel  weak  from  loss  of  blood ; 
and  in  the  third,  my  wounds  smart  most  amazingly." 

"  So  do  mine,"  Matteo  agreed ;  "  in  addition  I  am  hungry, 
for  the  bread  they  gave  us  this  morning  was  not  fit  for  dogs, 
although  I  had  to  eat  it,  as  it  was  that  or  nothing." 

"And  now,  Matteo,  I  shall  try  to  get  a  few  hours'  sleep.  I 
did  not  close  my  eyes  last  night  from  the  pain  of  my  wounds, 
but  I  think  I  might  manage  to  drop  off  now." 

The  motion  of  the  vessel  aided  the  effect  of  the  bodily 
weakness  that  Francis  was  feeling,  and  in  spite  of  the  pain  of 
his  wounds  he  soon  went  off  into  a  sound  sleep.  Once  or 
twice  he  woke,  but  hearing  no  voices  or  movement,  he  sup- 
posed his  companions  were  all  asleep,  and  again  went  off, 
until  a  stream  of  light  coming  in  from  the  opening  of  the 
hatchway  thoroughly  roused  him.  Matteo,  who  was  lying 
by  his  side,  also  woke  and  stretched  himself,  and  there  was 
a  general  movement  among  the  ten  young  men  who  were  their 
comrades  in  misfortune. 

"  Here  is  your  breakfast,"  a  voice  from  above  the  hatchway 
said,  and  a  basket  containing  bread  and  a  bucket  of  water 
was  lowered  by  ropes. 

"  Breakfast ! "  Matteo  said ;  "  why,  it  is  not  two  hours  since 
we  breakfasted  last." 

"I  suspect  it  is  twenty-two,  Matteo;  we  have  had  a  very 
long  sleep,  and  I  feel  all  the  better  of  it.  Now  let  us  divide 
the  liberal  breakfast  our  captors  have  given  us ;  fortunatel> 


282  "I  AM  YOUR  CAPTAIN   NO   LONGER." 

there  is  just  enough  light  coming  down  from  those  scuttles  to 
enable  us  to  do  so  fairly." 

Then  was  a  general  laugh  from  his  comrades  at  the  cheerful 
way  in  which  Francis  spoke.  Only  one  of  them  had  been  an 
officer  on  the  Pluto  \  the  rest  were,  like  Matteo,  volunteers  of 
good  families.  There  was  a  good  deal  of  light-hearted  jesting 
over  their  meal.  When  it  was  over  Francis  said  : 

"  Now  let  us  hold  a  council  of  war." 

"  You  are  better  off  than  Pisani  was  anyhow,"  one  of  the 
young  men  said,  "  for  you  are  not  hampered  with  proveditors, 
and  anything  that  your  captaincy  may  suggest  will,  you  may 
be  sure,  receive  our  assent." 

"  I  am  your  captain  no  longer,"  Francis  replied ;  "  we  are  all 
prisoners  now  and  equal,  and  each  one  has  a  free  voice  and  a 
free  vote." 

"  Then  I  give  my  voice  and  vote  at  once,  Francisco," 
Matteo  said,  "  to  the  proposal  that  you  remain  our  captain, 
and  that  we  obey  you  as  cheerfully  and  willingly  as  we  should 
if  you  were  on  the  poop  of  the  Pluto  instead  of  being  in  the 
hold.  In  the  first  place,  at  Carlo's  death  you  became  our  cap- 
tain by  right  so  long  as  we  remain  together;  and  in  the 
second  place  you  have  more  experience  than  all  of  us  put 
together,  and  a  very  much  better  head  than  most  of  us,  my- 
selt  included.  Therefore,  comrades,  I  vote  that  Messer  Fran- 
cisco Hammond  be  still  regarded  as  our  captain,  and  obeyed  as 
such." 

There  was  a  general  chorus  of  assent,  for  the  energy  which 
Francis  had  displayed  throughout  the  trying  winter,  and  the 
manner  in  which  he  had  led  the  crew  during  the  desperate 
fighting,  had  won  for  him  the  regard  and  the  respect  of  them  all. 

"  Very  well,  then,"  Francis   said ;    if  you  wish  it  so   I   will 

,  remain  your  leader,  but  we  will  nevertheless  hold  our  council 

of  war.    The  question  which  I  shall  first  present  to  your  con- 


A   COUNCIL   OF  WAR.  283 

sideration  is,  which  is  the  best  way  to  set  about  retaking  the 
Pluto  f" 

There  was  a  burst  of  laughter  among  the  young  men.  The 
matter-of-fact  way  in  which  Francis  proposed  what  seemed  to 
them  an  impossibility  amused  them  immensely. 

"  I  am  quite  in  earnest,"  Francis  went  on  when  the  laughter 
had  subsided  ;  "  if  it  is  possibly  to  be  done  I  mean  to  retake  the 
Pluto,  and  I  have  very  little  doubt  that  it  is  possible  if  we  set 
about  it  in  the  right  way.  In  the  first  place,  we  may  take  it 
as  absolutely  certain  that  we  very  considerably  outnumber  the 
Genoese  on  board.  They  must  have  suffered  in  the  battle 
almost  as  much  as  we  did,  and  have  had  nearly  as  many  killed 
and  wounded.  In  the  second  place,  if  Doria  intends  to  profit 
by  his  victory  he  must  have  retained  a  fair  amount  of  fighting 
men  on  board  each  of  his  galleys,  and,  weakened  as  his  force 
was  by  the  losses  of  the  action,  he  can  spare  but  a  comparatively 
small  force  on  board  each  of  the  fifteen  captured  galleys.  I 
should  think  it  probable  that  there  are  not  more  than  fifty 
men  in  charge  of  the  Pluto,  and  we  number  fully  three  times 
that  force.  The  mere  fact  that  they  let  down  our  food  to  us 
by  ropes  instead  of  bringing  it  down,  showed  a  consciousness 
of  weakness." 

"What  you  say  is  quite  true,"  Paolo  Parucchi,  the  other 
officer  of  the  Pluto,  said  :  "  but  they  are  fifty  well-armed  men, 
and  we  are  a  hundred  and  fifty  without  arms  and  shut  down 
in  the  hold,  to  which  must  be  added  the  fact  that  we  are  cut 
off  from  our  men,  and  our  men  from  us.  They  are,  as  it 
were,  without  a  head  to  plan,  while  we  are  without  arms  to 
strike." 

A  murmur  of  approval  was  heard  among  some  of  the  young 
men. 

"  I  do  not  suppose  that  there  are  no  difficulties  in  our  way, 
Francis  said  quietly;  or  that  we  have  only,  next  time  the 


284  THE  FIRST  STEP. 

hatch  is  opened,  to  say  to  those  above,  Gentlemen  of  Genoa, 
we  are  more  numerous  than  you  are,  and  we  therefore  request 
you  to  change  places  with  us  immediately.  All  I  have 
asserted  so  far  is  that  we  are  sufficiently  strong  to  retake  the 
ship  if  we  get  the  opportunity.  What  we  have  now  to  settle 
is  how  that  opportunity  is  to  come  about.  To  begin  with,  has 
any  one  a  dagger  or  knife  which  has  escaped  the  eye  of  our 
searchers  ?  " 

No  one  replied. 

"  I  was  afraid  that  nothing  had  escaped  the  vigilance  of  those 
who  appropriated  our  belongings.  As,  however,  we  have  no 
weapons  or  tools,  the  next  thing  is  to  see  what  there  is  in  the 
hold  which  can  be  turned  to  account.  It  is  fortunate  we  are  on 
board  the  Pluto  instead  of  being  transferred  to  another  ship,  as'' 
we  already  know  all  about  her.  There  are  some  iron  bolts 
driven  in  along  a  beam  at  the  farther  end  ;  they  have  been  used, 
I  suppose,  at  some  time  or  other  for  hanging  the  carcasses  of 
animals  from.  Let  us  see  whether  there  is  any  chance  of  get- 
ting some  of  them  out." 

The  iron  pegs,  however,  were  so  firmly  driven  into  the  beam 
that  all  their  efforts  failed  to  move  them  in  the  slightest. 

"  We  will  give  that  up  for  the  present,"  Francis  said,  "  and 
look  round  for  something  more  available." 

But  with  the  exception  of  the  water-casks,  the  closest  search 
failed  to  find  anything  in  the  hold. 

"  I  do  not  know  whether  the  iron  hoops  of  a  cask  would  be  of 
any  use,"  Matteo  said. 

"Certainly  they  would  be  of  use  if  we  get  them  off, 
Matteo." 

"  There  is  no  difficulty  about  that,"  one  of  the  others  said, 
examining  the  casks  closely.  "  This  is  an  empty  one,  and  the 
hoops  seem  quite  loose." 

In  a  few  minutes  four  iron  hoops  were  taken  off  the  cask. 


"  WHAT  NEXT,  CAPTAIN  ?  "  285 

"  After  all,"  Matteo  said,  "  they  cannot  be  of  much  use  ;  the 
iron  is  rust-eaten,  and  they  would  break  in  our  hands  before 
going  into  any  one." 

"  They  would  certainly  be  useless  as  daggers,  Matteo,  but  I 
think  that  with  care  they  will  act  as  saws.  Break  off  a  length 
of  about  a  foot,  now  straighten  it,  and  tear  a  piece  off  your 
doublet  and  wrap  it  round  and  round  one  end,  so  that  you  can 
hold  it.  Now  just  try  it  on  the  edge  of  a  beam." 

"  It  certainly  cuts,"  Matteo  announced  after  a  trial,  "  but  not 
very  fast." 

"  So  that  it  cuts  at  all  we  may  be  very  well  content,"  Francis 
said  cheerfully ;  "  we  have  got  a  week  at  least  to  work  in,  and 
if  the  wind  is  not  favourable  we  may  have  a  month.  Let  us 
therefore  break  the  hoops  up  into  pieces  of  the  right  length. 
We  must  use  them  carefully,  for  we  may  expect  to  have  many 
breakages. " 

"  What  next,  captain  ?  " 

"  Our  object  will,  of  course,  be  to  cut  through  into  the  main 
hold  which  separates  us  from  the  crew.  There  we  shall  probably 
find  plenty  of  weapons ;  but  to  use  our  saws  we  must  first  find 
a  hole  in  the  bulkhead.  First  of  all  then  let  there  be  a  strict 
search  made  for  a  knot-hole,  or  any  other  hole  through  the 
bulkhead." 

It  was  too  dark  for  eyes  to  be  of  much  use,  but  hands  were 
run  all  over  the  bulkhead,  but  no  hole  however  small  was 
discovered. 

"  It  is  clear,  then,"  Francis  said,  "that  the  first  thing  to  do  is 
to  cut  out  some  of  those  iron  bolts.  Pick  out  those  that  are 
nearest  to  the  lowest  side  of  the  beam,  say  three  of  them. 
There  are  twelve  of  us,  that  will  give  four  to  each  bolt,  and  we 
can  relieve  each  other  every  few  minutes.  Remember,  it  is 
patience  that  is  required  and  not  strength." 

The  work  was  at  once  begun.     The  young  men  had  by  this 


286  THE   FIRST   SUCCESS. 

time  fully  entered  into  the  spirit  of  the  attempt.  The  quiet  and 
business-like  way  in  which  their  leader  set  about  it  convinced 
them  that  he  at  least  had  a  firm  belief  that  the  work  was  possi- 
ble ;  and  there  was  a  hope,  even  if  but  a  remote  one,  of  avoiding 
the  dreaded  dungeons  of  Genoa. 

The  work  was  slow,  and  two  or  three  of  the  strips  of  iron 
were  at  first  broken  by  the  too  great  eagerness  of  their  holders  ; 
but  when  it  was  found  that  by  using  them  lightly  the  edges 
gradually  cut  their  way  into  the  wood,  the  work  went  on  regu- 
larly. The  Pluto  had  been  hurriedly  constructed,  and  any 
timbers  that  were  available  in  the  emergency  were  utilized. 
Consequently  much  soft  wood  that  at  other  times  would  never 
have  been  found  in  the  state  dockyards  was  put  into  her.  The 
beam  at  which  they  were  working  was  of  soft  timber,  and  a 
fine  dust  fell  steadily  as  the  rough  iron  was  sawed  backward  and 
forward  upon  it. 

Two  cuts  were  made  [under  each  bolt,  wide  at  the  base  and 
converging  towards  it.  The  saws  were  kept  going  the  whole 
day,  and  although  the  progress  was  slow  it  was  fast  enough  to 
encourage  them ;  and  just  as  the  light  that  came  through  the 
scuttle  faded  away  three  of  the  young  men  hung  their  weight 
upon  one  of  the  bolts,  and  the  wood  beneath  it,  already  almost 
severed,  gave,  and  a 'suppressed  cry  of  satisfaction  announced 
that  one  bolt  was  free. 

The  pieces  of  iron  were  two  feet  long  and  were  intended  for 
some  other  purpose,  but  had  been  driven  in  when,  on  loading 
the  ship,  some  strong  pegs  on  which  to  hang  carcasses  were 
required.  They  were  driven  about  three  inches  into  the  beam, 
and  could  have  been  cut  out  with  an  ordinary  saw  in  two  or 
three  minutes. 

"  Try  the  others,"  Francis  said.  "  As  many  of  you  get  hold  of 
them  as  can  put  your  hands  on." 

The  effort  was  made  and  the  other  two  bolts  were  got  out. 


ARRANGEMENT    OF  THE   WORK.  287 

They  had  been  roughly  sharpened  at  the  end  and  were  fully 
an  inch  across. 

"  They  do  not  make  bad  weapons,"  Matteo  said. 

"  It  is  not  as  weapons  that  we  want  them,  Matteo.  They  will 
be  more  useful  to  us  than  any  weapons,  except,  indeed,  a  good 
axe.  We  shall  want  at  least  three  more.  Therefore  I  propose 
that  we  continue  our  work  at  once.  We  will  divide  into 
watches  now.  It  will  be  twelve  hours  before  we  get  our  allow- 
ance of  bread  again,  therefore  that  will  give  three  hours'  work 
and  nine  hours'  sleep  to  each.  They  will  be  just  setting  the 
first  watch  on  deck,  and,  as  we  shall  hear  them  changed,  it  will 
give  us  a  good  idea  how  the  time  is  passing." 

"  I  am  ready  to  work  all  night  myself,"  Matteo  said.  "  At 
first  I  had  not  much  faith  in  what  we  were  doing;  but  now 
that  we  have  got  three  of  these  irons  out,  I  am  ready  to  go  on 
working  until  I  drop." 

"  You  will  find,  Matteo,  that  your  arms  will  ache  so  that  you 
cannot  hold  them  up  before  the  end  of  the  three  hours.  Sawing 
like  that,  with  your  arms  above  your  head,  is  most  fatiguing : 
and  even  the  short  spells  of  work  we  have  been  having  made 
my  arms  ache.  However,  each  must  do  as  much  as  he  can  in 
his  three  hours ;  and  as  we  are  working  in  the  dark  we  must 
work  slowly  and  carefully,  or  we  shall  break  our  tools." 

"  Fortunately  we  can  get  more  hoops  off  now  if  we  want 
them,"  Matteo  said ;  "  with  these  irons  we  can  wrench  them 
off  the  sound  casks  if  necessary." 

"  Yes ;  I  did  not  think  of  that,  Matteo.  You  see  we  are 
already  getting  a  stock  of  tools.  Another  thing  is,  with  the 
point  of  the  irons  we  have  got  off  we  can  wrench  the  wood  out 
as  fast  as  we  saw  it,  and  the  saws  will  not  work  so  stiffly  as 
they  did  before.  6ut  we  must  not  do  that  till  the  morning, 
for  any  sound  like  the  breaking  of  wood  might  be  heard  by  the 
watch  when  everything  is  quiet." 


288  BREAKFAST. 

Although  all  worked  their  best  they  made  but  slight  pro- 
gress in  the  dark,  and  each  worker  was  forced  to  take  frequent 
rests,  for  the  fatigue  of  working  with  their  arms  above  their 
heads  was  excessive.  As  soon,  however,  as  the  light  began  to 
steal  down  and  the  movement  above  head  told  them  that  the 
crew  were  at  work  washing  the  decks,  the  points  of  the  irons 
were  used  to  wrench  away  the  wood  between  the  saw-cuts ; 
and  the  work  then  proceeded  briskly,  as  they  relieved  each 
other  every  few  minutes.  At  last,  to  their  intense  satisfaction, 
three  more  irons  were  got  out. 

"  If  anyone  had  told  me,"  one  of  the  party  said,  "  that  a 
man's  arms  could  hurt  as  much  as  mine  do  from  working  a  few- 
hours,  I  should  have  disbelieved  him." 

There  was  a  chorus  of  assent,  for  none  were  accustomed  to 
hard  manual  labour,  and  the  pain  in  their  arms  was  excessive. 

"  Let  us  have  half  an  hour's  rest,  Francis,  before  you  issue 
your  next  orders.  I  shall  want  that  at  least  before  I  feel  that 
I  have  any  power  in  my  arms  at  all." 

"  We  will  have  an  hour's  rest,  Matteo,  if  you  like.  Before 
that  time  they  will  be  sending  us  down  our  food,  and  after  we 
have  breakfasted  we  can  set  to  work  again." 

"  Breakfast !  "  one  of  the  young  men  groaned.  "  I  cannot  call 
that  black  bread  and  water  breakfast.  When  I  think  of  the 
breakfasts  I  have  eaten,  when  I  think  of  the  dishes  I  have 
refused  to  eat  because  they  were  not  cooked  to  perfection,  I 
groan  over  my  folly  in  those  days,  and  my  enormous  stupidity 
in  ever  volunteering  to  come  to  sea." 

"  I  should  recommend  you  all,"  Francis  said,  "  to  spend  the 
next  hour  in  rubbing  and  squeezing  the  muscles  of  your  neigh- 
bours' arms  and  shoulders.  It  is  the  best  way  for  taking  out 
stiffness,  and  Giuseppi  used  to  give  me  relief  that  way  when  I 
was  stiff  with  fencing." 

The  idea  was  adopted ;  and  while  the  rest  were  at  work  in 


A   FAVOURABLE    REPORT.  289 

the  manner  he  suggested,  Francis,  taking  one  of  the  irons,  went 
to  the  bulkhead.  One  by  one  he  tried  the  planks  from  the 
floor  boards  to  the  beams  above. 

"  Well,  captain,  what  is  your  report  ?  "  Matteo  asked  as  h« 
joined  the  rest. 

"  My  report  is  a  most  favourable  one,"  Francis  said.  "  Bj 
great  good  luck  the  planks  are  nailed  from  the  other  sidt 
against  the  beams  both  above  and  below." 

"  What  difference  does  that  make,  Francisco  ?  " 

"  All  the  difference  in  the  world.  Had  they  been  nailed  on 
this  side,  there  would  have  been  nothing  for  it  but  to  carry  out 
our  original  plan — that  is,  to  make  holes  through  the  plankj 
with  these  irons  large  enough  for  the  saws  to  go  through,  and 
then  to  saw  the  wood  out  from  hole  to  hole.  As  it  is,  I  believe 
that  with  five  minutes'  work  we  could  wrench  a  plank  away. 
We  have  only  to  push  the  points  of  the  irons  up  between  the 
beams  and  the  planks  and  use  them  as  levers.  The  nails  will 
be  strong  indeed  if  those  irons,  with  two  of  us  at  each,  would 
not  wrench  them  out." 

The  young  men  all  leapt  to  their  feet,  pains  and  aches  quite 
forgotten  in  the  excitement  of  this  unexpected  news,  and  six  of 
them  seized  hold  of  the  irons." 

"  Gently ! "  Francis  said.  "  You  must  remember  there  may  be 
people  going  down  there  at  present  getting  up  stores.  Before 
we  venture  to  disturb  a  plank  we  must  make  the  hole  sufficiently 
large  for  us  to  spy  through.  This  will  be  a  very  easy  affair  in 
comparison  with  making  a  hole  large  enough  for  a  saw  to  go 
through.  Still  you  will  find  it  will  take  some  time.  However, 

we  had  better  wait,  as  we  agreed,  till  we  have  had  our  food." 
—19 


CHAPTER  XVI. 

THE  RECAPTURE  OF  THE  "  PLUTO.** 

|S  soon  as  the  hatch  had  been  removed  and  the  bread 
and  water  lowered  down  and  they  heard  heavy 
weights  again  laid  on  the  hatch,  two  of  the  party 
took  one  of  the  irons  and  began  to  bore  a  hole,  while 
the  others  proceeded  to  eat  their  food.  Several  times  the  workers 
had  to  be  relieved.  The  iron  penetrated  comparatively  easily  for 
a  short  distance,  but  beyond  that  the  difficulty  greatly  increased ; 
and  it  was  fully  four  hours  before  one  of  the  workers,  applying 
his  eye  to  the  hole,  said  that  he  could  see  a  gleam  of  light 
through.  In  another  quarter  of  an  hour  the  orifice  was  suffi- 
ciently enlarged  to  enable  a  view  to  be  obtained  of  the  central 
hold.  It  was  comparatively  light  there,  for  the  hatch  was  off, 
and  they  could  see  two  men  at  work  opening  a  cask  for  some 
stores  that  were  required. 

"  We  must  wait  till  it  gets  dark  now,"  Francis  said.  "  I  do 
not  think  that  we  shall  make  much  noise,  for  the  nails  will  be 
likely  to  draw  quietly ;  but  we  had  better  choose  the  time  be- 
tween nightfall  and  the  hour  for  the  crew  to  turn  in,  as  there 
will  be  a  trampling  of  feet  on  deck  and  talking  and  singing, 
which  would  prevent  any  slight  noise  we  might  make  being 
heard." 


THE  PLANK   YIELDS.  2QI 

"The  difficulty  will  be  to  force  the  ends  of  the  iron  down  be- 
tween the  beams  and  the  planks,  so  as  to  give  us  a  purchase," 
Matteo  said. 

"  I  think  we  shall  be  able  to  manage  that,"  Francis  replied. 
"  The  beams  are  put  in  in  the  rough,  and  if  we  hunt  carefully  I 
think  we  shall  find  a  plank  where  we  can  get  the  irons  in  far 
enough  between  it  and  the  beam  to  give  us  a  hold." 

After  a  careful  examination  they  fixed  upon  a  plank  to  oper- 
ate upon,  and,  leaving  one  of  the  irons  there  so  that  they  could 
find  it  in  the  dark,  they  lay  down  to  sleep,  or  sat  talking  until 
it  was  dark.  Before  this,  a  glance  through  the  peep-hole  showed 
them  that  the  hatch  had  been  placed  over  the  hatchway  of  the 
next  hold,  so  that  there  was  little  fear  of  anyone  coming  down 
unless  something  special  was  required. 

"  Now  I  think  we  can  begin,"  Francis  said  at  last.  "  Do  you, 
Paolo  Parucchi,  take  one  of  the  irons,  I  will  take  another, 
Matteo  a  third.  We  cannot  possibly  work  more  than  three  at 
the  foot  of  a  plank,  though  perhaps  when  we  have  fixed  them 
and  put  on  the  strain,  two  or  three  more  hands  may  get  at  the 
irons  ;  but  first  we  will  try  with  three,  and,  unless  the  nails  have 
got  a  wonderfully  firm  hold,  we  shall  certainly  be  able  to  draw 
them." 

It  took  some  time  to  fix  the  irons  to  the  best  advantage  be- 
tween the  planks  and  the  beam. 

"  Are  you  both  ready  ?  "    Francis  asked  at  last ;  "  then  pull." 

As  Francis  had  anticipated,  the  levers  did  their  work,  and 
the  nails  yielded  a  little. 

"  It  has  sprung  half  an  inch,"  Francis  said,  feeling.  "  Now 
you  keep  your  irons  as  they  are,  while  I  thrust  mine  down 
farther.  I  have  got  a  fresh  hold  ;  do  you  shift  yours." 


292  AN   ENTRANCE  EFFECTED. 

Again  the  effort  was  made,  and  this  time  the  nails  drew  fully 
two  inches.  Another  effort,  and  the  plank  was  completely  free 
at  the  lower  end. 

"  Now  do  you  push  against  it  as  hard  as  you  can,"  Francis 
said,  "  while  I  get  my  iron  in  between  it  and  the  beam  above." 

The  upper  nails  yielded  even  more  easily  than  those  below. 

"  No  farther,"  Francis  said  when  they  had  fairly  started 
them,  "  or  the  plank  will  be  falling  with  a  crash.  We  must  push 
from  the  bottom  now  until  it  gives  sufficiently  far  for  you  to  get 
an  iron  down  each  side,  to  prevent  its  closing  again." 

"  Now,"  he  said,  "  push  the  irons  higher  up ;  that  is  right. 
Now  I  will  loosen  a  bit  farther  at  the  top,  and  then  you  will  be 
able  to  get  your  hands  in  at  the  bottom  to  steady  it  and  prevent 
its  falling  when  the  nails  are  quite  drawn." 

Another  effort  and  the  plank  was  free,  and,  being  drawn  in, 
was  laid  down.  The  delight  of  those  who  were  standing  in  the 
dark,  and  could  only  judge  how  matters  were  going  on  from 
Francis's  low  spoken  orders,  was  extreme. 

"  Can  we  get  through  ?  " 

"  No,"  Francis  replied ;  "  it  will  be  necessary  to  remove 
another  plank  first,  but  perhaps  one  of  the  slighter  among  you 
might  manage  to  squeeze  through  and  hold  the  plank  at  the 
back  ;  we  shall  be  able  to  work  with  more  freedom  if  we  know 
that  there  is  no  danger  of  its  falling." 

In  a  few  minutes  the  second  plank  was  laid  beside  the  first. 

"  What  is  to  be  done  next  ?  "  Matteo  asked. 

"  We  must  establish  a  communication  with  the  sailors.  I  will 
take  a  working  party  of  four ;  Paolo  Parucchi  with  four  others 
will  relieve  me ;  you,  Matteo,  will  with  the  rest  take  the  last 
spell.  When  we  have  entered  the  next  compartment  we  will 


COMMUNICATION   OPENED.  293 

put  up  the  planks  again  and  press  the  nails  in  tightly  enough 
to  prevent  their  falling.  Should,  by  some  chance,  any  one 
descend  into  the  hold  while  we  are  working,  we  shall  be  hidden 
from  their  view  ;  at  the  other  end  there  are  a  number  of  sacks 
piled  up,  and  we  shall  be  working  behind  them." 

Francis  and  the  men  he  had  chosen  made  their  way  to  the  pile 
of  arms  they  had  observed  through  their  peep-hole,  moving  with 
great  precaution  so  as  to  avoid  falling  over  anything.  Here 
with  some  trouble  they  succeeded  in  finding  a  dagger  among  the 
heap,  and  they  then  felt  their  way  on  until  they  reached  the  pile 
of  sacks ;  these  were  packed  to  within  a  foot  of  the  deck-beams, 
and  there  was  but  just  room  for  them  to  crawl  in  at  the  top. 

"  Whatever  you  do,  do  not  bump  against  the  beams,"  Francis 
said.  "  Any  noise  of  that  sort  from  below  would  at  once  excite 
attention.  Now  do  you  be  quiet  while  I  find  a  spot  to  begin 
upon." 

Commencing  at  a  junction  of  two  planks,  Francis  began  with 
the  dagger  to  cut  a  hole  of  some  three  or  four  inches  across,  but 
tapering  rapidly  as  it  went  in.  After  waiting  for  some  ten 
minutes  he  touched  the  man  lying  next  to  him,  placed  his  hand 
on  the  hole  he  had  begun,  and  then  moved  aside  to  allow  him 
to  continue  the  work.  In  an  hour  a  hole  was  made  in  a  two- 
inch  plank,  and  this  was  soon  enlarged  until  it  was  an  inch  in 
diameter.  Lying  along  the  side  of  the  bulkhead  so  as  to  get  his 
ear  to  the  hole,  Francis  listened,  but  could  hear  no  sound  within  ; 
then  he  put  his  mouth  to  the  orifice  and  asked  : 

"  Are  you  all  asleep  there  ?  "  Then  he  listened  again.  Some 
of  the  men  were  speaking,  and  asking  each  other  who  it  was 
that  had  suddenly  spoken. 

No  one  replied  ;  and  some  of  them  gave  vent  to  angry  threats 


394  ORDERS   TO  THE  CREW. 

against  whoever  it  might  be  who  had  just  disturbed  them  from 
going  off  to  sleep.  Directly  the  voices  ceased  again  Francis  said  : 

"  Let  us  have  silence  in  there.  Where  is  Rinaldo,  the  boat- 
swain ?  " 

"  I  am  here,"  a  voice  replied ;  but  who  is  speaking  ?  It 
sounds  like  the  voice  of  Messer  Hammond." 

"  It  is  my  voice,  Rinaldo.  We  have  worked  through  from 
the  hold  at  the  other  end  of  the  ship,  having  removed  some  of 
the  planks  of  the  bulkhead  ;  now  it  is  for  you  to  do  the  same. 
We  will  pass  you  some  daggers  through  when  we  have  made 
this  hole  a  bit  larger.  You  must  choose  one  of  the  planks  in  the 
corner,  as  this  will  be  less  likely  to  be  observed." 

"  They  will  not  observe  us,  Messer  Hammond  ;  they  never 
come  down  here  at  all,  but  pass  our  food  down  in  buckets." 

"  Nevertheless,  begin  at  the  plank  next  to  the  side,"  Francis 
said  ;  "  possibly  some  one  may  come  down  before  you  have 
finished.  You  will  have  to  remove  two  planks  to  get  through. 
I  will  pass  a  javelin  through;  you  can  set  to  work. with  it 
and  bore  holes  through  the  plank  close  to  the  floor,  and  then 
with  the  dagger  cut  away  the  wood  between  them.  When  you 
have  done  them  set  to  at  the  top,  close  to  the  beams,  and  cut  the 
two  planks  through  there.  There  are  sacks  of  grain  piled  up 
against  them  on  this  side,  so  that  there  is  no  fear  of  your  being 
observed  from  here.  The  work  must  be  carried  on  perfectly 
noiselessly,  the  men  relieving  each  other  every  few  minutes. 

"When  the  planks  are  cut  through  replace  them  in  their 
former  positions  and  wedge  some  small  pieces  of  wood  in,  so 
that  there  shall  be  no  chance  of  their  falling.  You  ought  to 
finish  the  work  by  to-morrow.  When  you  have  done  it  take  no 
farther  step  until  you  get  orders  from  me.  It  would  not  do  to 


WHAT  DID  I  TELL  YOU?"  295 

rise  now,  for  we  may  be  surrounded  by  other  ships,  and  if  we 
overpowered  the  crew  we  should  at  once  be  attacked  and  re- 
captured by  them.  You  will  therefore  remain  quiet  until  you 
have  orders,  whether  it  be  one  day  or  ten.  All  the  arms  they 
have  taken  from  us  are  lying  piled  here,  and  when  the  time 
comes  we  shall  have  no  difficulty  in  overpowering  the  Genoese, 
and  shall,  I  hope,  bring  the  Pluto  safely  to  anchor  in  the  port 
of  Venice  before  long." 

There  was  a  murmur  of  delight  among  the  sailors,  pent  up  in 
their  close  quarters.  Francis  listened  a  moment  and  heard  one 
of  the  men  say  : 

"What  did  I  tell  you?  "  Didn't  I  tell  you  that  Messer  Ham- 
mond got  us  all  out  of  a  scrape  before,  when  our  ship  was 
captured  by  the  Genoese,  and  that  I  would  be  bound  he  would 
do  the  same  again  if  he  had  but  the  shadow  of  a  chance." 

*  You  did,  Pietro,  and  you  have  turned  out  right ;  that  is  the 
sort  of  fellow  to  have  for  a  captain.  He  is  not  like  one  of  those 
dainty  young  nobles  who  don't  know  one  rope's  end  from 
another,  and  who  turn  up  their  noses  at  the  thought  of  dirty- 
ing their  hands.  See  how  he  looked  after  us  through  the 
winter.  I  wish  we  could  give  a  cheer  for  him,  but  that  would 
never  do;  but  when  we  are  out  of  this  I  will  give  him  the 
loudest  shout  I  ever  gave  yet.  Now  then,  Rinaldo,  let  us  set 
to  work  without  a  moment's  delay.  There's  a  chance  we  aren't 
going  to  rot  in  the  dungeons  of  Genoa  after  all." 

Convinced  that  the  work  would  be  carried  on  in  accordance 
with  his  orders,  Francis  withdrew  his  ear  from  the  hole,  and, 
crawling  over  the  sacks  again,  made  his  way  to  the  pile  of  arms, 
felt  about  until  he  found  two  javelins,  and  taking  these  back 
passed  them  one  after  the  other  through  the  hole. 


296  MATTEO'S   SURPRISE. 

"We  have  done  our  share  now,"  he  said  to  his  comrades. 
"  Paolo  and  his  party  will  find  it  a  comparatively  easy  task  to 
enlarge  the  hole  sufficiently  to  pass  the  daggers  through." 

The  party  returned  to  the  other  end  of  the  hold,  removed 
the  planks,  and  joined  their  friends.  The  next  watch  had 
arranged  to  lie  down  close  to  the  planks,  so  that  they  could  be 
aroused  without  waking  the  others. 

They  were  soon  on  their  feet.  Francis  explained  to  Pa- 
rucchi  the  progress  they  had  made  and  the  orders  that  had 
been  given  to  the  sailors  as  to  what  they  were  to  do.  "  When 
the  hole  is  large  enough  pass  these  five  daggers  in  to  the  crew, 
and  then  come  back  again.  I  will  guide  you  to  the  spot,  and 
on  my  return  will  pick  out  half-a-dozen  more  daggers  in  case 
we  want  them  for  further  work." 

When  daylight  made  its  way  into  the  hold  Matteo  and  his 
watch  woke,  and  were  astonished  to  find  that  all  their  comrades 
were  quietly  asleep,  and  that  they  had  not  been  awakened. 
Matteo  could  not  restrain  his  curiosity,  but  woke  Francis: 

"  Has  anything  gone  wrong,  Francis  ?  It  is  daylight,  and 
Parucchi's  party  as  well  as  yours  are  all  asleep,  while  we  have 
not  been  roused !" 

"  Everything  is  going  on  well,  Matteo,  and  we  did  not  wake 
you  because  there  was  nothing  for  you  to  do.  We  have 
already  passed  in  knives  and  javelins  to  the  sailors,  and  they 
are  at  work  cutting  through  two  planks  in  their  bulkhead ; 
after  which  we  shall  be  able  to  meet  in  the  next  hold,  arm  our- 
selves, and  fall  upon  the  Genoese  when  the  opportunity  offers." 

"  That  is  excellent  indeed,  Francis ;  but  I  wish  you  had  let 
us  do  our  share  of  the  work." 

"  It  did  not  take  us  more  than  two  hours,  Matteo,  to  make 


"THAT  WILL  DEPEND,   MATTEO."  297 

a  hole  big  enough  to  pass  the  javelins  through,  and  I  should 
say  Parucchi's  party  enlarged  it  sufficiently  to  hand  in  the 
daggers  in  another  hour ;  so  you  see  it  would  have  been  useless 
to  have  aroused  you,  and  the  less  movement  we  make  after 
they  get  quiet  at  night  the  better." 

"  And  how  long  will  the  sailors  be  cutting  it  through,  do 
you  think  ?" 

"  I  should  say  they  would  be  ready  by  this  time,  Matteo,  but 
certainly  they  will  be  finished  some  time  to-day." 

"  Then  we  shall  soon  be  free !"  Matteo  exclaimed  joyfully. 

"That  will  depend,  Matteo.  We  must  wait  till  there  is  a 
good  opportunity,  so  that  we  can  recapture  the  ship  without 
an  alarm  being  given  to  the  other  vessels  which  are  no  doubt 
sailing  in  company  with  us.  And  now,  if  you  have  nothing  to 
say,  I  will  go  off  to  sleep  again,  for  there  is  time  for  another 
hour  or  two.  I  feel  as  if  I  had  not  quite  finished  my  night's 
rest,  and  the  days  pass  so  slowly  here  that  it  is  as  well  for  us 
to  sleep  when  we  feel  the  least  inclination. 

"  By  the  way,  Matteo,  put  something  into  that  peep-hole 
we  made.  It  is  possible  that  they  might  see  the  light  through 
it,  and  come  to  examine  what  it  is;  it  is  better  to  run  no  risk." 

That  day  the  captives  were  far  more  restless  than  they  had 
been  since  they  were  taken  prisoners.  At  first  there  had  been 
a  feeling  of  depression,  too  great  to  admit  even  of  conversation 
with  each  other.  The  defeat  of  their  fleet,  the  danger  that 
threatened  Venice,  and  the  prospect  of  imprisonment  in  the 
gloomy  dungeons  of  Genoa  combined  to  depress  them  on  the 
first  day  of  their  imprisonment.  On  the  second  their  success 
in  getting  out  the  bolts  had  cheered  them,  and  they  had  some- 
thing to  look  forward  to  and  talk  about ;  but  still,  few  of  them 


298  "WHAT    ARE  W£  TO  DO?" 

thought  that  there  was  any  real  prospect  of  their  obtaining 
their  freedom.  Now,  however,  that  success  seemed  to  lie 
ready  to  hand,  now  that  they  could  that  very  evening  remove 
the  sacks,  effect  a  junction  with  their  crew,  arm  themselves 
with  the  weapons  tying  in  sight,  and  rush  up  and  overpower 
the  Genoese,  it  seemed  hard  to  remain  longer  in  confinement. 

Several  of  them  urged  Francis  to  make  the  attempt  that 
night,  but  he  refused. 

"  You  reckon  only  on  the  foe  you  see,"  he  said  ;  "  the  danger 
lies  not  from  them,  but  from  the  foes  we  cannot  see.  We  must 
wait  for  an  opportunity." 

"  But  no  opportunity  may  occur,"  one  of  them  urged. 

"That  is  quite  possible,"  Francis  agreed;  "but  should  no 
special  opportunity  occur,  we  shall  be  none  the  worse  for 
having  waited,  for  it  will  always  be  as  open  to  us  to  make 
the  attempt  as  it  is  to-night.  It  might  succeed — possibly 
we  could  overpower  the  guard  on  deck  before  they  could  give 
the  alarm — but  the  risk  is  too  great  to  be  run  until  we  are  cer- 
tain that  no  other  way  is  open  to  us.  In  the  daylight  the  hatch 
is  open ;  but  even  could  we  free  our  comrades  and  unite  for  a 
rush  unobserved — which  we  could  hardly  hope  to  do — we 
should  find  the  whole  of  the  Genoese  on  deck,  and  could  not 
possibly  overpower  them  before  they  had  time  to  give  the 
alarm  to  other  vessels.  At  night,  when  we  can  unite,  we 
cannot  gain  the  deck,  for  the  hatch  is  not  only  closed,  but 
would  almost  certainly  be  fastened,  so  that  men  should  not 
get  down  to  pilfer  among  the  stores." 

"  But  if  we  cannot  attack  in  the  daytime,  Messer  Hammond, 
without  giving  the  alarm,  and  cannot  attack  at  all  at  night, 
what  are  we  to  do  ?" 


THE  NEXT   STEP  TOWARDS   FREEDOM.  £99 

"That  is  the  next  point  to  be  seen  to,"  Francis  replied.  "We 
must  cut,  either  from  this  hold  or  from  the  other,  a  way  up  to 
the  deck  above.  It  may  take  us  some  days  to  do  this,  but  that 
matters  little,  we  have  plenty  of  time  for  the  work  before 
reaching  Genoa.  The  difficulty  is  not  in  the  work  itself,  but  in 
doing  it  unobserved." 

"  That  is  difficult,  indeed,"  Matteo  said,  "  seeing  that  the 
Genoese  sailors  are  quartered  in  the  forecastle  above  the  fore- 
hold,  while  the  officers  will  be  in  the  cabins  in  the  poop  over  us." 

"  That  is  so,  Matteo,  and  for  that  reason  it  is  clear  that  it  is 
we,  not  the  sailors,  who  must  cut  through  the  planks  above. 
There  are  no  divisions  in  the  forecastle,  and  it  will  be,  therefore, 
absolutely  impossible  to  cut  through  into  it  without  being  per- 
ceived long  before  a  hole  is  made  of  a  sufficient  size  to  enable  us 
to  get  out.  Here  we  may  succeed  better,  for  fortunately  we 
know  the  exact  plan  of  the  cabins  above  us,  and  can  choose  a 
spot  where  we  should  not  be  likely  to  be  noticed." 

"  That  is  so,"  Matteo  agreed,  "  and  as  they  will  not  have  as 
many  officers  as  we  had — that  is,  including  the  volunteers— some 
of  the  cabins  will  not  be  occupied.  Perhaps  by  listening  to  the 
footsteps  above  we  might  find  out  which  are  vacant." 

"  I  thought  of  that,  Matteo,  but  I  doubt  whether  it  would 
be  well  to  rely  upon  that.  Many  on  board  wear  soft  shoes 
which  make  but  little  noise,  and  it  would  be  fatal  to  us  were 
we  to  make  a  mistake.  After  thinking  it  over  I  have  decided 
that  we  had  best  try  to  cut  a  way  up  into  the  captain's 
cabin." 

"  But  that  is  sure  to  be  occupied,  Messer  Hammond,"  Pa- 
rucchi  said. 

"  Yes,   it  will  certainly  be  occupied  :  but  it  affords  a  good 


300  "WE  CAN   BEGIN   AT   ONCE." 

opportunity  of  success.  As  you  know,  Parruchi,  Carlo  Bottini 
had  been  a  long  time  at  Constantinople  and  the  Eastern  ports, 
and  had  a  somewhat  luxurious  taste.  Do  you  not  remember 
that  against  the  stern  windows  he  had  caused  to  be  erected  a 
low  wide  seat  running  across  the  cabin  ;  this  he  called  a  divan, 
and  spent  no  small  proportion  of  his  time  lolling  upon  it.  If  I 
am  right,  its  height  was  from  ten  inches  to  a  foot  above  the 
deck,  and  it  was  fully  four  feet  wide.  It  would  therefore  be 
quite  possible  to  cut  through  the  two  planks  at  the  back 
without  its  being  observed  by  anyone  in  the  cabin." 

There  was  a  chorus  of  assent. 

"  Of  course  we  must  work  most  cautiously,"  Francis  went  on. 
"  The  wood  must  be  cut  out  with  clean  cuts  with  the  daggers ; 
there  must  be  no  sawing  or  scraping :  the  beams  are  two 
feet  apart>>  and  we  must  cut  though  two  planks  close  to  them. 
In  that  way  there  will  be  no  nails  to  remove.  Of  course  we 
shall  not  cut  quite  through  until  the  time  arrives  for  us  to 
make  the  attempt,  but  just  leave  enough  to  hold  the  planks 
together ;  half  an  hour's  work  will  get  through  that ;  for  if  we 
were  to  cut  through  it  at  once,  not  only  would  there  be  risk  of 
the  hole  being  discovered  by  anyone  sweeping  the  cabin,  but  we 
should  be  obliged  to  remain  absolutely  silent,  or  we  should  be 
heard  immediately." 

"  We  can  begin  at  once,  can  we  not?  "  Matteo  asked.  "  Any- 
thing is  better  than  sitting  quietly  here." 

"  Certainly,  Matteo,  if  you  wish.  Two  can  work  at  once, 
one  on  each  line.  Choose  the  two  sharpest-edged  of  the 
daggers,  and  be  sure  to  cut  clean  and  not  to  make  a  scraping 
noise  or  to  try  to  break  out  pieces  of  wood.  The  work  must 
be  done  in  absolute  quiet  j  indeed,  however  careful  you  are  it 


THE  OPPORTUNITY   ARRIVES.  30! 

is  possible  that  some  slight  sound  may  be  heard  above,  but,  if 
noticed,  it  will  probably  be  taken  for  the  rats." 

Matteo  and  another  of  the  young  men  at  once  fell  to  work  ; 
but  it  was  not  until  the  evening  of  the  following  day  that  cuts 
were  made  as  deep  as  was  considered  prudent.  The  depth  of 
wood  remaining  was  tested  by  thrusting  the  point  of  a  dagger 
through,  and  it  was  decided  that  little  more  than  a  quarter  of  an 
inch  remained. 

Upon  the  following  day  the  ship  anchored  and  remained  for 
two  days  in  some  port ;  provisions  were  brought  on  board  and 
carried  down  into  the  hold,  and  the  prisoners  had  no  doubt 
that  they  were  in  harbour  on  the  coast  of  either  Sicily  or  the 
south  of  Italy.  They  had  not  set  sail  many  hours  when  the 
motion  of  the  ship  told  them  that  the  wind  was  getting  up,  and 
by  night  the  vessel  was  rolling  heavily,  the  noise  made  by  the 
dashing  of  the  water  against  her  planks  being  so  great  that  those 
below  could  scarcely  hear  each  other  speak.  Their  spirits  had 
risen  with  the  increase  of  the  motion,  for  the  opportunity  for 
which  they  had  been  waiting  was  now  at  hand ;  in  a  gale  the 
vessels  would  keep  well  apart  from  each  other  to  prevent  the 
danger  of  a  collision,  and  any  outcry  would  be  drowned  by  the 
noise  of  the  wind  and  water. 

Each  night  Francis  had  paid  a  visit  to  the  sailors  forward,  to 
enjoin  patience  until  he  should  give  them  the  order  for  making 
the  attempt.  They  had  long  since  cut  through  the  planks, 
which  were  only  retained  in  their  place  by  the  pressure  of  the 
sacks  behind  them.  He  had  bade  them  be  in  readiness  on  the 
first  occasion  on  which  rough  weather  might  set  in,  and  knew 
that  they  would  now  be  expecting  the  signal. 

As  soon,  then,  as  it  became  dark,  and  the  hatch  over  the 


302  THE  ATTEMPT. 

middle  hold  was  closed,  the  planks  were  removed,  and  Francis 
and  his  party  set  to  work  shifting  the  sacks  in  the  corner 
where  the  sailors  had  cut  the  planks.  Each  sack  was  taken  up 
and  placed  against  the  pile  further  on  without  the  slightest 
noise,  until  at  last  all  were  removed  that  stood  in  the  way  of 
the  planks  being  taken  down.  These  were  carried  out  into  the 
hold.  Francis  entered  the  gap.  The  sailors  had  already  been 
informed  that  the  occasion  had  come,  and  that  they  were  to 
remain  perfectly  quiet  until  bidden  to  move. 

"  All  is  prepared,"  he  said  as  he  entered.  "  Rinaldo,  do  you 
see  that  the  men  come  out  one  by  one.  As  each  comes  out 
a  weapon  will  be  placed  in  his  hands,  and  he  will  be  then  led 
to  the  starboard  side  of  the  hold,  which  is  free  from  encum- 
brance, and  will  there  stand  until  he  receives  orders  to  move 
further.  Remember  that  not  the  slightest  noise  must  be  made, 
for  if  any  stumbled  and  fell  and  the  noise  were  heard  above, 
it  might  be  thought  that  some  of  the  stores  had  shifted  from 
their  places,  and  men  would  be  sent  below  to  secure  them  ; 
the  alarm  would  be  given,  and  a  light  or  other  signal  shown 
the  other  ships  before  we  could  overpower  all  resistance.  After 
the  men  are  all  ranged  up  as  I  have  directed,  they  will  have 
to  remain  there  for  some  little  time  while  we  complete  our 
arrangements." 

As  soon  as  the  sailors  were  all  armed  and  ready  for  action 
Francis  entered  the  after-hold,  where  Matteo  and  another  had 
been  engaged  in  cutting  the  planks  quite  through.  They  had 
just  completed  the  task  when  he  reached  them,  and  had  quietly 
removed  the  two  pieces  of  plank.  Francis  had  already  given 
his  orders  to  his  companions,  and  each  knew  the  order  in 
which  they  were  to  ascend.  A  dim  light  streamed  down 


THE  CAPTAIN'S  CABIN.  303 

from  the  hole.  Two  of  his  comrades  lifted  Francis  so  that 
his  head  was  above  the  level  of  the  hole,  and  he  was  enabled 
to  see  into  the  cabin.  So  far  as  he  could  tell  it  was  untenanted, 
but  it  was  possible  that  the  commander  might  be  on  the  divan 
above  him.  This  was  not,  however,  likely,  as  in  the  gale  that 
was  now  blowing  he  would  probably  be  on  deck  directing  the 
working  of  the  ship." 

Francis  now  gave  the  signal,  and  the  others  raised  him  still 
further,  until  he  was  able  to  get  bis  weight  upon  the  deck 
above,  and  he  then  crawled  along  underneath  the  divan,  and 
lay  there  quiet  until  Parucchi  and  Matteo  had  both  reached 
the  deck  ;  then  he  gave  the  word  and  all  three  rolled  out  and 
leaped  to  their  feet,  with  their  daggers  in  their  hands  in  readi- 
ness to  fall  upon  the  captain  should  he  be  on  the  divan.  As 
they  had  hoped  and  expected,  the  cabin  was  untenanted.  The 
other  volunteers  now  joined  them,  the  last  giving  the  word  to 
Rinaldo,  who  soon  passed  up  followed  by  the  crew,  until  the 
cabin  was  as  full  as  it  could  contain.  There  were  now  assem- 
bled some  fifty  men  closely  packed  together. 

"  That  is  ample,"  Francis  said,  "  as  they  will  be  unarmed 
and  unprepared.  We  can  issue  out  singly  until  the  alarm  is 
given,  and  then  those  that  remain  must  rush  out  in  a  body. 
Simply  knock  them  down  with  the  hilts  of  your  swords.  There 
is  no  occasion  to  shed  blood  unless  in  the  case  of  armed  resis- 
tance ;  but  remember  they  will  have  their  knives  in  their 
girdles,  and  do  not  let  any  one  take  you  by  surprise." 

Opening  the  door  Francis  walked  along  a  passage,  and  then 
through  an  outer  door  into  the  waist  of  the  ship.  The  wind 
was  blowing  fiercely,  but  the  gale  was  not  so  violent  as  it  had 
appeared  to  them  when  confined  below.  The  night  was  dark, 


304  THE  SURPRISE. 

but  after  a  week's  confinement  below  his  eyes  were  able  easily 
to  make  out  almost  every  object  on  deck.  There  were  but 
few  sailors  in  the  waist ;  the  officers  would  be  on  the  poop,  and 
such  of  the  crew  as  were  not  required  on  duty  in  the  fore- 
castle. Man  after  man  joined  him  until  some  thirty  were 
gathered  near  the  bulwarks.  An  officer  on  the  poop  caught  sight 
of  them  by  the  light  of  the  lantern  which  was  suspended  there 
as  a  signal  to  the  other  vessels. 

"  What  are  all  you  men  doing  down  there  ?  "  he  challenged. 
"There  is  no  occasion  for  you  to  keep  on  deck  until  you  are 
summoned." 

"Do  you  move  forward  with  the  men  here,  Parucchi;  knock 
down  the  fellows  on  deck,  and  rush  into  the  fore-castle  and 
overpower  them  there  before  they  can  get  up  their  arms.  I  will 
summon  the  rest  in  a  body  and  we  will  overpower  the  officers." 

He  ran  back  to  the  cabin  door  and  bade  the  men  follow  him. 
As  they  poured  out  there  was  a  scuffle  on  the  deck  forward,  and 
the  officer  shouted  out  again  : 

"  What  is  going  on  there  ?  "    What  does  all  this  mean  ?  " 

Francis  sprang  up  the  ladder  to  the  poop,  followed  by  his 
men,  and  before  the  officer  standing  there  understood  the 
meaning  of  this  sudden  rush  of  men,  or  had  time  to  draw  his 
sword,  he  was  knocked  down.  The  captain  and  three  other 
officers  who  were  standing  by  the  helm  drew  their  swords  and 
rushed  forward,  thinking  there  was  a  mutiny  among  their  crew  ; 
but  Francis  shouted  out : 

"  Throw  down  your  weapons  all  of  you.  We  have  retaken 
the  ship,  and  resistance  is  useless  and  will  only  cost  you  your 
lives." 

The  officers  stood  stupefied  with  astonishment ;  and  then  see- 


"THERE  ARE  SIXTEEN   LIGHTS."  305 

ing  that  fully  twenty  armed  men  were  opposed  to  them,  they 
threw  down  their  swords.  Francis  ordered  four  of  the  sailors  to 
conduct  them  to  the  captain's  cabin,  and  remain  in  guard  over 
them  ;  then  with  the  rest  he  hurried  forward  to  assist  Parucchi's 
party.  But  the  work  was  already  done ;  the  Genoese,  taken 
completely  by  surprise,  had  at  once  surrendered  as  the  armed 
party  rushed  in  the  forecastle,  and  the  ship  was  already  theirs. 
As  soon  as  the  prisoners  were  secured,  the  after-hatch  was 
thrown  off,  and  those  whose  turn  to  crawl  up  through  the  hole 
had  not  yet  arrived  came  up  on  deck. 

"  Rinaldo,"  Francis  said,  as  soon  as  the  crew  had  fallen  into 
their  places,  "  send  a  man  aloft  and  let  him  suddenly  knock  out 
the  light  in  the  lantern." 

"  But  we  can  lower  it  down,  captain,  from  the  deck." 

"  Of  course  we  can,  Rinaldo,  but  I  don't  want  it  lowered  down, 
I  want  it  put  suddenly  out." 

Rinaldo  at  once  sent  a  man  up,  and  a  minute  later  the  light 
suddenly  disappeared. 

"  If  we  were  seen  to  lower  it  down,"  Francis  said  to  Matteo, 
"the  suspicions  of  those  who  noticed  it  would  be  at  once 
aroused,  for  the  only  motive  for  doing  so  would  be  concealment, 
whereas  now  if  it  is  missed  it  will  be  supposed  that  the  wind 
has  blown  it  out.  Now  we  have  only  to  lower  our  sails  and  we 
can  drop  unobserved  out  of  the  fleet." 

"  There  are  sixteen  lights,  I  have  just  been  counting  them." 
Matteo  said. 

"  These  are  probably  the  fourteen  galleys  captured  with  us, 
and  two  galleys  as  guards  in  case  on  their  way  they  should 
fall  in  with  any  of  our  ships.  Parucchi,  will  you  at  once 
muster  the  men,  and  see  that  all  are  armed  and  in  readiness 


306  "I   AM   GOING  TO   LAY  THE  SHIP   ALONGSIDE." 

for  fighting.  Matteo,  do  you  and  some  of  your  friends  assist 
the  lieutenant." 

In  a  few  minutes  Parucchi  reported  that  the  men  were  all 
ready  for  action. 

"  Rinaldo,  brail  up  the  sails  so  that  we  may  drop  into  the  rear 
of  the  squadron ;  watch  the  lights  of  the  vessels  behind  and 
steer  so  that  they  shall  pass  us  as  widely  as  possible." 

This  was  the  order  the  men  were  expecting  to  receive,  but 
they  were  surprised  when,  just  as  the  last  light  was  abreast  of 
them,  Francis  gave  the  order  for  the  brails  to  be  loosed  again. 

"  Signor  Parucchi,  do  you  tell  off  fifty  men.  I  am  going  to 
lay  the  ship  alongside  that  vessel  and  recapture  her ;  they  will 
not  see  us  until  we  are  close  on  board,  and  will  suppose  it  is 
an  accident  when  we  run  alongside.  No  doubt  they,  like  the 
Pluto,  have  only  a  complement  of  fifty  men,  and  we  shall  over- 
power them  before  they  are  prepared  to  offer  any  resistance. 
No  doubt  they  have  prisoners  below.  Immediately  we  have 
recaptured  her  I  shall  return  on  board  with  the  rest,  leaving 
you  with  your  fifty  men  in  charge  of  her.  As  soon  as  you  have 
secured  the  Genoese,  free  any  prisoners  there  may  be  in  the 
hold.  I  shall  keep  close  to  you,  and  you  can  hear  me,  and  tell 
me  how  many  there  are." 

The  Pluto  was  now  edged  away  till  she  was  close  to  the 
other  ship.  The  crew,  exulting  in  having  turned  the  tables  on 
the  Genoese  and  at  the  prospect  of  recovering  another  of  the 
lost  galleys,  clustered  in  the  waist  grasping  their  arms.  The 
ship  was  not  perceived  until  she  was  within  her  own  length  of 
the  other,  then  there  was  a  sudden  hail : 

"  Where  are  you  coming  to  ?  Keep  away,  or  you  will  be  into 
us.  Why  don't  you  show  your  light?  " 


A  SUCCESSFUL   SURPRISE.  307 

Francis  shouted  back  some  indistinct  answer.  Rinaldo 
pushed  down  the  helm,  and  a  minute  later  the  Pluto  ran  along- 
side the  other  vessel.  Half  a  dozen  hands  told  off  for  the  work 
sprang  into  her  rigging,  and  lashed  the  vessels  together,  while 
Francis  followed  by  the  crew,  climbed  the  bulwarks  and  sprang 
on  to  the  deck  of  the  enemy. 

Scarce  a  blow  was  struck.  The  Genoese,  astonished  at  this 
sudden  apparition  of  armed  men  on  their  deck,  and  being  en- 
tirely unarmed  and  unprepared,  either  ran  down  below  or 
shouted  they  surrendered,  and  in  two  minutes  the  Venetians 
were  masters  of  the  vessel. 

"  Back  to  the  Pluto,"  Francis  shouted ;  "  the  vessels  will  tear 
their  sides  out ! " 

Almost  as  suddenly  as  they  had  invaded  the  decks  of  the 
galley  the  Venetians  regained  their  own  vessel,  leaving  the 
lieutenant  with  his  fifty  men  on  board  the  prize.  The  lashings 
were  cut,  the  Pluto's  helm  put  up,  and  she  sheered  away  from 
her  prize.  Her  bulwarks  were  broken  and  splintered  where  she 
had  ground  against  the  other  vessel  in  the  sea,  and  Rinaldo  soon 
reported  that  some  of  the  seams  had  opened  and  the  water  was 
coming  in. 

"  Set  the  carpenter  and  some  of  the  hands  to  work  to  caulk 
the  seams  as  well  as  they  can  from  the  inside,  and  set  a  gang  to 
work  at  the  pumps  at  once.  It  is  unfortunate  that  it  is  blowing 
so  hard.  If  the  wind  had  gone  down  instead  of  rising,  we  would 
have  recaptured  the  whole  fleet  one  by  one." 

The  Pluto  was  kept  within  a  short  distance  of  the  captured 
vessel,  and  Parucchi  presently  shouted  out  that  he  had  freed 
two  hundred  prisoners. 

"Arm  them  at  oncel"  Francis  shouted  back.    "Extinguish 


308  DISMASTED. 

your  light  and  board  the  vessel  whose  light  you  see  on  your 
starboard  bow  ;  I  will  take  the  one  to  port.  When  you  have 
captured  her,  lower  the  sails  of  both  vessels;  I  will  do  the 
same.  You  will  keep  a  little  head  sail  set,  so  as  to  keep  them 
before  the  wind ;  but  do  not  show  more  than  you  can  help.  I 
wish  the  rest  of  the  fleet  to  outrun  us  as  soon  as  possible." 

The  Pluto  sheered  off  from  the  prize  and  directed  her  course 
towards  the  vessel  nearest  to  her,  which  she  captured  as  easily 
as  she  had  done  the  preceding ;  but  this  time  not  only  were  her 
bulwarks  stove  in,  but  the  chain-plates  were  carried  away ;  and 
the  main-mast,  no  longer  supported  by  its  shrouds,  fell  over  the 
side  with  a  crash. 

This  vessel  had  but  a  hundred  prisoners  on  board.  They  were 
wild  with  astonishment  and  delight  when  they  found  that  their 
vessel  had  been  recaptured.  Francis  told  them  to  keep  by  him 
through  the  night,  as  possibly  he  might  need  their  assistance. 

For  some  hours  the  gale  increased ;  the  Pluto  lay  head  to  it, 
her  mast  serving  as  a  floating  anchor.  As  soon  as  the  lights 
of  the  Genoese  squadron  disappeared  in  the  distance  Francis 
hoisted  a  lantern  on  his  main-mast,  as  a  signal  to  the  other 
vessels  to  keep  near  him. 

As  soon  as  day  broke,  the  galley  they  had  last  recaptured 
was  seen  half  a  mile  away,  while  the  two  others  could  be  made 
out  some  six  miles  to  leeward.  The  gale  died  out  soon  after 
daybreak,  and  Francis  at  once  set  his  crew  to  work  to  get  the 
mast  on  board,  and  to  ship  it  by  its  stump. 

It  was  a  difficult  undertaking,  for  the  vessel  was  rolling 
heavily.  It  was  first  got  alongside,  two  ropes  were  passed 
over  it,  and  it  was  parbuckled  on  board.  Shears  were  made 
of  two  spars,  and  the  end  was  placed  against  the  stump,  which 


THE    FOUR   GALLEYS.  309 

projected  six  feet  above  the  deck.  By  the  aid  of  the  shears  it 
was  hoisted  erect  and  lashed  to  the  stump,  wedges  were  driven 
in  to  tighten  the  lashings,  and  it  was  then  firmly  stayed  ;  and 
by  the  afternoon  it  was  in  readiness  for  sail  to  be  hoisted  again. 
By  this  time  Parucchi,  with  the  vessel  he  had  captured,  was 
alongside.  The  Lion  of  St.  Mark  was  hoisted  to  the  main- 
mast of  the  Pluto,  and  three  similar  banners  were  run  up  by 
the  other  vessels,  the  crews  shouting  and  cheering  with  wild 
enthusiasm. 


CHAPTER  XVII. 

AN   UNGRATEFUL  REPUBLIC. 

|T  is  glorious,  Francis,"  Matteo  said,  "  to  think  that 
we  should  have  recaptured  four  of  our  ships !" 

"  It  is  very  good  as  far  as  it  goes,"  Francis 
replied,  "but  it  might  have  been  a  great  deal 
better.  If  it  hadn't  been  for  the  storm  we  might  have  picked 
them  all  up  one  by  one.  Each  vessel  we  took  the  stronger  we 
became,  and  I  had  calculated  upon  our  capturing  the  greater 
number;  but  in  such  a  sea  I  don't  think  we  could  possibly 
capture  more  than  we  did." 

"  I  should  think  not,"  Matteo  said.  "  I  had  never  dreamt  of 
doing  more  than  recovering  the  Pluto,  and  when  you  first  talked 
about  that  it  seemed  almost  like  madness.  I  don't  think  one 
of  us  had  the  slightest  belief  in  the  possibility  of  the  thing 
when  you  first  proposed  it." 

"I  thought  it  was  to  be  managed  somehow,"  Francis  said. 
"  It  would  have  been  a  shame  indeed  if  a  hundred  and  fifty 
men  were  to  be  kept  prisoners  for  a  fortnight  or  three  weeks 
by  a  third  of  their  number." 

"  Well,  certainly  no  one  would  have  thought  of  making  the 
attempt  if  you  had  not  proposed  it,  Francis.  I  believe  even 
if  you  were  to  propose  our  sailing  north  and  capturing  Genoa, 


HOMEWARD   BOUND.  311 

there  is  not  a  man  on  board  but  would  follow  you  willingly, 
with  the  firm  conviction  that  you  would  succeed." 

"  In  that  case,  Matteo,"  Francis  said,  laughing,  it  is  very 
lucky  for  you  that  I  am  not  at  all  out  of  my  mind.  Signal  now 
to  Parucchi  to  lower  his  boats  and  come  on  board  with  our 
men.  We  may  fall  in  yet  with  another  Genoese  squadron,  and 
may  as  well  have  our  full  complement  on  board,  especially  as 
Parucchi  has  found  two  hundred  men  already  on  board  the 
vessel  we  captured." 

Parucchi  and  his  men  soon  transferred  themselves  to  the 
Pluto,  and  the  four  vessels  hoisted  their  sails  and  made  for  the 
south.  They  had  learned  from  their  captives  that  the  squadron 
had  already  passed  through  the  Straits  of  Messina,  and  that 
it  was  at  Messina  they  had  stopped  and  taken  in  provision 
two  days  before.  Indeed,  when,  late  in  the  afternoon,  the  sky 
cleared  and  the  sun  shone  out,  they  saw  the  mountains  of 
Calabria  on  their  left.  Learning  from  the  captives  that  no 
Genoese  vessels  had  been  seen  in  the  straits  as  they  passed 
through,  Francis  did  not  hesitate  to  order  the  course  to  be 
shaped  for  the  straits  instead  of  sailing  round  Sicily,  as  he  would 
have  done  had  there  been  any  chance  of  falling  in  with  a  hos- 
tile squadron  in  passing  between  the  islands  and  the  mainland. 

"  I  should  like  to  have  seen  the  face  of  the  commander  of 
the  Genoese  squadron  this  morning,"  Matteo  said,  "  when  he 
discovered  that  four  of  his  vessels  were  missing.  He  can  hardly 
have  supposed  that  they  were  lost,  for  although  the  wind  was 
strong,  it  blew  nearly  dead  aft,  and  there  was  nothing  of  a  gale 
to  endanger  well-handled  ships.  I  almost  wonder  that  he  did 
not  send  back  the  two  fully  manned  galleys  he  had  with  him 
to  search  for  us." 


312  A  RAPTUROUS  RECEPTION.' 

"  Perhaps  he  did,"  Francis  said  ;  "  but  he  would  have  been 
a  hundred  miles  further  north  by  daybreak,  and  it  would  have 
taken  him  a  couple  of  days  to  get  back  to  where  we  were 
lying." 

No  hostile  sail  was  seen  during  the  voyage  back  to  Venice. 
Francis  remained  in  command  of  the  little  squadron,  for  the 
captains  and  many  of  the  superior  officers  had  been  transferred 
to  the  galley  of  the  officer  in  command  of  the  squadron,  and 
Francis  happened  to  be  the  only  second  officer  on  board  any  of 
the  four  ships. 

Great  care  was  observed  when  they  approached  Venice,  as, 
for  aught  they  knew,  Doria's  squadron  might  be  blockading  the 
port.  The  Genoese  fleet,  however,  was  still  cruising  on  the 
coast  of  Dalmatia,  capturing  port  after  port  of  the  Venetian  pos- 
sessions there.  The  four  vessels  passed  through  the  channel  of 
the  Lido  with  their  colours  flying. 

When  first  observed  from  the  watch-tower  of  Venice  they  were 
supposed  to  form  part  of  the  squadron  of  Zeno,  but  as  soon  as 
they  cast  anchor,  and  the  news  spread  that  they  were  four  of 
Pisani's  galleys  which  had  been  recaptured  from  the  Genoese 
the  delight  of  the  population  was  immense.  The  ships  were 
speedily  surrounded  by  a  fleet  of  boats,  containing  relatives 
and  friends  of  those  taken  prisoners  at  the  battle  of  Pola, 
and  the  decks  were  crowded  with  persons  inquiring  after 
their  friends,  or  embracing  with  delight  those  whom  they  had 
an  hour  before  believed  to  be  either  dead  or  immured  in  the 
dungeons  of  Genoa. 

One  of  the  first  to  appear  was  Polani,  who  had  early 
received  the  news  by  a  swift  boat  from  one  of  his  ships  in  the 
port  that  the  Pluto  was  one  of  the  vessels  entering  the  harbour. 


"HOW   DID   IT  ALL  COME  ABOUT."  313 

"  What  miracle  is  this,  Francis  ? "  he  asked,  as  he  warmly 
embraced  his  young  friend. 

"  Not  a  miracle  at  all,  Messer  Polani.  The  Genoese  fancied 
that  a  guard  of  fifty  men  was  amply  sufficient  to  keep  a 
hundred  and  fifty  Venetians  captives,  and  we  taught  them  their 
mistake." 

"  It  wasn't  we,"  Matteo  put  in,  as  he  shook  hands  with  his 
kinsman.  "  We  had  no  more  idea  of  escaping  than  we  had  of 
flying;  the  whole  thing  was  entirely  the  work  of  Francisco  here." 

"  I  might  have  been  sure  the  Genoese  would  not  keep  you 
long,  Francisco,"  Polani  said  ;  "  and  the  girls  and  I  might  have 
spared  ourselves  the  pain  of  fretting  for  you.  But  how  did  it 
all  come  about  ?  " 

"  If  you  will  take  me  to  the  Piazza,  in  your  gondola  I  will 
tell  you  all  about  on  the  way,"  Francis  replied ;  "  for,  absurd 
as  it  seems,  I  am  the  senior  officer  of  the  squadron,  and  must, 
I  suppose,  report  to  the  council  what  has  happened." 

"  Take  me  too,  kinsman  "  Matteo  said ;  "  I  know  Francisco 
so  well  that  I  am  quite  sure  that  of  himself  he  will  never  tell 
the  facts  of  this  affair,  and  will  simply  say  that  we  broke  out, 
avoiding  all  mention  of  his  share  in  it,  and  how  it  was  that 
under  his  orders  we  recaptured  the  other  ships." 

"  I  think  that  a  very  good  plan,  Matteo ;  so  do  you  come 
with  us,  and  you  shall  tell  me  all  about  it  instead  of  my  hearing 
it  from  Francis,  and  I  will  take  care  the  council  know  the  truth 
of  the  matter. 

"  The  admiral  got  safely  back,  I  hope  ?  "  Francis  asked.  "  We 
saw  that  his  galley,  with  five  others,  broke  through  the  Genoese 
fleet  and  got  safely  away,  but  of  course  we  knew  not  whether 
the  brave  admiral  was  himself  hurt." 


3H  PISANI  IMPRISONED. 

"  He  arrived  here  safely,"  Polani  replied  ;  "  but  knowing  the 
Venetians  as  you  do  you  will  be  scarcely  surprised  to  hear  that 
he  has  been  sentenced  to  six  months'  imprisonment  for  losing 
the  battle." 

"  But  that  is  shameful ! "  Francis  exclaimed  indignantly.  "  I 
heard  from  our  captain,  who  was  present  at  the  council,  that 
Pisani  was  opposed  to  fighting,  and  that  he  was  only  overruled 
by  the  proveditors.  It  is  shameful !  I  will  go  on  shore  and 
make  my  report,  and  then  I  will  come  back  to  you,  for  I  swear 
that  not  another  blow  will  I  strike  on  behalf  of  the  republic  as 
long  as  Pisani  is  in  prison." 

"  It  is  a  bad  business  my  lad,"  Polani  said ;  "  but  you  know 
that  Pisani,  popular  as  he  is  with  the  people,  has  few  friends 
among  the  nobles.  They  are  jealous  of  his  fame  and  popu- 
larity, and,  to  say  the  truth,  he  has  often  irritated  them  by  his 
bluntness  and  his  disregard  for  their  opinion  and  rank,  conse- 
quently they  seized  upon  his  defeat  as  an  occasion  for  accusing 
him,  and  it  was  even  a  question  in  the  council  of  taking  his  life, 
and  he  may  be  considered  fortunate  in  getting  off  with  the 
sentence  of  six  months'  imprisonment.  I  do  not  think  he  will 
have  to  remain  very  long  in  confinement.  We  may  expect  the 
Genoese  fleet  here  in  a  few  days,  for  the  Paduan  army  is 
already  moving,  as  we  heard  last  night ;  no  do  doubt  it  is  going  to 
co-operate  with  the  fleet.  Once  the  danger  presses,  the  populace 
will  demand  Pisani's  release.  There  have  already  been  demon- 
strations, and  shouts  of  '  Viva  Pisani ! '  have  been  raised  in  the 
Piazza..  At  any  rate,  Francis,  let  me  advise  you  most  strongly 
not  to  suffer  any  expression  of  your  feelings  concerning  him 
to  escape  you  before  the  council.  I  need  scarcely  say  it  would 
r  do  no  good  to  the  admiral,  and  would  set  the  whole  of 


BEFORE  THE  COUNCIL.  315 

his  enemies  against  you.  It  is  no  affair  of  yours  if  the  governors 
of  Venice  behave  ungratefully  to  one  who  deserves  well  at  their 
hands,  and  you  have  made  more  than  enough  enemies  by 
mingling  in  my  affairs  without  drawing  upon  yourself  more  foes 
by  your  championship  of  Pisani." 

"  I  will,  of  course,  follow  your  counsel,"  Francis  said ;  "  but 
I  will  certainly  serve  the  state  no  more  until  Pisani  is  freed." 

Several  of  the  councillors  were  already  assembled  on  hearing 
the  strange  news  that  four  of  the  ships  which  had  been  captured 
by  the  Genoese  had  entered  port.  Francis,  on  announcing  his 
errand,  was  at  once  shown  in  to  them.  Polani  accompanied  him, 
explaining  his  presence  to  the  council  by  saying : 

"  I  have  ventured,  signers,  to  accompany  my  young  friend 
here  in  order  that  I  may  give  you  a  much  further  detail  of  the 
affair  in  which  he  has  been  engaged  than  you  are  likely  to 
hear  from  his  own  lips.  I  have  just  come  on  shore  from  his 
ship,  the  Pluto,  and  have  heard  the  story  from  my  kinsman, 
Matteo  Giustiniani." 

"  We  have  surely  seen  this  young  gentleman  before,  Messer 
Polani  ?  "  one  of  the  council  said. 

"You  have,  signor,"  Polani  replied.  "You  may  remember 
that  he  greatly  distinguished  himself  at  the  fight  of  Antium, 
was  sent  home  by  the  admiral  with  his  despatches,  and  had  the 
honour  of  receiving  from  you  the  thanks  of  the  republic  and  the 
gift  of  citizenship." 

"  I  remember  now,"  the  councillor  said ;  and  a  murmur  $f 
assent  from  the  others  showed  that  they  also  recalled  the 
circumstance.  "  Is  he  again  the  bearer  of  despatches  from  the 
officer  in  command  of  the  little  squadron  which,  as  it  seems, 
has  just,  by  some  miracle,  entered  the  port;  and  how  is  i> 


316  FRANCIS  TELLS  HIS  STORY. 

that    the    officer    did    not    present    himself    in   person  before 
us?" 

"  The  officer  has  presented  himself,"  Polani  said.  "  Messer 
Hammond  is  in  command  of  the  four  ships  which  have  just 
arrived.  Not  only  is  he  in  command  by  virtue  of  senior  rank,  but 
it  is  to  him  that  their  recapture  from  the  Genoese  is  entirely  due." 

There  was  a  murmur  of  incredulity  from  the  circle  of  coun- 
cillors, but  Polani  went  on  quietly. 

"  It  may  seem  well-nigh  impossible  to  you,  signors,  but  what 
I  say  is  strictly  true.  If  Messer  Hammond  will  first  relate  to 
you  the  broad  facts  of  the  recapture  of  the  ships  I  will  furnish 
you  with  such  details  as  he  may  omit." 

Francis  then  briefly  related  the  events  which  had  led  to  the 
capture  of  the  four  galleys.  He  explained  that  by  the  death  of 
the  captain  he,  as  second  officer,  succeeded  to  the  command  of 
the  Pluto,  and  that  afterwards,  being  captured  by  the  Genoese, 
Signer  Parucchi,  the  sole  other  surviving  officer,  and  ten  gentle- 
men belonging  to  noble  families  and  serving  as  volunteers  on 
board  the  Pluto,  were  confined  in  one  hold  of  that  ship  on  her  * 
voyage  as  a  prize  to  Genoa,  the  crew  being  shut  up  in  the  other ; 
that  by  working  at  night  they  had  effected  a  junction  with  the 
crew,  and  choosing  a  stormy  night  when  any  noise  that  might 
be  made  would  not  be  heard  on  board  the  ship,  they  made  their 
way  up  to  the  deck  above  through  a  hole  they  had  cut  in  the 
planks,  and  overpowered  the  Genoese  almost  without  resistance ; 
that  they  had  then  in  the  darkness  ran  alongside  another  of  the 
ships  and  captured  her  with  equal  ease,  and  Parucchi,  with 
a  portion  of  the  crew  of  the  Pluto,  and  the  Venetian  prisoners  on 
board  that  ship  had  retaken  a  third,  while  the  Pluto  had 
captured  a  fourth. 


POLANI    FILLS   UP  THE    DETAILS.  317 

"It  may  seem  to  you,  signers,"  Francis  concluded,  "that  we 
might  in  the  same  way  have  recaptured  the  rest  of  our  ships, 
and  it  was  a  bitter  disappointment  to  me  that  we  failed  to  do 
so  ;  but  the  storm  was  so  high  and  the  sea  so  rough  that  it  was 
only  with  the  greatest  danger  and  difficulty  that  ships  could 
lie  alongside  each  other.  The  bulwarks  of  all  four  vessels  were 
greatly  damaged,  and  the  Pluto  lost  her  foremast  while  along- 
side the  last  ship  we  captured,  and  as  the  storm  was  increasing 
rather  than  abating  we  were,  to  our  great  chagrin,  obliged  to  let 
the  rest  escape,  since  in  striving  for  more  we  might  have  lost 
not  only  our  lives  but  the  vessels  we  had  taken." 

"  This  is  indeed  a  most  notable  achievement,  Messer  Hammond, 
and  the  restoration  of  four  ships  and  their  crews  at  the  present 
moment  is  of  great  importance  to  the  republic,  threatened  as  she 
is  with  invasion  by  land  and  sea.  Now,  Messer  Polani,  if  you 
will  give  us  the  full  details  of  which  you  spoke  we  shall  be  glad." 

Polani  then  related  to  the  council  the  full  story  of  the  means 
by  which  the  crew  of  the  Pluto  had  gained  their  liberty,  show- 
ing how  the  recapture  was  entirely  due  to  the  initiative  of 
Francis,  and  to  the  ingenuity  with  which  he  overcame  all  diffi- 
culties. He  ended  by  saying : 

"  My  kinsman,  Matteo,  said  that  should  you  doubt  whether 
this  account  is  not  tinged  by  his  friendship  and  partiality  for 
Messer  Hammond,  Signer  Parucchi  and  all  the  gentlemen  who 
were  confined  with  them  in  the  hold  can  substantiate  the 
account  that  he  has  given.  He  said  that  Parucchi's  evidence 
would  be  all  the  more  valuable  since  he  and  the  other  officers 
were  in  the  first  place  much  prejudiced  against  Messer  Ham- 
mond, deeming  it  an  indignity  that  one  so  young,  and  a 
foreigner  by  birth,  should  be  appointed  to  the  command  over 


318  FRANCIS  REFUSES  COMMAND. 

the  heads  of  others,  Venetian  born,  of  good  family,  and  his 
seniors  in  age.  The  circumstances  which  I  have  related  to  you 
have,  however,  completely  altered  his  opinion,  and  he  is  as 
enthusiastic  with  respect  to  Messer  Hammond's  conduct  as  are 
my  kinsman  and  all  on  board  the"  ship." 

"  I  remember  now,"  one  of  the  council  said,  "  that  we  had  a 
letter  from  the  admiral  in  the  spring  and  that  when  describing 
how  terribly  the  crews  had  been  diminished  and  weakened  by 
the  severity  of  the  winter,  he  said  that  the  sole  exception  was 
the  Pluto,  whose  crew  was  kept  up  to  their  full  strength  and  in 
excellent  health,  owing  entirely  to  the  care  and  attention  that 
Messer  Hammond,  the  officer  second  in  command,  had  bestowed 
upon  them." 

"  Thanks,  Messer  Polani,"  the  president  of  the  council  said, 
"  for  the  light  you  have  thrown  on  this  matter.  Messer  Ham- 
mond, it  is  difficult  to  over-estimate  the  services  that  you  have 
rendered  to  the  state.  We  shall  at  an  early  day  decide  in 
what  manner  most  fitly  to  reward  them,  and  in  the  meantime 
you  will  remain  in  command  of  the  squadron  you  have 
brought  in." 

Francis  returned  thanks  for  the  promise  of  the  president, 
but  expressed  his  desire  to  resign  the  command  of  the  squadron 
at  once. 

"  I  am  in  business,"  he  said,  "  with  Messer  Polani,  and 
although  for  a  short  time  I  abandoned  commerce  in  order  to 
sail  under  Admiral  Pisani,  I  now,  from  various  reasons,  desire, 
as  soon  as  my  successor  is  appointed,  to  return  to  my  work 
with  Signer  Polani.  I  desire  to  recommend  warmly  to  your 
excellencies  Signer  Parucchi,  who  is,  except  myself,  the  sole 
remaining  officer  of  the  Pluto.  He  seconded  me  most  admirably 


AMONG   FRIENDS.  319 

in  our  enterprise,  and  himself  commanded  at  the  recapture  of 
one  of  the  ships.  The  gentlemen  volunteers  also  worked  with 
the  greatest  energy  and  spirit.  Matteo  Giustiniani  has  been 
acting  as  third  officer,  and  to  him  also  the  thanks  of  the 
republic  are  due." 

On  leaving  the  ship  Messer  Polani  had  despatched  a  boat  to 
carry  to  his  house  the  news  that  Francis  had  returned,  and 
when  they  came  back  from  the  palace  they  found  Giulia 
anxiously  expecting  them,  and  a  few  minutes  later  Matteo 
arrived  with  his  brother  Rufino,  and  Maria.  The  latter  was 
far  more  effusive  in  her  greeting  of  Francis  than  Giulia  had 
been. 

"  Matteo  has  been  telling  us  all  about  it,  Francis,  and  that  he 
and  everyone  else  owed  their  escape  from  the  dungeons  of 
Genoa  entirely  to  your  cleverness." 

"  Not  so  much  to  his  cleverness,  Maria,"  Matteo  corrected, 
"although  he  is  wonderful  in  inventing  things,  but  to  his 
energy,  determination,  and  steadfastness.  There  was  not" 
one  of  us  but  regarded  a  visit  to  the  dungeons  of  Genoa  as  a 
foregone  conclusion,  and  when  Francis  spoke  of  our  recaptur- 
ing the  Pluto  as  if  it  were  the  easiest  and  most  natural  thing  in 
the  world,  it  was  as  much  as  we  could  do  not  to  laugh  in  his  face. 
However,  he  set  about  it  as  quietly  and  calmly  as  if  he  were 
carrying  on  the  regular  work  of  a  ship.  We  gradually  caught 
some  of  his  spirit,  and  when  we  began  to  see  that  there  was  a 
method  in  his  madness  did  our  best  to  carry  out  his  orders." 

"  It  is  wonderful,"  Maria  said  ;  "  and  do  you  know,  Francisco, 
that  when  we  first  knew  you,  after  you  had  rescued  us  from 
the  attack  on  the  canal,  I  absolutely  thought  that  though  you 
were  brave  and  straightforward  and  honourable,  yet  that  by 


320  FRANCIS    EXPLAINS. 

the  side  of  our  own  people  of  your  age  you  were  rather  stupid ; 
and  ever  since  then  I  have  been  learning  how  mistaken  I  was." 

Francis  laughed.  "  I  think  your  estimate  of  me  was  correct 
enough,"  he  said.  You  see  people  are  often  stupid  one  way 
and  sharp  another.  Matteo  will  tell  you  I  was  far  behind  most 
of  those  in  the  seminary  in  learning  lessons,  and  certainly  when 
it  came  to  talking  and  bandying  jokes  I  had  no  chance  at  all. 
I  suppose  that  every  lady  I  have  ever  spoken  to  when  I 
have  been  with  you  at  entertainments  has  thought  me  excep- 
tionally stupid  ;  and  I  am  sure  I  am  in  most  things,  only  I 
suppose  I  have  got  a  fair  share  of  common  sense  and  a  habit 
of  thinking  for  myself.  There  was  no  cleverness  at  all  in  any- 
thing that  Matteo  is  telling  you  of.  It  was  just  the  same  here 
as  it  was  when  I  was  in  that  cell  near  Tunis.  I  wanted  to  get 
out.  I  supposed  there  must  be  some  way  out  if  I  could  but 
discover  it,  and  so  I  sat  down  to  think  how  it  was  to  be  done  ; 
and  of  course,  after  trying  in  my  mind  every  possible  scheme, 
I  hit  upon  the  right  one.  There  certainly  was  nothing  clever 
in  that." 

"But  I  have  heard  nothing  about  it  yet,"  Giulia  said;  "and 
everyone  else  seems  to  know  how  it  was  done." 

"  Matteo,  do  you  tell  Giulia,"  Maria  ordered.  "  I  have  lots  of 
questions  to  ask  Francis." 

"  By  the  way,  Francis,"  Messer  Polani  said,  "  you  will  be 
glad  to  hear  that  I  have  succeeded  in  getting  home  your  man 
Giuseppi.  He  returned  two  days  ago,  and  I  have  no  doubt  is 
somewhere  below  waiting  to  see  you." 

"  I  will  go  and  see  him  at  once,"  Francis  said,  hurrying  away, 
*  I  am  indeed  glad  to  knew  that  you  have  rescued  him." 

Maria  laughed  as  the  door  closed  behind  Francis.    "  There. 


"  HE  IS  QUITE   RIGHT,   MARIA."  321 

Rufino,"  she  said,  turning  to  him,  "  you  pretend  sometimes  to 
be  jealous  of  Francisco  Hammond ;  and  there  you  see,  just 
when  I  have  said  I  have  lots  of  questions  to  ask  him,  and  five 
minutes  after  my  arrival  here  to  greet  him,  he  races  away 
without  a  word  directly  he  hears  that  his  man  Giuseppi  has 
returned  ' 

"And  he  is  quite  right,  Maria,"  Matteo  said  indignantly. 
"  Giuseppi  would  give  his  life  for  Francisco,  and  the  two  have 
been  together  every  day  for  the  last  six  or  seven  years.  I  don't 
doubt  the  faithful  fellow  is  crying  with  joy  now.  Francisco  is 
quite  right  not  to  keep  him  waiting  for  a  minute." 

"  Perhaps  \  cried  for  joy,  too,  Master  Matteo,"  Maria  said. 

"  I  believe  I  did  see  tears  in  your  eyes,  Maria ;  but  I  put 
them  down  *o  my  own  account.  You  would  naturally  be 
delighted  to  know  that  your  brother-in-law  was  safe  and  sound, 
to  say  nothing?  of  the  fact  that  the  family  would  be  spared  the 
expense  of  sending  a  thousand  ducats  or  so  to  ransom  him." 

"  A  thousand  ducats,  Matteo  !  A  thousand  soldi  would  more 
nearly  represent  your  value,  if  the  Genoese  did  but  know  it. 
But  why  don't  you  tell  Giulia  your  adventures,  as  I  ordered 
you  ?  " 

"  Because  Giulia  would  very  much  rather  hear  them  from 
Francisco's  lips,  and  I  have  no  doubt  he  will  be  equally  glad  to 
tell  her  himsf  If,  though  certainly  he  is  a  bad  hand  at  recount- 
ing his  own  doings.  However,  he  shall  have  the  pleasure  of 
telling  her  of  it,  and  I  can  fill  up  the  details  for  her  afterwards." 

Two  days  later  a  decree  was  published  by  the  council  stating 
that,  in  consideration  of  the  very  great  service  rendered  to  the 
state  by  Francisco  Hammond,  a  citizen  of  Venice,  in  recaptur- 
ing four  galleys  from  the  Genoese,  the  council  decreed  the 


322  A  PENSION. 

settlement  upon  him  for  life  of  a  pension  of  three  hundred 
ducats  a  year. 

"  You  will  not  want  it,  Francisco,"  Messer  Polani  said  as  he 
brought  in  the  news,  "  for  I  intend  at  the  end  of  these  troubles 
to  take  you  as  a  partner  in  my  business.  I  told  your  father 
that  I  should  do  so;  and  you  have  not  only  proved  yourself 
earnest  in  business,  quick  at  learning,  and  full  of  resources, 
but  you  have  vastly  added  to  the  debt  of  gratitude  which  first 
caused  me  to  make  the  proposition,  by  again  saving  my  daugh- 
ters from  falling  into  the  hands  of  their  enemy.  I  told  your 
father  that  I  should  regard  you  in  the  light  of  a  son,  and  I 
do  so  regard  you,  and  as  a  son  of  whom  I  have  every  reason 
to  be  proud. 

"  I  need  no  thanks,  my  lad.  I  am  still,  and  shall  always 
remain,  your  debtor.  You  have  very  much  more  than  fulfilled 
my  expectations,  and  I  shall  be  glad  to  place  some  of  the 
burden  of  my  business  upon  your  shoulders.  There  is  another 
matter  which  I  have  long  had  in  my  mind,  but  of  which  I  will 
not  speak  just  at  present.  Thus,  then,  the  three  hundred 
ducats  which  you  will  receive  each  year  from  the  state  may 
not  be  needed  by  you.  Still  you  are  to  be  congratulated  upon 
the  grant,  because  being  the  recipient  of  a  pension  for  distin- 
guished services  will  add  to  your  weight  and  influence  in  the 
city  ;  and  so  long  as  you  do  not  need  it — and  no  man  can  say 
what  may  occur  in  the  course  of  years  to  hinder  the  trade  of 
Venice — you  can  bestow  the  sum  annually  upon  the  poor  of 
the  city,  and  thus  increase  your  popularity." 

"  I  shall  be  happy  to  do  that,  signor,"  Francis  said,  "  al- 
though it  seems  to  me  that  popularity  is  of  little  value  in 
Venice.  It  has  not  saved  the  man  whom  a  short  time  since 


POPULARITY.  .  323 

the  peopic  hailed  as  their  father  from  unmerited  disgrace  and 
imprisonment." 

"  It  has  not,  Francisco,  but  it  has  saved  his  life.  You  may 
take  my  word  for  it  that  the  proposal  absolutely  made  in  the 
council  for  the  execution  of  Pisani  would  have  been  voted  had 
it  not  been  for  fear  of  the  people ;  and  it  may  be  that  you  will 
yet  see  that  the  voice  of  the  people  will  bring  Pisani  from  his 
prison  long  before  the  expiration  of  his  term  of  imprisonment. 
Popularity  is  not  to  be  despised,  for  it  is  a  great  power.  That 
power  may  be  abused,  as  when  one,  having  gained  the  ear  of 
the  people,  leads  them  astray  for  his  own  base  ends,  and  uses 
the  popularity  he  has  gained  to  attack  and  hurl  from  power 
men  less  eloquent  and  less  gifted  in  the  arts  of  cajoling  the 
people,  but  more  worthy  than  himself.  But,  used  rightly, 
the  power  of  swaying  and  influencing  the  people  is  a  great 
one,  and  especially  valuable  in  a  city  like  Venice,  where  private 
enmities  and  private  feuds  are  carried  to  so  great  an  extent. 
Already  your  name  is  in  every  mouth.  Your  rescue  of  Pisani 
when  sorely  beset  by  the  enemy  has  been  the  theme  of  talk  in 
every  house;  and  this  feat,  which  retrieves  to  some  extent 
the  misfortune  of  Pola,  will  make  your  name  a  household  word 
in  Venice." 

Immediately  after  the  battle  of  Pola  the  Venetians  had 
entered  into  negotiations  with  Hungary  to  endeavour  to  detach 
that  power  from  the  league  against  them.  But  the  demands  of 
King  Louis  were  too  extravagant  to  be  accepted.  He  demanded 
the  cession  of  Trieste,  the  recognition  of  the  suzerainty  of 
his  crown  on  the  part  of  the  present  doge  and  all  his  successors, 
an  annual  tribute  of  one  hundred  thousand  ducats,  and  half  a 
million  of  ready  money.  This  demand  was  so  excessive  that 


324  THE  GENOESE  FLEET 

even  in  their  distress  the  Venetians  refused  to  accept  It,  and 
hastened  on  their  preparations  for  a  struggle  for  life  or  death. 

Fortunately  the  Genoese  continued  for  three  months  after 
their  success  at  Pola  to  capture  the  outlying  possessions  of 
Venice  instead  of  striking  at  the  capital.  Towards  the  end  of 
July  seventeen  Genoese  vessels  appeared  off  Pelestrina,  burned 
a  merchant  ship  lying  there,  and  spent  the  day  in  reconnoitring 
positions  and  in  taking  soundings  of  the  shallows  and  canals  off 
Brondolo.  They  then  sailed  away  for  Dalmatia. 

In  less  than  a  week  six  galleys  again  hove  in  sight ;  and 
Admiral  Giustiniani,  who  was  in  supreme  command  of  the 
forces,  issued  out  from  the  Lido  with  an  equal  number  of  ships 
to  give  them  battle.  On  his  way,  however,  a  black  object  was 
seen  in  the  water.  As  they  neared  it  this  was  seen  to  be  the 
head  of  a  swimmer.  He  was  soon  picked  up,  and  was  found 
to  be  a  Venetian  citizen  named  Savadia  who  had  been  captured 
by  the  enemy  but  had  managed  to  escape,  and  was  swimming 
towards  land  to  warn  his  countrymen  that  the  whole  Genoese 
fleet  of  forty-seven  sail,  under  Pietro  Doria,  was  close  at  hand, 
and  that  the  six  ships  in  the  offing  were  simply  a  decoy  to 
tempt  the  Venetians  to  come  out  and  give  battle. 

Giustiniani  at  once  returned  to  port,  and  scarcely  had  he 
done  so  than  the  whole  Genoese  fleet  made  its  appearance. 
They  approached  the  passage  of  the  Lido ;  but  the  respite  that 
had  been  afforded  them  had  enabled  the  Venetians  to  make 
their  preparations,  and  the  Genoese  found,  to  their  disappoint- 
ment, that  the  channels  of  the  Lido  and  Malamocco  were 
completely  closed  up  with  sunken  vessels,  palisades,  and  chains ; 
and  they  sailed  away  to  seek  another  entry  through  which 
they  could  strike  at  Venice. 


THE  BRONDOLO  CHANNEL.  325 

Had  the  same  precautions  that  had  proved  so  effective  at 
the  Lido  and  Malamocco  passages  been  taken  at  all  the  other 
channels  Venice  could  have  defied  all  the  efforts  of  Doria's 
fleet.  The  city  is  situated  on  a  group  of  small  islands  rising  in 
the  midst  of  a  shallow  basin  twenty-five  miles  long  and  five 
wide,  and  separated  from  the  sea  by  a  long  sand-bank  formed 
by  the  sediment  brought  down  by  the  rivers  Piave  and 
Adige. 

Through  this  sand-bank  the  sea  had  pierced  several  channels. 
Treporti,  the  northern  of  these  channels,  contained  water  only 
for  the  smallest  craft.  The  next  opening  was  known  as  the 
port  of  Lido,  and  separated  the  island  of  San  Nicolo  from 
Malamocco.  Five  miles  farther  on  is  the  passage  of  Malamocco, 
between  that  island  and  Pelestrina.  South-west  of  Pelestrina 
lay  Brondolo,  behind  which  stood  Chioggia,  twenty  miles  distant 
from  Venice.  The  southern  point  of  Brondolo  was  only  separ- 
ated by  a  small  channel — called  the  Canal  of  Lombardy — from 
the  mainland. 

Unfortunately  at  Brondolo  the  channel  had  not  been  closed. 
All  preparations  had  been  made  for  doing  so,  but  the  work  had 
been  postponed  until  the  last  moment  in  order  that  trading 
vessels  might  enter  and  leave  the  harbour,  the  Chioggians 
believing  that  there  was  sure  to  be  sufficient  warning  of  the 
approach  of  an  enemy  to  enable  them  to  close  the  entrance  in 
time.  The  sudden  appearance  of  Doria's  fleet  before  Brondolo 
upset  all  these  calculations,  and  the  Genoese  easily  carried  the 
position.  Little  Chioggia,  the  portion  of  the  town  separated 
from  the  rest  by  the  Canal  of  Santa  Caterina,  was  captured 
without  difficulty;  but  the  bridge  across  the  canal  was  strongly 
defended  by  bastions  and  redoubts,  and  here  Pietro  Emo  made 


326  THE  SIEGE  OF  CHIOGGIA. 

a  brave  stand  with  his  garrison  of  three  thousand  five  hundred 
men. 

The  enemy  at  once  erected  his  batteries,  and  on  the  i2th  of 
August  the  Genoese  opened  fire.  The  Venetians  replied  stoutly, 
and  for  three  days  a  heavy  cannonade  was  kept  upon  both  sides. 
Reinforcements  had  reached  the  garrison  from  Venice,  and  hour 
by  hour  swift  boats  brought  the  news  to  the  city  of  the  pro- 
gress of  the  fight.  So  far  all  seemed  going  on  well ;  the  Genoese 
had  suffered  heavily,  and  made  no  impression  upon  the  batteries 
at  the  head  of  the  bridge.  The  days  passed  in  Venice  in  a  state 
of  restless  disquietude.  It  was  hoped  and  believed  that  Chiog- 
gia  could  successfully  defend  itself ;  but  if  it  fell  the  consequence 
would  be  terrible. 

Already  the  Hungarians  had  overrun  the  Venetian  possessions 
on  the  mainland,  the  Lord  of  Padua  was  in  the  field  with  his 
army,  and  communication  was  cut  with  Ferrara,  their  sole  ally. 
Should  Chioggia  fall,  the  Genoese  fleet  would  enter  the  lagoons 
and  would  sail  by  the  great  channel  through  the  flats  from 
Chioggia  to  Venice,  and  their  light  galleys  could  overrun  the 
Whole  of  the  lagoons  and  cut  off  all  communication  with  the 
mainland,  and  starvation  would  rapidly  stare  the  city  in  the  face. 

Polani  made  all  preparations  for  the  worst.  Many  of  his 
Valuables  were  hidden  away  in  recesses  beneath  the  floors, 
others  were  taken  on  board  one  of  his  ships  in  the  port,  and 
this  was  held  in  readiness  to  convey  Giulia  and  Maria,  whose 
husband  had  willingly  accepted  Polani's  offer  to  endeavour 
to  carry  her  off  by  sea  with  Giulia  in  case  the  Genoese  should 
enter  the  city.  The  merchant  made  an  excursion  to  Chioggia 
with  Francis  to  see  for  hirrtself  how  things  were  going,  and  re- 
turned somewhat  reassured. 


STIRRING  UP  THE  SAILORS.  327 

Francis  spent  much  of  his  time  at  the  port  visiting  Polani's 
ships,  talking  to  the  sailors,  and  expressing  to  them  his  opinion 
that  the  Genoese  and  Paduans  would  never  have  dared  to  lay 
siege  to  Chioggia  had  they  not  known  that  Pisani  was  no 
longer  in  command  of  the  Venetian  forces.  "  I  regard  the 
present  state  of  affairs,"  he  said  over  and  over  again,  "as  a 
judgment  upon  the  city  for  its  base  ingratitude  to  the  brave 
admiral,  and  I  am  convinced  that  things  will  never  come  right 
until  we  have  him  again  in  command  of  our  fleet. 

"  Giustiniani  is  no  doubt  an  able  man ;  but  what  has  he  ever 
done  in  comparison  to  what  Pisani  has  accomplished  ?  Why 
should  we  place  our  only  hope  of  safety  in  the  hands  of  an  un- 
tried man.  I  warrant  if  Pisani  was  out  and  about  you  would 
see  Venice  as  active  as  a  swarm  of  bees,  pouring  out  against  our 
aggressors.  What  is  being  done  now?  Preparations  are  being 
made ;  but  of  what  kind  ?  Ships  are  sunk  in  the  channel ;  but 
what  will  be  the  use  of  this  if  Chioggia  falls  ?  The  canals  to  that 
place  will  be  blocked,  but  that  will  not  prevent  the  Genoese 
from  passing  in  their  light  boats  from  island  to  island  until  they 
enter  Venice  itself. 

"  Do  you  think  all  these  ships  would  be  lying  idly  here  if 
Pisani  were  in  command  ?  Talk  to  your  comrades,  talk  to  the 
sailors  in  the  port,  talk  to  those  on  shore  when  you  land,  and 
urge  everywhere  that  the  cry  should  be  raised  for  Pisani 's 
release  and  restoration  to  command." 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 

THE  RELEASE  OF  PISANI. 

|N  the  morning  of  the  I7th  the  party  were  sitting  at 
breakfast,  when  Giulia  suddenly  sprang  to  her  feet. 
"  Listen  !  "  she  exclaimed.  Her  father  and  Francis 
looked  at  her  in  surprise,  but  instinctively  listened 
for  whatever  sound  she  could  have  heard  ;  then  a  deep,  solemn 
sound  boomed  through  the  air. 

"It  is  the  bell  of  the  Campanile  tolling,"  the  merchant  ex- 
claimed. "  It  is  the  signal  for  all  citizens  to  take  up  arms.  Some 
terrible  news  has  arrived." 

Hastily  putting  on  his  armour,  the  merchant  started  to  St. 
Mark's,  accompanied  by  Francis,  who  put  on  a  steel  cap,  which 
he  preferred  to  the  heavy  helmet,  and  a  breast-plate.  A  crowd 
of  citizens  were  pursuing  the  same  direction.  The  numbers 
thickened  as  they  approached  the  Piazza,  which  they  found 
on  their  arrival  to  be  already  thronged  with  people,  who  were 
densely  packed  in  front  of  the  palace,  awaiting  an  explanation  of 
the  summons. 

There  was  a  look  of  deep  anxiety  on  every  face,  for  all  felt 
that  the  news  must  be  bad  indeed  which  could  have  necessitated 
such  a  call.  Presently  the  doge,  accompanied  by  the  council, 
appeared  in  the  balcony.  A  complete  silence  fell  upon  the 


"CHIOGGIA   HAS   FALLEN!"  329 

multitude,  the  bell  ceased  tolling,  and  not  the  slightest  sound 
disturbed  the  stillness.  One  of  the  councillors  stepped  to  the 
front,  for  the  doge  Contarini  was  now  seventy-two  years  old, 
and  his  voice  could  hardly  have  been  heard  over  so  wide  an 
area. 

"  Citizens  of  the  republic,  gather,  I  pray  you,  all  your  fortitude 
and  constancy  to  hear  the  news  which  I  have  to  tell.  It  is  bad 
news ;  but  there  is  no  reason  for  repining,  still  less  for  despair. 
If  Venice  has  but  confidence  in  herself,  such  as  she  has  through- 
out her  history  shown  when  danger  seemed  imminent,  be  assured 
that  we  shall  weather  this  storm  as  we  have  done  all  that  have 
preceded  it.  Chioggia  has.  fallen  !  " 

An  exclamation  of  pain  and  grief  went  up  from  the  crowd. 
The  speaker  held  up  his  hand  for  silence. 

"  Chioggia,  contrary  to  our  hopes  and  expectations,  has 
fallen ;  but  we  are  proud  to  say  it  has  fallen  from  no  lack  of 
bravery  on  the  part  of  its  defenders.  As  you  know,  for  six  days 
the  brave  podesta,  Emo,  and  his  troops  have  repulsed  every 
attack  ;  but  yesterday  an  unforeseen  accident  occurred.  While 
our  soldiers  were  holding  their  own,  as  usual,  a  Genoese  fire- 
ship  exploded  in  the  canal  behind  them.  The  idea  unfortu- 
nately seized  the  troops  that  the  bridge  was  on  fire.  The 
Genoese  shouted  '  The  bridge  is  in  flames  ! '  and  pressed  onward, 
and  our  soldiers  fell  back  in  some  confusion  towards  the  bridge. 
Here  Emo  with  four  brave  companions  made  a  noble  stand,  and 
for  a  time  checked  the  advance  of  the  foe ;  but  he  was  driven 
back.  There  was  no  time  to  destroy  the  communication  behind 
him ;  the  enemy  pressed  on,  and  mingled  with  our  retreating 
soldiers  entered  the  town.  And  so  Chioggia  was  taken.  Our 
loss  in  killed  is  said  to  be  eight  hundred  and  sixty  men ;  while 


330  VENICE  OPEN  TO  ATTACK. 

the  rest  of  the  garrison — four  thousand  in  number — were  taken 
prisoners." 

A  loud  cry  of  anguish  burst  from  the  crowd.  Numbers  of 
those  present  had  relatives  and  friends  among  the  garrison  of 
Chioggia ;  and  to  all  the  news  of  this  terrible  disaster  was  a  pro- 
found blow.  Venice  was  open  now  to  invasion.  In  a  few  hours 
the  enemy  might  appear  in  her  canals.  The  council  and  the 
nobles  endeavoured  to  dispel  the  feeling  of  despair  ;  while  some 
harangued  the  people  from  the  balconies,  others  went  down  and 
mingled  with  the  crowd,  assuring  them  that  all  was  not  yet  lost, 
that  already  messengers  had  been  despatched  to  Doria  and  the 
Lord  of  Padua,  asking  for  terms  of  peace ;  and  even  should 
these  be  refused  Venice  might  yet  defend  herself  until  Zeno 
arrived  with  his  fleet  to  their  rescue. 

The  doge  himself  received  deputations  of  the  citizens,  and,  by 
his  calmness  and  serenity,  did  much  to  allay  the  first  feeling  of 
terror  and  dismay ;  and  in  a  few  hours  the  city  recovered  its 
wonted  aspect  of  tranquillity.  The  next  morning  the  answer 
to  the  overtures  was  received.  The  Lord  of  Padua,  who  was 
doubtless  beginning  to  feel  some  misgiving  as  to  the  final  issue 
of  the  struggle,  declared  that  he  himself  was  not  unwilling  to 
treat  upon  certain  terms,  but  that  the  decision  must  rest  in  the 
hands  of  his  colleague.  Doria,  believing  that  Venice  was  now 
in  his  grasp,  rejected  the  idea  of  terms  with  scorn. 

"By  God's  faith,  my  lords  of  Venice,"  he  cried,  "ye  shall 
have  no  peace  from  the  Lord  of  Padua,  nor  from  our  commune 
of  Genoa,  until  I  have  put  a  bit  in  the  mouths  of  the  horses  of 
your  evangelist  of  St.  Mark ;  when  they  have  been  bridled  you 
shall  then,  in  sooth,  have  a  good  peace  ;  and  this  is  our  purpose 
and  that  of  our  commune  !  As  for  these  captives,  my  brethern," 


RESISTANCE  TO  THE  LAST.  331 

he  said,  pointing  to  some  Genoese  prisoners  of  rank  whom  the 
Venetians  had  sent  with  their  embassy  in  hopes  of  conciliating 
the  Genoese,  "  take  them  back ;  I  want  them  not ;  for  in  a  few 
days  I  am  coming  to  release  from  your  prisons  them  and  the 
rest." 

As  soon  as  the  message  was  received  the  bell  summoned  the 
popular  assembly  together,  and,  in  the  name  of  the  doge,  Pietro 
Mocenigo  described  to  them  the  terrible  nature  of  the  peril  that 
threatened  them,  told  them  that  after  the  insolent  reply  of 
Doria  there  was  now  no  hope  save  in  their  own  exertions,  and 
invited  all  to  rally  round  the  national  standard  for  the  protection 
of  their  hearths  and  homes.  The  reply  of  the  assembly  was 
unanimous ;  and  shouts  were  raised,  "  Let  us  arm  ourselves ;  let 
us  equip  and  man  what  galleys  are  in  the  arsenal ;  let  us  sally 
out  to  the  combat ;  it  is  better  to  die  in  the  defence  of  our 
country  than  to  perish  here  from  want." 

A  universal  conscription  was  at  once  ordered,  new  taxes 
were  imposed,  and  the  salaries  of  the  magistrates  and  civil 
functionaries  suspended.  All  business  came  to  a  stand-still,  and 
property  fell  to  a  fourth  of  its  former  value.  The  imposts  were 
not  found  adequate  to  produce  the  sums  required  and  a  new 
loan  at  five  per  cent,  was  decreed.  All  subscribed  to  the  utmost 
of  their  ability,  raising  the  enormous  sum  of  6,294,040  lire.  A 
new  captain-general  was  elected,  and  the  government  nominated 
Taddeo  Giustiniani  to  the  post. 

The  fortification  of  the  city  with  earthworks  was  commenced. 
Lines  of  defence  were  drawn  from  Lido  to  San  Spirito,  and  two 
wooden  towers  constructed  at  the  former  point  to  guard  the  pass 
of  San  Nicolo.  Events  succeeded  each  other  with  the  greatest 
rapidity,  and  all  these  matters  were  settled  within  thirty-six 


332  THE  PEOPLE  DEMAND  PISANI. 

hours  of  the  fall  of  Chioggia.  In  all  respects  the  people  at  first 
yielded  implicit  obedience  to  the  order  of  the  council ;  they  en- 
rolled themselves  for  service,  they  subscribed  to  the  loan,  they 
laboured  at  the  outworks ;  but  from  the  moment  the  appoint- 
ment of  Taddeo  Giustiniani  was  announced  they  grew  sullen. 
It  was  not  that  they  objected  to  the  new  captain-general,  who 
was  a  popular  nobleman,  but  every  man  felt  that  something  more 
than  this  was  required  in  such  an  emergency,  and  that  the  best 
man  that  Venice  could  produce  should  be  at  the  helm. 

The  sailors  of  the  port  were  the  first  to  move  in  the  matter, 
and  shouts  for  Vettore  Pisani  were  heard  in  the  streets.  Others 
took  up  the  cry,  and  soon  a  large  multitude  assembled  in  the 
Piazza,  and  with  menacing  shouts  demanded  that  Pisani  should 
be  freed  and  appointed.  So  serious  did  the  tumult  become 
that  the  council  was  summoned  in  haste.  Pisani — so  popular 
with  the  lower  class  that  they  called  him  their  father — was 
viewed  with  corresponding  dislike  and  distrust  by  the  nobles, 
who  were  at  once  jealous  of  his  fame  and  superiority,  and  were 
alarmed  at  a  popularity  which  could  have  made  him,  had  he 
chosen  it,  the  master  of  the  state. 

It  was  not,  therefore,  until  after  some  hours  of  stormy  debate 
that  they  decided  to  give  in  to  the  wishes  of  the  crowd,  which 
was  continually  growing  larger  and  more  threatening,  and  it 
was  late  in  the  evening  before  the  senators  deputed  by  the 
council,  followed  by  the  exulting  populace,  hurried  to  the  prison 
to  apprise  Pisani  that  he  was  free,  and  that  the  doge  and  senate 
were  expecting  him. 

Pisani  heard  the  message  without  emotion,  and  placidly 
replied  that  he  should  prefer  to  pass  the  night  where  he  was 
in  reflection,  and  would  wait  on  the  seignory  in  the  morning. 


PISANl'S  TRIUMPH.*  333 

At  daybreak  on  Friday,  the  ipth  of  August,  the  senatorial 
delegates  and  the  people,  accompanied  by  the  other  officers 
who  had  been  involved  in  the  disgrace  of  Pisani,  and  who  had 
now  been  freed,  reappeared  at  the  gates  of  the  prison.  These 
were  immediately  opened,  and  Pisani  appeared  with  his  usual 
expression  of  cheerfulness  and  good-humour  on  his  face.  He 
was  at  once  lifted  on  to  the  shoulders  of  some  sailors  and  borne 
in  triumph  to  the  palace  amid  the  deafening  cheers  of  the 
populace.  On  the  staircase  he  was  met  by  the  doge  and  sena- 
tors, who  saluted  him  cordially.  Mass  was  heard  in  the  chapel, 
and  Pisani  and  the  council  then  set  to  business,  and  were  for 
some  time  closeted  together. 

The  crowd  waited  outside  the  building  continuing  to  shout, 
and  when  Pisani  issued  out  from  the  palace  he  was  seized  and 
carried  in  triumph  to  his  house  in  San  Fantino.  As  he  was 
passing  the  Campanile  of  St.  Mark,  his  old  pilot,  Marino 
Corbaro,  a  remarkably  able  seaman,  but  a  perpetual  grumbler 
against  those  in  authority,  met  him,  and  elbowing  his  way 
through  the  crowd,  drew  close  to  him,  loudly  shouting  at  the 
same  time : 

"  Now  is  the  time,  admiral,  for  revenging  yourself  by 
seizing  the  dictatorship  of  this  city ;  behold  all  are  at  your 
service.  All  are  willing  at  this  very  instant  to  proclaim  you 
prince  if  you  choose." 

"  The  loyalty  of  Pisani's  nature  was  so  affronted  by  this  offer, 
that,  in  a  fury  of  rage,  he  leaned  forward  and  struck  Corbaro  a 
heavy  blow  with  his  fist,  and  then  raising  his  voice  shouted  to 
those  about  him  : 

"  Let  none  who  wish  me  well  say, '  Viva  Pisani ! '  but,  '  Viva 
San  Marco  ! ' " 


334  "WE  ARE  YOURS." 

And  the  populace  then  shouted,  "  Viva  San  Marco  and  our 
Father  Pisani ! " 

No  sooner  had  Pisani  reached  his  house  than  the  news  was 
bruited  about  that  the  admiral  had  been  merely  appointed 
governor  of  Lido,  and  that  Giustiniani  remained  in  command  of 
the  navy.  The  people  were  furious ;  and  a  deputation  of  600 
waited  upon  Pisani  and  said  : 

"  We  are  yours.     Command  us  as  you  will." 

Pisani  told  them  that  it  was  for  the  republic  and  not  for 
him  to  command  their  services.  The  deputation  then  went 
to  the  council,  and  declared  in  the  name  of  fifty  thousand 
Venetians,  that  not  a  man  would  embark  on  the  galleys  until 
Pisani  received  his  command  as  captain-general  of  all  the 
forces  of  the  republic  by  land  and  sea.  The  Council  of  Ten, 
finding  it  impossible  to  resist  the  popular  demand,  and  terrified 
at  the  idea  of  the  tumult  that  a  refusal  would  arouse,  at  last 
agreed  to  their  request. 

Fortunately  for  the  republic,  the  four  days  which  elapsed 
between  the  fall  of  Chioggia  and  the  appointment  of  Pisani  to 
the  supreme  command  had  not  been  utilized  by  the  enemy. 
Carrara  and  Doria  had  always  been  at  variance  as  to  their 
plans  of  operations,  and  as  usual  they  differed  now.  The 
Lord  of  Padua  urged  the  necessity  for  following  up  their  suc- 
cess by  an  instant  attack  upon  Venice,  while  Doria  insisted 
upon  carrying  out  his  original  plan  and  trusting  as  much  to 
starvation  as  to  military  operations.  He,  however,  gradually 
pushed  forward  two  outposts  at  Poreja  and  Malamocco,  and  on 
the  latter  island,  at  a  distance  of  three  miles  from  Venice,  he 
erected  a  battery  many  of  whose  shot  fell  at  San  Spirito. 

Francis  had  borne  his  share  in  the  events  which  had  led  to 


"  I   WAS   A   TRUE   PROPHET."  335 

the  installation  of  Pisani  in  the  supreme  command.  He  had 
at  first  instigated  the  sailors  of  Polani  to  raise  a  cry  in  the 
streets  for  the  restoration  of  the  admiral,  and  had  gone  about 
with  two  or  three  of  his  friends  mingling  with  knots  of  persons, 
and  urging  that  the  only  hope  of  the  republic  lay  in  the  energy 
and  talent  of  Pisani.  Even  Matteo  had  joined  him,  although 
Taddeo  Giustiniani  was  his  own  uncle  ;  but,  as  the  lad  said, 
"  what  matters  it  about  relationship  now  ?  what  will  become  of 
relationship,  if  the  Genoese  and  Paduans  land  here,  rase  the 
city  to  the  ground,  and  scatter  us  over  the  face  of  the  earth  ? 
No.  When  it  comes  to  a  question  of  ordinary  command,  of 
course  I  should  go  with  my  family ;  but  when  Venice  is  in 
danger,  and  only  one  man  can  save  her,  I  should  vote  for  him 
whoever  the  other  may  be." 

Polani  had  also  exerted  the  great  influence  he  possessed 
among  the  commercial  classes,  and  had  aided  the  efforts  of 
Francis  by  giving  leave  to  the  sailors  of  all  his  ships  in  port  to 
go  on  shore.  A  few  hours  after  Pisani's  release  the  merchant, 
accompanied  by  Francis,  called  upon  him. 

"  Welcome,  my  friends,"  he  said  heartily.  "  Well,  you  see, 
Messer  Hammond,  that  I  was  a  true  prophet,  and  that  I  have 
had  my  share  of  the  dungeon.  However,  we  need  not  talk  of 
that  now,  I  am  up  to  my  eyes  in  business." 

"I  have  no  doubt  of  that,  admiral,"  Polani  said;  "I  have 
called  to  offer  every  ship  I  have  in  the  harbour  for  the  defence 
of  the  city.  I  myself  will  continue  to  pay  their  crews  as  at 
present.  Use  the  vessels  as  you  like.  Make  fire-ships  of  them 
if  you  will,  I  can  afford  the  loss." 

"Thanks,  my  friend,"  the  admiral  said;  "we  shall  find  a 
use  for  them,  never  fear.  As  for  you,  Messer  Hammond,  even 


336  "HE  IS  A   GRUMBLING  OLD   SCOUNDREL." 

in  my  prison  I  heard  of  your  gallant  feat  in  recapturing  the 
Pluto  and  three  other  ships  from  the  Genoese,  and  thus  retriev- 
ing to  some  extent  the  losses  of  Pola.  I  hope  to  wipe  off  the 
rest  of  the  score  before  long.  I  shall  find  a  command  for  you 
in  a  day  or  two.  Age  and  rank  go  for  nothing  now.  I  am 
going  to  put  the  best  men  in  the  best  position.  I  have  just 
appointed  that  old  rascal,  Corbaro,  vice-admiral  of  the  Lido. 
He  is  a  grumbling  old  scoundrel,  and  would  have  had  me  get 
up  a  revolution  to-day,  for  which  I  had  to  knock  him  down ; 
but  he  is  one  of  the  best  sailors  Venice  ever  turned  out,  and  just 
the  man  for  the  place." 

"  I  would  rather  act  as  a  general  aide-de-camp  to  you,  admiral, 
than  have  a  separate  command,  if  you  will  allow  me,"  Francis 
said.  "  I  am  still  too  young  to  command,  and  should  be 
thwarted  by  rivalry  and  jealousies.  I  would  therefore  far 
rather  act  under  your  immediate  orders,  if  you  will  allow 
me." 

"  So  be  it  then,  lad.  Come  to  me  to-morrow,  and  I  have  no 
doubt  I  shall  have  plenty  for  you  to  do.  At  present  I  cannot 
say  what  course  I  may  adopt,  for  in  truth  I  don't  know  what 
position  I  shall  hold.  The  people  do  not  seem  content  with  my 
having  only  the  government  of  Lido ;  but  for  myself  I  care 
nothing  whether  I  hold  that  command  or  that  of  captain- 
general,  it  is  all  one  to  me  so  that  I.  can  serve  the  republic. 
And  Giustiniani  is  an  able  man,  and  will  no  doubt  do  his 
business  well.  You  do  not  think  so,  young  man  ?  "  he  broke  oft 
when  Francis  shook  his  head. 

"  I  do  not,  indeed,  sir.  He  has  erected  two  wooden  towers 
at  the  mouth  of  the  Lido,  which  the  first  stone  from  a  Genoese 
ballista  would  knock  to  splinters ;  and  has  put  up  a  fence  to 


EARNEST  WORK.  337 

San  Spirito  which  a  Genoese  soldier  in  full  armour  could  jump 
over." 

"  Well,  we  shall  see,  Messer  Hammond,"  the  admiral  said 
smiling.  "  I  fear  you  have  one  bad  quality  among  your  many 
good  ones,  and  that  is  that  you  are  a  partisan ;  but  go  along 
now,  I  have  no  more  time  to  spare  to  you." 

No  sooner  had  Pisani  obtained  the  supreme  command  than 
he  set  to  work  in  earnest  to  provide  for  the  safety  of  the  city, 
the  reorganization  of  the  navy,  and  the  conversion  of  the  new 
levies  into  soldiers  and  sailors.  The  hulls  of  forty  galleys 
which  were  lying  in  the  arsenals  were  taken  in  hand,  and  two- 
thirds  of  them  were  equipped  and  ready  for  sea  in  three  days. 
The  population  was  full  of  ardour  and  enthusiasm,  and  crowded 
to  the  offices  to  register  their  names  for  service ;  the  women 
brought  their  jewels  to  be  melted  down  into  money;  and  all 
vied  with  each  other  in  zeal. 

Pisani's  first  task  after  seeing  the  galleys  put  in  hand  was 
to  examine  the  defences  Giustiniani  had  erected,  He  at  once 
pronounced  the  two  wooden  towers — of  which  Francis  had 
spoken  so  disrespectfully— to  be  utterly  useless,  and  ordered 
two  tall  towers  of  solid  masonry  to  be  erected  in  their  stead. 
Giustiniani  was  indignant  at  this  condemnation  of  his  work; 
and  he  and  his  friends  so  worked  upon  the  minds  of  those  who 
were  to  carry  out  the  work  that  they  laid  down  their  tools 
and  refused  to  embark  upon  such  useless  operations.  The 
news  was  brought  to  Pisani  by  one  of  his  friends,  and,  starting 
in  his  gondola,  he  was  soon  upon  the  spot.  He  wasted  no 
time  in  remonstrating  with  the  workmen  on  their  conduct,  but 
seizing  a  trowel  lifted  a  heavy  stone  into  its  place,  shouting : 

"  Let  him  who  loves  St.  Mark  follow  my  example ! " 


338  IN    READINESS    FOR   THE   ATTACK. 

The  success  of  the  appeal  was  instantaneous.  The  workmen 
grasped  their  tools  ;  a  host  of  volunteers  seized  the  stones  and 
carried  them  to  their  places.  When  they  were  exhausted 
fresh  workmen  took  their  places,  and  in  the  incredibly  short 
time  of  four  days  the  two  castles  were  finished.  The  work- 
men were  next  set  to  level  the  paling  and  earthwork  from 
Lido  to  San  Spirito,  and  in  the  course  of  a  fortnight  the  lofty 
and  massive  stone  walls  were  erected. 

By  this  time  something  like  a  fleet  was  at  Pisani's  disposal. 
In  spite  of  the  conduct  of  Taddeo  Giustiniani,  Pisani,  with  his 
usual  magnanimity,  gave  him  the  command  of  three  large  ships 
mounting  the  heaviest  guns  in  the  arsenal.  The  light  boats 
were  under  the  command  of  Giovanni  Barberigo,  Federigo  Cor- 
naro  was  stationed  with  a  force  of  galleys  at  San  Spirito, 
Nicholo  Gallieano  was  charged  with  the  defence  of  the  "Laza- 
retto, San  Clemente,  Sant'  Elena,  and  the  neighbourhood,  while 
on  the  strand  between  Lido  and  Malamocco,  behind  the  main 
wall,  were  the  mercenaries,  eight  thousand  strong,  under 
Jacopo  Cavalli.  Heavy  booms  were  placed  across  all  the 
canals  by  which  it  was  likely  that  the  enemy's  fleet  might 
advance. 

Francis  found  his  office  under  the  energetic  admiral  no 
sinecure.  He  was  kept  constantly  moving  from  one  point  to 
the  other  to  see  that  all  was  going  on  well,  and  to  report  the 
progress  made.  The  work  never  ceased  night  or  day,  and  for 
the  first  week  neither  Francis  nor  his  commander  ever  went  to 
bed,  contenting  themselves  with  such  chance  sleep  as  they 
could  snatch. 

Having  wasted  eight  precious  days  the  enemy  on  the  24th 
of  August  advanced  to  the  atttck.  A  Genoese  force  under 


FAMINE.  339 

Doria's  brother  landed  upon  San  Nicolo,  while  the  Paduans 
attacked  San  Spirito  and  Santa  Marta. 

They  found  the  besieged  in  readiness.  Directly  the  alarm 
was  given  the  Venetians  flocked  to  the  threatened  points,  and 
repulsed  the  enemy  with  slaughter;  the  latter  then  attempted 
to  make  a  junction  of  their  forces,  but  Cornaro  with  his  galleys 
occupied  the  canal,  drove  back  the  boats  in  which  they  intended 
to  cross,  and  defeated  the  attempt. 

Doria  had  felt  certain  that  the  movement,  which  was  at- 
tempted under  cover  of  night,  would  succeed,  and  his  disap- 
pointment was  extreme. 

The  Lord  of  Padua  was  so  disgusted  that  he  withdrew  his 
troops  to  the  mainland.  Doria  remained  before  Venice  until 
the  early  part  of  October,  but  without  making  another  attack, 
indeed  the  defences  had  long  before  become  so  formidable  that 
attack  was  well-nigh  hopeless.  At  the  end  of  that  time  he 
destroyed  all  his  works  and  fell  back  upon  Chioggia,  and  deter- 
mined to  wait  there  until  Venice  was  starved  into  surrender. 

The  suffering  in  the  city  was  intense.  It  was  cut  off  from 
all  access  to  the  mainland  behind,  but  occasionally  a  ship  laden 
with  provisions  from  Egypt  or  Syria  managed  to  evade  the 
Genoese  galleys;  these  precarious  supplies,  however,  availed 
but  little  for  the  wants  of  the  starving  city,  eked  out  though 
they  were  by  the  exertions  of  the  sailors,  who  occasionally 
sailed  across  the  lagoon,  landed  on  the  mainland,  and  cut  off 
the  supplies  sent  from  Padua  and  elsewhere  to  the  Genoese 
camp. 

The  price  of  provisions  was  so  enormous  that  the  bulk  of  the 
people  were  famishing,  and  even  in  the  houses  of  the  wealthy 
the  pressure  was  great.  The  nobility,  however,  did  their 


340  DESPERATE   PROPOSALS. 

utmost  for  their  starving  countrymen,  and  the  words  of  Pietro 
Mocenigo,  speaking  in  the  name  of  the  doge  to  the  popular 
assembly,  were  literally  carried  into  effect. 

"  Let  all,"  he  said,  "  who  are  pressed  by  hunger,  go  to  the 
dwellings  of  the  patricians,  there  you  will  find  friends  and 
brothers  who  will  divide  with  you  their  last  crust." 

So  desperate  indeed  did  the  position  become  that  a  motion 
was  made  by  some  members  of  the  council  for  emigrating  from 
the  lagoons  and  founding  a  new  home  in  Candia  or  Negropont; 
but  this  proposal  was  at  once  negatived,  and  the  Venetians 
declared  that  sooner  than  abandon  their  city  they  would  bury 
themselves  under  her  ruins. 

So  October  and  November  passed.  Carlo  Zeno  had  not  yet 
arrived,  but  by  some  letters  which  had  been  captured  with  a 
convoy  of  provisions  it  was  learned  that  he  had  been  achieving 
the  most  triumphant  success,  had  swept  the  seas  from  Genoa 
to  Constantinople,  had  captured  a  Genoese  galleon  valued  at 
three  hundred  thousand  ducats,  and  was  at  Candia. 

This  intelligence  revived  the  hopes  of  Venice,  and  on  the 
i6th  of  November  Luigi  Moroceni  was  despatched  to  order  him, 
in  the  name  of  the  government,  peremptorily  to  hasten  to  the 
rescue  of  Venice.  Almost  at  the  same  time  Giovanni  Barberigo 
with  his  light  craft  surprised  and  captured  three  of  the  enemy's 
vessels,  killing  many  of  the  sailors  and  taking  a  hundred  and 
fifty  prisoners.  The  success  was  not  in  itself  important,  but 
it  raised  the  hopes  of  the  Venetians  as  being  the  first  time  they 
had  taken  the  offensive. 

Pisani  himself  had  endeavoured  to  reconnoitre  the  position 
of  the  enemy,  but  had  each  time  been  sharply  repulsed,  losing 
ten  boats  and  thirty  men  upon  one  occasion,  when  the  doge's 


AN  APPEAL  TO  THE  PEOPLE.  341 

nephew,  Antonio  Gradenigo,  was  also  killed  by  the  enemy; 
but  in  spite  of  this  he  advised  government  to  make  a  great 
effort  to  recover  Chioggia.  He  admitted  that  the  chances  of 
failure  were  great ;  still  he  maintained  that  success  was  possible, 
and  it  was  better  that  the  Venetians  should  die  fighting  than  by 
hunger. 

As  the  result  of  his  expeditions  he  had  found  that  Doria  had 
at  least  thirty  thousand  men,  fifty  great  ships,  and  from  seven 
to  eight  hundred  light  craft.  Moreover  his  troops  were  in  high 
spirits,  well  fed,  and  well  cared  for,  and  should  therefore  be,  man 
to  man,  more  than  a  match  for  the  starving  soldiers  of  Venice. 
Nevertheless,  there  was  a  possibility  of  success,  as  Zeno  would 
doubtless  arrive  by  the  time  the  siege  had  fairly  commenced. 
After  much  debate  the  council  determined  that  the  undertaking 
should  be  attempted. 

To  stir  the  people  to  the  utmost  exertion  the  senate,  on  the 
ist  of  December,  published  a  decree  that  the  thirty  plebeians 
who  should  most  liberally  meet  the  urgent  necessities  of  the 
state  by  the  proffer  of  their  persons  or  estates  should,  after  peace 
was  made,  be  raised  to  the  rank  of  nobility  and  summoned  to  the 
great  council ;  that  thirty-five  thousand  ducats  of  gold  should  be 
distributed  annually  among  those  who  were  not  elected  and  their 
heirs  forever;  that  any  foreign  merchant  who  should  display 
peculiar  zeal  for  the  cause  of  the  republic  should  be  admitted  to 
the  full  privileges  of  citizenship;  and  that  on  the  other  hand, 
such  Venetians  as  might  endeavour  to  elude  a  participation  in 
the  common  burdens  and  hardships  should  be  held  by  so  doing 
to  have  forfeited  all  their  civil  rights. 

Seventy  five  candidates  came  forward:  some  offered  money, 
some  personal  service  or  the  service  of  their  sons  and  relatives ; 


342  AN   IMPROVISED   FLEET. 

some  presented  galleys  and  offered  to  pay  their  crews.  Immense 
efforts  were  made,  and  by  the  2ist  of  December  sixty  ships,  four 
hundred  boats  of  all  sizes,  and  thirty-four  war  galleys  were 
equipped.  The  doge,  although  just  seventy-three  years  old, 
signified  his  wish  to  assume  the  supreme  command  of  the 
expedition,  Pisani  acting  as  his  lieutenant  and  admiral. 

During  the  long  weeks  the  siege  continued  Francis  saw  little 
of  the  Polanis,  his  duties  keeping  him  constantly  near  Pisani, 
with  whom  he  took  such  meals  as  the  time  would  afford,  sleep- 
ing in  his  house  in  readiness  for  instant  service.  Maria  had 
returned  to  her  father's  house,  for  her  husband  was  in  command 
of  the  outpost  nearest  to  the  enemy  and  was  therefore  constantly 
away  from  home. 

Maria's  spirits  were  higher  than  ever.  She  made  light  of  the 
hardships  in  the  way  of  food,  bantered  Francis  when  he  came  on 
his  business  engagements,  and  affected  to  treat  him  with  extreme 
respect  as  the  trusted  lieutenant  of  Pisani.  Giulia,  too,  kept  up 
her  spirits,  and  no  one  would  have  thought,  listening  to  the 
lively  talk  of  the  two  girls  with  their  father  and  Francis,  that 
Venice  was  besieged  by  an  overwhelming  force  and  reduced  to 
the  direst  straits  by  hunger.  The  greater  part  of  Polani's  ships 
were  now  in  the  service  of  the  state  ;  those  which  remained  were 
constantly  engaged  in  running  across  to  the  Dalmatian  coast 
and  bringing  in  cargoes  of  provisions  through  the  cordon  of  the 
Genoese  galleys. 

The  light  gondola  which,  after  being  repaired,  had  been  lying 
for  two  years  under  cover  in  Messer  Polani's  yard  had  again  been 
made  useful.  Giuseppi  had  returned  to  his  old  work,  and  he 
and  another  powerful  oarsman  made  the  light  boat  fly  through 
the  water  as  Francis  carried  the  orders  of  the  admiral  to  the 


AN   IMPORTANT  COMMISSION.  343 

various  posts.  He  had  also  been  in  it  upon  several  of  the 
reconnoitring  expeditions  in  the  canals  leading  to  Chioggia, 
and  although  hotly  chased  he  had  on  each  occasion  left  his 
pursuers  behind.  The  evening  before  the  expedition  was  to 
start  Pisani  said  to  him : 

"  I  think  you  have  brought  me  more  news  with  that  fast 
little  craft  of  yours  than  I  have  been  able  to  obtain  even  at  the 
cost  of  some  hard  fighting  and  a  good  many  lives.  I  wish 
that  you  would  make  an  excursion  for  me  to-night  and  find 
out,  if  you  can,  whether  the  enemy  have  moved  their  position 
since  the  last  time  I  reconnoitred  them.  I  particularly  wish 
to  learn  if  they  have  strong  forces  near  the  outlets  of  the 
channels  of  Chioggia  and  Brondolo  and  the  Canal  of  Lombardy. 
You  know  my  plans,  and  with  such  a  host  of  recruits  as  I  shall 
have  with  me  it  is  all  important  that  there  should  be  no  failure 
at  first ;  veterans  can  stand  defeat,  but  a  reverse  is  fatal  to 
young  troops.  Heaven  knows  they  will  have  enough  to  bear 
with  wet,  cold,  exposure,  and  hunger,  and  success  will  be  neces- 
sary to  keep  up  their  spirits.  Do  not  push  your  adventure  too 
far ;  run  no  risk  if  you  can  help  it.  I  would  not  for  much  that 
harm  befell  you." 

Francis  at  once  accepted  the  commission  and  left  the  admiral 
in  order  to  make  his  preparations. 

"Giuseppi,"  he  said,  as  he  took  his  place  in  the  boat,  "  I  want 
you  to  find  for  me  for  service  to-night  a  gondolier  who  is  a  native 
of  Chioggia,  and  who  knows  every  foot  of  the  country  round  and 
every  winding  of  the  canals.  He  must  be  intelligent  and  brave, 
for  the  risk  will  be  no  slight  one." 

"I  think  I  know  such  a  man,  Messer  Francisco;  but  if  he 
happens  to  be  away  there  will  be  no  difficulty  in  finding 


344  CURIOSITY. 

another,  for  there  are  many  fishermen  here  who  escaped  before 
the  Genoese  captured  Chioggia." 

"  When  will  you  see  him  ?  " 

•'  As  soon  as  you  have  landed  me  at  Messer  Polani's." 

"  Go  and  fetch  him,  Giuseppi;  and  if  you  can  find  one  or  two 
old  fishermen  of  Chioggia,  bring  them  also  with  you ;  I  want 
to  gain  as  much  information  as  possible  regarding  the  country." 

"  Is  it  true  that  the  fleet  starts  to-morrow,  Francisco  ?  "  Maria 
asked  as  he  entered  ;  "  every  one  says  so." 

"  It  is  quite  true  ;  there  will  be  no  further  change  ;  the  orders 
have  been  all  issued,  and  you  may  rely  upon  it  that  we  are 
going  to  sea." 

"  And  when  will  you  return  ?  " 

"  That's  another  matter  altogether,"  Francis  laughed.  "  It 
may  be  a  week,  it  may  be  three  months." 

"  But  I  thought  we  were  going  to  fight  the  Genoese  galleys ; 
it  does  not  seem  to  me  that  a  week  is  wanted  to  do  that.  A 
day  to  go  to  Chioggia,  a  day  to  fight,  and  a  day  to  return. 
What  can  you  want  more  than  that  for  ?  " 

"  I  do  not  think  that  we  are  going  to  fight  the  Genoese 
galleys,"  Francis  answered.  "  Certainly  we  shall  not  do  so  if 
we  can  help  it ;  they  are  vastly  stronger  than  we  are ;  but  I  do 
not  know  that  we  need  fear  them  for  all  that." 

"  What  do  you  mean,  Francisco  ?  You  do  not  mean  to  fight 
— they  are  vastly  stronger  than  you  are — and  yet  you  do  not 
fear  them.  You  are  not  given  to  speak  in  riddles ;  but  you 
have  puzzled  me  this  time." 

"  Well,  I  will  explain  myself  a  little,"  Francis  said  ;  "  but  you 
must  remember  that  it  is  a  secret,  and  not  to  be  whispered  to 
anyone." 


"DO  NOT  TRIFLE  WITH  US,   SIR."  345 

"  That  is  right,"  Maria  said.  "  I  love  a  secret,  especially  a 
state  secret.  Giulia,  come  and  sit  quite  close,  so  that  he  can 
whisper  it  into  our  ears,  and  even  the  walls  shall  not  hear  it. 
Now,  sir,  explain  yourself  ! " 

"  I  will  explain  it  without  telling  you,"  Francis  said.  "  Have 
you  not  gone  to  see  African  lions,  who  were  very  much  stronger 
and  fiercer  than  yourself,  and  yet  you  did  not  fear  them  ?  " 

"  Because  they  have  been  in  cages,"  Maria  said.  "  But  what 
has  that  to  do  with  it  ?  " 

"  It  explains  the  whole  matter,"  Francis  said.  "  We  do  not 
mean  to  fight  the  Genoese  fleet  if  we  can  help  it ;  but  we  are 
going  to  tr}-  to  put  them  in  a  cage,  and  then  we  shall  not  be 
afraid  of  them." 

"  Do  not  trifle  with  us,  sir,"  Maria  said  sternly.  "  How  can 
you  put  Genoese  galleys  in  a  cage? " 

"  We  cannot  put  them  in  a  cage,  but  we  can  cage  them  up," 
Francis  said.  "  Pisani's  intention  is,  if  possible,  to  close  all  the 
entrances  to  the  canals  round  Chioggia  ;  thus  not  only  will  the 
Genoese  galleys  be  unable  to  sally  out  to  attack  us,  but  the 
whole  of  the  Genoese  army  will  be  couped  up,  and  we  shall 
then  do  to  them  what  they  nave  been  doing  to  us,  namely, 
starve  them  out !  " 

"  Capital,  capital !  "  Maria  said,  clapping  her  hands  ;  "  your 
Pisani  is  a  grand  man,  Francisco.  And  if  he  can  do  this  for  us, 
there  is  nothing  which  we  would  not  do  to  show  our  gratitude  ; 
but  you  won't  find  it  easy ;  besides,  in  the  game  of  starving 
out  are  we  likely  to  win  ?  The  contest  will  not  be  even,  for 
they  start  on  it  full  men  and  strong,  while  our  people  are  half- 
starved  already." 

"  I  do  not  regard  success  as  certain,"  Francis  replied  ;  "  and 


346  "YOU  SHOULD  TELL  HIM  NOT  TO  GO." 

Pisani  himself  acknowledges  the  chances  are  very  great  against 
us.  Still,  it  is  possible ;  and  as  nothing  else  seems  possible  we 
are  going  to  attempt  it." 

Polani  looked  grave  when  he  heard  of  the  mission  which 
Francis  was  going  to  undertake ;  Giulia's  bright  colour  fled  at 
once,  and  Maria  said  angrily : 

"  You  have  no  right  to  be  always  running  into  danger, 
Francisco.  You  are  not  a  Venetian  and  there  is  no  reason  why 
you  should  be  always  running  risks  greater  than  those  which 
most  Venetians  are  likely  to  encounter ;  you  ought  to  think  of 
us  who  care  for  you,  if  you  don't  choose  to  think  of  your- 
self." 

"  I  did  not  volunteer  for  the  service,"  Francis  said.  "  I  was 
asked  by  the  admiral  to  undertake  it,  and  even  had  I  wished 
it  I  could  hardly  have  refused.  The  admiral  selected  me,  not 
from  any  merit  on  my  part,  but  because  he  knows  that  my  boat 
is  one  of  the  fastest  on  the  lagoons,  and  that  I  can  easily  run 
away  from  any  of  the  Genoese  row-boats.  He  particularly 
ordered  me  to  run  no  unnecessary  risks." 

"  That  is  all  very  well,"  Maria  said ;  "  but  you  know  very 
well  that  you  will  run  risks  and  put  yourself  in  the  way  of 
danger  if  there  is  a  chance  of  doing  so.  You  should  tell  him 
not  to  go,  father ! " 

"  I  cannot  do  that,  Maria ;  for  the  service  he  has  undertaken 
is  a  very  important  one  to  Venice.  Everything  depends  upon 
the  success  of  Pisani's  attempt,  and  undertaken,  as  it  is,  against 
great  odds,  it  is  of  the  utmost  importance  that  there  should  be 
no  mistake  as  to  the  position  of  the  enemy.  Whether  Francis 
was  wise  or  not  in  accepting  Pisani's  offer  that  he  shouldjact 
•ks  his  aid-de-camp,  may  be  doubted ;  but  now  that  he  has  un- 


STUDYING  THE  COUNTRY.  347 

ddtaken  it  he  must  carry  out  his  orders,  especially  as  it  is  now 
too  late  to  make  other  arrangements  did  he  draw  back. 

"  If  you  will  come  into  my  room,  Francisco,  I  will  give  you 
a  chart  of  the  passages  around  Chioggia ;  you  can  study  that, 
and  you  will  then  the  better  understand  the  information  you 
may  receive  from  the  men  you  are  expecting." 

Half  an  hour  later  Giuseppi  arrived  with  the  gondolier  he 
had  spoken  of  and  two  old  fishermen,  and  from  their  explana- 
tions and  a  study  of  the  map  Francis  gained  an  exact  idea  of 
the  localities.  From  his  previous  expeditions  he  had  learned 
where  the  Genoese  were  generally  posted,  and  something  of 
the  strength  of  the  forces  at  the  various  points. 

In  truth,  they  kept  but  a  careless  watch.  Feeling  convinced 
that  the  Venetians  possessed  no  forces  capable  of  attacking 
him,  and  that  their  surrender  must  now  be  a  matter  of  a 
few  days  only,  Doria  took  no  precautions;  his  troops  were 
all  quartered  in  the  houses  of  Chioggia,  his  galleys  moored 
alongside  its  quays,  and  the  utmost  he  did  was  to  post  small 
bodies  of  men  with  row-boats  at  the  entrances  to  the  passages 
from  the  sea  and  up  the  lagoons,  to  give  warning  of  any  sudden 
attempt  on  the  part  of  Barberigo,  with  his  light  flotilla,  to  make 
a  dash  at  the  galleys  and  endeavour  to  burn  them. 

Having  obtained  all  the  information  he  could  from  the  old 
fishermen,  Francis  dismissed  them. 

"  It  is  evident,"  he  said  to  Giuseppi,  "that  we  can  hardly  hope 
to  succeed  in  passing  the  boats  at  the  entrance  to  the  canal  sea- 
ward or  by  going  up  the  lagoon ;  the  only  plan  that  I  can  see 
is  for  us  to  land  on  the  island  of  Pelestrina,  which  is  held  by 
us,  to  carry  the  boat  across  it,  and  to  embark  in  the  Malamocco 
channel.  In  this  way  we  should  be  within  their  cordon  of 


348  LIGHTENING  THE  BOAT. 

boats,  and  can  row  fearlessly  either  out  to  the  entrances  or  to 
Chioggia  itself ;  we  are  not  likely  to  be  detected,  and  if  we  are, 
we  must  make  a  race  of  it  to  Pelestrina." 

The  gondolier  agreed  that  the  scheme  was  practicable,  and 
Francis  ordered  Giuseppi  and  him  to  remove  the  burdens  and 
every  bit  of  wood  that  could  be  dispensed  with  from  the 
gondola,  so  as  to  facilitate  its  transport. 


CHAPTER  XIX. 


THE  SIEGE  OF  CHIOGGIA. 

|ATE  in  the  afternoon  Francis  embarked  in  his 
gondola,  and  in  an  hour  and  a  half  landed  at 
Pelestrina.  He  was  well  known  to  those  posted 
there  as  the  bearer  of  Pisani's  orders,  and  as  soon 
as  it  became  dark  Rufino  Giustiniani,  who  was  in  command, 
ordered  a  dozen  men  to  carry  the  light  gondola  across  the 
island  to  the  Malamocco  channel.  While  this  was  being  done 
Francis  went  to  Rufino's  tent  and  informed  him  of  what  was 
going  on  in  Venice,  and  that  the  whole  fleet  would  set  sail 
on  the  morrow. 

"  We  heard  rumours  from  the  men  who  brought  our  rations 
that  it  was  to  be  so,"  Rufino  said ;  "  but  we  have  heard  the 
same  story  a  dozen  times.  So,  now,  it  is  really  true !  But  what 
can  the  admiral  be  thinking  of !  Sure  he  can't  intend  to  attack 
Doria  with  this  newly-manned  fleet  and  rabble  army.  He 
could  not  hope  for  victory  against  such  odds  ?" 

"  The  admiral's  intentions  are  kept  a  profound  secret,"  Francis 
said,  "  and  are  only  known  to  the  doge  and  the  Council  of  Ten  ! " 

"  And  to  yourself,"  Rufino  said  laughing. 

"  The  admiral  is  good  enough  to  honour  me  with  his  fullest 
confidence,"  Francis  said  ;  "  and  in  this  matter  it  is  so  important 


350  "I    WILL   WARRANT   THEY    HAVE." 

that  the  nature  of  the  design  should  be  kept  wholly  secret  that 
I  cannot  tell  it  even  to  you  !  " 

"  You  are  quite  right,  Francisco ;  nor  do  I  wish  to  know  it, 
though  I  would  wager  that  Maria  and  her  pretty  sister  have 
some  inkling  of  what  is  going  on." 

Francis  laughed. 

"  The  signoras  are  good  enough  to  treat  me  as  a  brother,"  he 
said,  "  and  I  will  not  affirm  that  they  have  not  obtained  some 
slight  information." 

"  I  will  warrant  they  have  !  "  Rufino  said.  "  When  my  wife 
has  made  up  her  mind  to  get  to  the  bottom  of  a  matter  she 
will  tease  and  coax  till  she  succeeds.  Ah,  here  is  Matteo !  hts 
has  been  out  posting  the  sentries  for  the  night." 

The  two  friends  had  not  indulged  in  a  talk  for  some  weeks, 
though  they  had  occasionally  met  when  Francis  paid  one  of  his 
flying  visits  to  the  island. 

"  I  have  just  seen  your  boat  being  carried  along,"  Matteo 
said,  as  he  entered  the  tent.  "  I  could  not  think  what  it  was 
till  I  got  close ;  but  of  course  when  I  saw  Giuseppi  I  knew  all 
about  it.  What  are  you  going  to  do— scout  among  the 
Genoese  ?  " 

"  I  am  going  to  find  out  as  much  as  I  can,"  Francis  said. 

"  It's  a  capital  idea  your  bringing  the  boat  across  the  island," 
Matteo  said.  "  You  are  always  full  of  good  ideas,  Francis ;  I 
can't  make  it  out ;  they  never  seem  to  occur  to  me,  and  at  the 
present  time  especially  the  only  ideas  that  come  into  my  mind 
are  as  to  the  comfortable  meals  I  will  eat  when  this  business  is 
over.  I  never  thought  I  cared  much  for  eating  before,  but 
since  I  have  had  nothing  but  bread — and  not  enough  of  that — 
and  an  occasional  fish,  I  have  discovered  that  I  am  really  fond 


MATTEO'S  OPINION.  3$I 

of  good  living.  My  bones  ache  perpetually  with  lying  on  the 
bare  ground,  and  if  I  escape  from  this  without  being  a  cripple 
for  life  from  rheumatism  I  shall  consider  myself  lucky  indeed. 
You  are  a  fortunate  fellow,  Francisco  ;  spending  your  time  in  the 
admiral's  comfortable  palace  or  flying  about  in  a  smooth-rowing 
gondola ! " 

"  That  is  one  side  of  the  question  certainly,"  Francis  said, 
laughing ;  "  but  there  is  a  good  deal  of  hard  work  too  in  the  way 
of  writing." 

"  I  should  not  like  that,"  Matteo  said.  "  Still,  I  think  you 
have  the  best  of  it.  If  the  Genoese  would  come  sometimes 
and  try  and  drive  us  off  the  island  there  would  be  some  excite- 
ment. But  except  when  the  admiral  wishes  a  reconnaissance,  or 
Barberigo's  galleys  come  down  and  stir  them  up,  there  is  really 
nothing  doing  here." 

"  That  ought  to  suit  you  exactly,  Matteo,  for  never  but  once 
did  I  hear  you  say  you  wanted  to  do  anything." 

"  When  was  that  ?  "  Rufino  asked  laughing. 

"  Matteo  conceived  a  violent  desire  to  climb  Mount  Etna," 
Francis  said,  "  and  it  needed  all  my  arguments  to  prevent  his 
leaving  the  ship  at  Girgenti,  while  she  was  loading,  and  starting 
to  make  the  ascent." 

"  He  would  have  repented  before  he  had  gone  a  quarter  of  the 
way  up,"  Rufino  said. 

"  I  might  have  repented,"  Matteo  replied  stoutly,  "  but  I 
would  have  done  it  if  I  had  begun.  You  don't  know  me  yet, 
Rufino ;  I  have  a  large  store  of  energy,  only  at  present  I  have 
had  no  opportunity  of  showing  what  I  am  made  of.  And  now 
how  do  you  intend  to  proceed,  Francisco?  Have  you  any 
plan  ?  " 


352  A  GOOD   SUPPER. 

"  None  at  all,"  Francis  replied.  "  I  simply  want  to  assure 
myself  that  the  galleys  are  all  in  their  usual  places,  and  that 
the  Genoese  are  making  no  special  preparations  against  our 
coming." 

"  I  have  seen  no  unusual  stir,"  Rufino  said.  "  Their  ships,  as 
far  as  one  can  see  their  masts,  seem  ali  in  their  usual  position. 
I  fancy  that  since  Barberigo  carried  off  two  of  them  they  have 
put  booms  across  the  channels  to  prevent  sudden  attacks. 
I  saw  a  lot  of  row-boats  busy  about  something,  but  I  could 
not  make  out  exactly  what  they  were  doing ;  but  still  I  fancy 
they  were  constructing  a  boom.  Their  galleys  keep  a  sharp 
look-out  at  night,  and  you  certainly  would  not  have  succeeded 
in  passing  them  had  you  not  hit  upon  this  plan  of  carrying  your 
boat  over. 

"  Your  greatest  danger  will  be  at  first.  When  once  you  have 
fairly  entered  the  inner  canals  you  are  not  likely  to  be  sus- 
pected of  being  an  enemy.  They  will  take  you  for  Chioggian 
fishermen  returning  late.  We  often  make  out  their  fishing- 
boats  near  the  town.  No  doubt  Doria  is  fond  of  fresh  fish. 
Otherwise  you  would  be  detected,  for  the  Genoese  boats  are  of 
course  quite  different  to  ours,  and  even  in  the  dark  they  would 
make  out  that  you  belonged  to  the  lagoons.  Ah,  here  is 
supper!  It  is  not  often  that  I  should  have  anything  to  offer 
you,  but  one  of  my  men  managed  to  catch  three  or  four  fish 
to-day,  and  sold  them  to  me  at  about  their  weight  in  silver. 
However,  I  have  some  good  wine  from  my  own  cellars,  and  a 
man  who  has  good  wine,  fish,  and  bread  can  do  royally  what- 
ever this  grumbling  brother  of  mine  may  say." 

Half  an  hour  later  a  soldier  brought  the  news  that  the 
gondola  was  in  the  water,  and  Francis  bade  adieu  to  his  friends 


ACROSS  THE  SHALLOWS.  353 

and  started  at  once.  "  Row  slowly  ana  quietly,"  he  said  as  he 
took  his  seat.  "  Do  not  let  your  oars  make  the  slightest  splash 
in  the  water  until  we  are  well  across  to  the  opposite  shore  ;  they 
may  have  a  guard-boat  lying  in  the  channel." 

The  light  craft  made  her  way  noiselessly  across  the  water. 
Once  or  twice  they  heard  the  sound  of  oars  as  some  Genoese 
galley  passed  up  or  down,  but  none  came  near  enough  to  per- 
ceive them,  and  they  crossed  the  main  channel  and  entered  one 
of  the  numerous  passages  practicable  only  for  boats  of  very 
light  draught,  without  being  once  hailed.  A  broad  shallow 
tract  of  water  was  now  crossed,  passable  only  by  craft  draw- 
ing but  a  few  inches  of  water;  then  again  they  were  in  a 
deeper  channel,  and  the  lights  of  Chioggia  rose  but  a  short 
distance  ahead.  They  paused  and  listened  now,  for  they  were 
nearing  the  ship  channel,  and  here  the  enemy  would,  if  any- 
where, be  on  the  alert.  Coming  across  the  water  they  could 
hear  the  sound  of  voices  and  the  dull  noise  made  by  the  move- 
ment of  men  in  a  boat. 

"  Those  are  the  galleys  watching  the  boom,  I  expect,"  Francis 
said.  •'  Now,  Philippe,  we  can  move  on ;  I  suppose  there  is 
plenty  of  water  across  the  flats  for  us  to  get  into  the  channel 
without  going  near  the  boom." 

"  Plenty  for  us,  signor ;  but  if  the  boom  goes  right  across 
the  channel  heavy  row-boats  would  not  be  able  to  pass.  There 
are  few  shallower  places  in  the  lagoons  than  just  about  here ; 
it  may  >e  that  in  one  or  two  places  even  we  might  touch,  but 
if  we  do  the  bottom  is  firm  enough  for  us  to  get  out  and  float 
the  boat  over." 

But  they  did  not  touch  any  shoal  sufficiently  shallow  to 

necessitate    this.    Several    times    Francis    could    feel   by   the 
—23 


354  AT  CHIOGGIA. 

dragging  pace  that  she  was  touching  the  ooCy  bouom ,  buT 
each  time  she  passed  over  without  coming  to  a  stand-still.  A 
last  Philippe  said  : 

"  We  are  in  the  deep  channel  now,  signer ;  the  boom  is  right 
astern  of  us.  The  town  is  only  a  few  hundred  yards  ahead." 

"  Then  we  shall  be  passing  the  Genoese  galleys  directly," 
Francis  said ;  "  row  slowly  as  we  go  and  splash  sometimes  with 
the  oars  ;  if  we  go  quickly  and  noiselessly  past  they  might  pos- 
sibly suspect  something,  but  if  we  row  without  an  attempt  at 
concealment  they  will  take  us  for  a  fisherman's  boat." 

Soon  the  dark  mass  of  Genoese  ships,  with  their  forests  of 
masts,  rose  before  them.  There  were  lights  in  the  cabins,  and 
a  buzz  of  talking,  laughing,  and  singing  among  the  crews  on 
board. 

"  What  luck  to-day?  "  a  sailor  asked  them  as  they  rowed  past 
twenty  or  thirty  yards  from  the  side  of  one  of  the  ships. 

"Very  poor,"  Giuseppi  replied.  "I  think  your  ships  and 
the  boats  lying  about,  and  the  firing,  have  frightened  the  fish 
away  from  this  end  of  the  lagoons." 

It  was  half  a  mile  before  they  passed  the  last  of  the  crowd 
of  vessels.  "  Would  you  like  me  to  land  here,  signer  ? " 
Philippo  said.  "  There  would  be  no  danger  in  my  doing  so.  I 
can  make  my  way  through  the  streets  to  the  house  of  some  of 
my  relatives  and  find  out  from  them  whether  there  are  any 
fresh  movements  among  the  Genoese.  I  will  not  enter  any 
house  ;  for  ought  I  know  there  are  soldiers  quartered  every- 
where ;  but  I  am  sure  not  to  go  many  yards  before  I  run  against 
some  one  I  know." 

"I  think  it  will  be  a  very  good  plan,  Philippo;  we  will  lie 
under  the  bank  here  and  wait  your  return." 


SCOUTING.  355 

It  was  not  more  than  twenty  minutes  before  the  gondolier 
was  back. 

"  I  have  spoken  to  three  men  I  know,  signor ;  they  are 
agreed  that  there  are  no  movements  among  the  enemy,  and  no 
one  seems  to  have  an  idea  that  the  Venetians  are  about  to  put 
to  sea.  Of  course  I  was  cautious  not  to  let  drop  a  word  on  the 
subject,  and  only  said  we  had  managed  to  get  through  the 
enemy's  cordon  to  learn  the  latest  news,  and  I  expected  to  earn 
a  ducat  or  two  by  my  night's  work." 

"  That  is  excellent,"  Francis  said.  "  Now  we  will  row  out 
to  the  sea  mouths  of  the  channels  to  assure  ourselves  that  no 
ships  are  lying  on  guard  there,  for  some  are  going  in  or  out 
every  day  to  cruise  along  the  coast.  A  few  may  have  taken 
up  their  station  there  without  attracting  notice  among  the 
townspeople." 

The  opening  of  the  passage  known  as  the  Canal  of  Lombardy 
was  first  visited.  To  gain  this  they  had  to  retrace  their  steps 
for  some  distance  and  to  row  through  the  town  of  Chioggia, 
passing  several  boats  and  galleys,  but  without  attracting  notice. 

They  found  the  mouth  of  the  canal  entirely  unguarded,  and 
then  returned  and  rowed  out  to  the  mouth  of  the  Brondolo 
passage. 

Some  blazing  fires  on  the  shore  showed  that  there  were 
parties  of  soldiers  here,  but  no  ships  were  lying  anywhere 
in  the  channel.  After  some  consultation  they  determined  that 
as  no  watch  seemed  to  be  kept,  it  would  be  shorter  to  row  on 
outside  the  islands,  and  to  enter  by  the  third  passage  to 
be  examined,  that  between  Pelestrina  and  Brondolo.  Here, 
however,  the  Genoese  were  more  on  the  alert,  as  the  Pelestrina 
shore  was  held  by  the  Venetians.  Scarcely  had  they  entered 


356  CHASED. 

the  channel  when  a  large  row-boat  shot  out  from  the  shadow 
of  the  shore  and  hailed  them. 

"  Stop  rowing  in  that  boat !  Who  are  you  that  are  entering 
so  late  ?  " 

"  Fishermen,"  Philippo  shouted  back,  but  without  stopping 
rowing. 

"  Stop ! "  shouted  the  officer,  "  till  we  examine  you !  it  is 
forbidden  to  enter  the  channel  after  dark." 

But  the  gondoliers  rowed  steadily  on  until  ah«ad  of  the  boat 
coming  out.  This  fell  into  their  wake,  and  its  angry  officer 
shouted  threats  against  the  fugitives,  and  exhoited  his  men  to 
row  their  hardest. 

"  There  are  two  more  boats  ahead,  signer ;  they  are  lying  on 
their  oars  to  cut  us  off.  One  is  a  good  deal  further  out  than 
the  other,  and  I  don't  think  we  shall  gain  Felfcstrina." 

"  Then  make  for  the  Brondolo  shore  till  we  have  passed 
them,"  Francis  said. 

The  boat  whirled  off  her  course  and  made  towards  the  shore. 
The  Genoese  galleys  ahead  at  once  made  towards  them  ;  but  in 
spite  of  the  numerous  oars  they  pulled  the  craft  could  not  keep 
up  with  the  racing  gondola,  and  it  crossed  ahead  of  them.  In 
another  five  minutes'  rowing  the  three  galleys  were  well  astern, 
and  the  gondola  again  made  out  from  the  shore,  her  head 
pointing  obliquely  towards  Pelestrina  The  galleys  were  now 
fifty  yards  behind,  and  although  their  crews  rowed  their  hardest 
the  gondola  gradually  gained  upon  them,  and  crossing  their 
bows  made  over  towards  Pelestrina. 

"  We  are  out  of  the  channel  now,"  Philippo  said,  "  and 
there  will  not  be  water  enough  for  them  to  follow  us  much 
further." 


MATTEO   HAS   AN   OPPORTUNITY.  357 

A  minute  or  two  later  a  sudden  shout  proclaimed  that  the 
nearest  of  their  pursuers  had  touched  the  ground. 

"  We  can  take  it  easy  now,"  Giuseppi  said,  "  and  I  am  not 
sorry,  for  we  could  not  have  rowed  harder  if  we  had  been 
racing." 

A  few  minutes  later  the  light  craft  touched  the  mud  a  few 
yards  distant  from  the  shore. 

"  Is  that  you,  Francisco  ?  "  a  voice  which  Francis  recognized 
as  Matteo's  asked. 

"All  right,  Matteo  !  "  he  replied.    "  No  one  hurt  this  time." 

"  I  have  been  on  the  look-out  for  you  the  last  hour.  I  have 
got  a  body  of  my  men  here  in  case  you  were  chased.  We  heard 
the  shouting  and  guessed  it  was  you." 

"  If  you  have  got  some  men  there,  Matteo,  there  is  a  chance 
for  you  to  take  a  prize.  A  galley  rowing  twelve  or  fourteen 
orrs  is  in  the  mud  a  few  hundred  yards  out.  She  was  chasing 
us  and  ran  aground  when  at  full  speed,  and  I  imagine  they 
will  have  some  trouble  in  getting  her  off.  I  suppose  she  draws 
a  couple  of  feet  of  water.  There !  don't  you  hear  the  hubbub 
they  are  making  ?  " 

"  I  hear  them,"  Matteo  said.  "  Come  along,  lads.  The  night 
is  cold,  and  I  don't  suppose  the  water  is  any  warmer,  but  a 
skirmish  will  heat  our  blood." 

Matteo,  followed  by  a  company  of  some  forty  men,  at  once 
entered  the  water  and  made  in  the  direction  of  the  sounds. 
Five  minutes  later  Francis  heard  shouts  and  a  clashing  of  wea- 
pons suddenly  break  out.  It  lasted  but  a  short  time.  Matteo 
and  his  band  soon  returned  with  the  prisoners. 

"  What !  have  you  waited  Francisco  ?  I  thought  you  would  be 
on  the  other  side  of  the  island  by  this  time." 


358  "I   MUST   GO   NEVERTHELESS." 

"  I  was  in  no  particular  hurry,  Matteo ;  and  besides,  I  want 
my  boat ;  and  although  two  men  can  lift  her  easily  enough  she 
would  be  a  heavy  weight  to  carry  so  far." 

"  You  shall  have  a  dozen,  Francisco.  It  is  owing  to  you  we 
have  taken  these  prisoners  and  that  I  have  had  my  first  bit  of 
excitement  since  I  came  out  here.  Sergeant,  here  are  a  couple 
of  ducats.  When  you  have  given  the  prisoners  into  safe  cus- 
tody spend  the  money  in  wine  for  the  company.  The  water 
is  bitterly  cold,  I  can  tell  you,  Francisco ;  but  otherwise  I  am 
warm  enough,  for  one's  feet  stick  to  the  mud,  and  it  seems 
each  step  as  if  one  had  fifty  pounds  of  lead  on  one's  shoes. 
But  come  along  to  my  brother's  tent  at  once.  Your  feet  must 
be  cold  too,  though  the  water  was  only  a  few  inches  deep 
where  you  got  out  of  your  boat.  A  glass  of  hot  wine  will  do 
us  both  good  ;  and  it  will  be  an  hour  before  your  boat  is  in  the 
water  again.  Indeed,  I  don't  see  the  use  of  your  starting  before 
daybreak." 

"  Nor  do  I,  Matteo ;  but  I  must  go  nevertheless.  Pisani 
knows  how  long  it  will  take  me  to  get  to  Chioggia  and  return. 
He  will  allow  an  hour  or  two  for  me  to  reconnoitre,  and  will 
then  be  expecting  me  back.  As  it  is  I  shall  be  two  hours  after 
the  time  when  he  will  be  expecting  me,  for  he  knows  nothing 
about  the  boat  being  carried  across  this  island,  and  will  make  no 
allowance  for  that.  Moreover,  Polani  and  his  daughters  will 
be  anxious  about  me." 

'\Oh,  you  flatter  yourself  they  will  be  lying  awake  for  you," 
Matteo  said  laughing,  "thinking  over  your  dangers!  Well, 
there's  nothing  like  having  a  good  idea  of  one's  self." 

Francis  joined  in  the  laugh,  "  It  does  sound  rather  con- 
ceited, Matteo ;  but  J  know  they  will  be  anxious.  They  took 


"WHY,    YOU   ARE   WET."  359 

up  the  idea  it  was  a  dangerous  service  I  was  going  on,  and  I 
have  no  doubt  they  fidgeted  over  it.  Women  are  always 
fancying  things,  you  know." 

"I  don't  know  anyone  who  fidgets  about  me,"  Matteo  said ; 
"but  then  you  see  I  am  not  a  rescuer  of  damsels  in  distress, 
nor  have  I  received  the  thanks  of  the  republic  for  gallant 
actions." 

"  Well,  you  ought  to  have  done,"  Francis  replied.  "  You  had 
just  as  much  to  do  with  that  fight  on  board  Pisani's  galley  as 
I  had,  only  it  happened  I  was  in  command.  Oh,  there  is  your 
brother's  tent !  I  see  there  is  a  light  burning,  so  I  suppose  he 
has  not  gone  to  bed  yet." 

"  All  the  better,"  Matteo  said ;  "  we  shall  get  our  hot  wine 
all  the  quicker.  My  teeth  are  chattering  so  I  hardly  dare 
speak  for  fear  of  biting  my  tongue." 

Francis  was  warmly  welcomed  by  Rufino  Giustiniani. 

"  I  need  hardly  ask  you  if  you  have  succeeded  in  recon- 
noitring their  positions,  for  I  know  you  would  not  come  back 
before  morning  had  you  not  carried  out  your  orders.  Why, 
Matteo,  what  have  you  been  doing — wading  in  the  mud, 
apparently  ?  Why,  you  are  wet  up  to  the  waist." 

"  We  have  captured  an  officer  and  fourteen  men,  Rufino. 
They  will  be  here  in  a  few  minutes.  Their  boat  got  stuck  fast 
while  it  was  chasing  Francisco ;  so  we  waded  out  and  took 
them.  They  made  some  resistance,  but  beyond  a  few  slashes 
and  two  or  three  thumps  from  their  oars  no  harm  was  done." 

"  That  is  right,  Matteo.  I  am  glad  you  have  had  a  skirmish 
with  them  at  last.  Now  go  in  and  change  your  things.  I  shall 
have  you  on  my  hands  with  rheumatism." 

"  I  will  do  that  at  once,  and  I  hope  you  will  have  some  hot 


360  "YOUR  NEWS   IS   EXCELLENT." 

spiced  wine  ready  by  the  time  I  have  changed,  for  I  am  nearly 
frozen." 

The  embers  of  a  fire  outside  the  tent  were  soon  stirred  to- 
gether, and  in  a  few  minutes  the  wine  was  prepared.  In  the 
meantime  Francis  had  been  telling  Rufino  the  incidents  of  his 
trip. 

In  half  an  hour  the  message  came  that  the  gondola  was 
again  in  the  water,  and  Francis  was  soon  on  his  way  back  to 
the  city. 

"  I  was  beginning  to  be  anxious  about  you,"  was  Pisani's 
greeting  as,  upon  being  informed  of  his  return,  he  sprang  from  the 
couch  on  which  he  had  thrown  himself  for  an  hour's  sleep  and 
hurried  down-stairs.  "  I  reckoned  that  you  might  have  been 
back  an  hour  before  this,  and  began  to  think  that  you  must 
have  got  into  some  scrape.  Well,  what  have  you  discovered  ?" 

"  The  Genoese  have  no  idea  that  you  are  going  to  put  to  sea. 
Their  ships  and  galleys  are,  as  usual,  moored  off  the  quays  of 
Chioggia.  The  entrance  to  the  Canal  of  Lombardy  and  the 
Brondolo  passage  are  both  quite  open,  and  there  appear  to  be 
no  troops  anywhere  near ;  but  between  Pelestrina  and  Brondolo 
they  have  row-boats  watching  the  entrance,  but  no  craft  of  any 
size.  There  are  a  few  troops  there,  but,  so  far  as  I  could  judge 
by  the  number  of  fires,  not  more  than  two  hundred  men 
or  so." 

"  Your  news  is  excellent,  Francisco.  I  will  not  ask  you  more 
now.  It  is  three  o'clock  already,  and  at  five  I  must  be  up  and 
doing ;  so  get  off  to  bed  as  soon  as  you  can.  You  can  give  me 
the  details  in  the  morning." 

The  gondola  was  still  waiting  at  the  steps,  and  in  a  few 
minutes  Francis  arrived  at  the  Palazzo  Polani.  A  servant  was 


"THANK   HEAVEN  YOU  HAVE  RETURNED  SAFE."  361 

sleeping  on  a  bench  in  the  hall;  he  started  up  as  Francis 
entered. 

"  I  have  orders  to  let  my  master  know  as  soon  as  you  return, 
signer." 

"You  can  tell  him  at  the  same  time  that  I  have  returned 
without  hurt,  and  pray  him  not  to  disturb  himself,  as  I  can  tell 
him  what  has  taken  place  in  the  morning." 

Polani,  however,  at  once  came  to  Francis'  room. 

"  Thank  Heaven  you  have  returned  safe  to  us,  my  boy !"  he 
said.  "  I  have  just  knocked  at  the  girls'  doors  to  tell  them  of  your 
return,  and,  by  the  quickness  with  which  they  answered,  I  am 
sure  that  they,  like  myself,  have  had  no  sleep.  Have  you 
succeeded  in  your  mission  ?" 

"  Perfectly,  signor.  I  have  been  to  Chtoggia  itself  and  to 
the  entrances  of  the  three  passages,  and  have  discovered  that 
none  of  them  are  guarded  by  any  force  that  could  resist  us." 

"  But  how  did  you  manage  to  pass  through  their  galleys  ?" 

"  I  landed  on  this  side  of  Pelestrina  and  had  the  gondola 
carried  across  and  launched  in  the  channel  inside  their  cordon ; 
and  it  was  not  until  we  entered  the  last  passage — that  by 
Brondolo — that  we  were  noticed.  Then  there  was  a  sharp 
chase  for  a  bit,  but  we  out-stripped  them  and  got  safely  across  to 
Pelestrina.  One  of  the  galleys,  in  the  excitement  of  the  chase, 
ran  fast  into  the  mud ;  and  Matteo,  with  some  of  his  men, 
waded  out  and  captured  the  officer  and  crew.  So  there  is 
every  prospect  of  our  succeeding  to-morrow." 

"All  that  is  good,"  Polani  said;  "but  to  me  just  at  present 
I  own  that  the  principal  thing  is  that  you  have  got  safely  back. 
Now  I  will  not  keep  you  from  your  bed,  for  I  suppose  that 
you  will  not  be  able  to  lie  late  in  the  morning." 


362  "IS  HE  VERY  UNCOMFORTABLE?" 

Francis  certainly  did  not  intend  to  do  so,  but  the  sun  was  high 
before  he  woke.  He  hurriedly  dressed  and  went  down-stairs. 

"  I  have  seen  the  admiral,"  Polani  said  as  he  entered,  "  and 
told  him  that  you  were  sound  asleep,  and  I  did  not  intend  to 
wake  you,  for  that  you  were  looking  worn  and  knocked  up. 
He  said  :  'Quite  right!  The  lad  is  so  willing  and  active  that 
I  forget  sometimes  that  he  is  not  an  old  sea-dog  like  myself, 
accustomed  to  sleep  with  one  eye  open,  and  to  go  without 
sleep  altogether  for  days  if  necessary.'  So  you  need  not  hurry 
over  your  breakfast.  The  girls  are  dying  to  hear  your  adven- 
tures." 

As  he  took  his  breakfast  Francis  gave  the  girls  an  account  of 
his  expedition. 

"  And  so  you  saw  Rufino ! "  Maria  said.  "  Did  he  inquire  after 
me  ?  You  told  him,  I  hope,  that  I  was  fading  away  rapidly  from 
grief  at  his  absence." 

"  I  did  not  venture  upon  so  flagrant  an  untruth  as  that," 
Francis  replied. 

"  Is  he  very  uncomfortable  ?  " 

"  Not  very,  signora.  He  has  a  good  tent,  some  excellent  wine, 
an  allowance  of  bread  which  might  be  larger,  and  occasionally 
fish.  As  he  has  also  the  gift  of  excellent  spirits,  I  do  not 
think  he  is  greatly  to  be  pitied— except,  of  course,  for  his 
absence  from  you." 

"  That,  of  course,"  Maria  said.  "  When  he  does  come  here 
he  always  tells  me  a  moving  tale  of  his  privations,  in  hopes  of 
exciting  pity ;  but  unfortunately  I  cannot  help  laughing  at  his 
tales  of  hardship.  But  we  were  really  anxious  about  you  last 
night,  Francisco,  and  very  thankful  when  we  heard  you  had 
returned  ;  weren't  we,  Giulia  ?  " 


.THE  EXPEDITION  STARTS.  363 

Giufia  nodded. 

"  Giulia  hasn't  much  to  say  when  you  are  here,  Francisco,  but 
she  can  chatter  about  you  fast  enough  when  we  are  alone." 

"  How  can  you  say  so,  Maria  ?  "  Giulia  said  reproachfully. 

"  Well,  my  dear,  there  is  no  harm  in  that.  For  aught  he  knows 
you  may  be  saying  the  most  unkind  things  about  him  all  the 
time." 

"  I  am  sure  he  knows  that  I  should  not  do  that,"  Giulia  said 
indignantly. 

"  By  the  way,  do  you  know,  Francisco,  that  all  Venice  is  in  a 
state  of  excitement !  A  proclamation  has  been  issued  by  the 
doge  this  morning  that  all  should  be  in  their  galleys  and  at  their 
posts  at  noon,  under  pain  of  death.  So  everyone  knows  that 
something  is  about  to  be  done  at  last." 

"Then  it  is  time  for  me  to  be  off,"  Francis  said,  rising  hastily, 
"  for  it  is  ten  o'clock  already." 

"  Take  your  time,  my  lad,"  the  merchant  said.  "  There  is  no 
hurry,  for  Pisani  told  me  privately  that  they  should  not  sail 
until  after  dark." 

It  was  not  indeed  until  nearly  eight  oclock  in  the  evening 
that  the  expedition  started.  At  the  hour  of  vespers  the  doge, 
Pisani,  and  the  other  leaders  of  the  expedition,  attended  mass  in 
the  church  of  St.  Mark,  and  then  proceeded  to  their  galleys, 
where  all  was  now  in  readiness. 

Pisani  led  the  first  division,  which  consisted  of  fourteen 
galleys;  the  doge,  assisted  by  Cavalli,  commanded  in  the 
centre;  and  Corbaro  brought  up  the  rear  with  ten  large  ships. 
The  night  was  beautifully  bright  and  calm,  a  light  and  favour- 
able breeze  was  blowing,  and  all  Venice  assembled  to  see 
the  departure  of  the  fleet.  Just  after  it  passed  through  the 


364  A  FIRST  SUCCESS. 

passage  of  the  Lido  a  thick  mist  came  on.  Pisani  stamped  up 
and  down  the  deck  impatiently. 

"  If  this  goes  on  it  will  ruin  us,"  he  said.  "  Instead  of  arriv- 
ing in  proper  order  at  the  mouth  of  the  passages,  and  occupying 
them  before  the  Genoese  wake  up  to  a  sense  of  their  danger, 
we  shall  get  there  one  by  one,  they  will  take  the  alarm,  and 
we  shall  have  their  whole  fleet  to  deal  with.  It  will  be  simply 
ruin  to  our  scheme." 

Fortunately,  however,  the  fog  speedily  lifted,  the  vessels 
closed  up  together,  and  in  two  hours  after  starting  arrived  off 
the  entrances  to  the  channels.  Pisani  anchored  until  daylight 
appeared,  and  nearly  five  thousand  men  were  then  landed  on 
the  Brondolo's  shore,  easily  driving  back  the  small  detachment 
placed  there. 

But  the  alarm  was  soon  given,  and  the  Genoese  poured  out 
in  such  overwhelming  force  that  the  Venetians  were  driven  in 
disorder  to  their  boats,  leaving  behind  them  six  hundred  killed, 
drowned  or  prisoners.  But  Pisani  had  not  supposed  that  he 
would  be  able  to  hold  his  position  in  front  of  the  whole 
Genoese  force,  and  he  had  succeedsd  in  his  main  object. 
While  the  fighting  had  been  going  on  on  shore  a  party  of 
sailors  had  managed  to  moor  a  great  ship  laden  with  stones  across 
the  channel.  As  soon  at  the  Genoese  had  driven  the  Venetians 
to  their  boats  they  took  possession  of  this  vessel,  and  finding 
that  she  was  aground  they  set  her  on  fire,  thus  unconsciously 
aiding  Pisani's  object,  for  when  she  had  burned  to  the  water's 
edge  she  sank. 

Barberigo  with  his  light  galleys  now  arrived  upon  the  spot, 
and  emptied  their  loads  of  stone  into  the  passage  around  the 
wreck.  The  Genoese  kept  up  a  heavy  fire  with  their  artillery, 


A  TERRIBLE  TASK.  365 

many  of  the  galleys  were  sunk,  and  numbers  of  the  Venetians 
drowned  or  killed  by  the  shot.  Nevertheless  they  worked 
on  unflinchingly.  As  soon  as  the  pile  of  stones  had  risen 
sufficiently  for  the  men  to  stand  upon  them  waist  deep  they 
took  their  places  upon  it  and  packed  in  order  the  stones  that 
their  comrades  handed  them,  and  fixed  heavy  chains  binding  the 
whole  together. 

The  work  was  terribly  severe.  The  cold  was  bitter.  The  men 
were  badly  fed,  and  most  of  them  altogether  unaccustomed  to 
hardships.  In  addition  to  the  fire  from  the  enemy's  guns  they 
were  exposed  to  a  rain  of  arrows,  and  at  the  end  of  two  days  and 
nights  they  were  utterly  worn  out  and  exhausted,  and  protested 
that  they  could  do  no  more. 

Pisani,  who  had  himself  laboured  among  them  in  the  thickest 
of  the  danger,  strove  to  keep  up  their  spirits  by  pointing  out  the 
importance  of  their  work,  and  requested  the  doge  to  swear  on 
his  sword  that,  old  as  he  was,  he  would  never  return  to  Venice 
unless  Chioggia  was  conquered.  The  doge  took  the  oath,  and 
for  the  moment  the  murmuring  ceased  ;  and  on  the  night  of  the 
24th  the  channel  of  Chioggia  was  entirely  choked  from  shore  to 
shore.  On  that  day  Corbaro  succeeded  in  sinking  two  hulks  in 
the  passage  of  Brondolo. 

Doria,  who  had  hitherto  believed  that  the  Venetians  would 
attempt  nothing  serious,  now  perceived  for  the  first  time  the 
object  of  Pisani,  and  despatched  fourteen  great  galleys  to 
crush  Corbaro,  who  had  with  him  but  four  vessels.  Pisani  at 
once  sailed  to  his  assistance  with  ten  more  ships,  and  the  pas- 
sage was  now  so  narrow  that  the  Genoese  did  not  venture  to 
attack,  and  Corbaro  completed  the  operation  of  blocking  up  the 
Brondolo  passage.  The  next  day  the  Canal  of  Lombardy  was 


366  WORN   OUT   AND   EXHAUSTED. 

similarly  blocked ;  and  thus,  on  the  fourth  day  after  leaving 
Venice  Pisani  had  accomplished  his  object,  and  had  shut  out 
Che  Genoese  galleys  from  the  sea. 

But  the  work  had  been  terrible  and  the  losses  great.  The 
soldiers  were  on  half  rations.  The  cold  was  piercing.  They 
were  engaged  night  and  day  with  the  enemy,  and  were  con- 
tinually wet  through,  and  the  labour  was  tremendous.  A  fort 
had  already  been  begun  on  the  southern  shore  of  the  port  of 
Brondolo  facing  the  convent,  which  Doria  had  transformed  into 
a  citadel.  The  new  work  was  christened  the  Lova,  and  the 
heaviest  guns  in  the  Venetian  arsenal  were  planted  there. 
One  of  these  named  the  Trevisan,  discharged  stones  of  a  hun- 
dred and  ninety-five  pounds  in  weight,  and  the  Victory  was 
little  smaller.  But  the  science  of  artillery  was  then  in  its  youth, 
and  these  guns  could  only  be  discharged  once  in  twenty-four 
hours. 

But  on  the  2pth  the  Venetians  could  do  no  more,  and 
officers,  soldiers,  and  sailors  united  in  the  demand  that  they 
should  return  to  Venice.  Even  Pisani  felt  that  the  enterprise 
was  beyond  him,  and  that  his  men,  exhausted  by  cold,  hunger, 
and  their  incessant  exertions,  could  no  longer  resist  the  over- 
whelming odds  brought  against  him.  Still  he  maintained  a 
brave  front,  and  once  again  his  cheery  words  and  unfeigned 
good  temper,  and  the  example  set  them  by  the  aged  doge,  had 
their  effect;  but  the  soldiers  required  a  pledge  that  if  Zeno 
should  not  be  signalled  in  sight  by  New  Year's  Day  he  would 
raise  the  siege.  If  Pisani  and  the  doge  would  pledge  them- 
selves to  this,  the  people  agreed  to  maintain  the  struggle  for  the 
intervening  forty-eight  hours. 

The  pledge  was  given,  and  the  fight  continued.     Thus  the 


DESPAIRING.  367 

fate  of  Venice  hung  in  the  balance.  If  Zeno  arrived  not  only 
would  she  be  saved,  but  she  had  it  in  her  power  to  inflict  upon 
Genoa  a  terrible  blow.  Should  Zeno  still  tarry,  not  only  would 
the  siege  be  raised  and  the  Genoese  be  at  liberty  to  remove 
the  dams  which  the  Venetians  had  placed  at  such  a  cost  of 
suffering  and  blood ;  but  there  would  be  nothing  left  for 
Venice  but  to  accept  the  terms,  however  onerous,  her  trium- 
phant foes  might  dictate,  terms  which  would  certainly  strip 
her  of  all  her  possessions,  and  probably  involve  even  hef 
independence. 

Never  from  herf  rst  foundation  had  Venice  been  in  such  terri- 
ble risk ;  her  very  existence  trembled  in  the  balance.  The  3oth 
passed  as  the  days  preceding  it.  There  was  but  little  fighting, 
for  the  Genoese  knew  how  terrible  were  the  straits  to  which 
Venice  was  reduced,  and  learned  from  the  prisoners  they  had 
taken  that  in  a  few  days  at  the  outside  the  army  besieging  them 
would  cease  to  exist.  At  daybreak  on  the  3ist  men  ascended 
the  masts  of  the  ships  and  gazed  over  the  sea  in  hopes  of 
making  out  the  long-expected  sails.  But  the  sea  was  bare.  It 
was  terrible  to  see  the  faces  of  the  Venetians,  gaunt  with 
famine,  broken  down  by  cold  and  fatigue.  Even  the  most 
enduring  began  to  despair.  Men  spoke  no  more  of  Zeno.  He 
had  been  away  for  months ;  was  it  likely  that  he  would  come 
just  at  this  moment?  They  talked  rather  of  their  homes;  the 
next  day  they  would  return.  If  they  must  die,  they  would  die 
with  those  they  loved  in  Venice.  They  should  not  mind  that. 
And  so  the  day  went  on,  and  as  they  lay  down  at  night  hungry 
and  cold  they  thanked  God  that  it  was  their  last  day.  Whatever 
might  come  would  be  better  than  this. 

Men  were  at  the  mast-heads  again  before  daylight  on  the 


3^8  "THERE  ARE  SHIPS  OUT   AT  SEA  !" 

ist  of  January.  Then  as  the  first  streak  of  dawn  broke,  the 
cry  went  from  mast-head  to  mast-head  : 

"  There  are  ships  out  at  sea !  " 

The  cry  was  heard  on  shore.  Pisani  jumped  into  a  boat 
with  Francis,  rowed  out  to  his  ship,  and  climbed  the  mast. 

"  Yes,  there  are  ships  ! "  he  said.  And  then  after  a  pause  : 
"  Fifteen  of  them  !  Who  are  they  ?  God  grant  it  be  Zeno  !  " 

This  was  the  questian  every  one  on  ship  and  on  shore  was 
asking  himself,  for  it  was  known  that  the  Genoese  too  were 
expecting  reinforcements. 

"  The  wind  is  scarce  strong  enough  to  move  them  through 
the  water,"  Pisani  said  ;  "  let  some  light  boats  go  off  to  recon- 
noitre. Let  us  know  the  best  or  the  worst.  If  it  be  Zeno, 
Venice  is  saved  !  If  it  be  the  Genoese,  I  and  those  who  agree 
with  me  that  it  is  better  to  die  fighting  than  to  perish  of 
hunger,  will  go  out  and  attack  them." 

In  a  few  minutes  several  fast  galleys  started  for  the  fleet, 
which  was  still  so  far  away  that  the  vessels  could  scarcely  be 
made  out,  still  less  their  rig  and  nationality.  It  would  be 
some  time  before  the  boats  would  return  with  the  news,  and 
Pisani  went  ashore,  and  with  the  doge  moved  among  the  men, 
exhorting  them  to  be  steadfast,  above  all  things  not  to  give 
way  to  panic  should  the  new-comers  prove  to  be  enemies. 

"  If  all  is  done  in  order,"  he  said,  "  they  cannot  interfere 
with  our  retreat  to  Venice.  They  do  not  know  how  weak  we 
are,  and  will  not  venture  to  attack  so  large  a  fleet.  Therefore 
when  the  signal  is  made  that  they  are  Genoese  we  will  fall 
back  in  good  order  to  our  boats  and  take  to  our  ships,  and 
then  either  return  to  venice  or  sail  out  and  give  battle,  as  it 
may  be  decided." 


SUSPENSE.  369 

The  boats  before  starting  had  been  told  to  hoist  white  flags 
should  the  galleys  be  Venetian,  but  to  show  no  signal  if  they 
were  Genoese.  The  boats  were  watched  from  the  mast-heads 
until  they  became  specks  in  the  distance.  An  hour  afterwards 
the  look-out  signalled  to  those  on  shore  that  they  were  return- 
ing. 

"Go  off  again,  Francisco,  I  must  remain  here  to  keep  up  the 
men's  hearts  if  the  news  be  bad.  Take  your  stand  on  the 
poop  of  my  ship,  and  the  moment  the  look-outs  can  say  with 
certainty  whether  the  boats  carry  a  white  flag  or  not,  hoist 
the  Lion  of  St.  Mark  to  the  mast-head  if  it  be  Zeno ;  if  not,  run 

up  a  blue  flag ! " 
—24 


CHAPTER  XX. 

THE  TRIUMPH   OF  VENICE. 

(RANCIS  rowed  off  to  the  ship,  got  the  flags  in 
readiness  for  hoisting,  and  stood  with  the  lines  in 
his  hand. 

"  Can  you  make  them  out  yet  ?  "  he  hailed  the 
men  at  the  mast-heads. 

"  They  are  mere  specks  yet,  signer,"  the  man  at  the  fore- 
mast said ;  the  other  did  not  reply  at  once,  but  presently  he 
shouted  down :  "  Far  as  they  are  away,  signer,  I  am  almost 
sure  that  one  or  two  of  them  at  least  have  something  white 
flying." 

There  was  a  murmur  of  joy  from  the  men  on  deck,  for  Jacopo 
Zippo  was  famous  for  his  keenness  of  sight. 

"  Silence,  men  ! "  Francis  said.  "  Do  not  let  a  man  shout  or 
wave  his  cap  till  we  are  absolutely  certain.  Remember  the 
agony  with  which  those  on  shore  are  watching  us,  and  the 
awful  disappointment  it  would  be  were  their  hopes  raised  only 
to  be  crushed  afterwards." 

Another  ten  minutes  and  Jacopo  slid  rapidly  down  by  the 
stays  and  stood  on  the  deck  with  bared  head. 

"  God  be  praised,  signer !  I  have  no  longer  a  doubt.  I  can 
tell  you  for  certain  that  white  flags  are  flying  from  these  boats." 


IT  is  ZENO'S  FLEET!"  371 

"Goa  be  praised!"  Francis  replied.  "Now  up  with  the 
Lion ! " 

The  flag  was  bent  to  the  halyards  and  Francis  hoisted  it. 
As  it  rose  above  the  bulwark  Pisani,  who  was  standing  on  a 
hillock  of  sand,  shouted  out  at  the  top  of  his  voice : 

"  It  is  Zeno's  fleet ! " 

A  shout  of  joy  broke  from  the  troops.  Cheer  after  cheel 
rent  the  air  from  ship  and  shore,  and  then  the  wildest  excite- 
ment reigned.  Some  fell  on  their  knees  to  thank  God  for  the 
rescue  thus  sent  when  all  seemed  lost ;  others  stood  with  clasped 
hands  and  streaming  eyes  looking  towards  heaven.  Some 
danced  and  shouted ;  some  wept  with  joy ;  men  fell  on  to  each 
other's  necks  and  embraced ;  some  threw  up  their  caps.  All 
were  wild  with  joy  and  pent-up  excitement.  Zeno,  who,  in 
ignorance  of  the  terrible  straits  to  which  his  countrymen  were 
reduced,  was  making  with  his  fleet  direct  to  Venice,  was  inter- 
cepted by  one  of  the  galleys,  and  at  once  bore  up  for  Brondolo, 
and  presently  dropped  anchor  near  the  shore.  As  he  did  so 
a  boat  was  lowered  and  he  rowed  to  the  strand,  where  the 
Venetians  crowded  down  to  greet  him. 

With  difficulty  he  made  his  way  through  the  shouting  mul- 
titude to  the  spot  a  little  distance  away  where  the  doge  was 
awaiting  him.  Zeno  was  of  medium  height,  square  shouldered 
and  broad  chested,  his  head  was  manly  and  handsome,  his  nose 
aquiline,  his  eyes  large,  dark,  and  piercingly  bright,  and  shaded 
by  strongly-marked  eyebrows.  His  air  was  grave  and  thought- 
ful, and  in  strong  contrast  to  that  of  the  merry  and  buoyant 
Pisani ;  his  temper  was  more  equable,  but  his  character  was  as 
impulsive  as  that  of  the  admiral.  He  was  now  forty-five  years 
of  age — ten  years  the  junior  of  Pisani. 


372  CARLO  ZENO. 

Zeno  was  intended  for  the  church,  and  was  presented  by  the 
pope  with  the  reversion  of  a  rich  prebendal  stall  at  Patras.  On 
his  way  to  Padua  to  complete  his  studies  at  the  university  he 
was  attacked  by  robbers,  who  left  him  for  dead.  He  recovered, 
however,  and  went  to  Padua.  He  became  an  accomplished 
scholar  ;  but  was  so  fond  of  gambling  that  he  lost  every  penny, 
and  was  obliged  to  escape  from  his  creditors  by  flight.  For 
five  years  he  wandered  over  Italy,  taking  part  in  all  sorts  of 
adventures,  and  then  suddenly  returned  to  Venice,  and  was 
persuaded  by  his  friends  to  proceed  to  Patras,  where  his  stall 
was  now  vacant. 

When  he  arrived  there  he  found  the  city  besieged  by  the 
Turks.  In  spite  of  his  clerical  dignity  he  placed  himself  in  the 
front  rank  of  its  defenders  and  distinguished  himself  by  extreme 
bravery.  He  was  desperately  wounded,  and  was  again  believed 
to  be  dead,  he  was  even  placed  in  his  coffin ;  but  just  as  it  was 
being  nailed  down  he  showed  signs  of  returning  life.  He  did 
not  stay  long  at  Patras,  but  travelled  in  Germany,  France,  and 
England.  Soon  after  he  returned  to  Patras  he  fought  a  duel, 
and  thereby  forfeited  his  stall.  He  now  renounced  the  clerical 
profession  and  married  a  wealthy  heiress ;  she  died  shortly 
afterwards  and  he  married  the  daughter  of  the  Admiral  Marco 
Giustiniani. 

He  now  entered  upon  political  life,  and  soon  showed  brilliant 
talents.  He  was  then  appointed  to  the  military  command  of 
the  district  of  Treviso,  which  the  Paduans  were  then  invading. 
Here  he  very  greatly  distinguished  himself,  and  in  numberless 
engagements  was  always  successful,  so  that  he  became  known 
as  Zeno  the  unconquered. 

When    Pisani  was  appointed  captain-general  in  April,  1378, 


THE  VENETIANS  TAKE  THE  OFFENSIVE.  373 

he  was  appointed  governor  of  Negropont,  and  soon  afterwards 
received  a  separate  naval  command.  He  had  been  lost  sight 
of  for  many  months  prior  to  his  appearance  so  opportunely 
before  Brondolo,  and  he  now  confirmed  to  the  doge  the  news 
that  had  been  received  shortly  before.  He  had  captured  nearly 
seventy  Genoese  vessels  of  various  sizes,  had  cruised  for  some 
time  in  sight  of  Genoa,  struck  a  heavy  blow  at  her  commerce, 
and  prevented  the  despatch  of  the  reinforcements  promised 
to  Doria.  Among  the  vessels  taken  was  one  which  was  carrying 
three  hundred  thousand  ducats  from  Genoa.  He  reported  him- 
self ready  with  his  men  to  take  up  the  brunt  of  the  siege 
forthwith,  and  selecting  Brondolo  as  the  most  dangerous  posi- 
tion at  once  landed  his  crews.  The  stores  on  board  ship  were 
also  brought  ashore,  and  proved  ample  for  the  present  necessities 
of  the  army. 

In  a  few  days  he  sailed  with  his  galleys  and  recaptured 
Loredo,  driving  out  the  Paduan  garrison  there.  This  conquest 
was  all-important  to  Venice,  for  it  opened  their  communication 
with  Ferrara,  and  vast  stores  of  provisions  were  at  once  sent  by 
their  ally  to  Venice,  and  the  pressure  of  starvation  immediately 
ceased.  The  siege  of  Brondolo  was  now  pushed  on,  and  on  the 
22d  of  January  the  great  bombard,  the  Victory,  so  battered  the 
wall  opposite  to  it  that  it  fell  suddenly,  crushing  beneath  its 
ruins  the  Genoese  commander  Doria. 

The  change  which  three  weeks  had  made  in  the  appearance 
)f  the  Venetian  forces  was  marvellous ;  ample  food,  firing,  and 
shelter  had  restored  their  wasted  frames,  and  assurance  of 
victory  had  taken  the  place  of  the  courage  of  despair.  A 
month  of  toil,  hardship,  and  fighting  had  converted  a  mob  of 
recruits  into  disciplined  soldiers,  and  Zeno  and  Pisani  seemed 


374  A   NARROW   ESCAPE. 

to  have  filled  all  with  their  own  energy  and  courage  ;  Zeno. 
indeed,  was  so  rash  and  fearless  that  he  had  innumerable  escapes 
from  death. 

One  evening  after  dusk  his  own  vessel,  having  been  acci- 
dentally torn  from  its  anchorage  near  the  Lova  Fort  by  the 
force  of  the  wind  and  currents,  was  driven  across  the  passage 
against  the  enemy's  forts,  whence  showers  of  missiles  were 
poured  into  it.  One  arrow  pierced  his  throat.  Dragging  it  out 
he  continued  to  issue  his  orders  for  getting  the  galley  off  the 
shore — bade  a  seaman  swim  with  a  line  to  the  moorings,  and 
angrily  rebuked  those  who,  believing  destruction  to  be  inevi- 
table, entreated  him  to  strike  his  flag.  The  sailor  reached  the 
moorings,  and  with  a  line  he  had  taken  made  fast  a  strong  rope 
to  it,  and  the  vessel  was  then  hauled  off  into  a  place  of  safety. 
As  Zeno  hurried  along  the  deck  superintending  the  operation 
he  tumbled  down  an  open  hatchway,  and  fell  on  his  back  almost 
unconscious. 

In  a  few  moments  he  would  have  been  suffocated  by  the 
blood  from  the  wound  in  his  throat,  but  with  a  final  effort  he 
managed  to  roll  over  on  to  his  face,  the  wound  was  thus  per- 
mitted to  bleed  freely  and  he  soon  recovered.  On  the  28th  of 
February  he  was  appointed  general-in-chief  of  the  land  forces, 
and  the  next  day  drove  the  Genoese  from  all  their  positions  on 
the  islands  of  Brondolo  and  Little  Chioggia,  and  on  the  follow- 
ing morning  established  his  head-quarters  under  the  ramparts 
of  Chioggia  and  directed  a  destructive  fire  upon  the  citadel.  As 
the  Genoese  fell  back  across  the  bridge  over  the  Canal  of  Santa 
Caterina  the  structure  gave  way  under  their  weight,  and  great 
numbers  were  drowned. 

The  retreat  of   the  Genoese  was    indeed    so    hurried  and 


GENOESE  REINFORCEMENTS.  375 

confused,  and  they  left  behind  them  an  immense  quantity  of 
arms,  accoutrements,  and  war  material,  so  much  so  that  suits 
of  mail  were  selling  for  a  few  shillings  in  the  Venetian  camp. 

So  completely  were  the  Genoese  disheartened  by  the  change 
in  their  position  that  many  thought  that  the  Venetians  could  at 
once  have  taken  Chioggia  by  assault ;  but  the  leaders  were  deter- 
mined to  risk  no  failure,  and  knew  that  the  enemy  must  yield 
to  hunger.  They  therefore  contented  themselves  with  a  rigorous 
blockade,  cutting  off  all  the  supplies  which  the  Lord  of  Padua 
endeavoured  to  throw  in  the  city.  The  Venetians,  however, 
allowed  the  besieged  to  send  away  their  women  and  children, 
who  were  taken  to  Venice  and  kindly  treated  there.  The  army 
of  Venice  had  now  been  vastly  increased  by  the  arrival  of  the 
Star  Company  of  Milan  and  the  Condottieri  commanded  by 
Sir  John  Hawkwood.  The  dikes  erected  across  the  channels 
with  so  much  labour  were  removed,  and  the  fleet  took  their 
part  in  the  seige. 

On  the  i4th  of  May  there  was  joy  in  Chioggia  similar  to 
that  which  the  Venetians  had  felt  at  the  sight  of  Zeno's  fleet, 
for  on  that  morning  the  squadron  which  Genoa  had  sent  to 
their  assistance  under  the  command  of  Matteo  Maruffo  appeared 
in  sight.  This  admiral  had  wasted  much  valuable  time  on  the 
way,  but  had  fallen  in  with  and  captured,  after  a  most  gallant 
resistance,  five  Venetian  galleys  under  Giustiniani,  who  had 
been  despatched  to  Apulia  to  fetch  grain. 

The  Genoese  fleet  drew  up  in  order  of  battle  and  challenged 

Pisani  to  come  out  to  engage  them.     But  impetuous  as  was  the 

disposition  of  the  admiral,  and  greatly  as  he  longed  to  avenge 

his  defeat  at  Pola,  he  refused  to  stir.     He  knew  that  Chioggia 

f  must  ere  long  fall,  and  he  would  not  risk  all  the  advantages 


376  A  COWARDLY   RETREAT. 

gained  by  so  many  months  of  toil  and  effort  upon  the  hazard 
of  a  battle.  Day  after  day  Maruffo  repeated  his  challenge, 
accompanied  by  such  insolent  taunts  that  the  blood  of  the 
Venetian  sailors  was  so  stirred  that  Pisani  could  no  longer 
restrain  them. 

After  obtaining  leave  from  the  doge  to  go  out  and  give  battle 
he  sailed  into  the  roadstead  on  the  25th.  The  two  fleets  drew 
up  in  line  of  battle,  facing  each  other.  Just  as  the  combat  was 
about  to  commence  a  strange  panic  seized  the  Genoese,  and, 
without  exchanging  a  blow  or  firing  a  shot,  they  fled  hastily. 
Pisani  pursued  them  for  some  miles  and  then  returned  to  his 
old  station.  The  grief  and  despair  of  the  garrison  of  Chioggia 
at  the  sight  of  the  retreat  of  their  fleet  was  in  proportion  to  the 
joy  with  which  they  had  hailed  its  approach.  Their  supply  of 
fresh  water  was  all  but  exhausted  ;  their  rations  had  become  so 
scanty  that  from  sheer  weakness  they  were  unable,  after  the  first 
week  in  June,  to  work  their  guns. 

Genoa,  in  despair  at  the  position  of  her  troops,  laboured  un- 
ceasingly to  relieve  them.  Emissaries  were  sent  to  tamper 
with  the  free  companies,  and  succeeded  so  far  that  these  would 
have  marched  away  had  they  not  been  appeased  by  the  promise 
of  a  three  days'  sack  of  Chioggia,  and  a  month's  extra  pay  at 
the  end  of  the  war.  Attempts  were  made  to  assassinate  Zeno, 
but  these  also  failed.  The  Genoese  then  induced  the  pope  to 
intercede  on  their  behalf;  but  the  council  remembered  that 
when  Venice  was  at  the  edge  of  destruction  on  the  3ist  of 
December  no  power  had  come  forward  to  save  her,  and  refused 
now  to  be  robbed  of  the  well-earned  triumph. 

On  the  1 5th  of  July  Maruffo,  who  had  received  reinforce- 
ments, again  made  his  appearance  ;  but  Pisani  this  time  refused 


CHIOGGIA  SURRENDERS.  377 

to  be  tempted  out.  On  the  2ist  a  deputation  was  sent  out  from 
Chioggia  to  ask  for  terms,  and  though,  on  being  told  that  an 
unconditional  surrender  alone  would  be  accepted,  they  returned 
to  the  city,  yet  the  following  day  the  Genoese  flag  was  hauled 
down  from  the  battlements. 

On  the  24th  the  doge,  accompanied  by  Pisani  and  Zeno, 
made  his  formal  entry  into  Chioggia.  The  booty  was  enor- 
mous ;  and  the  companies  received  the  promised  bounty,  .and 
were  allowed  to  pillage  for  three  days.  So  large  was  the 
plunder  collected  in  this  time  by  the  adventurers  that  the 
share  of  one  of  them  amounted  to  five  hundred  ducats.  The 
republic,  however,  did  not  come  off  altogether  without  spoil — 
they  obtained  nineteen  sea-worthy  galleys,  four  thousand  four 
hundred  and  forty  prisoners,  and  a  vast  amount  of  valuable 
stores,  the  salt  alone  being  computed  as  worth  ninety  thousand 
crowns. 

Not  even  when  the  triumphant  fleet  returned  after  the  con- 
quest of  Constantinople  was  Venice  so  wild  with  delight  as  when 
the  doge,  accompanied  by  Pisani  and  Zeno,  entered  the  city  in 
triumph  after  the  capture  of  Chioggia.  From  the  danger,  more 
imminent  than  any  that  had  threatened  Venice  from  her  first 
foundation,  they  had  emerged  with  a  success  which  would 
cripple  the  strength  and  lower  the  pride  of  Genoa  for  years. 
Each  citizen  felt  that  he  had  some  share  in  the  triumph,  for  each 
had  taken  his  share  in  the  sufferings,  the  sacrifices,  and  the 
efforts  of  the  struggle.  There  had  been  no  unmanly  giving  way 
to  despair,  no  pitiful  entreaty  for  aid  in  their  peril.  Venice  had 
relied  upon  herself,  and  had  come  out  triumphant. 

From  every  house  hung  flags  and  banners,  every  balcony  was 
hung  with  tapestry  and  drapery.  The  Grand  Canal  was  closely 


378  A  TRIUMPHAL   ENTRY. 

packed  with  gondolas,  which  for  once  disregarded  the  sump- 
tuary law,  that  enforced  black  as  their  only  hue,  and  shone  in  a 
mass  of  colour  ;  gaily  dressed  ladies  sat  beneath  canopies  of  silk 
and  velvet ;  flags  floated  from  every  boat,  and  the  rowers  were 
dressed  in  the  bright  liveries  of  their  employers;  the  church 
bells  rang  out  with  a  deafening  clang,  and  from  roof  and  balcony, 
from  wharf  and  river,  rang  out  a  mighty  shout  of  welcome  and 
triumph  from  the  crowded  mass,  as  the  great  state  gondola, 
bearing  the  doge  and  the  two  commanders,  made  its  way  slowly 
and  with  difficulty  along  the  center  of  the  canal. 

Francis  was  on  board  one  of  the  gondolas  that  followed  in 
the  wake  of  that  of  the  doge,  and  as  soon  as  the  grand  service 
in  St.  Mark's  was  over  he  slipped  off  and  made  his  way  back 
to  the  Palazzo  Polani.  The  merchant  and  Giulia  had  both 
been  present  at  the  ceremony,  and  had  just  returned  when 
he  arrived. 

"  I  guessed  you  would  be  off  at  once,  Francisco,  directly  the 
ceremony  was  over.  I  own  that  I  myself  would  have  stayed  for 
a  time  to  see  the  grand  doings  in  the  Piazza,  but  this  child 
would  not  hear  of  our  doing  so ;  she  said  it  would  be  a  shame 
indeed  if  you  should  arrive  home  and  find  no  one  to  greet 
you." 

"  So  it  would  have  been,"  Giulia  said.  "  I  am  sure  I  should  not 
have  liked  when  I  have  been  away,  even  on  a  visit  of  pleasure  to 
Corfu,  to  return  and  find  the  house  empty ;  and  after  the  terrible 
dangers  and  hardships  you  have  gone  through,  Francisco,  it 
would  have  been  unkind  indeed  had  we  not  been  here.  You 
still  look  thin  and  worn." 

"  I  think  that  is  fancy  on  your  part,  Giulia ;  to  my  eyes  he  looks 
v;as  stout  as  ever  I  saw  him.  But  certainly  he  looked  as  lean  and 


PEACE  ASSURED.  379 

famished  as  a  wolf  when  I  paid  that  visit  to  the  camp  the  day 
before  Zeno's  arrival ;  his  clothes  hung  loosely  about  him,  his 
cheeks  were  hollow,  and  his  eyes  sunken ;  he  would  have  been 
a  sight  for  men  to  stare  at  had  not  every  one  else  been  in  an 
equally  bad  case.  Well,  I  thank  God  there  is  an  end  of  it  now  ! 
Genoa  will  be  glad  to  make  peace  on  any  terms,  and  the  sea  will 
once  more  be  open  to  our  ships.  So  now,  Francisco,  you  have 
done  with  fighting,  and  will  be  able  to  turn  your  attention  to  the 
humbler  occupation  of  a  merchant." 

"  That  will  I  right  gladly,"  Francis  said.  "  I  used  to  think 
once  I  should  like  to  be  a  man-at-arms;  but  I  have  seen  enough 
of  it,  and  hope  never  will  draw  my  sword  again,  unless  it  be  in 
conflict  with  some  Moorish  rover.  I  have  had  many  letters  from 
my  father,  chiding  me  for  mingling  in  frays  in  which  I  have  no 
concern,  and  shall  be  able  to  gladden  his  heart  by  writing  to 
assure  him  that  I  have  done  with  fighting." 

"  It  has  done  you  no  harm,  Francisco,  or  rather  it  has  done 
you  much  good.  It  has  given  you  the  citizenship  of  Venice,  in 
itself  no  slight  advantage  to  you  as  a  trader  here  ;  it  has  given 
you  three  hundred  ducats  a  year,  which,  as  a  mark  of  honour,  is 
not  to  be  despised  ;  it  has  won  for  you  a  name  throughout  the 
republic,  and  has  given  you  a  fame  and  popularity  such  as  few, 
if  any  citizens  of  Venice  ever  attained  at  your  age.  Lastly,  it 
has  made  a  man  of  you  ;  it  has  given  you  confidence  and  self- 
possession  ;  you  have  acquired  the  habit  of  commanding  men ; 
you  have  been  placed  in  positions  which  have  called  for  the  exer- 
cise of  rare  judgment,  prudence,  and  courage,  and  you  have  come 
well  through  it  all.  It  is  but  four  years  since  your  father  left 
you  a  lad  in  my  keeping ;  now  you  are  a  man  whom  the  highest 
noble  in  Venice  might  be  proud  of  calling  his  son.  You  have 


380  "I    LOVE   YOUR   DAUGHTER." 

no  reason  to  regret,  therefore,  that  you  have  for  a  year  taken 
up  soldiering  instead  of  trading,  especially  as  our  business  was 
all  stopped  by  the  war,  and  you  must  have  passed  your  time  in 
inactivity." 

In  the  evening  when  the  merchant  and  Francis  were  alone 
together  the  former  said  : 

"  I  told  you  last  autumn,  Francis,  when  I  informed  you  that 
henceforth  you  would  enter  into  my  house  as  a  partner  in  the 
business  when  we  again  recommenced  trade,  that  I  had  some- 
thing else  in  my  mind,  but  the  time  to  speak  of  it  had  not  then 
arrived.  I  think  it  has  now  come.  Tell  me,  my  boy,  frankly, 
if  there  is  anything  that  you  would  wish  to  ask  of  me." 

Francis  was  silent  for  a  moment;  then  he  said  : 

"  You  have  done  so  much,  Signor  Polani ;  you  have  heaped 
kindness  upon  me  altogether  beyond  anything  I  could  have 
hoped  for,  that  even  did  I  wish  for  more  I  could  not  ask  it." 

"  Then  there  is  something  more  you  would  like,  Francisco. 
Remember  that  I  have  told  you  that  I  regard  you  as  a  son, 
and  therefore  I  wish  you  to  speak  to  me  as  frankly  as  if  I  was 
really  your  father." 

"  I  fear,  signer,  that  you  will  think  me  audacious,  but  since 
you  thus  urge  upon  me  to  speak  all  that'  is  in  my  mind  I 
cannot  but  tell  you  the  truth.  I  love  your  daughter,  Giulia, 
and  have  done  so  ever  since  the  first  day  that  my  eyes  fell  on 
her.  It  has  seemed  to  me  too  much  even  to  hope  that  she 
can  ever  be  mine,  and  I  have  been  careful  in  letting  no 
word  expressive  of  my  feelings  pass  my  lips.  It  still  seems  to 
me  beyond  the  bounds  of  possibility  that  I  could  successfully 
aspire  to  the  hand  of  the  daughter  of  one  of  the  noblest  families 
in  Venice." 


"ALL  DIFFICULTIES   ARE  AT   AN   END."  38* 

"  I  am  glad  you  have  spoken  frankly,  dear  lad,"  the  merchant 
said.  "  Ever  since  you  rescued  my  daughters  from  the  hands 
of  Mocenigo  it  has  been  on  my  mind  that  some  day  perhaps 
you  would  be  my  son-in-law  as  well  as  my  son  by  adoption. 
I  have  watched  with  approval  that  as  Giulia  grew  from  a  child 
into  a  young  woman  her  liking  for  you  seemed  to  ripen  into 
affection.  This  afternoon  I  have  spoken  to  her,  and  she  has 
acknowledged  that  she  would  obey  my  commands  to  regard 
you  as  her  future  husband  with  gladness. 

"  I  could  not,  however,  offer  my  daughter's  hand  to  one  who 
might  reject  it,  or  who.  if  he  accepted  it,  would  only  do  so 
because  he  considered  the  match  to  be  a  desirable  one  from  a 
business  point  of  view.  Now  that  you  have  told  me  you  love 
her,  all  difficulties  are  at  an  end.  I  am  not  one  of  those  fathers 
who  would  force  a  marriage  upon  their  daughters  regardless  of 
their  feelings.  I  gave  to  Maria  free  choice  among  her  various 
suitors,  and  so  I  would  give  it  to  Giulia.  Her  choice  is  in 
accordance  with  my  own  secret  hopes,  and  I  therefore  freely 
and  gladly  bestow  her  upon  you.  You  must  promise  only  that 
you  do  not  carry  her  away  altogether  to  England  so  long  as  I 
live.  You  can,  if  you  like,  pay  long  visits  with  her  from  time 
to  time  to  your  native  country,  but  make  Venice  your  head- 
quarters. 

"I  need  say  nothing  to  you  about  her  dowry.  I  intended 
that  as  my  partner  you  should  take  a  fourth  share  of  the  profits 
of  the  business,  but  as  Giulia's  husband  I  shall  now  propose 
that  you  have  a  third ;  this  will  give  you  an  income  equal  to 
that  of  all  but  the  wealthiest  of  the  nobles  of  Venice.  At  my 
death  my  fortune  will  be  divided  between  my  girls." 

Francis  expressed  in  a  few  words  his  joy  and  gratitude  at  the 


382  "  GO   IN  TO   HER  NOW." 

merchant's  offer.  Giulia  had  inspired  him  four  years  before 
with  a  boyish  love,  and  it  had  steadily  increased  until  he 
felt  that,  however  great  his  success  in  life  as  Messer  Polani's 
partner,  his  happiness  would  be  incomplete  unless  shared  by 
Giulia. 

Polani  cut  short  his  words  by  saying : 

"  My  dear  boy,  I  am  as  pleased  that  this  should  be  so  as  you 
are;  I  now  feel  that  I  have  indeed  gained  a  son  and  secured 
the  happiness  of  my  daughter.  Go  in  to  her  now;  you  will  find 
her  in  the  embroidery  room.  I  told  her  that  I  should  speak 
to  you  this  evening,  and  she  is  doubtless  in  a  tremble  as  to 
the  result,  for  she  told  me  frankly  that  although  she  loved  you 
she  feared  you  only  regarded  her  with  the  affection  of  a  brother, 
and  she  implored  me  above  all  not  to  give  you  a  hint  of  her 
feelings  towards  you  until  I  was  convinced  that  you  really 
loved  her." 

Two  months  later  the  marriage  of  Francis  Hammond  and 
Giulia  Polani  took  place.  There  were  great  festivities,  and 
the  merchant  spent  a  considerable  sum  in  giving  a  feast  on  the 
occasion  to  all  the  poor  of  Venice. 

Maria  told  Francis  in  confidence  that  she  had  always  made 
up  her  mind  that  he  would  marry  Giulia. 

"  The  child  was  silly  enough  to  fall  in  love  with  you  from  the 
first,  Francisco,  and  I  was  sure  that  you  in  your  dull  English 
fashion  cared  for  her.  My  father  confided  to  me  long  since 
that  he  hoped  it  would  come  about." 

Francis  Hammond  lived  for  many  years  with  his  wife  in 
Venice,  paying  occasional  visits  to  England.  He  was  joined 
soon  after  his  marriage  by  his  brother,  who,  after  serving  for 
some  years  in  the  business,  entered  it  as  a  partner,  when  Messer 


A   LONDON   MERCHANT.  383 

Polani's  increasing  years  rendered  it  necessary  for  him  to  retire 
from  an  active  participation  in  it. 

Some  months  after  his  marriage  Francis  was  saddened  by  the 
death  of  Admiral  Pisani,  who  never  recovered  from  the  fatigue 
and  hardships  he  suffered  during  the  seige  of  Chioggia.  He 
had,  with  the  fleet,  recovered  most  of  the  places  that  the 
Genoese  had  captured,  and  after  chasing  a  Genoese  fleet  to 
Zara  had  a  partial  engagement  with  them  there.  In  this, 
Corbaro,  now  holding  the  commission  of  admiral  of  the  squad- 
ron, was  killed,  and  Pisani  himself  wounded.  He  was  already 
suffering  from  fever,  and  the  loss  of  Corbaro  and  the  check  that 
the  fleet  had  suffered  increased  his  malady,  and  he  expired  three 
days  later. 

Venice  made  peace  with  Genoa,  but  the  grudge  which  she 
bore  to  Padua  was  not  wiped  out  until  some  years  later,  when, 
in  1404,  that  city  was  besieged  by  the  Venetians  and  forced 
by  famine  to  surrender  in  the  autumn  of  the  following  year ; 
after  which  Zeno,  having  been  proved  to  have  kept  up  secret 
communications  with  the  Lord  of  Padua,  was  deprived  of  his 
honours  and  sentenced  to  a  year's  imprisonment.  Thus  in  turn 
the  two  great  Venetian  commanders  suffered  disgrace  and  im- 
prisonment. As  she  had  been  patient  and  steadfast  in  her 
time  of  distress  Venice  was  clement  in  her  hour  of  triumph, 
and  granted  far  more  favourable  terms  to  Padua  than  that  city 
deserved. 

At  the  death  of  Messer  Polani  Francis  returned  with  his  wife 
and  family  to  England  and  established  himself  in  London,  where 
he  at  once  took  rank  as  one  of  the  leading  merchants.  His 
fortune,  however,  was  so  large  that  he  had  no  occasion  to  con- 
tinue in  commerce,  and  he  did  so  only  to  afford  him  a  certain 


384  BETWEEN  TWO   CITIES. 

amount  of  occupation.  His  brother  carried  on  the  business  in 
Venice  and  became  one  of  the  leading  citizens  there,  in  part- 
nership with  Matteo  Giustiniani.  Every  two  or  three  years 
Francis  made  a  voyage  with  his  wife  to  Venice  and  spent  some 
months  there,  and  to  the  end  of  his  life  never  broke  off  his  dose 
connection  with  the  City  of  the  Waters. 


1MB 


"Wherever  English  is  spoken  one  imagines  that  Mr.  Henty's 
name  is  known.  One  cannot  enter  a  schoolroom  or  look  at  a 
boy's  bookshelf  without  seeing  half-a-dozen  of  his  familiar 
volumes.  Mr.  Henty  is  no  doubt  the  most  successful  writer 
for  boys,  and  the  one  to  whose  new  volumes  they  look  forward 
every  Christmas  with  most  pleasure." — Review  of  Reviews. 


A  LIST   OF   BOOKS 
FOR  YOUNG   PEOPLE 

By 

G.  A,  HENTY, 

KIRK  MUNROE,  JAMES  WHITCOMB  RILEY. 
ERNEST  THOMPSON  SETON,  and  Others 


Published  by 

CHARLES  SCRIBNER'S  SONS 

J53  to  157  Fifth  Avenue 
New  York 


Other  Volumes  of  the 
Henty  Books 

Uniform  with  This  Popular  Edition 


IN   FREEDOM'S    CAUSE 

WITH  LEE  IN 

VIRGINIA 

WITH  WOLFE   IN 

CANADA 

THE  LION  OF  ST.  MARK 

IN  THE  REIGN  OF 

TERROR 

NO  SURRENDER 

UNDER  WELLING- 
TON'S COMMAND 

WITH  FREDERICK 

THE  GREAT 

AT  ABOUKIR  AND 

ACRE 

BOTH  SIDES  THE 

BORDER 

A  MARCH  ON  LONDON 

WITH  MOORE  AT 

CORUNNA 

AT  AGINCOURT 

COCHRANE  THE 

DAUNTLESS 

ON    THE    IRRAWADDY 


THROUGH   RUSSIAN 

SNOWS 

A  KNIGHT  OF  THE 

WHITE  CROSS 

THE  TIGER  OF 

MYSORE 

IN  THE  HEART  OF 

THE  ROCKIES 

WHEN  LONDON 

BURNED 

WULF  THE  SAXON 

ST.  BARTHOLOMEW'S 
EVE 

THROUGH  THE  SIKH 
WAR 

A  JACOBITE  EXILE 

CONDEMNED   AS  A 

NIHILIST 

BERIC  THE  BRITON 
IN  GREEK  WATERS 

THE  DASH    FOR 

KHARTOUM 

REDSKIN  AND  COW- 
BOY 

HELD  FAST  FOR 

ENGLAND 


BOOKS  FOR  YOUNG  PEOPLE 


BY  G.  A.  HENTY 

"  Among  writers  of  stories  of  adventures  for  boys  Mr.  Henty  stands 
in  the  very  first  rank." — Academy  (London). 


THE   TREASURE    OF   THE    INCAS 

A  Tale  of  Adventure  in  Peru.     With  8  full-page  Illustrations 
by  WAL  PAGET,  and  Map.     $1.20  net. 

Peru  and  the  hidden  treasures  of  her  ancient  kings  offer  Mr.  Henty  a 
most  fertile  field  for  a  stirring  story  of  adventure  in  his  most  engaging 
style.  In  an  effort  to  win  the  girl  of  his  heart,  the  hero  penetrates  into 
the  wilds  of  the  land  of  the  Incas.  Boys  who  have  learned  to  look  for 
Mr.  Henty's  books  will  follow  his  new  hero  in  his  adventurous  and 
romantic  expedition  with  absorbing  interest.  It  is  one  of  the  most  cap- 
tivating tales  Mr.  Henty  has  yet  written. 

WITH  KITCHENER  IN  THE  SOUDAN 

A  Story  of  Atbara  and  Omdurman.     With  10  full-page  Illus- 
trations.    $1.20  net. 

Mr.  Henty  has  never  combined  history  and  thrilling  adventure  more 
skillfully  than  in  this  extremely  interesting  story.  It  is  not  in  boy  nat- 
ure to  lay  it  aside  unfinished,  once  begun  ;  and  finished,  the  reader  finds 
himself  in  possession,  not  only  of  the  facts  and  the  true  atmosphere  of 
Kitchener's  famous  Soudan  campaign,  but  of  the  Gordon  tragedy  which 
preceded  it  by  so  many  years  and  of  which  it  was  the  outcome. 

WITH  THE  BRITISH  LEGION 

A  Story  of  the  Carlist  Uprising  of  1836.    Illustrated.    $1.20 

net. 

Arthur  Hallet,  a  young  English  boy,  finds  himself  in  difficulty  at 
home,  through  certain  harmless  school  escapades,  and  enlists  in  the 
famous  "  British  Legion,"  which  was  then  embarking  for  Spain  to  take 
part  in  the  campaign  to  repress  the  Carlist  uprising  of  1836.  Arthur 
shows  his  mettle  in  the  first  fight,  distinguishes  himself  by  daring  work 
in  carrying  an  important  dispatch  to  Madrid,  makes  a  dashing  and 
thrilling  rescue  of  the  sister  of  his  patron,  and  is  rapidly  promoted  to  the 
rank  of  captain.  In  following  the  adventures  of  the  hero  the  reader  ob- 
tains, as  is  usual  with  Mr.  Henty's  stories,  a  most  accurate  and  interest- 
ing history  of  a  picturesque  campaign. 


BOOKS  FOR    YOUNG   PEOPLE 


STORIES    BY    G.    A.    HENTY 

"  His  books  have  at  once  the  solidity  of  history  and  the  charm  of 
romance.  "-Journal  of  Education. 


TO  HERAT  AND   CABUL 

A  Story  of  the  First  Afghan  "War.    By  G.  A.  HENTY.     With 
Illustrations.      12mo,  $1.20  net. 

The  greatest  defeat  ever  experienced  by  the  British  Army  was  that 
in  the  Mountain  Passes  of  Afghanistan.  Angus  Cameron,  the  hero  of 
this  book,  having  been  captured  by  the  friendly  Afghans,  was  com- 
pelled to  be  a  witness  of  the  calamity.  His  whole  story  is  an  intensely 
interesting  one,  from  his  boyhood  in  Persia;  his  employment  under  the 
Government  at  Herat;  through  the  defense  of  that  town  against  the 
Persians;  to  Cabul,  where  he  shared  in  all  the  events  which  ended  in 
the  awful  march  through  the  Passes  from  which  but  one  man  escaped. 
Angus  is  always  at  the  point  of  danger,  and  whether  in  battle  or  in 
hazardous  expeditions  shows  how  much  a  brave  youth,  full  of 
resources,  can  do,  even  with  so  treacherous  a  foe.  His  dangers  and 
adventures  are  thrilling,  and  his  escapes  marvellous. 

WITH  ROBERTS  TO  PRETORIA 

A  Tale  of  the  South  African  War.     By  G.  A  EENTY.     With  12 
Illustrations.    $1.20  net. 

The  Boer  War  gives  Mr.  Henty  an  unexcelled  opportunity  for  a 
thrilling  story  of  present-day  interest  which  the  author  could  not  fail  to 
take  advantage  of.  Every  boy  reader  will  find  this  account  of  the  ad- 
ventures of  the  young  hero  most  exciting,  and,  at  the  same  time  a 
wonderfully  accurate  description  of  Lord  Roberts's  campaign  to  Preto- 
ria. Boys  have  found  history  in  the  dress  Mr.  Henty  gives  it  anything 
but  dull,  and  the  present  book  is  no  exception  to  the  rule. 

AT  THE  POINT  OF  THE  BAYONET 

A  Tale  of  the  Mahratta  War.    By  G.  A.  HENTY.     Illustrated. 
12mo,  $1.20  net. 

One  hundred  years  ago  the  rule  of  the  British  in  India  was  only  partly 
established.  The  powerful  Mahrattas  were  unsubdued,  and  with  their 
skill  in  intrigue,  and  great  military  power,  they  were  exceedingly  dan- 
gerous. The  story  of  "At  the  Point  of  the  Bayonet"  begins  with 
the  attempt  to  conquer  this  powerful  people.  Harry  Lindsay,  an 
infant  when  bis  father  and  mother  were  killed,  was  saved  by  his 
Mahratta  ayah,  who  carried  him  to  her  own  people  and  brought  him 
up  ae  a  native.  She  taught  him  as  best  she  could,  and,  having  told  him 
his  parentage,  sent  him  to  Bombay  to  be  educated.  At  sixteen  he  ob- 
tained a  commission  in  the  English  Army,  and  his  knowledge  of  the 
Mahratta  tongue  combined  with  his  ability  and  bravery  enabled  him  to 
render  great  service  in  the  Mahratta  War,  and  carried  him,  through 
many  frightful  perils  by  land  and  sea,  to  high  rank. 


BOOKS  FOR    YOUNG   PEOPLE 


BY  G.  A.  HENTY 

"Mr.   Henty  might  with  entire  propriety  be  called  the  boys' Sir 
Walter  Scott,  "—Philadelphia  Press. 


IN  THE   IRISH   BRIGADE 

A  Tale  of  War  in  Flanders  and  Spain.    With  12  Illustrations  by 
CHARLES  M.  SHELDON.    12mo,  $1.50. 

Desmond  Kennedy  is  a  young  Irish  lad  who  left  Ireland  to  join  the 
Irish  Brigade  in  the  service  of  Louis  XIV.  of  France.  In  Paris  he  in- 
curred the  deadly  hatred  of  a  powerful  courtier  from  whom  he  had 
rescued  a  young  girl  who  had  been  kidnapped,  and  his  perils  are  of  ab- 
sorbing interest.  Captured  in  an  attempted  Jacobite  invasion  of  Scot- 
land, be  escaped  in  a  most  extraordinary  manner.  As  aid-de-camp 
to  the  Duke  of  Berwick  he  experienced  thrilling  adventures  in  Flan- 
ders. Transferred  to  the  Army  in  Spain,  he  was  nearly  a.8sassinated,but 
escaped  to  return,  when  peace  was  declared,  to  his  native  land,  having 
received  pardon  and  having  recovered  his  estates.  The  story  is  filled 
with  adventure,  and  the  interest  never  abates. 

OUT   WITH   GARIBALDI 

A   Story  of  the  Liberation  of  Italy.     By  G.  A.  HENTY.    With 
8  Illustrations  by  W.  RAINEY,  R.I.     12mo,  $1.50. 

Garibaldi  himself  is  the  central  figure  of  this  brilliant  story,  and  the 
little-known  history  of  the  struggle  for  Italian  freedom  is  told  here  in 
the  most  thrilling  way.  From  the  time  the  hero,  a  young  lad,  son  of 
an  English  father  and  an  Italian  mother,  joins  Garibaldi's  band  of 
1,000  men  in  the  first  descent  upon  Sicily,  which  was  garrisoned  by  one 
of  the  large  Neapolitan  armies,  until  the  end,  when  all  those  armies 
are  beaten,  and  the  two  Sicilys  are  conquered,  we  follow  with  the 
keenest  interest  the  exciting  adventures  of  the  lad  in  scouting,  in 
battle,  and  in  freeing  those  in  prison  for  liberty's  sake. 

WITH   BULLER   IN  NATAL 

Or,  A  Born  Leader.     By  G.  A.  HENTY.     With  10  Illustrations 
by  W.  RAINEY.     12mo,  $1.50. 

The  breaking  out  of  the  Boer  War  compelled  Chris  King,  the  hero 
of  the  story,  to  flee  with  his  mother  from  Johannesburg  to  the  sea 
coast.  They  were  with  many  other  Uitlanders,  and  all  suffered  much 
from  the  Boers.  Reaching  a  place  of  safety  for  their  families,  Chris 
and  twenty  of  his  friends  formed  an  independent  company  of  scouts.  In 
this  service  they  were  with  Gen.  Yule  at  Glencoe,  then  in  Ladysmith, 
then  with  Buller.  In  each  place  they  had  many  thrilling  adventures. 
They  were  in  great  battles  and  in  lonely  fights  on  the  Veldt ;  were 
taken  prisoners  and  escaped;  and  they  rendered  most  valuable  service 
to  the  English  forces.  The  story  is  a  most  interesting  picture  of  the 
War  in  South  Africa, 


BOOKS  FOR    YOUNG    PEOPLE 


BY  G.  A.  HENTY 

"  Surely  Mr.  Henty  should  understand  boys'  tastes  better  than  any 
man  living." — The  Times. 


WON   BY   THE   SWORD 

A  Tale  of  the  Thirty  Years'  War.     With  12  Illustrations  by 
CHARLES  M.  SHELDON,  and  four  Plans.     12mo,  $1.50. 

The  scene  of  this  story  is  laid  in  ^rance,  during  the  time  of  Richelieu, 
of  Mazarin  and  Anne  of  Austria.  The  hero,  Hector  Campbell,  is  the 
orphaned  son  of  a  Scotch  officer  in  the  French  Army.  How  he  at- 
tracted the  notice  of  Marshal  Turenne  and  of  the  Prince  of  Conde ; 
how  he  rose  to  the  rank  of  Colonel ;  how  he  finally  had  to  leave  France, 
pursued  by  the  deadly  hatred  of  the  Due  de  Beaufort — all  these  and 
much  more  the  story  tells  with  the  most  absorbing  interest. 

A   ROVING   COMMISSION 

Or,  Through  the  Black  Insurrection  at  Hayti.     With  12  Illus- 
trations by  WILLIAM  RAINEY.     12mo,  $1.50. 

This  is  one  of  the  most  brilliant  of  Mr.  Henty's  books.  A  story  of 
the  sea,  with  all  its  life  and  action,  it  is  also  full  of  thrilling  adven- 
tures on  land.  So  it  holds  the  keenest  interest  until  the  end.  The 
scene  is  a  new  one  to  Mr.  Henty's  readers,  being  laid  at  the  time  of  the 
Great  Revolt  of  the  Blacks,  by  which  Hayti  became  independent. 
Toussaint  1'Overture  appears,  and  an  admirable  picture  is  given  of  him 
and  of  his  power. 

NO   SURRENDER 

The   Story  of  the  Revolt  in  La  Vendee.     With  8  Illustrations 
by  STANLEY  L.  WOOD.     12mo,  $1.50. 

The  revolt  of  La  Vende'e  against  the  French  Republic  at  the  time  of 
the  Revolution  forms  the  groundwork  of  this  absorbing  story.  Leigh 
Stansfield,  a  young  English  lad,  is  drawn  into  the  thickest  of  the  con- 
flict. Forming  a  company  of  boys  as  scouts  for  the  Vendean  Army, 
he  greatly  aids  the  peasants.  He  rescues  his  sister  from  the  guillotine, 
and  finally,  after  many  thrilling  experiences,  when  the  cause  of  La 
Vendee  is  lost,  he  escapes  to  England. 

UNDER  WELLINGTON'S  COMMAND 

A  Tale  of  the  Peninsular  War.     With  12  Illustrations  by  WAI, 
PAQET.    12mo,  $1.50. 

The  dashing  hero  of  this  book.  Terence  O'Connor,  was  the  hero  of 
Mr.  Henty's  previous  book,  "  With  Moore  at  Corunna,"  to  which  this 
la  really  a  sequel.  He  is  still  at  the  head  of  the  "  Minho  "  Portuguese 
regiment.  Being  detached  on  independent  and  guerilla  duty  with  his 
regiment,  he  renders  invaluable  service  in  gaining  information  and  in 
harassing  the  French.  His  command,  being  constantly  on  the  edge  of 
the  army,  is  engaged  in  frequent  skirmishes  and  some  most  important 
battles. 


BOOKS   FOR    YOUNG   PEOPLE 


BY  Q.  A.  HENTY 
"Mr.  Henty  is  the  king  of  story-tellers  for  boys.  "—Sword  and  TroweL 


AT  ABOUKIR  AND  ACRE 

A  Story  of  Napoleon's  Invasion  of  Egypt.  With  8  full-page 
Illustrations  by  WILLIAM  RAINEY,  and  3  Plans.  12mo, 
$1.50. 

The  hero,  having  saved  the  life  of  the  eon  of  an  Arab  chief,  is  taken 
Into  the  tribe,  has  a  part  in  the  battle  of  the  Pyramids  and  the  revolt 
at  Cairo.  He  is  an  eye-witness  of  the  famous  naval  battle  of  Aboukir, 
and  later  is  in  the  hardest  of  the  defense  of  Acre. 

BOTH  SIDES  THE  BORDER 

A  Tale  of  Hotspur  and  Glendower.  With  13  full-page  Illus- 
trations by  RALPH  PEACOCK.  12mo,  $1.50. 

This  is  a  brilliant  story  of  the  stirring  times  of  the  beginning  of  the 
"Wars  of  the  Roses,  when  the  Scotch,  under  Douglas,  and  the  Welsh, 
under  Owen  Glendower,  were  attacking  the  English.  The  hero  of  the 
book  lived  near  the  Scotch  border,  and  saw  many  a  hard  fight  there. 
Entering  the  service  of  Lord  Percy,  he  was  sent  to  Wales,  where  he 
•was  knighted,  and  where  he  was  captured.  Being  released,  he  returned 
home,  and  shared  in  the  fatal  battle  of  Shrewsbury. 


WITH  FREDERICK  THE  GREAT 

A  Tale  of  the  Seven  Years'  War.     With  12  full-page  Illustra- 
tions.    12mo,  $1.50. 

The  hero  of  this  story  while  still  a  youth  entered  the  service  of 
Frederick  the  Great,  and  by  a  succession  of  fortunate  circumstances 
and  perilous  adventures,  rose  to  the  rank  of  colonel.  Attached  to  the 
staff  of  the  king,  he  rendered  distinguished  services  in  many  battles,  in 
one  of  which  he  saved  the  king's  life.  Twice  captured  and  imprisoned, 
he  both  times  escaped  from  the  Austrian  fortresses. 

A  MARCH  ON  LONDON 

A  Story  of  Wat  Tyler's  Rising.     With  8  full-page  Illustra- 
tions by  W.  H.  MARGETSON.     12mo,  $1.50. 

The  story  of  Wat  Tyler's  Rebellion  is  but  little  known,  but  the  hero 
of  this  story  passes  through  that  perilous  time  and  takes  part  in  the 
civil  war  in  Flanders  which  followed  soon  after.  Although  young  he 
is  thrown  into  many  exciting  and  dangerous  adventures,  through  which 
he  passes  with  great  coolness  and  much  credit. 


BOOKS   FOR    TO  UNO   PEOPLE 


BY  G.  A.  HENTY 

"  No  country  nor  epoch  of  history  is  there  which  Mr.  Henty  does  not 
know,  and  what  is  really  remarkable  is  that  he  always  writes  well  and 
interestingly." — New  York  Times. 


WITH  MOORE  AT  CORUNNA 

A  Story  of  the  Peninsular  War.  "With  12  full-page  Illustra- 
tions by  WAL  PAGET.  12mo,  $1.50. 

Terence  O'Connor  is  living  with  his  widowed  father,  Captain  O'Con- 
nor of  the  Mayo  Fusiliers,  with  the  regiment  at  the  time  when  the 
Peninsular  war  began.  Upon  the  regiment  being  ordered  to  Spain, 
Terence  gets  appointed  as  aid  to  one  of  the  generals  of  a  division.  By 
his  bravery  and  great  usefulness  throughout  the  war,  he  is  rewarded 
by  a  commission  as  colonel  in  the  Portuguese  army  and  there  rendered 
great  service. 

AT  AGINCOURT 

A  Tale  of  the  White  Hoods  of  Paris.  With  12  full-page 
Illustrations  by  WALTER  PAGET.  Crown  8vo,  olivine 
edges,  $1.50. 

The  story  begins  in  a  grim  feudal  castle  in  Normandie.  The  times 
were  troublous,  and  soon  the  king  compelled  Lady  Margaret  de  Villeroy 
with  her  children  to  go  to  Paris  as  hostages.  Guy  Aylmer  went  with 
her.  Paris  was  turbulent.  Soon  the  guild  of  the  butchers,  adopting 
white  hoods  as  their  uniform,  seized  the  city,  and  besieged  the  house 
where  our  hero  and  his  charges  lived.  After  desperate  fighting,  the 
white  hoods  were  beaten  and  our  hero  and  his  charges  escaped  from 
the  city,  and  from  France. 

WITH  COCHRANE  THE  DAUNTLESS 

A  Tale  of  the  Exploits  of  Lord  Cochrane  in  South  American 
Waters.  With  12  full-page  Illustrations  by  W.  H. 
MARGETSON.  Crown  8vo,  olivine  edges,  $1.50. 

The  hero  of  this  story  accompanies  Cochrane  as  midshipman,  and 
serves  in  the  war  between  Chili  and  Peru.  He  has  many  exciting- 
adventures  in  battles  by  sea  and  land,  is  taken  prisoner  and  condemned 
to  death  by  the  Inquisition,  but  escapes  by  a  long  and  thrilling  flight 
across  South  America  and  down  the  Amazon. 

ON  THE  IRRAWADDY 

A  Story  of  the  First  Burmese  War.  With  8  full-page  Illus- 
trations by  W.  H.  OVEREND.  Crown  8vo,  olivine  edges, 
$1.50. 

The  hero,  having  an  uncle,  a  trader  on  the  Indian  and  Burmese 
rivers,  goes  out  to  join  him.  Soon  after,  war  is  declared  by  Burmah 
against  England  and  he  is  drawn  into  it.  He  has  many  experiences 
and  narrow  escapes  in  battles  and  in  scouting.  With  half-a-dozen 
men  ha  rescues  his  cousin  who  had  been  taken  prisoner,  and  in  the 
flight  they  are  besieged  in  an  old,  ruined  temple. 


BOOKS  FOR  TO  UNO  PEOPLE 


BY  Q.  A.  HENTY 

"  Boys  like  stirring  adventures,  and  Mr.  Henty  is  a  master  of  this 
method  of  composition." — New  York  Tones. 


THROUGH   RUSSIAN  SNOWS 

A  Story  of  Napoleon's  Retreat  from  Moscow.  "With  8  full- 
page  Illustrations  by  W.  H.  OVEREND  and  B  Maps.  Crown 
8vo,  olivine  edges,  $1.50. 

The  hero,  Julian  Wyatt,  after  several  adventures  with  smugglers,  by 
whom  he  is  handed  over  a  prisoner  to  the  French,  regains  his  freedom 
and  joins  Napoleon's  army  in  the  Russian  campaign.  When  the  terrible 
retreat  begins,  Julian  finds  himself  in  the  rearguard  of  the  French  army, 
fighting  desperately.  Ultimately  he  escapes  out  of  the  general  disaster, 
and  returns  to  England. 

A  KNIGHT  OF   THE  WHITE  CROSS 

A  Tale  of  the  Siege  of  Rhodes.  With  12  full-page  Illustra- 
tions by  RALPH  PEACOCK,  and  a  Plan.  Crown  8vo,  olivine 
edges,  $1.50. 

Gervaise  Tresham,  the  hero  of  this  story,  joins  the  Order  of  the 
Knights  of  St.  John,  and  proceeds  to  the  stronghold  of  Rhodes.  Sub- 
sequently he  is  appointed  commander  of  a  war-galley,  and  in  his  first 
voyage  destroys  a  fleet  of  Moorish  corsairs.  During  one  of  his  cruises 
the  young  knight  is  attacked  on  shore,  captured  after  a  desperate 
struggle,  and  sold  into  slavery  in  Tripoli.  He  succeeds  in  escaping,  and 
returns  to  Rhodes  in  time  to  take  part  in  the  defense  of  that  fortress. 

THE   TIGER   OF   MYSORE 

A  Story  of  the  War  with  Tippoo  Saib.  With  12  full-page 
Illustrations  by  W.  H.  MARGETSON,  and  a  Map.  Crown 
8vo,  olivine  edges,  $1.50. 

Dick  Holland,  whose  father  is  supposed  to  be  a  captive  of  Tippoo 
Saib,  goes  to  India  to  help  him  to  escape.  He  joins  the  army  under 
Lord  Cornwallis,  and  takes  part  in  the  campaign  againt  Tippoo. 
Afterwards  he  assumes  a  disguise,  enters  Seringapatam,  and  at  last 
he  discovers  his  father  in  the  great  stronghold  of  Savandroog.  The 
hazardous  rescue  is  at  length  accomplished,  and  the  young  fellow's 
dangerous  mission  is  done. 

IN  THE  HEART  OF  THE  ROCKIES 

A  Story  of  Adventure  in  Colorado.  By  G.  A.  HENTY.  With 
8  full-page  Illustrations  by  G.  C.  HINDLEY.  Crown  8vo, 
olivine  edges,  $1.50. 

The  hero,  Tom  Wade,  goes  to  seek  his  uncle  in  Colorado,  who  is  a 
hunter  and  gold-digger,  and  he  is  discovered,  after  many  dangers,  out 
on  the  Plains  with  some  comrades.  Going  in  quest  of  a  gold  mine,  the 
little  band  is  spied  by  Indians,  chased  across  the  Baal  Lands,  and 
overwhelmed  by  a  snowstorm  in  the  mountains. 


BOOKS  FOR    YOUNG   PEOPLE 


BY  G,  A.  HENTY 

"Mr.  Henty  is  one  of  the  best  story-tellers  for  young  people." 

— Spectator, 


WHEN   LONDON   BURNED 

A  Story  of  the  Plague  and  the  Fire.  By  G.  A.  HENTY.  With 
12  full-page  Illustrations  by  J.  FINNEMORE.  Crown  8vo, 
olivine  edges,  $1.50. 

The  hero  of  this  story  was  the  son  of  a  nobleman  who  had  lost  his 
estates  durifag  the  troublous  times  of  the  Commonwealth.  During  the 
Great  Plague  and  the  Great  Fire,  Cyril  was  prominent  among  those 
who  brought  help  to  the  panic-stricken  inhabitants. 

WULF  THE  SAXON 

A  Story  of  the  Norman  Conquest.  By  G.  A.  HENTY.  With 
12  full-page  Illustrations  by  RALPH  PEACOCK.  Crown 
8vo,  olivine  edges,  $1.50. 

The  hero  is  a  young  thane  who  wins  the  favor  of  Earl  Harold  and 
becomes  one  of  his  retinue.  When  Harold  becomes  King  of  England 
Wulf  assists  iu  the  Welsh  wars,  and  takes  part  against  the  Norsemen 
at  the  Battle  of  Stamford  Bridge.  When  William  of  Normandy  in- 
vades England,  Wulf  is  with  the  English  host  at  Hastings,  and  stands 
by  his  king  to  the  last  in  the  mighty  struggle. 

ST.  BARTHOLOMEW'S  EVE 

A  Tale  of  the  Huguenot  Wars.  By  G.  A.  HENTY.  With  12 
full-page  Illustrations  by  H.  J.  DRAPER,  and  a  Map. 
Crown  8vo,  olivine  edges,  $1.50. 

The  hero,  Philip  Fletcher,  has  a  French  connection  on  his  mother's 
side.  This  induces  him  to  cross  the  Channel  in  order  to  take  a  share 
In  the  Huguenot  wars.  Naturally  he  sides  with  the  Protestants,  dis- 
tinguishes himself  in  various  battles,  and  receives  rapid  promotion  for 
the  zeal  and  daring  with  which  he  carries  out  several  secret  missions. 

THROUGH  THE  SIKH  WAR 

A  Tale  of  the  Conquest  of  the  Punjaub.  By  G.  A.  HENTY. 
With  12  full-page  illustrations  by  HAL  HURST,  and  a 
Map.  Crown  8vo,  olivine  edges,  $1.50. 

Percy  Groves,  a  spirited  English  lad,  joins  his  uncle  in  the  Punjaub, 
where  the  natives  are  in  a  state  of  revolt.  Percy  joins  the  British 
force  as  a  volunteer,  and  takes  a  distinguished  share  in  the  famous 
battles  of  the  Punjaub. 


BOOKS  FOR    YOUbG   PEOPLE 


BY  G.  A.  HENTY 

"  The  brightest  of  the  living  writers  whose  office  it  Is  to  enchant  the 
boys. — Christian  Leader. 


A  JACOBITE  EXILE 

Being  the  Adventures  of  a  Young  Englishman  in  the  Service 
of  Charles  XII.  of  Sweden.  By  G.  A.  HENTY.  With  8 
full-page  Illustrations  by  PAUL  HARDY,  and  a  Map.  Crown 
8vo,  olivine  edges,  $1.50. 

Sir  Marmaduke  Carstairs,  a  Jacobite,  is  the]victim  of  a  conspiracy,  and 
he  is  denounced  as  a  plotter  against  the  life  of  King  William.  He  flies 
to  Sweden,  accompanied  by  his  son  Charlie.  This  youth  joins  the 
foreign  legion  under  Charles  XII.,  and  takes  a  distinguished  part  in 
several  famous  campaigns  against  the  Russians  and  Poles. 

CONDEMNED  AS  A  NIHILIST 

A  Story  of  Escape  from  Siberia.  By  G.  A.  HENTY.  With  8 
full-page  Illustrations.  Crown  8vo,  olivine  edges,  $1.50. 

The  hero  of  this  story  is  an  English  boy  resident  in  St.  Petersburg. 
Through  two  student  friends  he  becomes  innocently  involved  in 
various  political  plots,  resulting  in  his  seizure  by  the  Russian  police 
and  his  exile  to  Siberia.  He  ultimately  escapes,  and,  after  many  ex- 
citing adventures,  he  reaches  Norway,  and  thence  home,  after  a 
perilous  journey  which  lasts  nearly  two  years. 

BERIC  THE  BRITON 

A  Story  of  the  Roman  Invasion.  By  G.  A.  HENTY.  With 
12  full-page  Illustrations  by  W.  PARKINSON.  Crown  8vo, 
olivine  edges,  $1.50. 

This  story  deals  with  the  invasion  of  Britain  by  the  Roman  legionaries. 
Beric,  who  is  a  boy-chief  of  a  British  tribe,  takes  a  prominent  part  in 
the  insurrection  under  Boadicea ;  and  after  the  defeat  of  that  heroic 
queen  (in  A.  D.  62)  he  continues  the  struggle  in  the  fen-country. 
"Ultimately  Beric  is  defeated  and  carried  captive  to  Rome,  where  he  is 
trained  in  the  exercise  of  arms  in  a  school  of  gladiators.  At  length  he 
returns  to  Britain,  where  he  becomes  ruler  of  his  own  people. 

IN  GREEK  WATERS 

A  Story  of  the  Grecian  War  of  Independence  (1821-1827).  By 
G.  A.  HENTY.  With  12  full-page  Illustrations  by  W.  S. 
STACEY,  and  a  Map.  Crown  8vo,  olivine  edges,  $1.50. 

Deals  with  the  revolt  of  the  Greeks  in  1821  against  Turkish  oppres- 
sion. Mr.  Beveridge  and  his  son  Horace  fit  out  a  privateer,  load  it 
with  military  stores,  and  set  sail  for  Greece.  They  rescue  the  Chris- 
tians, relieve  the  captive  Greeks,  and  fight  the  Turkish  war  vessels. 


BOOKS  FOB    YOUNG    PEOPLE 


BY  G.  A.  HENTY 

"  No  living  writer  of  books  for  boys  writes  to  better  purpose  than 
Mr.  G.  A.  Henty."— Philadelphia  Press. 


THE  DASH  FOR  KHARTOUM 

A  Tale  of  the  Nile  Expedition.  By  G.  A.  HENTY.  With  10 
full-page  Illustrations  by  JOHN  SCHSNBERG  and  J.  NASH. 
Crown  8vo,  olivine  edges,  $1.50. 

In  the  record  of  recent  British  history  there  is  no  more  captivating 
page  for  boys  than  the  story  of  the  Nile  campaign,  and  the  attempt  to 
rescue  General  Gordon.  For,  in  the  difficulties  which  the  expedition 
encountered,  in  the  perils  which  it  overpassed,  and  in  its  final  tragic 
disappointments,  are  found  all  the  excitements  of  romance,  as  well  as 
the  fascination  which  belongs  to  real  events. 

REDSKIN  AND  COW-BOY 

A  Tale  of  the  Western  Plains.  By  G.  A.  HENTY.  With  12 
full-page  Illustrations  by  ALFRED  PEARSE.  Crown  8vo, 
olivine  edges,  $1.50. 

The  central  interest  of  this  story  is  found  in  the  many  adventures  of 
an  English  lad,  who  seeks  employment  as  a  cow-boy  on  a  cattle  ranch. 
His  experiences  during  a  "  round-up  "  present  in  picturesque  form  the 
toilsome,  exciting,  adventurous  life  of  a  cow-boy ;  while  the  perils  of  a 
**ontier  settlement  are  vividly  set  forth  in  an  Indian  raid. 


HELD  FAST  FOR  ENGLAND 

A  Tale  of  the  Siege  of  Gibraltar.  By  G.  A.  HENTY.  With 
8  full-page  Illustrations  by  GORDON  BROWNE.  Crown  8vo, 
olivine  edges,  $1.50. 

This  story  deals  with  one  of  the  most  memorable  sieges  in  history — 
the  siege  of  Gibraltar  in  1779-83  by  the  united  forces  of  France  and 
Spain.  With  land  forces,  fleets,  and  floating  batteries,  the  combined 
resources  of  two  great  nations,  this  grim  fortress  was  vainly  besieged 
and  bombarded.  The  hero  of  the  tale,  an  English  lad  resident  in 
Gibraltar,  takes  a  brave  and  worthy  part  in  the  long  defence,  and  it  is 
through  his  varied  experiences  that  we  learn  with  what  bravery,  re- 
source, and  tenacity  the  Rock  was  held  for  England. 


BOOKS  FOR  YOUNG  PEOPLE 


A  List  of  Books  by 
Kirk  Munroe 

A  SON  OF  SATSUMA 

Or,  with  Perry  in  Japan.     By  KIKK  MUNBOE.     With  12  illus- 
trations by  HARRY  C.  EDWARDS.     $1.00  net. 

This  absorbing  story  for  boys  deals  with  one  of  the  most  interesting 
episodes  in  our  National  history.  From  the  beginning  Japan  has  been  a 
land  of  mystery.  Foreigners  were  permitted  to  land  only  at  certain 
points  on  her  shores,  and  nothing  whatever  was  known  of  her  civilization 
and  history,  her  romance  and  magnificence,  her  wealth  and  art.  It  was 
Commodore  Perry  who  opened  her  gates  to  the  world,  thus  solving  the 
mystery  of  the  ages,  and,  in  this  thrilling  story  of  an  American  boy  in 
Japan  at  that  period,  the  spirit  as  well  as  the  history  of  this  great 
achievement  is  ably  set  forth. 

IN  PIRATE  WATERS 

A  Tale  of  the  American  Navy.     Illustrated  by  I.  W.  TABEE. 
12mo,  $1.25. 

The  hero  of  the  story  becomes  a  midshipman  in  the  navy  just  at  the 
time  of  the  war  with  Tripoli.  His  own  wild  adventures  among  the 
Turks  and  his  love  romance  are  thoroughly  interwoven  with  the  stirring 
history  of  that  time. 


WITH  CROCKETT  AND  BOWIE 

Or,  Fighting  for  the  Lone  Star  Flag.  A  Tale  of  Texas.  By 
KIRK  MUNROE.  With  8  full-page  Illustrations  by  VICTOE 
PERARD.  Crown  8vo.  $1.25. 

The  story  is  of  the  Texas  revolution  in  1835,  when  American  Texans 
under  Sam  Houston,  Bowie,  Crockett,  and  Travis  fought  for  relief  from 
the  intolerable  tyranny  of  the  Mexican  Santa  Ana.  The  hero,  Rex 
Hardin,  son  of  a  Texan  ranchman  and  graduate  of  an  American  military 
school,  takes  a  prominent  part  in  the  heroic  defense  of  the  Alamo,  and 
the  final  triumph  at  San  Jacinto. 


BOOKS  FOR  YOUNG  PEOPLE 


BY  KIRK  MUNROE 

THROUGH  SWAMP  AND  GLADE 

A  Tale  of  the  Seminole  War.  By  KIRK  MUNROE.  With  8 
full -page  Illustration!?  by  V.  PERAKD.  Crown  8vo,  $1.25. 

Coacoochee,  the  hero  of  the  story,  is  the  son  of  Philip,  the  chieftain  of 
the  Seminoles.  He  grows  up  to  lead  his  tribe  in  the  long  struggle  which 
resulted  in  the  Indians  being  driven  from  the  north  of  Florida  down  to 
the  distant  southern  wilderness. 

AT  WAR  WITH  PONTIAC 

Or,  the  Totem  of  the  Bear.  A  Tale  of  Redcoat  and  Eedskin. 
By  KIRK  MUNROE.  With  8  full-page  illustrations  by  J. 
FINNEMORE.  Crown  8vo,  $1.25. 

A  story  when  the  shores  of  Lake  Erie  were  held  by  hostile  Indiana. 
The  hero,  Donald  Hester,  goes  in  search  of  his  sister  Edith,  who  has 
been  captured  by  the  Indians.  Strange  and  terrible  are  his  experiences ; 
for  he  is  wounded,  taken  prisoner,  condemned  to  be  burned,  but  contrives 
to  escape.  In  the  end  all  things  terminate  happily. 


THE  WHITE  CONQUERORS 

A  Tale  of  Toltec  and  Aztec.     By  KIRK  MUNROE.    With  8  full- 
page  Illustrations.     Crown  8vo,  $1.25. 

This  story  deals  with  the  conquest  of  Mexico  by  Cortez  and  his  Span- 
iards, the  "White  Conquerors,"  who,  after  many  deeds  of  valor,  pushed 
their  way  into  the  great  Aztec  kingdom  and  established  their  power  in 
the  wondrous  city  where  Montezuma  reigned  in  splendor. 


MIDSHIPMAN   STUART 

Or,  the  Last  Cruise  of  the  Essex.      A  Tale  of  the  War  of 
1812.     Illustrated.     12mo,  $1.25. 

This  is  an  absorbing  story  of  life  in  the  American  Navy  during  the 
stirring  times  of  our  war  of  1812.  The  very  spirit  of  the  period  ii  in  its 
pages,  and  many  of  the  adventures  of  the  Essex  are  studied  from  history. 


BOOKS  FOR  70UNG  PEOPLE 


BY  ERNEST  THOMPSON  SETON 
LIVES  OF  THE  HUNTED 

Being  a  true  account  of  the  doings  of  four  quadrupeds  and 
three  birds.  With  200  Illustrations.  $1.75  net.  (Post- 
age, 15  cents.) 

"Should  be  put  with   Kipling   and   Hans   Christian   Andersen  as  a 
classic." — THE  ATHENAEUM  (London). 

WILD  ANIMALS  I  HAVE   KNOWN 

With  200  Illustrations.     $2.00. 

Mr.  Ernest  Thompson  Seton's  first  and  most  famous  book.     More  than 
100,000  have  been  sold 'so  far. 


Profusely  Illustrated. 

The  sweetness,  the  grace,  the  laughter,  and  the  tenderness  of  Mr. 
Riley's  best  verse  are  found  to  the  full  in  this  book  of  delightful  poems 
for  and  about  children.  The  illustrations  have  been  made  under  the 
author's  supervision,  and  portray  the  scenes  and  the  little  heroes  and 
heroines  of  the  poems  with  artistic  fidelity. 


BY  CYRUS  TOWNSEND  BRADY 

IN  THE  WASP'S  NET 

The  Story  of  a  Sea  Waif.     Illustrated.    $1.50  net.     (Postage, 
16  cents.) 

A  vigorous  story  of  the  war  of  1812.  The  hero,  a  midshipman,  serves 
gallantly  aboard  two  famous  American  ships,  each  bearing  the  name  of 
Wasp,  having  many  adventures  of  storm,  battle,  and  capture. 

BY  THOMAS  NELSON  PAGE 

A  CAPTURED  SANTA  GLAUS 

Illustrated  in  Colors. 

This  exquisite  story  of  childhood  is  one  of  the  most  delicate  that  even 
Mr.  Page  has  written.  It  is  an  episode  of  the  Civil  War  in  which  chil- 
dren are  the  little  heroes.  The  period  is  the  Christmas  time,  and  th» 
scene  is  between  the  lines  of  the  Union  and  Confederate  Armies. 


BOOKS  FOR    YOUNG    PEOPLE 


JEB  HUTTON,  A  GEORGIA  BOY 

By  JAMES  B.  CONNOLLY.  Illustrated.  $1.20  net.  (Postage, 
13  cents.) 

A  thoroughly  interesting  and  breezy  tale  of  boy-life  along  the 
Savannah  River  by  a  writer  who  knows  boys,  and  who  has  succeeded 
in  making  of  the  adventures  of  Jeb  and  his  friends  a  story  that  will 
keep  his  young  readers  absorbed  to  the  last  page. 

KING  MOMBO 

By  PAUL  Du  CHAILLU.  Author  of  "The  World  of  the  Great 
Forest,"  etc.  With  24  illustrations.  $1.50  net.  (Postage, 
16  cents.) 

The  scene  is  the  great  African  f ore_st.  It  is  a  book  of  interesting 
experiences  with  native  tribes,  and  thrilling  and  perilous  adventures  in 
hunting  elephants,  crocodiles,  gorillas  and  other  fierce  creatures 
among  which  this  famous  explorer  lived  so  long. 

A  NEW  BOOK  FOR  GIRLS 

By  LINA  BEARD  and  ADELIA  B.  BEARD.  Authors  of  "The 
American  Girl's  Handy  Book."  Profusely  Illustrated. 

An  admirable  collection  of  entirely  new  and  original  indoor  and  out- 
door pastimes  for  American  girls,  each  fully  and  interestingly  de- 
scribed and  explained,  and  all  designed  to  stimulate  the  taste  and 
ingenuity  at  the  same  time  that  they  entertain. 


By  JESSIE  PEABODY  FROTHINGHAM.    Illustrations  by  REUTEB- 
DAHL.    $1.20  net.    (Postage,  14  cents.) 

Drake,  Tromp,  De  Reuter,  Tourville,  Suffren,  Paul  Jones,  Nelson 
and  Farragut  are  the  naval  heroes  here  pictured,  and  each  is  shown  in 
some  great  episode  which  illustrates  his  personality  and  heroism.  The 
book  is  full  of  the  very  spirit  of  daring  and  adventurous  achievement. 

BOB  AND  HIS  GUN 

By  WILLIAM  ALEXANDER  LINN.    With  8  Illustrations. 

The  adventures  of  a  boy  with  a  gun  under  the  instruction  of  his 
cousin,  an  accomplished  sportsman.  The  book's  aim  is  to  interest 
boys  in  hunting  in  the  spirit  of  true  sport  and  to  instruct  in  the  ways 
of  game  birds  and  animals. 


•""""'* 


UC  SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 


A     000134739     2 


